Speaker A
Fire Country Uchiha. Outside the Uchiha clan grounds, the air was thick with murderous intent and a stench of blood.
An Uchiha transmigrator rises to lead the radical faction in Konoha, challenging clan leadership and village politics with unique Mangekyo powers.
Key Takeaways
- The Uchiha clan is deeply fractured and under intense surveillance due to rebellion fears.
- Unique Mangekyo abilities can shift power dynamics within the clan and village.
- Leadership dissatisfaction fuels radical faction movements aiming to restore Uchiha honor.
- Strategic planning and secret identities are crucial for survival amid political intrigue.
- The transmigrator’s time-rewinding ability is a game-changing power with potential for future development.
What the video covers
- The story centers on an Uchiha transmigrator in Konoha who awakens rare Mangekyo Sharingan powers.
- The Uchiha clan is divided and monitored heavily by Root and other Konoha forces due to rebellion fears.
- The transmigrator joins and eventually leads the radical faction dissatisfied with Fugaku's leadership.
- He possesses unique abilities: Susanoo for destruction and Amano Katachi for time manipulation.
- The transmigrator plans to protect his family and restore Uchiha dignity despite village surveillance.
- The clan faces internal strife, with factions debating leadership and strategy against village control.
- The video explores themes of loyalty, power struggles, and the consequences of political intrigue in Konoha.
- The transmigrator’s knowledge of Mangekyo flaws and time techniques gives him an edge over others.
- The narrative includes tense clan meetings and strategic moves amid the backdrop of the Third Ninja War.
- The story highlights the clash between tradition, ambition, and survival within the Uchiha and Konoha.
Chapters
- 00:00 Introduction to Uchiha Clan Tensions
- 63:01 Conflict and Leadership Struggles
- 125:26 Fugaku’s Hesitation and Clan Fallout
- 187:51 Jyn’s Courtyard and Internal Turmoil
- 249:13 Root Expansion and Danzo’s Influence
- 311:40 Strategic Moves and Hokage Office Intrigue
- 374:11 Clan Integration and Industrial Challenges
- 436:22 Final Confrontations and Political Maneuvers
- 498:40 Aftermath and Future Prospects
Full Transcript — Download SRT & Markdown
Speaker A
Countless Root and U squads were tense, their eyes sharp with killing intent, carefully monitoring the Uchiha grounds while also guarding against everything around them. Previously, even knowing the Uchiha planned a rebellion, they were not this cautious. This change was due
Speaker A
to the rise of one person, Uchiha. A standard Uchiha who had been tacit since childhood with average to good grades at the ninja academy and had suddenly awakened the Mangekyo a month ago. Deep night inside the Uchiha clan grounds of
Speaker A
three courtyard residents. The security here was extremely tight. Not only were their patrols open, but hidden posts on trees, corners, and rooftops, all with the Sharingan activated. In the reception room, the atmosphere was solemn. Though only seven or eight
Speaker A
people were present, they were all core members of the radical faction. With a creak, the door was pushed open. Uchiha, wearing a black flame spiral open jacket, his eyes flashing. Three Tommo knelt on one knee. "Sensei-sama,
Speaker A
Seventh squad mission complete. Eliminated three Root squads. We encountered an Ubu team of one Jonin, but we eliminated them all. All enemies were reduced to ashes. The scene destroyed, so even the Yamanaka clan can gain no intel." This Uchiha's eyes were
Speaker A
full of arrogance. Meanwhile, as his report concluded, those in the room burst into laughter. Excitement was written on every face. "What a relief.
Speaker A
Truly satisfying." Uchiha stood up trembling with excitement. "This is the Uchiha we should be. Fugaku deserves death. He should never have become clan head." Others nodded in agreement.
Speaker A
Clearly, they were all fed up with Fugaku. "Fugaku is indeed unworthy. I regret it, too. Since Fugaku became leader, we have been retreating. Oo, on the battlefield, we die the most. Yet, the village ignores it. The Ninetails incident forced us to give up our
Speaker A
ancestral land, and now they openly monitor us. Fugaku, Jin-sama should be the leader." The crowd spoke up, showing how desperate the Uchiha had become. Uchiha Satsuno looked old, but his murderous aura remained strong. His eyes were obscure then he rasped,
Speaker A
"During Tobirama Senju's era, the Uchiha were unpopular, but we could barely protect ourselves. Since Fugaku became leader, the clan has deteriorated sharply. He is weak abroad, can't control the clan, split into three factions, and even spawn traders like Shisui and Itachi. Fortunately,
Speaker A
heaven sent us Gene-sama. I'm old. I should retire. I decide that Gene will be the leader of the radical faction from now on." Cheers erupted. No one objected. It was clear everyone had long been dissatisfied with Fugaku. But the
Speaker A
handsome young man sitting in the main seat showed no excitement. He was Uchiha, a transmigrator from the blue star. Not new, he had been reborn into this world as a baby over a decade ago.
Speaker A
He had no system or cheat, so he chose to grow steadily. Fortunately, his bloodline was decent. Though not a genius in the clan, he was still a small genius in Konoha. He had never thought of hiding or lying low because he wasn't
Speaker A
qualified. The Third Ninja War broke out while he was at the academy and he was bound to go to war. Unlike the original Konoha's surveillance was too tight. Not only the barrier team monitoring 24/7, but countless Ubu and Root in the
Speaker A
shadows. The most absurd were Orochimaru and Danzo who often acted secretly and Hiruzen Sarutobi who abused the telescope. Jutsu hide that was suicide.
Speaker A
Over the years, he had almost no friends. Even as a peer of Kakashi and Aido, he didn't try to contact Minato Namikaze. He entered the police force unremarkably, surviving the war and practicing silently until a month ago.
Speaker A
His parents in this life suddenly went missing. But Uchiha knew clearly they were secretly captured by Root because that day he returned from training at dawn and saw it secretly. As a Chinese person, he was clear about gratitude and grudges, treating this
Speaker A
life's parents as family. So that dawn he awakened the Mangekyo, but because of the shock he fell into a coma, which is why he couldn't save his parents. His eye technique was extremely rare because at that moment he wanted to destroy
Speaker A
everything. His left eye awakened. The technique called Susanoo, a god of destruction which can erase all things ignoring defense including time and space. And because Uchiha was a transmigrator knowing the flaws of the Mangekyo, his right, I awakened a technique
Speaker A
called Amano Katachi. A god of time capable of rewinding his own time state. The consumed eye power could of course be rewound. He even vaguely felt that if developed well, this technique could allow him to go back to the past and
Speaker A
future and enhance his genjutsu. Of course, this was not the eternal Mangekyo. Though he could rewind the left eye's power, it still consumed the right eye's power. However, compared to other Uchiha, the right eye technique had a bug-level
Speaker A
ability nurturing. With time, it could generate eye power. Though slow, it was far stronger than others. Because others, Mangekyo power was non-renewable.
Speaker A
Actually, he had prepared an escape plan and it was quite simple. He had used mission breaks to secretly create fake identities outside the village planning to take his family away before the massacre night. If he could survive the
Speaker A
first search wave once news of the Uchiha massacre spread, other villages would act. In the original, Kumo's kidnapping of Hinata happened during that period. Then Konoha would be busy guarding borders, no time to catch him. He could take his
Speaker A
family to the Land of Snow, a place far from conflict. But unexpectedly, Root's actions broke his plan and Uchiha was completely enraged. "Did they think this transmigrator had no temper?" So wanting to save his parents knowing
Speaker A
Fugaku was useless, he directly revealed his Mangekyo, joined the radicals, planned several actions, and finally took over the radical faction. At this moment he took a deep breath looking at the admiring and excited Uchiha around. He stood up and said, "All this hypocrisy is
Speaker A
too fake. From today I am the leader of the radical faction. I promise to lead you to victory and restore our lost dignity." But unfortunately, before he could finish, a Uchiha knocked and entered. "Jin-sama, Sensei-sama, the clan head has sent
Speaker A
a message to convene an immediate clan meeting." The faces of the crowd turned grim, the air in the room growing heavy with tension. The Uchiha were not fools, merely proud and arrogant with a hint of swagger. Why else would a clan meeting
Speaker A
be called at nearly 2:00 in the morning? There was no doubt this was aimed directly at them. "Fugaku has gone too far. We've only just dealt with Root and before Hiruzen Sarutobi and Danzo have even made a move, Fugaku can't sit still.
Speaker A
Anyone who didn't know better would think Fugaku was Hiruzen Sarutobi's loyal dog." The crowd seated with righteous indignation, especially considering that Fugaku, their clan leader, had once been elected by them. Now it felt as vile as swallowing filth. Uchiha furrowed his
Speaker A
brows slightly. Though his speech had been interrupted, he showed no sign of irritation. Instead, he raised a hand to quiet the crowd. His voice calm and measured. "Without the overwhelming power that patriarch Madara once wielded to dominate the shinobi world, a little
Speaker A
arrogance is fine, but one must still play by the rules. Let's go." He took the lead toward the Naka shrine, the others following closely behind him. Though the single-minded Uchiha didn't fully grasp his words, Uchiha had proven his
Speaker A
capability, and as a main powerhouse, they naturally chose to follow him without question. In the parlance of the shinobi world, Uchiha had demonstrated his caliber. Ten minutes later at the Naka shrine, the moderates and the centrists had arrived early while both factions
Speaker A
wore grim expressions, their eyes blazing with boundless fury. And the reason was simple. In their view, the Uchiha clan situation was already precarious enough. Uchiha
Speaker A
of the clan, but had instead become the greatest source of internal turmoil. Especially tonight, striking at root again. The previous reckless acts of the radical faction had only been suppressed because the Hokag and his great wisdom had chosen to forcefully contain the
Speaker A
matter. And now again pushed beyond endurance, the moderates and centrists had for the first time in a long while united. They intended to use this clan meeting to teach Achihajene a proper lesson. It was at that moment the
Speaker A
radicals arrived. Led by Aiha, they ignored the near murderous glares of the moderates and centrists taking their seats as if nothing was a miss. All right, the clan meeting begins. Fagaka's brow furrowed and he spoke directly.
Speaker A
Tonight Root lost three squads and an U squad. Elder Setsuna, do you have anything to say about this? He was quite blunt. They all knew each other too well for pleasantries. Shers added, "The Hokag can barely hold back Lord Danzo
Speaker A
anymore. But merciful as he is, he still wishes to give the Aiha chance." Elder Setsuna, the Achiha's position is extremely dangerous. I hope you can hand over the culprit or else even the Hokag will find it hard to help us. Others
Speaker A
chimed in almost all directing accusations at the radicals. They yearned for a peaceful life having long been fully assimilated into the village.
Speaker A
And with their single-minded Achihan nature, they genuinely trusted Hirusen Saratobi. This was the Aiha way of thinking. Their minds couldn't grasp complexity. Once they believed in something, it was nearly impossible to change. Even the seemingly gentle sway and Attache of the original timeline
Speaker A
were like this. This was precisely why Achiha gene after all these years of transmigration had never once considered trying to win over Shers Sway or Itachi.
Speaker A
Before transmigrating, he too had thought changing the Aiha would be easy given how early his new life began. But after actually living among them for a while, he had utterly discarded that notion into the trash bin. It was
Speaker A
feudal. The seemingly gentle Shers and Itachi were in fact the most extreme Aiha of all. That was why they could awaken the maneko. And Hihajene was exactly the same. With memories of two lives, he too was an extremist. It was
Speaker A
merely that hailing from the land of blooms, he possessed a broader perspective and richer experience. This was also the true reason he had never sought help from others after his parents in this life were captured by Root. Even now, having awakened the
Speaker A
Mangeko and taken control of the radicals, he still kept the matter hidden. And it was precisely because of his extremism that he could unlock the Mangeko. My apologies. I've already retired. Take any matters up with Jean.
Speaker A
After internal deliberation, Gene will henceforth be the leader of the radical faction and will also assume my position as clan elder. Just as Aiha Jeene was deep in thought, Achihaetssuna spoke with a smile. Having said that, he paid
Speaker A
the crowd no further mind adopting a calm detached air. But the gathered crowd was stunned into silence, their faces etched with disbelief. Fagaku was a gasast. Elder Setsuna, you're retiring. Yes. Is there a problem? Aiha Setsuna retorted. Fagaku fell silent.
Speaker A
Sher Suis expression soured as he couldn't help but speak up. Though Jyn's strength is impressive, he's far too young. Moreover, clan elders must go through a proper election. How can such a position be passed down privately?
Speaker A
Setsuna's expression remained unchanged. A hint of amusement curling at his lips. All members of the radical faction fully support Gene. Would you like an impromptu vote? Shers fell silent at that knowing a vote would be pointless.
Speaker A
Though he looked down on Aiha and even harbored a deep resentment toward this troublemaker, he couldn't deny the man's immense prestige within the radical faction. Even if the moderates and centrists disagreed the radicals alone would be enough to carry it. After all,
Speaker A
this wasn't an election for clan leader. So, drawing a deep breath, he turned to Aiha Gene with a solemn look. Elder Gene, let's return to the earlier topic.
Speaker A
This matter is of great importance to the Aiha clan, and I hope you can give me an answer soon. Hand over the culprit as soon as possible. Don't make things difficult for the Hokag. Then at Sher Suis words, all eyes turned to
Speaker A
Aiha. Everyone was curious how this new leader of the radicals would resolve the issue at hand. Refused to hand over anyone and risk angering the village, comply and risk alienating his own faction. And to this, Achihajene, seated beside Setsuna, remained unhurried and
Speaker A
composed. He had not spoken a word since entering, only now lifting his head at Sherui's inquiry. Hand over the culprit. Shersui, what are you talking about? I'm still completely in the dark here. Root and Umbu members were killed,
Speaker A
why would you ask me to produce the so-called culprit? It seems you've already decided the radicals are the killers. So, where's your evidence? If you can pin this on the radicals without proof, then by that logic, any murder in
Speaker A
the village could be blamed on us. That's utterly unreasonable, isn't it? Or are you planning to use a trumped up charge to condemn us? Though the radicals and moderates have our grievances, you can't shamelessly frame us just to score points for your
Speaker A
factions influence, can you? At the clan meeting, as Aiha Jeene spoke, everyone present was stunned. No one had expected Aiha Jeene to deny it. Although there was indeed no evidence such matters required noneuai from their radical faction, who else would have done it?
Speaker A
The stubborn Aiha members found themselves unable to refute. They revered combat and slaughter verbal sparring was not their forte. Shers Sway could no longer contain himself, his face filled with grievance. Aiha Jeene, do you dare to do it, but not admit it?
Speaker A
If I did it, I would certainly admit it. But the problem is, I didn't do it. Aiha Jin shrugged. Why should I confess to something I never did? Do you intend to force a confession by torture? Perhaps I
Speaker A
should swear an oath. If this deed was done by my radical faction, may the six path sage strike me dead with lightning.
Speaker A
The clan meeting fell into utter silence. No one had anticipated Aiha to be so uncompromising, even resorting to swearing an oath outright, which completely confounded everyone. What to do? The moderate faction and the neutral faction were utterly dumbfounded. They
Speaker A
had assumed the radical faction would surely admit it or at most refused to hand over the culprit. Thus, they had spent a long time discussing how to make the radical faction surrender, never expecting it wouldn't even reach that
Speaker A
stage. He simply flatly denied it. Damn it, they were stuck. What now? In truth, not only the moderate and neutral factions, but even the radical factions own members were dumbfounded. Good heavens, what a shameless move. The radical faction members twitched at the
Speaker A
corners of their mouths, barely restraining their expressions. Aiha Jeene shrugged. Everyone saw that the six path sage did not strike me dead, proving that I did not lie. A trace of mockery curled at the corner of his lips. He held no regard for those before
Speaker A
him. What a joke. These fools easily duped by Saratobi Herusen were nothing compared to him, who had received over a decade of education in his past life. If he couldn't outplay the likes of Fagaku and Sheru, he might as well go find a
Speaker A
piece of tofu and knock himself dead. Losing in battle was understandable. But if he couldn't even win a verbal duel against these simple-minded Aiiah, he would truly disgrace the army of transmigrators. As for the oath, Aiha Jeene was not afraid. Although the six
Speaker A
path sage truly existed in this world, he was far from a true deity. At best, a slightly more powerful alien. After all, this world had no heavenly dao. Ginu Shers tried to retort, but found himself speechless. No way. Faced with the
Speaker A
shameless Aiha Gene, a simple soul like him was utterly out of tricks. Fugaku as the clan leader could no longer sit still. He rose and looked sternly at Aiha Jeene. Jean, stop this. I know the clan has suffered many grievances, but
Speaker A
sure sway, and I have truly been trying. Give me some time, will you? Fugaku's words carried a hint of pleading clearly intending to play the emotional card.
Speaker A
And in his gaze toward Achiha Gene, a glimmer of killing intent indeed began to flicker. He was well aware of the grievances the clan suffered in the village, but he also knew that the Aiha clan was no match for the village. Thus,
Speaker A
he had racked his brains over the years to maintain the balance. Yet, he could not comprehend why the clan members did not understand. If only they would endure and yield, the clan would eventually integrate into the village.
Speaker A
The radical faction had already been difficult to suppress. And with the rise of Ajiha, he felt an even heavier burden. A genius who refuses to obey is better off not existing. Meanwhile, on the other side, in response to Fugaku's
Speaker A
slightly pleading words, Aiha Jyn's expression remained calm. I'm sorry, clan leader. I sympathize with the plight of Rude and Umbu. But if you want to pin the blame on me, I suggest you find evidence first. If there is nothing
Speaker A
else, I shall take my leave. Having said that, he was too lazy to continue dealing with Fagaku and walk straight out of the Nana shrine. Explain. No need. He did not even bother to win over other Achiha factions, for he knew that
Speaker A
prejudice in people's hearts is a mountain. Only by completely purging the Achiha, allowing enough deaths, would there be a slim chance for the Aiha to be reborn from Nirvana, they must be tempered by blood and fire, but no rush.
Speaker A
He knew that this opportunity was already approaching. As Aihaene departed, the other radical faction, Aiha, all followed in his footsteps.
Speaker A
Clearly, the current clan leader, Aiha Fagaku, had long lost his prestige in their eyes. Ginu Shers tried to stop them, but was blocked by Fagaku. Sheru, enough. Let them go. detaining them is pointless. Can you tell me about the
Speaker A
battle scene? Does the village really have no clues at all? Faga was deeply puzzled by this because if there were evidence, the matter would be easier to handle. And regarding this, Shers appeared somewhat hesitant as Umbu had rules against leaking intelligence. But
Speaker A
considering the complexity of the case, he helplessly shook his head. The scene was completely destroyed and the bodies were burned to ashes. There is no way to find any clues. However, I am certain that this was definitely the work of the
Speaker A
radical faction and Achihajene is the mastermind. Fagaka's face was full of bitterness, for everyone knew who the culprit was without needing to say it.
Speaker A
After all, before Achihajene rose to prominence, the radical faction, though somewhat reckless, had never dared to attack the village. At worst, they engaged in verbal sparring. It was only after Achiha Jyn's rise that things got out of control. Whenever an Aiha went
Speaker A
missing within a few days, some members of Root and U would die. Such an obvious pattern. How could Fugaku as clan leader not see it? But it was useless. Arrests require evidence, especially for a figure like Aiha. After a long silence,
Speaker A
he slowly spoke. I can't help much with this matter. Shiroui report truthfully to the Hokag. This Shers helplessly shook his head with a bitter smile.
Speaker A
That's the only way. Having said that, he vanished from the Nanha shrine in a shin. After Shersu left, Fagaku dissolved the meeting and returned home.
Speaker A
Yes, that was it. for the frequently missing Achihan. Neither of them had ever thought to seek justice for them.
Speaker A
This was also the reason why Fagaka's credibility as clan leader was increasingly diminished. Makoto brought him a cup of tea and then couldn't help asking, "Is the matter resolved? Did the radical faction yield? No, it's more complicated." Faga shook his head. Aiha
Speaker A
has risen to power. The radical faction will be even harder to deal with from now on since they have a mano. Makoto became interested. Then how will you account for this to the village? Fagako pondered for a moment. There's nothing
Speaker A
to account for. We just won't interfere. Let Saratobi, Husen, and Aiha Jeene fight it out. At least I can see the village's attitude toward the Aiha. If things go wrong, we sacrifice Aiha Jeene if the village backs down even better.
Speaker A
Either way, it won't affect us. After hearing this, Makoto finally understood. So, her husband had regarded Aiha as a pawn to test the village's stance.
Speaker A
Though she wanted to urge him to reconsider, she ultimately chose silence. Aihajene was a clan member, but not as close to her as Fagaka was. But neither of them noticed a small figure hidden outside the T-room. Aihaachi.
Speaker A
After overhearing their conversation, he clenched his fists in anger. Clan clan, why can't they think from the vill's perspective? What a foolish clan. The next morning at the crack of dawn, Aiha had just returned from the training ground when Achihhatiawa approached him
Speaker A
respectfully. Jinqin the Yu have arrived. As expected, Achiha said casually, "Summon Elder Shauna." Achihhatiawa departed respectfully while Aihaene returned to his home. 10 minutes later, Aihashana and the U Ninja entered together. The Ubu ninja spoke directly.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene the Hokag summons you. Bang. Before Aiha could speak, Aihashana slammed the table. Show some respect.
Speaker A
Jin Kuan is now an Aiha elder. The Yu remains silent, offering no reply. He represented the third Hokag and could not bow to the Aiha. However, he had no intention of provoking either, for he knew that the uchiha gene before him was
Speaker A
undoubtedly the most ruthless and dangerous among the uchiha. Enough, Elder Shauna. He is merely an u acting according to protocol. Harassing him serves no purpose. I must go to the Hokag building immediately. Elder Shauna, take the elite members of our
Speaker A
faction and await orders at the Saratobi clan compound. Proceed as planned, Aiha said with a smile. He did not bother to conceal his words from the Yu, then strode directly toward the Hokag building. 20 minutes later, by the time
Speaker A
Aihajin arrived at the Hokage's office, the Ubu had already reported and respectfully departed. With a cold glance at the departing UU, Aihajin spoke in a tone that feigned respect.
Speaker A
Lord Hokag adviser Danzo Elder Udetain Elder Midokado Adviser Nar, greetings to all. A smile adorned Aiha Jyn's face, giving an impression of remarkable gentleness. Paired with his handsome features, he even evoked the illusion of the fourth Hokag Manado Namicase. Yet
Speaker A
recalling his ruthlessness, everyone present couldn't help but shudder. Saratobi Herusen's eyes were deep. He took a puff of his pipe, then set it down. May I ask Jin Kuan, "Why did you send Elder Shauna to lead a team to my
Speaker A
Saratobi clan compound?" A shadow flickered across his face, but his tone remained as gentle as possible. To protect the Soratobi clan, of course.
Speaker A
Lately, enemy spies have been rampant. Not only have many Aiiah gone missing, but the U and Root have also suffered heavy losses. As the Kenoha military police force, it is our duty to intensify patrols. The Hokag exhausts himself for Kohaa, so it's only fitting
Speaker A
that the military police force ensures you have no worries. Aihajins tone was flat. Since he had dared to give orders in front of the U, he naturally was not afraid of Saratobi Herus's questioning. Indeed, that was the case.
Speaker A
At Achihajins words, everyone present was stunned into silence. Even Saratobi Herusen was left speechless, feeling an intense discomfort. What could he say? The tension between Kinoa and the Achiha was covert. E on the surface, they maintained a semblance of
Speaker A
harmony. Could he now claim to distrust the Aiha? Aiha Jin, you go too far.
Speaker A
Danzo roared in anger. The Saratobi clan does not need your Aha protection. Oh, I see. Aiha Jins expression remained unchanged. Then I understand. Does that mean any harm to the Saratobi clan regardless of how many die is none of
Speaker A
the Aiha military police forces concern? Then I request the Hokag to issue an official statement. I will immediately withdraw the military police force.
Speaker A
Everyone present fell silent again. Such a statement was unthinkable and would never be issued. They feared that if they issued at the scoundrel, Achihajene would not hesitate to hunt down Saratobi clan members at any cost. Aiha Saratobi Herusen's eyes were unfathomable. His
Speaker A
gaze was obscure and wavering. He began smoking his pipe in silence, showing no intention of speaking. Danzo's face was grim, his eyes flashing with murderous intent, but he was not foolish enough to voice such thoughts. In contrast, Yuden Kohharu slammed the
Speaker A
table in anger. Aiha Jin, you are too presumptuous. Showing disrespect to the Hokage. Are the Aiha plotting rebellion?
Speaker A
Mito Hamra added. Aiha Gene shrugged. Are you two elders saying that caring for the Saratobi clan safety is a sign of disrespect? You detain Koho. Mito Hamira. Both were instantly at a loss for words suffocated by frustration. Of
Speaker A
course, alongside their fury, astonishment surged within them. Was this man truly an Aiha? Since when did the single-minded Aiha possess such a sharp tongue? If not for the fact that this man had awakened the man Gekkyo Sharinggon and behaved even more
Speaker A
radically than the average Achiha, they would have suspected the hospital had swapped babies at birth. His verbal skills were far more reminiscent of the Nar clan. And seeing this, Saratobi Herusen let out a sigh. His two old friends were too useless, filling him
Speaker A
with helplessness. He could only shoot a glance at Narashikaku. Narikaku felt a chill run down his spine. He really didn't want to get involved in the mess between the Aiha and the Canoa high-ups.
Speaker A
But since Saratobi Herusen had personally signaled he had to steal himself despite his reluctance aim Jin Kuan, let's focus on the main issue first, shall we? Regarding last night's murder of Root and U members, many even within the Aiha suspect your radical
Speaker A
faction is responsible. Do you have any explanation? Aiha Jyn's eyes narrowed as expected of the Nar clan. They were setting a trap for him. A classic self-inccrimination trap. If it were anyone else, they would likely fall into it. But unfortunately, it didn't work on
Speaker A
him. Someone who had received compulsory education without even a moment's thought, he replied. Adviser Nar, that's not right. The correct approach is for you to prove my guilt. Otherwise, we radicals could also claim that the Nar clan did it since the Eno Shiko trio
Speaker A
have motives too, don't they? A with Minato Namik's death, your investment in the Enoshiko went down the drain. Inoi Yamanaka was removed as intelligence chief chosimi seems to have been sidelined and even you lost your position as joning commander now left
Speaker A
with only the title of adviser I suspect last night's incident was the work of the eno shikacho why don't you adviser Naro explained first indeed during manado namik's era was jonin commander ini yamanaka was intelligence chief and chosimi controlled the barrier team also
Speaker A
serving as deputy umbu commander along with kakashi hitaki they were man's planted agents within the umbu And now the intelligence division and the interrogation and torture division had merged headed by Ibiki Marino. The barrier team leader had become a
Speaker A
civilian ninja loyal to the Saratobi clan. Inochi Yamanaka and Choskimi were now sidelined while only Narashikaku remained useful granted the title of adviser. In the original story, when Saratobi Husen was killed by Orochimaru, almost none of the major clan showed up.
Speaker A
That itself spoke of an inevitable trend. To claim the Eno Shikacho held no grudge against Saratobi Herusen would be nonsense. Narashikaku. He was completely dumbfounded a chill crawling up his spine. Especially when he suddenly caught the ugly expressions of the Kohaa
Speaker A
F for a cold shiver ran down his backbone and fine beads of sweat broke out on his forehead. Aiha was too formidable. Even Hikinoa's foremost strategist could only awkwardly wave his hands. Jin Kuin, don't speak nonsense.
Speaker A
Enochi and Chosa are just on temporary leave due to health reasons. The Enino Shika Cho harbors not a shred of resentment toward the Hokag. Panic, cold sweat beated on Narashikaka's forehead as he fell into an awkward silence. The
Speaker A
grudges between the Enoshika Cho and the Kinoa higher-ups were well known to all. Yet, this was a truth that must never be spoken aloud. What the devil, this Aiha gene before him? Was he truly a member of the Aiha clan? Meanwhile, on the
Speaker A
other side, as Nar Shikaku fell silent, the Kóa F4 were plunged into utter stillness. Two minutes later, Saratobi Herusen sat down his pipe and spoke in a calm tone. Shikaku, you may take your leave now. Very well. Narikaku was taken
Speaker A
back for a moment, then departed without a second word. The silhouette of his retreating figure betrayed a palpable sense of fluster. After Narashikaku left and closed the door behind him, Saratobi Herusen's expression gradually darkened.
Speaker A
Now that no outsiders remain, let us speak plainly. Aihajin, what exactly is it that you intend to do? In an instant, the Kohaa F foreshed all pretense their eyes brimming with contempt, fury, and even icy murderous intent. Indeed, they
Speaker A
had seen through Aiha Gene completely. He was a die-hard radical with no possibility of redemption. Pretense utterly meaningless. To this, Achihaene retorted with razor sharp words, "An eye for an eye, blood for blood, a sharp intake of breath." The Kenoha F4 gasped
Speaker A
in unison and Udetain Koharu snapped furiously. "How dare you? Are you plotting a rebellion? I would love nothing more, but I lack the capability.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene shrugged. I must concede that the lot of you are quite formidable in your minations. The Aiha name has long since been sullied beyond repair, and within the clan, you have fractured us into a heap of scattered sand. While
Speaker A
your prestige and Kohaa may have waned from its former glory, it still far surpasses that of the reviled Achiha.
Speaker A
His voice was remarkably composed. Even with the Achiha's dire circumstances, he remained utterly nonchalant. The Kinoa F4 found this quite intriguing. Midokado Hamira couldn't help but ask with curiosity, "Since you are fully aware of Kenoha's political landscape, why
Speaker A
would you join the radical faction and adopt this posture of a reconcilable confrontation?" The others were equally perplexed. If Aihaene were like the rest of the Aiha, such behavior might be somewhat explicable. But since he understood everything so clearly, why
Speaker A
would he choose this path? Aiha smiled with easy grace. Precisely, because I see everything with perfect clarity that I know, I must fight with everything I have. Oh, now this is intriguing.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen smiled without warmth. Do elaborate if you would. Aihaene made no effort to conceal anything. As I see it, you intend to annihilate the entire Aiha clan sooner or later. Your current restraint is merely a strategy to
Speaker A
systematically strip away our support, laying the groundwork for the eventual massacre. Senu Hashiamurama cared not for the Achihas power, and Sinju Tobarama could suppress them through cunning schemes. But you possess neither their strength nor their intellect. Yet you still dream of holding the reigns of
Speaker A
Kenoha's authority for all eternity. Thus, your only option is to make the Aiha vanish entirely, leaving at most one or two bloodlines as relics.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen let out a soft sigh. His gaze was profoundly complex. You truly don't seem like an Aiha. Herusen, we cannot let him live. Danzo's expression turned icy murder gleaming in his eyes. We must kill him today.
Speaker A
Afterward, we'll claim that Aiha flew into a rage and attempted to assassinate the Hokag in his office. a radical aiha.
Speaker A
Anything he does would be readily believed by all. Saratobi Herusen remained silent deep in thought. He slowly lowered his hokag hat and picked up his pipe to smoke. Seeing this, Danzo was elated. He instantly understood the Hokag's unspoken intent. Not speaking
Speaker A
was as good as giving consent. While casually unsealing his left arm, he fixed Achiha Gene with a chilling stare.
Speaker A
I'll admit, you're an Aiha with brains and skill, but unfortunately, in this world, power reigns supreme. You're far too arrogant. Did you truly believe that awakening the mangeko would make you invincible? Bang! The ceiling shackles on his right arm crashed to the ground
Speaker A
and he lifted his eye patch revealing a crimson mangeko sukuy. In the blink of an eye, Aihaene found himself upon a vast azure plane surrounded by bird song and blooming flowers, a veritable paradise. What astonished him even more
Speaker A
were the countless familiar faces. These were friends Aihaene held dear in the depths of his heart and they were all beckoning him toward the heavenly realm.
Speaker A
So this is Aiha Kagami's dojitsu. Aiha Jeene murmured softly. Though it was the same tukuyami as Itachi's compared to Itachi's crimson hell kagami tsukuyami was far more akin to paradise. It made sense. In the original story, Itachi had
Speaker A
dwelled in hell himself. So naturally, his awakened men geko reflected that hell. Aiha Kagami was an entirely different story. A disciple of Sinjarama who considered Saratobi Huen and others his friends living what could only be described as a near-perfect life. The
Speaker A
man Gekckyo is a mirror of the soul. Even though Kagami's awakening yielded the same sukuyami illusion, his version was filled with beauty. What a pity.
Speaker A
Though everything here is utterly exquisite falsehood is falsehood. Susenu at Achiha Jyn's command, his eyes transformed into the Mangeko forming a crimson six-pointed star pattern.
Speaker A
Indeed, like Achiha Sasuke, his was a direct vision mangeko. In that very instant, as Aiha Jin's dojutsu took effect, the illusion shattered like a bubble, and the scene before him reverted to the Hokag's office would release Gun Tree. No sooner had Aiha
Speaker A
broken the Jing jutsu than he heard Danzo's roar immediately after, he watched as Danzo's right arm transformed into a massive tree, hurtling toward him like lightning. Danzo wary of Achiha Jyn's unknown Mangeko abilities launched his attack without the slightest
Speaker A
hesitation opening with Kagami's Mangeko Jin jutsu then unleashing his most devastating technique the moment Gene was ins snared would release Susenu aihaene held nothing back countering with his own ultimate technique a trail of blood tears streamed from his left
Speaker A
eye as his maneko spun into overdrive draining his ocular power at a terrifying rate would release collapsed instantly his sharing arm his entire body all disintegrating piece by piece.
Speaker A
Oh, Danzo let out a blood curdling scream and in the next moment he was dead. Saratobi, Herusen, and the others felt their scalps crawl instinctively rising to their feet, their eyes flooded with boundless terror. They couldn't believe it. Danzo was dead just like
Speaker A
that. But then the very next second, Danzo's corpse vanished without a trace, and Achihaene immediately went on high alert. Is ani, it was one of the most formidable techniques. How could he not recognize it? Whoosh! Danzo's figure materialized behind him, a sharp
Speaker A
canai piercing through his chest. Haha! Aiha Jin died. Danzo roared in triumph, his eyes brimming with mockery. But alas, Aiha Jins body dissipated with a poof, and Danzo couldn't help but exclaim in disbelief. A shadow clone, "Impossible! When did he?" However, just
Speaker A
as confusion clouded his mind, Aiha gene appeared behind him, and with equal precision, a canai pierced through Danzo's heart. Useless! Izanagi is an Aiha ninjutsu. How could I not have prepared for it? Aiha Jins expression remained calm. A blood red
Speaker A
hexog rotated within his eyes. His dynamic vision amplified countless times over. Danzo's speed still appeared far too sluggish in his sight. Next, Danzo resurrected once more, only to perish again. It was not until the sharing eyes embedded in his arm were
Speaker A
completely exhausted that he flashed away and took cover behind Haruen Saratobi. Herusen, help me. And yet, Husen and the other two had long since grown numb to this. Especially Danzo.
Speaker A
This man died and revived. Died and revived again. Truly terrifying. But facing Danzo's plea for aid, Husen let out a sigh and shielded him with his own body. Aiha Jeene, that's enough. Hi bellowed his tone grave. I will
Speaker A
dismantle the route and u units surrounding the Aiha district. Is that acceptable? Huen, how can you do this?
Speaker A
Danzo countered in astonishment. Are you joking? He had employed countless schemes leveraging the ninetailes attack to corner the ichiha. Now Hirusen would abandon years of painstaking effort with a single word. But Husen had no patience for further discussion. Silence. I am
Speaker A
the Hokag. Hirusen. You will regret this. Danzo gritted his teeth. Hashiha Jyns eyes narrowed slightly killing intent radiating from his body. He genuinely wanted to take advantage of the situation and eliminate Danzo. After all, Danzo had struck first. He did not
Speaker A
believe Herusen would completely severize with him over a dead man. Kanoha was too fragile now to withstand such turmoil. But unexpectedly, Danzo was far too cunning. Sensing danger, he immediately took cover, showing no shred of a warrior's dignity. Nevertheless,
Speaker A
Herusen's proposal was reasonable. Neither Kenoha nor he himself was fully prepared for an outright rupture. The time was not yet right. Fine agreed.
Speaker A
Aihajin nodded slightly having said that he no longer dained to glance at the Konoha elders before him and simply turned and left the Hokag's office.
Speaker A
Hirusen Soritobi's expression darkened. His gaze followed Achiha Jyns departure killing intent so thick it threatened to erupt from his eyes. Yet he still reached for his pipe and began smoking his thoughts flickering as he contemplated a way out. Danzo spoke
Speaker A
coldly. Herusen, you are far too weak. Even Gene and Koki usually overlooked spoke with indignation. Aiha Jeene is far too arrogant. We should eliminate him at all costs. How can we dismantle the umbu and root surrounding the Aiha?
Speaker A
I disagree as well. Maboshian declared. Upon hearing this, Husen's headache only intensified. You fools. When facing Achiha Gene Danzo, the useless one could only hide behind you. Miboshi Inn and Gene and Koki became invisible. Now that he has left, you suddenly grow bold. He
Speaker A
truly wanted to punch these idiots to death. But considering that the Saratobi clan alone could not fully control Kanoha, he still needed these three's cooperation. Thus, taking a deep breath, he could only explain. You three fools, haven't you noticed? Aiha Jeene is
Speaker A
fundamentally different from other Ajiah. He is truly willing to fight to the death with us. Moreover, he commands the most elite radical faction within the Aiha. Regardless of whether my current authority can rally the entire village, even if all of Kenoha were
Speaker A
willing to wage war against the Achiha, destroying them would leave Kenoha severely weakened. How would a weakened Kenoha face the other great ninja villages? And do not forget, the radical faction is stationed just outside the Saratobi district. Do you truly wish for
Speaker A
the Saratobi clan to be wiped out as well? Arusen Saratobi spoke with a chilling tone. He could see that Aiha was serious. The man had already prepared for death and intended to take the Saratobi clan down with him.
Speaker A
Eliminate Aiha? Are you joking? Do you mean to eliminate the Saratobi clan instead? Danzo, Jin, and Koki, Maboshi.
Speaker A
The three fell completely silent at a loss for what to do. Ajihajene was far too extreme. Ordinary radical members only dared to make loud boasts, but this man was genuinely willing to kill and with the resolve of someone determined
Speaker A
to take others down in his final moments. Watching the three fall silent Huan's side, Danzo explained, "What is the matter with that arm full of Sharing? And what was with the dying and reviving?" Also, regarding Achiha Jyn's man, Gekko Sharinggon, did you gain any
Speaker A
insights from your engagement with him? Danzo's face wore an expression of helplessness, yet he dared not conceal the truth. He stated that this arm was Orochimaru's creation and remained highly unstable. The sharing naturally obtained by secretly capturing Aiha clan
Speaker A
members and extracting them even before the night of the massacre roots methods ensured a steady supply of sharing. The effect of dying and reviving came from Izanagi. And when speaking of Aiha Jyn's ocular techniques, his eyes filled with
Speaker A
utter terror. Aiha Jyn's ocular technique is terrifying. Truly unstoppable. Any ninjutsu that contacts it dissolves completely. Once locked onto by his gaze, no defensive technique or barrier holds the slightest value.
Speaker A
During our battle, Aihajene rarely used his ocular technique clearly because it consumes enormous energy. In future engagements, I recommend overwhelming him with sheer numbers. Once his chakra is exhausted, he becomes useless. Danzo explained earnestly while Husen frowned upon hearing this. He had originally
Speaker A
hoped his woodrelease experiment had succeeded only to discover it was merely experimental, leaving him deeply disappointed. As for his anagi, he held no interest. Not everyone could ravage their own body the way Danzo had. Wait, something doesn't add up. Danzo Aiha
Speaker A
Jeene clearly saw that arm full of charing. Why did he not demand it or even ask about it? That makes no sense.
Speaker A
Jin and Koki suddenly spoke up and to this Husin took a drag from his pipe before speaking in a low ominous tone.
Speaker A
This only proves how troublesome Aiha is. A man who can ignore having his clan's keki Jenkai stolen. Imagine how patient he is and how grand his ambitions. Wait, Harusen. Danzo suddenly interjected. I have figured it out.
Speaker A
There is something I have not told you. Aiha Jyns ability to awaken the mano sharing is likely connected to me.
Speaker A
Aiha Jins parents are actually in Root's custody. The very day after Root captured his parents, word spread that Aiha had awakened the mano and ultimately decided to join the radical faction. Husen Saratobi gased upon hearing this. Good heavens, he finally
Speaker A
understood why Achiha Jeene had awakened the Mangeko and resolutely joined the radical faction, adopting an attitude of irreconcilable conflict with Kenoa's higherups. So that's how it is. Midokado Hamira nodded slightly, but then his face filled with confusion. But
Speaker A
something's off. When parents are arrested, shouldn't they first seek the Hokag? Even if not the Hokag, shouldn't they ask for help from Fagaku, the clan leader? Koryetain was equally puzzled.
Speaker A
Hirusen Saratobi shook his head. I wouldn't be surprised by any decision the Aiha make. There's no point discussing this now. I have no objection to Danzo's idea, but I won't give you any support. Aiha is not easy to
Speaker A
deal with. Danzo planned well before you act. If it were any other Aiha, he might have hesitated, but Aihaene was entirely different. There was no possibility of winning him over. Danzo without any surprise directly stated his terms. I
Speaker A
need a few squads of U and each clan must provide some personnel. Absolutely not. Don't even think about it. Hirus and Suratobi immediately shook his head in refusal. Place a bounty through the bounty exchange. Utain try to allocate
Speaker A
some funds to Danzo. Choose an ambush site outside Kenoha. Even if it fails, it must not give him an excuse to start a war. He knew full well that Danzo was seeking cannon fodder. But if he truly let the major ninja clan serve as cannon
Speaker A
fodder, his tenure as Hokag would likely be over. His own forces were even more out of the question. His prestige had waned after the third war and the death of menato namic in the ninetailes incident had further diminished it.
Speaker A
Coupled with his indulgence of Danzo, the persecution of Sakumo Hitaki, and especially the mistreatment of Narudo Usuzamaki, the fourth Hokag's son, Husen Saratobi's reputation had plummeted. He barely held his position due to some lingering popularity among commoners. If
Speaker A
his own forces suffered severe losses, he wasn't sure he could still control Kenoha, let alone face provocations from the four great ninja villages. And to this faced with Husen's refusal, Danzo directly shook his head, relying solely on rogue ninjas from the bounty
Speaker A
exchange, and a few missing mean isn't even enough to force Achihajene to use his Mangeko, let alone deplete his Mangeko's ocular power. If he won't provide even this minimal support, then I'll abandon this operation. Danzo was no fool. On the contrary, his survival
Speaker A
skills were among the best in Kenoha. If not for encountering the overpowered Sasuke Aiha, he could likely have survived well into the Buruto era.
Speaker A
Despite his numerous schemes against the Achiha, almost every time he struck only when he held the advantage, and he always positioned himself in the safest zone. If the Aiha had been more assertive in the original story, and without the traitorous Itachi's help, he
Speaker A
might not have been able to eliminate them. Although the current Achiha seemed timid, they remained the foremost clan.
Speaker A
Alen camel is still bigger than a horse. This time was no different. He could sense Achiha Jyn's determination and madness, so plotting against him was fine, but sacrificing his own root members without backup. Don't even think about it. While eliminating Aiha was
Speaker A
important, building his own power to ascend to the Hokag position was even more crucial. He was willing to take the blame for Huen Saratobi only because that would help him accumulate strength, but he would never sacrifice too much of
Speaker A
his own power. Otherwise, how could he compete for the Hokag position later? After all, Aiha Jyn's rise threatened Huen Saratobi the most. So, if he disagreed, so be it. Husen Soratobi, he was stunned. At that moment, his mind
Speaker A
went blank and he looked at Danzo in bewilderment. Was Danzo actually refusing to take the blame for him?
Speaker A
Don't look at me like that and don't treat me like a fool. We're all among ourselves here, so there's no need for pretense. I know my reputation in Kenoha very well. If Rude is wiped out, even if we manage to kill Aiha, when you step
Speaker A
down, the ninja clans will never spare me. Think it over, Herusen. With that, Danzo left the Hokag's office without any hesitation. Herus and Soritobi watched Danzo's retreating figure and felt a severe headache with Danzo refusing to take the fall. This
Speaker A
was going to be very difficult. So what to do? He instinctively looked at Kohar Utetain and Midokado Hamira, but in the end he said nothing and just shook his head helplessly. Those two fools were even less reliable. Husen, what should
Speaker A
we do? Kohar Utetane asked. Midokado Hamira furrowed his brow. Aiha Jeene is a problem. We must eliminate him as soon as possible. In response to their words, Harrisonen Soratobi's side, called it.
Speaker A
Those two fools could only raise problems, not solve them. So, in the end, after a long pause, he reluctantly spoke. There's no need to rush. Aihaji has just taken control of the radical faction. His threat to us isn't too
Speaker A
great yet. On the contrary, Fagaku should be the one worried now. Aiha Jyn's rise will inevitably challenge his position. I'll have Shers truly join Fagaka's faction and will secretly provide Fugaku with some help. Let the Aha fight among themselves. This is a
Speaker A
good opportunity. Later, we'll spread the word that considering Fagaka's loyalty to Kohaa, the Ninetailes incident likely had nothing to do with him, but subtly hint that the radical faction might be involved. That's enough for now. And Saratobi's methods were
Speaker A
seasoned since Danzo refused to take the blame. He as the glorious Hokag naturally couldn't personally act against Achihajene. So, supporting Fagaku, the clan leader, and causing internal strife among the Aiha was the best approach. Kohari Utetain and Midokado Hamira though displeased had no
Speaker A
choice but to accept. Meanwhile, back in the Achiha compound, Aiha gene was surrounded by many radical faction members. Don't worry, it's fine. Hirusen Suratobi chose to step back. The route and U outside the compound have been withdrawn. This proves that our radical
Speaker A
factions plan is working. Just follow the plan step by step. Aiha Jeene smiled slightly at their concerns. Then he briefly recounted the events and everyone present felt a surge of excitement. This was the first time since the conflict with Kenoha that the
Speaker A
higher-ups had chosen to back down. However, unfortunately, before they could celebrate long, though root and U had withdrawn, the reason the higher-ups gave for their retreat made everyone nash their teeth. They sensed the sincerity of Fugaku, the clan leader.
Speaker A
Kohaa was willing to extend some trust to the Aiha, led by Fagaku. Damn it. The shamelessness of Kenoha's higher-ups shattered the radical faction. It was clearly Aiha Jyn's achievement. Yet, in the end, the coward Fagaku got the credit without lifting a finger. Within
Speaker A
the Aiha clan, laughter and joy echoed incessantly. Following the decision of Kohaa's high council, Fagaka's approval, rating soared to new heights, leaving only the radical faction nashing their teeth in fury. In the clan leader mansion, Sherui, dispatched by Herusen
Speaker A
Saratobi, sat respectfully in the T-room and spoke. Clan leader, your judgment is correct. Under your leadership, the Aiha have finally achieved a significant easing of tensions within Kohaa. I am willing to serve as a blade in your hand
Speaker A
to help you completely unify the entire Aiha. Even though Sherui, who knew all the intricacies, was aware that this was the Hokag scheme, he still chose to obey, believing it was merely a temporary measure. The primary goal was
Speaker A
still to target the radical faction. Yet, he remained willing to comply, convinced that all of this was merely transient. Once that damned aha gene was truly eliminated, the Aiha would surely integrate into Kohaa under the guidance of the Hokag. Good. Very good. Shu, you
Speaker A
have found your way back and the Aiha gained another powerful ally. At this moment, Fugaku's dignified face revealed a faint smile. Though he knew this success was largely unearned, he felt no shame, only pride. Because in his mind,
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene was merely a pawn, and this was all the result of his own scheming.
Speaker A
Sherui's allegiance excited him. Yet, he still maintained the heir of a clan leader. After a moment's deliberation, he continued, "The Aiha situation is gradually improving. A cause for celebration. Summon all who have awakened their Shainggon to the Naka shrine immediately. Today we shall
Speaker A
celebrate heartily. Fagaku's intention was not hard to discern and Sheree understood it instantly. As a newly pledged subordinate, he naturally bowed and took his leave to inform the others.
Speaker A
Witnessing this, the smile on Fagaka's face grew even broader. Even Sher Sway had defected to him the unification of the Aiha was imminent. He decided to seize this auspicious day to properly intimidate the radical faction. Even if he couldn't win over the radical
Speaker A
factions, high-ranking members like Achihaene, at least he could sway some of the lower ranked radicals, Itachi hidden in the shadows wore an expression of pain and confusion. He quietly followed Shers and stepped out to block his path. Shen I I why did you should
Speaker A
speak? Shers quickly stopped him, pulling him into a corner before whispering cautiously, "This is the Hokag's arrangement. I still serve the Hokag." Hearing this, Itachi breathed a sigh of relief. They exchanged a few quiet words and Itachi departed
Speaker A
contentedly. Sherwe smiled and said no more silently thinking, "I am not alone on this path." And began contacting the clan members. The moderates and centrists had no objections. After all, a celebration was only natural for such a joyous occasion. The radicals,
Speaker A
however, felt entirely the opposite. Everyone had already heard the truth from Aiha. Though they were simple-minded, they were not foolish.
Speaker A
The surveillance was removed right after Gene met with the village. And now Fagaku claimed it was due to his own influence. Nonsense. Did Fagaka have that kind of face? He had none. Aiha Jeene said nothing more merely raising
Speaker A
his hand to silence the crowd. Calm down everyone. Don't be angry. Huen Saratobi would love nothing more than internal conflict among the Aiah. We cannot be led by the nose by Kenoha. I will take Tekk and the others to the clan meeting.
Speaker A
The rest of you follow Elder Setsuna's command and take action during this time. All radical faction members, ninja and civilian alike, relocate to the vicinity of my home. Divide all ninja squads into three shifts, morning, afternoon, and night for 24-hour
Speaker A
patrols. Set up both overt and covert posts. Everything must be done covertly understood. His tone was calm as he began assigning tasks. Kenoa's manipulation was not particularly sophisticated, how anyone with basic education could see through it. So, he
Speaker A
refused to be led astray, instead seizing the opportunity to achieve his own objectives. Everyone present nodded solemnly. Since Achihajene had joined the radical faction, every deed he had accomplished had thoroughly won them over. Even if they couldn't fully
Speaker A
understand his reasoning, they had grown accustomed to acting first and thinking later. Half an hour later, the Naka shrine buzzed with excitement. Everyone wearing smiles as if celebrating the new year. However, the moment Lin Mo and his companions arrived, the atmosphere
Speaker A
instantly turned silent. The moderates and centrists frowned clearly displeased with the radical faction, especially under Aihajins leadership. They believed the Aihakanoha tension was already severe enough and the radical faction under Aiha was only making it worse. Fagaka spoke with a gentle smile.
Speaker A
Since you're here, take your seats. Today is a good day, so let's set aside disputes. This is purely a celebration.
Speaker A
With Fagaku's opening, the plants he had arranged began to sing his praises. They lauded the breakthrough in Aihakoha relations under Fagaka's leadership. The underlying message was simple. Fagaka, the clan leader, was mighty and the radical faction should kneel. The
Speaker A
radicals could no longer contain themselves. You're all talking nonsense. Is this Fagaka's achievement? Jin sama met with the village and immediately the root and Umu withdrew. What does that have to do with Fagaku? If it weren't for that timing, why would they pull
Speaker A
back right after Jyn's meeting? He claims credit for nothing stealing others accomplishments. How can the Aiha have such a shameless person? This is clearly a scheme by Kohaa to stir up internal strife, and you fools are celebrating it. Worthless. The radical
Speaker A
faction was indignant, their words dripping with sarcasm, showing no respect for Fugaku as clan leader.
Speaker A
Fagaka's face turned ashen and the others began to ponder. There was logic to this. The timing was too coincidental. Though they were not the sharpest and looked down on the radicals, they were still reasonable people. If not for that, they wouldn't
Speaker A
have been bullied so badly by Kenoa. Thus, hearing the radicals words, their gazes toward Fagaka shifted. Lynon narrowed his eyes, his expression utterly calm. He sat quietly in his seat, neither refuting nor intervening nor defending himself. He simply watched
Speaker A
Fagaku observing his changing expressions. After 2 minutes seeing Fagaka's face reen as he tried to speak, Lynn Emmo cut him off before he could say anything. Enough. Everyone shut up.
Speaker A
Fagaku is our clan leader. What's a little credit compared to that? If the clan leader wants it, then let him have it. At this moment, Lynn Emmo exuded an air of authority. He seemed utterly indifferent to such a trivial
Speaker A
accomplishment, projecting an image of magnanmity. He played the role of a generous sage, unwilling to let a minor issue affect the greater good of the aiha. Everyone present looked bewildered. They were all stunned by such righteous words. Could this really
Speaker A
be something Aiha Gene the radical leader would say? In truth, not only the moderates and centrists, but even the radicals themselves were baffled. Only one person was struggling to contain himself. Fua. He had mentally prepared for this scene after all the timing of
Speaker A
events was indeed too coincidental. But since he dared to convene this clan meeting, he had naturally already devised a solution. This was the source of his confidence in this action.
Speaker A
However, damn it, he hadn't expected that before he could even speak Linn Mos seemingly generous words would choke him so badly. What was he to do?
Speaker A
Lynmo didn't care at all, willingly offering to seed the credit. If he continued to insist on explaining, wouldn't it make him look too petty? But not explaining was also not an option.
Speaker A
Wouldn't that prove that he is clan leader had poor character and forcibly seize the merits earned by his clansmen?
Speaker A
In an instant, Fua was left hanging in midair, there was no help for it.
Speaker A
Although Kenoha's upper echelons publicized it as Fua's achievement, not only those within the Aiha clan, but many perceptive people in Kenoha could roughly guess the truth. It was precisely because of this that Fua was instantly stuck in a difficult position.
Speaker A
Originally, he had thought that Aihaene would seize the credit and he would magnanimously show he didn't care because he hadn't claimed the credit himself, thus earning the goodwill of a large number of clansmen. This would not only force Achihajene to swallow his
Speaker A
pride, but might even allow him to win over some radical clansmen. But unexpectedly, Aihajin, this young man, disregarded Marshall virtue. Was that something a radical member should say?
Speaker A
Aihajene, what nonsense are you spouting? This matter itself is patriarch Fu's credit. Why do you need to hypocritically yield it? Shu couldn't bear it, and directly reprimanded him.
Speaker A
In response, Aiha Jeene didn't even lift his eyelids, merely shrugged and said calmly, "Whatever you say, how would I dare to compete with the patriarch for credit? You Shiroui's scalp went numb." At that moment, he was completely dumbfounded, and he faintly sensed
Speaker A
danger. And indeed, that was the case. With Aiha Jyns words, the entire shrine erupted into an uproar. Fua's face turned ashen, and he couldn't help but sigh. He knew that Shers might be skilled in combat, but in political
Speaker A
maneuvering, he was far inferior to Ajihajene. Of course, even he himself didn't know how to respond. Refuting would make him appear intolerant as a patriarch, while agreeing would signify total surrender, severely damaging his authority as clan leader. So, what was
Speaker A
he to do? His mind began to race frantically, his head throbbing with pain. Aiha was far too troublesome. Why hadn't he noticed this before? He cast a profound gaze at Aiha, but suddenly felt something was off. The radicals seemed
Speaker A
to have diminished in number. At this thought, a chill ran down his spine and he couldn't help but ask Achihajene, "Where are the other radicals? Why aren't they attending the clan meeting?
Speaker A
What conspiracy are you brewing?" "Huh?" at his words, everyone was bewildered. They glanced at the empty seats of the radicals and only then belatedly realized something was a mess, right?
Speaker A
Where were they? Everyone turned to Achiha Gene in confusion. After all, the clan meeting was a major event for the Aiha, and those eligible to attend would never miss it. At this moment, even the slowest among them realized something
Speaker A
was wrong. In response, the radicals exchanged glances, a hint of mockery curling at the corners of their mouths.
Speaker A
Lynmo remained calm, then slowly rose to his feet. As expected of the patriarch, you've caught on. But the time is almost up, so there's no need to waste any more of it. For the sake of our shared clan
Speaker A
blood, I don't mind giving everyone a friendly reminder. The reason Root and U were withdrawn was not because Saruto Tobien had a change of heart, but because I almost killed Danzo. That Danzo transplanted a whole armful of Sharing. Not only that, he can even use
Speaker A
syninju hasharama's with style and most importantly he has mastered the uchiha forbidden technique isn't aji patriarch fua wise up you've let the uchiha forbidden technique slip away and lost so many sharing the right eye under danzo's bandages even has a transplanted
Speaker A
mangeko sharing if I'm not mistaken it's probably aha kagamies after all only a handful of have ever awakened the mangeko and the only one who died under mysterious circumstances was aha kagami kanoha has suffered such a heavy loss at
Speaker A
my hands this time. So, the upper echelons will definitely retaliate covertly. Therefore, instead of throwing a celebration banquet, you should tighten clan patrols and vigilance.
Speaker A
Otherwise, when more people die, don't say I didn't warn you. I'm leaving with that. Aiha couldn't be bothered to say more and turned to leave. The radicals naturally followed suit. Explanations.
Speaker A
He couldn't be bothered. As the leader of the radicals, he was no longer the small fry he used to be. The so-called patriarch couldn't suppress him. On the contrary, as he left, he didn't forget to stir up trouble for Fua. During your
Speaker A
tenure as Aiha leader, clansmen shed blood and died on the battlefield. Yet, when they returned, they couldn't even be enshrined on the memorial stone. So many sacrifices, yet nothing was gained.
Speaker A
Not only has the Aiha's reputation worsened, but now even the ancestral land has been lost, and we are ostracized by the entire Kohaa with Root and U starting to surveil us. Heihajene barely managed to turn the tide, and you
Speaker A
still shamelessly try to steal the credit. So what now? Clansmen go missing every day while Danzo has a whole arm of sharing and even knows Aiha forbidden techniques. This burden can only be carried by Fiawa. And indeed as Aiha
Speaker A
Jeene had anticipated the moment the radicals left the shrine erupted into chaos. Danzo has a whole arm of Shainggon. His right eye is Aiha Kagami's mano. He even knows the Aiha forbidden technique is an Aji. These revelations completely ignited the Aiha.
Speaker A
Even the moderates and centrists could no longer tolerate it. All right, silence. This is just Aiha Jyn's one-sided story. Don't believe it so easily. I promise you all I will provide an explanation, but I asked for some time. That's all. Meeting adjourned.
Speaker A
Fu's head throbbed with pain, but he still had to helplessly explain. Of course, given his indecisive nature, he obviously couldn't articulate any clear reasoning and ended up resorting to his old trick, bluffing. Admittedly, the uchiha were easy to bluff. Although
Speaker A
everyone was furious about the matter in the end, they were still pacified by Fua's vague promises. This was perfectly normal. In the original story, even when the radicals were ready to stage an armed rebellion just before the night of
Speaker A
the Aiha massacre, weren't they still fooled by Fua? The clan meeting ended without resolution, leaving a mess in its wake. As the radical faction led by Aiha departed, Fagaku felt too embarrassed to stay, so he gave some prefuncter remarks and announced the
Speaker A
dissolution of the gathering. Shers watched Fugaku's retreating figure, his eyes filled with even deeper disappointment. Even with the Hokage's help, could he really suppress Aiha Jin?
Speaker A
But recalling Jyn's words before he left Shers took a deep breath and said sternly, "Clan leader, I must see the Hokag." Regarding the mano sharing gone in Danzos possession, I need to ask specifically what is going on. With that
Speaker A
said, he didn't even wait for Fugaku to respond before vanishing with a body flicker technique. Fagaka's face darkened at this. He was already frustrated and annoyed from being rebutted by Achiha gene. And now Sherzu's lack of respect only added to
Speaker A
his suppressed rage. Yet he held it and letting out a cold snort before returning home. Shortly after an Aiha entered knelt on one knee respectfully and said, "Clan leader, something is wrong. All radical members, both ninja and civilians, have moved near Achiha
Speaker A
Jins residence. That entire area has been fortified with new defensive barriers and patrols, and countless hidden centuries are visible inside." As he spoke, sweat beated on the Aiha's forehead. Indeed, this behavior of the radical faction was practically a state
Speaker A
within a state and absolutely unacceptable. Despite the internal factions within the Aiha clan where no one could convince the other, they still maintained a semblance of unity on the surface. Otherwise, without the need for Kenoha's higher-ups to act, the clan
Speaker A
might have already collapsed from within. But now, Aiha Jyn's actions had directly broken the rules. Bang! Fugaku, who had just picked up his teacup, was stunned, then slammed the cup to the ground in fury. Damn it, what does
Speaker A
Achihajene intend to do? Force a split in our clan. Fagaka's face was grim, and murderous intent flickered in his eyes.
Speaker A
He couldn't accept it. He had spent years walking on eggshells to maintain the clan's stability, always cautious, lest the Aiha be destroyed by his own missteps. And now that cursed Aiha gene, even if he didn't understand him, was
Speaker A
tolerable when he caused trouble. But now he dared to split the Achiha. As for that, the kneeling Achiha kept his head bowed and offered no rebuttal. Instead, his eyes flickered with a trace of confusion. He had actually taken to
Speaker A
heart everything Aiha Jeene had said at the clan meeting. Looking back at Fagaku's rise to clan leader, although he had earned the title of fiery on the battlefield, he was far too timid when facing Kenoha's higher-ups in the
Speaker A
village. He hadn't felt this way before, but after hearing Jyn's words, he realized it was indeed the truth. Take the Ninetales incident, which had the greatest impact on the Aiah. At the time, the clan had been ready to rescue
Speaker A
the fourth hokag menato namic. But unfortunately, Danzo had blocked their way. He remembered that Ashihajene, then still an insignificant figure, had suggested they ignored Danzo's so-called order from the third Hokag since the fourth Hokag Manado Names was in charge
Speaker A
at that time. But sadly, that proposal was rejected by Fagaku and no one took it seriously then. And in the end, the night Manato Namikes died, the Aiha were completely ostracized and even forced to leave their ancestral grounds. He often
Speaker A
wondered if they had followed Achiha Jins advice and actually rescued Manado Name's Would the Achiha situation be better now? But there was no if about it. After that night, Aiha once again became an invisible figure in the clan
Speaker A
until he awakened the Mangeko and joined the radicals, becoming their leader a few days ago. He roughly understood why Achihaene didn't ally with Fagaku because in a sense, Fagaku was too indecisive. So what should be done? Aiha Inho's eyes were full of confusion.
Speaker A
Though he now vaguely realized that Fugaku was truly lacking the problem was that Achihaene was too radical leaving him unable to make up his mind. Sigh.
Speaker A
After an helpless sigh, he decided to wait and see. Ino just as he was lost and thought Fagaku suddenly spoke coldly. Yes. Aiha Inho replied with utmost respect. A faint glimmer of hope flickered in his eyes. Could it be that
Speaker A
Fagaku had truly made up his mind to act directly? Although he also felt that some of Aiha Jyns words were right, he absolutely could not accept the splitting of the clan. So if Fagaka gave the order, he would definitely support
Speaker A
him. Wasn't it just war against the radicals? The Aiha were not afraid of battle. But sadly, under his expectant gaze, Fagaku became hesitant again. No, forget it. The Aiha cannot endure more turmoil. As for that Aiha gene, well deal with him another day. You
Speaker A
may leave. As for the radical faction, pretend we know nothing. Upon hearing this, Achiha Inho's eyes grew even more disappointed. His clan leader was too irresolute, leaving him at a loss for words. In the end, he could only
Speaker A
respectfully leave. Inside the Aiha clan grounds, voices were everywhere with some saying that the change in Kenoha's high-erups was due to clan leader Fagaka's efforts. But likewise, others claimed it was Aiha Jyn's doing. In short, the entire Achiha clan was filled
Speaker A
with endless arguments. Only a few clear-headed individuals let outsize their dissatisfaction with Fagaku, growing ever stronger. How could a man who couldn't even control the voices within his own clan qualify to be the Aiha clan leader? But before the
Speaker A
argument could reach a conclusion, they discovered that the radicals had formed their own system, creating a village within a village and a clan within a clan. Of course, Aiha Jyn's speech at the clan meeting had by now spread
Speaker A
throughout the entire Aiha clan. Kenoa's concession this time was won by Achiha Jeene and surely the higher-ups would seek revenge afterwards. Thinking of the Aiha who had gone missing some time ago, some in the clan scoffed at this while
Speaker A
others believed it to be true and consequently moved into the radicals compound. And for that, the radicals welcomed all comers. After all, they were all Aiha. At the radicals compound, Aiha Jyn's residence. Late at night, Achiha Jeene sat cross-legged on his
Speaker A
bed, the manoyo in his eyes flickering as he used his ocular power at the minimum level. A no hesikata. This was a subtle use he had discovered by chance.
Speaker A
By maintaining the ocular power at its minimum, he could slowly recover two units of pupil power for every one unit consumed. Although it was very slow and not as good as the eternal Mangeko for him, who had no system, no cheat, and no
Speaker A
access to weakened Hashurama cells, it was still quite good news. Within the Achiha clan, a great migration began. As the words of Achiha gene spread from Naka shrine, the Aiha who chose to believe him moved one after another to
Speaker A
the radical factions territory. The reasoning was simple. Regardless of whether the Kenoha higher-ups would retaliate, it was better to believe it than not since they had little to lose.
Speaker A
Especially recently, people had indeed been secretly disappearing within the Aiha compound. Considering this, although they cared little about factional disputes, they did not mind seeking refuge with the radical faction.
Speaker A
The radical faction members naturally appeared elated. In their view, this was a sign that the radicals were gaining popular support. Time slowly passed. As time passed, due to Fagaka's weakness and hesitation in allowing this to happen, many Achiha who had been
Speaker A
watching began to move to the radical factions territory as well. The vast Achiha compound was thus directly split in two. Meanwhile, on the other side, Sherse did indeed approach Saratobi Herusen, but was easily rebutted.
Speaker A
According to Saratobi, Herusen, Danzo, and Kagami were close friends, and the Shainggon was a gift before death, and so Shers believed it. After all, there had been the incident with Aido and Kakashi before, so another such occurrence seemed understandable, didn't
Speaker A
it? If it were Aiha, he would naturally regard this as nonsense. How dare Danzo compare himself to Kakashi? Did he have the nerve? But unfortunately, Shers Sway was not Achiha, and he was so easily persuaded. As for the armful of
Speaker A
Shainggon that Danzo had, it was dismissed with the phrase, "It's all for Kenoha." After all years ago, Danzo lost his arm for Kohaa. So, what was wrong with using a few sharing from the Aiha to better serve the village? The
Speaker A
persuaded Shers had long forgotten that the Shainggon was a clan's bloodline limit and that any bloodline was the foundation of a ninja clan. No clan could tolerate such an act. 10 days later, the great relocation within the Aiha clan ended. The radical factions
Speaker A
territory became bustling with centuries, both overt and covert, densely placed around the perimeter, and a new barrier directly enveloping the entire compound. On the other side, the moderate and neutral factions under the leadership of clan leader Fagaku and
Speaker A
with the support of the Mangeko wielder Sherui chose to trust the Kenoha higherups. But unfortunately, Danzo having lost an armful of Shaing in order to stabilize the Hashiamarama cells in his right arm could only arrest Aiha with three Tommo even more frantically.
Speaker A
There was no choice. It was not yet the time of the Achiha clan's extinction.
Speaker A
So, Danzo did not have many three Tommo Sharing in stock. Last time, Aiha gene had destroyed 10 of them directly. So for the sake of his body, he had to do this even more crazily than before. But because the radicals defenses were too
Speaker A
tight, he could only target the moderates and neutrals. For a moment, the neutrals and moderates naturally felt endangered. Fagaka said, "Trust the village. Trust the Lord Hokag. These are all coincidences." Shers said, "Everyone don't panic. The Lord Hokag will
Speaker A
investigate." Both the clan leader and the mano wielder raised their voices. They were also panicked under great psychological pressure. But they dared not imitate the radicals dared not easily change the compounds barrier nor increase centuries because that would
Speaker A
signify distrust of the village. For people like them, no matter how great the pressure, they dared not easily resort to such methods. However, 3 days later, they no longer had time to worry about this because rumors began to
Speaker A
circulate in the village that the Aiha were about to rebel. Moreover, this time the rumors were far more intense than before. Fagaka Sher Suer and others were panicked but had no solution. Even when they sought help from the Hokag Saratobi
Speaker A
Herusen, all they received were the same old platitudes. Trust the villagers. Trust the village. Rumors ceased with the wise or leave everything to time.
Speaker A
Don't panic. Don't fear. I'm here. As the Hokag, I will definitely handle it. Although Fagaku and Shers felt stifled with no other options. They could only temporarily trust the village and the Hokag. But unfortunately, Saratobi Horizon did not stop it at all and even
Speaker A
tacitly approved of it. Otherwise, the route alone could not have made it so big. Unfortunately, the two fools, Fagaku and Shersu, could not even see through such a simple matter. And aside from worrying, they could solve nothing.
Speaker A
On the other side, compared to the anxious Fugaku and Shiru, the radicals were strangely silent. Aiha had completely disappeared from view. During this period, he seldom left his residence in order to restore the ocular power of his mango. After all, without a
Speaker A
system to rely on, he had to keep himself in peak condition as much as possible. This was also why he did not directly overturn the table kill off the other factions within the clan and the Canoa higher-ups, but chose to engage in
Speaker A
a battle of wits within the rules of the game. Strength was his weakness unless he obtained hasharama cells in the future or found a way to awaken the eternal mango. Genecoin, are you really not going to do anything? Last night,
Speaker A
another one went missing from the moderates and neutrals. A strong one who had even awakened three tommo. Although we are in different factions, we are all Aiha. And watching this truly pains me deeply. If we truly rebel, these are all
Speaker A
combat power. Aiha Setsuna smiled bitterly. At this moment, he was restless. Even as a radical, he was deeply grieved by such losses. In response, Aihaene leisurely brood, t not taking the matter to heart at all. Elder Setsuna, I am also pained. But the Aiha
Speaker A
of today have long been domesticated into house dogs, having lost the savagery of their ancestors. The only method I can think of is to break down and rebuild. In my view, these losses are far from enough. Only by letting
Speaker A
more ninja die, completely shattering these people's illusions, can we hope to unify the entire clan and have the right to contend with the Kenoha higher-ups.
Speaker A
This is also why I have not broken with the Kenoha higher-ups. With only the radicals, not to mention rebelling, we don't even have the right to drag the Kohaa higher-ups down with us. Only by unifying the entire Aiha, can we barely
Speaker A
have that right. Yes, you heard correctly. Even if we unite the entire Aiha, we only have the right to drag Kenoha to death with us. Rebelling is still too difficult. Aiha Jyns tone was deep. As a trans migrator, he had a
Speaker A
deeper understanding of Kohaa, so he dared not act too rashly. Hearing this, Aiha Satsuna was stunned on the spot.
Speaker A
Gene, why are you so wary of the Kenoha higher-ups? Do those old fogies really have such ability? Aren't you being too cautious? Saratobi Herusen might have been formidable in his youth, but now he is old and frail. The experts of other
Speaker A
ninja clans are no match for the Achiha. I think if we rebel, our chances of success are quite high. Aiha Setsuna was utterly stunned. He couldn't quite comprehend Aiha Jins caution. In his view, this wasn't how Gene should
Speaker A
be. After all, this was a man bold enough to lock horns with the vill's higher-ups. Meanwhile, on the other side, Achiha Jyn's brow furrowed slightly. In response to Setsuna's confusion, he let out a soft sigh after a moment of deliberation. Elder Setsuna
Speaker A
Canó's foundations run deep. Among its forbidden scrolls, there is a technique called the dead demon consuming seal.
Speaker A
One of the Usuzamaki clan's greatest legacies. It summons the grim reaper at the cost of the caster's life. This jutzu can ignore all ninjutsu and barrier techniques. If one is caught by it, the soul is directly reaped by the
Speaker A
death god. Manado namic use this very technique to split the ninetailes into and yang has then sealed it within himself and his son Naro Uzumaki. If the village higher-ups are truly pushed to the brink, they could unseal this
Speaker A
forbidden technique and teach it to all of Kenoha's Jonan. What then? Granted, this technique is extraordinarily difficult to master, but Kenoha has many Jonan. If even 20 of them managed to learn it, do you think our clan could
Speaker A
withstand that? Even with my man Gekcko, I wouldn't dare risk it. Hearing these words, Setsuna's face instantly contorted with sheer terror. Kohaa actually possesses such a thing. Before he could even process this revelation, Achiha Jeene continued speaking. And
Speaker A
then there's the Ninetales. If the higher-ups are truly cornered, what if they release the Ninetales at any cost?
Speaker A
Jeriah will undoubtedly side with Kinoa and Sununade. Though she cannot stand the sight of blood, if the Achiha rebel, she might overcome her trauma for the sake of the village her grandfathers built. Who would be able to hold off
Speaker A
these two Kaga level fighters? The Yu and Root are loyal to the Hokag to the death. Though an Achiha can match three ordinary enemies faced with so many foes, even if we hold, how many lives would it cost? Danzo has already
Speaker A
collected quite a few three tommoing and that bastard himself has mastered his anagi. How many lives would we burn through just to wear him down? Peru and Saratobi may be the weakest Hokag, but he's still not someone ordinary clan
Speaker A
members can withstand. And I've personally investigated the Saratobi clan, having embezzled from the vill's coffers for years. They rarely participate in war missions. The Saratobi clan alone now has at least 1500 ninja with no fewer than 300 Jonin.
Speaker A
Even if these Jonin are far weaker than the Aiha sheer numbers alone can overwhelm us. And that's not factoring in the other clans. Given the Achiha's tarnished reputation, do you honestly believe the other clans and civilians would support the Aiha rising to power?
Speaker A
What if they all joined the fight? As Aiha Jyn's words sank and sweat beated on Setsuna's forehead, and he found himself utterly speechless, he realized how shallow his previous thinking had been. Kenoha's true strength was far more terrifying than he had imagined.
Speaker A
The Aiha, crippled as they were now, had no right to even contemplate rebellion. Even with Achiha Jyn's Mangeko, the village's higher-ups could simply outlast him. Reflecting on their earlier rebellion plans, he couldn't help but let out a resigned sigh. Jin Ku and Yu
Speaker A
thought this through well. We truly have no grounds for rebellion. He was convinced. The points Aihaene had raised were things he had never once considered. No matter how strong the Aiha were, they could hardly withstand all of this. Yes, it's difficult.
Speaker A
Aihajene nodded. Kenoha's foundation is too deep. Even after losing so many powerful shinobi and with the village in its current weakened state, it's still not something the Aiha can trifle with.
Speaker A
And that's without even counting the moderates and the middle faction within our own clan holding us back. Even if we somehow managed to overthrow the vill's higher-ups and seize power, how would a broken Kenoha fend off the four great
Speaker A
ninja villages? Elder Setsuna, do you think the other four great ninja villages would spare a weakened and broken Kohaa? So, let's be realistic. My goal for now is to stabilize the villages higher-ups and unify the Aiha.
Speaker A
Everything else can wait. Aiha Jeene took a sip of tea, his gaze growing impossibly deep. What allowed him to keep the village's higher-ups at bay was his willingness to risk everything to fight to the death even at the cost of
Speaker A
annihilating his own clan just to the leadership. The vill's higher-ups wanted a stable koha above all else. Even if they could eliminate the Aiha without losses, they would still have to figure out how to deal with the other ninja villages afterward.
Speaker A
Aiha Setsuna took a deep breath. He gazed at Aiha gene with profound gratification. Then a faint smile crept across his face. It seems this old man Setsuna is quite fortunate to have found such a worthy successor in my twilight
Speaker A
years. Even if I were to die right now, it would all be worth it. The radical faction is in good hands now. I can rest completely at ease. In his heart, Setsuna was genuinely satisfied with Achihajin before him. The old radical
Speaker A
faction, for all its strength, could do nothing but shout bluster. But under Achihajin's leadership, it had truly become a razor-sharp blade. Not only ruthless and daring, but also wise, he thanked the heavens for sending such a genius to the Aiha in their darkest
Speaker A
hour. To this, Aiha simply smiled, offering no further words. After a moment of deliberation, Setsuna spoke, "What about the clansmen who keep disappearing and the increasingly radical rhetoric in the village? Are we truly going to do nothing? Will it have
Speaker A
any impact on your plans?" Though he had already come to understand Jyn's plan, using the bloodshed to disillusion certain members of the clan, he still couldn't help but ask. Because the pain was too great. The Aiha, a proud
Speaker A
millennium old clan, stood. But as a feeble shadow against the full might of Kenoa's leadership with so many dying even now, he truly feared Aiha might lose control. To this, Aihajene shook his head. In my view, it's far from
Speaker A
enough. Too few have died. Only when death has shaken the moderates, and the middle faction to their very core will they wake up. The Aiha are too single-minded. It's the only way to shatter their illusions about the village. As for the village's rhetoric,
Speaker A
that's not our concern. The clan head is Fagaku after all. A rush deal is never a good one. If they want my help, they'll all have to come begging. It's not that I achi and putting on heirs. But if I'm
Speaker A
too forward, those people will only grow suspicious of me at every turn, throwing obstacles in my path and scheming behind my back. Do you think manipulating the village's public opinion is easy? I refuse to scheme for the Achihas benefit
Speaker A
while also having to deal with the fools in the moderate and middle factions. Aiha Satsuna let out a sigh. After a moment's thought, he realized Aiha Jeene was absolutely right. Given the folly of Fugaku and Shirui, it was inevitable,
Speaker A
certain to happen. Just then, Aiha Tatsuko walked in. Elder Gene, Elder Setsuna. Word from Fugaku. He's calling an emergency clan meeting and demands that the radical faction attend. A clan meeting, another clan meeting. Aiha Jyn's mouth twitched, and he couldn't
Speaker A
help but slap his forehead. Fagaku as clan leader left him utterly speechless. Any sensible person knows that trivial matters warrant large assemblies. While grave matters should be discussed in small circles or not at all. For ordinary folk lack the capacity to
Speaker A
resolve issues. Instead, they are prone to echoing others and being led by the nose. While the risk of intelligence leaking to spies grows ever greater.
Speaker A
Thus, the rank and file need only execute orders. When truly deliberating strategies, the fewer the participants, the better, provided those present possess prestige, authority over the lower echelons, and the ability to settle matters. But now Fagaku calls meetings at every turn, yet resolves
Speaker A
nothing devoid of the decisiveness a clan leader ought to embody. He scarcely even knows how to act. For a clan, this spells certain paralysis that Fagaku is truly useless. It must be about the missing clan members and the village's
Speaker A
rumors. Can't he handle even such trivialities? Can't he use his brain, calling meetings at the drop of a hat?
Speaker A
He must be out of his mind. Aiha Satsuna frowned deeply unable to restrain himself from cursing aloud. Previously, he had never seen anything wrong with the endless clan gatherings. But through his growing contact with Aiha, he increasingly realized such meetings were
Speaker A
woefully inefficient. Nothing but a waste of time. Looking back at every operation Gene had led since joining the radical faction, none had involved formal deliberations. He simply summoned a few individuals issued orders and executed. Covert, efficient, and flawless. More importantly, the results
Speaker A
were remarkable. Setsuna had attended clan meetings his entire life. Yet never once had anything been accomplished within them. Enough. Stop grumbling.
Speaker A
Since we have nothing better to do, Fugaku is still the clan leader after all. As long as it doesn't touch upon matters of principle, granting him some face won't hurt. Tekk select five elite Jonin from the radical faction to
Speaker A
maintain a show of strength. The rest of you will strictly carry out patrol duties during this time. Overt and covert posts must keep the compound under tight surveillance, leaving route no opening whatsoever. Elder sets up.
Speaker A
Let's go. Aihajene rose and strode directly outside. Setsuna naturally followed, leading by example to affirm Jyn's position as the leader of the radical faction. 10 minutes later, Aiha and Setsuna led the way, followed by Tekk and the unnamed elite Jonan, making
Speaker A
their way to the Naka shrine. At their arrival, those present furrowed their brows. However, unlike last time, many lower ranking Aiha clan members now gazed at the radical faction with complex, thoughtful expressions.
Speaker A
Clearly, the many recent events within the clan seemed to be proving Aiha gene right. The Aiha were stubborn and single-minded. Yet, they were not true fools. With such a contrast, they could sense something a miss, though their habitual trust in the elders of each
Speaker A
faction kept them from defecting to the radical faction for now. Elder Gene, Elder Setsuna, why has the radical faction sent so few? Why do the other Aiha members refuse to attend the clan meeting? Is this not a violation of
Speaker A
protocoling? Fagaka sat at the head, his face radiating authority. Had one not known his true character, that first impression might well have been intimidating. At the very least, his bearing had the semblance of a clan leader. But alas, he was but a silver
Speaker A
spear with a wax head. Fagaku was the epitome of all show and no substance.
Speaker A
After the group took their seats, Aihaene adjusted his robes and spoke with an unhurried smile. The others must guard against infiltration of the compound, so naturally they could not attend the clan meeting. Fagaka's face darkened at these words. Was this not an
Speaker A
obvious jab at him? But before he could speak, Shersu interjected. Jin Kuan, you should trust the clan leader and the Hokag. The radical factions actions are far too extreme. It's clear you don't trust them at all. Such behavior is
Speaker A
unacceptable. I hope the radical faction will withdraw its defenses to this. Aiha didn't even lift an eyelid and shot back directly. I do not trust the clan leader nor Saratobi Haruen. You sure was stunned. Fagaku was the clan leader and
Speaker A
Herusen was the Hokag. How could he show such blatant disrespect? Such bluntness left Sher Suer's mind blank. After all, regardless of one's true feelings weren't outward gestures of respect supposed to be maintained. But alas, unfortunately, Achiha couldn't be
Speaker A
bothered with him and spoke again with indifference. Many have died within the compound recently, and all of them were three tommoiha were they not. I recall warning you all at the last clan meeting. I never imagined you fools
Speaker A
would actually gamble your subordinates lives on the character of Fagaku and Saratobi Herusen. You're impressive. I salute you. Fagaka's indecisiveness is nothing new. During the war, the Achiha earned battle merits. Yet, even the dead couldn't be enshrined on the village's
Speaker A
memorial stone. Do the villagers even know the Achiha fought desperately for the village? The Ninetailes night the loss of the ancestral grounds the A&BU surveillance. One incident after another. You truly have no brains. But enough good council is wasted on the
Speaker A
damned. If you're all set on courting death, then I won't bother with you. But likewise, the radical faction does not accept Fugaku as clan leader. I Aihajin will state it plainly. I must take responsibility for my people's lives. So
Speaker A
no more nonsense. Let's get straight to the point. I still have matters to attend to back at base. Aihajene was exceedingly direct. At the last clan meeting, he had still dained to address Fugaku as clan leader, for he had just
Speaker A
risen to power and lacked a firm foundation. But with the recent string of Achiha disappearances and the radical faction suffering no losses whatsoever, his capabilities had already spoken for themselves. His authority was now established. So there was no need to
Speaker A
defer to Fugaku. And indeed that was precisely the case. Even though Aihaene was being utterly insolent, the entire Naka shrine fell into absolute silence.
Speaker A
Not a single Aiha clan member raised a word of objection. Even the elders of the moderate and neutral factions kept their tongues firmly in check. The reason was simple. The string of events during this period had already demonstrated Fagaka's incompetence as
Speaker A
clan leader. Even if they could not accept Jyn's radicalism, that did not mean they were obliged to show Fugaku any face. They had long grown weary of this incapable leader. Fugaku, staring at the utterly silent Naka shrine. His
Speaker A
expression shifted unpredictably. A fierce glint flickered in his eyes, and when his gaze fell upon Achiha Gene, a murderous intent surfaced. He was seething with rage. He believed that for the stability of the Achiha, he had graveled and endured countless
Speaker A
humiliations abroad. And within the clan, he had done everything possible to appease those who failed to understand him. And for what? Was it not to balance the village and the clan? Was it not to ensure the Aiha survival? His goal was
Speaker A
clear. Integration into Kohaa. But damn it, why couldn't this pack of idiots before him understand that? Fua's face was ashen, yet his back was drenched in cold sweat. He knew all too well that if this matter were not resolved properly,
Speaker A
his authority would be severely undermined. But here came the problem. He could not answer a single one of Achihajins questions. After a long silence, he finally gritted his teeth and said, "The current restraint within the clan is meant to help the Aiha
Speaker A
integrate into Kenoa. And what have we achieved?" Aihajene retorted, "Have we merged into Kenoa?" Upon hearing this, Fua was instantly silenced. He had indeed produced no tangible results.
Speaker A
Despite his efforts and a lifetime of endurance, all he received in return was the village's intensified persecution.
Speaker A
But he wanted to voice his plight. Yet his face was not thick enough for that.
Speaker A
So taking a deep breath, he spoke coldly. Aihajin, you are too young. You simply do not understand the complexity of the situation. However, considering your youth, I am not willing to argue with you any further. Now, let's discuss
Speaker A
the real matter. Fu, though, gritting his teeth, chose to back down. He knew he could not outar argue Aiha. So he wisely shifted the topic, laying out the clan's current troubles and hoping everyone could brainstorm a way through
Speaker A
the crisis. To this Aiha remained impassive. Seeing Fua concede, he naturally ceased his attack.
Speaker A
Understanding the principle of not pursuing a fleeing enemy, he fell silent, uninterested in participating in the clan meetings deliberations. The radical faction was likewise. Perhaps they once enjoyed arguing in clan meetings, but now with Achihaene at the helm, their methods had completely
Speaker A
changed. They had no interest in meetings now. Aiha made the arrangements and they simply followed through. They disdained such tedious procedures. If not for Achihajin's attendance, the radical faction would likely have skipped the meeting. Meanwhile, on the other side, as Fua began presiding over
Speaker A
the council, everyone present started voicing their opinions. I think we should discuss this with the Hokag. Yes, we must not act rashly. The Aiha's position is already precarious. We must be even more cautious in our actions. I agree too. Let's consult. The moderate
Speaker A
and neutral factions offered their suggestions. The atmosphere at the clan meeting was harmonious. With the radical faction silent, there was naturally no quarreling. Everything seemed peaceful.
Speaker A
Everyone in the Naka shrine felt an oddity. After all, such a quarrel-free meeting was a first, and they were somewhat unaccustomed to it. Fua at the head found it equally awkward. He cleared his throat softly. Elder Gene, what is the radical factions opinion? No
Speaker A
objections, Aiha Jeene said flatly. We agree. Everyone's lips twitched. They couldn't comprehend how he could agree so lightly. Was this still the radical faction? Shway frowned his naivity, prompting him to ask directly, "What scheme are you plotting? A scheme? Huh?"
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene sneered. You underestimate me. I have never engaged in underhanded plots, and I disdain such tricks. But since you wish to know, I don't mind telling you. The reason I don't oppose is that my radical factions territory is
Speaker A
impregnable. No matter how chaotic the outside world becomes, it won't affect us. So why should I bother with your sorry affairs? I eagerly await your continued foolishness leading to more deaths of three Tomtommo Achiha elites.
Speaker A
Once their corpses land on the dissection tables of roots lab and their threeto sharing are implanted into Danzos arm. The more elites your factions lose, the more terrified your supporters become, and they will naturally flock to my radical faction.
Speaker A
This is a good thing. Why would I oppose? Aihajins expression remained calm, his tone as flat as ever.
Speaker A
Indeed, it was an open strategim. He had no interest in scheming. Coming from a land of strategy, he knew that underhanded plots could not last. Thus, he only ever employed an open and upright approach. As seen here, he chose
Speaker A
to speak the truth. But what did it matter if the others knew his intentions? Given the folly of the moderate and neutral factions, they would still act according to his plan.
Speaker A
Trust the village neglect defense and suffer more casualties. All he had to do was wait for their factions to collapse from within, and the remaining Aiha would naturally choose to join him. And indeed, that was the case. As Aiha
Speaker A
Jyns words sank in the faces of the moderate and neutral faction members turned extremely grim. Shers slammed the table in anger. Aiha Jinu, did I say something wrong? Aiha Jin asked utterly indifferent. Are you planning to resist?
Speaker A
I'm not looking down on you, but you fools lack the courage. If you truly resisted, you'd become the radical faction yourselves. And if you choose to trust Saratobi Harusen, you'll fall right into my trap. I'll just sit back
Speaker A
and watch your elites march to their deaths. Whichever path you choose, I lose nothing. With Achiha Jins declaration, the entire Naka shrine fell into dead silence. Everyone had to admit the terrifying cunning of Achiha. Even knowing his scheme, they found no way
Speaker A
out. Silence. After a long pause, Shersu finally spoke through gritted teeth. I trust the Hokage. Your scheme will not succeed. As you wish if it makes you happy, Aiha shrugged. Meanwhile, Fufa fell into a long silence, his mind
Speaker A
racing frantically. But unfortunately, it was useless. Could he adopt the radical factions proactive defense?
Speaker A
impossible. Yet, if he maintained the status quo, the deaths of elite clansmen would continue playing into Achihajin's plan. Unlike the naive Shirou, he knew the ruthlessness of Root and the maliciousness of Danzo. Thus, the covert hunting of Achiha elites would never
Speaker A
cease. If Achihajin wasn't lying, then three tommo eyes were a necessity for Danzo. As for discussing it with Saratobi Herusen, he held little hope.
Speaker A
If talking worked, the situation wouldn't have deteriorated to such a state. What frustrated him further was that this didn't affect the radical faction as they had already fortified their territory, making it no easy task for Root to strike. What to do? Fufa
Speaker A
found himself unable to muddle through any longer. If he followed his old ways, he would likely brush it off again, and the clan meeting would end inconclusively. But this time, it was different. Because of Aiha Jyn's words, if he continued to evade more and more
Speaker A
would defect to the radical faction over time, and his position as clan head would likely become unstable. No, absolutely not. Aiha Jeene was too radical. He must never become the clan head or the Achiha would truly be doomed. He must not panic. There must be
Speaker A
a way. Fua kept trying to convince himself grinding his teeth as he desperately sought a solution. The clan meeting once again concluded without any resolution. The radical faction led by Aiha did not leave early. Instead, they observed with keen interest the
Speaker A
performances of Fugaku and Shiret. Finally departing from the Nana shrine with satisfaction. Clan leader Sherui's voice was hoarse. He spoke only after everyone had left. We must find a way. We cannot allow Achiha to continue his arrogance. He felt a
Speaker A
growing fear. Knowing the others schemes but powerless to stop them filled him with restlessness. This open conspiracy left him deeply conflicted. Fagaka's eyes were deep and profound. As he sat silently in his seat, he glanced at the empty Nana shrine and in a days he saw
Speaker A
how his appeasement strategy had led the Kohaa higher-ups to gradually indulge Danzo with more and more Aiha being captured. In the past, they had no choice. But now with Achiha, everyone was frantically defecting to the radical faction. Shiru, go and discuss with the
Speaker A
Hokage. Asked the Hokag to restrain Danzo. I will try my best to stabilize the clan's emotions. If this continues, the Aiha will become the domain of the radical faction. Fagaka spoke his face full of helplessness. He was truly
Speaker A
forced into a corner, hoping that Herusen Suratobi would exert some effort. To this, Shiroui's face showed a hint of anger. Clan leader, you cannot be misled by Achihajene. Lord Danzo is a high-ranking official of Kenoha. How could he possibly do such things? He
Speaker A
does have my grandfather sharing gone, but it was a gift from my grandfather before his death. Fugaku let out a sigh in response. Foolish child, do I not know what kind of person Danzo is? But he also knew that Shers Sway had long
Speaker A
been brainwashed by Huen Saratobi, and arguing further would be meaningless. So he merely waved his hand and said casually, "Just tell the Hokage what I said. Don't concern yourself with anything else. After saying that, he ignored Sherse and left with heavy
Speaker A
steps. Shers opened his mouth to explain wanting to persuade Fugaku. But watching Fagaku's departing figure, he eventually let out a helpless sigh. The clan's misunderstanding of the Kohaa high-erups runs too deep. Even the moderates and crists harbor severe distrust of the
Speaker A
higher-ups. The Hokag is such a good person. Why can't they show respect? It seems I must continue to work even harder. His eyes gradually grew resolute. As if he had made a decision, he went to the Hokag's office and
Speaker A
reported the contents of the clan meeting. Hirus and Saratobi smoking his pipe let out a sigh with a cryptic look.
Speaker A
Times are hard. I understand the situation. Convey to Fagaku that I will do my best to restrain Danzo. Sheru do not blame Fugaku. The Achihas misunderstanding of Kohaa is deep and it will take time to resolve it. Hirusen
Speaker A
Suratobi spoke with deep emotion. His aged face was filled with exhaustion and his eyes held a complex look of being misunderstood. Yet he still forced himself to console Shersu. Shers Sway was deeply moved. Lord Hokag, you have suffered much. It is my duty. Her
Speaker A
Saratobi replied with a smile. You are a good child. Let us work together. He then spoke at length about the will of fire and only after Shersu left did he summon the U. Lord Hokag informed Danzo to strictly monitor the Aiha compound.
Speaker A
Also deploy the third U division to assist. All actions are to be under Danzo's full command. Hiru and Suratobi gave the order directly. His old face was now full of coldness. And after the umbu left, he let out a cold
Speaker A
snort. Restrain Danzo. Nonsense. Danzo could no longer suppress the hasharama cells within him and urgently needed the three tommo sharing to balance them.
Speaker A
Under these circumstances, even if he ordered it, it would be feudal. He couldn't just let Danzo die, could he?
Speaker A
For the sake of the Aiah. Don't be ridiculous. As for Achiha Jyn's open conspiracy, it was indeed difficult to counter. But Hirusen Saratobi didn't need to solve it. After all, it was merely an internal factional struggle within the Aiha. He would be happy to
Speaker A
see more Achiha die. Even if Aiha gene took power, it wouldn't matter to him. A weakened Achiha, no matter how strong Gene was, could not cause much trouble.
Speaker A
He only needed to ensure that the internal strife within the Achiha did not affect the village. As for the rest, he chose to let nature take its course.
Speaker A
Time passed slowly, and 10 days flew by. Fagaka was anxious, but had no solution.
Speaker A
Hirus and Saratobi chose to let things be. The radical faction closed their doors and live their own lives in Danzo in order to suppress the raging hasharama cells within him continued to hunt down Achiha with three tommoing gone. For a time, the entire Aiha clan
Speaker A
was in a state of panic. Some who saw the reality chose to join the radical faction, but the vast majority remained loyal to their factions and refused to defect. After some discussion, these people prepared to learn from the
Speaker A
radical faction and form a defensive alliance. However, their plans were immediately thwarted by Sher Sui's intervention. Everyone must trust the Hokag. He will surely resolve this issue. This is definitely not Lord Danzo's doing. It is all slander by
Speaker A
Aiha. These are likely spies from other villages and the Hokag is already working on a solution. Fellow clansmen, wait a little longer. Trust the village.
Speaker A
Trust the Hokag. The naive Shers truly believed in Huen Saratobi and this was the very foundation of his life's beliefs. The Aiha were an extreme clan.
Speaker A
As a member of the Achiha Shersway naturally inherited this trait, especially as someone who had awakened the Mangeko, he was even more stubborn and single-minded than ordinary clan members. But unfortunately, not knowing that he had been sold out and was still
Speaker A
counting money for Huen Saratobi, he could not change the deteriorating environment within the clan. He could only watch helplessly as his fellow clansmen were killed day by day. Even if he stayed up all night patrolling the entire compound, it was useless because
Speaker A
one person could not guard the entire clan territory. It was precisely because of this another group of clansmen chose to join the radical faction. The remaining loyalists of the moderates and centrists ultimately decided to have Fagaku lead the defense. But well, huh.
Speaker A
Fagaku was a man of good ideas but no decisiveness, great ambition, but little wisdom and a weak heart. Although he could clearly perceive the problems within the clan territory, he could not make up his mind to break with the
Speaker A
village. Nor did he dare to counterattack or even actively defend because he feared the situation would worsen. Just like in the original story, when faced with Itachi's massacre of the clan, even though he did not agree with it internally, he still chose to offer
Speaker A
his neck to the blade. Now, it was the same. Even as clansmen died one after another, even as the moderates and centrists pressured him, he still kept thinking, hoping that delaying might bring new opportunities. In the end, amidst Fugaku's procrastination and
Speaker A
deliberation, more and more Aiha joined the radical faction until Fugaku became a leader with no followers. The only ones he could now lead were the high-ranking moderates and centrists along with a few core elites from both factions. In total, less than 15 people.
Speaker A
Aiha clan grounds the radical factions headquarters. Compared to half a month ago, the headquarters had expanded twofold. Helpless. Recently, too many had defected to the radical faction, forcing them to forcibly expand their territory. Consequently, the barrier had to be redesigned and the patrol teams as
Speaker A
well as the visible and covert centuries were reorganized. As for the police force, huh? From the moment Aiha truly assumed power, he ordered all members of the radical faction to withdraw from the police force. Now with the influx of
Speaker A
many moderates and centrist, Gene immediately issued a command for them to quit the police force entirely. The police force had long become a hollow shell. Although it still existed in name with Fagaku serving as its captain and some personnel stationed in the
Speaker A
building, in reality, no one was actually performing any duties. What? Surely they couldn't expect Fagaka the captain along with a few elders and elites from the two factions to actually patrol the streets like common officers.
Speaker A
Fagaku and the others couldn't afford to lose face. Hokag's office. Herus and Sir Tobiy's face was dark as thunder as he glared at Fagaku who stood before him and slammed the table heavily. Chief Fagaka, this is too much. Can you still
Speaker A
do your job as the police captain? Look at the chaos in the village. Where are your police force members? Why is no one enforcing the law? He was seething with rage, though he knew the Achiha were unstable with fierce internal factional
Speaker A
struggles and Danzo's incessant assassinations that turned the Achiha clan grounds into a reaping field.
Speaker A
Still, that was no excuse for the police force to be idol. In Huen Saratobi's mind, until the last Aiha fell, they must never abandon their police duties.
Speaker A
Otherwise, if the Aiha ceased to antagonize the commoners, where would he find the moral high ground to keep targeting them? But unfortunately, faced with Husen's fury, Fagaka's expression remained remarkably calm. He merely cast a faint glance at Hirusen, then spoke
Speaker A
with a helpless tone. Now the vast majority of the clan have sided with the radical faction. I can only command Sherui two or three moderate and crist elders and the six or seven Jonan elites under their command. Sherse is assigned
Speaker A
to the Umbu, and those six or seven Jonan elites need to attend to the elders and guard against the frequent enemy spies that appear at night. Surely you don't expect me the clan chief to patrol the streets with a few elders.
Speaker A
Fagaka spread his hands, adopting a resigned attitude. Indeed, he was equally helpless and desparing. And on the other side, Husen Saratobi was left speechless, unable to utter a word for a long time. Damn it. When he thought about it, if Fagaku's words were indeed
Speaker A
true, the so-called Aiha clan chief had become a general without an army. After silently smoking a pipe, Husen hesitated. Don't you have any countermeasures prepared? No, I can't think of any. Faga didn't even lift his eyelids, simply shaking his head. Aiha
Speaker A
Gene played an open strategim, so I concede defeat willingly. He truly had no solution, so he chose to accept it calmly. Such was his nature. In the original story, he had accepted Aiha's betrayal with the same equinimity.
Speaker A
Hirusen Soratobi, his mouth twitched violently, and he wanted nothing more than to slap Fagaku. Damn it. He had never seen such a useless man. Even if he thought Fagaka was no match for Achiha Gene, he couldn't just surrender
Speaker A
without a fight, could he? Now, this was troublesome. If Fagaka didn't contend with Gene once Gene took full control of the Aiha, wouldn't he stir up trouble again once he had free hands? No, absolutely not. Fagaka was clearly a
Speaker A
lost cause, completely hopeless. However reluctant he was heren had to fight for Fagaka's sake. At the very least, he needed to rally some people for Fagaku to keep the Aiha clan divided. Thinking this, he let out a soft sigh. Never
Speaker A
before had he imagined that one day he would actively help Fagaku. Yet Fagaku's ineptitude truly shocked him. From now on, he would have to find ways to let Shers assist him more and also find him more allies. Knock-knock knock. Hiru and
Speaker A
Suratobi tapped the table and an U knelt respectfully on one knee. Hokag sama go find Achihajin and tell him to come to the Hokag's office immediately. The U nodded and left. With the Usus departure, the office fell silent.
Speaker A
Herusen no longer in the mood to deal with Fagaku lit his pipe and began to ponder. He needed to use this time to think carefully. What rhetoric could he employ to make Aiha back down?
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, inside the core courtyard of the radical factions headquarters. Before Achihajene stood a young Aiha Jonan. But what truly piqued his interest was the man's identity.
Speaker A
Aiha and Abi Fagaku's absolute confidant. Likewise, the man Fagaku trusted most and one of the strongest Aiha. You defecting to Mi. To be honest, I find it hard to understand. You are Fagaka's core confidant. Why would you want to join me? As his absolute
Speaker A
confident, it should be easy for Fagaku to protect you, shouldn't it? Aiha Jyn's eyes flickered. He was somewhat wary of this. Aiha, given his awkward position, as the clan chief's most trusted man defecting to Gene, a radical faction
Speaker A
elder, seemed suspicious no matter how he looked at it. It didn't sit right, did it? Yet to this, Anab's expression remained unchanged. His tone calm. I have a younger sister. The clan grounds are not safe. I need to guard the clan
Speaker A
chief everyday, leaving no time to care for her. But that's only the surface reason. In truth, I have lost hope in the clan chief. The day you became the radical faction elder and established the headquarters, I believe the chief
Speaker A
should have stopped you at all costs, even if it meant a civil war. Because of his indecisiveness, he missed the best opportunity. Now, with the slander against the Aiha in the village and the daily disappearances of clan members,
Speaker A
Fugaku, as the chief, has found no way to stop it. Even though your methods have proven effective, the chief hasn't resolved to imitate them. This made me see clearly Fagaku as the clan chief lacks any decisiveness whether to fight
Speaker A
or make peace at least make a decision. With his hesitant nature and considering the complex relations between the clan and the village, I believe following Fagaku is doomed. Therefore, my defection to the radical faction is sincere. Fagaku is unworthy to be chief.
Speaker A
I want to support Eugene as the clan chief. I don't know if the Aiha situation will change under your leadership, but in my view, it will at least be better than under Fagaku. That is enough. Aiha Inho concealed nothing.
Speaker A
He straightforwardly recounted the entire matter, even casually mentioning his intention to move against the radical faction in secret. This is Aiha.
Speaker A
They disdain concealing their emotions, speaking directly whatever is in their hearts. Since Jyn's actions had earned his recognition, he would dedicate all his loyalty, caring not whether it might offend Aiha Gene, even willing to sacrifice his life if necessary. You
Speaker A
could say the Aiha are extreme, arrogant, and hotty. But similarly, if you truly have the means to make them submit, they will follow your lead for life. So that's how it is. Then I congratulate you on making the right
Speaker A
choice because Pagaku indeed lacks the ability to handle the villages complex situation. I will show you that under my leadership, the Aiha will reverse their current decline. Achiha Jeene narrowed his eyes. Looking at Achiha Inho before him, he felt increasingly certain of the
Speaker A
correctness of his plans. Because according to his original estimate, many Aiha would have to die before the remaining ones could awaken. Yet, he hadn't expected that with only a few Aiha dead, the vast majority would flock to him. And even clan leader loyalists
Speaker A
like Inho would rebel. Indeed, the Aiha are a bunch of stubborn fools who never look back until they hit the wall. Only by making them truly bleed and feel pain will they genuinely be willing to listen to you. Now it seems the gains are
Speaker A
substantial. At the very least among the entire Aiha clan, aside from a few faction elders in power and their close associates, almost everyone has now defected to him. As for whether these people were spies, Aihajene was not worried at all. The Aiha simply lacked
Speaker A
the brains for that. Even Sher Sway and Itachi who were bought by Saratobi Herusen in the original story and considered geniuses of the Aiha couldn't. They even managed to conceal their emotions on a daily basis. In the original story, the Aiha clan members
Speaker A
all knew that these two stood with the Hokag. Their undercover work was essentially a joke. This is actually one benefit of being born into the Aiha.
Speaker A
There's basically no need to worry about spies within the clan because the Aiha's character determines that they simply can't do such work. Even if someone genuinely wanted to be a spy, they would be itching to carve the word spy on
Speaker A
their forehead. Elder Jiu is looking for you. Aihao walked in and kneeling respectfully on one knee. His eyes were filled with adoration and fervor with no thought of hiding his emotions. Aiha seeing this couldn't help but smile and
Speaker A
say, "Long Yen, get up. We were teammates before, so there's no need for such formalities with me. You know, I don't have many rigid rules here. So from now on, don't keep kneeling to me.
Speaker A
I know you respect me, but in my view, respect is in the heart. As for these outward rules, except for formal occasions, don't bother with them in daily life." Aihalong Yian upon hearing this admired Gene even more. After all,
Speaker A
a person who is strong in strength, methods, and character, yet so gentle with subordinates. Such a leader is far superior to Fagaku. In fact, it wasn't just him. Even Achiha Inho was astonished. No help for it. His impression of Aiha was still dominated
Speaker A
by the doineering attitude at the clan meeting. This was the first time he saw the others private side. Elder Gene, be careful. Our members in the village saw that Fugaku is also at the Hokag building now, so I think this visit
Speaker A
bodess ill. Achihalong Yian said in a deep voice because of Achiha Jyn's rise to power the radical faction was now completely different from the original story. Not only was their base heavily guarded, but they had also deployed many
Speaker A
spies throughout the village. Whether it was the Hokag building the route or the various ninja clans, as long as there were any signs of trouble, Aiha Jeene could now grasp them immediately. This was why just as the U had arrived, Aiha
Speaker A
Long could easily obtain intelligence from the Hokag building without any effort. And as for this, Ajiha smiled, but didn't take it seriously. Don't worry, it's nothing. I roughly know what Saratobi Horizon is up to. Lion, there's no need to worry about my
Speaker A
safety. During my absence from the base, make sure to protect it well. At this moment, Aiha Jins face was as calm as ever. Saratobi Herusen's political tactics were too low-level. The ninja world had only established the one village, one country system a few
Speaker A
decades ago. So although Herusen's methods seemed decent for Achihajene who in his previous life came from China, as soon as Saratobi Herusen pulled down his pants, he knew what kind of fart he wanted to let out. 15 minutes later at
Speaker A
the Hokag's office, Aiha knocked on the door and entered only after receiving permission. His face was full of a gentle smile. When he saw Saratobi Harusen, his eyes narrowed slightly, but he still spoke very politely. Hokasuma, do you have any orders for me? His words
Speaker A
were quite humble. However, his body posture was extremely rude. He didn't even kneel on one knee and there was no trace of respect in his eyes. This was normal. They had already torn apart the pretense last time. If not for the fact
Speaker A
that neither side could kill the other without injury, they would have already overturned the table and started a civil war. So, it was enough to barely get by on the surface. Oh, one shouldn't expect much respect from Aiha. Fagaka's face
Speaker A
darkened. Seeing the utterly disrespectful Aihajene, he wanted to slap him to death. But considering the others terrifying power, he could only sigh helplessly and pretend not to see it. no help for it. As a clan leader with no real power, he really couldn't
Speaker A
do anything about Ajiha. Although he had also awakened the Mangeko, his indecisive nature made him afraid to reveal it lest he incur even greater suspicion from the leaf's higher-ups.
Speaker A
Now that he had lost even his clan authority, he was even less confident to move against Achihajene. So, he chose to endure. Since he had endured for so long, naturally, he could endure this one more time. Saratobi Herusen twitched
Speaker A
his mouth. He was naturally also displeased with Aiha before him. So when he saw the anger in Fagaka's eyes, his eyes lit up thinking, could this guy be about to stand up for once? That would be a good thing. That bastard Aiha
Speaker A
indeed needed a lesson. Even if Fagaku wasn't his match, making Aiha lose face would be good. However, unfortunately, he saw a Toby Herusen had already settled in to watch the show. But you Fagaku suddenly went soft again. Damn
Speaker A
it, a complete waste. What the hell can I expect from you? After all this, I have to do it myself. In an instant, Herusen Saratobi mentally cursed Fagaku with every vile word imaginable, even beginning to suspect that he had
Speaker A
miscalculated his own scheme. Could this fool Fagaku truly contain Achihajene? Yes. Because of Jyn's rise, he had long regarded Fagaku as an ally, planning to use the Hokag's authority to bolster him against Gene. But damn it, though he had
Speaker A
known Fagaku was inept, he never imagined the man could be this pathetic. So now he couldn't help but wonder, could this hopeless fool really trigger a civil war within the Aiah? difficult, far too difficult. He grew pessimistic about this idea. Yet at the same time,
Speaker A
was there any other choice within the Aiha besides Fagaku? Undoubtedly, no. Shers was a good pawn, and his strength was considerable. But he was far too naive, especially since he was Kagami's grandson, naturally viewed with hostility by the Aiha, and his closeness
Speaker A
to Herusen made the clan reject him outright. Though loyal to Huen, Shersu, was not suited to lead a faction. He could only be a blade, not a commander.
Speaker A
So Sai, it seemed he had no choice. To split the Aiha, he had to rely on the Fugaka before him. No alternative.
Speaker A
Danzo, that black gloved operative, refused to do dirty work. Even when it came to the Sharinggon, he wouldn't target the radicals. So to stop Achihaja Jyn's rise, even if Fugaku was a piece of mud, he had to be propped up. With
Speaker A
this thought, Herusen let out a soft sigh. What a disaster. The very idea of alying with someone like Fagaku made him feel utterly disgusted. Finally, after glancing at the completely calm, resigned Fagaka, Herusen, turned to Aiha Jin. Jinkin, do you know that Kenoha is
Speaker A
in chaos? I don't know, Aiha replied flatly. And I'm not interested. I'm just a freelance ninja. I stay in the clan grounds when not on missions, and I pay no attention to the outside world.
Speaker A
Herusen's forehead veins bulged. Freelance ninja? Are you kidding me? You who have sidelined the clan leader, Fugaku, and practically taken over the Aihan now claim to be a freelance ninja.
Speaker A
But he took a deep breath and said in a low tone, "Stop joking, Jen Kuan. You are the leader of the radical faction.
Speaker A
If you were just a freelance ninja, then what are the other ninjas of Kenoha?" However, Aiha Jins expression remained unchanged, and he merely shrugged. "Hokage sama, I don't quite understand what you mean. Radical faction, never heard of it. I'm just a
Speaker A
freelance ninja. I hold no official position, and I haven't even joined the police force." Herusen's face darkened instantly. This Achiha Jeene simply refused to take the bait, making his punch land on Cotton, leaving him unsure of what to do next. No choice. Because
Speaker A
if he stuck to the official records, Aiha Gene hadn't lied. The so-called Aiha radical faction was not a registered organization in Kenoha. It was merely a private group within the clan. As long as Gene denied it, Husen had no handle. According to official
Speaker A
records, Aihaene was an ordinary tunin, one of many freelance ninjas. His team had died in the third great ninja war.
Speaker A
And considering the Achiha's peculiar situation, each battle took many lives, but also awakened many Sharinggon. Under his orders, the Aiha were confined to Kenoha, no longer allowed to freely take missions. And that was precisely why Aiha Jyn's official rank was only Chunin
Speaker A
promoted for his battlefield contributions. Jonin, huh? Koho's Jonin were not cheap. They were a privileged class with voting rights. How could he possibly hand that to Aiha? So trouble.
Speaker A
From a purely official standpoint, he had no grounds to blame Aiha, blaming the chaos of Kinoa's villagers on a tunin. If that got out his reputation as Hokag would be ruined. Aihajin. Herusen crushed his pipe in his hand, his voice
Speaker A
turning icy. In response, Aiha remained calm. He looked at Harusen with eyes full of contempt and faint disdain. As someone who had come from the land of flowers in his past life, he knew well that every shortcut in this world came
Speaker A
with a hidden price. Rights and responsibilities must be equal. That was an iron law. Since he refused to grant him the rank of Jonan for your own schemes, then don't try to pin the blame on him. That was precisely why Aihaene
Speaker A
had never been angry about not being promoted to Jonan, nor had he sought a way around it. Because he knew that strength was paramount as long as he was strong enough being Jonan or not didn't matter. On the contrary, since he didn't
Speaker A
hold that rank, he couldn't be held responsible. Even if he was the elder of the Achiha radical faction, even if the clan secretly obeyed him, even if the vill's police force collapsed into chaos, Herusen could not make him take
Speaker A
the blame. Because officially, he was just a tunin. Since Husen had blocked his promotion to Jonan, now it was time for the Hokag to pay the price. Hokag sama, don't get upset. Let's talk things over slowly. Anger harms the body. Do
Speaker A
you need this Junin to carry out a mission? But what a pity. I don't even have a team now. So, according to Canoa's rules, I can only take C-rank missions at most. Has someone lost a cat? Need a babysitter or perhaps a
Speaker A
river to clean. I am ready to contribute to Kenoa. Please give me a mission.
Speaker A
Hokag sama. Aiha Jeene smiled slightly. His tone was calm. But everyone could hear the mockery. Yes. As a registered tunin without a team, he could only perform C- rank missions. Even if Koha wanted to trap him, it was impossible.
Speaker A
He wasn't even qualified for B-rank missions. Hirusen trembled all over. This Aiha jeene was utterly frustrating.
Speaker A
The kid was too slippery. No wonder he had never applied for the Jonan exam, never asked for a new team, nor joined the police force. He had been completely indifferent from the start. So this was his true aim. Saratobi Herusen fell into
Speaker A
silence. Gazing at Aiha before him, he felt like a dog trying to bite a turtle.
Speaker A
No way to start. After a long silence, he finally spoke. Let's be straightforward. What exactly do you want to restore the police department?
Speaker A
That kind of thing. You'll have to ask our clan leader. Aiha directly passed the buck. Fagaka's gaze was very displeased and he wanted to scold him several times. I damn well want to take charge, but no one listens to me.
Speaker A
However, considering that he is a titular clan leader had no deterrence against Achiha Jeene, he finally sighed and chose to give up. I can't do anything either. The others don't listen to me. Saratobi Haruen's face turned grim. The matter had come full circle.
Speaker A
Fugaku wanted to resolve it but lacked the ability. The uchiha below him didn't listen to him. Aihaene had the ability to solve it but he didn't want to. And crucially, he held no official position.
Speaker A
So even the Hokag couldn't punish him. This matter was stuck and difficult to handle. But the village's security had to be resolved. So after a moment of thought, he revealed a faint smile.
Speaker A
Jinku in your rank indeed needs to be raised. After all, a strong man like you shouldn't stay as a tunin forever. I hereby specially promote you to Jonan of the village and have Fagaku hand over the position of police chief to you. How
Speaker A
about it? Saratobi Herus's mind was clear. The reason he couldn't deal with Achihajin now was that this guy's rank was too low. And fearing to provoke the entire Aiha clan, he couldn't punish all of them. On the contrary, if he could
Speaker A
raise Aiha Jyn's rank, then in the future, if Achiha didn't do his duty, he is Hokag would have the right to punish him. But unfortunately, what he could think of Achiha was not stupid either.
Speaker A
Without any hesitation, he directly shook his head. Lord Hokage, you just my abilities are lacking you. I doubt I can pass the Jonan exam. Better to forget the special promotion. Oh, it's too unfair to other ninjas. Armi upholds the
Speaker A
will of fire. Everything should be fair and just. Lord Hokag, you must set an example. Aiha Jyn Jins tone was calm. But hearing this, Saratobi Herusen nearly burst with rage. Wool of fire. Is that something aiha like you has the
Speaker A
right to say? He wanted to curse aloud, even strike Aiha Jin dead with his staff. But no, he couldn't even counterattack Achiha Jyn's last words had completely checkmated him. As the Hokag, he had to uphold the will of
Speaker A
fire. This was the foundation of his entire tenure as hokage. So with Aiha Jyn's words, he completely lost any possibility of forcing Gene into the position. According to Mai's rules to become a Jonin, the first step is for
Speaker A
the individual to voluntarily apply. That was the bottleneck. Of course, special appointment was also possible, but that required the individual to have rendered great merits which Aihaene did not have. If it were promoting one's own people, it would be easy to manipulate.
Speaker A
Aihajene, he was not one of them. Saratobi Herusen truly feared that if he forcibly promoted Gene to Jon and now Jeene would immediately take to the streets and claimed that the Hokag lacked the will of fire. So Sai after a
Speaker A
helpless Sai Saratobi Haruen understood very clearly. If he wanted to get rid of this aiha gene, he would have to rely on sheer strength to kill him directly. The difficulty of trapping him through rules was too high. He didn't understand. This
Speaker A
guy was clearly aha. Why was he more shrewd in political maneuvering than himself? Finally, Saratobi Herusen shook his head helplessly, then put down his pipe. What conditions do you have? Just state them directly. Mai's security must be restored immediately. There is no
Speaker A
room for negotiation. Otherwise, if Mai is completely torn apart, I think the other ninja clans and civilians will not let the Aiha off either. Of course, if you are ready to tear off the mask and start a civil war now, then I Saratobi
Speaker A
Haruen will readily accompany you. These words were extremely doineering. And looking at the Saratobi Herusen before him, Aiha Jyn's eyes flickered. He seemed to truly see the former ninja hero. However, just as he was about to speak, Fagako anxiously interjected. Jin
Speaker A
Kuen, stop messing around. The security issue of Mai is not a bargaining chip. It is our Aiha's responsibility. You must shoulder this responsibility. Aiha Jyn's mouth twitched. Looking at Fagaku, he really wanted to slap him to death.
Speaker A
Couldn't he see that he was negotiating with Saratobi Herusen? But he took a deep breath and helplessly shrugged, "You're good. You do it. You're the clan leader. You call the shots. I'll just wash my hands. All right. Hearing this,
Speaker A
Fagaku was dumbfounded. If I damn well had any power, would I let you mess around here? Meanwhile, on the other side, Saratobi Herusen looked at the suddenly appearing Fugaku. Although he also agreed with his foolish remarks in his heart, he knew that Fugaku's words
Speaker A
didn't carry weight in the clan now. So, bang. Saratobi Herusen slapped the table. Fagaka, shut up, Fagaku. He looked at the furious Zaratobi Husen, feeling extremely agrieved. I'm on your side. And to this, Saratobi Herusen couldn't be bothered to respond and
Speaker A
directly addressed Aiha. Gene continued. Feel free to state any demands. As long as I can fulfill them for the sake of my security, I will agree to all of them.
Speaker A
Aiha nodded. This was the right way to negotiate. That fool Fagaku really didn't understand a thing, just causing trouble. His mind began to race, and after a moment, his eyes suddenly lit up. After clearing his throat, he spoke
Speaker A
slowly, "Lord Hokag." Originally as a tune, it's indeed not appropriate for me to get involved in such major matters.
Speaker A
But since Lord Hokag thinks highly of me for the sake of Mai's will of fire, I am still willing to do my best to resolve this. However, right now within the Aiha clan, the resentment is extremely great.
Speaker A
If I cannot give them some benefits, I truly have the heart, but not the strength. So, I certainly need Lord Hokag's assistance. Saratobi Herusen's eyes were obscure. He had a new respect for Aiha Jeene. Clearly, Gene wanted something for himself. Yet, he
Speaker A
deliberately wrapped it in the guise of the will of fire. This tactic was indeed not bad. But at this moment, he saw Fagaku about to speak again and immediately felt a headache coming on.
Speaker A
This Fagaka, why is he so stupid? He quickly stopped Fagaku. Fagaka, shut up. From now on, don't speak. Fagaku, who was about to open his mouth to scold Aihaji, was stunned by Saratobi Huan's rebuke. At this moment, Saratobi Herusen
Speaker A
ignored him and said with utmost seriousness, "What do you want? It's not what I want, but what the clansmen need.
Speaker A
Aiha retorted. Saratobi Herusen somewhat exasperated. Fine. What do the Aiha clansmen need? The original clan grounds. Achihajene without any nonsense. The plot to the left of the Hokag building. That is the Aiha clan grounds before the Ninetailes incident.
Speaker A
If Lord Hokage is willing to return the clan grounds, then I have the confidence to completely resolve this matter. A sharp hiss. As Aiha spoke, the entire Hokag's office fell into a silence so profound that even a pin drop could be
Speaker A
heard. Hirusen Suratobi's eyes grew obscure as he began puffing heavily on his pipe. His mind racing with frantic calculations. Aiha Jeene remained impassive, standing there with an air of nonchilence, as if utterly unconcerned by the scene unfolding before him.
Speaker A
Pagaka's expression was a mixture of complexity. His gaze at Aiha was filled with terror and dread. Though he had dreamed of reclaiming the Achiha clan's ancestral land, he had only dared to entertain such a thought in the deepest
Speaker A
recesses of his mind. For he knew it was utterly impossible. Once the meat was swallowed by Kenoa's F4, how could they ever be willing to spit it out? The Aiha clan lacked the strength and were despised within the village. Achieving
Speaker A
this in a lifetime was beyond reach. But now Ajihajene had laid this matter on the table. Instead of feeling joy, Fagaka's first reaction was a bone deep dread and terror. What if the village's high-ranking officials turned hostile?
Speaker A
The current tension between the Aiha clan and the village was already precarious if this matter pushed them into outright enmity disaster would be inevitable. Thus, without a moment's hesitation, he immediately spoke. Lord Hokag, absolutely not. The Aiha clan has
Speaker A
no intention of reclaiming the ancestral lands. This is all Aiha Jyn's wild fabrication. Please do not take it seriously. Fagaka's tone was resolute.
Speaker A
In his view, maintaining the relationship between the Aiha clan and the village was paramount. At the very least, they should find a way to ease the tension. Aihajene was too radical.
Speaker A
He would never agree. On the other side, Achihaene remained expressionless watching Fugaku's terrified face with eyes full of disdain and mockery.
Speaker A
However, he did not retort, merely said with a light laugh, "Clan leader Fagaku is quite right. I am only a mere tunin, though perhaps I cannot truly grasp the village's grand strategy." Then regarding matters of persuading the Aiha
Speaker A
clan, I'm afraid I must plead incompetence. After all, I'm just a tunin. Aihajins logic was simple.
Speaker A
If you are not in a position, you do not plan its affairs. Since he could not be granted benefits nor held any official duty, there was no need to pressure him.
Speaker A
Herusen Suratobi. He let out a soft sigh. He was quite pleased with Fugaku's submission. If only all Aiha were of such a caliber, how wonderful that would be. But unfortunately, that was not the case. Though he was satisfied with
Speaker A
Fagaku's weakness, the Achiha clan leader held little sway within the clan itself. As for the Aiha ancestral land, to be honest, that area was indeed prosperous, but it had long belonged to the Soratobi clan. Yet at the same time,
Speaker A
that piece of land was not highly valued by Herisen Saratobi, having served as Hokag for decades. The Saratobi clan had grown wealthy and powerful. The original decision to relocate the Aiha clan was primarily to contain them. that location
Speaker A
was too close to the bustling center of the village and too near the major ninja clans, especially the Saratobi. He feared that if the Achiha were pushed to the brink, they would rise up and annihilate the Saratobi clan first. Now,
Speaker A
however, things were different. Though the Achiha were becoming increasingly troublesome, Herusen Saratobi could see that Aiha gene was a man of considerable intellect. Such a person would not erupt unless forced into a corner. Under these circumstances, returning the ancestral
Speaker A
land to the Aiha was something he could reluctantly accept. After all, compared to that piece of land, he was more concerned about the village's public order. Recently, due to the deteriorating security complaints had been directed at him as the Hokag.
Speaker A
Therefore, let the Achiha go back to that cespool. With this thought, he nodded directly. Very well, I agree. I will vacate the land within 3 days. The Aiha clan must restore the village's security immediately. Aiha, any problem?
Speaker A
Hirus and Saratobi was quite straightforward. He was not inclined to haggle over such trivial matters.
Speaker A
Restoring the village's basic order and letting the Aiha sink into that cesspool continuing to absorb the village's resentment. That was his primary concern. In response, Aihaene nodded.
Speaker A
Since the Hokag is so generous, I feel reassured. In 3 days, the village's security will be restored. 3 days. Hirus and Saratobi's eyes grew obscure. One day, I'll vacate the place in one day.
Speaker A
Hutihajene shrugged. Then I'll also take just one day. Having said that, he ignored Herus and Soratobi and turned to leave. Respect, not necessary. The two sides had long since torn off all pretense. It was only because neither had the ability to eliminate the other
Speaker A
without cost that they barely maintained a shred of face. As for his rudess, Herusen Saratobi pretended not to notice. Compared to having Danzo killed countless times right in front of him, such discourtesy was nothing but child's play. On the contrary, he glanced at
Speaker A
Fugaku, whose face was a mix of fear and a hint of joy and a flicker of disdain passed through his eyes. Fagaku, you may leave as well. Yes, Lord Hokag. Fagaka bowed hastily. He left the Hokag's office with a respectful demeanor, still
Speaker A
not fully registering what had happened even as he returned to the clan grounds. Was it really that simple? At that moment, he could not comprehend it.
Speaker A
After all, in his view, Aihaene had been too [clears throat] arrogant. How could the village tolerate such insolence? But the outcome left him bewildered. Hiru and Saratobi had not even bargained agreeing so easily that it felt like a
Speaker A
dream. Was it truly that he himself was too lacking and Achihajin too exceptional? No, absolutely not. Though Aiha had reclaimed the clan's land, he had deeply offended Hirusen Saratobi.
Speaker A
Such behavior was wrong. The Aiha clan should now humble themselves and do everything possible to ease the relationship with the village. Aihajin's approach was more like courting destruction. Back at home, Makoto greeted him directly. Fagaka, how did it
Speaker A
go? Was the Hokag angry? Is the matter settled? Faga's face was dark and irritable. He was in no mood to talk to Makoto and asked directly, "Where is Anabi?" "I haven't seen him." Mikoto shook her head. Fugaku's expression
Speaker A
darkened. And Nabi, his most trusted subordinate, was usually always by his side. It seemed he had not been seen since today. After a brief thought, Fagaka said, "I'm going out for a while." Makoto wanted to say something, but seeing Fugaku already leaving, she
Speaker A
could only sigh and turned back inside. Meanwhile, Fagaku searched the clan grounds for a long time before learning from a moderate elder that Anabi had taken his sister and defected to Aihajin. Upon hearing this, Fagaka's face darkened. Anger, frustration,
Speaker A
bewilderment, and grievance. A complex array of emotions flickered in his eyes. Finally, he spoke to the elder before him. Help me notify our people.
Speaker A
Well have a brief meeting at my house later. We are in trouble. Half an hour elapsed. In the reception hall of the clan leader residence, the Aiha, who had not yet joined the radical faction, were now all seated in the meeting hall,
Speaker A
murmuring among themselves. Their expressions were clearly grim. Fagaka was the same. Although the reception hall seemed crowded, this was the entirety of his support. Most were moderates, and those he could truly command could be counted on one hand.
Speaker A
Alas, he let out a sigh. A month ago, he could still command with authority. How had things come to this? All right, Fagaku, everyone is here. Speak your mind directly. The speaker was Achiha Yoshiro, one of the moderate elders,
Speaker A
inclined to concede to the village and integrate. Now that the situation within the Aiha clan had deteriorated, frankly, his mood had been sour. The clansmen who once trusted him now numbered only a handful. If not for Fagaka's claim of a
Speaker A
major matter, he truly had no desire to come. The others remained silent. By now, everyone had lost respect for Fugaku. After all, he was merely a commander without troops. Though he still bore the title of clan leader, no
Speaker A
one took him seriously. Fugaku. His face was so dark it seemed to drip water, his fists clenched in fury. He hated this.
Speaker A
If only he had known Aiha would turn out so disastrously, he would have killed him at all costs when he first rose. Now too late. Taking a deep breath, he forcibly suppressed this thought and spoke in a grave tone that Aihaene has
Speaker A
reclaimed our ancestral land. This hearing Fagaku's words, everyone drew in a sharp breath. But before the crowd could recover from the shock, Fagaku as clan leader spoke again. But this is absolutely not a good thing. Everyone knows the relationship between the Aiha
Speaker A
and the village. Forcing the village to return that land will only heighten tensions. So Aiha, we cannot let Achiha continue his reckless behavior. We must find a way to stop his foolish actions.
Speaker A
We have barely managed to ease relations with the village. We cannot let Achihajene destroy everything. However, unfortunately, even though Fagaku shouted passionately, the atmosphere was dead silent. Everyone remained silent.
Speaker A
No one spoke. Fagaka was stunned. He couldn't understand why everyone had no reaction. After a long while, as Fagaka's face grew darker, the neutral elder Achihashimi side and spoke reluctantly. I admit what you say is very true, but the problem is we cannot
Speaker A
stop it. Indeed, there's no one left. Aiha Yashiro also nodded slowly. Fagaku accepted. Except for the people in this room, everyone else has joined the radical faction. Even if we wanted to resist, we have no strength to do so. As
Speaker A
they spoke, Fagaka's heart sank deeper. The previously silent Aiha Sherho couldn't help muttering. I told you before, Fagaka, we should have adopted defensive measures similar to the radical faction. But you hesitated and refused. You think of the bigger
Speaker A
picture, but the people below don't understand. They only know that if they don't join the radical faction, death awaits them. Everyone present spoke up.
Speaker A
They all had grievances against Fugaku. If not for his lack of responsibility as clan leader, they wouldn't have been abandoned by most. The last one, Aiha Tinya, the grand elder of the Achiha, who dated back to the era of Achiadara,
Speaker A
had long retired to live at home. Now he existed merely as a mascot. But this time, he also spoke, "I do not hate those clansmen who joined the radical faction. They simply want to survive.
Speaker A
Since you Fagaku as clan leader cannot protect their safety, don't blame them for choosing to join the radical faction. Don't talk about the greater good of the Acha. If you were truly selfless, would you be willing to send
Speaker A
your wife and children directly to Tuan Song in exchange for the ordinary clansmen? Why haven't the people here joined the radical faction? It's not for the sake of the Aiha. It's simply because we have the strength, but we are
Speaker A
not afraid of the roots assassination visits. I am tired. Since Aiha gene now represents the prevailing trend, I and Aiha will also join the radical faction.
Speaker A
As for you, Fugaku, I give you a final piece of advice. You are always hesitant. The Aiha fell into this predicament because of your hesitation.
Speaker A
Back then, the Achiha had chosen to fully support the fourth Hokag Bofong Shuer Men. But when Bofong Shuer Min truly fell into trouble, you because of Tuan Songs obstruction, missed the chance to rescue him, leading the clan into this plight. You are truly unfit to
Speaker A
be clan leader. I advise you to step down voluntarily. That's all I have to say. Farewell. After saying this, Aihhati and I stood up unsteadily, taking a few people with him, and left straight away, heading to join the
Speaker A
radical faction. The reception hall fell into dead silence. Everyone sank into silence. No one spoke again. Fagaka's face was grim. Aihhati and I had torn open the truth. He least wanted to face the Aiha had fallen into this situation
Speaker A
precisely because of his earlier hesitation. But likewise, he absolutely refused to acknowledge Aiha Jyn's ideas.
Speaker A
In his view, Aiha was far too radical. If the Aiha were led by him, they would surely be completely annihilated. At this moment, Aiha Yoshiro also chose to stand up. Everyone, I too shall take my leave. Although I don't fully approve of
Speaker A
Aiha, I have thought carefully during this period. Whether it was the route and Ubu choosing to retreat or his proactive defense, it has indeed ensured the safety of our clansmen. Now he has even reclaimed the Aiha ancestral land.
Speaker A
I think I should try to trust Aiha. Although his actions are somewhat radical, they have indeed changed the Aiha's passive situation. Perhaps following Aiha gene will lead to clan extinction, but it's better than living in humiliation. I Aiha Yashiro also have
Speaker A
blood in my veins. I would rather die standing than live on my knees. After saying this, Aiha Yoshiro left directly and those who followed him also left. As the two elders left, many others stood up one after another, eventually
Speaker A
choosing to join the radical faction. In the end, only Fagaku, the clan leader, Aiha Sherho, Aihashimi, and three subordinates totaling 13 Aiha Jonan remained. Fagaka's face grew even more grim. The murderous intent in his eyes intensified. Aiha. Because of this
Speaker A
bastard, he had truly become a commander without troops. Suddenly, at this very moment, Sheru, who had just finished his shift, entered. Seeing the empty room, Shers couldn't help but speak. Clan leader, where are the others? Weren't we supposed to hold a meeting to decide how
Speaker A
to stop Aiha and the radical faction? Where are the other elders? In the reception hall, there was a dead silence. No one answered Sher Sui's question. Not even Fagaka spoke. The reason? It was simply shameful. A clan leader betrayed by almost all his
Speaker A
clansmen. He had set a precedent for the Aiha. They've all defected to the radical faction. Aiha Siming spoke coldly. Then he cast a complex glance at Shirsu, then ignored Fagaku. I feel this meeting is meaningless. Though I'm unwilling to join the radical faction, I
Speaker A
also refuse to acknowledge you, Fagaku, as the clan leader. You are a complete failure. Elder Tiana is right. I advise you to resign voluntarily. From today, I will not recognize your orders as clan leader. You'd better fend for yourself
Speaker A
from now on. After saying that Aiha Siming left with his subordinates, having apparently completely abandoned Fagaku, Achiha Seong also departed. He did not mock Fagaku, but his implication was clear he would not recognize Fagaku as the clan leader in the future, almost
Speaker A
in an instant. The entire reception room became completely empty. Aside from Fagaku and Shiru, only three of Fagaka's loyalists remained. Clan leader, are you all right? Shers found it hard to hold back his eyes filled with sympathy. In
Speaker A
response, Fagaka took a deep breath and forced a smile. Shir Sui, you must be amused. No, I just shui tried to explain, but before he could finish, Fagaku interrupted. Shirui, you're not good at comforting others, and I don't
Speaker A
need comfort. Let's talk about business. I suppose you've heard about the ancestral land. Shers nodded his face heavy. Though he desperately wanted to reclaim the Aiha's ancestral land, he didn't want to resort to Aiha Jyns methods. In his view, the situation
Speaker A
between the Aiha and the village was already extremely tense. He had done his best to maintain it, but unfortunately he had encountered that mad man Aiha Jin. This left him utterly helpless. The fruits of his hard-earned efforts were
Speaker A
destroyed by Achiha Jyn's casual actions. So alas, after a helpless Saiway spoke in a grave tone, clan leader, you are right. This is definitely not a good thing. We must stop it. Yes, that's good. Fugaku nodded solemnly. Let's go together. We
Speaker A
must convince Aiha. He cannot be allowed to ruin this favorable situation. Shers nodded without refusing. Then the two, having made up their minds, naturally didn't hesitate and went straight to the radical factions base. Then they were stunned. The radical factions base
Speaker A
before them was peaceful and tranquil with smiles on every face in the streets, something that had never been possible in the old Aha compound. Due to the vill's oppression and Fugaku's inaction, the Aiha clansmen had naturally been living in fear. But now
Speaker A
they actually saw this in the radical factions base, which they found hard to accept for a moment. No impossible.
Speaker A
These must be fake. with Aiha being so radical. How could the clansmen be so peaceful? I don't believe it. It's all fake. Fagaka's voice was horse's eyes filled with disbelief. Yes, in his original imagination, these clansmen should have been numb. Especially under
Speaker A
Achihajin's leadership, they should have been worse off than before. It was only natural that the radical faction didn't know how to govern. But now, the genuine smiles radiating from the clansmen felt particularly dazzling to him. More importantly, if they were so happy
Speaker A
following the radical faction, would they still acknowledge him as their clan leader in the future? His fears soon became reality. As soon as he spoke, it instantly drew the attention of all the Aiha on the street. However, upon seeing
Speaker A
Fagaku, not a single person greeted him. Instead, as if encountering something filthy, they all began to flee into the distance. Fagaka's face turned even darker. Shers was also astonished by this scene, but he quickly took a deep breath. Clan leader, take it easy. This
Speaker A
is all temporary, just an elucory piece. Our path is the right one. Only by reconciling with the village and truly integrating the Achiha into it can we achieve lasting peace. Fugaku came to his senses at Sher Suer's consolation.
Speaker A
Right. This was only a false peace. The village's power was too strong. Only through consiliation could there be a way out. Don't be fooled by the radical factions apparent prosperity now the rift between them and the village is
Speaker A
growing wider. If this continues, they will inevitably face annihilation. Meanwhile, on the other side, in Aiha Jyn's small courtyard, everyone was also holding a meeting in the yard. There was no choice. His courtyard was small to begin with, and Aiha Jyn was not one for
Speaker A
luxury. Moreover, with all the problems between the village and the clan, he had no mind to expand his courtyard.
Speaker A
Previously, it hadn't seemed like a problem. But now, with more and more people under his command, it naturally became inadequate. For instance, when they wanted to hold a meeting, everyone had to gather in the yard. Recovering the ancestral land this time was
Speaker A
actually a coincidence. I didn't expect that the clansman's assistance in moving would coincidentally disrupt the police force's work which gave Saratobi Herusen a headache leading him to exchange the ancestral land for the Aiha's return to the police force. So this time the
Speaker A
credit belongs to everyone. Aiha Jeene spoke with a smile. At this moment he sat at the head seat announcing the results to everyone. Upon hearing this almost everyone present let out exclamations of surprise. It was truly hard-earned. After all losing the
Speaker A
ancestral land was a pain for almost all Aiha. But this time Aihajene had brought it back. This skyrocketed everyone's support for Achihajene immeasurably for compared to Fagaku who failed at everything Aihaene was the king worthy of their trust. As for the claim that
Speaker A
the credit belonged to everyone, they didn't actually agree. Because if Fagaku had been in this situation, the result would have been to make everyone suffer and then obediently go back to work. He wouldn't have dared to make any demands
Speaker A
of the Hokag. Elder Gene, thank you so much. Please don't flatter us. We have no credit at all. Without a reliable leader, no matter how hard we work, it's meaningless. If it were Fagaka, the Aiha would definitely have to bow their
Speaker A
heads. Yes, right. And probably even apologize. It was clearly because Danzo assassinated us Aiha. Yet, Fagaka didn't dare to resist or even defend. Could we expect him to demand our ancestral land from Kenoha? The people present all spoke up. The entire courtyard instantly
Speaker A
became an ocean of joy. Unlike Fugaku and Sherui who were hesitant and overthinking since Aiha Jin had the ability, they would just follow his orders. Aiha Jyn's smile grew even more radiant. But then he raised his hand to
Speaker A
stop them. Let's enjoy the moment, but we must return to reality. The Aiha situation is already unfavorable. We'll need everyone's even greater efforts in the future. So, let's talk about business. I haven't been paying attention to the village recently. Does
Speaker A
anyone know the current situation? After the Aiha police force was disbanded, how chaotic has the village become? Aiha was quite curious. He rarely walked through the village and only when attending the ninja academy in the past would he
Speaker A
briefly pass through the village streets. Yet, he seldom visited any shops. After graduation, he went straight to the front lines. Later, when his teammates fell in battle, he was ordered back to the village and had remained within the Aiha compound ever
Speaker A
since. There was no helping it. The Aiha were too deeply resented, and he couldn't bear those judgmental gazes.
Speaker A
Only someone like the pre-darkness Aido, that simple-minded fool, could remain indifferent to such things. Though he occasionally visited the Hokag's office these days, he never really paid attention to the shifting conditions on the streets. And so now, upon learning
Speaker A
that the absence of the police force had plunged all of Kenoha into chaos, he found himself genuinely intrigued. Elder Gi know about this. The matter started because everyone has been busy these past few days. After all, to relocate
Speaker A
their entire families into our radical faction, not only did they need to pack up their valuables, but even furniture like tables, chairs, and beds couldn't be left behind. So, it's been quite troublesome. Therefore, in order to accomplish this as quickly as possible,
Speaker A
everyone could only request leave using excuses like physical discomfort or family matters. At that point, the police force was already stretched thin.
Speaker A
I myself only chose to join the radical faction later after being worn down by my family's constant nagging. So, I have a fairly good understanding of the changes within the police force. The streets have now fallen into complete
Speaker A
disorder. Because of the police force's absence, all sorts of thugs and ruffians have crawled out of the woodwork, and incidents of theft and robbery have become frequent, especially since these bastards know the police force isn't on duty lately. Their methods have become
Speaker A
even more reckless than before. Coupled with disputes among merchants and neighbors that no longer have the police force to mediate the level of chaos in Kenoha has skyrocketed. Among them, some scoundrels from the various noble clans have taken advantage of the situation to
Speaker A
coersse and deceive in cases of encroaching upon civilian assets have increased considerably. So, the streets right now are truly chaotic in every sense of the word. Alder gene, my name is Aihhat Takashi, a former member of the moderate faction. Though I've only
Speaker A
recently joined the radical faction, I hold great admiration for your governance. I'm quite comfortable here in the radical faction. Not only do I no longer have to worry about assassination attempts from Danzo's route on a daily basis, but my family can also
Speaker A
sleep soundly at night. Under your command, we've repeatedly rested benefits from Kenoa's grasp. Compared to that unreliable clan head, Fagaki, your actions have truly given me hope. So from this day forward, I offer you my loyalty. Aiha Takashi spoke with solemn
Speaker A
gravity. Following his declaration, everyone present voiced their willingness to pledge loyalty to Aiha Jin as well. And to this Achiha Jins eyes curved with a smile. It would be a lie to say he wasn't pleased.
Speaker A
His judgment had indeed been correct. If he had originally tried to persuade these people through words alone, he would never have been able to unite the Aiha into a single force for under the deliberate sabotage of Kenoha's higher-ups. The internal factional
Speaker A
strife within the Aiha clan was far too acute. And now, simply by letting these people taste blood after only a few Aiha had died, they were thoroughly awakened.
Speaker A
Of course, he still had two people to thank. First was Danzo. Had it not been for his assassination attempts, these people would never have flocked to him.
Speaker A
Second was Fagaku. Had it not been for that fool implementing his non-resistance and non-defense strategy, the moderate and neutral factions of the Aiha would never have become utterly disillusioned with Fugaku ultimately choosing to defect to Jyn's side.
Speaker A
Everyone, by all rights, I should offer some modest words of refusal, but given the internal and external troubles facing the Aiha, we must unite as one.
Speaker A
Therefore, I will shamelessly accept your loyalty. However, I must still tell you all the situation for the Aiha remains extremely grave. Externally, we are targeted by the Hokag and the higher-ups, especially that old dog Danzo. Internally, clan head Fagaku and
Speaker A
Shers are pulling us back. Thus, our next moves must remain cautious and prudent. Aiha spoke with a serious tone.
Speaker A
Indeed, though his actions seemed effective for now, each time managing to tear a piece of flesh from Husen Saratob's jaws, but likewise, the Achiha situation remained perilous. Herus and Soratobi was a formidable opponent and having suffered such a loss this time
Speaker A
that old man would surely seek revenge in the future. Fagaku and Shersu were also difficult to handle. This was after all a world where might reign supreme.
Speaker A
Both of them possessed man Gekcko Sharinggon with the ungrateful Itachi lurking on the side and that bastard Aido scheming in the shadows. To call it internal and external troubles would be putting it mildly. So at this moment Aiha was genuinely troubled. Though he
Speaker A
had already awakened his mango, it was not the eternal mangeko that came without drawbacks. While his mangeko could slowly recover its ocular power, it still couldn't sustain prolonged large-scale battles. Thus, he was indeed treading on thin ice. Though his actions
Speaker A
appeared aggressive on the surface inwardly, he remained cautious, not daring to push his enemies completely into a corner. Otherwise, Shers would likely use Cotto Amitsukami on him.
Speaker A
Fagaku was currently hiding his Mangeko precisely because he didn't want to provoke the village's excessive weariness. If Gene went too far, that old man would probably stop concealing it as well. As for Itachi, Aiha wasn't too worried for the time being. Unless
Speaker A
Shers died, Itachi wouldn't be able to awaken his man Gekko anytime soon. By the time he awakened his man Gekko, it would mean Sher Suer's threat had been eliminated. The same logic applied to Aido. That bastard didn't want to expose
Speaker A
himself at this stage. Unless Kóa chose to act directly or the Aiha clan fell into internal strife, he would only watch and stir the pot from the shadows.
Speaker A
So for now, he couldn't push the enemy too hard. Everything still required careful, gradual planning. As for his parents, who had been captured by Root, honestly, Aihajin worried about them the least because they were Danzo's trump card against him, and he wouldn't be
Speaker A
willing to waste them as disposable assets. Now was not yet the time to burn bridges with Root. So even though his heart achd as if twisted with knives, his rationality still told him he must remain calm. Thinking of this, he
Speaker A
couldn't help but see with frustration. Other transmigrators landed with a system at the very least or were given some kind of golden finger himself.
Speaker A
Though he did have a seven-story pagota pendant that had crossed over with him, he had tried every conceivable method over the years, dripping blood on it, nourishing it with chakra and so on. Yet to this day, nothing had changed. Damn
Speaker A
it. Surely it wouldn't only reveal its power after he had eliminated Kenoha's higher-ups and unified the ninja world.
Speaker A
If he had a system to support him, he would have already gone head-to-head with Kenoha's higher-ups instead of having to scheme so cautiously all this time. By the way, Gene, there's something I've been struggling to understand. Why did Haru and Saratobi
Speaker A
concede? Couldn't the U temporarily fill in for the police force? With so many ninjas and so many clans in Kohaa, he could easily pull together a team to calm the chaotic village, right? Why would he rather pay such a heavy price
Speaker A
than let the U step in or perhaps assemble a new group to temporarily take over the police force? Aiha Setsuna spoke, his eyes flickering with doubt.
Speaker A
Almost instantly, as Setsuna's words rang out, all the Aiha turned to look. Obviously, everyone had thought nothing of it before, but now they suddenly realized. That's right. It was clearly a simple matter to resolve. After all, maintaining village security was a
Speaker A
trivial task for the Kenoha high-ranking officials. But why? Why would the Kohó high-ranking officials rather return the ancestral land to the Aiha than handle this matter themselves? Aiha Jeene paused in surprise. He truly hadn't expected Setsuna that old radical to ask
Speaker A
such a penetrating question. Could it be that after stepping down as elder the fellow had actually gained wisdom?
Speaker A
However, despite his deep confusion, he still smiled directly. Elder Setsuna, you've asked a sharp question. I imagine everyone is also very interested in this issue, so I will briefly explain it. The root cause of this issue inevitably points to the second Hokag Senju
Speaker A
Tobarama. Back when Madaras sama lost the Hokag election, Tobarama created this so-called police force to appease the Aiha. In essence, it was completely unnecessary. Think of the other four great ninja villages. Which one is anything like a police force? The
Speaker A
functions of the police force could actually be performed by the Yu. Why do you think that is? I Aiha Jeene narrowed his eyes. In the past, he would not have bothered to explain so much. For one thing, the Achiha were all
Speaker A
stubborn-headed. If they didn't acknowledge you, they wouldn't listen to your words at all. For another, there was no time. When he truly resolved to join the radical faction, the Aiha clan was already extremely unstable. What he needed most was to increase the radical
Speaker A
factions influence and then find a way to stabilize them. Now, however, it was different. The radical faction had been completely stabilized, becoming his staunch supporters. Even the moderates and neutrals, for the most part, were now willing to follow his orders. Though
Speaker A
he was not the clan head as a leader, he should demonstrate his wisdom. Therefore, with a narrowed gaze, he gave everyone time to think. Meanwhile, with Aiha Jyns words, everyone present began to ponder. However, although they hadn't fully thought it through yet,
Speaker A
upon hearing that other villages had no police force combined with the treacherous ruthlessness of Sinju Tobarama, they immediately sensed something was a miss. 10 minutes later, seeing that no one spoke, Aihaene knew that the Aiha were all stubborn, so he
Speaker A
naturally did not continue to wait. He took a deep breath and spoke in a grave tone. The police force is a conspiracy.
Speaker A
Senju Tobarama knew that the Aiha were proud and not skilled at dealing with others. So, he deliberately assigned this task to the Aiha. His aim was to create a rift between the Achiha and the other clans and commoners of the village
Speaker A
so that he could rally them to isolate the Aiiah. In Tobarama's own words, because the Aiha were too strong, they had to be caged. After the third Hokag Soratobi Herusen took office, he exploited countless rules. And because the clan head Fagaku was weak, he forced
Speaker A
the police force to relinquish many of its original important powers. Intelligence gathering spy detection interrogation. All were lost under that worthless Fugaku. Now the police force retains only one authority, public security. It is the most insignificant duty of the police force and the one
Speaker A
most likely to create friction with the villagers and clans. Of course, Harusen would never allow the Aiha to abandon the police force. Otherwise, if the villagers and clans no longer had a rift with the Aiha, how could the Kohaa
Speaker A
high-ranking officials continue to target them? Therefore, the village will never send its own people, it will only force the Aiha to take charge of the police force. Aiha Jin said coldly, gasps with Aiha Jins words.
Speaker A
Everyone was stunned in place. Everyone was completely dumbfounded. No one had imagined that such a small police force could conceal so many schemes. The atmosphere instantly fell silent. The entire courtyard was filled with a terrifyingly oppressive air. Finally,
Speaker A
one Aiha, unable to bear it, couldn't help but speak. Why does the village force us? What crime did we Aiha commit?
Speaker A
Damned village, another Achiha said. For a moment, everyone was filled with righteous indignation. Setsuna at the forefront was also perplexed. He couldn't help but look at Achiha. Gene, I know you are very smart. Do you know the reason? Almost instantly with Achiha
Speaker A
Satsuna's words, everyone couldn't help but look at Aiha again. They all desperately hoped that Achihaene could provide an explanation. As for this, Achihaene pondered for a moment, then smiled and spoke. The reason, of course, I know since everyone wants to know, I
Speaker A
will briefly explain. One word, money. You must understand that although the third Shinobi world war has ended and Kenoha appears to be a victor, in reality, Kenoha received no war reparations. Moreover, the pensions for countless fallen shinobi have yet to be
Speaker A
paid. Why? O because Kenoha has no money. The pensions for the fallen must be paid and Kenoha also needs to replenish the food, weapons, and other supplies consumed during the war. The daimo has said that the land of fire
Speaker A
will absolutely not provide this money. So everyone, where will the money come from? Considering the sudden tension between Kenoha and the Achiha since the Ninetales incident, I have strong reason to suspect that the Kohaa high-ranking officials have their eyes on the Aiha.
Speaker A
Everyone think carefully every time the koha ninja demand pensions or when the village faces financial problems doesn't danzo suddenly launch an attack on the aiha. I can think of two reasons. One is to divert attention using the aiha whom
Speaker A
everyone fears to cover up the pension issues financial gaps and so on. The other reason is to buy time. What is koho waiting for? Considering that if they can destroy the aiha the thousand-year accumulated wealth of the aiha will fall completely into the
Speaker A
vill's hands. Then the pensions for the shinobi who died in the third war will be available. The financial gaps and food supplies for Kenoha will be met.
Speaker A
And even after all that, the high-ranking officials can still make a profit. Sacrifice one uncontrollable, universally feared aha clan, and the pensions for fallen ninja, and the vill's finances can be resolved. The Kenoha high-ranking officials can even line their pockets, and Danzo can
Speaker A
finally obtain the sharing he has always coveted. Sacrificing one Aiha clan brings happiness to thousands of families. What do you all think of this DA? This is why I joined the radical faction and never considered compromising with Kenoha because Kenoha
Speaker A
does not allow us to surrender. If we Achiha surrender, what will happen to the pinions of the fallen ninja? How will the vill's financial gap be filled?
Speaker A
Think carefully about recent events. Why is Kohaa suddenly so eager to confront us? Wasn't it about a month ago when many ninja proposed that the village should promptly distribute the pinchions for fallen shinobi? The entire courtyard was shrouded in a deathly silence.
Speaker A
Everyone was immersed in Achiha Jins speculation, their faces turning grim and ugly, and many had even widened their sharing in shock. If it weren't that almost everyone who could enter this small courtyard were considered the elite of the Aiha clan,
Speaker A
there might have been a large number of people so enraged that they would have awakened their sharing, especially the moderates and the radicals. They were the ones most provoked for Achiha Jinn's speculation had answered many questions that had long puzzled them. It was one
Speaker A
thing for the village to be wary of the radicals, but why were they who had always been loyal to the village still treated differently? How could this be?
Speaker A
Though it's a bit unbelievable with Elder Jyn's speculation as a premise, everything that was previously incomprehensible now makes perfect sense. I never imagined that while we sought to integrate into the village, the village had its eyes on the Achihas
Speaker A
thousand-year accumulation. I swear they will never succeed. Everyone present began to speak. All were filled with righteous indignation, especially the moderates and the centrists for betrayal inflicts the deepest wound. Though the Aiha were stubborn to the point of
Speaker A
foolishness, they were not entirely devoid of intelligence. Aiha Jyn's speculation, though lacking evidence, was highly plausible given the village's current predicament and the blatant targeting of the Aiha. The possibility was indeed very high. In fact, not only the moderates and centrists, but even
Speaker A
the radicals were seething with anger. They had never before considered that the villages persecution of the Achiha might conceal such intricate schemes.
Speaker A
Achihashana in particular wore a cryptic expression. He had never realized that the root of Achiha Jins decision to join the radicals lay here just as everyone was deep in thought. Aihhati and I and Aihabadai led their respective trusted followers into the courtyard.
Speaker A
Everyone this old man will join too. Aihhati and I stepped to the front and bowed respectfully to Achiha. I happen to overhear Lord Jyn's speculation outside the door. Considering the history between the village and the Achiha, I believe the likelihood of your
Speaker A
speculation is indeed very high. For the survival of the Achiha, this old man must become radical. Aihabadai also bowed solemnly. He looked at Achihaene with a profoundly complex gaze. This young Aiha, whom he had once deemed too radical and unworthy of regard, had
Speaker A
utterly stunned him with his recent assertion. So after a helpless sigh, he couldn't help but ask, "I am willing to join the radicals, but I am curious. Did Lord Jeene join the radicals?" Because he perceived this truth. Hearing this
Speaker A
inquiry, everyone was intrigued. Meanwhile, Aiha showed no surprise at the two newly joined moderate elders.
Speaker A
His perception was not weak. He had since their approach long ago, but he had deliberately allowed them to overhear his words. Hearing Achihabadai's question, Achihajene pondered briefly, then shook his head directly. No, you are wrong. In truth, I
Speaker A
had long seen through the vill's schemes. However, due to the Achihas nature, I did not believe I had the power to change the clan. Initially, I only sought to protect myself. The Knight of the Ninetales was my attempt.
Speaker A
I tried to persuade Fagaka, the clan leader, to disregard the obstacles set by Danzo and the route. If Fagaku had heeded my advice and supported Minato Namikes, it would have proven that the Aiha were still worth saving. But alas,
Speaker A
Fagaku refused and the clan did not support me either. At that point, I was utterly disillusioned. I believe the Aiha were too foolish to change.
Speaker A
Compared to the doomed Aiha, I could only think of how to save myself. To be honest with you all, as early as the third great ninja war, I had already prepared an escape route for my family, the snow country. My original plan was
Speaker A
to sneak my parents out of Kohaa during the chaos before the village exterminated the Aiha, then used the pre-arranged path to reach the snow country. But h that day, when I finished my training late at night, I witnessed
Speaker A
the route abducting my parents right before my eyes. That very night the shock awakened my man Gekkyo Sharinggon.
Speaker A
However, the shock was so immense that I fell unconscious directly waking up only the next day. I knew how tightroot security was. Going alone to rescue them would not only fail to save my parents but would also cost me my own life. But
Speaker A
Fagaka's character destined him to be of no help. So I chose the radicals and began causing trouble immediately. I knew Danzo's nature well. Once he identified me as a threatening aiha, he would never kill my parents so easily.
Speaker A
On the contrary, he would hold my parents tightly as a trump card to use against me in the future. The higher my status, the safer my parents would be.
Speaker A
Aiha narrated calmly. He had no intention of hiding anything for he would eventually rescue his parents. It was better to reveal this himself than to have Danzo expose it later. Thus, he did not deny his selfish motives. In an
Speaker A
instant, as Aiha spoke, everyone drew in a sharp breath. No one had expected the truth to be this. Aiha Jyns parents had been taken by the root and he had witnessed it himself which had awakened his mano. So that's how it is.
Speaker A
Achihabadai said with a bitter expression. I suppose I should thank Danzo for his actions otherwise the Aiha would have been beyond saving. The others nodded in agreement. However, their expressions were grim for Achiha Jyn's behavior revealed that he had not
Speaker A
truly regarded the clan as his own. They wanted to call him selfish but the words would not leave their lips. There was no help for it. Just thinking about their own past actions made them want to slap themselves. Even if Achihajene had stood
Speaker A
up back, then they probably wouldn't have believed him. So other than a sai, they could only feel fortunate. Indeed, as Aihabadai said, if not for Danzos unexpected stroke of genius, Aiha might have already defected.
Speaker A
Aihhati and I asked with curiosity, I can understand Lord Jyn's choice. The Aiha are too straightforward. Back when the clan leader Madara left Kinoa, we didn't follow him either. What I'm curious about now is did Lord Jeene sense something wrong back during the
Speaker A
third war when he prepared his escape route. That's right. With Aiha's question, everyone's interest was peaked. Aiha Jeene narrowed his eyes slightly. Adammano's inquiry. His mind began to race furiously. His influence had already reached its limit. With Danzos recent frantic actions he
Speaker A
had drawn in almost everyone that could be swayed. The remaining Achiha, Fagaku Sheru, and their like were utterly beyond his reach. So now it was indeed time to speak from the heart. After all his subsequent moves would require the
Speaker A
full cooperation of everyone present. Helpless without a system or the eternal maneko. It was nearly impossible for him to take on Konoho alone. All he could rely on were these Aiha before him.
Speaker A
Taking a deep breath, he slowly began. Elder Amano is right. I've seen through it all long ago. But the Aiha are a clan that values strength above all. I was confident that even if I had spoken out back then, I would have earned no trust
Speaker A
from my clansmen. So all I could do was protect myself. As Aiha Jeene spoke, those presence slowly nodded. Yes, the Aiha clan relies on strength. Without any power, even a moderate like Sheree would not listen to a single word you
Speaker A
said. Aiha Satsuna then spoke up. Jyn's choice is not wrong. The Aiha are indeed extreme. It's not the time for that now.
Speaker A
Let's get straight to business. All Aiha suffer from a lack of wisdom. Take this chance to enlighten everyone on the bigger picture. At the very least, let everyone have a basic understanding of the village and the clan. His words
Speaker A
earned nods from all. Everyone was indeed interested for whether they were radicals, moderates, or centrists.
Speaker A
Hardly any of them ever used their brains. Now that they had a chance to learn, they were eager to listen. They truly wanted to know why Gene had been certain during the third war that the village intended to eliminate the Aiha.
Speaker A
To this, Achiha Jeene did not demur. He nodded and began. Since everyone wants to hear it, I'll share a few thoughts.
Speaker A
Excellent. They all chimed in. Aihajin wasted no time. He asked directly, "Everyone knows that Hashiamaramaju became Hokage through his overwhelming power that suppressed the entire ninja world." Toborama, while not as strong as the first, was still among the elite,
Speaker A
and his schemes and strategies were topnotch. So, what about Husen Suratobi? Was it just because of his self-proclaimed title of strongest Hokag? Aihajin's face was full of disdain. After hearing this question, everyone present was baffled. Indeed, they might have limited knowledge of the
Speaker A
first and second, but they were quite familiar with Husen Saratobi. Was he powerful? They weren't sure. Because Hirusen had only fought in a few battles during the Second War afterward, he simply stayed in Kenoha and never went to the front lines again. The same went
Speaker A
for the so-called Kohaa F4, they also rarely fought. Yet, they had held the Hokag seat for so long without anyone questioning it. Everyone had grown so accustomed to it that they never saw anything wrong. And now Aiha Jyn's words
Speaker A
finally made them realize, "Yeah, this was damn suspicious. Think of the Kaga from other villages, the fourth rakage, A whose physical prowess was unmatched." And who fought Manado Names to a standstill. Manado would have lost without the flying thunder god
Speaker A
technique. The third rakage, needless to say, Anoki's dust release was no joke. Yagura of the mist and Raza of the sand had all proven their strength on the battlefield. But Husen Saratobi, everyone said he was the strongest Hokag, a professor of ninjutsu. Yet no
Speaker A
one truly knew his real strength. The third Hokag Herusen Suritoi seems to only talk about the will of fire. They call him the ninja hero, but he rarely fights. Can't figure it out. They all exclaimed. Even the older Aiha were
Speaker A
baffled, shaking their heads in confusion. In the end, they could only turn their gazes to Aiha, waiting for their leader's explanation. Aiha let out a soft sigh. Someone already gave the answer just now. It's the will of fire.
Speaker A
And that wasn't established from the start. It was something Harusen Saratobi defined later. Initially, Harusen became the third Hokag partly due to Tobarama Senus dying wish, but more importantly, he had the backing of Mido Usuzamaki. After Husen truly ascended to
Speaker A
the Hokag seat and prepared to make his mark his heart, turned ice cold. Back then, the Sinju clan under pressure from Mido Usuzamaki didn't deny his position as Hokag, but they completely ignored him, engaging in passive resistance. The
Speaker A
Aiha clan, needless to say, looked down on him as Hokag with the Sinju and Aiha like that the other clans were even worse. In short, Husen was nothing but a puppet. How did the situation change?
Speaker A
Husen forced by circumstances had no real power. He could only go to the ninja academy to preach his damned will of fire since there was little else he could do. But then the second war broke out and Herusen's chance came. Does
Speaker A
everyone remember Nwaki Senju? He was the hope of the Senju clan, the most likely candidate to become the fourth Hokag. Yet on his first battlefield, he was blown to pieces by explosion tags.
Speaker A
But here's the question. What are the traits of the Senu clan? Vast chakra and immense vitality. Even if an explosion tag directly hit an Aiha, it would likely only cause severe injury with a very low chance of killing them. Yet,
Speaker A
Nwaki with his Senu vitality died, and even the medical genius couldn't save him. Thus, the Senu clan suffered a heavy blow. Later, Husen initiated the Hashiamurama experiments, claiming to revive the first Hokag's mighty wood release. Consequently, a large number of
Speaker A
Synu died on the experimental table. Coupled with the fact that most Sinju fought on the front lines during the early second war, the combination of these two factors depleted the Synus elite. To preserve their strength, the remaining Synu adopted Tobarama's plan
Speaker A
to integrate into Kenoa. Some gave up their surnames to become civilians, while others chose to serve the fire daimu. At that point, the Senu were completely gone. But the name of the Senju still carried weight andsunade and mitosumaki were still alive. It was
Speaker A
around this time that Dan Ko emerged. He became engaged to Sununade and backed by the Senu legacy. His voice for becoming the fourth Hokag grew loud. Then he died. The Yuzumaki clan refused to join Kohaa. When they were besieged, their
Speaker A
clan was annihilated for no clear reason. At that time, Kohaa had the sano Hataki and other experts. Yet, they only managed to rescue Kusha Usuzamaki and the Usuzamaki clan sealing techniques.
Speaker A
Thinking about it makes me laugh. They couldn't save the people, but they brought back all the ceiling techniques.
Speaker A
Interesting, isn't it? Next came Sukumo Hitaki, another strong candidate for the fourth Hokag. Then he inexplicably committed suicide. I'm baffled. I recall Sukumo Hitaki was on an S-rank mission.
Speaker A
Even A-rank missions require confidentiality. Yet, an S-rank mission was spread through the streets within a day. The so-called confidentiality protocols were thrown to the dogs.
Speaker A
Sakumo Hitaki killed himself and no one was held accountable. It was just glossed over. Then Orochimaru was discovered conducting human experiments and defected. To me, that's even more ridiculous. Orochimaru was a commoner.
Speaker A
Although some clans supported his bid for the fourth Hokag, those clans wouldn't back his human experiments, would they? Conducting human experiments costs money, astronomical sums for high-end equipment. Where did the money come from? If you ask me, it's
Speaker A
impossible without the villages support. And consider this, before Orochimaru defected, he was the front runner for the fourth Hokag. It's obvious that the Kenoha high-ups were scheming behind the scenes. They didn't want Orochimaru to become Hokag because despite being a
Speaker A
commoner, he was ruthless and principled. He would never be Herusen's puppet. So, it was either defection or death. Finally, Minato Name is the most interesting. As everyone knows he was a commoner. Hiran let him become Hokag hoping he would be a puppet. But Minato
Speaker A
had his own principles. Once he became Hokag, he wanted to do his own work. So, he placed Kakashi in the Yamu and formed his own Hokag guard. Wasn't that a direct challenge to Husen's authority?
Speaker A
And then he died. Have you noticed? Anyone who tries to seize power from the F4 ends up dead with only Orochimaru surviving as a missing mean. Husen Saratobi controlled Kinoa through the will of fire. Anyone who threatened their power inevitably died for various
Speaker A
reasons. Now it's the Aiha's turn. On one hand, the Aiha are disobedient, strong, and unpredictable. On the other hand, the village is desperate for money. This fat piece of meat is ready to be slaughtered. Ajihajene spoke in a
Speaker A
measured tone. This time his explanation was exceptionally detailed, dissecting the path of Saratobi Husen's rise to power and laying it bare for all to see.
Speaker A
The reason was simple. The Aiha clan served as the very foundation of his power and self-preservation. He had to make these people thoroughly realized that there was no possibility of reconciliation between the Aiha and the Kohaa high command. There was no other
Speaker A
way. Whether it was Sartoi Herusen's Hokag leadership, the two Mangeko wielders, Shersu and Fagaku, the dark abido lurking in the shadows, or even Aiha Itachi, who had already awakened the three tommo and could unlock the Mangeko at any moment. The potential
Speaker A
enemies were far too powerful. Relying solely on his own Mangeko, a direct confrontation would surely lead to his death. The Achiha clan before him was now his foundation. This is utterly terrifying, but if you think about it carefully, Elder Jyn's words are
Speaker A
absolutely right. I used to wonder why whenever a strong ninja appeared in Kenoha, they would meet an unexplained accident. One or two might be accidents, but when there are too many coincidences, even a ghost wouldn't believe that excuse. I was also
Speaker A
bewitched before actually thinking of reconciling with Kenoa. The crowd present began to speak up, especially the moderates and centrists. As they reexamined Saratobi Harusen's path to power, they began to regret their previous choices. This man could not be
Speaker A
trusted. The leading elders let out a soft sigh. Unlike the ordinary clan members, their high positions meant they understood far more. But they had been blinded by illusions before. Only now with Achiha Gene clearing away the mist did they instantly realize how foolish
Speaker A
they had been. Gene, I am enlightened. Aiha Yatsiro took a deep breath. From today on, I will fully support you. With his lead, the other elders also voiced their support. Having truly understood the Aiha's predicament, they knew that
Speaker A
integrating into the village was a dead end. So, they naturally chose to back Aiha. Seeing this, Achiha Setsuna couldn't help but smile faintly. He was overjoyed. Aiha had truly been the right choice as heir. Not only had he
Speaker A
effectively stabilized the radicals, but he had also won over the moderates and centrists. However, after taking a deep breath, he still asked a question. Gene, I have a question. Since we know the police department is a trap, why did you
Speaker A
still agree to the deal with Saratobi Herusen? Was it really just to reclaim the ancestral land? I don't think that's in your character. His face was full of confusion. The others also turned to look at Aiha. They hadn't thought about
Speaker A
this before, but now with Jyn's explanation, they all realized the police department was a pitfall.
Speaker A
Everyone began to speak up, saying that even if it meant giving up the ancestral land, they didn't want to take on the police department trap. To this, Aiha gene gestured for silence, then began to explain. Everyone, don't be impatient. I
Speaker A
have a countermeasure. Previously, due to internal factional divisions, the Aiha strength was scattered and my influence was limited. So, I had no choice but to turn a blind eye. Now that everyone is willing to listen to me, solving the police department issue is
Speaker A
not difficult. One-word delay. The aiha of the past were too straightforward. From now on, when handling cases in the police department, remember not to be too diligent. Drag out any case as long as possible. If you can't gauge the
Speaker A
pace, use the shadow clone technique to find me when an emergency case arises and I'll teach you on the spot how to handle it. In short, the core principle is one for a case that could be resolved in a day, drag it out for 10 days or
Speaker A
half a month. After all, even if the village descends into chaos, it will only affect the Kohaa High Command.
Speaker A
Since the villagers don't favor the Achiha, why should we uphold justice for them? Aiha Jyn's tone was calm. Handling the police department was not difficult.
Speaker A
Any other ninja clan could have managed the balance. It was only the Aiha's straightforwardness that had led to this situation. The Aiha had simply been too sincere. Hearing his words, the crowd was bewildered and unable to comprehend, but they didn't say much. They would
Speaker A
just come to Achiha when they encountered problems. After handling a few cases they would learn Aiha Aamino asked in confusion Gene why go through all this trouble since we've nearly broken with Konoha why not just abandon the police department to this Aiha Jeene
Speaker A
let out a soft sigh. He glanced helplessly at the crowd then said calmly the Aiha's strength is insufficient. We cannot openly break with Kohaa for now or it will benefit no one. Our struggle with the Kenoha High Command must be
Speaker A
confined to a certain scope. Conflict without rupture is good for everyone. Otherwise, if we truly fight Kenoha, even if the Achiha wins in the end, we won't be able to withstand attacks from other ninja villages. This is precisely
Speaker A
why the Kohha High Command keeps squeezing the Achiha's living space constantly trying to provoke us into action rather than taking the initiative to annihilate the clan. Because only if the Aiha rebel first can the high command mobilize the other ninja clans
Speaker A
and civilians. Everyone must remember our main enemy is that small clique of Kohaa High Command. Specifically, it's the four clans, including Saratobi, as well as the U and Root. The other ninja clans and civilians are all centrists.
Speaker A
Whoever wins, they will side with. Don't think of Kohaa as a monolith. In reality, there are factions within Kohaa. Take Saratobi Horizon's return to the Hokag seat. Have you noticed that those who supported the fourth Hokag have all been removed from key
Speaker A
positions, especially the Enoshiko trio who suffered heavy losses? They lost the positions of Jonan, commander, intelligence chief, and deputy u commander. Do you think the enoshiko have no resentment toward the high command? The other clans are the same.
Speaker A
It's just that Saratobi and his faction are too powerful, and they fear the Aiha's temperament won't cooperate. So, they are biting their time, waiting for the right moment. These people are not our enemies. So, all of you remember
Speaker A
this. Our only enemy is the Konoha High Command. The crowd suddenly understood. So, that's how it was. They had never thought of this before. Now listening to Achiha, they realized that Kinoa itself was divided into many factions. Aiha
Speaker A
Yatsushiro, we were indeed mistaken before. Only after hearing Jyn's explanation did I understand. Aihhatano couldn't help but say Saratobi Herusen may be Hokag, but he doesn't represent all of Kinoa. We used to treat the entire village as the Aiha's enemy. The
Speaker A
crowd sighed with emotion, but now with Aiha's analysis, they suddenly felt that the future was indeed promising. to this seeing the crowd buzzing with discussion. Aiha Jeene spoke again.
Speaker A
Let's end today's talk here. Everything discussed in this meeting can be leaked. I don't mind if other clans or the village know. The following content involves the Aiha's future plans and is not suitable for most people to hear.
Speaker A
Except for the elders, everyone else may leave. Upon hearing this, the crowd dispersed. The radicals, of course, were already accustomed to this. The moderates and centrists had no objections either, as they were all part of the same clan and had long understood
Speaker A
Achihajin's methods. Minor matters call for a large assembly. Major matters demand a small gathering. Matters like the Unified Front Alliance were discussed in a large meeting. But when it came to true strategies and actions, Aiha only consulted with a select few.
Speaker A
The rest only needed to execute their tasks. In the past, they had disapproved, believing that clan affairs required collective deliberation. Now, however, things were different. Achihaja Jajin's several successful operations had convinced them that he was right. 10 minutes later, the small courtyard began
Speaker A
to empty. Aside from a dozen Aiha with three Tommo Sharinggon, they dispersed around the perimeter to ensure that not even a bird could fly past. In the courtyard, Aiha Jeene invited several elders into the house and personally poured tea for each. Without waiting for
Speaker A
them to speak, he began directly. Everyone, he said, among those present, there are both newcomers and veterans.
Speaker A
Since you have all gathered here, it proves your trust in me, Aiha. Thus, I will dispense with formalities. As per the old tradition, I will first set the next phase's objectives. If anything is unclear, I will explain afterward.
Speaker A
Aihajins tone was stern. The radicals like Shan of course had no objections. For newcomers like Yoshiro and Amano, who were able to join, it was a novel experience. The radical faction operated completely differently from the clan council. Nevertheless, they nodded
Speaker A
in agreement. After all, the radicals previous successes had sufficiently demonstrated the superiority of this method. All right, no problem. I accept.
Speaker A
Please speak. Gene sama both spoke calmly. Seeing everyone nod. Aiha Jeene took a deep breath and began without further preamble. Next phase two objectives. First, use the authority of the police force to raise high the banner of the will of fire and
Speaker A
thoroughly throw the entire village into chaos. We need to give the Kohaa higherups something to occupy their time so they stop fixating on the Aiha clan.
Speaker A
Therefore, I plan to appoint Chunin as squad leaders and have Jyn serve as police force members specifically to handle trivial village affairs. second win over other ninja clans. Of course, direct appeals won't work. The Aiha reputation is too tarnished and other
Speaker A
clans won't trust us. Thus, my plan is to force their hand. Although many of the police forces powers have been usered by the Yu in recent years, the fact remains that these powers were established by Sentoama. Reclaiming them
Speaker A
is legally sound. The specific plan, find a spy from another ninja village, use the Shainggon to control him and have him flee directly toward the roots base. The police force under the pretext of capturing a spy will gather all the
Speaker A
clans's elites and launch a fierce assault on Root. Danzo will likely believe I'm trying to rescue my parents.
Speaker A
Then the Root's elite will be diverted to transfer and guard my parents. Thus, other areas of Root will be left defenseless. The police force has only two objectives. First, collect as many of Root's mission scrolls and research materials as possible. Second, kill as
Speaker A
many of Root's combat personnel as we can, especially Root's Jonan elites. Kill as many as you can. Danzo dreams of becoming Hokag. With such heavy losses among his elite forces, he will be forced to replenish Root by pressuring
Speaker A
other ninja clans to send their promising young members into Root. Therefore, the more root elites we kill, the more desperately Danzo will coers other clans. Then we will have an opportunity to win those clans over.
Speaker A
Gasts filled the room. As Aihajene spoke, everyone present was stunned. At that moment, they truly saw the difference between Aiha and Fugaku.
Speaker A
Fugaku often held clan councils, but they solved nothing. Aihajin. His meetings had no superfluous words. He directly assigned actions. More importantly, his actions were reasoned and justified. Unlike the old radicals who constantly rebelled, he was genuinely playing within the rules
Speaker A
against the Kenoha high-erups. While striking at the Kenoha leadership, he also used this to pressure and win over other clans. Truly impressive. I agree.
Speaker A
Aiha Amano immediately voiced his support. Though a moderate, he was still an Aiha. In the past, he had opposed the radicals because the chance of a successful rebellion was slim. But now, Aiha Jins approach, fighting without breaking, uniting without
Speaker A
uniformity, gave him genuine hope for success. I also support wholeheartedly. Aiha Yoshiro raised his hand as well.
Speaker A
After fully realizing the untrustworthiness of the Konoha higher-ups, he had even considered joining the radicals outright. But unexpectedly, Achihajin's methods were far more moderate yet with a high probability of success. This made him trust Achiha Jeene even more believing
Speaker A
him to be a truly cerebral Aiha. The others chimed in almost unanimously without needing Aiha to explain expressing their support for his actions. Shan sighed, "So alike, truly alike. Your schemes and strategies remind me of Achihauna, an Aiha who
Speaker A
could match Senju Tobarama in intellect." As Shan spoke, the others nodded in agreement. They were all old-timers who had survived the end of the waring states period. Though they had never personally witnessed Aihaunas prowess, they had heard tales from the clan's elders of his
Speaker A
brilliance. And now in Achiha, they truly saw the shadow of Achihauna. The atmosphere in the living room grew relaxed. Aihajin said nothing more.
Speaker A
Since the serious matters were concluded, he began to chat casually with the others. At that moment, Aiha and Nabi entered. Elders Fugaku and Shiru have arrived. They wish to see Gene sama. The crowd was taken back.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene remained calm, unsurprised by their arrival. After a brief thought, he said, "Let them in." Understood. Hachiha and Nabi bowed. Two minutes later, Shersu and Fugaku entered the living room. Upon seeing Yashiro and Amano, their expressions darkened. They were
Speaker A
not foolish. The tight security outside indicated that serious discussions were taking place inside, and the presence of two moderate elders, Yoshiro and Amano, was enough to prove they had already made their choice. Fagaka's eyes were obscure, and his body trembled slightly.
Speaker A
Yet his composure was well honed. So even witnessing this scene, his face remained calm. But inwardly he was seething with rage. That damned Aihaene had not only brought the radical faction under his control in a short time, but
Speaker A
now he had also won over the moderates and the centrists. He, the dignified clan leader of the Aiha, had become a commander without an army. What a grievous humiliation. Shiroui, however, lacked such composure. As soon as they met, he could not help but speak. Elder
Speaker A
Hakadai, Elder Amano, how could you also shuer give up? Achiha Amano interrupted him immediately. This is our choice. We gave Fagakum many chances, but under his leadership, the Achiha have become a disgrace. Anyone with eyes can see that.
Speaker A
Even if we play the villages obedient dog, constantly retreating, what did we gain? They only pushed further. Our concessions earned no goodwill from the village. Instead, we faced endless escalation. Previously, our clan grounds were under surveillance by the U and
Speaker A
Root. Now, the Aiha can barely breathe thanks to Aiha Jyn's efforts. Your patience and Fagakas might be correct, but we see no results. In contrast, Jyn's methods show tangible effects. At this moment, Ajiha Amano showed no difference to either of them. And for
Speaker A
this, Shers fell silent words failing him. He wanted to persuade everyone to be patient and trust that the village and the Hokag would resolve matters. But his arguments pald in comparison to Jyn's actions. What to do? As he
Speaker A
wrestled with his dilemma, Fagaka stepped forward. Shiru, it's pointless. Clan leader. Shersu was stunned. But Fugaku ignored him directly addressing Aiha gene. Your actions will drive the Achiha into a dead end. I advise you to abandon the plan to reclaim the Aiha
Speaker A
ancestral grounds. Such radical behavior will only make the Aiha a target for everyone almost instantly. With Fagaku's words, the atmosphere in the room turned deathly still. Aiha Gene shook his head absolutely impossible. No explanation, no hesitation. For people like Fugaku
Speaker A
and Shiru, any explanation was meaningless, merely a waste of time. Are you going to lead the Achiha into ruin?
Speaker A
Fagaka's face was filled with fury. Aiha Jeene sneered. Think what you want. But let me tell you this, even if I lead the Aiha to death, the members of this clan are willing to die with me. Fugaku fell
Speaker A
silent. This damn conversation was impossible. Aiha couldn't even be bothered to explain, leaving him at a loss for how to respond. Of course, he understood. Aiha did not trust him at all. In fact, he looked down on him.
Speaker A
Xene must have his own schemes, but he simply deemed it beneath him to explain.
Speaker A
He glanced around, noticing that even when Gene said he would drag the Aiha to death, the elders of all factions remained unmoved. In that moment, realization dawned on him. Aihajene had already convinced these people. Even if Gene ordered them to die, they would
Speaker A
likely obey without hesitation. What to do? His mind raced and finally through gritted teeth, he said, "Aihajene, do you think I have no cards left? Your man Gekko?" Aihaene remained disdainful.
Speaker A
Sorry, I don't care. You and Shiru could join forces and annihilate the Aiha. But let me warn you though, you have two pairs of mangeko Iha gene am not made of clay. If you try to destroy the Aiha, I
Speaker A
will not save a single one of them. But likewise, I will be the first to kill your wife Makoto and your son Itachi, including the child in Makoto's womb.
Speaker A
Then I will make the Saratobi Utain Midocado and Shamura clans pay for the Achias demise. I know a single pair of Mangeko cannot defeat the entire village united, but I also don't give a damn about the so-called dignity of the
Speaker A
strong. Whenever a strong opponent appears, I will hide and run, then strike at the weaklings of Kohaa. Fagaka Sheru, I warn you, if you dare to act against the Aiha for the sake of the village, I will make the entire Kenoha
Speaker A
pay with their lives. Once I Kohaa, I doubt other ninja villages will resist the temptation to wage war against it. I have only one bottom line.
Speaker A
If you play by the rules, if you can convince the village not to target the Aiha or convince the clan to follow you, then I Aiha Jeene will play within the rules. But if you want to overturn the
Speaker A
table and suppress the Aiha with force, then we all die together and Kohaa no longer needs to exist. His words were resolute and powerful. He knew very well that with only his single pair of Mangeko, he was no match for the
Speaker A
countless strong warriors of the village, let alone Fagaku and Sherui's Mangeko and the lurking Dark Abido.
Speaker A
Thus, he directly stated that the Achiha could not contain him. If it came to overturning the table, he would not care about the Achiha's fate. He would become a reaper in the shadows, fleeing when the strong pursued striking at the weak
Speaker A
of Kinoa when they were offg guard, essentially employing guerilla warfare in the ninja world. After all, with a mangeko, if he simply wanted to escape, no one could ever corner and kill him.
Speaker A
Fagaku, you have a mangeko? Aihaano stood up and couldn't help asking. The others also rose. Everyone stared at Fagaku in shock and confusion. And to this, Fagaka looked utterly bewildered.
Speaker A
Aihajene, how do you know? Don't worry about that. Aiha said directly. No secret in this world can escape my eyes.
Speaker A
If it weren't for you two traders, Fugaku and Shiru, do you think I would be so cautious in my actions? And you, Shersu? I know your mango ability is Cottosukami, which can forcibly alter anyone's will. Although I also possess a
Speaker A
mangeko, I am not sure if I can resist Cottosukami. So listen carefully. If one day you find my thoughts altered and I act completely differently from before, do not hesitate. Attack the Sartobi Uetain Midocado and Shimura clans. Don't
Speaker A
fight the Kohaa high rankers. The Achiha lack enough strong warriors. So kill their clansmen instead. Even if the Aiha are completely annihilated, drag Kinoa into war and give other ninja villages the opportunity to launch an attack. The core principle is simple. If the Achiha
Speaker A
are destroyed, then Kenoha must also be destroyed. Cotto Amitsukami. Upon hearing the effect of this dojitsu, the faces of everyone turned extremely grim, even indignant. At this moment, they were truly enraged. For within this very room lay no fewer than three pairs of
Speaker A
Mangeko Sharing. Even in the annals of the entire Achiha clan, this was a moment of unparalleled brilliance. Yet alas, these three pairs of Mangeko were far from united in purpose. Two of them stood on the enemy's side. A
Speaker A
heart-wrenching sight. Shers trembled all over, staring in disbelief at Achihajene. Fagakatu felt the same. If the others were shocked by the awakening of his own man, Gecko and the terrifying power of Sherzu's Cottositsukami, then he himself was stunned by Jyn's resolute
Speaker A
determination. How terrifying. This man had adopted a stance of mutual destruction, realizing that he could not protect the entire Aiha clan. So, he chose to protect none of them, threatening that if the village or anyone dared to break the impass by
Speaker A
force, he would become a rogue ninja lurking in the shadows. Bear in mind, Kohaa could not escape. Had he hailed from a certain land, he would have understood that Achiha Jins approach was essentially no different from nuclear deterrence. However, if
Speaker A
these actions only shocked him, then Achiha Jyn's threat truly filled him with terror and fury, yet above all a profound sense of helplessness. Though he was not as trusting of the village as Sheru's wife and children were his
Speaker A
Achilles heel, he could not protect his family around the clock. If he truly chose to break ties with Achiha, he had no doubt that Gene would stop at nothing to kill his children and wife. So with a sigh, he let out a helpless sigh and
Speaker A
finally spoke. I am the clan leader of the Achiha. I will not raise my hand against the clan. I will no longer meddle in the affairs between the village and the Aiha. Even if you wish, Gene, I am ready to pass the title of
Speaker A
clan leader to you at any time, provided you never disturb my wife and children again. And to this, though the others were astonished, Aiha remained calm. As a trans migrator, he knew well that Fagaka's life was one of compromise. His
Speaker A
true concern was only his family. Having struck his nerve, Fagaka's retreat was only natural. Thus, he merely nodded gently and said in a calm tone, "I guarantee the safety of your family.
Speaker A
Even if the Achihawk clan is annihilated in the future, I will have your wife and children evacuated. I have prepared a retreat in the land of snow. Is that so?" I see. Faka was stunned and suddenly understood, "Then I thank you."
Speaker A
With that, he simply waved his hand and stroed out. After all, he had long been a figurehead as clan leader. Now that he had truly laid down the heavy burden, he felt a lightness in his heart. He even
Speaker A
thought that this was not so bad. Now he would have more time to spend with his children free from the worries of clan affairs. Since Jane had prepared a retreat and he had heard of the land of snow, a place far from the mainland of
Speaker A
the ninja world. Even Kinoa in its madness could not pursue them that far. Sheru, however, was dumbfounded. What the hell was he to do now? Aiha Jeene had already seized control of the entire Aiha clan and even the soul clan leader
Speaker A
Fugaku had caved. How could he alone stand against Achiha Jeene and the whole clan? Bitterness filled his voice. Jean, can't we negotiate? Who said we can'tt? Aiha Jeene replied calmly.
Speaker A
I am more than willing to negotiate. As long as the village does not target the Aiha, the Aiha will not stir up trouble.
Speaker A
But can you make Danzo stop hunting the Aiha? Why did the clansmen flock to me, the radical faction? Because you could accomplish nothing babbling about integrating into the village and that the Hokag sama would solve everything.
Speaker A
But what is the reality? Clansmen die in battle without compensation and they cannot even be entered into the memorial stone. Our ancestral land is taken.
Speaker A
Clansmen are monitored and hunted. Initially the Aiha demanded the position of Hokag which was agreed upon before the village's founding. Later they reneged and forbade the Aiha from becoming Hokage. The Aiha endured. Later the Aiha demanded power but the village
Speaker A
still refused. The Aiha endured again. Now all the Achiha want is to survive. Yet the village still denies them. How far must we retreat? Must the entire clan be wiped out before the village is satisfied? But sorry, I cannot do that.
Speaker A
Even if the Aiha must die, we will drag the village down with us. Shers fell silent, devoid of words. Though he was willing to believe that the Hokag would change everything what Aiha Jin said was also the truth. At the very least, he
Speaker A
could not stop Danzo from hunting the Aiiah. Previously, he thought the Aiha were too radical. But now, hearing Aiha Jyn's words, he realized how many steps the Achiha had already taken back. How much further could they retreat? His
Speaker A
head achd terribly, and he finally spoke. But confrontation is meaningless. It will only drain the village's strength. If we both suffer, how can we face the other villages? Why must I choose? Aiha Jins expression remained unchanged. This time, I will
Speaker A
make the village choose. For the stability of Kohha, can't the village take a step back? Sheri was dumbfounded.
Speaker A
Make the village choose. He had only ever considered making the Aiha retreat. Never once thought of asking the village to yield. But upon reflection, it made sense. The Aiha had retreated so much.
Speaker A
Oh, why couldn't the village retreat a little? He was truly at his wits end.
Speaker A
Gene had unified the Aiha, and even Fagaku was disheartened. It was impossible to stop him now, as he was just one man. He was not Attachi. He still cared for the clan. So, he decided to first see what Achiha Gene intended
Speaker A
to do before deciding his own course of action. At the very least, he would ensure the stability of both the village and the Aiha, even if it was a fragile piece. After a long deliberation, he spoke seriously. I want to know your
Speaker A
next plan. I want to know what exactly you intend to do. I am waiting for you to die. Aihajin said. Shers was taken aback. What? Me die? Aihajins expression remained calm, his eyes growing deep. Yes, waiting for you to
Speaker A
die. If I am not mistaken, you have already reported this matter to the Kohaa higher-ups, haven't you. The power of Cotto Amitsukami is too terrifying, but sends chills down anyone's spine. If you think carefully, you will realize that even Saratobi
Speaker A
Herusen now dares not face you alone. And when he meets you, he avoids your gaze. Saratobi Herusen will not make a move against you as he needs to maintain his image of righteousness. But the problem is he has Danzo as his black
Speaker A
glove. Danzo has hasharama cells implanted in his body and he urgently needs the release of the sharing to suppress them. Moreover, he himself fears Cottosukami and covets its power.
Speaker A
Danzo dreams of becoming Hokag. If he could obtain Cottosukami, he could manipulate Sarutoi Herusen into stepping down. He will definitely make a move against you. And because you trust the villages higher-ups too much, you are completely unprepared. Your death would
Speaker A
be no surprise. Saruto Husen knows this very well. So, he has Danzo eating out of his hand. If Danzo succeeds, Herusen can use that to hold him in check. If Danzo fails, it has nothing to do with him. As Hokag, it is not difficult for
Speaker A
him to deal with the hidden pest. Finally, do not think I am warning you out of kindness because I know well the Achihas extremism and stubbornness. Even if I say this, you will absolutely not believe it. I however always use open
Speaker A
schemes to break the situation. Your death is of great significance to me. Not only will it remove one of my concerns, but it will also give me an excuse to confront the village. Whoever touches a clan's keki jenai will die. If
Speaker A
I use your death as a pretext, the other clans will definitely sit on the sidelines. My next move is to wait for you to die. Is that clear enough? Is that plain enough? Aiha Jyn's face was full of mockery, utterly disdainful of
Speaker A
concealing his intentions. As he put it, he excelled in using open schemes to break the deadlock, even if he explicitly told Sherui the latter would most likely follow the old path. For a leopard cannot change its spots, many
Speaker A
things are hard to alter. Of course, if Shersu could truly come to terms, then it would be a good thing for him. In any case, he would not lose out. Impossible.
Speaker A
The Hokag is just a kind old man, and he would never do such a thing. Aiha Jin, you won't succeed. Shers shook his head, his gaze firm. He would not be swayed by Achiha Jyns instigation. Even though images of past meetings with the
Speaker A
Hokage kept surfacing in his mind, he chose to steal his heart, believing that only the Hokag could help the Aiha integrate into Konoha. The others let out a sigh. Although they were also stubborn, they could still tell right
Speaker A
from wrong. If Aiha lacked strength, no one would bother to listen to his nonsense. Now that his power was sufficient, they were naturally willing to listen attentively. But unfortunately, Sher Suer who could awaken the man-eko was more extreme than
Speaker A
others. And such a person could not be easily persuaded. Otherwise, he would not have been extreme enough to awaken the maneko. Understanding this, they did not try to persuade him, only sighing bitterly their gazes towards Shers, filled with pity. Meanwhile, on the
Speaker A
other side, facing Sherui's roar, Aiha Jyns gaze remained calm. Shersu, do you know what an open scheme is? It means that no matter what choice you make, it won't affect my specific plans.
Speaker A
If you suspect Hiru and Saratobi, that's good for me. and the Achiha since the clan can have one more expert. Even if you still choose to trust her and Saratobi, it won't have any impact on my plans. Open schemes are different from
Speaker A
conspiracies, they cannot be counteracted. Shway was stunned. The others looked at Aiha Jeene as if admiring a lofty mountain and flowing water. Their hearts filled with admiration. Aiha Jyn's scheming ability was simply astonishing. Even if explicitly told you could not change it,
Speaker A
you could only follow his scheme. In the end, Sherse let out a helpless sigh and then left the courtyard directly. As for this Aiha Jeene did not stop him. He merely watched Sherse leave with indifference, then spoke to the others
Speaker A
present. Fagaku's decision to delegate power is a good thing. Let's proceed with the plan as scheduled. Hearing this, everyone was puzzled. Their minds took a moment to catch up and finally Aiha Satsuna asked, "Execute the original plan or the one you mentioned
Speaker A
to Shers." Gene, were you deceiving him when you said that? Aiha Yashiro also looked confused. Ajihajene was slightly taken aback. He instinctively glanced at everyone and upon seeing their confusion, he couldn't help but let out a helpless sigh. Good heavens, the Aiha
Speaker A
really had simple minds. He rubbed his forehead in exasperation but still began to explain. Both plans need to be executed. I didn't mean to deceive Shersu. Although they are all my deductions, and I have no evidence, I genuinely believe the Kenoha higher-ups
Speaker A
want to kill him. And I indeed plan to use Sher Sui's death to scheme against the Kohaa high-erups. This doesn't affect our previously formulated plan.
Speaker A
After all, I only said I wouldn't deceive Shiru. I never promised to tell him all the plans. Uh upon hearing Aiha Jyns explanation, everyone was speechless. Though it was technically true, wasn't this essentially misleading Shers? However, if one thought about it
Speaker A
carefully, what Achihajin said was indeed correct? After all, they weren't on the same side, and the plans he revealed were true. He just hadn't disclosed the full scope. So, alas, everyone's gaze toward Aiha instantly became complicated. Yet they also felt a
Speaker A
sense of reassurance. Having such a leader was a good thing for the Aiah. At the very least, it was no easy task for Kohaa to set a trap for Aiha Jin.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, after leaving Jyn's courtyard, Sher Suer's eyes were filled with confusion. At this moment, his heart was truly in turmoil.
Speaker A
He knew he shouldn't believe Aiha Jyn's instigation. But Sheru, though blindly loyal, was not foolish. Sometimes lies don't hurt. The truth is the sharp blade. As someone who had earned the name Shers Sway of the Body Flicker on
Speaker A
the battlefield, although his scheming ability was not as good as others, he at least had the basic skill of reading people. Thus, thinking back to after he had told the Hokag about his Mangeko ability, Husen Saratobi, just as Aiha
Speaker A
had said never met him in private again, I every time he saw Harusen, there were at least two Ubu members accompanying him. Especially Husen Soratobi's gaze.
Speaker A
He had never looked him in the eye again. In the past, he hadn't thought much of it. But now that Aiha Jeene had pointed it out, it would be a lie to say he held no resentment. Even though he
Speaker A
understood Husen Suratobi's actions, the feeling of betrayal was terrible, especially since he had trusted Husen so deeply. Have you heard Elder Jyn's speech? It's all over the place. I really didn't expect Huen Saratobi to be so ruthless. The Hokag looks so kind,
Speaker A
but I never thought he could do such a thing. Do you think Elder Gene is overthinking this? Although Elder Gene hasn't provided any evidence, sometimes too many coincidences are no longer coincidences. That's true. Let's be more careful from now on. Amid the dense
Speaker A
discussions around him, Shersu felt a sense of forboding. What was going on? What were they all talking about? It seemed to be about the Hokag.
Speaker A
Sherui's expression instantly turned serious. Although he had some reservations about Huen Saratobi, he still trusted the village and the Hokag more. He didn't go forward to ask directly. Instead, he hid in a small alley, used the transformation technique, and then came out again. Then
Speaker A
he joined the chatting crowd and learned of Aiha Jyns earlier remarks. His scalp tingled from the mysterious deaths of Nwaki Senju and Dan Ko to the extermination of the Uzumaki and Senju clans, the successive departures and defections of the Sanin, then Sukumo
Speaker A
Hitaki's forced suicide, and finally Minato Namik's death. One incident after another. This left him with mixed feelings because many things were indeed hard to explain. Just the leak of Sakumo Hataki's mission. No matter how you looked at it, it was inexplicable. The
Speaker A
most confidential S-rank mission was leaked and spread throughout Kenoha within a day. Yet, the U conducted no investigation. This simply didn't make sense. Although he didn't know much about the other incidents, he knew that one or two things could be coincidences,
Speaker A
but when there were so many, could they still be explained by coincidence? Okage sama, should I trust you? Sheruis expression darkened his eyes clouded with complex emotions. Sigh. After a soft sigh, he departed from the radical factions compound regarding the village
Speaker A
and the Aiha clan. Sherse felt the need to deliberate further. Since Aihaene had no immediate plans for action, he decided to seize this opportunity to conduct his own investigations. The land outside the radical factions compound was desolate. Though this area still
Speaker A
belonged to the Aiha, the surrounding houses lay abandoned, exuding an eerie stillness. After all, nearly every Achiha member had relocated to the radical factions compound. However, unfortunately, just as he was about to return home to rest and reflect, an ANBU
Speaker A
operative appeared and blocked his path. Sheru, the Hokag request your presence. Understood. I'll be there. Shers furrowed his brow, but nodded in acquiescence. To be honest, he had little desire to see Huen Saratobi at this moment. Yet, the habits cultivated
Speaker A
over years of service compelled him to respond without hesitation. Subsequently, after taking a deep breath, he arrived at the Hokag's office. Lord Hokag Shers knelt on one knee. his face radiating loyalty. His gaze had shifted subtly from before his
Speaker A
eyes briefly sweeping toward the A&Bu lurking in the shadows. He also noticed details about Husen Saratobi, the Hokag that he had never paid attention to in the past. For instance, Husen Soratobi subconsciously lowered his hokag hat and upon seeing him instinctively cast his
Speaker A
eyes downward, showing no intention of meeting his gaze even without activating his sharing shers could keenly perceive the faint tension emanating from Husen Saratob's body. Though the movements were subtle, they did not escape his notice. Having come from the
Speaker A
battlefield, if he lacked such basic vigilance and the ability to read others, he would have perished long ago on the front lines. Thus, in the past, he had simply trusted Huen Soritoi to deeply never stopping to consider such
Speaker A
things. But now, everything was different. Even though he still trusted Huen Saratobi, Aiha Jyns words had taken root. Instinctively, he began to observe these minor details. Perhaps in his own way, he wanted to prove Aiha wrong. Unfortunately, however, his
Speaker A
discovery seemed instead to validate what Aiha gene had claimed. At this realization, his heart grew heavy with conflicting emotions. Mm. Shway.
Speaker A
Although today is your day off, matters concerning the Aiha are too crucial for me to leave unattended. I must reluctantly call upon your services.
Speaker A
Today, you and Fugaku visited the radical factions compound. Could you tell me what transpired there? Husen Suratobi spoke with a gentle smile, curving at the corners of his mouth. His face remained a picture of benevolence, his tone warm and reassuring. Yet upon
Speaker A
hearing the inquiry, Sherui's heart jolted, he quickly suppressed his inner turmoil and recounted everything truthfully. Withholding nothing, he concealed nothing. This included Achihajins threats to Fugaku Fagaka's despair that led him to withdraw from worldly affairs and the warnings and threats Aiha had directed
Speaker A
at Sherse himself. He recounted every detail with complete accuracy. Of course, he omitted the revelation of Fugaku awakening the mano sharing as well as the whispers he had overheard within the clan's territory. On the one hand, he feared increasing the villages
Speaker A
vigilance and straining relations with the Achiha further. But more significantly, he struggled to articulate these matters for the implications were far too offensive to Huen Saratobi. Deep within a faint dread stirred within him, the rumors had already begun circulating within the
Speaker A
clan's territory. But given how rarely clan members ventured into the village to interact, they would likely remain contained for some time. But what if those rumors ever leaked out? He dared not imagine it. The thought made his head ache, and he felt a sense of relief
Speaker A
that the clan remained so insular. Nonsense. How could I ever deliberately watch Shers walk to his death? Danzo, absolutely impossible. He is an elder of this village. How could he possibly lay a hand on its own citizens? Aihajin
Speaker A
speculations are a complete slander against this village. Sure, you must not believe a word of it. Hiuus and Suratobi slammed his hand upon the desk, forcing down the terror rising within him, he rushed to refute the accusation, but
Speaker A
simultaneously his heart quakd with fear for Aiha Jyns judgment struck him as disturbingly accurate. Danzo would inevitably make a move against Shers Suway. The only question was when, and he himself would undoubtedly choose to turn a blind eye, then hold Danzo
Speaker A
accountable afterward. That bastard Aihaene had seen through the innermost recesses of his mind. The very thought sent a chill down his spine. Having such a man at the helm of the Achiha clan boeded ill for the village. He would be
Speaker A
far more formidable to deal with than Fagaku ever was. Rest assured, Lord Hokag, I still choose to place my faith in this village. Shers hastened to respond upon hearing this. Hiru and Saratobi observing the sincerity on Sher Suis face breathed an inward sigh
Speaker A
of relief and quickly smiled. That puts my mind at ease. Sheru, do not let such baseless thoughts take root. I understand, Lord Hokag. Shway nodded. Hi Suritoi paused for a moment studying his emotions before asking how did Achiha
Speaker A
Jeene come to know of your man Gekko. I'm not certain either. It puzzles me just as much. Shers fell into genuine bewilderment. And only after a long while did he speak hesitantly. Perhaps it is an ability of his man Gekko. Some
Speaker A
form of prophetic power. I see indeed. He too was at a loss. After all, he had revealed the nature of his maneko abilities to only one person, Herusen Saratobi. Thus, he could conceive of no other explanation besides a prophetic
Speaker A
ability. Herusen Saratobi's expression grew increasingly grim. A prophetic ability would be utterly devastating. It would mean that no matter how he schemed, Aihaene would anticipate his every move and either counter or thwart him in advance. This was a formidable
Speaker A
predicament. In the end, after learning of all that had transpired within the Achiha clan that day, he offered Shers a few words of reassurance before sending him home to rest. Once Shers Sway had departed, his fury erupted as he slammed
Speaker A
his hand against the desk. Damn it, curse it all. How did that Achihaene become so infuriatingly difficult to handle?
Speaker A
Having vented his rage, Herusen Soratobi knocked on the desk and an AMBU operative knelt respectfully on one knee. Herusen Serto thought for a moment before speaking in a detached tone, "Compile everything Shers Sway just told me and deliver it to Elder Danzo. Warn
Speaker A
him that he must not lay a hand on Shers for the foreseeable future. As you command Lord Hokag, the Ambu bowed and departed. After the NBU left, Husen Saratobi let out a heavy sigh. His burden was immense. It was clear that
Speaker A
dealing with Achihajene would not be accomplished overnight. This man was quick to resort to mutual destruction.
Speaker A
If he could not be neutralized first, then even if the Achiha clan were annihilated, he would remain a monumental threat to the village. A hidden Mangeko wielder targeting the ordinary members of various ninja clans and innocent civilians would leave the
Speaker A
village with virtually no means of defense. He would have to be patient. First transfer the Achiha to that cesspit known as the police force, then find ways to weaken the clan further. As for the rest, he would deal with it in
Speaker A
due course. However, the one thing that truly made him uneasy was the vill's ever widening fiscal deficit. During the Third Great Ninja War, the funds allocated by the land of fire had long been siphoned off. Nearly 90% of it
Speaker A
divided among the Suratobi, Udetain, Midocado, and Shamura clans. Of the meager remainder, Shamura Danzo had taken the lion's share, leaving barely enough to sustain the war effort until its conclusion. Now, with the shortfall in survivor benefits, the need to
Speaker A
stockpile grain reserves, and the cost of paper bombs, canai, shuriken, and other supplies. The daimo was already refusing to fund such a massive shortfall. If he couldn't finish off the uchihasoon, where on earth would he find the resources to cover this enormous
Speaker A
financial burden? Hirus and Saratobi's head began to throb with worry. Early the next morning, groups of Yuzbo set out from their clan territory. Every family dragging along their households and all their belongings making their way through the village's most bustling
Speaker A
district and heading straight for the original Yuzbo ancestral land. On the streets, the villagers were horrified.
Speaker A
Ever since the Ninetales incident ended, the Yuzbo had been branded as the culprits, though no concrete evidence could be found at the time. Yet even so, the Yuzbo had been driven out of the villages prosperous areas, forced to
Speaker A
huddle in a corner on the outskirts. From that day onward, aside from the security department members, the villagers barely saw a single yuzbo.
Speaker A
Now, unexpectedly, the yuzbo had returned. What is this? Why is the village doing this? I don't want to live so close to the yuzbo. This morning, the bulletin board in front of the Haing building stated that after an
Speaker A
investigation over this period, the village believes the likelihood of the Ninetailes incident being caused by the yuzbo is very low. Additionally, the Yuzbo have shown good behavior recently.
Speaker A
So, the village has decided to return their ancestral land to them. The village is foolish. Even without the Ninetailes incident, I still don't want to live next to the Yuzbo. We finally managed to drive those damned yuzbo away, but now they're allowed to come
Speaker A
back just like that. The streets buzzed with murmurss. All the villagers wore grim expressions, and the ordinary ninja were much the same. Only the members of the various ninja clans and the civilian ninja with a certain status had complex
Speaker A
looks in their eyes. Clearly, those who understood the inside story knew that despite the village's high sounding announcement, the truth was that in the power struggle between the Yuzbo and the vill's highranking officials this time, the Yuzbo had gained the upper hand.
Speaker A
Helpless, the village backed down. Among the crowd, a white-haired U agent was on full alert, closely watching the Yuzbo to prevent any conflict between them and the villagers. But just then, the energetic bull cut Mate Kai came running
Speaker A
over. Kaki, you're getting too caught up in the spectacle, aren't you? But today is truly a day worth celebrating. The facts prove that the Yuzbo are still everyone's comrades. On such a happy day, how about a youthful competition?
Speaker A
The white-haired U was speechless. Looking at this hot-blooded youthful fool, he didn't know what to say for a moment. Was this something to celebrate?
Speaker A
Knowing the truth, he only felt a headache. This new leader of the Yuzbo was clearly no ordinary troublemaker.
Speaker A
Now that they had moved back to the village center, he could imagine there would be even more antics in the future.
Speaker A
However, he didn't bother to explain this to Mate Kai. He simply said coldly. I'm on duty as an u right now executing a mission. You can't just talk to me casually. Fine then. Mate Kai scratched his head. I'll wait for you to get off
Speaker A
work. Kak's mouth twitched thinking spare me the trouble. He was already busy enough every day. He truly had no energy for a competition. At a tea house overlooking the street on the second floor by the window. The current
Speaker A
generation of Zhu Dai sat drinking tea and chatting. Shan Jong Hai looking at the Yuzbo figures couldn't help but let out a soft sigh. Troubled times. In response, Nyong Lujos expression remained unchanged, but he stared blankly at the Yuzbo. His gaze filled
Speaker A
with complexity. Sha Dingwa, on the other hand, couldn't be bothered to think too much. He didn't even touch the tea on the table. Instead, eating snacks one after another. Dings was stopped eating, Shan Jong- Hai said helplessly.
Speaker A
His mood was already sour, and the sound of Chao Dings was snacking only agitated him further. In response, Chao Dings was shrugged. What else should I do if not eat? Forget it. I can't reason with you, Shan Jong- Hai said full of resignation.
Speaker A
Luji, what do you think? Nalyang Lu pondered for a moment before setting down his teacup helplessly. This is a matter between the Yuzbo and the village's high rank. It has nothing to do with us, Zu Dai. In any case, I don't
Speaker A
want to get involved in these messy affairs. Shan Jong Hai found this hard to understand. He gave Naong Lu a deep look. You didn't used to say that. The situation has changed, Naong Lu said calmly. So, my attitude must change,
Speaker A
too. Shan Jong- Hai was somewhat surprised. Is that Yuzbo Gene really that formidable? Nyong Lu nodded. In particular, recalling his brief encounter with Yuzbo Gene last time, he still felt a chill run down his spine.
Speaker A
Then, without any intention of hiding it, he briefly recounted that encounter. That's about it. What was supposed to be a questioning of Yuziv Jyn's responsibility, he not only handled with ease, but even managed to drag us Zu Lu
Speaker A
die into it. And on the slyo discord between us and the hanging. His thinking is unconstrained and his reaction speed is terrifying. He can instantly find your weak point and counterattack. More importantly, he is powerful enough. He dared to kill Tuan Tong in the Hoy
Speaker A
Yings office, showing no respect for Yu Fe Risen, and yet in the end, he managed to maintain a state of conflict without breaking ties. Facing a Yuzbo who can think and is also strong in combat, I really don't want to go up
Speaker A
against him. I even advise your two clans not to get involved in this matter. If it were Fua in charge, I would definitely support the Haingh High rank because it's obvious to everyone that the Muih High rank would win. Now
Speaker A
it's different. The current Yuzbo is under Jyn's control. The Muihi rank has been acting against the grain for years.
Speaker A
How many ninja clans will fully support them. Who wins and who loses is still unknown. Nalyong Lus tone was somber. Shan Jong Hai and Shoa Dingwa fell into deep thought upon hearing this because listening to Nalyong Lu, they
Speaker A
too sensed the terror of Yuzbo Jeene. After a long silence, Shan Jhong Hai spoke, "If the Yuzbo wins, will they make a move against Zhu Lu Dai? That's what I'm worried about." Tu Cho Daoing was said, "Seriously, Zhu Dai is a
Speaker A
faction of the Hoyang. I'm afraid that if the Yuzbo come to power, they will settle scores with our three clans." In response, Nyong Lus eyes flickered.
Speaker A
After a long deliberation, he spoke solemnly. I can't vouch for other Yuzbo, but if Yuzbo Gene comes to power, I believe he won't settle scores with us.
Speaker A
He is a very rational Yuzbo. As long as he's not a madman, everything can be discussed. And haven't you noticed the Yuzbo's tactics have changed now? Under the leadership of Yuzbo Gene, the Yuzbo now only target the Yufi four clans, the
Speaker A
U and the root. Not once have they acted against other ninja clans. That in itself speaks volumes. So, let's wait.
Speaker A
The situation isn't clear yet. There's no need for Zhu die to rush. For now, let's just watch the tiger fight from the mountain. Shan Jong- Hai and showings were thought for a moment and nodded. Indeed, Nalyang Lujos words
Speaker A
struck accord with them. In the end, the two decided to follow Luigis advice. Inside the village, discussions were rife. Apart from the commoners, who knew nothing and were kept in the dark by the village, the thoughts of the
Speaker A
various ninja clans were similar to those of the Eno Shikacho trio. No one was foolish. Everyone had witnessed the actions of the village's high-ranking officials over the years, and they had long harbored resentment toward Herusen Saratobi. However, this resentment was
Speaker A
now suppressed in their hearts. This was also the reason why when Orochimaru initiated the Kenoha crush, the village suffered almost no other losses. Only the death of the third Hokag Huen Saratobi. After all, could the prestigious number one ninja village be
Speaker A
unable to handle the four red Yong formation conjured by mere fortun? Indeed, the formation was formidable, but its potency depended on the strength of the ninjas maintaining the barrier.
Speaker A
Thus, as long as the clash between the Aiha and the vill's upper Echelon did not affect their own clans, these ninja clans were content to watch from the sidelines at the Aiha ancestral grounds.
Speaker A
Though they had been away for only two or 3 years, the Achiha who returned could not help but shed tears and weep aloud. At the same time, their respect for Aiha surged to new heights. Compared to Fagaku, who only retreated and
Speaker A
appeased, they were far more willing to support Achihajin. After all, Achihaene could genuinely lead them to victory and gradually change their current predicament. All right, everyone. What I promised has now been fulfilled. All civilians may return home and resume
Speaker A
their normal work and lies as soon as possible, but avoid going out carelessly in the coming days. The ninja will immediately set up defensive barriers, and the patrol squads will commence patrol actions right away. Additionally, dispatch a special squad composed
Speaker A
entirely of Jonan to thoroughly search the entire ancestral grounds in the shortest time possible mainly to check for any traps deliberately laid by the villages upper echelon. Ajihajene spoke with a stern tone. Although returning to the ancestral grounds was a good thing,
Speaker A
his primary concern was security. After all, who knew whether the vill's upper echelon might set traps? What if they went mad and covered the entire underground ancestral grounds with explosive tags? Everyone bowed in obedience to Aiha Jyns orders.
Speaker A
Clearly, after his frequent actions during this period, especially securing the return of the ancestral grounds, he had earned the genuine allegiance of all. Immediately after the entire Achihigh ancestral grounds plunged into bustling activity. Smiles adorned every face. Laughter echoed throughout the
Speaker A
grounds and a feeling of hope surged in people's hearts. Meanwhile, on the other side, Aiha Jeene was accompanied by several elders to a massive courtyard.
Speaker A
Jean, your status is different now. You cannot stay in that small courtyard. Otherwise, when clan meetings are held in the future, your home won't even have a suitable venue. This courtyard used to be clan head Madara's residence. After
Speaker A
he left the village, it naturally fell into disuse. Even later, clan heads like Fagaku and his father built their own residences elsewhere. Your contributions to the clan merit this residence. Aiha sets in his eyes were sincere. The other
Speaker A
elders raised no objections, also believing that Aiha deserved it. Aiha Jeene narrowed his eyes. Gazing at this ancient courtyard before him, he hadn't expected it to be the former residence of Aihamadara. Taking a deep breath, he pushed open the courtyard gate. What met
Speaker A
his eyes was an expansive artificial lake complete with rockeries, flowing water pavilions, and towers. After crossing the front courtyard to the middle courtyard, he found an enormous training ground. Upon reaching the rear courtyard, there was a vast garden. The
Speaker A
residents also had numerous rooms enough to comfortably house one or 200 people. He truly knew how to enjoy life with such a large three-section estate.
Speaker A
Indeed fitting for Achiha Madara. But after living in a place like this, how did Madara later endure living in that dark, dim cave underground? Aiha Jyns eyes flickered. Without commenting further, he simply nodded and said, "Since everyone agrees, I won't
Speaker A
stand on ceremony. From now on, this is my home. That's only proper." The others nodded in approval. 2 hours later, the Aiha civilians arranged by Setsuna and others had thoroughly cleaned the entire courtyard. Everyone gathered in the tea
Speaker A
room and as they took their seats, a young girl had already brewed tea for them. Jean, let me introduce you. This is my daughter, Achihasuki. Her ninja talent is average. She only has two tommo, and she'll likely never advance
Speaker A
further. From now on, she'll handle household affairs for you. I've arranged for a batch of servants for you. After all, with such a large courtyard, you can't possibly clean it all yourself.
Speaker A
Although you're not the clan head, yet you have many matters to attend to daily, so you shouldn't waste your energy on trivialities. In the future, you'll also need your own guard. You may select two elite Jonan squads," Aiha
Speaker A
Setsa said with a smile. The other elders raised no objections as these amenities were basically standard for someone of Achihajin standing.
Speaker A
"Previously, the clan was too chaotic with factions competing against one another, external interference from the village, and Gene having been in power for too short a time. Now that things had temporarily stabilized, it was only natural that the necessary accudants be
Speaker A
provided. As for this, Achiha Gene remained calm. Being an Aiha, he knew the clan had such customs since it was given he would accept it. However, he couldn't help but speak about Elder Setsuna's granddaughter. Elder Setsuna, isn't it inappropriate for your
Speaker A
granddaughter to do this? It's fine. Aiha Setsuna waved his hand directly. Just let her work with Eugene. My granddaughter's ninja talent is average, and I and old man won't live much longer. Naturally, I need to find her a
Speaker A
patron in advance. You'll give me that little bit of face, won't you? Being an Aiha, he was quite direct. He didn't bother with beating around the bush and spoke his true thoughts plainly. In the past, when meeting Aiha, he had never
Speaker A
let his granddaughter meet him because he wasn't certain of Jyn's abilities back then. Even after handing over the position of leader of the radical faction, he still had to carefully consider his granddaughter's safety.
Speaker A
Now, however, things were different. Aiha had proven his capability, and so Setsuna had made his decision straightforwardly, and in response, Aiha thought for a moment and understood Setsuna's intentions. Favors are like water. Each use diminishes them. Perhaps in the future, out of respect for
Speaker A
Setsuna, he might help his granddaughter a few times. But once the favors were used up, the connection would fade.
Speaker A
Thus, having his granddaughter work with him was a clever move. All right, I accept. With Achiha Jyns nod, not a faint smile appeared on Setsuna's face.
Speaker A
For the time being, the atmosphere in the tea room became relaxed. But just then, Aiha Tadashi walked in, elders in A&U came by. He brought the Hokag's order, requiring us to resume the work of the police force as soon as possible.
Speaker A
The crowds eyes flickered, their lips curling into cold sneers. What was coming had finally arrived. The village wasn't going to be so easily exploited, but what to do next still depended on Aiha Jins thoughts. All eyes turned to Achiha, who wasted no words. Elder
Speaker A
Yatsiro, you'll handle it. Me a Yatsushiro was takenback. Aiha slowly nodded, a faint smile crossing his face before he said, you're one of the moderate faction leaders. The village isn't on high alert against you. Your appearance will lull them. Bring 20
Speaker A
lower ninja squads and set up the framework for the police department first. Remember, if any trouble arises, the solution is one word, stall. If the Hokag presses say the clan just moved and everything is chaotic, so we can't
Speaker A
spare more manpower. If the village keeps pushing, tell them the Aiha are willing to give up the police department. Let whichever clan wants to take it. Before Aihaene had been worried about who would take over this mess.
Speaker A
After all, he needed to restore his dojitsu daily manage clan affairs and outweat the village while keeping the big picture in mind. He couldn't devote all his energy to the police department.
Speaker A
Now, perfect. Since the moderates and centrists had come to him, it was better to let the moderates handle this. As for that, Achihai Yatsiro, though lacking confidence, finally accepted the burden.
Speaker A
All right, understood. I'll strictly follow Jyn's instructions and do my best with the police department. Time passed slowly. Though the Aiha had relocated, they quickly stabilized. After all, compared to the clan grounds on the village outskirts where they had lived
Speaker A
for only a few years, they had resided here much longer. Aihajene was practically in seclusion. Apart from spending 2 hours a day practicing ninjutsu and lightly exercising, he stayed home almost all the time. All to restore his dojutsu. In his previous
Speaker A
clash with Danzo, he had used nearly 3% of his dojutsu to thoroughly intimidate the village's upper echelons. To always be at his peak, he needed to fully recover that dojutsu. As for the squables within the village and clan, he
Speaker A
only ensured the big picture stayed on track, delegating the details to his subordinates. This delegation of authority would have delighted other clans, but the Aiha were an exception.
Speaker A
Almost every member of every faction was single-minded. They excelled on the battlefield, but were utterly unfit for desk work. If not for Achihajin's insistence, they would have gladly quit, especially the police department.
Speaker A
Previously, there was Fugaku indecisive, but barely steady. Now with Achihi Yatsushiro, though he was a moderate, the mountain of paperwork nearly drove him mad. At 8 in the morning at the police department, Aihi Yatsushiro had just sat down in his office when someone
Speaker A
knocked. Hearing the knock, the corner of his mouth twitched and a headache began to set in. But sigh. After a helpless sigh, he spoke listlessly.
Speaker A
"Come in, Lord Yatsushiro." Aiha Jinn entered and immediately knelt on one knee. Those troublemakers are asking about the verdict again. Should we keep stalling? This case is simple. He just ate without paying. Everyone knows that local thug. Why not just arrest him? The
Speaker A
jin's face was strained almost in tears. Yes, because of Aiha Jyn's new rules, they were being tortured beyond belief.
Speaker A
Problems that used to be solved easily now required a whole set of procedures, leaving these illiterate ninjas baffled.
Speaker A
Hearing this, Achiha Yatsiro said in a hollow tone, "Do you have evidence?" Well, the jenning gave up, shrugging.
Speaker A
Many villagers saw it. Aihi Yatsushiro rolled his eyes. Then find those witnesses, take their statements, and have them sign and fingerprint. They won't cooperate. The jinnon shook his head. Aihi Yatsushiro continued, "Do some ideological work. It's impossible." The jinon was nearly sobbing. No one is
Speaker A
willing to testify. "Eating without paying is a minor offense, at most a month in jail." The villagers are afraid the thug will retaliate after release.
Speaker A
This is a dead end. The jennon poured out his grievances. But unfortunately, Achihai Yatsushiro had heard enough over the past few days and cut him off before he could finish. Enough. Shut up.
Speaker A
Complaining to me is useless. This is Elder Jyn's rule, so follow it. If you can't convince them, keep trying to persuade them. In short, as long as the police department is making an effort, it's fine. I haven't set a deadline,
Speaker A
have I? Just take it slow. The Jennon looked bewildered, cursing inwardly. Yes, there was no deadline, but the problem was that those troublemakers were blocking the police department every day, giving him a massive headache. He instinctively started, but
Speaker A
no buts. Aihi Yatsiro cut him off. That's final. Get out. The jennon swallowed a mouthful of words, but could only hold them back. Finally, with a sigh, he had no choice but to leave.
Speaker A
Watching the office returned to silence, Aihi Yatsushiro relaxed a little, then let out a long, weary sigh. What a headache. But unfortunately, before his sigh could end, the familiar knock came again. Aihi Yatsushiro's temples bulged with veins. Enter. Lord
Speaker A
Yatsushiro. Have you taken statements? found evidence, completed the procedure. Not yet. Get out and follow the procedure. But no, but get out. Then the newly arrived police department member scured out of the office. 10 minutes later, the familiar knock sounded again.
Speaker A
This time, Aihi Yatsiro, completely enraged, shed his usual moderate demeanor, flung, opened the door, and roared. Take statements. Find evidence.
Speaker A
Secure witnesses. Don't come to my office until the procedure is complete. Get out. Get out. Get out right now. If I see you bastards again, I'll roast you with a great fireball. In the police department, a dead silence rained.
Speaker A
Everyone looked at Aihaurro, who was speaking directly and couldn't help but shiver. Many Jenn who had come to vent their grievances instinctively changed their minds, not daring to provoke the enraged old man. But the problem was that what had originally been easy to
Speaker A
handle had become too complicated for them after Aihaene issued the new regulations. However, there was no choice. Compared to being scolded by Aiha Yoshiro, it was better to endure the nagging of those troublesome citizens for a while. Only the jin
Speaker A
standing at the door despite his terrified expression still gathered his courage and spoke. Elder Yoshiro the Yamu has delivered a notice requesting the police department chief to go to the Hokage's office. Upon hearing this, Aiha Yoshiro's angry expression
Speaker A
instantly calmed down. The Hokag summons. He had actually anticipated this. After all, although the police department's procedures had become more formal, few problems had actually been resolved, those troublesome citizens would surely go to the Hokage building to complain. However, although he was
Speaker A
assigned to handle the police department, he was not actually the chief. After a moment's hesitation, he said, "I understand. You may leave." The jennon upon hearing this felt as if pardoned. Meanwhile, Aiha Yoshiro pondered for a long time and decided to
Speaker A
consult Aiha. After a moment, he returned to the Aiha compound and found Aiha, who was training. Upon hearing this, Aiha Jeene said directly, "Since the hokage is looking for the police department chief, let Fagaka go." Aiha Yoshiro looked bewildered. "Fagaku, will
Speaker A
that work?" Facing the bewildered Yoshiro, Aihajene remained calm. Fagaku is still the clan leader and the village hasn't removed him from the position of police department chief. You are just an elder of the clan and I am just an
Speaker A
ordinary Chunin. The Hokag is looking for the police department chief. If you don't let Fagaka handle it, who else?
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene shrugged. However, looking at Achiha Yashiro, who still couldn't understand, he couldn't help but sigh inwardly. The Aiha indeed were not good at handling such matters. Rubbing his brow, he began to explain. Elder Yoshiro, you must remember one thing.
Speaker A
Our goal is not to solve problems, but to cause as much trouble for the village as possible. The busier the village is, the less time they have to trouble us.
Speaker A
So, does it matter whether Fagaku has authority? Since Saratobi Haren didn't specifically ask for me, let Fagaku as the police department chief go. As for whether Fagaku can solve the problem, that's none of our damn business. As long as we ensure the procedures are
Speaker A
correct and no mistakes are made, the village hire-ups have no evidence to hold against us. The rest is none of our concern. After hearing this explanation, Aiha Yashiro suddenly understood. So, this is how it's done. He nodded and
Speaker A
then took his leave. However, when he found Fugaku, who was currently idol at home, Fagaku was dumbfounded upon hearing the news. I'm already idol at home. What does this have to do with me?
Speaker A
Listen to Jean. Consider it a favor. Aiha Yoshiro said with a helpless expression, "Even though you're idol at home, you still have to live within the clan, right? It's not wrong to build a good relationship with Gene. You know
Speaker A
very well about Itachi's thoughts can cause big trouble sooner or later. Since you can't solve Itachi's problem, building a good relationship with Gene now will make it easier for you to plead for leniency later. What do you think?"
Speaker A
Fagaka fell silent at a loss for words. He was indeed troubled by Itachi's matter, especially recently being idol at home and truly focusing on Itachi. He realized how serious his son's problem was. Especially after joining the Yu, he
Speaker A
had almost become a staunch loyalist of Saratobi Herusen. Yes, although Saratobi Herusen had sent Itachi and Sher Sway as spies, the problem was that the Aiha clan members were simply incapable of such deception. Their minds lacked scheming and they didn't know how to
Speaker A
act. Previously, Fagaku was too busy worrying about the clans and the vill's troubles to have time to care about Itachi's growth. Now that he was idle at home, he immediately noticed the problem. But unfortunately, Itachi's mindset had already been set. Even if he
Speaker A
intervened, it was already too late. "All right, I understand." Fugaku took a deep breath and then headed toward the Hokage building. It was just a matter of bluffing. He was familiar with that. He had previously bluffed in various ways
Speaker A
within the clan. Now, even if it was against the Kohaa higher-ups, he could handle it with ease. Meanwhile, on the other side, Aiha Yoshiro looked at Fugaku, who was already far away with a complex expression. Previously, he had
Speaker A
felt some sympathy for Fugaku. But now, seeing him idle at home with a ruddy complexion and no trace of worry on his brow, he looked several years younger than before. And what about himself?
Speaker A
Troubles in the police department kept coming and dark circles had formed under his eyes. But Endure, he hoped that Aiha truly had the ability to change the Aiha situation for the better. 20 minutes later, Fagaku arrived at the Hokag's
Speaker A
office. Saratobi Herusen was utterly exasperated. Saratobi Herusen, who was smoking while wearing his hokag, had almost cursed out loud the moment he saw Fagaku. Damn it, was he crazy? Sher Sway and Itachi were his spies. Did they really think he didn't know that Fagako
Speaker A
had no power and had been kicked out to idol at home? What was the point of talking to him? However, considering that what he had told the U was indeed to find the police department chief, and although Fagako had been stripped of
Speaker A
power, he still held the titles of police department chief and clan leader, which Aihaene had not revoked. Fine.
Speaker A
Saratobi Husen let out a sigh and then tapped the table. Um, Hokag sama. The U hidden in the corner appeared and knelt on one knee. Saratobi Herusen took a deep breath. Go find Aiha. Don't make a mistake. The Yu bowed and then left.
Speaker A
Fagaka was quite embarrassed, but his composure was decent, and he maintained his stoic expression. In short, as long as he wasn't embarrassed, the embarrassment would be on others.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Saratobi Harusen lowered his head to deal with official business, completely ignoring Fagaku. He simply pretended not to see him. 20 minutes later, Aiha arrived at the Hokag's office. After greeting Fugaku, he spoke in a very respectful tone, "Hokagama,
Speaker A
what is it that you wish to see me about?" It was only then that Saratobi Herusen looked up. His gaze at Aiha was profound. And then he spoke in a grave tone, "What is going on with the police
Speaker A
department? Why aren't you handling the villagers problems? I'm not the police department chief, so what's it to me?" Aiha rolled his eyes and retorted without hesitation. Achihajin was quite straightforward. Though he had already effectively controlled the entire Aiha
Speaker A
clan, why was he still not interested in seizing the clan leader authority? Even last time when Husen Saratobi proposed to make him the head of the police department, Aihaene flatly refused without hesitation. Still, that same phrase, authority and responsibility
Speaker A
must be equal. As long as Aiha didn't accept these positions, he would remain merely a tunein and these troublesome matters would not fall on his shoulders.
Speaker A
If any issues arose, they could go to Fuyu with a scapegoat. As for whether Fu could solve them, what did that have to do with him? Of course, would Fuyu be willing to bear the blame? Huh? At this
Speaker A
moment, Fuyu indeed had a pale face, trembling with anger. Yet, after a moment, he suppressed his frustration and didn't refute no choice. With that troublesome child, Attachi at home, given the ruthlessness Aihaene had displayed, even if only to leave a way
Speaker A
out for his family, he dared not easily fall out with Achihajene. So, endure. After all, he had been used to it for years. He could endure the leaf vill's higher-ups before and he could do the same with Aiha. Having realized this
Speaker A
fu's expression calm down. He stood there like a clay statue motionless and even when faced with Husuan Saratobi's strange gaze, he merely coughed and pretended not to see Husen Soratobi. His mind went blank, completely stunned.
Speaker A
What the hell is this how you play it? He was so angry he laughed, gritting his teeth and saying, "Since that's the case, then Fuyu, will you tell me how should this matter be resolved?" Uh me.
Speaker A
Fui [clears throat] was baffled. How to resolve? How the hell would I know being a mere figure head commander? He instinctively looked at Aiha. After all, he was the real powerholder. As for this, Aiha rolled his eyes. Clan leader
Speaker A
Fua, why are you looking at me? Since the Lord Hokage wants you to handle it, and you are the minister of police, you are naturally dutybound. Fuyu coughed and said, Well, I'll try my best. Herus and Saratobi rolled his eyes, try your
Speaker A
best, my ass. Does anyone in the Aiha clan even listen to you? But alas, although Achihajene could play games, he didn't have the time. So he angrily slammed the table. Aiha, that's enough.
Speaker A
Stop playing tricks with me. Since you choose to fight me within the rules, you must abide by the village's rules. The ninja clans of the village are not blind. The village has kept its promise.
Speaker A
If you choose to break the contract now, I hope you can bear the consequences.
Speaker A
Hiru and Suratobi's face was full of malice. Since he had already torn off the mask with Aiha and Fuyu, this useless man was no longer of any use. He naturally didn't bother to hide his true face. He was truly anxious. If it were
Speaker A
anything else, he would never have said it, wishing Aiha would break the contract. But the police department, absolutely not. This was the foundation for maintaining the hostility between the Aiha and the village. As the Hokag for decades, he knew well that ordinary
Speaker A
villagers were the most forgetful, most easily manipulated, and most easily bought off. Currently, the police department was delaying, but it was damn well justified. The villagers had no reason to complain about the police department. If the Aiha kept mingling
Speaker A
for a while longer, their bad reputation would disappear and at most they would gain a new title of useless. On the contrary, when the villagers couldn't solve their problems, they would likely resent him as the Hokag. So, no, other
Speaker A
things could be negotiated, but the police department was different. Even if forced, the police department had to return to its former state. Fua seeing Huen Saratobi like this, Fuyu was stunned. What the hell? When did Husen Saratobi become like this? Was this the
Speaker A
gentle and kind old man just a bit conflicted that he had in mind? Meanwhile, on the other side, compared to the utterly bewildered Fua Aihajins expression remained unchanged, but his tone grew serious.
Speaker A
Oh, interesting. Since the Lord Hokage is talking like this, then I agree to let the police department open for business. Did I do it? Breaking the contract. What are you talking about?
Speaker A
Aihajene was quite straightforward. At first, Harusen Saratobi wanted to play bureaucrat, so he was willing to play along and kick the ball around. Since Huen Saratobi had put aside the Hokag's identity and chose to talk as the leader
Speaker A
of a faction, Aiha also shed the skin of a tunin and directly put on the skin of the Aiha clan leader. Herus and Soratobi slammed the table. Aiha, don't go too far. I promised to give the Aiha the
Speaker A
ancestral land in exchange for the peace and stability of the village. To this Aiha was full of disdain. Sorry, you didn't make it clear. What you exchanged was the Achiha going to work the police department reopening for business. Those
Speaker A
were your exact words. Husen Saratobi's eyes darkened and he took a deep drag of his pipe. Nitpicking words is meaningless. That argument won't convince anyone else. Herusen Saratobi, you're wrong again. Aiha shook his head.
Speaker A
Actually, it can be convincing. In light of the numerous complaints from villagers against the police department in the past, we have decided to reform completely. From now on, we will adhere to the principles of having laws to follow, enforcing them strictly and
Speaker A
ensuring justice for all. To avoid wrongful cases as much as possible, and to enhance the happiness of Leaf Village's residents, the Aiha will henceforth focus on evidence and strictly follow procedures in every case. Everything for the sake of Leaf.
Speaker A
At this moment, Aiha gene was full of righteousness. No kidding. Did he really think only the Leaf villages higher-ups could play the will of fire? Someone who had experienced 9 years of compulsory education could play this game just as
Speaker A
well as Husuan Saratobi. Hirusen Saratobi was instantly dumbfounded. He stared at Aiha and shock his mind completely shortcircuited. Although he tried desperately to think, he could not find a single counterargument.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, Fuyu was stunned. His mind already overloaded. Could he really play it like this? When he had led the Aiha, he had never thought of this. Similarly, he gained a deeper understanding of Huen Saratobi.
Speaker A
It turned out Aiha Jeene was right. Hi Saratobi was usually hypocritical putting on a show for outsiders while only he naively believed it. Without Achiha Jins rise under his leadership, the Achiha might indeed have become dangerous in the future. After a
Speaker A
long silence, Hiru and Saratobi took a deep breath. Aiha Jin, what exactly do you want? Of course, to contribute to Leaf. Aiha replied without thinking.
Speaker A
Where the leaves dance, the fire burns ever brighter. Lord Hokag, don't be too moved. It's all for Leaf. Farewell. Hi Saratobi's gaze grew cryptic. A terrifying coldness flashed from his eyes his entire demeanor like an enraged vulture fixated on the retreating figure
Speaker A
of Aiha. Get out. He did not look at Fagaku merely pointing coldly toward the door. Fagaku felt a chill run down his spine. This was his first time witnessing her in such a rage shattering every illusion he had ever held about
Speaker A
the Hokag. And then displaying none of the arrogance befitting a man Gekko Sharinggon wielder, he fled the Hokage's office in utter disarray like a startled cat. Um notified Danzo Koharuru and Hamira, three elders. Tell them to set aside all current affairs
Speaker A
and come immediately. Hirusen spoke coldly. The U kneeling on one knee departed with respect. 10 minutes later, Fagaku caught up before the Aiha compound. He regarded Achiha Jeene with an extraordinarily complex expression, pondering for a long while before
Speaker A
speaking bitterly. GU don't hesitate. If you have something to say, just say it. Aiha Jeene appeared casual, his eyes half-cloed a faint smile, gracing his lips. Fugaku pondered long before finally asking, "Did you already know Harusen Saratobi's true nature? Your
Speaker A
words are unnecessary. Doesn't it stare you right in the face?" Aihajene rolled his eyes. Fagako asked, "How do you mean?" Aiha had no desire to waste breath on this. However, considering that many upcoming actions would indeed require Fagaku to serve as a scapegoat,
Speaker A
he simply stated directly to no Senjuko, Danhei, Gecko, Manado, Namikes, the Senu and Usuzamaki clans, and then the legendary Sanin of Kenoa, especially Orochimaru, a commoner like him. Where did he get the funds for human experimentation? Fagaku was dumbfounded
Speaker A
due to leaving early and never relocating to the current ancestral grounds, he had indeed been unaware of these matters. Seeing Fagaku's bewildered expression, Aiha spoke directly. You should go discuss this with the other elders. I have already shared these matters with them. The
Speaker A
Kohaa High Command will certainly not remain idle from here on. I need to give them something else to occupy themselves with, so I have no time to discuss this further. With that, he waved his hand casually and headed toward his home.
Speaker A
Fagaka's expression remained complex, but he ultimately made up his mind. I am also willing to contribute to the Aiha clan. If we ever reach the point of armed confrontation, I will stand with you. At this moment, he had made his
Speaker A
final decision. There was no other choice. Herusen's true nature revealed today had genuinely terrified him.
Speaker A
Having fully understood that he had been deceived all along, even if he had not shown it outwardly, when the time came for armed confrontation, he would naturally stand resolutely on Achihajin's side. Aihajins lips curved into a faint smile, but he merely
Speaker A
waved his hand casually and departed. Fugaku's willingness to act was of course a good thing. Although his mind was indeed rather slow, the man was at least a powerful maneko wielder.
Speaker A
Speaking of which, he actually felt somewhat grateful to Herusen Saratobi. Without today's incident, Fagaku would have merely lay low and done nothing.
Speaker A
Certainly never spoken those words. Shortly after, Aiha had barely sat down when Aihasuki brewed tea for him and began massaging his shoulders with utmost obedience. Such treatment was indeed enjoyable. However, although he was gradually growing accustomed to it,
Speaker A
he still felt somewhat uneasy. It was far too decadent. But he could not bear to refuse. It was after all her sincere intention. So he cleared his throat and spoke directly. Have Jean come here?
Speaker A
Yes, Elder Jeene. The Aiha guard at the door immediately knelt on one knee in a scent, then departed. A moment later, Aiha Jong entered, "Elder Jeene, you summon me." "Yes, help me with a task," Aiha said. Then he called Achiha Jong
Speaker A
over and whispered in his ear, "Have Elder Hackedai proceed with caution." When clan members patrol Kenoha, take the opportunity to create several shadow clones, use the transformation jutzu to conceal your presence and quietly spread information throughout various parts of
Speaker A
Kenoha. Remember, act swiftly. Aiha Jongs eyes were resolute. He nodded solemnly, then departed the compound and made his way to the police force headquarters. Gazing at the noisy marketlike police force headquarters, a hint of disdain curled his lips before
Speaker A
he proceeded to Elder Aiha Hakadai's office. Jean, has Gene given new instructions? Achi Haong nodded. After briefly recounting Achiha Jyns directives, Achiha Hakadai couldn't help but draw a sharp breath. Truly ruthless.
Speaker A
His eyes held a trace of horror, but he ultimately spoke solemnly. Tell Gene, I will handle this. Understood. Aiha Jong nodded. Elder Hakadai, I take my leave.
Speaker A
With his departure, the office fell silent. Aiha Hakadai took a deep breath before summoning his subordinate captain and assigning the mission. Meanwhile, on the other side, Fagaku found Aihhati and I and learned the so-called truth from him. Then, he fell into complete
Speaker A
silence. 5 minutes passed before a long sigh escaped his lips. Indeed, it's too coincidental. I always found it strange, as if Kenoha were cursed. Any ninja capable of standing on their own seemed to ultimately meet some unfortunate end.
Speaker A
Viewing it from Jyn's perspective, now all these people threatened Huen Saratobi's rule, and now it's the Achiha's turn. Fagaka's expression was deeply troubled, barely able to accept it. There was no way around it. This contradicted everything he had
Speaker A
previously believed. Aihhati and I sighed. Fagaka, do you truly believe this? His eyes were filled with doubt, clearly struggling to accept it himself.
Speaker A
Yes, as someone who had lived through the era of Achiadara, he understood all too well how drastically and extremely Achihas mindset could change after awakening the Mangeko Sharing.
Speaker A
Therefore, regarding Fagaku, a powerful Mangeko wielder, he genuinely did not believe the man could change his thoughts. And yet, Fagaka's face was etched with bitterness. The technique awakened in my left eye is called Izanagi prophecy. It can anchor a single
Speaker A
point to predict the future for a certain period. Through the intelligence gathered today and Herusen's true nature, I have dimly glimpsed a path to survival. I have abandoned all illusions. From now on, I will prepare completely for battle. As he spoke, a
Speaker A
killing intent erupted from his body. No longer timid as before, he actually carried a hint of a fierce eyes. Aihhati and I was somewhat startled, then broke into a gratified smile. Good. Fugaku had chosen to join. Only sure sway and
Speaker A
Itachi remained. Of course, they were the true hard bones, almost impossible to persuade. Inside the Hokage's office, the atmosphere was stiflingly heavy.
Speaker A
Even though Saratobi Husen had not spoken, the three who had just arrived, including Danzo, could feel an immense pressure. Husen, what's wrong? Uditen Koharuru was the first to speak.
Speaker A
Midokado Hamira's face was filled with worry after all their abilities were mediocre and they had only reached their current elder status thanks to Saratobi Herus support. Thus sensing something a miss, they were naturally very anxious. Only Danzo looked utterly
Speaker A
disdainful. With Root as his own private armed force, he was naturally more assertive than those two old friends.
Speaker A
Now he merely leaned on his cane sitting silently in his chair. All right, let's talk business. Seeing his old friends had arrived, Saratobi Herusen did not conceal anything and briefly recounted what had just happened. The more he spoke, the angrier he grew. Under
Speaker A
Achihaja Jyns leadership, the Achiha clan had completely slipped out of control. Realizing this, Saratobi Herusen was truly anxious. Uteng Koharu spoke first. Bastards, are they plotting rebellion? They must be punished.
Speaker A
Midokado Hamira added his opinion. Hearing this, Saratobi Husen directly asked, "Then should I leave this matter to you too?" Almost instantly, the two who had been so righteous just moments before fell silent. There was no choice.
Speaker A
Aiha Jyn's strength was overwhelming, and his methods were ruthless. He showed no respect, even to the Canoa higher-ups. Danzo, who had died several times before, knew this best. Provoking him would certainly lead to death.
Speaker A
Shouting a few times in the Hokag's office was fine, but actually leading a team to deal with Aiha. What a joke.
Speaker A
They didn't want to die, so without a doubt, they chickenened out. Saratobi Herusen. Looking at his two old friends who chose to play dead, he couldn't help but frown. What a disaster. They were useless at everything but excelled at
Speaker A
playing dead. Of course, he hadn't held much hope for them in the first place.
Speaker A
With a sigh, he turned to Danzo. And as for that, before Soratobi Harusen could speak, Danzo said with utter disdain, "I told you long ago, the Achiha are all madmen. The longer you delay, the more likely accidents will happen." Saratobi
Speaker A
Haruen's face was full of bitterness. Yes, he truly regretted it. The Achiha clan was too uncontrollable, and the power of the Shainggon was full of uncertainty. Someone might be a nobody today, but after a sudden shock tomorrow, they could unleash terrifying
Speaker A
power. But alas, with a helpless sigh, Saratobi Harusen put down his pipe. This is not the time to assign blame. Danzo, I need you to act immediately. You must do everything possible to eliminate Achihajene. His tone was extremely cold.
Speaker A
An opponent skilled in political maneuvering posed a far greater threat than any before. In the past, he had faced many challenges, but those enemies all had weaknesses that Saratobi Herusen could exploit relatively easily. For instance, he dared to kill Sinju Nawaki
Speaker A
and Ko Dan because he knew Sununade cared more about her grandfather's village. He dared to let the Uzumaki clan be completely annihilated without fear of Usuzamakimito going berserk because she cared about the Senju clan.
Speaker A
The moment Usuzumaki Mito died, he initiated the Hashiamarama experiment and conveniently wiped out the Senu clan. Hitaki Suko was too upright and cared about his son Kakashi. Manado Namik's weakness was Usuzamaki Kusha.
Speaker A
Jeriah, though righteous, lacked the courage to shatter everything. Even Orochimaru, who seemed cold and ruthless on the surface, Saratobi, Herusen, knew valued bonds most. Otherwise, with Orochimaru's intelligence, would he not realize that experimenting on villagers would eventually catch the attention of
Speaker A
the Yu. No, he knew. He was simply disillusioned with his teacher and wanted to sever ties and defect.
Speaker A
Thinking back on all the opponents he had faced in his life, Saratobi Herusen could always grasp their weaknesses.
Speaker A
Except for Achihajene, who was an exception. That bastard had no weaknesses. He didn't care about the survival of the Aiha clan. The slightest move from Saratobi Herusen would make him risk the entire Achiha clan's destruction to drag the Saratobi clan
Speaker A
down with him. Friendship, he had no friends. Love, he had no girl he liked.
Speaker A
Parents, he had thought about using them to control Aiha, but now he had little confidence. The reason was simple. This man was already a man gecko user had seized control of the entire Achiha clan yet showed no intention of rescuing his
Speaker A
parents or even negotiating to resolve the matter. His ruthless nature made Sarobi Herusen feel like a thorn in his back. Moreover, Aiha was skilled in politics and in their several confrontations, Saratobi Haruen had always been subtly suppressed. So, he
Speaker A
had no intention of playing political games with Achihajene. He just wanted to kill the bastard as soon as possible. In short, he was ready to overturn the table. But unfortunately, Danzo's tone remained cold. I'll say it again. I want
Speaker A
a battalion of U and authorization to take three elites from each clan to join Root. Also, give me 100 million Rio, who I need to hire cannon fodder from the bounty exchange. Yes, Root was his entire life work and his leverage to
Speaker A
become Hokag. He knew very well how terrifying Aiha was, and he would never let Root be wasted on such a matter. At that, Sarutoi Herusen slammed the table and roared in anger. Danzo, are you insane? Aiha is our greatest enemy. We
Speaker A
must eliminate him as soon as possible or the consequences will be dire. This is not a time for bargaining. If Aiha really takes power, do you think he will spare you? Utain Koharuru and Midokado Hamira also chimed in to persuade him.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, it was useless. Danzos face remained cold, even showing a hint of contempt. Hirusan save it. As you said, the threat of Achihaene concerns all of us. Why should Rude alone take the losses while you contribute nothing? Do I look like a
Speaker A
fool? My demands are clear. decide whether to accept them or not. Almost instantly with Danzo's words, everyone fell into silence. Saratobi Herusen was also speechless. He had indeed intended to drain root, but now it was clearly impossible. After a
Speaker A
moment of deliberation, he spoke again. I'll give you one U battalion. Not enough. Danzo shook his head. I need the authorization. Saratobi Harusen's face turned ashen and he roared at him. Don't even think about it. That's absolutely out of the question. Yes, because of the
Speaker A
third great ninja war, his reputation was already tarnished. If Konoha could find a more reliable candidate, the clans would not have agreed to make him hokage. Under these circumstances, giving Danzo authorization. That would be asking for death. Then forget it.
Speaker A
Danzo crossed his arms full of disdain. I'm not taking this job. Danzo was quite direct without any hesitation or delay.
Speaker A
He and Husen Saratobi were comrades allies, but beyond that, they were also enemies. Of course, he understood her Saratobi's concerns. However, this was also precisely his true intention. He could hardly wait for Husen's reputation to be completely ruined so that he
Speaker A
himself would have a chance to vive for the position of Hokag. Thus, he was quite relaxed at the moment, showing no sign of urgency whatsoever. In response, Husen Saratobi fell into silence and only after a long while did he slowly
Speaker A
speak. Danzo, can't we negotiate? Sorry, no negotiation. Danzo flatly refused. Although he also wanted to eliminate the Aiha as soon as possible and knew that Achiha gene was a major trouble, he was not overly worried in his heart because
Speaker A
even if the sky fell, the tall ones would bear the brunt. And in the current koha, Herusen Saratobi was that tall one. If he wasn't anxious, why should he be? Herusen Saratobi fell into silence.
Speaker A
He cast a deep penetrating glance at Danzo, then immediately began to smoke. He could see through Danzo's intentions.
Speaker A
It was simply that Danzo would take the blame for him, but in return, he had to give Danzo benefits and in the process deplete his own reputation. What should he do? He indeed wanted to deal with Aiha Gene as soon as possible, but he
Speaker A
was also reluctant to sacrifice his reputation. So, for a moment, the entire room fell into a tense silence. Herus and Danzo, both of you, take a step back. There's no need to take it this far. Our enemy is the Aiha. We cannot
Speaker A
afford internal strife at this time. Kohhur Utitain and Hamir Midito grew anxious earnestly trying to persuade the two. There was no choice. If the Aiha threat hadn't been resolved yet, and they fell into internal chaos, the news would undoubtedly be laughed at by the
Speaker A
Aiha. In response to their persuasion, Huen Soratobi looked at Danzo, his eyes filled with hope. He wished Danzo would yield, but his hopes were destined to be dashed. What kind of person was Danzo?
Speaker A
Throughout the original story of Kenoha's many calamities, when had Danzo ever taken the initiative? Selfishness was his motto. With such a perfect opportunity to weaken Hirusen Saratobi, if he gave it up, he wouldn't be Danzo.
Speaker A
Thus, there was no way out. The matter was deadlocked with neither Husen Saratobi nor Danzo willing to concede.
Speaker A
At 3:00 in the afternoon, Husen Saratobi did not choose to end the meeting. He continued to vi with Danzo in the office determined to make Danzo yield.
Speaker A
Cohoritane couldn't help but say, "How about we grab a bite first, then continue discussing?" "Yes, let's eat first." Pomero Midocado also sighed helplessly. Staying like this solves nothing. But unfortunately upon their words, Herusen Seratobi slammed the table, displaying the demeanor of the
Speaker A
professor of Shinobi. Enough both of you shut up. I'm already too furious to eat.
Speaker A
How can I have the appetite? Danzo, I'll give you one more chance. Will you take this mission or not? Faced with Husen's raging fury, Kohar Utane and Hamir Midocado were instantly at a loss.
Speaker A
You're too angry to eat, but we're hungry. They wanted to mutter a complaint but facing Herusen Saratobi at that moment they dared not speak in response Danzo's expression remained indifferent utterly unfazed by Herusen Saratobi he sat leisurely in his chair
Speaker A
his face exuding an air of calm detachment clearly unless Herusen Saratobi agreed to his demands he would never willingly take the blame time gradually dragged into the evening but Husen Saratobi and Danzo were still locked in a stalemate neither backing
Speaker A
down creek just then the door was suddenly knocked her Soratobi frowned He knew that this was a highle koha meeting e under normal circumstances. Unless something major happened, no one would dare interrupt. So after a moment of thought, he sat back down. He adjusted
Speaker A
his hokag hat and then spoke toward the door. Come in. With a soft creek, the door to the hokag's office was opened.
Speaker A
Anyu member entered and knelt respectfully on one knee. Hokama esteemed, "Elders, today some very unfavorable rumors have spread through the village involving all of you." After a brief explanation, the ANBU produced a scroll. Upon hearing this, Herusen Saratobi's heart sank instantly, sensing
Speaker A
a very ominous feeling. He took the scroll and dismissed the&bu with a wave. Then with a puzzled expression, he opened the scroll and glanced at it.
Speaker A
Before he could finish reading, he slammed the desk in fury, shattering it. Nwaki Sanju Dan Ko Sakumo Hataki. A string of familiar names came into view.
Speaker A
And more importantly, this slander against him contained within. Clearly, this was exactly what Achihajene had speculated earlier. It had previously only circulated within the Aiha clan, but now it had swept through the entire village. In response, Huen Saratobi was
Speaker A
nashing his teeth, trembling with rage, his voice turning horse. Aiha Jean, you bastard. You deserve to die. I will kill you. Danzo, I give you authorization.
Speaker A
You must kill that bastard Aiha Jeene as soon as possible. Hirusen Suratobi was almost mad with fury reaching the peak of anger. Meanwhile, on the other side, seeing Herusen so enraged, Hamir Midito and Kohar Utitain was bewildered. They
Speaker A
picked up the scroll read and instantly fell into a frenzy as well. Slander, pure slander. This Aiha Jeene deserves to die. He's framing us. We can't keep him any longer. We must kill him immediately. After reading it, Kohari
Speaker A
Utitain and Hamir Mito were also enraged. Danzo grew interested as well. After reading the scrolls contents, he couldn't help but sneer. Herusen, I told you before, you would regret this.
Speaker A
Aihaene after his negotiation with you broke down keenly sensed that you were about to make a move so he struck first.
Speaker A
Herus and Suritoi trembled all over. He felt a tremendous crisis. If he couldn't resolve this matter his career as Hokag would end and in a most disgraceful manner. You she huh Jean? His tone was terrifyingly cold like a chilling wind
Speaker A
from the abyss. He was truly enraged. Aihajins move had struck him directly at his most vulnerable point.
Speaker A
However, after a long deliberation, he calmed down. Danzo, now is not the time for internal strife. We must unite. Your root often manipulates public opinion. I surely you have a way to counter this.
Speaker A
What should we do next? Danzo remained utterly nonchalant. A joke. Every faction harbors countless subfactions.
Speaker A
The Aiha had their moderate cinists and radicals, and the same naturally applied within Kenoha. Kohari Utitane had one view, Hamiraado, another Husan Saratobi, yet another, and Danzo himself held his own perspective. Even among the major clans, the great and minor clans
Speaker A
differed in their views, as did the civilian factions and the clan-based ones. And now it was the same to Danzo, eliminating the Aiha was important. But was it not equally important to tarnish Huen Saratobi? Bear in mind, for someone
Speaker A
aspiring to become Hokag Husen Saratobi stood as an insurmountable mountain before him. Now that an opportunity to smear Husen had arisen, Danzo refraining from adding fuel to the fire was already a favor. How could anyone expect him to
Speaker A
help her find a solution? Nonsense. And what about the dirt splashing back on himself? Huh? Danzo was already a cesspool. Why would he care about a bit more filth? Pure overthinking. As for whether Harusen could withstand these rumors, Danzo had absolute confidence.
Speaker A
Such trivial matters might unsettle Haruen or even damage his reputation. But to nail him for good. That possibility was minuscule. The reason was simpler. Kinoa was too weak right now. If Husen were toppled, who would take over as the fifth Hokag? Thus, even
Speaker A
though many clans loathe Husen, they had to grit their teeth and support him. Otherwise, would they let the Aiha take the position of fifth Hokag?
Speaker A
Understanding this, Danzo was in no hurry. Sorry, Herzen. Public opinion cannot be stopped. The more you suppress it, the stronger it rebounds. Leave it to time. We must trust the villagers.
Speaker A
With that, Danzo rose and prepared to leave. Hirusen was dumbfounded. Yet, he instantly grasped Danzo's intention, his face ashen as he ground out each clan. I grant you the authority to take five members. Now, will you speak? At that moment, Haruen chose to
Speaker A
give ground. He had no choice. Danzo was a master of public opinion warfare, and it was a game Herusen couldn't play.
Speaker A
More precisely, Harusen wanted no part in such tactics. How could the flawless, righteous Hokag sully himself with such sorted methods? If he were to handle such dirty business himself, what use was Danzo as his black glove? Meanwhile, hearing Harusen's offer, Danzo's eyes
Speaker A
lit up instantly. 10 members per clan. You're insane. Absolutely not. I'll compromise. Nine. No, it's five. I'll drop to eight or I'm leaving right now.
Speaker A
Seven. Take it or leave. Deal. Danzo receded himself. A barely concealed smile spreading across his face. Seven was enough. The bloodline clans of Kenoha, though perhaps not equal to the Achiha, were each immensely powerful.
Speaker A
Among them, Danzo favored the Yamanaka and the Abbyang. On the other side, in contrast to the satisfied Danzo Haruen's face was livid and his heart was bleeding. Damn it, his reputation was already tarnished once this Hokag decree was issued. He could only imagine how
Speaker A
much the clans would resent him. But there was no help for it. Compared to the clan's resentment, resolving the immediate crisis was far more important.
Speaker A
After all, his standing among the civilians was what he cherished most. "All right, speak up. I've given you what you wanted to this matter must be resolved quickly, or else." Husen said coldly. To resolve this crisis, he had
Speaker A
paid a heavy price. If Danzo failed, he would make him understand why he was called the ninja hero. At that, Danzo couldn't help but shudder. Herusen's gaze was truly terrifying. He coughed and began to speak. To resolve this,
Speaker A
there's only one way. spread more and more absurd rumors, whether true or false, just unleash them all at once.
Speaker A
Don't look at me like that. Oh, I'm not joking. The villagers are ignorant. They have narrow access to information and can't verify the truth of rumors. As long as the logic holds loosely, it works. Only by flooding them with such a
Speaker A
torn of rumors can we divert their attention. I'm well verssed in this. Trust me, Danzo spoke laying out his plan. Of course, though, Herusen and the others were skeptical. If Achihajene were here, he would have given Danzo a
Speaker A
thumbs up. Indeed, impressive. This was the same tactic as suppressing heat in his past life. It had to be said, Danzo, the darkness of the ninja world, had certainly developed some skill in underhanded dealings over the years.
Speaker A
Fine, I'll leave it to you. But it must be done quickly, and don't forget about Aiha. I don't want to see that man again. Find a way to make him disappear within a month. How you do it, I don't
Speaker A
care. I only want results. Husen gritted his teeth and issued his ultimatum. Clearly, his hatred for Achihajene had exceeded his tolerance. He now only wished to see Aiha dead. The process and methods mattered not to him. A month
Speaker A
Danzo pondered briefly, then nodded, "Fine, no problem." With that, he leaned on his cane and left this time without slamming the door. Instead, he closed it politely. In the Hokag's office after Danzo's departure, Hamir Mito voiced his concern. Husen Danzos power is
Speaker A
growing too large. Yes, Husen Goharitain added her brow furrowed. If the root continues to expand like this, are you not afraid it will become too big to control? Indeed, they were comrades and knew Danzo's temperament all too well.
Speaker A
With roots so powerful, could they really let him become Hokage? No, absolutely not. Because that would spell disaster for all of Kenoha. Danzo's character was even worse than the Aihos at that herus inside and spoke resignedly. Do you think I don't know?
Speaker A
You didn't object just now and now you worry about Root becoming hard to manage. But forget it. We have no choice now over the public opinion matter. We must trust Danzo and he'll be facing Aiha. Defeating a powerhouse of that
Speaker A
level is no simple task. Even if he manages to kill Aiha, how many of Ruth's members will remain? Hard to say. Herus and Saratobi of course was not foolish.
Speaker A
In his view, Danzo was still too inexperienced truly thinking Aiha was a pushover. Even if he gave Danzo these men, it was hard to say how many would survive. Of course, even if Danzo failed, it did not matter. At the very
Speaker A
least, it would consume some of Achiha Jyn's ocular power, which was a good thing for him. Provoke the Aiha. That was the least of his worries. The reason he chose to endure now was that his authority as Hokag was insufficient. He
Speaker A
had no justifiable reason to target the Aiha and the other clans would not support him if he did. If the Aiha were to rebel, the other clans would be forced to act. So that's how it is. If that's the case, I can rest easy.
Speaker A
Hamuridokado and Kohar Utane exchanged a glance and nodded. After confirming there was nothing else, they took their leave. Konoha was already in chaos filled with conspiracy theories.
Speaker A
Countless people whispered among themselves, and many instinctively showed fear when looking toward the Hokag building. Of course, if one observed closely, they would notice that the street in front of the Hokag building was eerily empty. Today, not a
Speaker A
single passer by. Even if people had to pass by, they would rather take a longer detour than walk in front of the Hokag building. Suko sama, why did it come to this? Actually, I thought it was strange back then. V- rank missions were
Speaker A
supposed to be top secret. Yet the S-rank intelligence was leaked so suddenly and within a day the whole village knew and the higher-ups remained silent. I think Sukumo sama took his own life to protect Kakashi. Definitely if he had Kakashi wouldn't survive either.
Speaker A
The streets buzzed with discussion. Kakashi wearing his mask as an umbu crouched in the shadows nearby, seemingly deaf to the chatter around him. Yes, as a member of the Uoo, how could he not have figured it out after
Speaker A
all these years? But by now he was completely numb. Especially after the deaths of Aido Ren and the fourth Hokage and his wife, he was now no more than a walking corpse merely going through the motions of living. Revenge meaningless.
Speaker A
Even if he took revenge, what would it change? Would his father come back to life? Just like the name his father, Suko, had given him, he was like a scarecrow standing in a field, a hollow shell, a walking corpse. Kakashi. Just
Speaker A
as Kakashi was lost and thought a bull cut had appeared above him. Kakashi was annoyed. Guy, stop it. I'm on a mission.
Speaker A
I can't talk to you, but my guy ignored him and pulled him into a hug. Is what everyone says true? Did your father really guy? Shut up. Kakashi's gaze was cold. Don't talk nonsense. This has nothing to do with you. Just pretend you
Speaker A
didn't hear those words and go about your business. Don't get involved. At that moment, Kakashi's tone was icy cold. My guy was one of the few friends he truly acknowledged and no one else came close. Even Karina, Yui, and Asuma
Speaker A
were just colleagues, mere acquaintances. So, he didn't want Guy to be in danger. He knew all too well how deep these waters ran. Mike got seeing Kakashi's serious expression, his heart sank. He might be simple, but he wasn't
Speaker A
stupid. Kakashi had spelled it out clearly. So, how could he not grasp the truth? So, with a sigh, after a helpless sigh, he could only nod heavily. I understand. There was a note of resignation in his voice. Indeed, even
Speaker A
if he knew, what could he do? It had been years since Sukumo Hataki died.
Speaker A
Even confronting the Hokag would change nothing. Kill the Hokag. He didn't want to see Kenoha fall into chaos either after all this was his home. Seeing this, Kakashi breathed a sigh of relief.
Speaker A
He slipped back into his lazy demeanor. Guy, you should go. Got it. Mike Guy nodded. Kakashi watched Mike Guy leave, then turned his gaze to the increasingly chaotic village and let out a helpless sigh. What a headache. But what could he
Speaker A
do? This was a power struggle between the Aiha and the vill's higher-ups. Hardly something a small fry like him could meddle in. Indeed, even as an elite Jonan in the current Kenoha, he was still just a small fry. Not far away
Speaker A
in a tea house, the clan heads of the Eno Shikacho trio sat upstairs drinking tea, having overheard the discussions below. The Aiha are ruthless. Inoi Yamanaka shook his head and spoke seriously. Shikaku, should we get involved? Get involved. A Shikaku Nar's
Speaker A
lips twitched. And then what? Even if Haruen Saratobi is despicable, if we got rid of him, who would you make the fifth Hokag? Given the current state of Kohaa who is qualified, Danzo or the Achiha hearing this in Noi fell silent. Indeed,
Speaker A
Kohaa was too weak now and only Husen Suritoi could suppress the Aiha. If they truly ousted Husen who could take his place and keep the Achiha in check.
Speaker A
Wasn't that why they had reluctantly chosen Huen after Manato Namik's sacrifice precisely to hold the Aiha down of such a headache? The village is in a transitional period with no one capable of holding things together. That old man, Herusen, is truly vicious. He's
Speaker A
let so many of Kenoa's strong warriors wither away. Enochi let out a sigh. Even Shikaka gave a bitter smile, but what was the use of saying it all out loud?
Speaker A
Even if they were angry, they had to hold it in. It wasn't just the Eno Shikacho. The other clans hadn't stepped in either. Everyone shared the same concerns. In truth, they didn't care who took power, but the Aiha was absolutely
Speaker A
out of the question because the Aiha were one of the founding clans of Konoha. Yes, all that talk about their extreme temperament was nonsense. The real reason was simply this one point.
Speaker A
The Aiha were too powerful. If the Aiha truly took over with their strength and control of the villages reigns, Kinoa would become an appendage of the Achiha.
Speaker A
When the Senu and Usuzumaki clans fell, why didn't the other clans raise a hand?
Speaker A
The same logic applied. These great clans were just too strong. They all wanted to see these great clans disappear or else the Keki Jenkai clans would never get a chance to rise. In fact, this wasn't unique to Kenoha.
Speaker A
Other ninja villages did the same. Although there was no formal agreement, all villages followed nearly the same path, supporting civilian ninja while systematically weakening the great clans within their midst. However, unlike the worried Enochi and Shikaku, Chosa Akimichi continued to munch on his food,
Speaker A
showing no interest in these affairs. The other clans were no different. Their sentiments mirrored those of the Enoch trio. They harbored no fondness for Husen Saratobi, nor did they hold any particular affection for the Ayia. Thus, they all remained silent during the
Speaker A
clash between the two sides. Danzo, who had gained the most from this affair, was uncharacteristically swift in his actions, commencing his own maneuvers immediately upon his return. Danzo was a master of manipulating public opinion.
Speaker A
With a single move, he flooded the village with a torrent of rumors that deluded the scandals plaguing the village's leadership. Shocking. Why are the Inazuka clans dogs barking in the dead of night, stunning the untold stories of the Nar Yamanaka and Akimichi
Speaker A
clans, terrifying the Huga clan? Countless rumors about various clans and the high-ranking elders spread across the village immediately capturing the attention of the villagers. Within just 3 to 5 days, the Achihas campaign to sway public opinion was effectively
Speaker A
neutralized. Of course, amidst these chaotic rumors, they had to insert some slander aimed at Herusen Saratobi himself. For instance, they claimed he loved using his telescope jutzu to spy on the bath house and that as Hokag, he never set foot on the front lines. They
Speaker A
also sang their own praises. nonsense about how Danzo, the darkness of the Shinobi world, had sacrificed so much for Kenoha. In response, the other clans sneered, believing the Aiha, were proving themselves incapable. The ease with which the vill's leadership had
Speaker A
diffused the situation only deepened their weariness of the elders, and they decided to maintain their previous approach towards the Aiha. No contact, no alignment, utter indifference, and that was to be expected. They had perhaps entertained the faint hope that
Speaker A
with Gene Aiha in a position of power, the Aiha's fortunes might change. But now they saw no reason for optimism. The Aiha were clearly no match for the village's leadership. Of course, as for the slander of Haruen and Danzo's
Speaker A
self-praise, they simply dismissed it all. All except for the Enoch trio, more specifically Shikaka Nara. As the one who had truly interacted with Gene Aiha, he understood the man's intractability better than anyone. He refused to believe Gene would be so easily
Speaker A
defeated. A persistent nagging feeling remained that he had missed something crucial. Danzo, however, was openly contemptuous. Did Amir Achiha think he could rival him? Events had proven them to be nothing but a pack of buffoons.
Speaker A
Hiru and Soratobi breathed a sigh of relief. His blackclad right hand had come through. Danzo had actually managed to pull it off. At the compound, several elders once again approached Gene, their faces etched with worry. Fagaka was also
Speaker A
present. It was clear that after learning the truth about Husen Saratobi, he had fully committed to following Jyn's orders. Gene, things are looking grim. We need to think of something. The village leadership is too cunning. Who would have thought they'd find a way out
Speaker A
of this predicament? Murmurss of agreement filled the room. Gene, however, remained impassive. Without hesitation, he stated, "Release another rumor. Claimed that Hirusen Saratobi's position as Hokag is illegitimate." As members of the second Hokag's escort unit, they abandoned their Kag when
Speaker A
danger arose. Who knows if Tobarama Senu truly intended for Harusen to succeed him. Perhaps hey it was Husen and his cronies who conspired with the cloud meme to get Tobarama killed then forged his final orders to seize the Hokag
Speaker A
seat. After all, what's the point of an escort unit? They're meant to take a blow for the Hokag. A collective intake of breath. Jyn's words sent a chill down their spines. Good grief. The more they thought about it, the more plausible it
Speaker A
seemed. Fagaka couldn't help but ask Jean. Is this true? Of course, it's false. Gene rolled his eyes. What kind of man was Tobarama Senju? He was a true master of deception. Unless Tobarama allowed it, do you think someone like
Speaker A
Husen could have outmaneuvered him? The others nodded in agreement. Indeed, even if they harbored resentment towards Tobarama, they had to concede that his cunning was formidable. Hirusen was hardly a match for him. Shortly after Aiha Tadashi left to spread the new
Speaker A
rumor. Soon, the entire village was thrown into an uproar. There was no choice. If this rumor held any truth, then Husen's entire claim to the Hokag's seat was fundamentally illegitimate.
Speaker A
Almost instantly, all the rumors Danzo had fabricated along with Jyn's earlier accusations were completely swept aside.
Speaker A
The villagers were now entirely engrossed in debating the legitimacy of Husen's ascension. A day later, at the Hokag's office, Hirusen Saratobi smashed his desk, shouting at everyone present.
Speaker A
Slander: This is slander. How could I have conspired with the cloud nin to kill my own teacher? Cursed Aiha. How dare they I? His voice was horsearo, and he was on the verge of losing control.
Speaker A
Kohar Utitain and Hamir Midito were seething with fury as well. However, they were at a loss, turning to Danzo for a solution. Danzo waved his hand dismissively. Don't worry, just watch me. He immediately set the root division to work, and soon the village was a wash
Speaker A
with gossip about its prominent figures. Tales of Kakashi's love for picture books, Jeriah's peeping habits, and Sununade's gambling addiction. And amidst the gossip, a more insidious narrative was woven that the Sanin as Herusen's students had been corrupted by
Speaker A
their teacher. A day later, the Aiha struck back, releasing a new wave of rumors claiming that the council of Jonan had long been a hollow institution. That Madura Aiha was promised the title of Hokag when the village was founded. But after the Aiha
Speaker A
Senu Alliance, Hashiamarama took the position, then passed it to Tobarama, and when Hirusen assumed the role, it was through direct appointment rather than the council's approval. The Hokag's power was now completely monopolized by his own faction. Danzo's side responded
Speaker A
by attacking the Aiha's history of harming the village. For a time, the entire village was a chaotic mess, a maelstrom of conflicting stories and wild accusations. This clash between the Aiha and Danzo had plunged Konoha into turmoil. But in the chaos, everyone had
Speaker A
forgotten the spark that ignited the conflict in the first place. In the Nar clan's tea room, a Kimichi Chosa appeared calm, still munching on snacks.
Speaker A
But Yamanaka and Noi finally spoke up. Shikaku, what's wrong? Why the urgent summons? Has something happened? Hearing this, Chosa set down his snacks and looked at Shikaku with a grave expression. Shikaku smiled Riley and nodded. Yes, something major. I had a
Speaker A
nagging feeling I was missing something, and now I figured it out. The Aiha's true aim. The village leadership has been outmaneuvered. Jyn's war of words wasn't meant to destroy them, but to create a diversion. Have you noticed?
Speaker A
We've all overlooked the police department. That's where the conflict truly began. It was their inaction that started this whole mess. The leadership clashed with the Aiha over it, but now no one seems to care about the police department anymore. So, what is the
Speaker A
police department doing now? Narashikaku is gazed deep and thoughtful. And upon hearing these words, Yamanaka Andochi and Akimichi Chosa were both filled with shock. Yes, the police department. At first, it was the drastic change in the police department style that caused the
Speaker A
village to be filled with complaints. Countless villagers lodged protests against the police department which led to Husen Saratobi questioning the Achiha ultimately sparking this war of public opinion. The problem is now that both sides are locked in a war of public
Speaker A
opinion, the very core of this matter, the police department, has been overlooked by everyone. So, here's the crux. The villagers problems remain unresolved, the police department continues its high-handed ways, and they have a perfectly legitimate excuse. That excuse is the search for evidence.
Speaker A
Regardless of whether they ultimately find evidence or whether the case is solved, the Achiha have successfully shifted the blame, leaving the villages top bras to bear the burden as scapegoats. The villagers of Kenoha have already filed complaints with the
Speaker A
village. Village, are you going to solve this or not? How are you going to solve it for heaven? Sake, just give us a response. But the problem is the village's top brass are currently locked in a battle of wits with the Achiha,
Speaker A
having completely forgotten about this matter. The longer this drags on, the more resentment the villagers will harbor towards the vill's leadership.
Speaker A
Therefore, the so-called war of public opinion waged by the Aiha is merely a tactic to buy time. So that's how it is.
Speaker A
This Aiha gene, he's quite a formidable opponent. If you hadn't pointed it out Shikaku, I would have been in the dark until now. Yamanaka and Noi's gaze was complex. After hearing Narashikaka's analysis, he finally understood the Achihas cunning. Fortunately, they had
Speaker A
Narashikaku on their side, though otherwise he would still be in the dark. To this, Narashikaku could only let out a helpless sigh and then said with a bitter expression, "It's only because I'm on the outside looking in that I can
Speaker A
see clearly. If I were truly in the thick of it, I might not be able to see through these things either." On the other side, a Kimichi Chosa who had remained silent all along finally spoke up. Should we help the village's top
Speaker A
brass? You decide, Shikaku. Yamanaka and Noi said in a serious tone. The Inoshi Kikacho are bound together in life and death. We will follow your decision. Nar Shikaku's eyes flickered with thought.
Speaker A
After a long moment of deliberation, he finally made his decision. We will help neither side. Let them fight it out. The village's top brass are no good. But we also can't side with the after all.
Speaker A
Well, if that thousand-year-old clan with their bloodline limits were to take power, clans like ours with secret techniques would have no chance of ever rising again. Of course, if the Aiha do gain the upper hand, the Enoch must make
Speaker A
some gesture. Otherwise, once the Aiha truly come to power, they will definitely come after us first. To be honest, Aiha gene is too difficult to deal with. I'm fairly confident that the village's top brass are no match for
Speaker A
him. He's currently only playing within the rules. He hasn't even resorted to using the Aiha's actual military might.
Speaker A
Don't ever forget they are the Aiha. Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosa were both startled by this realization.
Speaker A
Indeed, they had almost forgotten. During this period, Achiha Jins actions had given them a false impression that he was similar to Shikaku. Now they finally remembered he was a manu level powerhouse. Moreover, he had already unified the entire Aiha
Speaker A
clan and held their strongest military force in his hands. Akimich Chosa asked with some confusion, "Why not help the village's top brass?" "Yes, Shikaku." Yamanaka Enochi quickly added, "If the Achiha rise to power, it would be bad for everyone. Even though the village's
Speaker A
top brass of poor character wouldn't, they still be better than the Aiha taking over." To this, looking at his two old friends, Narashikaku, let out a sigh. They were still too naive. Shaking his head helplessly, he explained briefly. "You must remember development
Speaker A
is secondary, but survival is the priority. Given how troublesome Aiha is, are you sure the village's top brass can win? Even if they could win, at what cost?" After the battle with a koha left in ruins, how would they fight against
Speaker A
the other ninja villages? The two of them grimaced upon hearing this. They had to admit that Narikaku was right.
Speaker A
The Aiha's power was right there in front of them and Achiha gene was a manu level powerhouse. If they were to fight a hard battle against the Aiha, even a victory would be a pirick one.
Speaker A
Therefore, from this perspective, the Aiha might not be able to win, but they certainly cannot afford to lose because the cost is something no one can bear.
Speaker A
In the original story, if it weren't for that filial son Aiha Tachi, the Achiha might have been framed and ostracized, but they would never have been so easily wiped out. The Aiha fell due to internal strife, not because the village's top
Speaker A
brass were strong. The current Aiha are willing to play within the rules only because Aiha gene is a smart man who doesn't want to inherit or ruin Kenoha.
Speaker A
The Enoacho and other ninja clans can sit on the fence and watch the tigers fight, choosing to remain neutral for now. But likewise, if they truly descended into the fry to help the village's top brass, then the Aiha once
Speaker A
pushed to complete despair would drag them all down to hell with them, even in death. Then we remain neutral. But it's truly disheartening. We finally got rid of the Sinju clan, and now it seems the Achiha will take their place. Let's hope
Speaker A
the vill's top brass can win. Yamanaka and Noi said with a bitter expression. He still remembered the entire process of the Senju clan's downfall. Don't be fooled into thinking Husen Saratobi and the others were powerful. I remember they had only just assumed the position
Speaker A
of Hokag back then. At that time, Huen Saratobi's position as Hokag was not yet secure. If it hadn't been for the covert push from all the ninja clans of Kinoa, could they have taken down the Synu clan with just Saratobi and his group
Speaker A
Hadreon? But what they never expected was that even though the Synu clan was gone and Aiha would rise in their place.
Speaker A
But there's no alternative. Who could have imagined that among the straightforward and simple-minded Aiha clan, a freak like Achiha would emerge?
Speaker A
If it weren't for Achiha, the Aiha would have been played to their doom and the Huga clan would have been next.
Speaker A
Narikaku's eyes flickered with thought. He ignored Yamanaka and Noi's internal fretting and his brain began to work at full speed. After a moment, he spoke directly. You two go back and prepare a group of your clan members. Have them
Speaker A
ready to defect at a moment's notice. The vill's top brass are definitely getting impatient. Next, they'll have Danzo make a move. As long as Aiha can get through this, we'll have to diversify our investments. We'll send a group of our clansmen to pledge their
Speaker A
allegiance to them. The reason is easy to find. We'll say that we've been monopolizing the clan's resources, and this group has been secretly oppressed.
Speaker A
They're dissatisfied and want to advance, so they've chosen to defect to the Aiha. Let these defectors take a batch of the clan's resources with them.
Speaker A
If we want the Aiha to accept us, we need to offer a proper token of goodwill. Narashikaka spoke in a grave tone. The two who heard this were stunned and Yamanaka and Noi couldn't help but ask, "Is it really necessary to
Speaker A
go this far? The situation hasn't reached that point yet, has it?" Akimichi Chos was also horrified. His gaze towards Narikaku filled with disbelief. It is necessary, absolutely necessary. Never underestimate Achihajene. What makes him most terrifying is that he thinks. We ninja
Speaker A
clans, the things we've done in the past cannot possibly fool that guy. What I fear most is that Achiha gene will come to settle accounts with us in the future. After all, no matter how clever he is, his nature remains that of an
Speaker A
Achiha and he is an Aiha who has awakened the mano. This proves that deep down he is still an extremist. We cannot take this risk. Narashikaku's tone was stern. The two who heard this broke out in cold sweat for they had indeed
Speaker A
overlooked Achiha Jyn's true nature due to his style of conduct. The entire Shinobi world knows that the more insane an Achiha is, the stronger they become.
Speaker A
and Achihaene who has awakened the maneko who knows what dark color he suppresses deep within his heart. For now, he seems manageable, but once he truly seizes control of Kinoa, many issues will become unpredictable. All right, I agree. I'll arrange it once I
Speaker A
return. The two were silent for a moment before nodding quietly. In response, Nar Shikaku merely nodded, then gazed out at the night, finally letting out an involuntary sigh. The road ahead is arduous. At the very least, the troubles
Speaker A
of Kohaa's high-erups are about to descend once more. Indeed, that was the case. 3 days later, the common citizens who could no longer endure directly blockaded the Hokag's building, clamoring wildly for Saratobi Herusen to solve the problem. If he couldn't, he
Speaker A
should step down immediately. This was hopeless because the police department was not handling matters. They could only hope the Kenoha higher-ups would intervene. However, little did they expect. How long has it been? The Hokage's building has shown no response
Speaker A
at all. In the past few days, everyone had endured this matter temporarily for the sake of watching the spectacle. And now they could no longer bear it. After all, everyone needs to eat. Gossip won't fill their stomachs. So, the people
Speaker A
pushed beyond endurance spontaneously gathered in front of the Hokag's building. Saratobi Herusen abdicate. Can the police department issue be solved or not? If not, replace the Hokag with someone who can. We need food. We need to live. In front of the Hokage's
Speaker A
building, the citizens were filled with rage. Everyone's face was contorted with anger. A long-term resentment had driven them mad, erasing all respect for Saratobi Herusen. In response, the A&BU guard stationed in front of the Hokag's building felt their scalps tingle.
Speaker A
Although they were powerful, they dared not act rashly against these citizens. In the end, they could only barely maintain formation to prevent the crowd from storming the Hokag's building. Then turned their heads back, hoping their Hokag would come up with a solution
Speaker A
quickly. However, unfortunately, in the Hokag's office, the current Kenoha high-ups had gathered, but all of them were suffering from severe headaches.
Speaker A
Even Danzo, obviously, during this time, he had been fully engaged in a war of words with the Achiha, and had long forgotten about this matter. What should we do? This has blown up completely. We must come up with a solution as soon as
Speaker A
possible. Herusen, what should we do? How about ordering the Aiha to resolve this matter within today? Utain Koharu and Midokado Hamira were now as anxious as ants on a hot pan. In the end, unable to think of any other way, they could
Speaker A
only hope to let the uchiha solve it since it was after all the uchiha who had stirred it up. In response, Saratobien rolled his eyes, put down his pipe, and said in a gloomy tone, "The police department is carrying out
Speaker A
reforms in the name of the village. On what grounds could you ask them to abandon it?" If Kenoha orders the police department to give up the reforms, then in the future when there are wrongful cases, they can shift the blame on to
Speaker A
us, saying everything was the order of the Kenoha high-erups. Then what will you do? More importantly, if this order is issued, the Achiha will have a scapegoat and the villagers will hate us from now on. Almost instantly, as Sarobi
Speaker A
Herusen spoke, everyone present fell into deathly silence. They were all dumbfounded. There was no way around it.
Speaker A
What Aihaene had devised was a clear and open scheme. No matter how they chose, it would be a mistake. Damn it. This Aiha Jeene is a bit too troublesome, isn't he? Is he really an Aiha? Midito Hamira's face was full of
Speaker A
bitterness. In response, no one could give him an answer. Saratobi Herusen spoke. Danzo, do you have a way? No.
Speaker A
Danzo shook his head. At this moment, he could still remain calm since this matter was a blow to Saratobi Herusen.
Speaker A
Of course, considering they were all allies after a brief thought, he still said directly, "At least there is no conventional method. What I can think of is to eliminate him completely. If you can't solve the problem, can't you solve
Speaker A
the person who raised it?" His face was ruthless for him. The leader of Root, this was the best solution. Udang Koharu spoke. Let's do it this way. Aiha Jeene indeed deserves to die. Midito Hamira nodded. Saratobi Herusen also became
Speaker A
very ruthless. Danzo, you must do it as soon as possible. As for the police department issue, call Shikaku over and ask him. Then he directly called an A&BU and ordered him to find Narashaku. 10 minutes later, Narikaku arrived at the
Speaker A
Hokag's office. After hearing Saratobi Harusan's request, he pondered for a moment and then said directly, "Truly resolving this matter is very troublesome. I can't think of any way for now. As for temporary stability, I suggest letting the ANBU handle it. Let
Speaker A
the ENBU temporarily take over the police department's work. At least it can suppress the public's dissatisfaction in the short term.
Speaker A
Narikaku spoke slowly. Since he had long anticipated this day, he had naturally already thought of a solution. Yes, if he had to confront the Aiha head-on, Narashikaku would certainly be unwilling. After all, this was a conflict between Kenoha's higher-ups and
Speaker A
the Achiha and had nothing to do with the Enoch alliance. However, if he was only asked to come up with a way to stabilize Kenoa's chaos, then there was no problem. That was his duty as an adviser. Saratobi Herusen pondered for a
Speaker A
moment. Finally, he let out a sigh and then said directly, "If that's the case, then do as Shikaku says." Obviously, at this point, he truly had no other choice and ultimately accepted Narashikaka's suggestion. Although he was reluctant to
Speaker A
have the ANBU take on the dirty work of the police department under the premise of the police department's collective dereliction of duty for the stability of Kohaa, he could only nod in agreement.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen ascended to the rooftop of the Hokag building, gazing upon the endless sea of citizens below. His fury toward Aiha jeans swelled within him.
Speaker A
Yet he quickly composed himself, his face once again adorned with a benevolent expression. Everyone's silence. At his command, the clamorous crowd instantly fell silent. Evidently his authority as Hokag remained intact.
Speaker A
Then Saratobi Herusen first offered his apologies to all affirmed the reforms of the police force and finally explained that during the transition the village's security would be handled by the U. He would designate a location in the village as an external Ubu outpost where
Speaker A
citizens could seek assistance during this period. Thus, the populace seeing their issues resolved reluctantly withdrew. However, though the citizens were satisfied, the U now faced a headache. No help for it. The Yu were well aware of the troubles the police
Speaker A
force had endured over the years. Though these civilians lacked chakra, they were far more unruly than Shinobi, often refusing to listen to reason. But there was no choice. They could not defy the Hokag's decision. 2 hours later, a
Speaker A
three-story building rose not far from the Hokag building. Such rapid construction was of course thanks to the woodrelease Ninjamo. Soon after, as Ubu members moved in, a crowd of civilians surged through the doors. The Ubu members lips twitched, but fortunately
Speaker A
they all wore masks, so their agony remained hidden. Umbu receptionist, what seems to be the matter, ladies? The leading woman immediately spoke. She stole my hen. That was meant to nourish my child attending the ninja academy.
Speaker A
Nonsense. That's my hen. The other woman retorted. Then before the umbu receptionist's eyes, they began grappling with each other. The umbu receptionist was dumbfounded. The noise grated on his ears, making him feel more exhausted than after a battle with an
Speaker A
enemy. What a headache. but he quickly spoke. Team Alpha 3 handled this. A squad of U emerged and escorted the two women away to investigate the scene.
Speaker A
With their departure, the receptionist finally breathed a sigh of relief. But alas, before he could even sip water, another man approached. Canaro borrowed 300 Rio from me, promising to repay within a month. It's been 3 months already. I'm broke. The other man
Speaker A
shrugged. I'll pay you back when I have money. The receptionist felt his head about to explode. How is he supposed to handle this? Finally, he waved his hand and said, "I'm just here to record the cases. Someone else will take over
Speaker A
yours. Team Alpha 5, it's yours." With that, another reluctant U squad stepped forward, leading the two men out of the Ubu building. Then, the numb receptionist greeted the third complainant. 2 hours later, before a residential house, Kakashi, leading team
Speaker A
Beta 7, a listened to the two family's quarrels. We broke off the engagement. The 30,000 Rio bride price must be returned. Absolutely not. You called off the wedding. You didn't mention your daughter was blind. You didn't ask.
Speaker A
Anyway, no refund. Ambusama, please help me get my money back. It's 30,000 Rio. You broke the engagement. Why should I return the bride price? The two families spittle flying erupted into another argument. Kakashi's squad was utterly exasperated. The racket gave them all a
Speaker A
headache. Yamo couldn't help but ask, "Captain, how do we resolve this?" "I have no idea." Kakashi shrugged. Indeed, with each party insisting on their own version of the truth, who the hell knew how to handle this? Another U muttered,
Speaker A
"Is this the sort of petty squabble the police force dealt with every day? Honestly, I'm starting to sympathize with them. If it were me, I'd have quit long ago out of sheer frustration." Kakashi and Yamo nodded in agreement.
Speaker A
Indeed, such matters were truly difficult to resolve. No matter how they ruled, one party would inevitably be dissatisfied. Kohaa being a military fortress prioritized its ninja forces and naturally lacked a civil code. Thus, the outcome always depended on the
Speaker A
enforcer's judgment. This was precisely why the police force's reputation had soured. No matter what they did, someone was always unhappy. Now that the U had taken over, they too faced the same misery. Finally driven to distraction by the noise, Kakashi decided to pay out of
Speaker A
his own pocket. Problem solved. But Yamato couldn't help remarking, "We can't keep paying our own salaries every time, can we? We can't afford it." "What do you suggest?" Kakashi asked. Yamo had no answer either. With this grim thought, they returned to the umbu
Speaker A
building. But before they could rest, they were assigned another case. Kakashi had to fork out another 800 Rio. By the end of the day, Kakashi's squad had spent over 10,000 Rio. Even so, they were utterly drained. It wasn't just
Speaker A
their squad who others were also on the verge of breaking down. This continued until the third day when the U could no longer bear it as their salaries were drained. In desperation, they had no choice but to issue rulings, either pay
Speaker A
compensation or face imprisonment. Yet this decision tarnished the U The umbu are struggling. Can you think of something? There's no solution.
Speaker A
Narikaku replied helplessly. This is merely a stop gap measure. Whoever takes over the police force will face the same problems. Why did the villagers resent the Aiha? It all stems from the police force. This is a hot potato. The Aiha
Speaker A
couldn't handle it and neither can anyone else. Saratobi Haruen was deeply troubled. In the end, he could only urge the Ubu to endure a while longer and ordered Danzo to eliminate Aiha. Within the Aiha clan grounds in the clan leader
Speaker A
courtyard, all the high-ranking Aiha had gathered their faces brimming with joy and excitement. Do you see everyone? The Kohha higher-ups still foolishly thought the Yu could replace the police force.
Speaker A
Now, the Yu's reputation is utterly ruined, isn't it? It's absolutely hilarious. What's so-called Aiha arrogance that it's the Achiha's fault for not integrating into Kohaa? The Yu's behavior has completely proven that this is a lie fabricated by the Kohaa
Speaker A
high-ups. The police force was deliberately set up by Tobarama Senu to trap the Aiha. In the past, we were naive and ignorant. Fortunately, heaven could not bear to see this and sent us Elder Gene. Everyone join me in toasting
Speaker A
Elder Gene. Aiha Yoshiro laughed heartily and raised his glass to toast Aiha Jeene. Yes, only now did he fully understand how foolish he had been before actually harboring the delusion of truly integrating into the village.
Speaker A
If when he first joined the radical faction, he still had a trace of reckless abandon, now the Us ordeal had made him realize that Aiha Jyns thoughts and actions were the correct path. Had it not been for Achiha, the
Speaker A
Aiha would have continued along the old path, and perhaps they would have truly been annihilated. The other Achiha naturally voiced their agreement toward the Aiha gene before them. Everyone's hearts held only the word loyalty. Even Fugaku, the most stubborn of them, had
Speaker A
to admit that Achihajin strategy was right and the Achihas resurgence was entirely due to him alone. In response, a faint smile graced Achihajin's face, and he did not refuse the toast. After downing the drink in one gulp, he gently
Speaker A
raised his hand. Almost instantly, the clamorous courtyard fell into absolute silence. Everyone, hear me out. Although we have indeed achieved considerable victories, this is not the time for true celebration. The journey of 100 miles is half through 90. The greatest taboo is
Speaker A
to hold a feast midway. Although this move with the police force has indeed dealt a blow to the village, it has not truly harmed Kenoha. On the contrary, I believe it will further provoke the Kenoha higher-ups, driving them to take
Speaker A
desperate measures and overturn the table. Therefore, in the coming days, everyone must be more cautious than ever to prevent the village from jumping the wall in desperation and attacking us.
Speaker A
Aiha Jins tone was somber. Indeed, no matter how many victories he had achieved, unless he completely eliminated the Kenoha higher-ups like Saratobi, he would never let his guard down. Hearing this, everyone present regained their composure. Clearly, since following Aiha, they had clashed with
Speaker A
the Kohaa higher-ups multiple times and had thoroughly seen the filthy and ugly true face of those leaders. Thus, they understood that Achihajene was right.
Speaker A
The excitement in their eyes gradually faded, replaced by depth, coldness, and caution. Seeing this, Aihajene finally revealed a faint smile. Good. Very good.
Speaker A
Seeing everyone so cautious, I am somewhat relieved. However, in my opinion, even if the Kenoha higher-ups wish to make a move, they will likely try to kill me directly. Once I, the core of the Aiha collapse, they will
Speaker A
feel at ease. Since I rarely leave the clan grounds, if they want to act against me, they will have to use my parents as a bait. Almost instantly, as Aiha Jeene spoke, fury filled the faces of everyone present. After all, based on
Speaker A
their understanding of the Kohaa higher-ups typical behavior, Aiha Jin speculation was undoubtedly correct. Aiha immediately spoke up. No need to say more. Let's launch a rescue immediately. Yes, Elder Jeene. Aiha Yoshiro's tone was filled with killing intent. I know you haven't
Speaker A
rescued your parents because you still prioritize the Aiha as a whole. But there's no need. The Aiha are a single entity. Even if it costs a great price, we must rescue your parents. Even if it means death, I will not hesitate. The
Speaker A
others also volunteered for the mission, including Fagaku. His tone was resolute, his eyes blazing with murder. I am willing to personally lead the rescue operation. In an instant, the entire courtyard was filled with a chilling atmosphere. In response, Aiha Jins
Speaker A
eyes showed a trace of emotion, but after taking a deep breath, he calmed everyone down and then spoke in a cold tone. Everyone, do not worry. Since I can anticipate the Kohaa higher-ups thoughts, I have naturally already devised a plan of action. Based on my
Speaker A
understanding of the Kenoha higher-ups, Husen Suratobi cares too much about face and reputation to act personally. Kohari Utitain and Hamier Midocado are useless.
Speaker A
So the assassination attempt against me will most likely be carried out by Danzo himself. And Danzo, although he has earned the title Shadow of the Underworld, he is essentially a coward who values his own life. Considering our previous encounter, he will probably
Speaker A
send a horde of canon fodder to exhaust my dojitsu. Danzo also has the trait of arrogance and self-conceit, so he will likely appear in person. Furthermore, even if he uses my parents as bait to lure me, he will never keep them by his
Speaker A
side. Instead, he will imprison them in the most secure location of the route. So, h for the next operation, we will act simultaneously. I will go to the trap Danzo has set while you infiltrate the route and do everything possible to
Speaker A
rescue my parents. Of course, if you have the spare capacity sees as many valuable items as possible, the roots operation records, experimental data, achievements, and so on. However, considering that the Kenoha higher-ups are still relatively powerful, it's better to find a convenient excuse.
Speaker A
After all, when this is over, we'll have to fool the Kenoha higher-ups. Here's the plan. Find a spy from another village. During the operation, use the sharing gun to control him and make him run straight toward the roots territory.
Speaker A
Our police force also has the authority to arrest spies. Aiha Jins tone was calm, but upon hearing this, the others were stunned. Spies were trivial matters. As members of the police force, they had already gathered many clues, just waiting for the right moment to
Speaker A
spring the trap. The only thing that troubled them was Achiha Jeene walking alone into the trap which filled them with unease. However, the decisions made by Aiha were not something they could defy. So, in the end, they had no choice
Speaker A
but to acquies. Finally, there is one more thing. What I am most uneasy about are Shers Sway and Itachi Aya. Does anyone know what those two have been up to lately? Aiha Jin narrowed his eyes.
Speaker A
This was what he was most uneasy about for Shuway and Itachi had been too quiet lately. That was highly abnormal. After all, they belonged to the most iron-blooded faction of the village. The recent Achiha had been so restless, and
Speaker A
the village side had suffered many losses. Given their personalities, they should not have been so silent, especially considering the upcoming operation, he would need to walk straight into Danzo's trap. Therefore, he naturally had to figure out what those two were up to now. At this,
Speaker A
everyone present froze in place upon hearing Aiha Jins question. Shers, Itachi, indeed, there had been little news of them recently. It felt as if they had completely vanished. After a moment, it was Fugaku who pondered briefly and then spoke up. I have some
Speaker A
idea about this. Both Itachi and Shers are members of the UU. A few days ago, they apparently took on a mission and have since left the village. Of course, he added, "That's just Itachi's word.
Speaker A
Oh, I don't know if it's true or false." Fagaku's eyes wavered clearly, carrying a trace of fear in his heart. At this, after hearing Fagaku's words, everyone fell into silence. However, after a brief thought, Aiha spoke directly. It's
Speaker A
most likely just an excuse. There have been no major troubles in the ninja world recently. Although the front lines between Mai and Yunin are somewhat tense and the final peace treaty hasn't been signed. Yunin is already exhausted and
Speaker A
simply cannot start a war in the near future. Especially at this critical juncture with the situation between the Aiha and the village growing increasingly tense. Herus and Saratobi unless he's foolish would not let those two leave the village. With that in
Speaker A
mind, they're most likely in route. In the trap being set for me next, these two will probably be part of it as well.
Speaker A
This as Aiha Jeene spoke, everyone present drew in a sharp breath. All faces turned grim. Fagaka's face was filled with inner conflict momentarily at a loss for words. So alas, after a helpless sigh, he was filled with weariness. There was nothing he could
Speaker A
do. Having such a son, he was truly exhausted at heart. Damn it, curse it.
Speaker A
They are both Achiha. Yet they insist on siding with the village. Can't those two fools see how the village treats the Aiha? Everyone present voiced their complaints. Their expressions were unpleasant for his Aiha. They were helping outsiders harm their own kind.
Speaker A
At this, Fagaku could only force a bitter smile, not knowing what else to say. Ajihajene fell into thought. This was not good news for him, so he had to find a way to stop it. It wasn't that he
Speaker A
feared Shers Su and Itachi, but those two must not die at his hands, even if they had indeed betrayed the people of the same clan must not kill each other.
Speaker A
That is a core principle that absolutely cannot be broken. Otherwise, even if everyone internally understood him, it would still leave a knot in the clan members' hearts. On the contrary, only by letting Shersu die at Danzos hands could the clan's desperate resolve
Speaker A
be ignited. What to do? Aiha Jyn's mind raced. And after a moment, he spoke in a cold tone. Fagaku, I need you to reveal your mango and let the my high-ranking officials learn of it. Then let's do this. In a moment, go to the Hokag's
Speaker A
office and tell Haruen Saratobi directly. Two factions may fight for power. Whether through political maneuvering or outright breaking the table, it's acceptable. But Aiha must not kill Aiha. Tell Haruen Saratobi that I am willing to clash head-on with
Speaker A
Danzo, but Shers Sway and Itachi absolutely must not participate in the battle. Have him immediately recall Shers Su and Itachi. Otherwise, the moment I Aiha die will be the moment the entire Achiha clan rises in armed rebellion. Aiha Jyn's expression
Speaker A
remained calm. He had long been mentally prepared to clash head-on with Danzo for an essence. This was a world where might reign supreme, but Shers Sway and Itachi, those two turncoats absolutely must not join the fight. That was the
Speaker A
most crucial point. If that point could not be guaranteed, then he would completely overturn the table and wage a direct all-out war against the my high-ranked officials. At worst, if he truly smashed might to pieces, all Achiha would wander the ninja world as
Speaker A
refugees. At this, Fagaku did not hesitate in the slightest and immediately nodded. No problem. I understand. The core is that Shway and Itachi must not participate. If Hirusen Saratobi refuses, then before I die, I will first kill them my high-ranking
Speaker A
officials. I will personally witness Shers Sway and Itachi being brought to the Hokag's office and then I will personally seal the chakra within them.
Speaker A
Since Gene trusts me, I guarantee I will complete the mission. Fagaka's face was filled with ferocity and murderous intent burst from his eyes. Yes, the methods of the my high-ranking officials were too filthy, especially since they involved his own son. This clearly
Speaker A
struck at Fagaka's bottom line. On the other side, Aiha and everyone present were stunned by Fagaka's words. Good heavens, this had truly enraged the usually mildmannered Fagaku. Sure enough, in the matter of being inhumane that my high-ranking officials never
Speaker A
disappoint. However, that was fine with Fagaku's momentum and his manoen Saratobi would surely compromise.
Speaker A
Indeed, even though Fagaku had not yet left for the Hokag building, Aiha gene had already anticipated this outcome.
Speaker A
And at that very moment, a patrol member walked in and said, "Elders Danzo has sent a letter specifically addressed to Elder Gene. Give it to me." Ajihajene said coldly. Then he immediately began to read Danzo's letter. Meanwhile, as
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene read the faces of everyone present began to turn grim. Obviously, even if they didn't yet know the letter's contents, they understood it was most likely exactly what Achihaene had mentioned. Indeed, that was the case. While they were silently
Speaker A
speculating Aiha had already put down the letter, everyone had guessed it. Danzo is using my parents as leverage, demanding that I go to the forest of death alone, otherwise he will kill my parents. This matches my prediction.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene spoke calmly since he had anticipated this he naturally wasn't too surprised. Then he handed the letter to the others and after reading it they were all filled with murderous aura. The my high-ranking officials are utterly inhuman. Elder Gene give the order.
Speaker A
Everyone present rose to their feet. At this Aiha wasted no words and directly said Fagaka go to the Hokag building immediately and bring Shers Sway and Itachi back. The rest of you immediately mobilize twothirds of the Achiha Jonan
Speaker A
while I begin fighting in the forest of death immediately launch a surprise attack on route to rescue my parents.
Speaker A
Almost instantly with Achiha Jyn's command, the entire Achiha clan like a precision machine began to operate at a frantic pace. Aiha Yoshiro and Setsuna along with several other elders gathered twoth3s of the Aiha's elite Jonan and concealing their presence headed
Speaker A
directly for the roots base. Because of Achiha Jyn's ascension and methods, the roots base was no longer a secret to the Aiha. And then upon arriving at the entrance to the roots base, they completely concealed their presence, patiently waiting for Achiha Jyn's
Speaker A
signal flare. Meanwhile, on the other side, Achiha Amano leading the remaining Achiha Jonin alongside numerous Chunin and Jinn began their operations surrounding the entire Achiha compound in an impenetrable encirclement. Each person was issued 200 explosive tags acquired by Aiha from the outside world
Speaker A
at nearly twothirds of the radical factions total expenses during this period. Fagaku alone headed towards the Hokag building. Aihajene stood solitary at the clan's entrance, waiting silently for the outcome of Fagaka's actions.
Speaker A
Only if Fagaku succeeded would he choose to step into the trap Danzo had laid. 10 minutes later, Fugaku arrived at the Hokag's office where Saritoi Herusen regarded him with complete indifference.
Speaker A
clearly because Fagaku was deemed too incompetent, had lost his clan leader authority, and could not be won over.
Speaker A
Facing him now, Haruen didn't even bother to continue the pretense. Saratobi Haruen sat steadily behind his desk, his hokag hat tilted low over his eyes. The smoke from his pipe curled upwards, shrouding his features in a haze. He didn't even lift his gaze to
Speaker A
look at Fagaku. What is it? His tone was calm, utterly indifferent. And to this, Fagaku, who had long seen through Harusen's true nature, naturally didn't take it to heart either. He dispensed with pleasantries and stated directly, call Shers Sway and Itachi back,
Speaker A
impossible, cannot be done. Saratobi Herusen replied calmly, "They are not in the village." Fagaku's expression remained unchanged, merely stating, "Regarding Danzo's invitation to Gene, if Sher Sway and Itachi are not returned, then Lord Gene will not attend a meeting. Even if you kill Jyn's
Speaker A
parents, it will be useless." Saratobi Herusen was momentarily stunned. For the first time, he looked up at Fugaku.
Speaker A
You've also defected to Achiha Jeene. Yes, you guessed correctly. Fugaku nodded his gaze perfectly calm. Send the two of them back. Even if they are traitors, the Achiha do not allow internal conflict and bloodshed. We can contend with you within conventional
Speaker A
boundaries. Even if you resort to open hostility, we are willing to follow your rules. But likewise, do not push us too far. Do not force the Aiha to take that final path. Although we wish to inherit a relatively unscathed Kinoa and are
Speaker A
therefore willing to contend with you within a limited scope, we have no desire to extend the conflict to encompass the entire village. But if you interpret this as a sign of Achiha weakness or believe we lack the capability, then you, the Kohaa
Speaker A
leadership, would be gravely mistaken. Fagaka's expression turned icy, his voice laden with menace. Then without another word, he revealed his Mangeko.
Speaker A
This an ability he had kept hidden for many years known to no one. Meanwhile, on the other side, upon hearing these threats, Saratobi Herusen was momentarily frozen in place of flicker of astonishment showing in his eyes. Was this still that weakwilled Fagaku?
Speaker A
However, before he could fully process it, he laid eyes on Fagaka's Mangeko. He was utterly dumbfounded. Sucking in a sharp breath, his voice turned trembling and fearful. Mangeko, you've awakened it, too. This Saratobi Herusen shuddered. His face turned ashen, and he
Speaker A
couldn't help but tremble slightly. Fagaka's Mangeko had thoroughly terrified him. It couldn't be helped. A single Aihajene with a Mangeko had already cornered the Konoha leadership.
Speaker A
Now Fagaku also possessed a Mangeko which completely put him in a checkmate position, especially considering the possibility of a full-scale rupture with the Achiha pitting the village against two Mangeko wielders and the entire clan. Could the village truly withstand
Speaker A
such an assault? Even if they managed to annihilate the Achiha, what immense price would the village have to pay?
Speaker A
Could a shattered Kinoa withstand the other hidden villages? Indeed, just as Aiha dared not rashly start a war, Saratobi Haruen had the same concerns.
Speaker A
After mulling it over for a long time, he let out a helpless sigh. He tapped his desk and an Uu appeared. Hokag sama have Shers and Itachi return immediately. They are to disregard all other matters. Then, without a single
Speaker A
word of descent, the U turned and left. 20 minutes later, Shers and Itachi, who were setting up defenses in the forest of death, were stunned by the abrupt order from Husen. Danzo, however, couldn't contain his fury roaring. Has
Speaker A
that fool Hirusen lost his mind? Why recall Shers Sway and Itachi at a time like this? Shers, Itachi, neither of you is to go anywhere. Danzo was livid, his veins bulging in anger. Nonsense. This was the most critical moment for
Speaker A
ambushing Aiha. He was loathed to let them leave. But unfortunately, Sherse and Itachi were not Danzo's men, they were loyal to Saratobi Herusen. Now that they had received a direct order from Husen, they naturally wouldn't obey Danzo. They offered him a brief
Speaker A
apologetic bow before swiftly heading to the Hokag's office. Then the moment they saw Fagaku, their expressions turned grim. But before they could even voice a question, they saw Fagaku open his eyes, revealing his unique Mangeko. Mangeko Fagakasama, what is the meaning of this?
Speaker A
Shers began instinctively sensing trouble. Unfortunately, because they were in the Hokag's office, Shersu had no guard up against Fugaku. Takamagara, this was Fagaku's right eye dojutsu.
Speaker A
Similar in function to his left eye was also a special time-based ability. Its ability was even simpler. His left eye is Anaji's premonition saw through time to anchor a point and make predictions.
Speaker A
His right eyes ability was pure delay, slowing the passage of time by 10fold, 100fold, even a thousandfold within a certain range. Within this space, only Fagaku could move normally. Of course, Fagaka's current ability was rather limited, he could only slow time by a
Speaker A
factor of 20. But that was enough. Even though Shers tried his utmost to resist his speed before Fagaku was too slow.
Speaker A
Even as Sherse the body flicker, he appeared to be moving in slow motion in front of Fugaku. In an instant, Fagaku's hand pressed against Sheru, sealing his chakra completely and directly gouging out his eyes. Immediately after, he began sealing Itachi's chakra. And 5
Speaker A
seconds later, Fagaku closed his Mangeko. Yet even in those mere 5 seconds, a streak of blood trickled from Fagaka's eyes, revealing the immense power of this dojitsu and the extraordinary drain on his ocular chakra. Fagaka, what are you doing?
Speaker A
Husen Saratobi roared. Sheree and Itachi were his pawns, especially powerful ones. And now they were being crippled like this. He rose to his feet, smashing the desk with a single palm, tore off his hokag robe, revealing the battle
Speaker A
attire beneath. At this moment, he was truly enraged. Yet he did not actually strike as he was also intimidated by Fagaka's methods. Indeed, the abilities of the Mangeko were myriad and strange, though only a few like Amiturasu and
Speaker A
Kimmy were visible to outsiders while most were imperceptible. Like Sukuyami, unless you were the target, no one else could perceive it. Such was the case with Fagaku's Mangeko technique. From Hirus's perspective, it seemed as though Fagaku leisurely sealed Shers and
Speaker A
Itachi's chakra, then casually took Sherui's eyes. Shers and Itachi were as if stupified, offering no resistance whatsoever. Fagaku's ocular power was limited to them alone, which was the least draining method. Thus, Herusen could not discern the truth, but
Speaker A
it only filled him with greater dread. After all, he knew well that even Sher Sway and Itachi, with their formidable strength, could not resist. He himself would likely be powerless. imagining himself unable to offer even a token resistance under Fagaka's eerie
Speaker A
technique easily stabbed by a canai sent a shiver down his spine raising his weariness of Fagaku to the highest level clan leader why father how could you do this shers and itachi spoke their hearts filled with anger but even more with
Speaker A
incomprehension after all in their minds Fagaku should not be like this such behavior was utterly unjustified to this Fagaka's expression remained cold and indifferent as he spoke calmly Lord Gene is right no matter what You think there must be no civil war within the Aiha. In
Speaker A
ordinary times, losing one or two in internal strife might be tolerable. But now the Aiha are on the brink of destruction. All the ninja clans of Kohaa are watching us. The Aiha situation is already dire. If internal conflict erupts, it will only make other
Speaker A
clans look down on us further. Aiha that falls into infighting even in the face of extinction. Even if Lord Gene achieves great victories, other clans will hesitate to align with us. So that is why I had to bring you two back
Speaker A
before we wage war against Danzo. Of course, Lord Gene only wanted you to refrain from involvement. He was unwilling to imprison or seal you because he has absolute confidence in himself, believing that even if you sided with the Kenoha higher-ups, he
Speaker A
could still triumph over them. This is his conviction like an invincible path. He never resorts to schemes, only employs open strategies. But I Faku am not. After participating in the Hokag's conversation with Lord Gene, I truly understood the attitude of the Kenoha
Speaker A
high-ups, I realized how terribly wrong I have been as clan leader all these years. If not for Lord Jyn's emergence, the Aiha would likely have been annihilated under my leadership. So, I must atone. When Lord Jeene is unwilling
Speaker A
to intervene, I Fagaka will set aside my reputation to you to Shersway and Itachi. I cannot help Lord Gene in other matters, but this small task I am capable of. Itachi is my own child. As his father considering his youth, I
Speaker A
merely confine him at home to learn properly. No one in Kohaa can object to that. As for Yuru, though you are not my child, I am your clan leader. Kenoha must not interfere in internal clan affairs. This was declared by the first
Speaker A
Hokag Hashiamarama. Therefore, as clan leader, I have the right to discipline you and Kohaa has no grounds to intervene. If you choose to leave the Aiha, you must also surrender your sharing. That is the clan rule. So, Shiru, I give you a choice. If you
Speaker A
choose to leave the uchiha, I will later find you a pair of ordinary eyes and you may follow your hokage. If you choose the achi, return with me and I will replace your eyes with a pair of three
Speaker A
tommo sharing. Fagaka's tone was icy as he explained his reasons. Indeed, in the past, the Achiha seemed disunited unlike the Huga or Eno Shikacho. But the true reason was their arrogance. They disdained wielding authority. Each member chose their own faction. Yet in
Speaker A
reality, clan rules existed for every clan. When Root demanded personnel from other clans, the clan leader decided who to send, and the lower ranked members had no say. The principle of Kohaa not interfering in clan affairs was established by Hasharamaju. Therefore,
Speaker A
Fagaka's argument was absolutely valid. Every clan had to acknowledge this, and Huen Saratobi could not refute it. In matters within a clan, his status as Hokag held little sway. If he dared to interfere, other clans would surely stop
Speaker A
him. So, once again, don't underestimate the role of a clan leader. Now that Fagaku had truly set aside the Achihas pride and acted as the clan leader, he might not have influence over village affairs, but he held absolute authority
Speaker A
over Shers and Itachi. Of course, from Fagaka's actions now, it was clear how profoundly Herusen's true nature had changed Fagaka's worldview after their last conversation. Shers was stunned.
Speaker A
After listening to Fagaku, he fell silent for a long time before sighing. His earlier anger had dissipated completely. Though he wanted to help the clan in his own way, he also acknowledged his achiha identity and knew the clan rules must be followed.
Speaker A
Itachi might choose the village directly, but Shersu was different. His heart leaned more toward the even actions now were meant to help the clan.
Speaker A
So with a helpless sigh, Shersu spoke directly. I choose the chiha. I am willing to accept the clan leader's judgment. Itachi wanted to say something, but in the end, he could only let out a long sigh. There was no
Speaker A
choice. Previously, the clan's internal supervision had been relatively lax, so they naturally did as they pleased. Now that his father had spoken so bluntly, even the Hokag would find it difficult to speak on their behalf. And this was
Speaker A
indeed the truth. Although ninja clans possessed a certain degree of autonomy, and the Hokag could not easily interfere, if a clan showed weakness, the Hokag could subtly intervene in its internal affairs. The Aiha of the past had been in such a situation. Because of
Speaker A
Fagaku's weakness as clan leader Herusen Saratobi and Danzo had meddled leading to the situation with Itachi and Shersu.
Speaker A
But by the same token, as long as the clan stood firm, the Hokag would be left helpless. This was precisely why the Kenoha higher-ups had always tried to divide and eliminate the various ninja clans, they lacked Hashiama's overwhelming power and Tobaramasenju's
Speaker A
unparalleled strategic and combat prowess. To seize power, they had no choice but to act this way. Now that Fagaku had suddenly hardened his stance, even Husen Saratobi had nothing to say if he forcibly interfered in the clan's internal affairs, he would be confronted
Speaker A
by all the clans the very next day. They might not ally with the Aiha. But on the issue of clan autonomy, no clan would ever concede. Because if the village could meddle in the Aiha's affairs today, it could meddle in other clans
Speaker A
tomorrow. Thus, even though Herusen Saratobi was trembling with rage and his eyes blazed with boundless killing intent, at this moment he could only remain silent. Lord Hokag, I apologize, Fagaka said calmly. My clan has other arrangements for Itachi and Sherui. So
Speaker A
from today onward, they withdraw from the U and will also step down from the ranks of active shinobi. Of course, if the village is short on ninja, the Achiha will provide new members to fill these two slots. There are matters
Speaker A
within the clan that require my attention, so I will not take up more of your time. Farewell. Faga's face was calm, his tone, even measured. Having said that, he directly led Itachi and sure sway out of the Hokag's office.
Speaker A
Herus and Saratobi wanted to speak but chose to remain silent because there was no point. Sherua a mangeko user had been rendered useless and while Itachi was still a valuable pawn with only three tommo saratobi found him rather
Speaker A
unremarkable for a crippled Shersu and an ordinary three Tommo Aiha it was not worth breaking the rules and openly clashing with the Aiha. In the end he could only watch Fagaku lead the others away never uttering another word his
Speaker A
face turning in ash and shade of iron with a helpless sigh. Herusen Saratobi relaxed. He put on the Hokag's robe once more, dawned his hat, and sat back down behind his desk. He puffed on his pipe, the furrow between his brows deepening.
Speaker A
Jean Fugaku, the situation is spiraling out of control. I can only hope Danzo succeeds. Failure impossible. Even without Itachi and Shirui's combat power, Danzo still holds many cards.
Speaker A
That bastard Aiha gene is too arrogant. He's still willing to step into a trap even when he knows it's one. But then again, that's typical of the Aiha.
Speaker A
However, even the third rakage was cornered and killed by the IWA ninja. I refuse to believe that Achihaene is stronger than the third rakage. That bastard Aiha will pay for his arrogance.
Speaker A
Fugaku, though he's awakened the man, Gekko, he's still a complete fool. Once we confirm Aiha Jyn's death, dealing with the Aiha will be easy. Herusen Saratobi's eyes flickered with calculation. Only after he had fully reasoned through these matters did he
Speaker A
finally breathe a sigh of relief. At last, he took a long look at the portraits of the past. Tokag on the wall, then walked to the window and stared blankly at the night scenery outside. Finally, his gaze fixed on the
Speaker A
direction of the Hokag rock. In the pitch black night, the statues of the former Hokag loomed shifting between light and shadow. Hirus and Seratobi's eyes fell on the second statue, that of his teacher, Tobaramaju. Sensei, I will protect Kohaa with all my might. Never
Speaker A
shall I allow the Aiha to claim the title of Hokag. Everything for the sake of Kenoha. Meanwhile, on the other side, outside the Aiha clan grounds in the pitch black night. Aihaene leaned against the utility pole. On the wide
Speaker A
road, dim lights flickered and a flock of crows rose from the dense forest behind him. These were the summoning beasts raised by the Aiha clan members.
Speaker A
But at that moment, Gene had no mind to watch them. His brows were slightly furrowed, his eyes flickering with uncertainty, his mind deep in thought.
Speaker A
Of course, he was not pondering the petty conflicts between the village and the Aiha clan. Instead, he was thinking about the most formidable figures in this shinobi world. First, the sage of six paths. This being lurked in the pure
Speaker A
land, and Achiha Jeene could not determine whether he could actually manifest in the ninja world. He had only appeared once during the fourth great ninja war, and given his limited screen time, many things could only be inferred. Gene was tempted to kill
Speaker A
Sasuke and Narudo outright because protagonists were inherently uncontrollable. He feared that no matter how well he laid his groundwork, these two, once they grew up, might reject his plans and deliberately sabotage him. But at the same time, if he did make a move
Speaker A
against them, would the sage of six paths suddenly appear and crush him with a single slap. Throughout every reincarnation of Indra and Ashura, they had almost always died only at each other's hands, never once at the hands of another. This made Achihajene feel a
Speaker A
prickling unease. Then there were the three great sage regions, especially Mount Maboku, which was deeply suspicious. Why would a bunch of toads care so much about humans? They weren't even the same species, were they? It was as absurd as humans caring deeply about
Speaker A
the world of ants, constantly selecting certain ants to teach them jutsu and sending them to find the savior of the ant world. Would humans care if ants went extinct? No. So, by the same logic, why did Mount Myaboku care so much about
Speaker A
the human world? Moreover, they possessed prophetic dreams. Could they foresee him? Beyond that, there were the hidden Jiggan, the unknown fate of Hamira Atsutsuki, the mysterious death god, Yama and Jashin, and the enigmatic bounty exchange. Was it truly only
Speaker A
backed by the daimo and nobles, and the strange power structure of the ninja world? Was it really just because Shinobi were too loyal that they allowed the daimo and nobles to sit on top of them? Was there a deeper reason? Were
Speaker A
there puppeteers behind the daimo and nobles? Sigh. Thinking of this, Achihajene, let out a helpless sigh. The waters of the ninja world were still too deep, which was why he dared not overturn the table recklessly, but instead probed cautiously. After all, he
Speaker A
was just an ordinary man with no cheat like Golden Finger, and his strength was only that of a man Gekcko user. He was genuinely afraid of disrupting some cunning veteran schemes and having a hidden mastermind jump out to slap him
Speaker A
to death. So, playing it safe was fine. Aiha Jyn's eyes flickered. Amid his thoughts, he saw Fagaku returning with two miserable children. Elder Gene, Fagaku, what have you. Seeing Sher Sui's blinded eyes and Itachi's grim expression, he was truly takenback.
Speaker A
Indeed, he hadn't expected Fugaku to be so ruthless, directly gouging out Sher Suis eyes. Damn, was this the same weak, hesitant Fugaku. Fagaka's face was calm. Some things Gene can't do, but I, as the clan head, am not exempt. Since I
Speaker A
am the Aiiah clan head, I have the authority to discipline all Aiha. Since seeing Herus and Saratob's ugly face, clearly I've grown ever more hateful of my past mistakes. This can only be considered my atonement. He sighed deeply. Aiha hearing this couldn't help
Speaker A
but twitch his mouth. It seems seeing Herusen's true face had indeed impacted Fagaku's worldview greatly, turning the timid Fagaku into an aggressive man. If Herusen learned of this, he might actually cry himself unconscious in the bathroom. Fine, it's good, too. It's
Speaker A
Sher Sui's luck though as Sharinggon was removed. At least he kept his life. Temporarily hand them over to Elder Amano. Then you go help Elder Hacked at the root base. After I clash with Danzo, we'll launch a surprise attack on the
Speaker A
root base. Aihajin spoke with a serious tone. Since Shersu and Itachi were already sealed in their chakra, and Shirui's eyes were removed, he could speak quite freely now. Fagaka had no objections, but the blinded Shers couldn't help but speak out. Gene, what
Speaker A
are you planning? Itachi also turned pale cold sweat dripping from his forehead. They truly hadn't expected that while Danzo had set a trap for Achihajene, it seemed Aiha had other schemes in mind. And to this, Achiha Jeene casually said, "My parents are in
Speaker A
Danzo's hands. Can you guess whether I could see the village using this to set a trap for me? So the question is, why didn't I rescue my parents in advance?
Speaker A
Why deliberately leave this flaw? Shirou, you're too naive. Losing your eyes might be a good thing." Spend this time in the clan grounds and reflect deeply. I'm off. After saying that, Achiha Jeene patted Sherui's shoulder and walked toward Danzo's trap with a
Speaker A
smile. Fugaki's gaze was deep. He quickened his pace and handed the two over to Elder Amano. And to this looking at the blinded shway and the chakra sealed Attachi, he couldn't help but sigh deeply. All this Achiha power, not
Speaker A
only can it be used, but they might even have to fight against their own kin for the village. Sealing them is also for the best. Better than death at least.
Speaker A
Leave this matter to me. Fagaku, you go attend to your duties. Aihaano's tone was somber. Indeed, if Shers and Itachi were both willing to help the clan, the Aiha could rise faster and spare Gene some worry. Unfortunately, Shersu and
Speaker A
Itachi were too stubborn. So sealing them temporarily was also a good thing. However, he was increasingly satisfied with Fagaku's decisive action and sense of duty. It had to be said though Fagaka wasn't a good clan head. If he weren't
Speaker A
forced to be one, he would be a fine Aiha warrior. Elder Amano, I've troubled you. Fagaka gave a slight bow, then turned and left. His eyes no longer held confusion or hesitation, only a chilling coldness and a battle intense soaring to
Speaker A
the heavens. What harm was there in killing? Perhaps he was indecisive when handling clan affairs overthinking and thus making mistakes. But when it came to killing, he never faltered.
Speaker A
Otherwise, he wouldn't have earned the title fears Fagaku on the battlefield. Meanwhile, on the other side, compared to the Achihas soaring battle intentway, and Itachi's hearts plunged into an abyss, this was a disaster. Danzo's so-called killing trap was from the very
Speaker A
beginning within Aiha Jyn's calculations. And it seemed Aiha intended to take advantage of this opportunity. They wanted to go to the Hokag's office to report this major matter so the village could prepare in advance. However, thinking of their
Speaker A
current predicament, they could only sigh and give up that idea. Sheru, itachi, you two need not overthink. Just stay in the clan grounds from now on.
Speaker A
The sealing technique Fagaka used on you is the four symbol seal from the Uzumaki clan. Back then, Makoto and Kusha were close friends and it was Kusha's birthday gift to Makoto. Among the current Aiha, only Fagaku has mastered
Speaker A
this sealing technique. Moreover, the key to this sealing technique is not fixed. Each user has a different key.
Speaker A
Even if Herusen Saratobi knows the four symbol seal, without Fagaka's key, he couldn't undo it either. So, don't cause trouble for me. Just beat ordinary people for a while. Aihaano's tone was strange. Indeed, he suddenly realized that apart from being the clan head,
Speaker A
Fagaku was actually a damn genius in every other way. He had awakened the man Gekko early earned recognition from enemy villages through his combat prowess, thus gaining the title fearside Fagaku and even showed talent in sealing arts. In short, as long as he wasn't the
Speaker A
clan head, he was an outstanding talent within the clan. Back then, everyone might have been wrong if Fagaku truly wasn't suitable to be the clan head.
Speaker A
Itachi Sheru both were speechless. Their expressions sour. Aihaano's words completely shattered their illusions. No matter how grand their ambitions or dreams were from this moment on, it was all over. The future direction of the Aiha could only be left to Aiha other
Speaker A
than silently praying they could think of no other solution. Outside the village in the forest of death, Aiha wasn't in a hurry. Instead, he strolled leisurely, even taking time to appreciate the scenery along the way.
Speaker A
Even though it was deep night, pitch black all around with no scenery to speak of, he still maintained the demeanor of a supreme powerhouse entering Danzo's trap without haste.
Speaker A
Looking around, there was a sea of people. In the front were a horde of rogue ninjas and miscellaneous defectors from various villages. Behind them were mass dumb and at the very back stood Danzo with his core subordinates. Danzo,
Speaker A
let's begin. Aiha Jeene crossed his arms, eyes full of disdain and mockery, standing there calmly. Now Danzo narrowed his eyes. With a slight wave of his hand, a lead U hidden in the four corners appeared and began forming hand
Speaker A
seals. ram, monkey, snake, rabbit, tiger for violet flames formation. Within the forest of death, violet flames surged upward. In merely a dozen seconds, a cube was constructed, each side enveloped by purple fire directly, enclosing the entire battlefield.
Speaker A
Standing outside the four violet flame barrier, Danzo's lips curled into a sinister grin. Gazing at Achihajene, trapped within, he felt an overwhelming sense of elation. Aiha, I never imagined your weakness would be your parents.
Speaker A
Though I can't fathom why you never came to rescue them from root all this time, but it doesn't matter now. His face was filled with disdain. The moment Shers Sway and Itachi were reassigned, he realized the plan had been leaked.
Speaker A
Originally, he thought the scheme would be scrapped. Yet, Achiha Jeene still came. Thus, even though much remained beyond his comprehension, he had no desire to delve deeper. As long as Aiha died, nothing else mattered. Kill. With a wave of Danzo's hand, the U and rude
Speaker A
operatives within the barrier began forcing the rogue ninjas. And wandering ninjas to confront Achihajing. But unfortunately, the foremost wandering ninjas, and rogue ninjas were not fools.
Speaker A
They almost instantly sense something a miss. They have been lured by money tasked with dealing with an ordinary Aiha. But the spectacle before them clearly indicated they were meant to be cannon fodder to exhaust the enemy.
Speaker A
Would they even live to spend the promised wealth given the adversary who made even a Kohaa elder so wary? I'm out. Me too. Let's go. Whoever wants that money can earn it. I'm not staying.
Speaker A
Numerous wandering and rogue ninjas voiced their descent. Clearly, they were not stupid. Sensing trouble, they immediately prepared to flee. But in response, the root and U personnel did not stop them, merely watching as if they were fools as one by one they
Speaker A
collided with the four violet flame barrier and turned into great fireballs. Screams, cries of agony, and howls ensued. The rogue and wandering ninja's faces darkened while the umbu and root observed coldly. At that moment, Danzo spoke again. Your mission is to kill
Speaker A
Aiha. Only when the enemy before you is dead will you gain true freedom and a lifetime of wealth beyond your needs.
Speaker A
Otherwise, you are doomed. With Danzo's icy provocation, a carrot and stick approach. The gathered rogue and wandering ninjas finally fixed their gazes on Aiha. Their eyes harbored a steadily intensifying murderous intent.
Speaker A
In response, Achihaene narrowed his eyes. He stood with arms crossed as if watching a farce too lazy even to stop Danzo. Now seeing that Danzo had finally completed the death trap, he cracked his neck and loosened his limbs. Do you two
Speaker A
wish to dance? Aiha Jins tone was flat. His serene gaze turned bloodthirsty and frenzied a cruel smile, curling at the corner of his mouth as he charged straight into the crowd. At that moment, he tore off his gentle mask
Speaker A
entirely, as if returning to the battlefield of the third great ninja war. Hey, yes. During the third war, the Aiha were frequently stabbed in the back by Danzo. He survived the war not by luck. No reputation had spread because
Speaker A
his methods were ruthless enough. Everyone who witnessed his actions died, including his own teammates. Kill. With all escape routes cut off by the four violet flame barrier and goated by Danzo's promises of gold, the rogue and wandering ninjas erupted with soaring
Speaker A
battle spirit. Soon the two sides clashed violently. In an instant, Aiha Jyn's figure became a black lightning bolt. His body flicker technique was used to perfection, evading all tai jutsu and dodging any ninjutsu with ease. Bang! With a sweep of his left
Speaker A
arm, Aiha Jeene shattered the steel blades of three wandering ninjas, sending them flying like ragdolls. He crouched slightly, then kicked off, cracking the ground like a spiderweb and casually sent a rogue ninja who was forming hand seals flying. In the blink
Speaker A
of an eye, over a dozen had lost their lives, not even touching his clothes.
Speaker A
Mangeko unnecessary. In his crimson eyes, three Tommo spun ceaselessly. Though the scene seemed chaotic, every move and flow of chakra was laid bare before his vision. He wielded Achiha's ninja body with divine grace moving like a fluttering butterfly who in less than
Speaker A
3 minutes he had killed over 200 without using a single ninjutsu he shattered the entire group of rogue and wandering ninjas that Danzo had gathered demon he's a demon I won't fight him everyone run the remaining rogue and wandering
Speaker A
ninjas their courage utterly broken fled in panic crying for their mothers some charged into the four violet flame barrier and became fireballs others rushed toward the route and u lines only to be instantly slain by Kenoa's elite.
Speaker A
In response, Aihaene sneered with contempt. Without hesitation, he stroed toward the U and Root. Meanwhile, on the other side, Danzo witnessing this was utterly dumbfounded. His eyes were filled with disbelief as he couldn't help asking, "Sugan, is Aiha really this
Speaker A
strong?" Yes, he had originally intended to exhaust Achiha Jyns ocular techniques using these men. But now the rogue and wandering ninjas he had paid for didn't even qualify to force Achiha to activate his mangeko. In an instant, Danzo felt his scalp prickles, sensing a
Speaker A
loss of control. In response, UNV Chu Jin furrowed his brow slightly, but replied respectfully, "Lord Danzo, I am not certain." Aihajene participated in the third great ninja war, yet no one truly saw him fight. I never thought much of it before, but seeing this now,
Speaker A
I believe it is highly likely that anyone who witnessed Aiha in action probably died. That is the only plausible explanation. I otherwise someone so powerful would not have remained completely unheralded on the battlefield. Yes, in UNV Chu Jens
Speaker A
view that was the only possibility. Normally, anyone who fought on the battlefield would leave behind legends.
Speaker A
Names like Manado Namek's yellow flash, Fagaka's fierce eye, and Sukumo Hitaki's white fang were earned blade by blade on the battlefield. Aiha was entirely different. He had no moniker. He was virtually invisible. Had he not awakened his man Gekkyo Shainggon, no one would
Speaker A
have known his true strength. Thus, considering this, the only conclusion was that Achihaene deliberately concealed his power. Anyone who saw him fight had likely perished. Damn it. This Achihajene is truly insidious. You should join the fight. Find a way to
Speaker A
kill him. Danzo's voice was icy as he issued the command. Beads of cold sweat formed on his forehead, a faint tremor of unease stirring within him.
Speaker A
Perhaps even he refused to admit it, but at this moment, he was afraid. Yes, Achihajene was so formidable, yet he had never revealed this power before. Even during their last confrontation in the Hokag's office, he had chosen to use his
Speaker A
maneko instead of this strength. Was it to guard against the death trap Danzo had prepared for him now? What was this insidious man plotting? But there was no time to dwell on it. No matter what Achihaene was scheming, Danzo had to
Speaker A
eliminate him today or the difficulty would only grow. Meanwhile, on the other side, as Danzo spoke, Abraim to Yune and the others nodded slowly. Under roots brainwashing, they had long lost fear and dread. So no matter how powerful
Speaker A
Achihajene was, their eyes remained unchanged. They merely bowed slightly and walked to the edge of the four violet flame formation. The rude elite controlling the formation opened a small gap and once Abureame and the others entered, they slowly sealed it shut.
Speaker A
Let's begin. Abure Tory spoke calmly. Then he charged straight at Achihajene with the others following close behind.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Aiha began to feel the pressure mounting. Even as he unleashed ninjutsu, his killing pace slowed. It couldn't be helped. Root and U were elite koha shinobi far beyond rogue ninja or renegades. One-on-one, he was unafraid, even against a few squads. But
Speaker A
now, he faced an overwhelming number of enemies. A quick glance told him there was at least one U battalion. A battalion consisted of three companies, each with 12 squads. That made 36 U squads in total. Root had fewer members,
Speaker A
but still 15 squads. It seemed Kenoha's higher-ups had truly spared no expense to eliminate him this time. Hey, interesting. Trying to drain my dojitsu.
Speaker A
Then, as you wish. It's time to make Kenoha's leadership feel fear and dread to show them how foolish it is to overturn the table. Aiha Jyn's eyes flickered. Then, without hesitation, the three tommo in his eyes transformed into
Speaker A
the Mangeko Sharing. Third power sus. In an instant, Aiha Jyns mano spun wildly, emitting a blinding crimson light. His dojitsu poured forth furiously from his eyes, and faint black curse marks spread across the ground.
Speaker A
Then a black susenu rose upon the earth. Not enough to intimidate Kenoha's leadership, the first stage is far from sufficient. Then, disregarding the cost aihajene unleashed even more dojitsu.
Speaker A
The black head of the susenu emerged from the void, followed by its neck, limbs, and skeletal frame. In the blink of an eye, it grew to over 10 m tall.
Speaker A
Still not enough. It needs to be more all inspiring. So continue. Aiha Jyn's eyes flickered. Then with another surge of dojutsu, the susenu grew flesh and finally clad itself in black armor. The black giant now stood over 30 m tall.
Speaker A
More importantly at this stage, the susenu held a long sword in its hand. Yes, that's enough. Half-stage susenu is sufficient. The full body form is unnecessary. Even to intimidate Kenoha's leadership, there's no need to waste too much dojitsu. Aiha Jyn's eyes flickered.
Speaker A
He controlled the 30 m tall black susenu standing proudly in the forest of death stunning everyone present. Yes, since Madaraa Aiha had left Kinoa, no one had seen the susenu in years. To the current Canoha, the susenu was merely a legend.
Speaker A
Now faced with this 30 m giant fear crept into every gaze. What is this thing? You're kidding. Fight him. Run.
Speaker A
At this moment, even the Kohaa couldn't hold their ground, let alone the rogue ninja and renegades. No way. This was something beyond human capability. For the current shinobi world, Hashiamaramaju and Madara were already legends. And it was not yet the era
Speaker A
where Kaga level fighters were a dime a dozen. Thus faced with this clearly unnatural susenu. Even the Kohaa U couldn't withstand it. Only root though shocked managed to maintain a semblance of calm. Outside the four violet flame formation, Danzo was utterly
Speaker A
dumbfounded. How is this possible? The legendary third power, the susenu. Is this powerful? A this. Then the next second, Aiha commanded the Susenu to draw the long sword from its waist and slash fiercely at the crowd. Boom! With
Speaker A
that one stroke, countless died in terror. The ground was split open with a horrifying crack, and even the four violet flame formation was cleaved apart by the susen's blade. Then, knowing time was short, Aiha gave no one a chance to
Speaker A
recover. He swung the long sword horizontally again, instantly slaughtering countless more shinobi. In just two strikes, two/3s of the enemies were eliminated. Seeing the four violet flame formation shattered rogue ninja and renegades fled frantically toward the outskirts of Kenoha while the
Speaker A
remaining U also retreated into the distance. Rude under Danzo's coercion fought desperately but it was useless.
Speaker A
All their ninjutsu couldn't breach the susenu. On the contrary, because they didn't flee, they were cut down by Achihajin's blade. Damn it, it's over.
Speaker A
How could the Aiha susenu be this powerful? How do we fight this? Sweat beated on Danzo's forehead, his eyes filled with terror. Then the next second without hesitation he turned and quietly slipped away. Yes, he had no interest in
Speaker A
fighting Aiha. Seeing the death trap collapse, he quietly left the scene, signaling the other root members to withdraw discreetly. 10 seconds later, feeling the tremendous drain on his dojutsu Aiha deactivated his man Gekko.
Speaker A
With the Susenu's disappearance, everyone breathed a sigh of relief. But the next second with his three tommo sharing gone act of Achihajene ignored the scattered remnants and dashed straight toward Danzos direction.
Speaker A
Aihajin your parents are in my hands. Susenu seeing Achiha closing and Danzo couldn't help but speak. But unfortunately Achihajene paid him no heat. Instead he activated his Mangeko technique. In an instant Danzo's entire body collapsed, dissipating like a wisp
Speaker A
of smoke into nothing. 10 seconds later, Danzo resurrected once again fled without a second word, casually throwing out, "Stop Aiha." Abiram Toryune and Yamanaka fu charged toward Achihajene without hesitation. Mind disturbance jutzu secret art poison dust jutzu.
Speaker A
Their speed was blinding, accompanied by a swarm of venomous insects spreading like a locust plague. Beneath the cover of the insect swarm, the Yamanaka clan's mind disturbance, jutzu, began attempting to disrupt Achihajin's chakra. However, unfortunately for them, Aiha Jeene was even faster. Susenu, he
Speaker A
had no interest in wasting time on these small fry. With a single Mangeko technique, he instantly eliminated both of them, then charged straight toward Danzo's position. 10 seconds later, catching sight of Danzo's back once more, Achihajene struck without a
Speaker A
moment's hesitation. Susenu, as a trail of blood, tears streaked down his face, Danzos body crumbled once again.
Speaker A
Aiha halted his steps. He crossed his arms once more, beginning to wait. The next second, not far to his right, Danzo's figure appeared. Windstyle vacuum great sphere. Whoosh! Aiha easily evaded the wind technique, then activated his maneko once more. Danzo
Speaker A
dead again, briefly assessing his ocular power consumption. He even felt his vision had begun to blur slightly. "I need to finish this quickly." Aiha murmured to himself. He had never considered fighting a conventional battle against Danzo for the old man's
Speaker A
combat prowess was far from weak. combined with his anagi and would style killing him permanently within a short time would be no easy task. Therefore, it was better to seize this opportunity to exhaust his sharing completely. After all, given the current state of the
Speaker A
Achiha clan, collecting Shainggon had become an almost impossible endeavor. That's right. Aiha had no intention of killing Danzo. The purpose this time was merely to buy time to secure precious moments for Achiha Yoshiro's side while depleting Danzo's stockpile of
Speaker A
Sharinggon. Kill Danzo. Danzo indeed deserved death, but not yet. If Danzo and Root were gone, who would be left to force the other clans to abandon darkness and embrace the light?
Speaker A
Therefore, eliminating Root's fighting force as much as possible, exhausting Danzo Shainggon reserves and driving him to desperately oppress the other ninja clans. This was Achiha Jyn's true objective. 3 minutes later, Danzo's stockpile of Shaing was completely exhausted, leaving only the man Gekko
Speaker A
embedded in his right eye socket, the one belonging to Achiha Kagami. Enough Achihajin. I think we can talk. Whatever you want, I'll provide it if I can.
Speaker A
Let's make a deal. Danzo chose to seize hostilities preparing to negotiate with Achiha. Indeed, faced with Aiha Jyn's virtually unsolvable ocular technique, he genuinely could not devise a countermeasure. Even fleeing had become a luxury beyond reach. Therefore, Danzo,
Speaker A
who was not yet ready to die, decided to attempt a negotiation. What choice did he have? Though he knew the odds were slim, this was his only remaining chance to gamble on survival. And to this hearing Danzo's capitulation, Aiha gene
Speaker A
breathed a quiet sigh of relief. Indeed, he too feared accidentally killing Danzo for good. Should that happen, the Aiha would gain nothing while the other clans of Kohaa would be celebrating with fireworks and festivities. Such a gift to his enemies was something Aiha gene
Speaker A
would never do. Negotiate. Fine. Dead demon consuming seal flying thunder god technique Hasharama sells with the corresponding research data and impure world reincarnation. Give me these four things and I'll spare your life today.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene stated directly. These were the prizes he most desired to secure at this stage. Although Achiha Yashiro and his team had already raided the root base, there was no telling whether they could locate these items. If he could
Speaker A
obtain them directly from Danzo's hands, it would be a welcome bonus. What? How do you know about these? Damn it, there's a spy. Danzo's expression turned grim, his entire body trembling with rage. These matters were top secret within the village. How could the Aiha
Speaker A
possibly know of them? Therefore, the only explanation he could conceive was a spy. And to this, Achiha Jeene remained non-committal, merely stating calmly, "Just say the word, will you hand them over or not? Once I return, I'll give
Speaker A
them to you." Danzo spoke. However, unfortunately for him, Aiha Jins tone was composed, "An item of such importance, I doubt you'd store it at the base. You'd certainly keep it on your person." Hearing this, Danzos face darkened. Nevertheless, gazing into
Speaker A
Aiha Jyn's stern, unyielding eyes, he knew that stalling was virtually impossible. So, in the end, he reluctantly summoned a massive storage scroll through the summoning jutzu.
Speaker A
After searching through it briefly, he grudgingly handed over the items. Aiha Jeene inspected them, and only after confirming everything was in order did he stow them away. Good a pleasure doing business. With those words, Aiha turned to leave for all of today's objectives
Speaker A
had been accomplished. And yet at this Danzo stood frozen in place, unable to stop himself from asking, "Don't you want to rescue your parents?" "My parents?" Aiha Jyns tone was dismissive. "They're at the root base, aren't they? However, I do
Speaker A
appreciate your concern." The other Aiha have already made their way to the root base by now. I imagine my parents have already returned to the clan compound.
Speaker A
"Farewell," Aihaene offered a casual smile. He cast one last indifferent glance at Danzo, then strolled away with complete nonulence. Danzo, at this moment he was utterly bewildered.
Speaker A
Appreciate my concern. I don't give a damn about your gratitude. Was I worried about you? But upon hearing that the other Aiha were currently assaulting the root base, he nearly vomited blood from sheer fury. It all clicked. It finally
Speaker A
all made sense. He had kept feeling something was off. Why Achihajene wasn't anxious to rescue his parents and why he had willingly walked into this trap even knowing it was one. Now he understood.
Speaker A
On one hand, Achiha Jeene had absolute confidence in his own strength. But more crucially, the bastard had turned the trap against its creator, imagining a horde of Achiha storming into his root base. Danzo's face was twisted with despair as if he had lost his own
Speaker A
father. "Damn it, you a cursed Achiha! I Danzo will not forgive you." Ar having fully grasped the situation, Danzo felt his heart shatter into pieces. He rushed toward the root base with all his might.
Speaker A
But by the time he actually arrived, all he could see was a towering blaze rising into the sky, surrounded by ENBU operatives. And at their head, the third Hokag Saratobi Herusen. Root, my life's work. It's all over. No. Gazing upon the
Speaker A
raging inferno before him, he spat out a mouthful of blood. And then he collapsed into unconsciousness. Saratobi Herusen was instantly dumbfounded. Watching Danzo, who had directly spit blood and fallen unconscious, the questions he originally wanted to ask were
Speaker A
immediately choked back down his throat. Is Achiha dead? How many men did we lose? Damn it. Couldn't you have finished giving me the details before passing out? But alas, with a helpless sigh, Saratobi Harusen spoke. Third squad take Elder Danzo to
Speaker A
the hospital. First squad head to the forest of death. I want to know who Root was fighting in the exact casualty situation. The two Ubu squads immediately knelt on one knee. Then one squad carried Danzo and rushed to the
Speaker A
hospital while the other headed toward the forest of death. As for this, Saratobi Herusen quietly watched the two U squads leave, then turned to look at the fiercely burning root base momentarily unsure if he should extinguish the fire. There was no
Speaker A
choice. Who knew what was inside the root base? If the U firefighters discovered something, they shouldn't see. At that thought, he shook his head.
Speaker A
He couldn't afford that cost. After all, he had brought on Buu, not the Saratobi clan's loyalists. So, he naturally didn't dare take that risk. Therefore, at this moment, Saratobi Haruen could only pray that Danzo would truly kill Achihajin. Unfortunately, however, first
Speaker A
squad returned quickly, their eyes filled with terror. Hokag sama. So many dead bodies. Many people died at the edge of the forest of death. At least over 300, most of them rogue ninja and missing Nin. We even found many bodies
Speaker A
wearing Ubu uniforms. The exact numbers and identities require further verification. Also, a huge new fisher appeared near the forest of death. It's unclear what kind of jutzu caused it, but it's likely related to the giant black figure that suddenly emerged there
Speaker A
earlier. The umbon knelt on one knee and began to report in detail. Indeed, the black giant silhouette at the forest of death was so enormous that even though they were far away, they could still see that over 30 m tall black giant. Not to
Speaker A
mention them, even the entire Kenoha probably could see that thing. As for this, Saratobi Hirusen closed his eyes in contemplation, his mind racing.
Speaker A
Although the death toll was indeed alarming, as long as they could kill that bastard Aiha, these people's sacrifices would be meaningful. So, is that Aiha dead or alive? It's all Danzo's fault for being so alarmist.
Speaker A
Couldn't he have told me the truth before passing out? That way, I could consider how to handle things next based on the situation. But fortunately, while he had detected the battle at the root base and rushed here with the umbu, he
Speaker A
had also sent his trusted subordinate to the Aiha clan compound. If Aiha had really survived, he would know soon. 10 minutes later, an U member approached from afar and spoke in a low voice to Saratobi Husen. Hokag sama Aiha has
Speaker A
returned. This hearing this answer, Saratobi Herusen's scalp tingled. After giving Danzo so many men, this time Aiha still survived. Almost instantly, he knew his plans were ruined. The Aiha would be even harder to deal with from now on. Thinking this, he quickly asked,
Speaker A
"How is Achiha Jyns condition? Did you see him injured or blinded in any way? A there was still a glimmer of hope in Saratobi Herzen's heart." As for this, the Ubu member respectfully replied, "No, Aiha gene is very
Speaker A
healthy." Although his clothes were stained with much blood, his steps were steady and there was not a trace of fatigue on his face. His eyes were still bright and piercing. Saratobi Harusen's heart sank to the bottom. What to do?
Speaker A
His mind began to race furiously because almost all of his previous plans were based on Jyn's death. Who could have imagined that Achihajene would still be alive? Not to mention other things the police force alone gave him a headache.
Speaker A
Previously in his imagination, as long as Achihajin died, he would directly support Fagaku to take over and then let Fagaku first fix the police force, at least replacing the U. Then after some time, he would release Shers Sway and
Speaker A
Itachi. Everything would return to how it was. But now the most damnable thing was that Aihaene hadn't died. After pondering for a long time, he slowly spoke. Dispatch men to find Jeriah and sonade. Try to persuade them to return.
Speaker A
Yes, the umbu bowed. Then Saratobi Haruen took one last deep look at the blazing root base. He still said nothing turned and left the place. Meanwhile, on the other side, after a jeene returned to the clan compound, he saw the Aihawk
Speaker A
gathered in the streets. Indeed, they might not know exactly what happened tonight, but with so many clan elites dispatched and the over 30 m black giant appearing at the forest of death, they were naturally very worried. Now seeing
Speaker A
Achiha returned, they instantly felt a sense of reassurance. Everyone is fine. Please go back and rest. As long as I'm here, the Achiha will not fall into chaos. Don't worry, sleep peacefully.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene said with a smile. His tone held a reassuring power, and the many anxious Aiha finally put their hearts at ease. 10 minutes later, back in his own home, Aiha was greeted by many clan elders and the elite Fritomo members.
Speaker A
Many of them had bloodstained robes and various wounds of all sizes, but the moment they saw Aiha, they all began to speak with delight. Elder Gene is back.
Speaker A
Gene, are you all right? Thank goodness you're back. The people present all spoke. Everyone's faces were filled with smiles and the previously heavy atmosphere instantly dissipated. Seeing this, Aiha Jeene immediately smiled and said, "Everyone, you've worked hard." As
Speaker A
for this, everyone waved their hands almost unconcerned. Fagako walked over. Gene, your parents have been rescued.
Speaker A
Their bodies are not seriously injured, but your father Shainggon was taken. However, we have some spare sharing in a clan left by previous Aiha before their deaths. So, I've already replaced your father's eyes with a new pair. But your
Speaker A
mother's strength is lower. She only has a two tommoing and cannot use as an Aji.
Speaker A
So, her eyes were not taken. Oh, and also we rescued 32 of the Aiha who had gone missing from the clan compound tonight. Upon learning that his parents were safe, Aiha Gene breathed a sigh of relief. Thank goodness. It seemed his
Speaker A
reasoning was correct. If he rose to prominence and revealed his capabilities, Danzo would not truly harm his parents, but would instead keep them as a bargaining chip against him. On the contrary, if he had chosen to storm the
Speaker A
root headquarters alone, even with his man Gekcko, whether he could rescue his parents was uncertain, and even if he succeeded, he would be branded a rogue ninja. Thus, he would be hunted by the entire Leaf Village, and even the Achiha
Speaker A
clan would pursue him. If he were alone, he would not fear such consequences and could simply become a rogue ninja. But that was not an option. As a lone rogue ninja, it would be nearly impossible to protect his parents while fleeing.
Speaker A
Therefore, Aiha Jeene endured, pondered long in his mind, and ultimately chose to join the radicals. Now, at last, success was achieved. Though his scheme seemed cold and ruthless, it was the path with the highest probability of success. Thank you. I am grateful to
Speaker A
everyone. I owe you all a great debt. Even any further words would seem insincere. Just watch my actions in the future. I promise to make the Aiha great again. Aihajene spoke with slight emotion. At this moment, he had truly
Speaker A
made up his mind and was willing to shoulder the banner of the Aiha clan.
Speaker A
Indeed, previously, he had been indifferent to the clan, offering help only when convenient, like the warning he gave to Fuad during the Ninetales incident. But when he sensed the clan was beyond saving, he prepared to flee without hesitation. Now, however, it was
Speaker A
different. He fully understood his debt to the Aiah. Without the clan backing him, he would have no grounds to contend with the leaf's higher-ups. A mere manoing gone was far from sufficient. As matters stood now, even though he had
Speaker A
eliminated so many U and root operatives, and the leaf's higher-ups knew his parents were in the Aiha compound, the village dared not exploit that fact. His parents' safety relied entirely on the Aiha's protection, having realized this Aiha gene truly
Speaker A
integrated into the Aiha clan at this moment. Gene, no need to say more. Elder Gene, this is what we all should do.
Speaker A
Yes, everyone present chimed in. Even Fua could not help stepping forward. Without a proper title, one's words carry no weight. I suggest you directly assume the position of clan leader and take over the police department. The others quickly nodded. By now, everyone
Speaker A
had accepted Aiha Jyns leadership. There was no objection to him becoming clan leader. But unfortunately, after a moment of deliberation, Aiha slowly shook his head. No, not yet. One must attend to the duties of the position.
Speaker A
The situation is already unstable. Ufua, you should remain in your role for now. Only after we have truly eliminated the leaf's high-er will it be time for me to assume the clan leadership. With Achihajins refusal, the others said
Speaker A
nothing more. They were well aware that their own judgment was lacking. Since Achiha Jin had not outright refused, but merely said, "Not yet." They would simply follow his commands. Even Fua chose to accept. No one even asked why,
Speaker A
which sufficiently demonstrated the high prestige Aiha commanded. "Jene, tell us." Aiha Setsuna stepped forward, speaking in a calm tone. What do we do next? Almost instantly, the entire room fell silent. Everyone turned to Achihajene, eager to hear if their
Speaker A
leader had any other arrangements. In response, Achihajene pondered briefly, then invited everyone to take their seats. He sat at the head. Fuette took the second seat, followed by the elders, and finally the clan's elite with three Tommo sharing gone. Compared to the clan
Speaker A
meetings during Fua's tenure, those with only two tommo were not even permitted to sit. As for what to do next, we'll discuss it later. First, let's review the situation. In tonight's clash with Danzo, nearly an entire Ubu battalion
Speaker A
was wiped out along with all of Rut's elite. Only a few scattered individuals escaped. "Yatsushiro Fua, what about your side?" Aiha Jeene asked in a calm tone, summarizing his own situation before turning to Fua and Yatsushiro.
Speaker A
Even though everyone had prepared mentally, they still couldn't help but gasp in shock. Too powerful. An entire U battalion and Danzo's elite eliminated just like that. In response, the group exchanged glances and then Aihi Yatsushiro spoke. There weren't many
Speaker A
personnel left at the root base, but the things they did were too filthy. Fua and I killed them all. His tone was exceedingly cold. Even Fua's face wore a frosty expression. I never imagined the village's higher-ups could be so
Speaker A
corrupt. The experiments in Route were too cruel. I saw many missing ninja from the village there, but they were already beyond suffering. They all begged me to kill them. Only our Achiha clansmen were somewhat better off. Perhaps because
Speaker A
Sharinggon were valuable, they were treated as precious experimental subjects. So Root handled them more carefully. That's why we were able to rescue most of them today. Tonight's gains were also enormous. Root's mission records various ninjutsu scrolls, exploding tags, canai shuriken
Speaker A
provisions, and a large sum of banknotes. The goods are miscellaneous and haven't been inventoried yet. Aiha Jyn's eyes lit up. This was good news.
Speaker A
Although the Aiha were a thousand-year-old clan, they had been suppressed by the leaf village, leaving them in dire financial straits. They had been relying on the clan's reserves to survive. With this sudden influx of wealth, things would be much easier. As
Speaker A
for going into business, he had never considered it. Though he understood some business tactics and capital operations in this marshall world of Shinobi, he had no intention of focusing on such matters. Unless the Aiha truly stabilized eliminated the leaf's
Speaker A
higher-ups, and he became the fifth Hokag, then he might implement some necessary reforms. Now, huh, what business scheme could be faster than plundering? The Aiha had deep roots.
Speaker A
There was no need for such things. His current goal was singular. Eliminate the leaf's higher-ups. Until that goal was achieved, he had no interest in any other trivial matters. I see.
Speaker A
Understood. Sort out these supplies as quickly as possible for future use. Categorize the ninjutsu and compile the u mission records. They are a trump card if used well. As for the village, ignore it for now. The longer the police
Speaker A
department issue remains unresolved, the worse the umbu's reputation becomes. Time is on our side. I'm quite curious how Herus and Saratobi will find a way out. But oh, if you have nothing better to do, there is one thing you can do.
Speaker A
Kakashi Hataki, since we have nothing to do, let's bleed the leaf's higher-ups a little. It was 2:00 in the morning. The gathering had truly come to an end, and as they departed, everyone was brimming with excitement, looking as though they
Speaker A
were ready to charge into action. Meanwhile, at that moment, Aiha arrived at his parents' room. Clearly, they had not yet retired for the night. The dark ordeal they had endured in the umbu was not something that could be erased in
Speaker A
just a day or two. Gene mother finally gets to see you. I've heard everything from the clan about what you've done.
Speaker A
You've suffered so much, my child, during this time. You must be tired. Come sit down in the room. Aihao was a beauty around 30 years old. Thanks to the constant training of Akunoichi, her figure and skin rivaled those of any
Speaker A
young girl. The moment she laid eyes on Aiha Jeene, her eyes reened instantly. And on the other side, Aiha Jyn's father, Aiha Tanichi, was also around 30, right at the prime of his life.
Speaker A
Unlike his mother, however, his father was one of the Jonin of the Aiha clan.
Speaker A
As he watched his son enter his gaze was exceedingly complex. Clearly, neither of them had ever imagined that their son would become this formidable. Not only had he awakened the Mangeko on his own, but he had also won over the entire Aiha
Speaker A
clan. Even the clan head had to heed his words. Honestly, even now, they still couldn't believe it. In their eyes, their son had always been quiet and withdrawn since childhood. He had no friends inside or outside the clan, and
Speaker A
his strength was rather ordinary. They found it unbelievable that he had even survived the third great ninja war. But who would have thought he'd suddenly hit them with something this monumental?
Speaker A
Don't worry, I'm fine. Do you blame me for taking so long to rescue you?
Speaker A
Aihajin's voice was somewhat. Although he had his own reasons, he knew that what he had done was indeed not entirely right. He could claim he was wary of the high-ranking officials of Kohha and needed to maintain the persona of not
Speaker A
caring about his parents, but as a son, it was truly well. However, Aiha Tinichi patted his shoulder. What you've done is already more than enough. I've heard the full story from the clan. Your mother and I are both proud of you. Yes, Jean.
Speaker A
Aihao said with a smile. Don't feel pressured. Your father and I will always support you. We used to think you just didn't want to play with other kids, but now we understand. Perhaps you had already seen through everything long
Speaker A
ago. But while you're busy with work, do remember to think about your personal life. It would be best if you found a girlfriend soon. Your mother and I are waiting to hold a grandchild. Almost instantly upon hearing those words, Aiha
Speaker A
Jyn's expression turned awkward. He truly hadn't expected that even after changing worlds, he'd still face pressure to get married. So, he immediately lost the desire to continue the conversation. He made up an excuse for his parents to rest early, then dash
Speaker A
straight back to his own room. This was far too terrifying. He had no intention of considering such matters anytime soon. After all, his struggle against the Kenoha High Command was still ongoing. He certainly didn't want to gain another weakness. He didn't bother
Speaker A
explaining himself to his parents, knowing full well that explanations would be feudal. Even though his parents were still young on such matters, communication was simply impossible. The next morning, early Kakashi, with his listless dead fish eyes once again
Speaker A
dawned his umbu mask. After the squad assembled, they headed to the Yu headquarters. The three-man squad wore numb expressions. They hadn't participated in last night's events as they belonged to the U's fifth division.
Speaker A
Moreover, these past few days had drained them completely. The villagers had been driving them to their wits end.
Speaker A
Exhausted, they had simply gone straight to sleep after their shift. So, as for the covert clash that unfolded last night, many members of the fifth division weren't really aware of it. Of course, Kakashi had certainly sensed it.
Speaker A
However, with the truth behind his father's death now exposed, although he had no immediate interest in pursuing revenge, the problem was that he also had little desire to help Saratobi Herusen anymore. So, regarding the clash between the Kohaa High Command and the
Speaker A
Achiha, he simply chose to pretend he knew nothing. For now, he only cared about his work. But the thing was, he really didn't want to deal with those trivial, messy affairs of the villagers.
Speaker A
He had repeatedly applied to be reassigned to other missions, even the most dangerous ones, and he would have welcomed them gladly. But unfortunately, his application reports were directly rejected by the Hokag's office. Kakashi, I'm about to lose my mind. I really
Speaker A
don't want to deal with these missions anymore. Can we resign from the umbu? I truly don't want to do this anymore.
Speaker A
Yamo walking behind Kakashi couldn't help but voice his complaints. Yes. He felt that his past experiences in route were nothing compared to the absurdity of the current affairs in the police force. It was utterly child's play. To that, Kakashi rolled his eyes, shrugged,
Speaker A
and said in a flat tone, "Everyone in the first division wants to resign. If the Hokag were to approve all of them, the entire village would be thrown into complete chaos. So just endure it. The thing you're hoping for is absolutely
Speaker A
impossible. Kakashi saw it all too clearly. Kohaa had in a sense dug its own grave. In truth, no other ninja village had a police force. Kohaa was the exception. The second Hokag had established that department specifically to corner the Aiha. On one hand, he let
Speaker A
the Kohaa villagers freely preach the will of fire. On the other, he imposed strict demands on the Aiha, deliberately isolating them. And now, the Achiha had chosen to stop playing along, leaving the villages high command utterly stuck.
Speaker A
What to do? After so many years of indulgence, the villagers had long been spoiled into a bunch of troublemakers.
Speaker A
They couldn't exactly expect these Kohóians to suddenly transform back into the gentle, obedient folk they once were, could they? And if they tried, what would happen to the will of fire?
Speaker A
So, there was no solution until the vill's high command came up with a plan.
Speaker A
and the Yu would just have to endure as best they could. Suddenly, just at that moment, the three walking men overheard a conversation. Have you heard that Hataki Kakashi? What another rumor?
Speaker A
Kakashi's eyes narrowed slightly. Yamato and the other Usus expressions also grew complicated. The three of them were good friends outside of work. So, upon hearing that new rumors were circulating and that they seemed to involve Kakashi again, they naturally worried for their
Speaker A
comrade Kakashi. Yamo started to speak, but unfortunately before he could finish, Kakashi cut him off. Don't worry, I'm perfectly calm. But I do need to hear this rumor. At the very least, I should be mentally prepared. Yes, indeed. As for the rumors surrounding
Speaker A
his father, Hitaki Sukumo, after all this time of settling, he had actually begun to slowly let it go. There was no choice. He was merely an ordinary elite Jonan. How could he possibly fight against the entire village's high
Speaker A
command? And asked for joining the Achiha faction, he entertained the thought briefly, then promptly dismissed it because the Achiha were too unstable.
Speaker A
Did he really want to spark a civil war and tear the village apart? No, he still cared about the village deep down. He didn't want Kohaa to fall to ruin.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, just as Kakashi was lost and thought the new rumor reached his ears. I heard that when Kakashi was paying respects at his father Hataki Suko's grave, he said something truly astonishing. A few days
Speaker A
ago, after learning the truth, Kakashi knelt at his father's grave and said, "Father, my strength is insufficient and your enemies are too powerful. If I can't avenge you, I truly have no face to see you." So Kakashi pulled out his
Speaker A
father's white light chakra saber, tore a strip from his own sleeve with a fierce glare, then stood up and said flatly, "From this day forth, I sever my ties with you as father and son. For this vendetta, you'll have to find
Speaker A
someone else. Farewell." Kakashi's expression shifted abruptly. His languid vacant eyes instantly sharpened like a blade and a ferocious killing intent erupted from his entire being. Without a moment's hesitation, he moved to charge forward. But alas, seeing the danger,
Speaker A
Yamato quickly wrapped his arms around Kakashi. Kakashi, don't be impulsive. It's just a rumor. Everyone knows you're not that kind of person. Yugo, help.
Speaker A
Yamato hastily spoke cold sweat beating on his forehead. He dared not let Kakashi rush over or things would truly spiral out of control. And at that Yuzuki Yugo snapping back to her senses also hurriedly block Kakashi's path.
Speaker A
Don't do anything foolish. Rumors only grow darker the more you try to refute them. Kakashi it's best to act as if you haven't heard. If you go argue with him, you'll only make things worse. Kakashi's eyes turned bloodshot. His entire body
Speaker A
trembled with rage. This rumor was beyond excessive and utter humiliation to his very being. He had chosen to let go of his hatred only because the village mattered to him. He didn't want to see internal strife tear Kohaa apart,
Speaker A
leaving a broken shell vulnerable to attacks from other villages. But damn it all, how could they spread such a vile rumor? That he had severed ties with his father because the enemy was too strong and that he'd told his father's spirit
Speaker A
to find someone else to avenge him. Oh, at that thought, Kakashi felt as if he might explode. Yet, restrained by his two comrades, he managed to barely calm himself. In the end, Yamo forcibly escorted Kakashi home while Yuzuki Yugo
Speaker A
went to the Hokage's office. She briefly recounted the incident and casually mentioned that Kakashi would be taking leave. And at that Saratobi Herusen seated behind his desk, furrowed his brow deeply. He smoked in silence lost and thought troublesome. There was no
Speaker A
doubt this was a move from the but he hadn't expected them to target Kakashi instead of him. What to do? His mind was a tangled mess. The police department issue was still unresolved and now Kakashi had become a problem. The Aiha's
Speaker A
methods were utterly despicable. Yes, once he truly understood the content of the rumor, he instantly sensed the Achihas deep malice. But alas, he sighed in helplessness. Letting out a resigned sigh, he found no good solution. After all, Danzo's failed attempt to overturn
Speaker A
the table meant that Achihaene hadn't stormed the Hokag's office. That was already a blessing. Leave. Granted, you and Yamo should take some time off to stay with Kakashi for a few days. Go on.
Speaker A
Saritoi Herusen made his decision. He needed to temporarily stabilize Kakashi to prevent him from doing something rash. After all, in the current Kenoha, Kakashi was one of the top tier shinobi.
Speaker A
No help for it. Kenoha was at its most vulnerable now. And at that, Yuzuki Yugo was actually quite pleased. The MBU work had been giving her a headache. A few days of normal rest were a welcome relief for her. Yes, Hokag sama. Yuzuki
Speaker A
Yugo bowed and withdrew. Shortly after she left, Saratobi Haruen summoned his comrades. Danzo kicked open the door of the Hokag's office. His face was still slightly pale. Obviously, upon hearing the rumor about Kakashi, he had leapt from his sick bed and rushed over as
Speaker A
fast as he could. Herusen give the order. Kakashi is unstable. Transfer him to my route. I will train him into a powerful weapon who strictly obeys orders and is willing to die for the village. Danzo was direct, stating his
Speaker A
purpose. Yes, he had long had his eye on Kakashi, but Husen's obstruction had kept him from achieving his goal.
Speaker A
Today's incident was perfect. It gave him the perfect excuse to take Kakashi under his wing. Utain Koharu hearing this couldn't help but interject. Danzo makes a good point. Kakashi can no longer be trusted. Joining root would be a decent outcome. Midokado Hamira also
Speaker A
spoke directly. And at that Saratobi Husen was utterly exasperated. Join Danzo's route. Danzo had never given up his ambition for the Hokag seat. Even when Husen was reinstated, this very man had attempted to assassinate him.
Speaker A
Kakashi as one of Kenoa's strongest shinobi at this stage was to be handed over to that bastard Danzo. Huh? Was he asking for an early death? Enough. Don't even think about it. Kakashi embodies the will of fire. He must live in the
Speaker A
sunlight. I will never agree to him joining root. Danzo, give it up. Saratobi Husen was unyielding. Hearing this, Danzo coldly retorted. Herusen, you will regret this. Danzo, I am the Hokag. Saratobi Husen blurted out. Danzo nashed his teeth, trembling with rage.
Speaker A
Hokag again. That damned Hokage. If he hadn't been a step too slow back, then perhaps it would be he Danzo uttering those words now. So Humph. Danzo snorted coldly and turned to leave. Seeing this, Saratobi Herusen couldn't help but call
Speaker A
out, "Danzo, wait. What is it?" Danzo turned his head. Saratobi Husen took a deep breath. The Aiha have made another move. We need to discuss how to respond.
Speaker A
Yes, the police department issue was unresolved and now Kakashi had become a problem. Since Danzo's attempt to overturn the table had failed, they had to figure out a solution. But unfortunately, Danzo merely replied calmly. I am severely injured and need
Speaker A
to rest for a while. You handle this yourself. After all, you are the Hokag.
Speaker A
I'm no Hokag. He sneered with utter contempt. The Aihas move affected Hirusen the most. When the sky falls, the tall ones bear the brunt. And right now, Huen was the tall one. Why should he bother? He wouldn't even give him
Speaker A
Kakashi yet expected him to keep taking the blame. Hadon after speaking, Danzo leaning on his cane left the Hokag's office and slammed the door shut behind him. Bang! With a loud crash, Saratobi Haruen was covered in dark lines. "Good
Speaker A
grief! Was Danzo giving up, too? What to do?" Saratobi Herusen instinctively glanced at his two old friends beside him. Then, after a moment of hesitation, let out a helpless sigh. He shook his head and didn't even bother asking
Speaker A
because he knew all too well how useless these two old friends were. Forget it.
Speaker A
You can go back. Control the rumors in the village. I'll think about the rest.
Speaker A
Saratobi Husen waved his hand and at that mitocado Hamira you'd attain Koho. The two exchanged glances feeling as though they had been insulted. No help for it. Husen's gesture was essentially ignoring them. But likewise, they truly had no way to counter it. So despite
Speaker A
their displeasure, they could only leave in resignation. On the other side, at the Hitaki residence, Kakashi's face was filled with dejection. He looked as if his soul had been lost. With vacant eyes, he seemed to be lost and thought,
Speaker A
unaware of what he was pondering. Clearly, this rumor had dealt him a heavy blow. Cheer up, Kakashi. No one will believe those rumors. Everyone knows you're not that kind of person.
Speaker A
Yes, Kakashi. Don't be sad. His friends had all come over trying their best to console him. But unfortunately, at that moment, Kakashi couldn't hear a word.
Speaker A
Instead, his true friend Mike Guy said nothing extra. His face losing its usual sunshine and youth, and he fell into a heavy silence. Because he could empathize, fully understanding how devastating this rumor was to Kakashi.
Speaker A
He certainly wanted to urge Kakashi to look on the bright side, but the words just wouldn't come out, for he knew Kakashi would never let it go. What to do? He didn't know. He silently stood by Kakashi's side, uttering not a single
Speaker A
word the entire time. Time slowly passed. To the exhertations of those present, Kakashi remained as if his soul had departed, offering no response whatsoever. 2 hours later, everyone gradually left. After all, everyone had their own work and lives. They were no
Speaker A
longer in the school days, so naturally, they couldn't stay with Kakashi all day. Guy, you should go back too. I want to be alone for a while. Kakashi spoke his voice horse. Hearing this might guy opened his mouth as if to say something
Speaker A
but ultimately chose to stay silent. In the end, he merely nodded then chose to leave. He could sense his best friend's feelings and felt he should give him some personal space. Thus, the entire Hitaki residence fell silent once more.
Speaker A
Kakashi sat blankly on the porch steps, quietly gazing at his father's white fang shortblade, his fingers, gently tracing the crack on it. That crack had been made during a battle. Although he had sought the finest repairer, a scar
Speaker A
still remained. It was from that very battle that he had completely abandoned the family's sword art. At this moment, he was like a statue. He sat for morning till noon and from noon till night. When the sky had turned pitch black and the
Speaker A
pale moonlight cast down, Kakashi finally murmured horarssely to himself, "Father, it wasn't like that. Those rumors are false." Kakashi's face was ashen and his eyes were grim and obscure. At last, he stood up. First, he split a shadow clone to go buy groceries
Speaker A
while he himself went to the kitchen to clean. Yes, since his father's suicide, he had never cooked at home, so the kitchen was naturally covered in dust.
Speaker A
Kakashi began to move. His cleaning movements were very gentle, as if caressing a blade. 20 minutes later, by the time he had almost finished cleaning, the shadow clone had returned with the groceries. Kakashi picked up the spatula and cooked himself a meal of
Speaker A
four dishes and a soup. in the living room at the dining table. Looking at the neatly arranged dishes, he felt as if he had returned to his childhood. He first pressed his palms together solemnly. I humbly partake. After speaking, he took
Speaker A
a deep breath and began to eat. At that moment, he ate with great earnestness, his eyes brimming with memories as if his father were sitting right beside him. Half an hour later, after finishing the meal, Kakashi washed the dishes and
Speaker A
chopsticks and put them away neatly. He took one last look at the Hitaki residence, then closed the courtyard doors solemnly, and his gaze instantly became as sharp as a blade. Swoosh! He directly drew the white fang short blade, his eyes filled with a
Speaker A
bloodthirsty gleam. "Father, wait for me. I will avenge you now, starting with Danzo." After speaking, he pushed the body flicker technique to its limit, turning into a streak of white light and charged straight toward the root base.
Speaker A
Along the way, thanks to his concealment, naturally, no one noticed him. Half an hour later at the root base, Danzo was cursing and swearing.
Speaker A
Yamanaka Fu, haven't you cleaned it up yet? I need to know the exact losses.
Speaker A
Speed up. Danzo leaned on his cane, his eyes blazing with fury. Root was his life's work, and this confrontation had destroyed it all. Although he carried the most important items on his person, the contents of the root base still
Speaker A
represented most of his wealth. So, after his falling out with Hisan Soratobi, he gathered the remaining root members and came directly here to begin sorting out the base. And at that, Yamanakaf Fu's expression changed. He bowed and withdrew then began directing
Speaker A
the cleanup. His heart was filled with anxiety. Clearly, he had never expected that after going out on a single mission, he would return to find the root base in this ghastly state. And even his clansmen, Yamanaka Kimo, was
Speaker A
dead. He had been busy all day today. Because Root's losses were so immense, nearly all the station personnel had died, he had to urgently summon back operatives from other villages, the capital of the land of fire, and other
Speaker A
places. as roots reconstruction depended on them. Furthermore, after the root base was restored, they might even have to recall intelligence agents for compared to gathering intelligence on other ninja villages. Rebuilding the base was the top priority. Yes, for
Speaker A
these route members, the vill's mission always came second, helping Lord Danzo rebuild Route was the most important thing. Swoosh. Just then, a flash of white light suddenly stre. Danzo's heart jolted. He instinctively dodged only to find his left arm severed. Well, at
Speaker A
least it's fine. Fortunately, it wasn't his right arm with the Shaing and Hashurama cells, or his overall combat power would have been greatly diminished. "Who's there?" Danzo yelled instinctively, then recognized the attacker. "Your Hitaki, Kakashi." In response, Kakashi's eyes flashed with
Speaker A
killing intent. He didn't bother to answer and instead charged straight at Danzo again. That Husen has made another mistake. "Attack! Kill him!" Danzo snorted coldly, leaped backward, and shouted. Immediately all the root members present dropped their work and
Speaker A
rushed at Kakashi. Wind release, wind cutter technique, earth release, earth spear, secret technique, mind body disturbance technique. Everyone struck.
Speaker A
Kakashi was only an elite Jonan. Without a beo's mano, he could never reach the kaga level. Thus, in just 3 minutes though, he had killed six or seven men, he himself was cornered. There was no choice. His chakra reserves were too
Speaker A
meager, especially with the charing gun and absolute chakra guzzler, making it impossible for him to last long. Raikiri using the last bit of chakra in his body with a sky full of blue lightning, he charged straight at Danzo. He succeeded.
Speaker A
Danzo's heart was pierced. He also failed because 2 minutes later, Danzo revived his Anagi. Although his loss of three Tommo Sharinggon was severe, and collecting Shainggon had become very difficult. Now, the fact was that Danzo had killed too many Aiha during the
Speaker A
third war. though he still had some stock. A I failed. It seems my life is full of tragedy. Father, don't blame me.
Speaker A
I did my best. But this is fine. Let it end here. Kakashi collapsed to the ground, choosing to give up resistance completely. He had done his best. The root members naturally would not let him go and they charged at him. Just as
Speaker A
Kakashi was waiting for death, he suddenly heard a very familiar voice. Gate of opening open. Gate of rest open.
Speaker A
Gate of surprise open. Mateikai arrived. At this moment, his eyes were as sharp as a wolf's blue steam rising from his entire body. And the aura he unleashed made everyone present change color. Kaki seeing this immediately said, "Kai go
Speaker A
back. This matter has nothing to do with you. You don't need to get involved.
Speaker A
This was his own revenge. Even if he failed and died, he would accept it." But Mate Tikai was different. He could not drag him into this. In response, Mateai simply gave a thumbs up and said without hesitation, "My father told me
Speaker A
that the eight gates are only opened for protection. Kaki is my most important friend. Even if I lose my life, I will protect him to the end. That way, even if I die, I will leave behind proof that
Speaker A
I lived as a man. The proud blue beast of my burn your youth. Kaki was very troubled. Looking at Mateikai before him, his eyes showed a slight stir. He used to think his life was a tragedy.
Speaker A
All the important people in his life had died. Now looking back, he realized there was still one friend. A friend who would rather defy the village's high command and still willing to help him.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, all the root members instinctively looked at Tuanzang. Tuanzangs eyes narrowed slightly at this, and he said without hesitation, "Kill the move." Almost instantly, with Tuanzangs command, the root members moved. They did not understand concepts like protection or
Speaker A
bonds. Towanzangs orders were their supreme principle. So, they naturally charged at the two without hesitation.
Speaker A
My strong whirlwind, my great whirlwind, youth power prelude. Under the blessing of the seventh gate, Mate Tikkai was terrifyingly strong. Any ninjutsu or techniques of the root members were almost immediately kicked away by Mateikai before they could even form
Speaker A
hand seals. However, Mikai still held back. Even though Tanzang had said kill them, Mateikai still regarded everyone as comrades. Now, he only wanted to save his best friend Kaki and did not wish to actually kill these village comrades.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, those root members clearly did not appreciate it. Even though they were severely injured, they still struggled to get up. Enduring pain, they crawled to thrust the canai in their hands directly into the throat of the fallen Kaki. Mateikai enraged
Speaker A
just as that root member was about to stab Kaki to death with the canny mateai completely abandoned the concept of village comrade in his heart and mercilessly kicked that root member to death. Then in just over 10 seconds, he
Speaker A
instantly killed over a dozen root members, even causing Tuanzangs heart to bleed as he watched. Damn it. Yuzbo Gene had almost wiped out the root members.
Speaker A
And now the men he had just brought back from outside were being killed in such numbers by that idiot Mateikai. So he made his move. Summoning technique Ma. A summoning beast resembling an elephant appeared with a low elephant-like cry.
Speaker A
The trunk of Munga produced a huge suction force. Its massive hoof was raised high clearly intending to use its enormous size to crush Mateikai to death. Daytime tiger. A powerful air cannon shaped like a tiger formed, carrying an overwhelming force and
Speaker A
directly blasted Munga into a mist of blood scattered in the sky. Yes, Mungma didn't even have time to cancel the summoning before being blasted to pieces by a single punch from Mateikai. What?
Speaker A
Damn it. How can this guy Mate Tikkai be so strong? Tuanzang was dumbfounded. As an elder of Mai, he had certainly heard of the reputation of that taijitsu idiot Mate Kai. But in reality, he had never taken him seriously. However, the power
Speaker A
the other had now unleashed thoroughly shocked him. No doubt absolute kaga level. But damn it, why should that idiot made Tikkai be kaga level? Even if you and Fe Risen were here, he would definitely not be a match for this brat,
Speaker A
right? However, afterwards, he thought it best to beat a retreat. Following the principle of where there is life, there is hope. He immediately began to flee into the distance without a word. Yes, he had no pressure in escaping E. After
Speaker A
all, for the future of the village, he had to endure humiliation and stay alive. If he died, the village would have no future. So everything for my 2 minutes later, all the root members present were killed by Mateai. Then he
Speaker A
hoisted the weakened Kaki onto his shoulder and headed straight toward the village. Meanwhile, on the other side, watching Mateikai, who had ended the eight gates and was weakened, but still carrying him Kak's eyes began to grow extremely complex. To be honest, he
Speaker A
really wanted to die. He felt that living was too meaningless, and that was the real reason for his actions tonight.
Speaker A
In short, he simply wanted to die intentionally. It would be best if he could kill Tuanzang. But if he couldn't, it didn't really matter. Now, however, it was different. Mate Kai's appearance shattered his resolve. Even if he didn't
Speaker A
care about himself, he had to be responsible for his best friend before him. Tonight, the two of them had attacked Tuanzang, which had clearly cut them off from the my high command. Now, in Mai who could protect them. On one
Speaker A
hand, Zilli and Gangho were not in the village. And even if they were kici dared not trust them, because the past of these two had proven that they were not worth betting on. the Chincho clan, Shing Shu, Jotting Duan, and even his
Speaker A
own teacher, Woofing Shuen. These two people had saved none of them. When it came to the life of his best friend, Mateikai, considering that guy was still a naive fool, he absolutely could not gamble on that probability. Other ninja
Speaker A
clans, they could barely protect themselves, let alone shelter the two. What to do? At this moment, the only one Kaki could think of was the Yuziv clan.
Speaker A
But should he really do this? Kaki fell into thought. As they got closer and closer to the village, he finally spoke horarssely. Kai don't go to my house.
Speaker A
What? Faced with Kaki's words, Mate Tikkai was stunned. In response, Kaki didn't intend to explain, but said calmly, "Go to the Yuzbo clan grounds.
Speaker A
Why?" Mate Kai was bewildered. Kaki pondered for a moment, then said, "Seriously, now only the Yuzbo can possibly protect us both." But Matei Kai wanted to speak. After all, he wasn't really an idiot. Kaki clearly didn't trust the village. To be honest, he had
Speaker A
originally planned to send Kaki home and then go directly to report to the Hokag.
Speaker A
Kaki's words naturally made him conflicted, but before he could finish, Kaki cut him off. Kai, trust me. All right, Matei Kai. Although he was still a bit reluctant in his heart, he ultimately chose to trust his best friend. And so, the two went straight to
Speaker A
the Yuzbo clan grounds. In the pitch black night, a full moon hung high in the sky. A weakened Mike guy carried Kakashi on his back, relying on Kakashi's keen perception to evade countless surveillance from the villages U directly arriving at the edge of the
Speaker A
Aiha clan grounds. Who goes there? Kakashi Hitaki. Mike Guy, what business do you have in the Aiha clan grounds?
Speaker A
The moment they entered, they were discovered by a patrol squad of the Aiha clan. To be honest, if not for the pair's exhausted and disheartened appearance, the Achiha patrol would have already unleashed a great fireball at them. After all, with Achihajene taking
Speaker A
leadership, the Aiha clan grounds were under the strictest vigilance. Any suspicious intruder would be eliminated.
Speaker A
Kakashi narrowed his eyes his respect for Aiha, rising another notch. Such tight security completely disregarding the village's reaction. Even after clashing with the village's higher-ups numerous times, they still hadn't truly broken ties, maintaining a minimal level of peace. That was indeed impressive.
Speaker A
However, for the two of them about to defect to the Aiha, in some ways, it was actually a good thing. We've come to seek refuge with the Aiha. My guy and I failed in our assassination attempt on Danzo and apart from the Aiha, we have
Speaker A
no other path left. Kakashi's tone was steady. He briefly explained the situation, then waited for their decision. Meanwhile, the Aiha patrol squad exchanged strange glances, seeking refuge with the Aiha. That was a novel concept. They knew the Aiha had a
Speaker A
terrible reputation in the village, almost like dirt. Who would have thought someone would willingly join them?
Speaker A
However, the squad leader spoke up. You two need to wait a moment. I'll go report to the elders immediately. The rest of you keep an eye on them. And if anyone from the village tries to cause trouble, take them out. With that, he
Speaker A
first summoned three patrol squads to watch over Kakashi. And my guy suddenly signaling that they should be protected if danger arose, then headed straight for Aihajin's residence. Meanwhile, Aiha, who had been about to sleep, was stunned upon hearing the report from the
Speaker A
squad leader. Good heavens, so fast. As the originator of the rumor about Kakashi, he knew full well its power.
Speaker A
Kakashi couldn't withstand it. Suicide or revenge were both normal outcomes. But the problem was the speed. He hadn't expected the rumor to spread. Only today Kakashi to act tonight and ultimately choose to defect to the Ajiah. However, thinking of Mike Guy, he understood a
Speaker A
bit. Kakashi might not care about his own life. But with his nature of valuing comrades, he had to consider his friend Mike Guy. Well, good. Kakashi was a powerful combatant for the village, and Mike Guy was even a pillar of its
Speaker A
strength. Who would have thought they'd both fall into his lap? I agree. Send them over to me. Aiha said immediately.
Speaker A
After the patrol squad leader left, he said to Achihasuki beside him, "Prepare two guest rooms. Well have visitors tonight." Aihasuki bowed and left.
Speaker A
Although she was the lateborn daughter of Elder Shan in another world, she could almost be considered a standard rich beauty. However, she bore no trace of spoiledness, she was more like a standard Yamato Nadashiko. Getting along with her was indeed quite easy. Soon
Speaker A
after, Kakashi and Mike Guy were escorted in and the Aiha squad bowed before leaving to continue their patrol of the clan grounds. Kakashi, Mike Guy, we were classmates who graduated together, though we never interacted before. I don't think we need to be
Speaker A
overly hypocritical. Since you've chosen the Aiha, unless the clan is wiped out, you don't need to worry about your safety. Resign from the U. Write a resignation letter later, I'll have it sent to the Hokage's office tomorrow.
Speaker A
Aiha was straightforward. He detested beating around the bush and always said what he meant. Roll out the welcome mat, share a bed, no need. In the shinobi world, that kind of thing was unnecessary. Besides, these two didn't truly accept him. In short, it was a
Speaker A
matter of necessity, mutual warmth. He needed to model them as a benchmark, showing other clan ninjas in the village that the Aiha were willing to make room for them. As for Kakashi and Mike Guy, since they had offended the village's
Speaker A
higher-ups, they also needed his protection. Simply put, each took what they needed. Meanwhile, looking at their peer, Aiha, Kakashi, and Mike Guy felt a pang of emotion. Indeed, if Achihajene hadn't mentioned it, they wouldn't have realized they were all classmates from
Speaker A
the same academy. But back in the academy, Aiha had hardly interacted with anyone, and his studies and ninjutsu were unremarkable. So, they had subconsciously overlooked him. Who would have thought? Now, he had become the leader of a faction. All right,
Speaker A
understood. Well follow your arrangements, Gene sama. I have no objections. However, I hope you can assign us positions as we also need a source of income. Kakashi didn't stand on ceremony either. He directly stated his request. After all, they were both
Speaker A
ninjas who needed to eat and spend. Work was essential. Other than that, there was nothing else as they were both alone. Narudo, Uzumaki, Sasuke, Aiha, and others were still young. In the original story, they wouldn't become their Jonan instructors until they
Speaker A
entered the academy and graduated. At this stage, they had almost no attachments. That's no problem. But the Aiha don't have much to do right now, especially the police department, which is almost half paralyzed. I'll give you both the rank of police department squad
Speaker A
leader. Tomorrow, I'll assign each of you three Aha squads. You'll guard the clan grounds, focusing on preventing infiltration from the UU and root. If you have free time, you can visit the Aiha clan school and teach the children.
Speaker A
Other than that, just try to integrate into the clan as soon as possible. Aiha gene was also troubled. The Aiha indeed had few industries, so they couldn't provide many job positions. After all, due to their special relationship with
Speaker A
the village, food and ninja tools were almost entirely supplied by the Nakoma clan. While money came from the clan's reserves or occasional raids outside, for example, if other clans defected, it wouldn't be an issue. They didn't lack such resources and they could just move
Speaker A
into the Aiha grounds to live together. But ninjas like Kakashi and Mai were more troublesome. They couldn't be freeloaders forever. And even if the Aiha were willing to support them, they wouldn't accept it. So jobs had to be
Speaker A
provided. After some thought, Aihaene decided to have them attached to the police department. The next morning, bright and early, Saratobi Herusen, feeling refreshed, once again, took his seat on the Hokag's throne. However, looking at the deteriorating reputation of the Yu and the report of the police
Speaker A
force's continued negligence, he couldn't help but let out a long sigh. Truly difficult. But for the trust of Tobarama sensei, he had to persevere and shoulder the burden of Kinoa. Although Aihaene was troublesome, he believed that with his own abilities, he would
Speaker A
eventually resolve the threat of the Aiha. For now, he would adopt the wait and see approach. Temporarily stabilize the Aiha wait for the return of Jeriah andSunady. Then it would be his time to shine. Perhaps Jeriah and Sununade each
Speaker A
had their flaws and refused to heed their teachers commands. But the problem was that both loved the village, and that was his opportunity to bind them.
Speaker A
Sai just endure. Let the Achihab be arrogant for a while longer. Only the one who laughs last is the true king.
Speaker A
Take it slow. Saratobi Herusen spoke in a somber tone. After finishing, he skillfully lit his 13th new pipe. There was no help for it. Lately, he had been getting angry too, often smashing countless pipes. Now, thinking back, it
Speaker A
was utterly unnecessary. So, don't get angry. No one will take your place if you fall ill. In life, one must remain calm. Upon thinking this, a faint smile crept across his face. The police force's negligence. The Us's tarnished
Speaker A
reputation. Danzo's failed coup. A mere smile sufficed. He was the god of Shinobi Creek. At that moment, Narasikaku entered Hokag Sama. What bad news now? Saratobi Husen smiled faintly.
Speaker A
Nar Shikaku was somewhat takenback. Could the Hokag have gone mad from anger his mind unhinged? Though inwardly complaining, he nonetheless reported.
Speaker A
The achiha handed in Kakashi's resignation letter. What? Saratobi Herusen was stunned. He recognized each character. Yet when strung together, they seemed utterly foreign. Kakashi resigning and submitted by the Aiha.
Speaker A
Almost instantly a sense of forboding struck him. He snatched the letter from Narashikaku's hands and his face immediately turned ashen. After a long pause, he spoke coldly. I understand.
Speaker A
Very well. Nar Shikaku promptly said, "Then I shall take my leave." Having said that, sensing Saratobi Herus's dark mood, he left the Hokag's office without another word. Indeed, lately, due to Achihajene, Saratobi Hiruan's temper had been extremely volatile. Had
Speaker A
it not been for urgent business requiring his presence in the Hokag's office, Nar Shikaku truly would have preferred to stay away. Since the matter was concluded, he had no desire to linger. Saratobi Herusen did not stop him. After Narashikaku left, he
Speaker A
furiously slammed his new pipe onto the desk. Bang! The new pipe met its demise.
Speaker A
"Umu!" Saratobi Harusen said coldly. Immediately, a masked Abu knelt respectfully on one knee. "Hokage sama, what happened last night? Why did Kakashi suddenly resign? And why did the Achiha submit his resignation?" Saratobi Herusen wasted no words. He voiced his
Speaker A
confusion directly for he truly couldn't fathom why Kakashi would ally with the Aiha. Could it be merely because of yesterday's rumors? The kneeling Ubu member spoke with utmost respect. Last night, Kakashi failed to assassinate Danzo Sama. Just as he was about to be
Speaker A
killed by Danzo Sama, Mike Guy intervened and saved Kakashi's life. Then the two fled directly to the Aiah.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen shuddered at the UM's words. How could this be? He truly couldn't understand. Kakashi was no longer a youth after years in the U. He should have long known the truth of his father's suicide. His lack of action
Speaker A
over the years had led Harusen to believe that Kakashi had truly let go of his vengeance. It was one of his proudest achievements because it proved the success of his will of fire and why even after Minato's death, he still
Speaker A
regarded Kakashi as a trusted confidant. In essence, it was about appearances. As long as Kakashi remained by his side, it would demonstrate to all how successful Saratobi Herus's will of fire truly was.
Speaker A
Why? Had it all been rekindled by that absurd rumor, Kakashi might die. These were among the vill's few elites and now they have been handed to the Aiha for nothing. At this thought, Saratobi Harusen was so enraged that he spat out
Speaker A
a mouthful of blood. Hokag sama, I'll take you to the hospital immediately. The kneeling U panicked. He scrambled to his feet, his face filled with alarm. If Saratobi Husen actually fainted from anger, he wouldn't be able to explain
Speaker A
himself. If others believe he had harmed the Hokag, he would be doomed. Sarobi Herusen waved his hand dismissively.
Speaker A
Don't worry, I'm fine. There's no need for a hospital. My body isn't that fragile. Immediately send word to find Jeriah and Sununade and have them return as soon as possible. Indeed, he could not collapse. If this news got out, the
Speaker A
village would descend into chaos. Thus, no matter how furious he was, he had to endure. Yes, the Yu bowed and accepted the order. Without further ado, he left the Hokag's office, resolving to request a transfer as soon as possible. He would
Speaker A
rather fight to the death on the border against enemy villages than stay by Saratobi Herus's side. Damn, that was terrifying. Just a hair's breath away.
Speaker A
If Saratobi Harusen had truly fainted, his fate would have been miserable. Damn it, Jiha. And Kakashi, my guy, I misjudged you both. Has the will of fire been fed to the dogs? How could you attempt to assassinate Danos sama? Even
Speaker A
if he did something wrong back, then you should have magnanimously forgiven him. In this life, who hasn't made mistakes?
Speaker A
As long as one can correct in time, we're all working for the village. Why can't we talk it out? And even if you committed a wrong, you should have come to me, the Hokag, to handle it. How could you? How could you defect to the
Speaker A
etchiah? Saratobi Herusen muttered to himself. His face was terrifyingly ashen and a murderous aura gathered around him. Clearly, he was truly enraged.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, Narashaku left the Hokag's office, his eyes dark and unreadable. When he reached a secluded spot, he suddenly dispersed a shadow clone toward the clan compound while he himself returned openly to his own office. 10 minutes later, the shadow
Speaker A
clone of Nar Shikaka back at the clan compound directly sent someone to invite Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosa.
Speaker A
Ever since Manado Namik's death and Saratobi Herus's ascension, the two of them had been largely idle at home. Only Narashikaka's mind was still of some use, allowing him to barely hold a nominal position as adviser with a nearly useless office in the Hokag
Speaker A
building. Before long, Yamanaka and Noichi and Akimichi Chosa entered and took their seats. Narikaku personally began to brew tea for them. Isn't today not a day off? Shikaka, why aren't you at work? How can you be in the mood for
Speaker A
tea at home? Could it be that your adviser position has been revoked as well? Yamanaka and Noi spoke hurriedly.
Speaker A
His expression turned quite grim for the positions of the Inoshiko had all been revoked, making it difficult to protect the various industries of their clans.
Speaker A
Now, the three families could barely scrape by in Kinoa, relying mainly on Narashikaka's reputation as an adviser to hold things together. If Narashikaka's adviser status were stripped, could their family businesses still be protected? How would their clansmen survive in the future? To this,
Speaker A
Narashikaku shook his head with a faint smile. Don't worry, you two. My adviser position hasn't been revoked. Right now, I'm just a shadow clone. Almost instantly upon hearing this, the two men, though their worries subsided, grew even more solemn. The fact that Narikaku
Speaker A
would urgently use a shadow clone to contact them during work hours showed how serious the matter must be. Shikaka, what happened? Yamanaka and Noi asked hurriedly. Narashikaku did not hide anything. With a sigh, he slowly said, "Aihaene survived Danzo's ambush."
Speaker A
This morning, Kakashi resigned from the umbu. And what's crucial is that the resignation letter was submitted by the Aiha. This as Narikaku spoke, Yamanaka Enochi and Akimi Chosa couldn't help but draw in a sharp breath. On one hand,
Speaker A
Aiha Jyn's strength was beyond their imagination. But more importantly, it was Kakashi. His status was not ordinary. Though he appeared to be alone, he actually had two forces supporting him behind the scenes. The first was Hitaki Sukumo. As the one who
Speaker A
had been the most acclaimed candidate for the fourth Hokag, he had successfively served as the head of the intelligence division, the captain of the elite, Jonan, the head of the U, and even briefly as the frontline commander.
Speaker A
In those days, he had many supporters and was even a candidate for the Hokag's mantle. This was also why Saratobi Herusen had been so wary of Hitaki Suko resorting to underhanded tactics to eliminate him. Although it has been a
Speaker A
long time since Hitaki Sukumo's era, there are still a group of people. Perhaps they are not very conspicuous on ordinary days. But if Kakashi encountered problems, they would definitely help. Of course, this force due to its age might not amount to much.
Speaker A
But similarly, Kakashi also had a second force, namely the supporters of Manado Names back then. As the only surviving disciple of Manado Namic before Naro Uzamaki grew up, he inherently had the right to gather Manado's forces. This was also the reason why in the original
Speaker A
story, Kakashi was able to ascend to the position of the sixth Hokag. Even the current clan heads of the Enoshik Cho could be seen as Manato's faction.
Speaker A
Otherwise, after Saratobi Herusen regained power, he would not have suppressed their three clans. The vow of the earrings between the Enoshik Cho and Saratobi had long become a matter of form over substance when they chose to support Manado Namikes. But there was no
Speaker A
choice. Who could have imagined that such a brilliant and young man name would die so early? Therefore, over the years, these two forces had remained invisible and intangible only because Kakashi himself was in a slump. So, these people chose to lie low for the
Speaker A
time being. So, what about now? In No Chos, we can't wait any longer. According to our previous plan, let the clansmen act immediately and double it.
Speaker A
Each of our Inoshiko clans will split off half of our members, sending them with half of our family resources to immediately join the Aiha side. Narikaka spoke with a serious tone. To this, Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosa
Speaker A
pondered for a moment, then finally nodded heavily. There was no way around it. Aiha had proven himself. If they didn't invest quickly, and if Aiha truly won in the future, would there still be a place for the Inoshika Cho in the
Speaker A
future Kenoa? All right, understood. In fact, the personnel and supplies have long been prepared. I'll just go back and give the orders. Akimi Chosa spoke first. When it came to decisions concerning the future of the Enino Shika Cho, he considered his own intellect
Speaker A
insufficient. So, he naturally followed the Nar family's instructions completely. On the other hand, Yamanaka and Noi couldn't help but speak up.
Speaker A
Wait, Shikaku Aihajin won't be easily fooled. If we just send half our clansmen over, are you sure the Enoch will have a future? Anyway, Saratobi, Huen, and the others are finished and Jeriah and are unreliable. Why don't we
Speaker A
just go all in for a big gamble to this? This Narashikaku was taken aback. Even though he was just a shadow clone, his thinking was no different from the original. So, he immediately began to think carefully. However, after a
Speaker A
moment, he shook his head with a firm tone. No, let's stick to the original plan. As they say, plans can't keep up with changes. Didn't we just suffer a loss with Minato? At that time, who could have imagined that Manado, so
Speaker A
young and powerful, would become Hokag and die suddenly within less than a year. So, let's play it safe. Our primary goal is survival. Only after ensuring survival can we talk about development. Even if Achihajene truly takes the seat of the Hokag, there will
Speaker A
eventually be countless matters in the village that require the support of our Inoshiko. That will be the time for us to truly exert our strength. For now, let's be steady. Who knows if the seemingly powerful Aiha gene might
Speaker A
suddenly fail. So, hedging our bets, though it may cost us our reputation, can also maximize the chance for our families to survive. Saratobi Haru's side may seem decadent, but they still hold the hearts of the village and Jeriah are still outside. The outcome is
Speaker A
still uncertain. Narashikaku spoke with a grave tone. Upon hearing this, Yamanaka Noi and Akimichi Chos couldn't help but think of that little son, Minato Namikes. In the end, they nodded solemnly. The next morning at dawn, the news of a sudden internal rebellion
Speaker A
within the Inosikacho clans, followed by half of their members leaving to defect to the Aiha once again landed on the desk of Saratobi Herusen. Saratobi Haruen's eyes turned fierce. He didn't even bother to seek out Nar Shikaku as
Speaker A
he could easily guess the true reason behind this. Was it not simply that they sensed his predicament and for the sake of the Enoch's future chose to invest in a diversified strategy? Internal strife.
Speaker A
The Nar clan were all exceptionally intelligent and their personalities were naturally indolent. So the internal atmosphere within the Nar clan was quite harmonious, devoid of the petty squables that plagued other ninja clans. The Yamanaka and Akimichi clans were much
Speaker A
the same. Due to their close ties with Anara, they rarely oppressed their own members. In all the years of Kinoa, there had never been any reported animosity within the Enoshiko. And now, as soon as his own side fell into a
Speaker A
disadvantage, the Enoch suddenly erupted in internal strife. Huh? Who were they trying to fool? The half that remained ostensibly loyal to him were also merely considering the future of the Inoshika Cho. So, no matter who won or lost the
Speaker A
Enoch would remain unshaken. Saratobi Husen scoffed inwardly. For now, he would endure for the sake of the greater situation. Once he had dealt with the Aiha, he would see to it that they were properly disciplined. Yes, he might not
Speaker A
be as cunning as Narashikaku, but having served as Hokag for so many years, he could see through Shikaka's schemes.
Speaker A
Having thought this far, he regained his composure. Saratobi Herusen retrieved a new smoking pipe, lit it, and gazed out the window at the village as he smoked.
Speaker A
At this moment, he was still the Hokag who had ruled Kohaa for decades. Even with the Aiha spiraling out of control and the Inino Shika Cho wavering, he had not lost his bearings. Just then, on the windows sill of the Hokag's office, a
Speaker A
man clad entirely in white fur appeared. He wore wooden clogs on his feet, exuding an air of unrestrained elegance with a forehead protector bearing the character oil hanging from his brow.
Speaker A
Leaping down from the window sill into the office, he spoke in a frivolous tone, "Old man, after all these years, you haven't changed a bit. Spill it. Why the urgent summons? What's happened now?" In response, Saratobi Herusen let
Speaker A
out a sigh of relief upon seeing this man, Jeriah. His feelings toward this disciple of his were complex. The man genuinely cared for the village and would surely step in if it faced trouble. But at the same time, his mind
Speaker A
was consumed with the search for the child of prophecy, which left Saratobi rather exasperated. Still, never mind.
Speaker A
This was not the time for such matters. He didn't even bother to remind Jeriah to use the front door. After briefly recounting the recent events in the village, he cut straight to the point.
Speaker A
Jeriah's stay. I've grown too old though I can no longer study the village. Only if you become the fifth Hokag can the village truly find peace. Saruti Herusen spoke with earnest sincerity. He genuinely hoped Jeriah would take the
Speaker A
position as the man was a political knife allowing him to pull the strings from behind the scenes. Moreover, given Jeriah's prestige, the other clans would show respect. At that point, the village would be stable and his own power would
Speaker A
remain intact, a single stone killing countless birds. More importantly, Jeriah had no lust for power. Once he trained Isuma to take over as the sixth Hokag, everything would be set. But unfortunately, Jeriah didn't even hesitate before shaking his head. Old
Speaker A
man, give it up. I will never become Hokag. I have more important things to do. But the Aiha, I'll go talk to him first. With that, Jeriah unwilling to waste more words with Saratobi, Husen headed straight for the Aiha clan
Speaker A
grounds. However, originally intending to barge in Jeriah since the dense network of visible and hidden centuries as well as the patrol teams in sight and ultimately decided to announce himself properly otherwise he estimated that they would have to fight before any talk
Speaker A
could begin. The Aiha respected strength. Thus, upon learning Jera's identity, they did not give him trouble.
Speaker A
After obtaining Aiha Jyn's consent, they led him directly to Jyn's courtyard. In the front hall's reception room, Aiha served them tea, then bowed and left the room. Aiha didn't bother to entertain Jeriah. After downing the tea in one
Speaker A
gulp, he said to the man before him, "You shouldn't have come. This has nothing to do with you. Just go find your child of prophecy. Why meddle in this muddy business?" Jeriah remained silent, pondering. Finally, after finishing his tea, he spoke directly. I
Speaker A
have my reasons. Let's get down to business. I've heard the situation from the old man, but I'd like to hear the etcha side. I still hope we can all sit down and talk things out. The village belongs to everyone. There's no need for
Speaker A
such tension. Jariah's tone was grave. He could feel the chaos and strain in the village and genuinely wished to restore peace. In response, Aiha gene shook his head. Coming to me is pointless. The Aiha are merely acting in
Speaker A
self-defense. If the village stops persecuting the Aiha apologizes for past wrongs and brings the guilty to justice, then all conflicts can be resolved. But likewise, if the village continues to play tricks, the Aiha will drag Kinoa down with him, even if it means the
Speaker A
clan's annihilation. Aiha Jyn's tone was resolute. He held no goodwill toward Jeriah, a man fooled by toads unto death, capable yet cowardly. If Jeriah had truly been willing to become the fifth Hokag, he might have thwarted Jyn's plans, but unfortunately, he
Speaker A
couldn't. Thus, Aiha Jeene merely exchanged platitudes with Jeriah. For example, Jeriah pressed, "What has the village done to persecute you?" Too much. Aiha Jeene shook his head. It's endless. Go find out for yourself. If you truly want to do something first,
Speaker A
return the maneko sharing in Danzo s right eye and the several tommo sharing in his arm. I don't care about the hasherama cells on Danzo's body since doesn't care and the rest of the Synu have been all but wiped out. But the
Speaker A
Shainggon is different though. The Aiha were nearly annihilated by the vill's high council. Now that I Aiha gene, have taken charge, I will seek justice for my clan. Zilli fell into silence. He was not ignorant of the darkness of the
Speaker A
village. This was precisely why he chose to leave the village directly and roam the world in search of the savior. He was not privy to Danzos affairs, but he knew Danzo was certainly capable of such deeds. Therefore, at this
Speaker A
moment, he did not lose his composure. Moreover, he had never thought of reasoning with Saratobi Herusen, nor had he ever considered actually eliminating Danzo, the darkness of Kenoa. Nonsense.
Speaker A
If he had such ability and resolve, he would not have needed to leave the village in disappointment, placing his final hope on the future savior. So Sai after a helpless sigh Zilli slowly spoke. Gene, take a step back. I
Speaker A
guarantee Danzo will not act recklessly from now on. For the sake of the village, you Aiha must endure. The current Kenoha is in a state of transition, and the threat from hostile ninja villages still exists. Although the war seems to have ended, the border
Speaker A
between Kenoha and Cloud remains in a standoff, and a peace treaty has yet to be signed. I know the Aiha have suffered grievances, but for the sake of the village, you should still take a step back. Zillis tone was stern. His
Speaker A
eyes were extremely sincere, containing a trace of apology but more determination. As for this Achiha Jeene was completely dumbfounded. What a guy really a piece of work. You can't handle the village's upper echelons. So you think the Aiha are easy to bully.
Speaker A
However, similarly, he didn't feel too angry. After all, he had long known what kind of person Zilli was. Under the circumstances, was there any need to get angry? So Aiha Jeene directly picked up his teacup, then pointed to the door
Speaker A
with his left hand. Goodbye. No need to see me off. Indeed, since they had reached this point in the conversation, what was the point of continuing?
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Zilli felt humiliated and immediately slammed the table hard. Aiha, is there really no room for negotiation? Get lost. Aihajene said without any nonsense. Do you really think you the legendary Sanin of Kohaa hold any significant place in my heart?
Speaker A
Do you think you're the red-haired Shanks from next door possessing the god-like ability of the face fruit? What a joke. Making me aha step back. I'll step back on your head. Unfortunately, however, Zilli also refused to back down. He directly said, "Even for the
Speaker A
sake of the village, I will definitely stop you. I don't care. I don't mind." Aiha Jeene said sternly, "I'll say it one last time. The Aiha have already prepared for the extinction of our entire clan, and I have long given my
Speaker A
final orders to the clan members. If war breaks out with the village, the first step is to annihilate the Saratobi clan.
Speaker A
If the Saratobi clan is wiped out and the Aiha are not yet extinct, then the second targets are the Juwan Shin Shuahan and Jiuan clans. If we kill all of them and still haven't perished, then next will be the ordinary civilians
Speaker A
until the entire clan is wiped out. Fua and I both Aiha who have awakened the mano will then completely hide in the shadows and hunt Kohaa ninjas. Unless Kohaa is prepared to never leave the village for missions for the rest of its
Speaker A
life, we will kill one for everyone who leaves and kill two for every two. Of course, I don't think Kohaa can last until then because the Aiha's extinction will inflict such massive losses on Kohaa that it most likely won't be able
Speaker A
to withstand attacks from other ninja villages. The core is just one sentence. If the Aiha cease to exist, then Kenoha also has no reason to exist. If you Zill want to make a move, the entire Achiha clan will be ready. If you want to play,
Speaker A
then go ahead. Aihaji was quite direct. He gave Zilli no face at all directly issuing an ultimatum. As for this, Zilli was completely stunned upon hearing it.
Speaker A
He could tell from Achiha Jyn's eyes that this guy was not joking with him, he was truly prepared for death and clan annihilation. The other party would not back down. This was troublesome because if it really came to that the village
Speaker A
would surely be reduced to rubble. What to do? Zilli upon thinking this was instantly at a loss. After pondering for a long time, he spoke again. For the sake of the village, can't the Aiha take a step back? The same words to you? Aiha
Speaker A
Jeene said with a curl of the lip. For the peace of Kenoa, you should persuade Saratobi Harusen to take a step back.
Speaker A
It's all for Kenoa. Why can't the village step back? Zill was instantly awkward because he had never thought of this before. In the past, it was always about making other ninja clans and ninjas step back for the village. So,
Speaker A
for a moment, he didn't know how to respond. And as for this, looking at the completely dumbfounded Zilli, Aihajin spoke again. You are far inferior to Saratobi Hoen. The current situation in the village is not something you Zilli
Speaker A
can change. Take my advice. Go find your savior. A guy like you lacking resolve is doomed to be unable to resolve the village's situation. Finally, don't forget back then, Hashiama used the position of Hokag as a bargaining chip
Speaker A
to persuade the Aiha to join Kanoha. Otherwise, the Aiha would not have come to Kohaa in the first place. At that time, the village reneged and weha endured it. Later, when Tobberenu came to power, he said he would establish a
Speaker A
Jonan council to vote. Whoever wins, everyone's support becomes Hokag. The Aiha endured again. But when Tobaramaja died, he directly abandoned the Jonan council vote. This double standard towards the Aiah. We still endured it.
Speaker A
So Zill, listen up. Hiruan Suratobi came to power by Tobarama's appointment, relying on Mido Usuzumaki to put him in the Hokag seat, not through the Jonan voting system that Tobarama established.
Speaker A
From this point of view, Saratobi Hirusen himself is not clean either. As a member of the second Hokag's guard squad, his duty should have been to die for the Hokag. Who would have thought that when the Hokag died, he shamelessly
Speaker A
became the third Hokag? Who was he trying to embarrass? Aihajin was relentless. After all, he had long since burned bridges with the vill's upper echelons. Ezil's allegiance was bound to side with Saratobi Herusen. In that case, what was there to say? Meanwhile,
Speaker A
on the other side, Zills expression was also quite grim. After a long silence, he spoke coldly. I don't want to talk about the past. Why not talk about it? Aiha immediately retorted. I insist on talking about it and I'm going
Speaker A
to talk about it loudly so that the whole village can hear. Hearing this, Zilli felt stifled. Damn it. Can't he let me finish? Thinking this, he directly said, "Les nonsense. Let's fight. We're both ninjas. Let's settle things with a fight first. As for this,
Speaker A
Aiha did not take the bait." He merely gave Zill a cold glance and said with great disdain, "I have no time to fight with someone who can't even make decisions first because it holds no meaning for me. Even if I win, I gain
Speaker A
nothing. So if you dare to lay a hand on me, it will be regarded as Kohaa declaring war on the Aiiah. Then the entire Aiha clan will immediately and without hesitation attack the Saratobi clan. Aihajene radiating sheer dominance. Did he truly believe that the
Speaker A
reputation of the legendary Sanin would compel him to back down? Not a chance. Even ifsade herself stood before him, he would still refuse to show any difference. What nonsense. As he had just stated, the Aiha owed Konohan nothing. Rather, it was Kenoha that owed
Speaker A
the Achiha a great debt. Jeriah's current rhetoric might sway a fool like Fagaku, but it held absolutely no sway over Aiha gene. Outar argued, so he simply stops the discussion.
Speaker A
Unbelievable. He comes to discuss compensation and apologies, yet drags in the will of fire. I point out that Herisen Suratobi's rise to power was dubious and hardly clean casting doubt on his so-called will of fire. And then he has the audacity to threaten me with
Speaker A
a fight. And then he claims he doesn't want to discuss the past. who gave you the right to dismiss it. Since you've chosen to play rough, don't blame Achihajene for discarding Dorm. It was fortunate that Achihajene lacked the
Speaker A
eternal maneko. He also had to be wary of the Azura chakra within Naro Usuzamaki, fearing that killing Narudo would draw out the hidden sage of six paths. Moreover, he worried that heavy losses in Kenoha would weaken its ability to defend the land of fire.
Speaker A
Destroying Kohaa would indeed be easy, but the Shinobi world's balance was already set. He still had to consider the clan's long-term survival. An isolated Aiha clan without the eternal maneko and the vill's protection could hardly withstand external threats.
Speaker A
Otherwise, did you think he actually wanted to negotiate? He would have already taken control of the Ninetales and unleashed a tailed beastball barrage on Kenoa. You she huh? Jean, have you no will of fire? Are such threats permissible? You're asking for death.
Speaker A
Jariah's fury erupted. For the first time, a murderous glint flickered in his eyes, clearly provoked by Achiha Jins audacity. To him, Kohaa was everything. He would never allow anyone to harm it. In the original story, even sununade had nearly triggered his
Speaker A
murderous intent. Thus, facing Aiha before him, he shed all his previous amiiability, genuinely prepared to resort to violence now. However, it was a pity. Aiha Jyn's face was filled with mockery. His arms crossed a sneer on his lips. Angry. What right do you have to
Speaker A
be angry, Jeriah? Who do you think you are? Did you truly believe I Aiha Jeene would fear you, a legendary Sani? You came to me preaching peace. When asked to compensate the Achiha issue a public apology and execute Danzo, you failed to
Speaker A
deliver. Instead, you resort to preaching this oursed will of fire, demanding my clan put the village above all. You want to talk about the will of fire? Fine, let's discuss the legitimacy of Herusen Sarto's ascension. But then you claim it's too old a story, refusing
Speaker A
to discuss it and suggest we settle it like Shinobi with a fight. What's the matter? Are the Aiha that easy to bully?
Speaker A
If I killed the Saratobi clan right now and slew your disciples son, Nerd Usuzamaki, would you for the sake of the will of fire and the greater good choose to forgive my clan? Let me tell you, Jeriah, I despise people like you the
Speaker A
most. When others bully my clan, we must be magnanimous and forgive. But when my clan dares to strike first, especially after you've threatened violence, you can't handle our righteous retaliation.
Speaker A
Now that the Aiha are preparing to act, and only as a defensive response to your aggression, you find it unbearable. Huh, what a joke. Get lost, you hypocrite. If you truly enrage my clan, I'll go find Naro Usuzamaki right now and use the
Speaker A
Ninetales to bombard Kinoa with a tailed beast ball barrage. Don't you forget I possess the manoyo. What that masked man could do on the night of the ninetailes attack, Iene can just as easily control the Ninetales. Aiha remained utterly
Speaker A
indifferent. Did Jeriah think his anger would frighten him? In that instant, he voiced all his thoughts without hesitation. Playing an open game, he wasn't afraid of his intentions being known. He simply used the harshest words to make Jeriah understand he was not to
Speaker A
be trifled with. He laid out all his thoughts without hesitation for he played an open game and feared not having his intentions known beforehand using the sharpest words to make Jeriah realize he was not to be trifled with
Speaker A
Jeriah. At this moment he was utterly stunned, gazing at Achihajene, who appeared even more enraged than himself.
Speaker A
He was honestly taken aback. In that moment, he truly understood. No wonder his master had summoned him back. With the ferocity Aiha was displaying, the village was practically sitting on a powder keg and any single spark could ignite a civil war. Still, he couldn't
Speaker A
help but ask, "How do you know the ninetailes genturiki is Narudo?" Usuzamaki Jeriah, you're truly dense.
Speaker A
Aihajene scoffed. You should be asking, "Who in the village doesn't know?" The village's higher-ups have openly called Narudo a fox demon. Even the common civilians know. Besides the Ninetailes, is there any other fox demon in Kenoha?
Speaker A
Enough. Get out. I truly cannot stand the sight of you. A man who couldn't protect his own student nor cares about his student son and still has the nerve to preach to me about the will of fire.
Speaker A
Absolutely ridiculous. You see our guest out. Having said that, Aiha Jeene rose gracefully and headed directly towards the backyard. Clearly, he was deeply irritated by Jera. This type of typical fantasist was even worse than Hasharama's idealism. They set their
Speaker A
dreams too high, never grounded in reality. A man like this belonged with Narudo Uzumaki. He shouldn't have wasted his time meeting Jeriah today. Damn it.
Speaker A
Two hours wasted and not a single goal achieved. Talking with a waste like Jeriah was less productive than negotiating with Herusen Saratobi. At least every meeting with Husen yielded some substantial benefits. And Jeriah, a popper, a man with nothing to offer
Speaker A
except that blasted will of fire, he wasn't even worthy of a conversation. He would be better off spending this time returning home to nurture his ocular power. After all, during the recent battle with Danzo, he had expended a
Speaker A
full 10% of his ocular power. Although his recovery speed was several times faster than before due to constant use of his jutzu, the loss this time was substantial. According to Aiha Jyn's estimate, it would take at least a month
Speaker A
and a half of careful nurturing to fully recover. Meanwhile, on the other side witnessing Aiha Jyns departure, Jeriah stood frozen, his mouth opening as if to speak, but failing to produce a sound. Finally, under the courteous farewell of Achiha, he could only leave
Speaker A
Jyn's courtyard in dismay. However, just as he was about to leave the Aiha clan grounds, he was startled to see many members of the Narak Kimichi and Yamanaka clans seemingly shopping for food on the streets appearing to reside
Speaker A
there. What baffled him even more was the sight of Kakashi and Mike Guy. Wait, Jeriah rubbed his eyes, murmuring to himself involuntarily. An illusion? Yes, it must be an illusion. How could the Eno Shika Cho clans and Kakashi possibly
Speaker A
be in the Aiha district? After a moment, Jeriah took a deep breath. When he opened his eyes again, he was completely stunned, standing frozen in place. The figures of the Enoshik Cho were still there, and Kakashi was also present. He
Speaker A
could even hear Mike's youth shouts as he trained. Jeriah was utterly bewildered. At this moment, he could no longer contain himself and immediately approached Kakashi. Kakashi, what's going on with you and the Inoshiko? Why are you all gathered in the Aiha clan
Speaker A
compound? Do you have some special mission? Jeriah asked clearly still finding it hard to believe even now.
Speaker A
Indeed, whether it was the Enino Shiko or Kakashi, they were all supposed to be staunch supporters of the Hokag faction.
Speaker A
How could they possibly join the Etcha? And regarding this, Kakashi, who was on duty, couldn't help but pause for a moment when he saw Jeriah. Clearly, he hadn't expected Jeriah to have returned to the village. However, in response to
Speaker A
Jeriah's inquiry, he calmly replied, "No special mission. We've all pledged allegiance to the Aiha. Why? Oi. Jeriah was shattered. Even though he had been sharply rebuked by Achihajene, he hadn't been terribly angry. After all, he was well aware that Achihajene was a smart
Speaker A
man, not one with a mind full of muscle. Such a person, though more dangerous, would not dare to start a war lightly unless he had a sure win or was truly cornered. But the problem was that the sight of Kakashi and the Enoch right
Speaker A
before him truly broke his composure. If even the Enino Shiko and Kakashi, both loyal to the Hokag faction one by one, chose to defect to the Aiha, then he would feel utterly hopeless about the village's future. In regarding this,
Speaker A
Kakashi remained silent for a long time before calmly saying, "I assassinated Elder Danzo." Ka was also implicated.
Speaker A
Only the Yiha can protect us. He offered no explanation, too lazy to mention the difficulties. He simply stated the matter matter of factly without any intention of convincing Jeriah. But Jeriah understood. Although he disapproved of his teacher's actions, he
Speaker A
was not a fool by nature. Otherwise, he could not have become the frontline commander during the Third Shinobi World War. He was actually well aware of many things happening in the village. It was just that he always hoped others would
Speaker A
deal with these issues while he himself acted like an ostrich staying far away from the village and leaving everything to time or perhaps a savior who might appear in the future. So, he understood Kakashi because although Kakashi seemed
Speaker A
dispirited, he was still essentially a smart man. Especially during his years in the UU, he must have seen plenty of the village's dark side and certainly understood his teacher better. If it truly came down to a choice between
Speaker A
Danzo and Kakashi Huen Saratobi, would definitely choose Danzo. Then Kakashi who had assassinated Danzo could only be protected by the Aiha. As for himself, huh? Not to mention Kakashi, even he didn't believe in himself. A wanderer who had long been away from the village.
Speaker A
What right did he have to protect Kakashi? He couldn't just take Kakashi on a journey across the entire ninja world, could he? After pondering for a long time, he sighed and asked, "Why did you suddenly assassinate Danzo?" "To
Speaker A
avenge my father," Kakashi said lazily, casually. Hearing this, Jeriah fell silent, "Sukumo Hataki, so that was it." Although Jeriah had long been away from Kohaa, he was still part of the absolute core of the village. If he hadn't been
Speaker A
unwilling to go along with the corruption, his status would not be inferior to Danzo. Thus, the truth behind Sukcomo Hataki's suicide certainly could not be hidden from him.
Speaker A
One of the legendary Sanin evensunade and Orochimaru back then were fully aware of the inside story. Jeriah even remembered that after Sukcomo Hitaki's suicide, Tsunady had said in the izakaya, the old man messed up right.
Speaker A
What a pity about Sukcomo Hitaki such a good shinobi. Yes, all three of them knew very well that Huen Saratobi hadn't intended to kill Sukcomo Hitaki. It was just that Sukumo posed a threat to the Hokag, so he had to be discredited. If
Speaker A
Sukumo Hitaki had swallowed this bitter pill and completely tainted himself with darkness, Hirusen would have still promoted him. But unfortunately, Sukumo Hitaki was a man of unyielding integrity. And in the end, he proved himself with his suicide. For a moment,
Speaker A
looking at the language Kakashi before him, Jeriah didn't know what to say. Although he couldn't understand why Kakashi, who had long let go of all this, suddenly wanted to retaliate against Danzo, what could he say when it was avenging his father? continued
Speaker A
talking about the will of fire. He could discuss it with a stranger like Aiha, but with someone close like Kakashi, he couldn't quite bring himself to say it.
Speaker A
So with a sigh of helplessness, he patted Kakashi on the shoulder and left directly. And regarding this, Kakashi merely glanced at Jeriah lightly, then turned around and continued with his own business. Yes, he had to admit that Jeriah was indeed a good person.
Speaker A
However, unfortunately, he was not a reliable elder nor a leader worth following because he couldn't even protect his own people. So naturally, he couldn't earn everyone's loyalty. So it was best to just stick with the Aiiah.
Speaker A
After all, Achiha Gene had good character, and it seemed his chances of winning were high. Jeriah appeared somewhat leisurely. He strolled around the Aiha clan compound like this. Of course, the Aiha didn't drive him away since they had no rule forbidding others
Speaker A
from visiting the Aiha compound. Actually, no Ninja Clan had such a rule. It was just that there was a special unspoken understanding among ordinary civilians and ninja clans. But essentially, as long as one didn't go into the restricted areas of the clan,
Speaker A
the Aiha wouldn't interfere. Not to mention Jeriah. Even if a civilian came, as long as they followed the rules, the Achiha wouldn't drive them away. Before long, the more Jeriah walked around, the more solemn his expression became. The
Speaker A
Aiha's defenses were too heavy, dense centuries, both overt, and covert patrol teams everywhere, all composed solely of Jonan. Where were the Chunin and Jennan?
Speaker A
He couldn't help but grab a random Narac clan member and ask out of curiosity.
Speaker A
And regarding this, the Nar clansman who was grabbed upon seeing it was Jeriah cautiously said, "The Achihas Chunin and Jinnon have almost all gone to the police force." Jariah's mouth twitched.
Speaker A
The village's security such a critical issue was all left to a group of Chunin and Jinnon. While all the Jonan stayed in the clan compound, however, he shook his head and didn't bother to say more because he knew very well that this was
Speaker A
a preparation for war with the village at any time. Suddenly, Jerus lit up. He directly caught up with a figure ahead and draped his arm around his neck.
Speaker A
Shikaku, I never expected you to defect to the etchiatu. Come on, let's talk. Jeriah was quite pleased. Kakashi was just an ordinary ninja. His knowledge limited, so he didn't bother asking questions. Now, perfect. The Narasiki before him was someone he knew quite
Speaker A
well. Back in the frontline camp during the third war, this man had been his strategist and logistics chief, so their bond was actually not bad. However, upon seeing Jeriah before him, Narashikichi was rather displeased. Being dragged out to work by his clan head was already
Speaker A
irritating enough, but now he had to run into someone even more annoying. Jeriah. After a moment's thought, he couldn't help but say, "I'm with the Aiha faction now, so it's not appropriate for us to be seen together. You should go find my
Speaker A
cousin instead. He's the village faction's man." Unfortunately for him, Jeriah paid no heed and forcibly dragged Shikichi away. Nar Shikichi, his heart churned with irritation. Yes, he had clearly expressed that he had joined the Achiha and shouldn't be seen too close
Speaker A
to Jeriah. But to his surprise, Jeriah didn't care about his predicament at all. Nor did he consider how Shikichi would explain things to the Aiha later.
Speaker A
This made Shikichi's opinion of Jeriah plummet. Nevertheless, despite his inner turmoil, his face betrayed nothing. As someone chosen by Nar Shikaku to lead a new faction, his intellect was no less sharp than Shikaka's own. And so, maintaining his usual lazy demeanor, he
Speaker A
invited Jeriah to his residence. After simply pouring him a cup of tea, he dispensed with pleasantries. Jeriah sama, please get to the point. I have matters to attend to later. He was quite direct. First, this was Jeriah and Nar
Speaker A
Shikichi certainly didn't want to offend him. However, given his current position, he also couldn't afford to be too close to him. Thus, as a clan leader, he could offer a semblance of respect on the surface, but he had to
Speaker A
maintain a sufficient distance and get rid of Jeriah as soon as possible. On the contrary, his immediate concern was how to explain things to the Aiha later.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Jeriah, with his keen perception, noticed Shikichi's displeasure, but simply didn't care. After all, in his eyes, someone who had abandoned the will of fire was lucky not to be killed on the spot. If it weren't for the significant impact it would have
Speaker A
on the situation, he would have resorted to violence long ago. This was precisely why he adopted such a hardline stance, completely disregarding Narashiki's feelings. All right, just tell me simply what exactly happened in the village.
Speaker A
Why did the Eno Shikacho choose side with the Aiha? And what's the current status of the Aiha? Give me this information and I'll leave immediately.
Speaker A
Jeriah was quite direct in his approach. He didn't quite trust what his teacher said and he trusted Aiha gene even less.
Speaker A
So even though Narikichi had defected to the Aiha, he believed the Nara clan were all intelligent people and he had personally dealt with the man before him. Therefore, he concluded that even if this guy had sided with the Aiha, he
Speaker A
wouldn't dare to deceive him. After all, not everyone in Kenoha was as tough as Aiha Jeene daring to clash head-on with him. No kidding. He was after all one of the legendary Sanin of Kohaa, a title recognized by the demigod of the shinobi
Speaker A
world, Hanzo of the salamander. Indeed, this wasn't the era of giant war machines. In this time before the Akatsuki's major operations, Hanzo still held a formidable reputation in the ninja world. It proved to be true.
Speaker A
Despite his irritation, Nar Shikichi eventually began to explain. It started with Aiha Jyn's parents being captured by Root which triggered his man Gekkyo Sharinggon and led to a series of assassination battles against Root. Kill one of my Aiha today and I'll take two
Speaker A
of your root members tonight. And so Aiha Gene carved his path with slaughter and with his man Gekyo, he completely won over the radical faction of the Aiha. Subsequently during the confrontation with the village's higherups for reasons unknown, the
Speaker A
elders backed down. The ANBU and root units surrounding the Aha district were withdrawn and Aiha gained even more support thanks to this victory. Later on, the assassination war between Aiha and Danzo escalated. The radical faction was wellprepared, so they suffered
Speaker A
almost no casualties. But Fagaku, having chosen to trust Huen Saratobi, led the moderate and neutral factions into a devastating massacre by Danzo. It was precisely because of this that most chose the radical faction, leaving Fugaku completely isolated and
Speaker A
powerless. Once he had control over the entire Aiha clan, Aihajin used the police force as a stepping stone clashed with the village's higher-ups and ultimately forced them to concede. Aiha, having reclaimed the clan's land, naturally saw his prestige s even
Speaker A
higher. As for the current village, with the police force slacking off the no choice but to pick up the slack, causing their reputation to suffer as well. The vill's higher-ups were completely at a loss. There seemed to have been a major
Speaker A
battle in the forest of death a few days ago, but since Narashiki's rank wasn't high enough, he didn't know the details.
Speaker A
In short, Narashikichi offered no commentary, simply relaying the things he should know to Jeriah. Anything else?
Speaker A
He didn't know. If you wanted to know more, you'd have to investigate yourself. Meanwhile, Jeriah's expression grew increasingly grave as he listened.
Speaker A
His face darkening. He could sense how troublesome Aiha was. His teacher might not be a good person, but he was certainly skilled. Forcing his teacher into such a corner without resorting to force was a testament to Achiha Jyn's
Speaker A
extraordinary abilities. After pondering for a moment, he said, "A few more questions." "Go ahead," Narashiki nodded. Jeriah asked, "The police force is being negligent." The Hokag just tolerates it. The police force has its own explanation. Narashikichi began slowly. They cite the overwhelming
Speaker A
number of complaints, so they must strictly follow legal procedures, which naturally requires a great deal of time.
Speaker A
For instance, if you hit me and I file a complaint, the police force would need to investigate, right? Are there witnesses? Is there physical evidence?
Speaker A
How severe is the injury? Witnesses need to give statements, but civilians are afraid of trouble, worried about retaliation from the perpetrator after release. Physical evidence even harder.
Speaker A
Where would an ordinary civilian find physical evidence? For injury assessment, you'd have to go to Canoa Hospital and get an official report. In short, the process is extremely troublesome. Dragging it out for a year or two is easy. It's not like the police
Speaker A
force only has this one case. If you want to wait for them to handle it, you'll be waiting a long time. You'd probably be dead before they even get to it, but it's legal. Jeriah was dumbfounded frozen in place. Good grief,
Speaker A
that actually works. Subsequently, he inquired about several more issues, and Narikichi answered them all. However, as he listened on, Jeriah found it increasingly hard to bear because he heard about the propaganda war between both sides and more specifically the
Speaker A
rumors spread by the Aiah. Rumors that Herusen Suratobi's ascension was illegitimate conspiracy theories surrounding Nwaki Dan Ko Sukumo and others claims that he deliberately killed Minato Namikes to reclaim his seat and that the Synu and Usuzamaki clans were wiped out through his
Speaker A
minations. Hearing all this, Jeriah's heart nearly stopped. What followed was a bone chilling coldness. He had thought his teacher was unscrupulous, but upon deeper reflection, if these rumors were true, then Herusen Saratobi was truly despicable. Of course, what frightened
Speaker A
Jeriah even more was the feeling that Achihaene hadn't yet played all his cards. He had only spread rumors about cases where all parties involved were long dead. The matters where the victims were still alive, he was holding tightly, waiting for the right moment to
Speaker A
unleash them. Like the truth about Narudo Uzumaki's parentage, the villages dark experiments. Just thinking about it made Jeriah's scalp tingle. Beyond that, he finally fully understood the reason behind Kakashi's vengeance. The rumors spread by the Achiha were a
Speaker A
psychological assassination aiming to destroy the spirit. Any normal person would feel compelled to seek revenge even at the cost of their own life.
Speaker A
Otherwise, even if they seemed alive physically, they would be dead in spirit. Jeriah could understand Kakashi's actions. But the problem was what could be done? Even though he could see through Achiha Jyn's tactics, he couldn't think of a countermeasure.
Speaker A
Thus, at this moment, Jeriah felt even more troubled than before. Half an hour later, Jeriah with a heavy heart slowly left the Achiha clan grounds and made his way onto the village streets. Then he was utterly stunned. Compared to the
Speaker A
harmony and tranquility within the Achiha clan grounds, the village was now in complete disarray. He had barely crossed two main streets when he witnessed seven or eight quarrels, two of which had even escalated into outright brawls. Furthermore, Ambu
Speaker A
agents were visible everywhere, yet they, having just taken over the police force, were obviously incapable of handling these crises. For one, they could not be impartial. The Aiiah, regardless of who backed them. Even the Saratobi clan of the Hokag himself,
Speaker A
would be arrested if they aired. The Ambu, however, clearly could not do the same. But more importantly, they were annoyed and resentful. Initially, they tried to counsel patiently, but as time passed, their true Yinbu nature was fully exposed. If you had the backing of
Speaker A
a ninja clan, you were fine. Otherwise, they would seize you without a second thought, and their methods were far harsher than the Aiha skilled as they were in the arts of killing. This hypocritical behavior only deepened the civilians resentment. Jeriah witnessed
Speaker A
one villager in a fit of rage curse an ambu to his face. Theu responded with a single slap breaking the civilian's arm, then promptly handcuffed him and dragged him away. There was no helping it. The physical gap between a ninja and a
Speaker A
civilian was immense. And theu being an organization focused on assassination, even when trying to restrain their strength, could still easily shatter a civilian's arm. Jeriah opened his mouth trying to say something, but in the end he let out a long sigh, shook his head,
Speaker A
and walked away, for he knew it would be feudal. Jeriah himself came from a civilian background, so he understood that disputes among neighbors rarely had a clear right or wrong. The A&BU were new to police work, and this chaos
Speaker A
wasn't necessarily their fault. After all, they were A&BU. Could you expect an organization that dwelled in the shadows, specializing in assassinations and other dirty work to effectively mediate petty squables between villagers? Aiha, you are ruthless. Just by adding a few requirements to the
Speaker A
police force, you've cornered the village, and we can't even officially find fault with it. The current state of the village is far worse than I ever imagined. Relying on myself alone is too difficult. Should I go finds? No, forget
Speaker A
it. If she ever learned of the rumors spread by the Aiha, who knows what that woman might do. This is tough. Jeriah shook his head in dismay and finally returned to the Hokag's office. This time, he didn't come through the window.
Speaker A
He pushed the door open and entered. Clearly having just returned to Kenoha that morning, he hadn't had a chance to observe things closely. So his mood had been light now. However, everything was different. Having truly delved into Kenoha's situation and understood the
Speaker A
state of affairs, he didn't even have the heart to visit the hot spring bath house for research. Meanwhile, on the other side, Arus and Saratobi sitting behind his desk smoking watched the dejected Jeriah before him, his expression utterly impassive. What's
Speaker A
wrong? Feeling discouraged, Jeriah nodded listlessly. He grabbed a random chair, sat down in reverse, rested his arms on the back rest, and slumped his head onto his hands. Indeed, the village's situation was too complex. He didn't even know where to begin. Aiha
Speaker A
was exceptionally troublesome. He wasn't a traditional powerhouse whom you could just fight directly. Dealing with someone who used their brains left him momentarily without a strategy. Because with many things, you knew they were wrong, but you simply couldn't find a
Speaker A
proper justification to act. It's normal. Don't overthink it. I called you back this time just to prevent the Aiha from acting rashly. Resolving the Aiha threat isn't something you need to handle. Jeriah and Suratobi's tone was relaxed. Obviously, he never expected
Speaker A
Jeriah to solve this problem. His only concern was the village's lack of strong fighters, so he wanted to gather a few powerful figures to guard the village.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, hearing Harusen's words, Jeriah breathed a sigh of relief, then couldn't help but ask.
Speaker A
Although the police force's explanation makes sense the village's situation is already deteriorating. Can't we just remove the uchiha from the police force?
Speaker A
Then the village can step and summon the major ninja clans and have each contribute a few ninjas to reform the police force. Wouldn't that work? Jeriah offered his suggestion. Now that he wasn't the person in charge freed from
Speaker A
such heavy burdens, his mind began to work more clearly. But unfortunately, hearing Jeriah's suggestion, Herusen Saratobi rolled his eyes. I'm sure the Achiha wouldn't object that Gene fellow has long wanted to be rid of the police force. But the problem is who takes over
Speaker A
next. The Ambu have held the position for less than half a month and their reputation is already worse than the Ajihas was. Do you think the other clan heads are fools? Jeriah was momentarily speechless. He supposed that was true.
Speaker A
So in the end, he let out a helpless sigh, waved his hand, and left the Hokag's office. Before leaving, he said, "I won't be leaving the village anytime soon. You can find me if there's anything. As for where I'll be, I'm sure
Speaker A
the A and B you can track me down. I'm off. And with that, Jeriah left in a flourish. And Herus and Saratobi didn't stop him. As he had said himself, he hadn't expected Jeriah to resolve this.
Speaker A
After all, he knew better than anyone just how troublesome Aiha gene could be. As long as Jeriah stayed in Kenoha and could be found when needed, that was enough. Time flowed on. Jeriah, who had just returned to the village and wanted
Speaker A
to tackle the Aiha issue, was immediately shut down by Aiha. The so-called Galling Jeriah once again devolved into a leerous wanderer.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, the Aiha took no further action, maintaining their own territory. The police force, meanwhile, had long since become a mere ornament, its functions completely taken over by theuh remained dormant. Each day, besides necessary training, he silently
Speaker A
recovered his ocular power. He was waiting, waiting for Danzo to make his move. Earlier, Aiha could have easily killed Danzo, but chose to let him live.
Speaker A
It was to extract the last bit of use from him. Now the time had come for Danzo to prove his worth. 3 days later, Danzo, bearing an authorization signed by the Hokag, began visiting the villages major ninja clans. His first
Speaker A
stop was the Inoshiko Nar clan heads residence. Because Danzo had sent a formal letter beforehand, Chos Kimchi and Enochi Yamanaka were also present.
Speaker A
Watching Danzo walk in Shikaku Nar's gaze turned cold. After all, this visitor was not one to welcome lightly.
Speaker A
Nonetheless, he still invited Danzo to sit and poured him a cup of tea. Elder Danzo visits the Enoshiko. What business might you have? Nar Shikaku spoke in a calm tone. He held no fondness for the Danzo before him. Though he would offer
Speaker A
basic respect, but nothing more. After all, the Inoshikacho trio had a firm foothold in the ecosystem of Kenoha.
Speaker A
Even if Huen Saratobi, who had returned to power, could strip them of their administrative posts, he could not possibly revoke the positions held by their clan members, especially the Yamanaka clan. Without their secret techniques, the interrogation and torture division would be rendered
Speaker A
completely dysfunctional. Although Jin Jutsu in conventional interrogation methods had some effect, they were far inferior to the Yamanaka clan's arts.
Speaker A
The Nar clan's intellect was equally irreplaceable. When real trouble or difficulties arose, let Husen Saratobi dare not to beg them for help. The Akimichi clan, the strongest among the three was also their combat foundation.
Speaker A
Thus, even though the Inoshikacho had been expelled from the core circle, Narashikaku still sat securely in his position. However, unfortunately, when Danzo spoke, Narashikaku could no longer maintain his composure. This is the Hokage's transfer order. Each family must provide 17 people. Root urgently
Speaker A
needs fresh blood. Since you three clan leaders are all here, it saves me an extra trip. I'll give you two hours to prepare. And don't try to fool me. At the very least, I need elite shunin and the number of Jonan level personnel
Speaker A
cannot be less than five. I'll give you one day to prepare. I'll be back at this time tomorrow. With that, Danzo pulled out the Hokage's transfer order briefly showed it to the three and then put it away. Yes. Although Herus and Saratobi
Speaker A
had only agreed to conscript seven people per family. If Danzo did not resort to a little trickery, he would not be the Danzo of the shadows. So, he had the forgery experts in route alter the number on the Hokage's order from 7
Speaker A
to 17. Danzo thinking of this felt even more admiration for himself. He really was a little genius. Then without paying any attention to the grim expressions of the three, he simply walked out of Narashikaka's home. The T-room fell into
Speaker A
a deathly silence. After Danzo left, the faces of the three turned extremely sour. Bang! Akimichi Chos was the first to lose his temper, slamming his palm directly on the table. Damn it, I absolutely refuse. I would rather defect
Speaker A
to the Aiha with my whole clan than allow any of my people to join Routt.
Speaker A
There is no room for negotiation on this. What are your opinions? Akimichi Chosa without any hesitation directly expressed his thoughts. Clearly, he had been completely enraged by Danzo. That was 17 clan members, and among them, five had to be at the Jonan level. If he
Speaker A
actually handed over these people, the Akimichi clan might as well disband. The village has indeed gone too far this time. Yamanaka Andoi's face turned cold, and then he spoke directly. I absolutely cannot accept this either. We might as
Speaker A
well all defect to the ichi. Yes, unlike the Nar and Akimichi clans, Danzo was very fond of using Yamanaka clan members. Therefore, Yamanaka in Noi naturally knew more about root than the other two. So, even the usually calm man
Speaker A
now made the same decision as a Kimichi Chosa. Then the two turned to look at Nar Shikaku, the smartest of the three clans. In response, Naras Shikaku let out a turbid breath and drain the tea in his cup. Inoi Chosa, don't be hasty.
Speaker A
Danzo gave us a full day. We have plenty of time to analyze this matter. First point one. Do you think Hiruan Saratobi would give Danzo such extensive authorization? Almost instantly with Narashikaku's words Yamanaka Enochi and Akimichi Chos fell into silence. Indeed,
Speaker A
Hirusen Saratobi's reputation was already bad enough. If the village had no suitable candidate, he wouldn't even be qualified to be Hokag. For a man so concerned with his own image under the current complex circumstances, even if Root truly needed reinforcements, would
Speaker A
he possibly issue such an unscrupulous order that disregarded the survival of the clans? Wasn't he afraid of provoking all the clans into rebellion? After all, they were not the only power in Kinoa.
Speaker A
Now, the Aiha had risen. Yamanaka and Noi pondered for a moment. Shikaku, what do you mean? I think we should not make a decision, Nar. Shikaku said slowly. As the old saying goes, just sit on the mountain and watch the tigers fight.
Speaker A
Danzo wants people, so we'll give them to him. But remember to tell our people once they leave the Inosikacho compound, they should immediately defect and run to the Aiha compound. Civil war, huh?
Speaker A
It's already happened once. What's one more time? SSS. Upon hearing Narashikaku's words, Yamanaka and Noi and Akimi Chos couldn't help but twitch their mouths. Akimichi Chos couldn't help but ask, "Is it really feasible to fool Danzo like this?" "No big problem,"
Speaker A
Narashikaku said slowly. "Just bluff. If it were before the Achiha rose, we certainly couldn't have fooled the villages high level like this. But now it's different. Unless Haru and Saratobi wants us to defect to the Achiha with our entire clans, even if he knows
Speaker A
everything in his heart, he has to pretend not to know on the surface. Even if he wants to settle the score with us later, he'll have to wait until after he destroys the iah. But the question is, can the vill's high level hold out until
Speaker A
then? Even if the highle eventually wins, they will certainly suffer heavy losses. By then, even if they still want to come after us, how much strength will they have left? If the high level can destroy the Aiha without any casualties,
Speaker A
then we Inoshikacho will just continue to lie low. After all, Haru and Saratobi is very old. No matter how long he lies, how many more years can he have?
Speaker A
Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosen nodded upon hearing this. It had to be said, Narosikaka's plan was good. No matter who won in the end, the Inoshikacho might not get into the core, but they could preserve their clans
Speaker A
without much trouble. All right, I agree. Akimichi Chosa said, "Yamanaka and Noi, let's settle it then." Then with this major matter resolved, the atmosphere naturally became lighter.
Speaker A
Akimichi Chosa took a sip of tea and couldn't help asking with Danzo doing this to the other clans, how many do you think will defect to the Aiha? I think quite a few Yamanaka and Noi said directly. The Abureim clan will
Speaker A
definitely collapse. They are not good at talking and no matter who takes power, they can't get into the core and their insects are too versatile. They have both offensive and defensive capabilities and even possess perception abilities. Besides, the Abraang clan's
Speaker A
foundation is not deep. If they don't want to be wiped out, they have to defect to the Aiha. Yamanaka and Noi's tone was certain. He clearly held no high opinion of the Abure clan. Just as he had said the Abby were merely a
Speaker A
mid-tier ninja clan, and even their clan size could not compare to any one of the Enoshiko trio. The Enoshiko could only barely defend themselves when united.
Speaker A
And what of the Abraim clan? Due to the nature of their clan, they had almost no allied ninja clans, nor even any friends who would advance or retreat alongside them. Such a mid-tier ninja clan, yet possessing versatile abilities. Faced
Speaker A
with Danzo's threats, what could the Abraim clan possibly do? It seemed there was no other choice but to wholeheartedly pledge allegiance to the Aiah. They had too little room to maneuver when confronted with a crisis.
Speaker A
In Noi Chosa, have you noticed? The very fact that Danzo is still alive is utterly perplexing. Let us not forget one thing. Achihajene holds a grudge against Danzo. Danzo captured his parents, yet under such intense hatred, Danzo has repeatedly escaped death.
Speaker A
Could it be that Achihaene truly lacks the ability to finish him? Think back to that night in the forest of death, the black giant over 30 m tall. I for one do not believe it. Narikaku's eyes flickered. His mind began to race and he
Speaker A
posed his own question at this. Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chos's faces darkened instantly. They were not fools.
Speaker A
Narashikaku had made it so clear that if they still could not understand, they would deserve to sit at the same table as the Aiah. Shikaku, you mean? Akimichi Chos was stunned. However, before Narashikaku could speak, Yamanaka and Noi said coldly, Aihajin deliberately,
Speaker A
let Danzo live to use Danzo to harass us other clans and force us to flee to their side as soon as possible. Akimi Choso let out a sigh. Even knowing this, what could they say? After all, Danzo was the one doing the dirty work. They
Speaker A
could hardly blame Aiha. Nar Shikaku remains silent pondering. After a long while, he shook his head. Forget it.
Speaker A
It's none of our concern. But this shows that Achiha Jeene is a man of great forbearance. Kenoha is about to descend into chaos. Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosa could only sigh once more. Yes, even though they were clan
Speaker A
heads on the vill's chessboard, they were not qualified to be players. Even with all their might, they could not guarantee their clan survival.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, elsewhere in the Achiha compound within Jyn's courtyard. In the front reception hall, Achihasuki, after skillfully brewing tea, bowed slightly and left the room. Aiha Jeene raised his teacup and then could not help but remark, "Chief Shibi, it is an honor. I
Speaker A
had anticipated that some clan would come to pledge allegiance to the Aiha, but I never expected the first to do so in mass would be the Abby clan. May I ask, how many people does Danzo intend to conscript from your Abiram clan?"
Speaker A
Aihajene was full of curiosity. Yes, he was truly astonished. The Aiha had placed many spies in the village, so he was well aware that Danzo had begun visiting the major clans today. Thus, he had prepared accordingly, constantly speculating which clan would be the
Speaker A
first to come. But the problem was that he truly had not expected the first to arrive would be the Aburim clan. After all, compared to the Enoshik Cho or the Huga, the Abby might be considered a small clan. But within Kenoha, the
Speaker A
Abureim clan was actually quite sizable. Therefore, in Aiiah Jyn's view, even if the Abraim clan were to come over, they should at least take a few days to think it over. And now, Danzo had barely left the Abiram clan when Abraim Shibi came
Speaker A
directly to pledge allegiance. This left him somewhat bewildered. After all, Aiha had thought the first clans to come would be smaller ones like the Midashi Ko or Kurama. So, he asked outright without even denying that he had anticipated this. In fact, if a clever
Speaker A
person heard this, they would realize that Danzo's continued survival was itself a ploy by Aihajin. Meanwhile, on the other side, Abraham Shibby, clad in a black robe and wearing sunglasses, could not help but let out a faint sigh
Speaker A
upon hearing Aihajins words. He downed the tea in one gulp set the cup firmly on the table and said in a very somber tone, "All of them." Aiha was a bit confused. That was it. He knew the Abby were not talkative, but you are the
Speaker A
clan head. Could you be a little less laconic? But wait, what did that mean?
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene pondered a moment before tentatively asking, "Chief Shibi, I don't quite understand." Then considering Shibi's personality, this conversation felt too dreary. So he called for Achihasuki to prepare some dishes and brought out several jars of sake. Then Aihaene raised his cup and
Speaker A
began pllying Shibi with alcohol in response. Although Abureame Shibi did not care much for drinking given that he had come to pledge allegiance, he reluctantly started to drink. After three cups, Shibi loosened up. Yes, all of them. Abure Shiby's expression turned
Speaker A
cold. Danzo is too greedy. In the past, he only asked for one or two Abraham geniuses. At those times, I gritted my teeth and gave in because the Abureim clan lacked the foundation to resist. We had to bow when necessary. After all,
Speaker A
since Canó's founding, many clans have been wiped out. The Fuma clan, once roughly the same size as the Abureim, and even the Synua founding clan, are all gone. The Abure clan realized this and for the sake of survival could only
Speaker A
stoop low. The village has changed. Ever since Saratobi Herusen became the third Hokag, the village has long ceased to be what the first Hokag promised at its founding. But Danzo has gone too far.
Speaker A
This time he ordered me as the clan head to lead the entire Abureim clan into root. How is that different from annihilation? By this point, Abraham Shivy was filled with rage. Especially with the alcohol in his system, his
Speaker A
chakra control wavered, causing insects to flutter from various parts of his body. Meanwhile, Aihaene paid no attention to the insects, but was shocked by Danzo's audacity. Damn, was he insane? Previously, he thought Danzo, even at his craziest, would only
Speaker A
demand a majority of the clan's members. But now, you're utterly inhuman, demanding the entire Abure clan be incorporated into Root. Damn it, he's got a hole in his head. Aiha let out a soft sigh, looking at Abraham Shivi
Speaker A
before him. His eyes were filled with sympathy. How tragic to have encountered that scoundrel Danzo. It was indeed the Abureim clan's misfortune, but that was fine. At the very least, his trust in the Aburim clan could be a bit higher
Speaker A
than in other ninja clans. In the future, he could give the Abureim clan more responsibilities, at least making them stronger than the Enoshiko clans.
Speaker A
Indeed, how could the petty schemes of the Enoshiko possibly escape his notice? However, in the same vein, he simply didn't care. An old ancestor once said, "Wisely make more friends and fewer enemies." Now with the leaf villages upper echelons as enemies, not only
Speaker A
would he accept half of the Inino Shikacho's resources as investment, but even if a mere civilian ninja or an ordinary commoner came to pledge allegiance, Aihajin would welcome them all without exception. The more the better. Retaliation afterward, non-existent. Aihajin's philosophy was
Speaker A
pointtooint. He would not treat the Enoshiko as a monolithic entity. As long as those who defected from the Enoshika Cho truly contributed, he would grant them corresponding trust and benefits.
Speaker A
Just like Zhuang during the three kingdoms period, did Lube lose trust in Zukoyang just because Zhua Gene defected to Sun Kuan? Impossible. Whoever was truly willing to fight for him would receive equal respect. However, in terms of trust, the Aiha ranked first and the
Speaker A
Abraim clan could rank second because this clan, unlike the Enoch, had no retreat. Having chosen to side with the Aiha, they could only go all the way.
Speaker A
Could I accept? Have the Abure clan come as soon as possible. For now, they can squeeze in with the Aiiah. Next, I'll have some Achiha members cooperate with the Abureim clan to develop a territory in the Death Forest to the west. Then
Speaker A
have your clan dispatch some ninjas mix them with the Aiiah Inoshiko and others reorganize into new tactical squads and jointly take charge of the security of this area. Aiha spoke with a smile.
Speaker A
Indeed, although the Enoshiko had defected not long ago, he had already broken them apart and fully integrated them into the Aiah combat system, not split the Enoshiko. Impossible. The Naras shadow techniques could buy the Aiha precious time. The Yamanaka secret
Speaker A
arts were assigned to intelligence units and the Akimichi were reliable tanks and offensive assets. On the Achiha side, there was no such thing as absolutes.
Speaker A
Since you choose to join the Aiha faction, you must demonstrate your value. Of course, he wouldn't enforce complete assimilation. If the Enoch wanted to form a few core teams, Aihaene wouldn't stop them. After all, he was well aware that this was a world where
Speaker A
bloodline reigns supreme. Truly integrating everyone into commoners would only dilute the bloodline further leading to the collapse of the entire team. Therefore, he would maintain a proper ratio. Ninja clans could serve as the core. But they must interweave and
Speaker A
cooperate with each other. All right, I agree. Abure Shibi immediately nodded. Then knowing the urgency, he left the Aiha without another word and began the intense relocation work. Meanwhile, on the other side, watching Abure Shib's departing figure, a faint smile appeared
Speaker A
on Achihajin's face. Danzo was truly reliable. It seemed his decision to keep Danzo alive for now was correct. Without this cespool's help, the other ninja clans would never have decided to defect to him so quickly. I decided once this
Speaker A
fellow completely lost his usefulness, he would not only kill him but also burn plenty of gold ingots and spirit money for him. No choice. Such a great benefactor must be properly thanked.
Speaker A
However, as he was musing, Achihasuki walked in. Gene sama the Kurama clan has come to visit. Good show them in. Aiha said with a smile. Time passed slowly.
Speaker A
In just one day, Achihaja was almost overwhelmed with busyness. He personally received seven or eight people, almost all heads of major ninja clans, while those of lesser influence were mostly handled by the clan elders. For a time, the entire Aiha clan was bustling with
Speaker A
activity with ninja clans constantly joining. This spectacle stunned all the Aiha. No way. In normal times, the Aiha were like outcasts. Neither grandmothers nor grandfathers cared for them. They didn't even have a single visiting ninja clan. And now in the entire ninja world,
Speaker A
few clans could be seen. But in the Aiha compound, they were everywhere. Of course, considering that the addition of major ninja clans would make the situation increasingly chaotic, Aiha Gene dispatched Fagaku to coordinate issues among the various clans, ensuring
Speaker A
the compound could run smoothly. Elder Gene is truly amazing. Indeed, since Elder Gene took power, the Aiha have changed every day. Look at this scene.
Speaker A
Many ninja clans have joined us. All the Achiha spoke up. Yes, the Aiha were just a bit single-minded and appeared arrogant, but in reality, they were very approachable. As long as you were willing to be friends with the Aiha,
Speaker A
they would be willing to take a blade for you. Tobraenju had a point. The Aiha were actually a clan of love. But because their emotions were too intense, they would go mad upon losing their beloved. In the past, since Tobaramaju's
Speaker A
era, the Achiha had been subjected to all kinds of slander. Especially after Herus and Saratobi took over, the marginalization of the Achiha intensified, causing them to become increasingly stifled. Coupled with their intense emotions, they became like a powder keg. Now, however, things were
Speaker A
different. Under Achiha Jyn's efforts, the Aiha situation in the village had gradually stabilized, and the reform of the police force had brought a sigh of relief to everyone. Now, with the addition of major ninja clans, they once again experienced the feeling of having
Speaker A
friends. Therefore, the Aiha had now completely normalized. In an alley, Shersui and Itachi were filled with mixed emotions. Indeed, Fugaku had only sealed their chakra and replaced Sherui's eyes with ordinary onetomo Sharinggon, but he hadn't completely confined them. He just forbade them from
Speaker A
leaving the Aiha compound. Therefore, they could still wander around the compound on ordinary days. Itachi, what do you think? Sherui, after a long silence, couldn't help but ask. He looked very dejected. The recent drastic changes within the clan had completely
Speaker A
confused his mind. Yes, if at the beginning he could still hold on to his own beliefs, but now the Inoshiko had defected the Abureim and Inuzuka had defected and ninja clans of all sizes had come. Aiha Jeene acknowledged by so
Speaker A
many people left Shersway momentarily unable to distinguish right from wrong. Looking at the utterly dejected Xi Shu felt a tumultuous complexity in his heart. He could hardly believe his own eyes. Why had all these ninja clans defected to the yuzbo? He could not
Speaker A
comprehend it. Finally, he suddenly spotted a stout man and walked straight up to him. Goes, "You show Gay Thai, who was about to head home, paused in surprise at the sight of you blocking his path. Indeed, the two had once been
Speaker A
classmates, though you had graduated earlier. After graduating from the ninja academy, since his year couldn't form an Inoacho team, he was assigned to assist within his clan." Mm. Guuitai, can you tell me why you joined the Yuzbo? I
Speaker A
truly don't understand. Yo, you asked puzzled. Though he had been aloof during his academy days, he was actually quite sharp and knew everyone in his class. So upon seeing a former classmate now he naturally asked directly. In response,
Speaker A
Cho Guai looked at Yuzibbou before him. Although he didn't know much about Yus situation, Narashikaku being among the highranking often mentioned the villages basic circumstances during clan meetings. The three clans Eno Shikacho were united through thick and thin, so he naturally knew a little.
Speaker A
Therefore, upon hearing Yuzbo use question, his eyes instantly turned peculiar. Thinking that from now on, the Yuzbo would be their own people, he coughed softly and said cautiously, "You must have heard some of the rumors your clan has been spreading in the village
Speaker A
lately. Right. Aren't they just rumors?" You asked, "Innocence written on his face." At this, Cho Guai was instantly stunned, then looked at him as if he were a rare giant panda. "You actually think they're rumors? Aren't they?" you
Speaker A
retorted. Sho Guay's mouth twitched. But in the end, he let out a helpless sigh and after a moment of rofal reflection said, "You, though powerful, are frighteningly naive. Those rumors are certainly true. In fact, those matters are almost an open secret. Even without
Speaker A
the Yuzbo spreading rumors, all our ninja clans are well aware of them. It's just that the vill's situation is complicated, and we clans have been keeping out of it to protect ourselves.
Speaker A
Since we've now aligned with your clan, I won't lie to you." The village has been targeting the Yuzbo. The second Hokag's influence plays a part, but the main reason is that the Yuzbo are too powerful and uncontrollable. Like the
Speaker A
Senu, the Yuzbo either become the vill's leaders or are utterly destroyed. There is absolutely no third option. The strong have no right to surrender unless the Yuzbo voluntarily dismantle themselves. Either become so weak that only a few members remain or split into
Speaker A
a dozen or more factions that are mortal enemies. Otherwise, no matter who sits in the Hokag seat, they will always find ways to oppose the Yuzbo. The vill's previous approach was exactly that, to co-opt and divide the Yuzbo, creating as
Speaker A
many factions as possible. However, unfortunately, while Hirus and Saratobi may only want to split the Yuzbo, Danzo for some reason is determined to annihilate them entirely. Thankfully, a Yuzbo gene emerged within your clan.
Speaker A
Otherwise, with Danzo's ruthlessness and her way of doing things, the future of the Yuzbo would be bleak. As for why we joined the Yuzbo, it's because the village pushed us too hard. Root demanded that each of the Enoshik Cho
Speaker A
clans send 17 members to join Root. And you know what Root is like? It treats us as mere cannon fodder and sacrificial pawns. In such a situation, why wouldn't we flee? Previously, we clans maintain neutrality. Even if we had some
Speaker A
grievances against Saratobi and the others, we were unwilling to meddle in your conflicts. Now it's different. When our own survival is at stake, of course, we have to fight with all our might. Sho Guetai spoke eloquently. Though he was
Speaker A
not a core member of the clan's leadership and only knew superficial information, his insights were still beyond what Xi Shuer and you could grasp. Hence, this speech rendered you completely silent. Xi Shuer standing nearby couldn't hold back and blurted
Speaker A
out though root is a bit strict. Everyone is doing it for the village. A little sacrifice is only natural, isn't it? Everyone is dedicated to the will of fire. Why should we fear a little sacrifice? This was the creed of Xi
Speaker A
Shuer's life, the very foundation of his convictions. But now, from the mouth of a member of another clan, he could not detect even a trace of the will of fire. Everything was filled with words like calculation, scheming, and
Speaker A
choice. For a moment, he couldn't hold it together. Yes, in the past, if a Yuzbo member said such things, he would think the Yuzbo lacked a sense of the big picture, their hearts filled with petty schemes. But the problem was that
Speaker A
the speaker was not a Yuzbo, but someone from another clan. Will of fire. Is that just a slogan used by those in power to fool the common people? Did you actually take it seriously? No way. No way. Are
Speaker A
there really people in this world so foolish as to believe that damned slogan? Sho Guai's face was full of disbelief. His face was filled with bewilderment and incredul as if he were looking at fools. You Xi Shuer. At that
Speaker A
moment, both of them felt extremely stifled. Especially the look of pity on Choa Guai's face dealt a devastating blow to their worldview. There was no help for it. If a Yuzbo had said such things, they would have dismissed it as
Speaker A
nonsense. But now it was different. The person saying this was a member of the Akimichi clan. Is the will of fire truly wrong? You asked in a horse voice. In response, Cho Guayai rolled his eyes. A simple question. Have you ever seen the
Speaker A
Hokag go to the front lines? But that's because the Hokag must oversee the overall situation. Xiu tried to find an excuse. Unfortunately, Shoda Goai retorted directly. Don't the Kagaya of other villages need to oversee the overall situation? Aren't other villages
Speaker A
afraid of being attacked? Xiu was instantly bewildered. After a side show, Daw Guetai couldn't help but say, "Wake up, you two." The will of fire speaks of burning oneself to give children room to grow, but in reality, the village cannot
Speaker A
achieve that. You both experienced the third great ninja war. Wave after wave of children were sent to the battlefield while the older generation stayed in the village. Our Hokag and the two elders.
Speaker A
Have you ever seen any of those in power personally fight on the battlefield? The ones truly fighting on the battlefield were all the vill's children. Cho Guetai said in a calm tone. After finishing, he found an excuse to leave, not wanting to
Speaker A
stay too long with those two and risk contaminating his own mind. On the other side, Shers and Itachi were incredulous, yet they could not refute. After all, Itachi might have been young at the time and only made a brief trip to the
Speaker A
battlefield, but Shers was different. He had participated in the entirety of the third great ninja war. So he naturally knew that Shioetai was speaking the truth. Wave after wave of newly graduated from the ninja academy perished. And even children who had not
Speaker A
yet graduated were forced to graduate and thrown into the front lines with less than one in 10 surviving. On the contrary, the Kohaa higher-ups who held the villages power suffered almost no losses. After all, they never even set
Speaker A
foot on the battlefield. These words, if spoken by the Aiha, he would never have listened. But coming from another clan, they truly made him unable to help but start thinking. Was he really wrong?
Speaker A
Wait, hiss. As if thinking of something, Shiroui's face instantly changed. Seeing this, Itachi couldn't help but ask Sher Sui, "What's wrong? I remembered something." Shers shook his head, his voice trembling. Itachi was puzzled.
Speaker A
However, after hearing Sherui's next words, he felt a chill run down his spine. During the third war, I never saw any clan members of the vill's higher-ups. I never thought too carefully before, but the words of your classmate just now made me suddenly
Speaker A
recall the situation during the third war. Not only the Hokag and the two elders never went to the front lines, but I also never saw the members of their respective clans on the battlefield. Yuan Feuan Shuer men. In
Speaker A
theory, these three clans are not small, but I never encountered them on the battlefield. At most, I ran into a few in logistics and administration. So, here's the problem. During the third war, the village was besieged by the
Speaker A
four great ninja villages, and the entire front line was so precarious that the village had to graduate children and send them directly into the brutal battlefield. With such a dangerous situation, where were the clan members of Yuan Feay and the other two? Why
Speaker A
couldn't we see their figures on the battlefield? Shiroui's face was grim, and his body trembled slightly. Clearly, the belief he had held in his heart began to crumble at this moment. After all, although he was stubborn and self-righteous, he was no fool.
Speaker A
Previously, he simply believed that his clansmen had a few screws loose. So, he was unwilling to communicate with them and even too lazy to listen to their voices. But at this moment, when a member of another clan he respected
Speaker A
spoke all these words, even though he felt very uncomfortable, he still took them all to heart. Then, he began to subconsciously reflect. Although he was looking for words to refute, he still recalled the strange situation during the third war. This is impossible.
Speaker A
Itachi's face also changed drastically, and he shook his head instinctively. However, seeing Shir Suis increasingly grim expression, he felt as if his head was about to split because he knew that Shirui would not lie to him. But if all this were true, wouldn't
Speaker A
it prove that Sho Da Thai was right? Could it be that Achihajin's actions were also correct? Then if Aiha was right, wouldn't their own actions make them traitors to the clan? Previously, they could still deceive themselves, believing that their actions were
Speaker A
actually for the sake of the village and the clan. Even if their chakra was sealed by Fua and Sherui's eyes were removed, they still believed in their hearts that they were right, their beloved Hokag would eventually set things right and fix everything. But
Speaker A
now, with Cho Da Goai's words, their beliefs were shattered into pieces. The next morning, in Jyn's courtyard, the atmosphere grew heavy. The middle courtyard, originally a training ground, had been converted into a meeting room.
Speaker A
No other choice. Although Achiha Ban's courtyard was indeed large in the past, when the Aiha clan held meetings, the family's reception room could accommodate everyone. Now, however, it was different. With the addition of various clans, the family's meeting room
Speaker A
was clearly insufficient. Helpless, he had no choice but to hold the meeting in the middle courtyard's training ground.
Speaker A
However, unlike the slap dash setup of the radical faction days, Aihajene, now fully in power, had brought in countless cushions and low tables, and even placed a pot of tea and some cups on each table. After all, those qualified to
Speaker A
attend this meeting were almost all clan leaders and elite members, he couldn't just have everyone standing while he spoke. Even if his strength was formidable, he couldn't afford to slight others. Basic respect was still necessary. As time slowly approached
Speaker A
9:00, representatives of the various clans began to enter. Although they hadn't established any ranking, they chose their seats according to the size and strength of their respective clans.
Speaker A
This aiha is quite thoughtful. Just giving out cushions is already a sign of respect. But they even provided tables and tea. Even when we had Joan in meetings in the village, we only got a cushion each. Tables and tea are
Speaker A
standard for the higher-ups. The people present all spoke up chatting and laughing. From their relaxed expressions, there was little worry about the future. Indeed, the Aiha themselves were already strong enough.
Speaker A
And now, with so many clans joining, even if there wasn't a single civilian ninja, it was enough to challenge the Kenoha higher-ups and even set things right. Just self-preservation, no pressure at all. Nonglu e poured himself a cup of tea before saying to Shan Jong
Speaker A
Sun Run and Sho Dao Ha Wan, "It seems our decision was right. At least from the Aiha style, Yuan Fe risen and the others are no match. Although it's uncertain whether we will lose any chance of further advancement with the
Speaker A
Achiha rising to power from the current perspective, it's still an acceptable matter. After all the ambition of our Inoshik Cho was never that great. Shan Jong Sun Run and Sho Dao Haan let out a sigh. Then Shan Jong Sun couldn't help
Speaker A
but say, "I can't see the rest yet, but they show a lot of respect for us clans.
Speaker A
But it's understandable. The Aiha are an emotional clan, and if they are your friends, you don't have to fear a knife in the back on the battlefield. I have a good impression of the Aiha, too." Cho Dao once shrugged. "Besides, the
Speaker A
position of Hokag is not so easy to touch. If you're not careful, you'll end up shattered to pieces. On the contrary, by showing up this time, we'll probably have to take full control of the clan from now on. Luigi and the other two
Speaker A
will probably have to stay behind the scenes. Akimichi Gamaru wore a look of deep regret because the Inosikacho alliance was anchored by the Nar clan status as the greatest strategic minds relations within the coalition were generally harmonious with few instances
Speaker A
of discord stemming from disputes over wealth. The internal reward and punishment systems were almost entirely devised by the Nar clan, ensuring the greatest possible degree of fairness.
Speaker A
And so this relatively relaxed internal environment meant that the Inosikacho clans rarely suffered from internal strife. Few harbored ambitions for power, knowing full well that ascending to leadership would only bring greater burdens. The Nar clan in particular was
Speaker A
exceptionally peculiar. In every generation's succession struggle, the victor earned the right to rest on their laurels while the loser was saddled with the responsibilities of clan head. And in this generation, it was Nar Rokichi who ultimately emerged victorious
Speaker A
thereby claiming the privilege of idleness. The defeated Narashikaku, by contrast, was left to trudge miserably to the Hokag's office every single day.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, due to the sudden rise of the Aiha clan, Rokichi, who had been enjoying his peaceful retirement, was forced to set aside his leisure and return to active duty once more. All right, enough grumbling. As for Shikaku
Speaker A
and the others, I honestly don't think they'll ever find themselves idol. I have a distinct feeling that Achiha Jin's schemes run far deeper than we realize. Otherwise, why would he resort to such a slow cooking approach, methodically seizing power from Kenoa's
Speaker A
leadership one step at a time? After all, regarding the battle a few nights ago, and Noi has already obtained the full truth. So many rogue ninja missing mean from various villages, 15 root squads, and an entire battalion of U.
Speaker A
All of them effortlessly annihilated by Achihajin's hand. If Danzo weren't still useful for the time being, Gene very likely would have killed him on the spot. So from this perspective, Aihajin's objective is quite clear. He doesn't want to see Kenoha lose too much
Speaker A
of its strength. If that weren't the case, wouldn't it have been simpler for him to simply kill Danzo a few days ago and then find an opportunity to dispose of Husen Saratobi as well? Now, do you still believe that Shikaku and the
Speaker A
others will have any time to rest? Once the Aiha fully sees power, even if Shikaku and his team don't earn their complete trust, they'll likely be even busier than we are. Nar Rokichi spoke in a languid tone. He was an even lazier
Speaker A
man than Narashikakuya, he was also sharper and slightly more powerful in combat. In fact, ever since Yamanaka Anochi had quietly slipped into the intelligence unit, located those who had fallen in battle that day, and used the Yamanaka clan secret arts to extract the
Speaker A
circumstances of the clash, the Inosikacho alliance had convened an internal council. Narroichi advocated complete submission to the Aiha, given that the Aiha's ascendancy was now unmistakable. The Shinobi world, after all, was one where power spoke the loudest. The Aiha's overwhelming might
Speaker A
had already been proven beyond all doubt. Especially Ajiha. His ordinary combat prowess alone was enough to terrify. And when he unleashed his Mangeko, it inspired [clears throat] a sense of sheer hopelessness. A veritable reincarnation of Madara Aiha. Though
Speaker A
every Shinobi clan harbored the desire to eliminate transcendent clans like the Sinju and the Achiha, the time for such an endeavor had long passed. The Aiha had clearly already moved beyond the point of vulnerability. Thus, for the sake of survival, it was wise to align
Speaker A
with the strong. But unfortunately, Narashikaku was the current clan head, and he was far too cautious seeking perfection in every decision. So, never mind. Rokichi had little interest in pressing the matter further. He would simply defer to the clan heads judgment.
Speaker A
After all, the worst that could happen to the Inosikacho in the future was being trusted a little too much. The rest of the impact would be minimal so long as they weren't subjected to any Aiha reckoning. Still, he unconsciously
Speaker A
glanced at the corner of the training ground where the Abureim clan sat in near total obscurity. A faint sigh escaped his heart because he understood that once the Aiha assumed power, the Abby clan would inevitably rise to prominence. Unlike the Inosikacho, the
Speaker A
Abby had no ability to hedge their bets. But their clan's secret techniques were extraordinarily powerful. Defense, defense, and sensory abilities all covered, leaving virtually no weaknesses. As long as Aiha wasn't foolish, he would certainly place great value on the Abby. Is that so? That's
Speaker A
good to hear. Akimichi Gamaru laughed and said, "As long as they aren't idle, I'll be perfectly content." Yamanaka Hayyato's mouth twitched involuntarily.
Speaker A
He didn't know what to say about his companion, but then thinking about how the three of them would once again fight side by side. He had to admit that a faint heat stirred within his blood.
Speaker A
Yes, though the most famous Inosikacho trio was Shikaku and Noi and Chosa. In truth, they Gamaru Hayyato and Rokichi were the true foundation of the alliance, the strongest three-man squad of their generation. It was simply that with Shikaku and his team serving as the
Speaker A
public face, there was no need for them to reveal themselves. Time slowly drifted by. By 9, nearly everyone who was expected to arrive had come, and even Kakashi and Mgy were seated in a corner of the training ground. The Aiha
Speaker A
had also arrived, but they no longer conducted themselves with excessive arrogance. After all, everyone present had come to pledge their allegiance. So, their expressions, while proud, were also remarkably cordial toward the assembled crowd. They occupied the far left with the elders seated at the
Speaker A
front. Just at that moment, Aihajin arrived. He walked straight to the seat of honor at the very front while Aihasuki knelt silently at his left rear. Gazing at the dense congregation of Shinobi clans before him, Aiha felt a
Speaker A
surge of heroic ambition swell within his chest. Indeed, though his official rank was merely that of a Chunin, he was in truth the leader of a rising power.
Speaker A
With the force assembled before him on this training ground from this day forward, he could stand toe-to-toe with Hirus and Saratobi. He now had the right to stake a claim in defining the will of fire. Abraim Shibi Kakashi might guy.
Speaker A
The three of you, why are you hiding in the back? Come sit up front. Someone bring out three more seats. Aiha Jyns eyes gleamed. He pointed directly to the core positions at the very front, ordering the Aiha to arrange
Speaker A
three additional seats. Though the Aiha did not fully understand Jyn's reasoning, they immediately carried out his command. His prestige within the clan had already reached its absolute zenith. In the next moment, Abureame Shibi and the other two found themselves
Speaker A
deeply embarrassed. Yet they nonetheless made their way to the front and settled onto the freshly prepared cushions. A low table was placed between the three of them upon which sat a pot of tea and three cups. The eyes of everyone present
Speaker A
flickered with unspoken understanding because they all knew full well that this was no mere table and cushions. It was a declaration of these three individuals standing within the Aiha's new order. The first rank beneath the Aiha themselves. At that very instant,
Speaker A
Aiha Jyn's expression grew solemn. Everyone, I'm not one for excessive pretense, so let's get straight to the point. First, the Abureim clan. I pledge to provide you with all necessary support, including but not limited to funding stable enterprises and other
Speaker A
resources. My core objective is to help you expand your clan to 3,000 members within 5 years. A sharp gasp of cold air escaped from all the ninja clans present as Achihajene began to speak. It was well known that the Yan clan, even
Speaker A
counting their civilian members, numbered no more than 500 with only just over a 100 ninja and among them merely 12 Jonan. This was the scale the Y clan had barely managed to preserve after being constantly meddled with by
Speaker A
Tuanzang. But now, Aiha Jeene was offering to support them and help the Young Clan expand to 3,000 members within 5 years. How many ninja could such a scale produce? And how many resources would it require to support?
Speaker A
Honestly, everyone was stunned by the sheer scale of Aiha Jyn's generosity. Yan Jouer trembled all over Junku in this. Don't get excited, Achiha Jin said slowly. There are conditions. From now on, the young clan must intermar with the Aiha. I believe there are no eternal
Speaker A
enemies or friends in this world, but binding clans together through mutual interests leads to greater longevity.
Speaker A
Yanji didn't hesitate and immediately nodded. I have no objections. I agree. Of course, since the young clan joined Kenoha, they had never been able to develop. This opportunity was once in a lifetime. Only a fool would let it slip.
Speaker A
Marrying into the Aiha was even less of a problem. After all the methods Aihajene had displayed were enough to see his future governing policies, his courage and his strength. None of which could compare to Saratobi Herusen. The other ninja clans were redeyed with
Speaker A
envy. Obviously, they too were aed by Aiha. They had thought today's meeting would be about how to deal with the Kenoha high-ups, but unexpectedly Aiha didn't even mention that and instead came straight to offering benefits. This everyone's gazes toward the Yan clan
Speaker A
were now filled with envy, jealousy, and hatred. However, before they could recover Aiha Gene continued speaking, "Kakashi, my guy, each of you must marry at least five wives, and one of them must be from the Aiha clan. Especially
Speaker A
you, Kakashi. Your father is counting on you to revive the Hitaki clan. At your age, you don't even have a girlfriend.
Speaker A
Are you worthy of your father's spirit in heaven? Even if you don't practice the Hitaki blade technique yourself, you must ensure you pass it on to your son." The White Fang of Kohaa is a legend of our village. E. I don't want this
Speaker A
technique to be completely lost to dust. My guy, you too. Your father only had you as a son. The eight gates release, let alone all eight gates. Just opening the seventh gate could kick Saratobi Harusen to death. This is your father's
Speaker A
lifelong masterpiece. Ordinary people's physiques can hardly cultivate the eight gates. So, if you want to pass it down, you'll have to have more children yourself. Of course, the same goes for you. Among your five wives, one must be
Speaker A
from the Aiha clan. And you don't need to worry about money or such things.
Speaker A
From now on, you will be our core battle force, and you will both receive top tier support in all aspects.
Speaker A
Aihajins tone was serious. Whether Kakashi or Mikey both were the core combat power of Kinoa, and he certainly wouldn't let them go, and the best way to bind them in the end was through blood. Once they bore children with
Speaker A
Achiha blood, then regardless of their willingness, they would forever stand by the Aiha. So Aiha, who knew well that these two cared little about power, directly pressured them in the name of their fathers. In fact, it was very
Speaker A
effective. Although Kakashi initially wanted to retort upon hearing words like Hataki Sukumo, Hataki blade technique and inheritance, he finally let out a sigh with a bitter face, but ultimately reluctantly accepted. As for my guy, he didn't think about those aspects at all.
Speaker A
Hearing about inheriting his father's eight gates, he recalled the scene of his father's death and then couldn't help but burst into tears. Finally, he jumped up and said, "Jink Cohen, don't worry. I always remember my father's words. I will pass down the eight
Speaker A
gates." However, on the other side, the people present were all bewildered, even a little shocked. The eight gates formation. Of course, they had heard of it. After all, the incident where Mike might die once kicked to death four of
Speaker A
the seven ninja swordsmen and made the other three run away was not a secret in Kenoha. But Mike Guy opening the seventh gate could kick Saratobi Haruzen to death. That terrifying. They didn't think Achihajene would joke on such an
Speaker A
occasion. So, when they looked at Guy's bull cut head again, their eyes became serious. Next, after dealing with the two Aiha gene, turned his gaze to the other ninja clans present. The core message was just one sentence. Any clan
Speaker A
that chose to join the Aiha would be promised benefits by Aiha. Once he took power, all these clans present would benefit. Yes, he was not Sinju Tobarama, nor was he Saratobi Herzen. Because he understood the underlying rules of this
Speaker A
world, he knew the importance of bloodline inheritance. So, after taking power, he could give civilian ninja higher status, provide some support in ninjutsu and tools. But he would not suppress the clans. Instead, he would develop them even more vigorously. No
Speaker A
choice. The situation was different. In another world, he might have supported the civilians, but in this damn world of shinobi mere training had little effect.
Speaker A
In reality, the underlying logic of determining a strong person was still based on the concentration of Atsitsuki bloodline. Suppress the clans. That was suicide. On the other hand, the clans present were not fools. Even though Achihajene had not said it directly,
Speaker A
they sensed it vaguely. At this moment, everyone was trembling. Obviously, no one had expected that Aihajene would not suppress the clans. This was good news for them. After all, from Sinjarama to Saratobi Herisen, two Hokagages had actually been suppressing the clans.
Speaker A
Although Manado Name's reign was short, he too represented the civilian ninja. Now, finally, they had found an Aiha who did not bear hostility toward the clans.
Speaker A
No more words. Kill Saratobi Husen. Why endure any longer? Make Saratobi Husen step down. Jingu and make your move.
Speaker A
Everyone present spoke up one after another. At this moment, they were truly mad, only wanting Aiha Jin to become Hokag as soon as possible. Even the always calm Eno Shikacho were to be honest, a bit excited, wanting to
Speaker A
immediately bring the other half of their clan members. Damn it, what the hell are we waiting for? The most important thing is to pull Saratobi Husen down early and let Achiha take over. The only one who remained calm was
Speaker A
Nyong Lui. However, he did not speak at that moment. Instead, choosing to observe Achihajin, the leader, to see what his thoughts were. Achihajin did not disappoint him. After raising his hand to calm everyone down, he spoke in a very composed tone. My friends, do not
Speaker A
panic. It is not yet time for an official war, as there are still many high-ranking forces in the village. I wish to take over a relatively intact Canoa. After all, due to Saratobi Herus's mismanagement over the years, Sinju Nawaki, Ko, Dan Hitaki, Sukcomo,
Speaker A
Manado, Namices, all these powerful figures are gone. Sununade has also left the village. Jeriah rarely returns unless it's a major event. And even Orochimaru was driven away. Speaking of this, I can only laugh. Orochimaru, a man of civilian origin. Where could he
Speaker A
possibly obtain all those expensive equipment and instruments? Where did he get Hasharama cells and experimental materials? Could he go out every day to capture test subjects? Moreover, the equipment required for research is too large to be stored in scrolls. Were all
Speaker A
the A&BU blind all these years? Now that the incident has come to light and can no longer be hidden, they let Orochimaru, a mere scapegoat, take the blame. No wonder the Sanin became estranged from Saratobi Herusen.
Speaker A
However, these matters are not directly related to us. In short, I hope everyone remains calm for now, as the village's strength must not be consumed in internal strife. After all the peace agreement between Kohaa and Kimovicure has yet to be signed. The other ninja
Speaker A
villages are eyeing Kenoha covetously. Our precious strength cannot be wasted on useless civil war. Moreover, my friends, there is no need to worry. With the help of Elder Danzo, we will eventually drive the others into our camp. So, for now, let us raise our
Speaker A
teacups and a toast to Elder Danzo. After speaking, Aiha Jeene raised his teacup and the others followed suit.
Speaker A
However, the eyes of those present were filled with complex emotions. Good heavens, Danzo. That mad man had actually become one of their own. But then again, it made sense. Now with countless ninja clans joining the Aiiah, the higher-ups in the village were
Speaker A
losing combat power. The root division in particular had been shattered by Aiha gene. To restore combat strength quickly, they could only resort to internal oppression. Such behavior from root only further alienated the vill's internal factions. From this perspective, there was no rush. They
Speaker A
could adopt a wait and see approach, letting the vill's higher-ups collapse on their own. Shortly after the meeting concluded perfectly, the various ninja clans rose to leave, leaving only the clan leaders behind. Aihaji invited everyone to the meeting room and began
Speaker A
discussing the reorganization of clan territories and the redistribution of squads among the newly joined clans.
Speaker A
After all, to truly integrate the newly joined ninja clans into the Aiha and maximize their combat effectiveness, this step was absolutely necessary.
Speaker A
Suddenly at that moment an aiha entered elder gina groupa from the enoshiko clans has come to pledge allegiance. A total of 15 jonin and 36 elite chunin.
Speaker A
Having already learned from other clans about danzo's ruthless methods immediately understood that danzo had conscripted these enoshiko members and now they were directly defecting to the aiah. This must be naraka's doing. After a moment of thought he said directly
Speaker A
first send them to our enoshiko clan territories. After the meeting, Ensil let the clan leaders handle the rest.
Speaker A
How does that sound? He then looked toward Nyong Lui. Nyong Lui and the other two exchanged glances and naturally had no objections. The meeting continued. They talked until noon and after settling everything, Aiha treated everyone to a meal before allowing them
Speaker A
to leave his courtyard. At 1:00 in the afternoon, Aiha sat in the tea room holding a teacup enjoying the shoulder massage from Aiha and could not help but sigh. This kind of trivial matter is truly exhausting, but the overall
Speaker A
situation is not bad. I'm curious to see how the village higher-ups will respond next. Wait and see. Let's watch quietly.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene murmured to himself. Suddenly, he recalled seeing Shere Su and Itachi among the crowd earlier. Yes, the two had come today as well. What surprised him, however, was that neither of them spoke a word. They simply watched in silence. This surprised
Speaker A
Ajiha, but he could roughly guess the reason. The influx of so many clans had shaken their convictions. They had been educated in the orthodox will of fire.
Speaker A
So they knew that the hokag was the one supported by the people. Now without that support could they still trust Saratobi Herusen as they once did. On the other side Aihayui upon hearing these words did not interrupt. She
Speaker A
quietly continued to serve Aiha. She knew her position clearly. She was Aiha Jins mate. Apart from carrying out his orders, she never interfered in other matters. But the way she looked at Achihajene grew increasingly passionate.
Speaker A
It was inevitable. The Achiha inherently admired strength and Aiha gene was the strongest in the clan both in power and intellect. At the Fagaku residence, Aiha Fagaku was busy with his own tasks. His previous actions against Sheree and
Speaker A
Itachi had regained Aiha Jajin's trust, so he now had his own work to do. Of course, although he still held the title of clan leader, his role was more akin to an Aihai elder. In the living room, Shers Sway and Itachi sat facing each
Speaker A
other, their expressions complex. The stance taken by the various ninja clans today had thoroughly shaken them. If it were merely the radical faction within the Aiha clan acting so wildly, they would have attributed it to internal clan issues. But now with so many clans
Speaker A
united and wanting to eliminate Saratobi Herusen, they couldn't help but wonder had the Hokag truly committed something so heinous. So was he a villain? The atmosphere in the living room grew heavy. After a long silence, Shersu finally spoke. Itachi, what do you
Speaker A
think? I don't know, Itachi said his head aching. They have been taught all along that the Hokag was infallible chosen by the trust and recognition of everyone. But whether from the casual conversation with the Kimichi Kada last time or the words of the clans today,
Speaker A
they felt as if their faith was crumbling. Finally, they exchanged glances and let out a sigh. Sure smiled bitterly before speaking calmly.
Speaker A
Let's continue observing. For now, we'll remain neutral. But if the Hokag know if Saratobi Herusen is truly evil and deliberately wants to destroy the ichiha. Itachi's voice deepened.
Speaker A
Shiroui, what would you do? Shers did not hesitate. Kill him. Yes, unlike Itachi, Shersui had always cared for his clan, though he had simply been deceived by the village in the past. So now, if Saratobi Herusen was truly at fault, he
Speaker A
would be willing to take action himself. Itachi fell into silence, thinking for a long time before finally nodding slowly.
Speaker A
"All right, I understand. When the time comes, I will strike as well." Meanwhile, on the other side, today, Danzo felt invigorated. After rising from bed, he set out to visit the various ninja clans preparing to take over his future subordinates. His mind
Speaker A
began to fantasize. Once he took over these personnel, he would immediately plant the tongue severing seal. Then with the reborn route, he would find a way to deal with the Aiha. The first clan he visited was of course the most
Speaker A
important Inoshiko. Shikaku and Noi Chosa. Long time no see. Where are the people I requested? The Inoshiko were quite cooperative. Gazing at the arrogant Danzo before him, Narashikaku immediately waved his hand and a group of people stepped forward. Danzo looked
Speaker A
at the group before him, a faint smile appearing on his face. Very well, farewell. Having said that, he led the group away from the Enoshiko compound in response to this. Watching Danzo and his men slowly depart, Yamanaka and Noi's
Speaker A
expression turned grim. Danzo is truly a fool. Has he still not realized that more than half of the ninja clans have already pledged their entire allegiance to the Aiha side? I find this quite normal. Akimichi Chosa slowly spoke. The
Speaker A
village's upper echelons have become too arrogant over the years. Whether it was the annihilation of the Synu and Usuzamaki clans in the past or the deaths of Nwaki Dan Ko and Sukumo Hitaki, their countless successes led them to overestimate their own
Speaker A
abilities. They long forgot that without the united push of the major ninja clans back then, they alone could never have accomplished such things. Now they probably believe they have full control over the major clans and only the Aiha
Speaker A
as a thorny issue deserves their attention, the Kohaa high-erups. Narikaku remained silent. At that moment, his brows furrowed slightly as his mind began to race wildly. To be honest, he also felt that the current Kenoha leadership was increasingly
Speaker A
unworthy of his allegiance, as if their downfall was already predetermined. So, should he go over to the Aiah? No, absolutely not. He suddenly thought of Minato Namikes from the past. Back then, his influence was even greater than the
Speaker A
Achihas. But in the end, the Ninetailes knight suddenly occurred and that gentle, sunny young man perished, didn't he? Better to play it safe. Who knew if the Achiha would face a similar upheaval next? Both of you say no more. It's
Speaker A
understandable that the village hasn't noticed. After all, Haruen Saratobi doesn't know Danzo dared to alter his authorization orders. Under normal circumstances, taking just seven people from each clan might cause the clan some headaches, but they could barely tolerate it. Danzo is too arrogant. He
Speaker A
dared to add a 10 before the number seven. It's normal that Hiu and Saratobi wouldn't anticipate it. And with Danzo's arrogance, he doesn't think the clans would dare to resist. Even if they saw through his little trick, they would
Speaker A
probably continue to endure it. But unfortunately, Danzo misjudged. Times have changed. In the past, the clans had no choice. Now, with the rise of the Aiha, the clans have options. Why would they continue to suffer? Narikaku let out a soft sigh. His tone remained calm
Speaker A
as if nothing could disturb his composure. Hearing this, Yamanaka Enochi and Akimichi Chosa shook their heads too lazy to dwell on such troublesome matters. Enochi asked Shikaku, "Are you going to work today? Maybe you should take the day off." Akimichi Chos
Speaker A
suggested today. The Hokag's office is bound to be in turmoil. Herus and Saratobi will probably go crazy. But unfortunately, Narikaku shook his head.
Speaker A
His gaze was deep and then he gave a cold laugh. Precisely in times like this, I cannot afford to be absent.
Speaker A
Since we have chosen to stay, we must show our loyalty. Moreover, I need to keep track of the next moves of the Konoha higher-ups. As for what our half of the Inoshika show will do in the future, I will know after I return from
Speaker A
the Hokag's office. You two go back and rest. With that, Narashikaku left the clan compound directly and headed toward the Hokag's office. In response, Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chos's expressions turn serious. I think we need to prepare as well. The Canoa
Speaker A
high-ups are not fools. They will surely figure out the Inoshikos arrangement. To prevent them from acting rashly in desperation, we must ready ourselves for the worst. Yamanaka Enochi's tone was grave. Hearing this, Akimichi Chosa became very cautious. I will go and
Speaker A
consult the ancestor. This matter may require his presence. Mm. Very well. Yamanaka Andoi had no objection. Then the two having made their decision began to act separately. Meanwhile, on the other side, Danzo, feeling invigorated, led the group of Enocho experts away
Speaker A
from the Nar compound, intending to head toward the Abureame Clan compound. However, just as they passed by the Aiiah compound, all the Inoshiko members suddenly dashed madly toward the Aiha.
Speaker A
Danzo was dumbfounded. His mind went blank. He stood frozen in place, even forgetting to give chase. It was impossible. He truly had not anticipated such a scene. His mind was filled with a single thought. Were these Enoch members
Speaker A
insane? 10 seconds later, just as he was about to attempt pursuit, he saw that the group had already reached the Aiha compound, and a large number of Aiha had surrounded them. Damn it, bastards. This must be Narikaka's scheme. I'll settle
Speaker A
accounts with him later. Let's go to the Abby clan first. Danzo's face turned cold as he spoke viciously. Yes, steeped in the essence of the way of survival, he alone and unarmed, had no interest in confronting the Aiha
Speaker A
head-on. Even if he wanted to pick a quarrel with the Aiha, he would need to gather some experts first. So he retreated. He even used the body flicker technique to quickly arrive at the Abraham clan compound. Then he was
Speaker A
stunned. Staring at the empty ghostly Abure compound, Danzo's mind struggled to comprehend. Where were the people? A very ominous feeling crept over him.
Speaker A
Anxiously, he rushed to the Inazuka clan. It was empty, too. Danzo's face grew increasingly grim. He then ran to other ninja clans, but damn it, empty.
Speaker A
Still empty. Every clan he had visited yesterday now had its compound completely deserted. Why? Danzo felt his mind about to explode just as he was about to head to the next clan and A&Bu intercepted him on the road. Lord Danzo,
Speaker A
the Hokag request your immediate presence in the Hokag's office. Danzo's face darkened a chill creeping up his spine. Indeed, he was no fool, though initially bewildered realization had now dawned upon him.
Speaker A
These clans must have defected to the obviously the entire village was under the vigilant watch of the barrier team.
Speaker A
Had such a massive exodus occurred, how could they have remained completely unaware? And in the current Kinoa, there was only one place they could have gone, the Aiha. His expression soured further at the thought. The Aiha were already a
Speaker A
handful. With the addition of these clans, just how arrogant would they become? And more importantly, how was he supposed to explain this to Harusen? If he learned that his actions had driven the major clans into the Achihas arms,
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen would probably tear him apart. What to do? Danzos mind raced furiously. After a moment's thought, he slowly spoke. Inform Harusen that I won't be attending. Rude has received intelligence that something has occurred in the other villages. I need
Speaker A
to leave immediately to handle it. Yes, that's it. At this moment, Danzos face was full of semnity, as if some major incident had truly occurred elsewhere, requiring his immediate presence. The Yu member was stunned.
Speaker A
Damn it, how am I supposed to report this? Cold sweat beated on his forehead.
Speaker A
Danzo sama, but the Hokag ordered. Enough. Shut up. Danzo cut him off. his tone severe. If this truly delays matters of great importance to the village, can you bear the responsibility? Just report that to her.
Speaker A
You needn't worry about the rest. With that said, without a moment's hesitation, Danzo vanished using the body flicker technique. Indeed, he was no fool. With all the major clans defecting to the Aiha, if he went to Saratobi Harusen, now the enraged Hokag
Speaker A
might very well summon the monkey king and smack him out of the village with his staff. So, time to flee. Flee. After all, he wasn't the Hokag. It was Saratobi Haruen who should be worried.
Speaker A
As Hokag, his concern was far greater. If this matter couldn't be resolved, he wouldn't be able to keep his seat as Hokag. So, let Husen handle it first.
Speaker A
That would be the perfect time for him Danzo to return to Kenoha and make his grand move. The U member, his mouth twitched. Watching Danzos departing figure, he yearned to stop him. But the man's status was too high. He simply
Speaker A
didn't dare. No way around it. He was after all the Hokag's comrade. No matter his errors at worst, he'd be scolded and then everything would return to normal.
Speaker A
But what about himself? If Danzo held a grudge, he could start picking out his own grave right now. What to do? The U member was utterly dumbfounded. But alas, he finally let out a helpless sigh and trudged back to the Hokage's office.
Speaker A
Seeing Saratobi Harusen seated behind the desk, his face dark as Inc. his aura as cold as a prison, and the two elders standing beside him, the Ubu member couldn't help but shudder slightly.
Speaker A
Nevertheless, he knelt respectfully on one knee and spoke in a steady tone. Reporting to the Hokag Sama, Danzo Sama of Root received an encoded message indicating some suspicious movements in the other villages. He had to leave immediately to deal with it. He said he
Speaker A
would return once it was handled. After speaking, the kneeling U member couldn't help but sweat. Then immediately before Husen could even speak, Hamurokado let out a shriek. What? Danzo fled. That damn man. He causes such a huge mess.
Speaker A
And then you tell me he just ran off. Why didn't you stop him? Koharus face was twisted with fury as she pointed and cursed at the Umu. Even Hamiro was seething with anger. Indeed, by now they knew exactly what had
Speaker A
happened, which was why they had urgently summoned Danzo. But damn it all. That damn Danzo just brushed off his hands and ran. Enough. This is not the time for blame. We must find a solution and quickly. You may leave now.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen slammed the table, shattering his 17th pipe, a testament to his immense rage. However, he still waved the U member away, dismissing him.
Speaker A
He was well aware that if Danzo wished to leave the U, neither dared nor had the ability to stop him. With the clans defecting and his forces stretched thin, this was no time to vent his fury and further dishearten his remaining
Speaker A
subordinates. The U member felt as if he had been granted a pardon. Without a second word, he hurried out of the Hokag's office's back, completely soaked with cold sweat. There was no helping it. When he'd arrived at work today,
Speaker A
he'd found that nearly half his colleagues in the UBU hadn't shown up, leaving only letters of resignation on their desks. This was a huge problem.
Speaker A
The remaining Ubu members immediately reported it, and the Hokag Saratobi Herusen flew into a rage, ordering an immediate targeted investigation. The clans hadn't bothered to hide their movements, so it was quickly uncovered.
Speaker A
Furious Herusen had dispatched him the unlucky bastard to find Danzo. But damn it, who would have thought that bastard Danzo could be so shameless? The moment he sensed trouble, instead of trying to solve it, he just ran away.
Speaker A
he screwed me over. As for why this only came to light today, this U member was quite clear on that.
Speaker A
Although the U was filled with civilian ninja, the true core strength came from clan members. That was the fundamental reason the massive relocation of the clans last night had gone completely undetected by the village's top brass.
Speaker A
The Yamboo, the barrier team, the intelligence division, the interrogation unit, all were staffed heavily with clan members. Now that these clans were fleeing, the members in these departments naturally helped to cover it up. Only after their own clan compounds
Speaker A
were emptied with these last members finally make their escape. The atmosphere in the Hokag's office was stifling. Saratobi Herusen and the other two had grim expressions unable to devise a solution. The incident was too sudden, leaving them completely
Speaker A
unprepared, helpless. Who could have foreseen Danzo's ruthlessness? His authorization had been for seven members per clan, but the man had secretly increased it to 17 and even demanded five Jonan from each. Good grief, that was a death sentence for those clans,
Speaker A
especially the Abraim clan. It was utterly inhumane to have their leader Shibby Abraim heading the entire clan to join Routt. Damn, that was vicious. Upon receiving this news, Saratobi Herusen nearly spat out a mouthful of blood. It was at that moment that Jeriah leaped in
Speaker A
through the window. Old man, what's the urgency? What have the Achiha done now? Jeriah felt a headache coming on his eyes filled with displeasure. Yes, he was no longer the man who had just returned. Being a master of
Speaker A
intelligence, he had already investigated the matter thoroughly in the past few days. In his view, this whole affair was entirely the doing of those three old men. The night of the Ninetales Manato's death. His heart achd more than anyone's. Yet, he also
Speaker A
understood that this was most likely not the work of the Acha. Had they been responsible, they could have openly rebelled then rather than being cornered in their clan grounds by Danzo alone and obediently surrendering their territory afterward. They were uprooted from the
Speaker A
bustling heart of Kenoha and relocated to the vill's periphery. As if that weren't enough, the U and Root kept them under surveillance, and Aiah members were vanishing one by one every day.
Speaker A
Enemy village spies. Nonsense. If other villages truly possess such capability, Kinoa would be on the brink of annihilation. The village's hostility towards the Aiha in Jeriah's view had gone too far. Even regarding the Ninetailes night incident, combined with
Speaker A
the vill's rumors, he had begun to suspect these three old men before him. The reason was simple. That night, the only one who truly engaged the enemy was Manado Namicase. Even his teacher before him hadn't actually fought merely using
Speaker A
the adamant staff to poke at the Ninetailes. If all of Kinoa's Jonah had joined the battle, even if the enemy wielded spaceime, Ninjatsuminado could have held them in check. Had the village acted, the outcome wouldn't have been Minado's tragic death. Of course, even
Speaker A
though he had already found his answer, he buried it deep within his heart. He feared that voicing it would shatter the master student bond between him and Herusen Saratobi. More importantly, Manado was already dead. Even if Herusen had been behind it, could he really
Speaker A
bring himself to kill his own teacher, so he let it go? Better to remain oblivious, especially given the village's currently complex situation, he had no desire to see further chaos.
Speaker A
Despite his grievances against Herusen, he still came when summoned. At most, he was just a bit short with Herusen.
Speaker A
Jeriah only wished to resolve this mess quickly and then leave this suffocating village. Even if he never found the Toad Sage's prophesied savior out there, at least he wouldn't have to be entangled in these village troubles. Jeriah, what
Speaker A
is your attitude? We are village elders. Show some respect. Kohari Yudain and Hamira began pulling rank as elders before Jeriah. In response, Jeriah yawn dug a finger in his ear and simply ignored them. What nonsense. Though he was loathed to get involved in village
Speaker A
affairs, that didn't mean he would tolerate these two old fossils. If not for the sake of the village's stability, he'd have already fled. As one of the legendary Sanin, he had his own privileges in the village. Herusen look
Speaker A
see how your fine student treats us. Rehiman Kohharu and Hamira seeing themselves ignored immediately resorted to tattling. And to that Hirusen Saratobi let out a sigh. These two companions of his were utterly useless, incapable of handling even the smallest
Speaker A
matter and only creating more trouble for him. Enough all of you be quiet. With things this serious, you're still bickering. Let's focus on the matter at hand. Arusen slammed his hand on the table. Then, paying no attention to his
Speaker A
two colleagues, he briefly explained the situation and asked for Jeriah's opinion. Though Kohharu and Hamira were deeply dissatisfied, they could only suppress their feelings for now.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, Jeriah, who had been calm, exploded upon hearing the news. What the hell? Every ninja clan of any standing in the village has defected to the uchiha. Jeriah scalp crawled. Learning of Danzos actions, he nearly spat out a mouthful
Speaker A
of blood. Good grief. Absolutely astonishing. Even if Root suffered heavy losses, you can't sabotage others like this. Jeriah slammed his hand on the table at the thought. Where's that old Danzo? Why wasn't he summoned? Sensei, kill him. As long as that old wretch
Speaker A
Danzo lies, Kóa will never know peace. That root of all evil must be eliminated. Jeriah's fury erupted. His eyes blazed with murderous intent. His white hair whipping wildly in the air.
Speaker A
Clearly, he was fed up with that fool Danzo and had long wanted to kill him, but had always been held back by Herus and forced to watch Danzo play Kinoa.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, faced with Jera's chilling blood lust, Koharu and Hamira fell silent. They had no choice. For old-timers like them, who hadn't seen battle since the end of the last great war provoking this madman in his current frenzied state was unthinkable. Husen
Speaker A
Saratobi's heart trembled. He cursed Danzo for the trouble this incident had caused. However, seeing the murderous look in Jerus's eyes, his own resolve wavered. Really kill Danzo. He shook his head internally. Of course not. This was hardly the right moment to discuss such
Speaker A
a thing. So, he cleared his throat and offered words of appeasement. Well with Danzo later. For now, let's focus on solving the immediate problem.
Speaker A
Jeriah, we're counting on you. We old men are unfit to go out. You, with your status and position, are the perfect envoy to the Aiha. Talk to those clans.
Speaker A
Tell them Danzo's actions had nothing to do with me, the Hokag. Ask them to stop this foolishness and return to their clan grounds. I disavow all of Danzos actions. As long as they don't want to join Route, I, as Hokag,
Speaker A
will not force them. Herusen's tone was heavy. Yes, he was genuinely frightened and was preparing to back down. If these clans would simply return to their grounds, he promised not to provoke them in the future. Instead, he would tacitly
Speaker A
allow them to remain neutral. They would no longer be required to participate in matters concerning the Aiah. He had no choice. The thought of all major clans defecting to the Aiha made him uneasy. A Hokage's decree, forcibly inducting them
Speaker A
into root. He had long since abandoned such ideas. Even if the Huga clan hadn't yet made their choice, and even if all the commoners still supported him, and even if he had the Saratobi and three other clans behind him, facing a
Speaker A
coalition of the Aiha and all the other clans, honestly speaking, he was still terrified. And to that hearing her intentions, Jeriah's face filled with bitterness. persuade those clans to return. Even he naive as he could be knew the difficulty of that. However,
Speaker A
for the sake of the village's stability, he let out a sigh and reluctantly agreed. Fine, I understand. I'll make a trip to the Aiha compound now. But whether I can actually convince them, old man, I really can't say. You need to
Speaker A
be prepared for the worst. Bam. As he left, Jeriah slammed the door shut with all his might, venting the fury that burned within him. But alas, he was merely the second generation Danzo, not the man himself. The moment Jeriah
Speaker A
departed Kohatain slammed her hand on the table in a fit of rage. Heroin look at your precious disciple. He shows us absolutely no respect. Does he harbor some grudge against us? He must be punished. We must teach him what it
Speaker A
means to show reverence. Cohoritane was consumed by fury. Being so blatantly disregarded by a younger generation shinobi, especially as an elder of the village left her deeply resentful. Even Hamurokado's expression darkened. Hirus and something must indeed be done about
Speaker A
him. He shows not even the slightest respect for his seniors. It's hard to imagine how arrogant Jeriah will become if left unchecked. We must establish some rules for these youngsters immediately or else who will take us old-timers seriously in the future.
Speaker A
Herus and Saratobi's brows furrowed deeply. He knew exactly what was running through the minds of his two old companions. To put it plainly, they were getting old and no one in their own clans had the metal to take the reigns.
Speaker A
Even in the best case scenario, the village would eventually be steered by Jeriah andSunady. And given Jeriah's current behavior, who knew how he would treat them once he actually took power.
Speaker A
So whether for the sake of their descendants or the fear of losing their own authority to the new generation, they both longed to impose some discipline on Jeriah. However, the problem was this. With the meteoric rise of Achihajene, the vill's situation had
Speaker A
spiraled completely out of control. Even Danzo had fled outright. Facing such a complex situation, even he himself was at a loss and could only rely on Jeriah to try and impose rules at a time like this. Huh? Are you asking for death? So
Speaker A
with a sigh, letting out a helpless breath, Herusen Sorobi finally spoke. You two need to calm down. If you have the ability to solve our problems, then I'd gladly hand over the title of Hokag to either of you. But if you don't have
Speaker A
that capability, then stop causing trouble for me. If you truly drive Jeriah away, can you handle the etchiha?
Speaker A
If you can't, then keep your mouth shut. His tone was icy cold. In ordinary times past, he might have been more lenient with these two. After all, he needed their support to secure his position as Hokag. But now, the Achihas relentless
Speaker A
pressure, the unresolved police force issue, and the recent betrayals from various major clans were draining the very life from him. At this critical juncture, he truly had no patience for their petty squables. Either come up with a viable solution or shut the hell
Speaker A
up immediately. If you can't help at all and end up driving Jeriah away, I'll summon Emma and have him knock you both right out of Kinoa. Yes, just as he had done with the Ninetales back then, Kohari Utudetain Hamro Mito sensing the
Speaker A
full brunt of Herusen's wrath, they were instantly deflated. Indeed, they wished to preserve their power, yet they lacked the means to do so. On one hand, they needed Jeriah to handle matters. On the other, they expected him to obey their
Speaker A
every command. So in the end, facing Huen Saratob's fury, they chose discretion over valor and reluctantly left the Hokag's office. Husen Saratobi's eyes were sharp. Only after his two old friends had gone did, he let out a deep weary sigh. His entire being
Speaker A
steeped in an air of despondency. He was old. The ambition of his youth was long gone.
Speaker A
Surrounded by useless allies, grieving his eldest son, who fell in battle, and his second son, who was incorraably useless. He truly yearned to step down as Hokag, but he couldn't. His prestige was already severely diminished. If he abdicated now, Ajiha would undoubtedly
Speaker A
take his place. So, he had no choice but to endure. He had to hold the banner of Kinoa High until someone truly worthy of the title emerged. Meanwhile, on the other side, unaware of Harusen's thoughts, Jerio wasted no time in
Speaker A
heading to the Aiha district. After passing a series of rigorous security checks and obtaining Aiha Jin's permission, he was finally allowed to set foot on the Achiha clan grounds once more. Indeed, due to the mass relocation of the major clans, tensions between the
Speaker A
Aiha and the village had escalated. A powerful figure aligned with the village like Jeriah would not simply be allowed open access to the Aiha territory. After all, the families of all the Aiha and allied clans dwelled there. If Jeriah
Speaker A
were to lose his mind, the potential for carnage would be unimaginable. However, Aihajin granted permission anyway. He knew Jeriah's purpose for coming, yet was confident in his ability to control the situation. So, he merely assigned an elite squad to accompany Jeriah along
Speaker A
with three Jonan teams for covert surveillance. Having done that, he paid no further attention to the Sanin.
Speaker A
Seriously, this is infuriating. I'm a shinobi of this village returning home, and I'm being put under surveillance.
Speaker A
Jeriah was visibly annoyed, crossing his arms and muttering under his breath. But alas, the Achiha squad tailing him remained cold and stern, showing no intention of offering any explanation for his complaints. On the contrary, they remained on high alert, poised to
Speaker A
activate their Sharinggon at any moment. Seeing this, Jeriah felt defeated. He asked a few questions, then made his way to the temporary residence of the Abraim clan. He was received by Shibi Abby.
Speaker A
Once they were seated in the tea room, Shibi began to quietly prepare tea. However, he was a man of very few words.
Speaker A
Apart from a quick Jera Sama upon arrival, he showed no further inclination to speak. Jeriah left with no choice and initiated the conversation. Shibi, go back. No. Shibi Abraim shook his head. Jeriah continued, "The orders you received were
Speaker A
Danzo's unauthorized commands. The old man never intended such things. He has since rescended them, and Root will never force the Abraham clan to give up their members again. Return to your normal life and don't get involved in these troublesome affairs. The stability
Speaker A
of the village is paramount." Jeriah was extremely serious. Though he didn't say it outright, his meaning was clear.
Speaker A
While he disapproved of the village elders methods, he too now considered the Aiha to be a destabilizing factor.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, Shibi Abirams eyes remained utterly impassive. He simply shook his head again. No frustrated Jeriah asked why aha are good. Shibi's tone was still serene.
Speaker A
Was there any doubt? It was a leader who didn't suppress the clans and was even willing to help the Abiram grow. This was the first opportunity like this they'd had since joining Kinoa all those years ago. Give that up. Do I look
Speaker A
stupid? Yu Xiwii's face remained calm. What did the vill's upper echelons think? Did they really believe he was ignorant? The Yinu clan might be Tacadern, but we are not fools. They had already made their damn choice. Even if
Speaker A
the Achiha clan were not as good as they claimed, and even without that promise, he could not trust the vill's upper echelons. Who knew that after the upper echelons eliminated the Achiha, they might come back to settle accounts with
Speaker A
us? Of course, he did not voice these thoughts, but continued to brew tea calmly, only speaking in a placid refusal when Jeriah asked. Jeriah was at a loss his heart, seething with a nameless anger. There was no way around
Speaker A
it. Faced with this tacit man, he truly did not know what to say. In the end, even the usually patient Jeriah was so enraged that he slammed the table. Yanu Xiwi, speak. What are you dissatisfied with? Or do you have any demands? You
Speaker A
can just bring them up directly. You need to let me know what you're thinking. Indeed, although Jeriah had anticipated this trip would not go smoothly, Yinuis reaction still struck him hard. In response, Yinui remained calm, merely shaking his head
Speaker A
slowly. Lord Jeriah, please return. The Yunu clan has chosen the Aiha, and we will not change our minds. No explanation, no reason. The Yinu clan was not adept at words. It to speak this much at once was already a sign of great
Speaker A
respect for Jera. Jeriah's face darkened. The Yinu clan's firmness puzzled him. Why? In his view, the ninja clan's choice this time was merely driven by Danzos excessive pressure. As long as the Hokag could rectify the situation in time,
Speaker A
everything would return to normal. But now, the facts dealt him a fatal blow. No matter how much he pleaded, Yunui remained cold, rejecting him without even a moment's thought. What about the will of fire? Everyone was supposed to
Speaker A
be for the village. Why had it come to this? Jery's eyes grew dim, and in the end, he had no choice but to leave the Yinu clan. His next stop was the Inuzuka clan. However, unfortunately, although the Inuzuka clan's attitude was
Speaker A
polite, their stance was equally resolute. One sentence, they were sticking with the Aiha, and nothing could change that, and there was no way around it. Not only was this behavior a deacto betrayal of the vill's upper echelons, but the benefits offered by
Speaker A
the Aiha were genuinely enticing. Although the Inazuka clan's benefits were not as great as those of the Yinu clan or Kakashi, they were still far beyond what the vill's upper echelons could offer. Only a fool would not know
Speaker A
which side to choose. Jeriah returned empty-handed once again, his spirit utterly crushed like a walking corpse.
Speaker A
He then visited other clans large and small, and the results were no different. Everyone had no interest in returning to the village, all determined to stand with the Aiha to the end.
Speaker A
Nonsense. Whether it was Hasharamaju's plan to integrate clans into the village or the policies of Tobaramaju, Herzen, Saratobi, and other Hokag, they had all overtly or covertly suppressed the clans. Did they really think the clans were blind to it? Now that they had
Speaker A
finally encountered an Aiha who did not suppress the clans, but instead seemed to vigorously support them, only a fool would not know how to choose. Husen Saratobi, even a dog wouldn't side with him. Now, not even Jeriah's persuasion,
Speaker A
nor's arrival, would make any difference. Though the Senu clan's influence remained in matters concerning the clan's legacy, even if Hasharama Senu rose from his coffin, it would be useless. Everyone was set on the Achiha.
Speaker A
Even the sage of six paths would have to step aside. In the end, utterly despairing Jeriah finally went to the Inoshikacho clans. The members of the Akimichi and Yamanaka clans did not show themselves. The one receiving him was
Speaker A
Naralui. Looking at the dejected Jeriah, Nara, Louie shook his head. Lord Jeriah, save your breath. The Eno Shikacho like the other clans are determined to stand with the Aiha to the very end, even if it means clan extinction. We are willing
Speaker A
to split the village if necessary. Nar Louui's tone was firm. Before Jeriah could speak, he had already stated their decision. Clearly being clever, he knew exactly why Jeriah had come. So, he did not give him a chance to speak and directly revealed the
Speaker A
Enoch's stance. He had even relayed the situation to Shikaku and the others, and it was likely that the other half of the Enoshiko would arrive soon. No kidding.
Speaker A
The Aiha had already laid out their future governance policies. The Enoch, even at the cost of bloodshed and sacrificing clan members, would resolutely push Yuzbo Gene into the position of Hokag. Yes, if earlier the Enocho and other clans were only driven
Speaker A
by the pain inflicted by Danzo and reluctantly sought shelter under the Achiha's wing, now they were steadfast in their support for the Aiha. The simple fact that the Aiha did not suppress the clans and even supported them was enough. Because everyone had
Speaker A
truly had enough of the Hokag factions decadesl long suppression of the clans. If they had known the Aiha stance earlier, how could they have ever supported someone like Hashiama? As for doubts, suspecting that the Aiha were just painting a rosy picture and would
Speaker A
later suppress the clans once in power. Impossible. Absolutely impossible. You could call the Achiha arrogant or even extreme, but you could never say they lie. They lacked the cunning for that.
Speaker A
The Aiha's thousand-year reputation was worthy of everyone's trust. Although there was now a clever one like Yuzbo Gene, deep down, he was still the same Aiiah. If he weren't extreme, he wouldn't have awakened the mano. Why? Oi Lou, tell me, what are you all thinking?
Speaker A
If I weren't sure your chakra was normal, I'd think you were under a jing jutsu. Kohaa is everyone's village.
Speaker A
Don't you know that? Having one Aiha is already troublesome enough. Why do you have to get involved? Are you trying to make the village worse? Why can't we all work together to build the village? The third great ninja war just ended not
Speaker A
long ago, and Kenoha and Kimogakure haven't even signed a peace treaty yet. Your Narl clan is so smart. How can you not understand such a simple truth?
Speaker A
Jariah's face was cold, and a murderous glint flickered in his eyes. Yes, the actions of these clans had truly infuriated him. If not for the current Aiha being so powerful and having such widespread support from the clans, he
Speaker A
would have considered a decapitation strike without hesitation. The village was his bottom line. Even if crossed to Jeriah would not hesitate to kill. But the problem was this time too many people were involved. Not only the strongest Aiiah clan but also all the
Speaker A
major and minor clans of Kenoha. That was the only reason he managed to restrain himself. So in utter despair and helplessness, he voiced his confusion. He had lost all hope of persuading these clans. Now he merely wanted to hear from Naralui what exactly
Speaker A
the clans of Kohao were thinking. Nar Rokichi's eyes flickered. As a member of the Inrelease clan, though not skilled in sensory ninjutsu, he still caught the killing intent in Jera's eyes, fleeting as it was. However, he did not care. Yet
Speaker A
Jeriah's roar made his expression grow complicated. In truth, during the third war, he had a good relationship with Jeriah, and the man had even saved his life once. But with the Enoch's shift in allegiance, their friendship was cast
Speaker A
into shadow. Watching Jeriah's stifled frustration, he gently lifted the teacup before him. And as he drained it in one gulp, he truly began to make up his mind. He set down the teacup gently, then took a deep breath before speaking.
Speaker A
"Lord Jeriah, I'll tell you then. Consider this repaying the debt from the third war, but from now on, do not come to me again." The core reason the Inoshika Cho and other ninja clans chose the Aiha is simply one the Aiha do not
Speaker A
restrict clan development. You as a core member of the village must understand in your heart that the village has always supported the civilians and continuously weakened the rights of the clans. How many among the clans should have been
Speaker A
promoted to Jonan long ago yet remain stuck? Even if they cannot stall forever at most they are given the rank of special Jonan. We do not ask the village to grant clans privileges but can't we at least have fair competition? The
Speaker A
Achiha are different. They believe in the strong ruling. Perhaps after the Aiha take the position of Hokag, their clan may occupy it forever. But as long as they treat all clans fairly, we would actually be satisfied. After all, the
Speaker A
position of Hokag was never meant for us clans anyway. Moreover, your teacher's nature is too ruthless. We clans know better than anyone that the rumors circulating in Kenoha are true. How many clans has Husen Saratobi destroyed since coming to power? Since we chose to align
Speaker A
with the Aiha, it means a complete break with Huen Saratobi. A choice of camp.
Speaker A
There is no turning back. Otherwise, once the village destroys the Aiha, all of us clans will die too. So this trip of yours is destined to end in disappointment. You might offer promises, but they are useless in reality. Because behind me stands the
Speaker A
Nar clan. My decision represents the life and death of over 3,000 clansmen. Moreover, it represents about 10,000 people of the Enoch. Do you think I dare to gamble on your credibility in such a matter? You are a wanderer. How long can
Speaker A
you stay in the village? Even if Huen Saratobi agrees now, what can you do if he breaks his promise later? Manado Name's died in an unexplained manner.
Speaker A
Any discerning person can see that this is absolutely connected to the high-ranking officials of Kenoha. After all, only a few people knew Kusha's delivery date. So, what have you done?
Speaker A
You are still running errands for Herus and Saratobi with no intention of avenging Minato Namikes. Remember, he was your only disciple in Kenoha. You don't even care about your own disciple.
Speaker A
You haven't even gone to see the only child Manado left behind. So, do you have any credibility? Even if the Aiha had given us no benefits, we still wouldn't dare to trust you given the example of Manado Name's right before
Speaker A
our eyes. You don't even care for your own disciple. How can we hope that after the village kills us, you will seek justice for our clans? And there's another point. Haven't you noticed? Why did Harusen Soratobi send you here? Why
Speaker A
doesn't he come himself? You are just a pawn. In the future, Harusen Saratobi can break his promise without any pressure. After all, it was you who promised our clans, not him. He saw through you as his disciple. He knows
Speaker A
that once things become a fade accomplete, even if you are furious inside, you will silently choose to accept it in the end. Few who lead clans are fools. Civilians might believe in the credibility of you, one of the three
Speaker A
Sanin. But our clans have entire families behind us. Compared to the empty promises of the white fong, we quietly observe every action you take.
Speaker A
The matter of Manado Namic alone is enough to confirm that you are not worthy of our trust. So go back. For the sake of our past friendship, I advise you to leave the village as soon as possible. Power struggles are extremely
Speaker A
bloody and cruel. Your personality is truly unsuited for such games. In this regard, Lady is a wise person.
Speaker A
[clears throat] I suggest you learn from her. After finishing, Narroichi poured himself a cup of tea and continued drinking leisurely. Yes. out of gratitude for the life-saving favor in the past. At this moment, he concealed nothing and directly laid out the matter
Speaker A
in detail. But likewise, this also completely severed the last threat of friendship between them. From now on, if they meet again, they will be enemies, not friends. Meanwhile, on the other side, with these words from Nar Rokichi, Jera's mind was utterly blown. Clearly,
Speaker A
at this moment, he finally realized that he had been grievously wrong from the very beginning. Clans are different from civilians. They care more about the issue of inheritance. He could naturally empathize with how the village had restricted the clans over the years
Speaker A
since he along with Orochimuru Minado Names and others were almost all representatives of the civilian faction.
Speaker A
The Aiha were too ruthless. With just this one point, they had bound the clans tightly. Moreover, the credibility issue that Narroichi then raised left Jeriah utterly stunned. Yes, although he chose to let go of his hatred for the sake of
Speaker A
the village in the eyes of others, it was a sign of having no credibility.
Speaker A
Manado Namic was his own disciple. Yet he did not seek justice for Manado. How could others dare to believe his promises? As for being manipulated by Huan Saratobi, that point was irrelevant to him. After all, he was not stupid. He
Speaker A
could certainly see his teacher schemes. But the problem was that in his view, as long as it was for the village, he could overlook such trivial matters. At this moment, he was silent for a long time.
Speaker A
After a moment, he spoke in a horse voice. Rokichi, do you think there is still room for redemption? Nar Rokichi frowned slightly. Looking at the utterly dejected Jeriah, he felt no sympathy in his heart. On the contrary, after a
Speaker A
brief contemplation, he slowly spoke. Lord Jeriah, you are truly hopeless. Your vision is too lofty. You refuse to lower your gaze even for a moment. You can't even accomplish the small things of talking about all this is meaningless. What you should do most now
Speaker A
is to care for Manado's child. First, find out how the child has been doing these past years and recover the inheritance left by Manado and Kusha for the child. You should know that Kusha was a great ays. She held the
Speaker A
inheritance of the Usuzamaki clan and Lady Mito also gave her a share of inheritance. The entire street west of the Hokag building is her inheritance.
Speaker A
As Manado's teacher and the child's grandmaster first recover the child's parents inheritance, Naral Lui his face filled with displeasure. Having already repaid the favors he owed, he saw no reason to engage in pointless banter with Jera. So when he saw the man about
Speaker A
to continue, he immediately countered with the matter of Narudo Uzumaki. Of course, it wasn't that he cared about Narudo Uzumaki personally. After all, his relationship with Minato Namay was merely cordial, and it was Shikaku who had been close to Minato. He was simply
Speaker A
using this to shut Jeriah up. The subtext was simple, you may as well retire and get some rest. He didn't believe Jeriah could succeed anyway.
Speaker A
Minato might not have left much, but Kusha Usuzamaki's estate was vast. As a member of the Nar clan, he knew all too well that Kusha's assets had long been carved up and divided. Return it. How?
Speaker A
It's all been swallowed into their bellies. Can they cough it back out? Would you like the waste? They've already expelled Jeriah to prize such a fortune from their grass blood would have to be spilled and lives lost. Would
Speaker A
Jeriah truly go that far from Enado Name? Narui deemed it highly unlikely. Of course, if Jeriah were actually willing to go that route, it would in a sense be a boon for their Aha faction.
Speaker A
After all, if the village descended into internal strife, their own power would only grow stronger. Jeriah rebutted again. He was overcome with embarrassment and agitation. The matter of Manado Name was his sore spot. He instinctively avoided anything related
Speaker A
to him. Partly out of nostalgia, but mostly because he didn't know how to face it. Even if he avoided Narudo Usuzamaki, having lived in the village for so long, he'd often overhear the term demon fox. All he wanted was to
Speaker A
escape. He could only hope that Huen Saratobi would handle things and that Narudo would one day grasp the will of fire, understanding the meaning and importance of protection once he grew up. But now he was cornered. Jeriah was
Speaker A
no fool. He caught the implication behind Nar Louui's words. A man who couldn't even protect those close to him had no right to speak of protection to them. He had failed to demonstrate the requisite responsibility in Manado's case. No amount of words would change
Speaker A
that. After a long silence, Jeriah cast a deep glance at Lousie, then turned and left without a word. A moment later, after he left the Aiha compound in dejection, he let out a heavy sigh. Why?
Speaker A
Why can't everyone understand that everything I do is for the village? As ninjas, shouldn't we endure? I know I've let Monado down. That boy Narudo must have suffered, but everything is for the stability of the village. Why can't you
Speaker A
all let this go? For the sake of peace, what's a little hardship? If everyone just endured, it would pass. Selfish.
Speaker A
Truly selfish, Jeriah murmured to himself his heart full of confusion. Why couldn't everyone learn from him? Keep a balanced mindset and stop obsessing over personal gains. A ninja must endure.
Speaker A
With that thought, his gaze grew increasingly resolute. He was certain he had done nothing wrong. The real fault lay with those short-sighted clans who had abandoned the greater good. They were no longer true ninjas, but pitiful creatures of power, no different from
Speaker A
his mentor, Saratobi and the others. Birds of a feather. But Saratobi and the others were too old. He couldn't change their minds. Unexpectedly, after interacting with those clans, he discovered they had been assimilated by Soratobe's ways, having lost the
Speaker A
strategic vision a ninja should possess. to resolve everything. It seemed he could only rely on the savior. But where was the savior foretold by the great toad sage now? No, absolutely not. He had to resolve the villages troubles as
Speaker A
soon as possible, then venture into the ninja world to find a savior. Only the future savior could fix this increasingly distorted village. Just as Jeriah made up his mind, he noticed a large group approaching. Jeriah froze, but once he recognized them, his face
Speaker A
turned dark instantly. Leading the group were the Eno Shik Cho trio along with minor clans like Kazari Tiki Shingetsu Yamashiro and Koga. At the forefront stood the three clan leaders Nar Shikaku Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosa.
Speaker A
Jeriah's face went pale. He immediately barred their way. Shikaku Enochi. What exactly are you all trying to do? Answer me. His face was livid and his entire body trembled slightly. Clearly, he already had an answer in his heart, but
Speaker A
he was reluctant to believe it. There was no other way. A large number of clans had already defected to the Aiha if these clans were allowed to pass the Aiha would control every major and minor clan in Kenoha. He couldn't accept that
Speaker A
outcome. After all, with only the Saratobi and three other clans, plus countless civilians under his command, even if Herusen Saratobi still held the title of Hokag, could he truly be considered the Hokag of Kinoa? Yes, before he could still deceive himself,
Speaker A
the clans that joined the Aiha were only a fraction. But now if these people were allowed through Saratobi might not be a commander without an army. But given the Aiha's current strength, they could easily establish a new Kenoa. At the
Speaker A
thought of such dire consequences, rage flared within Jera. But unfortunately, despite being takenback by his blocking, Nar Shikaku quickly regained his composure. Jeriah sama stepped aside. We clans have made our choice. If you insist on obstructing us, then we will
Speaker A
have no choice but to resort to force. It's your call. Narikaku's tone was stern. He was not Naralui. His acquaintance with Jeriah was merely superficial with no real bond. As the head of the Narac clan, his dealings were with Herisen Soratobi. Even during
Speaker A
wartime, he rarely appeared on the battlefield as Saratobi relied on his council. Thus, he saw no reason to mince words with Jeriah. Though his abilities might be slightly inferior to Louis, his long tenure at the heart of Kenoa's
Speaker A
power allowed him to strike at Jeriah's weak spot with a single sentence. Do you want to start a war? Are you willing to plunge Kohaa into chaos? Can you bear?
Speaker A
Dare you bear the cost? Narui might have shown some difference, but Nar Shikaku didn't give a damn. One strike a killing blow. Jeriah. His face was grim, murderous intent flickering in his eyes.
Speaker A
By now, he was thoroughly enraged. But he had to admit against Naras Shikaku before him. He felt a greater oppressive force than from Lousie. In the end, after a deep breath, he suppressed his murderous intent and reluctantly stepped
Speaker A
aside. At that, Narashikaku gave a slight bow, then waved his hand, leading the group toward the Aiha compound.
Speaker A
Jeriah, his face filled with dejection. Though he longed to stop these people, he knew he lacked the strength to do so.
Speaker A
As one of the famed three ninja of Kenoha, he had once enjoyed certain privileges within the village owing to his status as a disciple of Saratobi Hirusen and his own prowess. Now, however, everything had changed. The ninja clans had resolved to betray the
Speaker A
Hokag, and naturally, they would not regard him with any respect. Even if it came to open conflict, they would not fear him, for he was but an ordinary ninja, no matter how strong his strength held no significance. More importantly,
Speaker A
if war truly broke out, could Kóa withstand it? So with a helpless side, Jeriah could only leave in dejection, eventually arriving at the Hokag's office. Jariah, you're back. How did things go on your end? How many clans are willing to return? Don't put too
Speaker A
much pressure on yourself. Even if you can persuade just one person to return, that would be a good thing for us.
Speaker A
Saratobi Hirusen spoke with a smile. He could clearly see the dejection on Jeriah's face, but he did not take it too seriously. In his view, Jeriah was probably setting too high a standard for himself. In reality, he thought that if
Speaker A
Jeriah could persuade even a portion of the clans to return, he would be satisfied. The reasoning was simple.
Speaker A
After all, he was still the Hokag of Kenoha, inherently holding the moral high ground and the rightful authority.
Speaker A
As long as a portion of the ninja clans were willing to accept his rule, combined with the countless common ninja of the village and the core power held by the Saratobi and other three major clans, he could still barely maintain
Speaker A
the current operation of Kenoha. Other matters could be dealt with gradually in the future. He believed that with his skills, as long as he stretched the timeline, he would eventually be able to dismantle the alliance of clans led by
Speaker A
the Aiah and then he would settle accounts with those treacherous clans. Unfortunately, as he smoked his pipe, Saratobi Harusen did not notice the utter dejection and despair on Jeriah's face. Old man, Jeriah's voice wasoaro as he tried to speak. But for a moment, he
Speaker A
opened his mouth. Yet, no words came out, gazing at Saratobi Husen's smiling face under the dim light, his body began to tremble slightly. And yet, Saratobi Herusen still did not notice. After all, in his view, no matter how bad the
Speaker A
situation was, how bad could it possibly be? He had weathered countless storms in his lifetime. Could it be worse than the difficulties he faced when he first took office? So he smiled and said calmly, "Go ahead and say it. I can handle it."
Speaker A
After speaking, he looked at Jeriah with an expression that suggested he thought Jeriah was overreacting. In that case, fine. Hearing these words, Jeriah gained a bit of confidence. All that's good.
Speaker A
Truly worthy of the third Hokag of the village. His pressure tolerance was indeed greater than his own. With that thought, he no longer concealed anything. Not a single clan is willing to return to the village. All the clans
Speaker A
have now become resolute. They are determined to follow the Aiha to the very end. And on my way back, I happen to see that the other half of the Eno Shikacho led by Narashikaku along with over a dozen minor clans have also
Speaker A
thrown their lot in with the Aiha. In short, as it stands now, apart from the Huga clan, which has not yet made a clear stance, all the other families that can be called ninja clans have already sided with the Aiah. However,
Speaker A
it's good that all the common villagers still trust you, old man. That is a positive for us. With the support of the four major clans like the Saratobi, we still have a fighting chance against the Etchia. I believe you can definitely
Speaker A
handle this old man. Speaking of which, I have to admire you, old man. Your ability to withstand pressure is truly remarkable. When I learned of this outcome, my heart sank. Yet, you remain strong and composed. Impressive. Truly impressive. Uh, old man, what's wrong?
Speaker A
Why are you spitting blood? You must stay strong. At first, Jeriah had been speaking quite lightly since the calmness Saratobi Herusen displayed had indeed alleviated twoth3s of the pressure in his heart. But damn it, how could the old man suddenly start
Speaker A
spitting blood before he even finished speaking? Where was the promised strength? Where was the composure?
Speaker A
Immediately after, he had no choice but to summon the A&Bu on duty outside and rush the old man to the hospital as quickly as possible. However, fortunately, the hospital was controlled by Uditen Koharu. So they managed to save Saratobi Husen in the shortest
Speaker A
possible time. Half an hour later, outside the emergency room, Utitang Koharu stepped out of the emergency room and looked at the anxious Jeriah. All right, don't worry. Harusen is stable for now. That's a relief. Jeriah let out a sigh of relief. There was no other
Speaker A
way. He truly was afraid. If Saratobi Haruen had died in such a situation, the village would be completely finished.
Speaker A
Come on, tell me, how did Harusen end up like this? Did you complete today's mission? How many of those clans are willing to move back? Udetain Koharu spoke slowly. Indeed, she had been shocked as well because both she and
Speaker A
Midocado Hamira had relied almost entirely on Saratobi Husen. If Saratobi Haruen died suddenly, it would undoubtedly be the collapse of the sky for her. Hearing this, Jeriah's face darkened instantly. Are you sure you can handle it? The old man learned of this
Speaker A
news and immediately vomited blood and lost consciousness. His eyes were filled with doubt. There was no helping it. One of the vill's top leaders had already fallen and he did not wish for Uditen Koharu to collapse as well. Uditen
Speaker A
Koharus face turned grim. Even before Jeriah spoke, she knew the situation was not ideal. But after a moment's thought, she still said, "Go ahead. I can handle it. Not a single one was brought back." Jariah stated bluntly, "Even the other half of the
Speaker A
Inoshika Cho and the dozen or so minor clans that had remained neutral, I saw them joining the Aiha on my way back tonight." Uditain Koharu gasped and for a moment she nearly fainted. Her face turning extremely pale. But she knew
Speaker A
that the situation was critical and she absolutely could not collapse now. So she forced herself to endure. However, her expression became frantic. What are we to do? All the clans have defected to the Aiha. Can the village withstand
Speaker A
this? This is the end. Utain Koharu murmured to herself. Her body began to tremble slightly and especially with Hirusen unconscious. She had completely lost her composure. Seeing this Jeriah let out a soft sigh. This old woman clearly could not bear the load. It
Speaker A
seemed he could not rely on her. Mito Hamira. Huh? That old man was equally unreliable. So after a moment of deliberation, he said, "Seriously, I'll go out and find immediately. She is the only one who can handle this now. In the
Speaker A
meantime, you take care of the old man and do not provoke the Aiha. Buy me some time and I will definitely bring back." Zilli was a man of action. After speaking, he used a body flicker technique and instantly dashed out of
Speaker A
the hospital. Shining Xiaoun. She was completely bewildered. She was about to say something, but all words were choked back. Her face was extremely grim. Damn it. Are you trying to rush to your reincarnation? Can't you wait for someone to finish speaking? But forget
Speaker A
it. Now she let out a sigh and then came to an office. Director, the young man sawin Xiao and quickly stood up ready to pour tea. And to this, Xiaoin waved her hand, not even sitting down, and directly said, "Those hypocritical
Speaker A
formalities are unnecessary. I now assign you three tasks. First, immediately return to our clan and have the clan leader prepare the entire clan.
Speaker A
All ninjas ready for battle. Additionally, prepare five Jonin squads to protect me at the hospital. Also, go find Elder Shuah Yen and inform him to gather all ninjas of the Shuahan clan.
Speaker A
Likewise, prepare for the worst mentally. Then have Elder Shuahan use his elder authority to immediately assemble the A&BU under his command and enter the Hokag building for defense.
Speaker A
Also tell Elder Shuommen Yen that Hokag Ryzen is unconscious and I need to take care of him at the hospital. So he needs to handle matters outside. Finally go notify the Yu Feay and Jitsuin clans to also prepare for battle. Go. After
Speaker A
saying this, Xiaoin immediately left without any intention of wasting words. Yes. Compared to other matters, what she cared most about was Yu and Fe Ryzen.
Speaker A
She needed to find a way to make Yuan Fe Ryzen wake up as soon as possible because she knew that neither she nor Shua Yin wanted to. And in controlling the overall situation, they must have Yu and Fay Ryzen. As for Zill, she actually
Speaker A
didn't hold much hope for getting Gangho back because she knew that Gangho and these people were not of the same faction at all. Back then, Yu and Feay Ryzen's choice to take Gangho as his disciple was actually just sending a
Speaker A
signal to the outside world. Yuan Fe Ryzen's teacher was Chinsho Fijin. Back then, in order to temporarily stabilize the Chincho clan, he had to take Gang Ho as his disciple as a token. Actually, judging from the choices of Zilli and
Speaker A
Dashawan Yuan Feay, Ryzen intended to take only disciples of civilian origin. Coupled with the subsequent targeting and scheming of the Chincho clan by the My High Level, she didn't think these things could fool Ganggho. After all, the former Gang Ho was a truly
Speaker A
intelligent person, not someone as easy to deceive as Zilli. Why did Gangho choose to leave? truly because of so-called hemophobia, nonsense. As a medical ninja herself, Xiaoin didn't believe it at all. Ganggho simply couldn't stand the darkness of the
Speaker A
village, and because Mai was the life's work of her two grandfathers, she couldn't bring herself to retaliate against them. Counting on Gangho, not very likely. But on one hand, she didn't stop Zilli, and letting him try might also be good. If they could really win
Speaker A
Gangs Ho back, even making her the fifth Hokag would be fine. After all, with her influence diluted over so many years, the old-timers were confident in controlling the vill's power. On the contrary, using Gang Shos Chinsho reputation might even stabilize those
Speaker A
ninja clans. So, forget it. For now, she should first prepare for the worst in advance and then quietly wait for Zillow's subsequent news. Immediately after within Xiaos arrangements, the village instantly began to fall into chaos. After learning of this, Shuahmen,
Speaker A
Yin immediately began making arrangements. The unfair and jitsuin clans also started tense preparations. It wasn't until 3:00 in the morning that Shu Homin Yin had some free time and he rushed to the hospital as quickly as possible. Xiao Jun, how is Risen? Shu
Speaker A
Homin Yin asked hurriedly as he entered. And to this Xiao let out a helpless sigh, then shook her head and said, "I can'tt tell yet for now, but he should wake up by tomorrow morning at the latest." That'ss good then.
Speaker A
Shua Human Yen sighed in relief. What happened? How did Ryzen suddenly fall unconscious? Upon hearing this, Schwanin Xiaoin also looked helpless. In the end, she still recounted Zilli's explanation.
Speaker A
After listening to Aommen, Yin was completely dumbfounded. No way. All ninja clans defecting to the Yuzbo was not good news for them. More importantly, Ryzen was unconscious and Tuanzang was also missing. Relying only on the two of them, these useless men,
Speaker A
could they really hold up the current Mai? To be honest, even they themselves had little confidence. But there was no choice. No matter how panicked and chaotic they felt inside, now they had to tough it out. Either wait for
Speaker A
Tuanzang to return or wait for Ryzen to wake up or wait for Zilli to come back.
Speaker A
In short, they could only handle a smooth sailing game, not a desperate situation like this. Just like now, apart from passive defense, they had no idea what to do. As for the civilians, huh, they themselves were almost in
Speaker A
chaos. How could they have the heart to deal with those trivial matters? So they recalled all ambu all responsible for guarding their own clans, the hospital and the Hokag building. As for how to solve the problems civilians would
Speaker A
encounter when they woke up tomorrow. Just bear with it. Either go line up at the police department and short the amb you won't handle it. Meanwhile, on the other side compared to the tense atmosphere in the village, the Yuzbo
Speaker A
side was filled with laughter and joy. Another dozen small ninja clans joined and the power of the Yuzbo swelled terrifyingly. Even Yuzbo Gene, who had just gone to sleep, was directly pulled up by Yuzbo Shauna. Jean, don't sleep.
Speaker A
How can you still sleep now? Another dozen small ninja clans have joined us. Haha, I never thought that our Yuzbo would truly have a day of rising. I am so happy in all of this is because of Eugene. My choice back then was too
Speaker A
correct. Yuzbo Sha was overjoyed. And to this, Yuzbo Gene, who had just been woken from sleep and was still groggy, now watched Yuzbo Sha acting crazy with a head full of question marks. Good heavens. What exactly happened? Damn it.
Speaker A
Just say it. You said a bunch of nonsense but haven't told me why you woke me up. What exactly do you want me to do? Another dozen small ninja clans.
Speaker A
Huh? Let them come. Why wake me up? Just a bunch of small clans. Not even the first to defect. Do I have to go greet them? However, seeing Yuzbo Jyn's increasingly displeased expression, Yuzbo standing nearby, couldn't bear it
Speaker A
and quickly began to explain for her grandfather. After hearing this, Yuzbo Gene was helpless. That's it. solve the housing and food problems for these people. You woke me up in the middle of the night just to deal with such a
Speaker A
trivial matter. Aihajene felt quite displeased. He could understand the excitement among the Aiha despite this clan's power not being vast and their quality not matching that of the first clans to pledge allegiance. Yet, the significance of their arrival signaled a
Speaker A
trend. From this day forward, the tide of attack and defense had turned. Although not a single civilian ninja had defected to them, the power the Achiha now held was enough to stand toe-to-toe with the village's high-ranking officials, even giving them the right to
Speaker A
establish a new Kenoha outright. But likewise, couldn't this matter be discussed tomorrow? Did they have to wake him up in the dead of night?
Speaker A
However, despite his annoyance, since he was already awake, going back to bed would likely prove feudal. So, forget it. Since he had been roused from sleep, no one else deserved to slumber either.
Speaker A
With this thought, he called out, "Tadashi, come in." Elder Gene Aiha Tadashi's gaze was filled with reverence. Clearly for this man who had pulled the Aiha from the meer and restored them to their former glory, he had long vowed to dedicate his life to
Speaker A
this. Aiha gene remained calm as all Achiha had worn this expression recently. Perhaps it was awkward at first, but now it was simply a matter of habit. Notify all ninja clans to send a representative. We're having a meeting. Aiha Tadashi nodded and
Speaker A
immediately left. Shan couldn't help but ask. A meeting at this hour? What's wrong? Aiha Jin inquired. Shan shook his head saying nothing more. However, he felt something was a miss for Achiha used to despise meetings. Of course, if
Speaker A
he knew that Achiha Jins actions were simply out of personal annoyance summoning everyone to share his misery, he might find it even more unbelievable.
Speaker A
Half an hour later, in the reception hall of the front courtyard, everyone was seated. Many were still blurryeyed, having been dragged from their slumber.
Speaker A
Entering the reception room, Aiha felt slightly more balanced seeing this scene. Yes, not bad. This is how it should be. Why should I suffer alone?
Speaker A
Let's share the burden together. However, this was also a little thought of Aiha Jyn's. In truth, he did have matters to discuss originally planned for the next day merely moved up to tonight. Firstly, everyone. Perhaps my will of fire burns too strongly leading
Speaker A
to too many people defecting to the Aiha and our compound has its limits. Therefore, I've decided to expand the clan grounds near the Nanga shrine outside the village. So, regarding the allocation for each ninja clan, I hope we can establish a plan tonight. Don't
Speaker A
worry about land shortage. As our land borders the forest of death, we can expand outside the village as needed.
Speaker A
Second, we must also devise a plan tonight for barrier defenses, patrol teams, and sentry posts. We must reorganize as quickly as possible for our enemies won't give us much time. We must swiftly consolidate our forces into a complete combat capability and ensure
Speaker A
the safety of our clan territory. Aiha wasted no words. This was his meeting style. Identify problems and solve them.
Speaker A
He had no interest in watching factions bicker. He set the framework and they figured out how to build it. This novel meeting style attracted both the Aiha and the representatives of other clans.
Speaker A
Subsequently, under the Nar clans lead, they reached a consensus after 2 hours. There was no conflict among the clans present. They knew this was temporary.
Speaker A
The real resource allocation would happen after eliminating the high-ranking officials like Saratobi Herusen when the true spoils would be divided. For now, they'd make do. As long as the clan could function, they couldn't ask for more. After all, when
Speaker A
defecting to the Aiha, they could only bring their valuables, or retrieving other assets would take time. At that moment, Narroichi spoke up. Gene Kuin, I have a question. Go ahead. Aiha Jeene nodded slightly. Speak freely.
Speaker A
We're all in this together now. I won't impose a one-man rule. As long as it's reasonable, we'll analyze and plan together. The same goes for everyone else. If you don't understand something or find it unsuitable, speak up and
Speaker A
we'll discuss it. Hearing this, everyone breathed a sigh of relief. They had prepared for oppressive Aiha rule but surprisingly Aihaene was quite approachable even willing to consult everyone. This made them feel their choice was indeed a gamble. One with
Speaker A
that. Narroichi stopped beating around the bush and asked directly, "What are your thoughts on dealing with the village?" Rokichi, what's your take? Aiha Jin countered. Nar Rokichi didn't hesitate and gave his answer. The village is already severely weakened.
Speaker A
Who I believe there's no need to delay further. Let's convene the Jonan council, present the roots crimes, and completely remove Saratobi Herusen from the position of Hokag. There may be some turmoil, but it will also thoroughly cleanse the filth, allowing us to
Speaker A
concentrate on dealing with other villages. Others voiced their agreement. Having chosen to side with the Aiha, they had long prepared for a clash with the village, especially the Aiha, who were burning with passion. Were it not for Achihajin's restraint, they would
Speaker A
have already sought to annihilate the Saratobi and other three clans. Only Aiha Jin remained silent. Then, after thinking for a moment, he looked at Narikaku. Shikaku, you spent the most time in the Hokag building. So, do you know Saratobi Herusen's background? If
Speaker A
conflict truly erupts, what trump cards can he produce? And to this, Narashikaku, who had hoped to remain inconspicuous side helplessly upon hearing this, then thought deeply before answering. I'm not part of the Hokag's inner circle, so I don't know the
Speaker A
specifics. However, there are one zero registered civilian ninjas, including 132 Jon, though their abilities are slightly inferior to those from the clans. The Saratobi and other three clans are quite large. Each has around 50 registered ninjas with only six or
Speaker A
seven Jonan. But I often visit the Saratobi compound to discuss matters with Herusen. And from fleeting glances, I could tell their actual ninja count is at least 20 times that number. The other three clans are similar. Over the years,
Speaker A
the vill's finances have been heavily embezzled by Saratobi and his allies. And since these four clans rarely fight on the front lines, the exact numbers are impossible to ascertain. Within the U and Route, excluding as clan members, about half are civilians numbering
Speaker A
around 300. But these are all elites, so they pose a significant problem. Furthermore, both U and Root have hidden personnel. I'm almost certain of this, but I'm not sure about the exact scale of these hidden forces. Finally, Saratobi Husen, known as the professor
Speaker A
of ninjutsu, controls the scroll of seals. Who knows how many forbidden techniques he's mastered. So, when facing Saratobi Hirusen, you must be wary of his forbidden jutzu. His words shocked the entire assembly. Even Nar Rokichi, who had been clamoring for
Speaker A
immediate action, suddenly calmed down considerably, as he was genuinely unaware of this fact. He was a carefree member of the Nar clan, and Shikaku had never discussed such matters before.
Speaker A
Thus, hearing it for the first time, he couldn't help but lament the inhumane nature of the likes of Saratobi, Herusen, and the higher-ups. Damn, I knew the Kenoha higher-ups were greedy, but I never imagined they would be so
Speaker A
blatant. No wonder Kenoha has remained stagnant all these years. The assembled crowd voiced their opinions one after another. All their expressions were grim, for if the wealth embezzled by the Kohaa higher-ups had truly been used for the vill's development, none of them
Speaker A
would be living in such dire straits. Then, after venting their frustrations, they once again turned their gaze toward Aiha. He was the one in charge. What to do next hinged entirely on his thoughts, and in response to this, Aiha sighed
Speaker A
inwardly. Naroshikaku was indeed no simple man. Even though he was not part of Saratobi Herusen's inner circle, he could still deduce much of the truth with just a fraction of the authority he held and the things he observed in his
Speaker A
daily life. Truly impressive. Yet, although Narashikaku and Narroichi were equally intelligent, their personalities were entirely different. Narikaku was more cautious while Narroichi was more adventurous. After a long silence, Aihajin spoke, "This world operates on cause and effect. The Saratobi for clans
Speaker A
may seem formidable in terms of numbers, but in truth, I do not hold them in any regard. A group of people who have never witnessed bloodshed or experienced battlefield slaughter, even if they possess the chakra of Jonan, can still
Speaker A
be effortlessly cut down by us in an instant. Battleharden hardened experience and various combat techniques. Flowers raised in a greenhouse, cannot be cultivated into warriors. Any elite Chunin could instantly kill those so-called Jonan.
Speaker A
So, regarding the data Shikako mentioned, it's fine to keep it in mind, but there's no need to be intimidated by those superficial numbers. These words calmed the crowd considerably. Indeed, those concealed members of the Saratobi four clans at most had eliminated
Speaker A
bandits outside the village or guarded the caravans of their clans. Such a level of killing had no real training effect. In contrast, the combat methods of the people before him were all honed on the battlefield. To them, Jonan
Speaker A
created by resource investment were no different from prey delivered to their doorstep. Even Narashikaku nodded slowly. Indeed, Aiha Jins words were accurate. But what shocked him even more was Achihajin's ability to adapt on the fly. When everyone was panicking, he
Speaker A
could pinpoint the weaknesses and instantly calm them down. From this, it was evident that Aiha Jinene was a qualified leader. Then, after the crowd had settled, Aiha spoke again. First, I believe that for now, stability is paramount. This is not the time to
Speaker A
completely sever ties with the village and engage in open conflict. My reasoning is actually quite simple. In short, the costbenefit ratio is too low.
Speaker A
The ninja of the Saratobi four clans were forged using the vill's resources. Letting them die in internal strife is a waste. Moreover, I do not wish to casually sacrifice even the civilian ninja, even if they are not our allies.
Speaker A
Sending them to the border to be worn down is far better than having them perish meaninglessly in civil strife.
Speaker A
So, I will make the following arrangements regarding the village's situation. First, the police force will continue to slack off and intensify the spread of various rumors, doing everything possible to stir up the villagers distrust of the Hokag.
Speaker A
Eventually, we should secretly organize some villagers to vandalize the Hokag building, the hospital, and the shops along the streets. The goal is simple, throw the village into chaos. Second, Shikaku, as a Kenoha counselor drafted document based on the official data
Speaker A
published by the administrative department listing the financial income and expenditure from the start of the third war to the present. how much money the daimo allocated, how much the village earned, and how much came from mission commissions. How much has been
Speaker A
spent over the years where it went, and how much remains unaccounted for. Submit this inquiry to the Hokag's office with all the ninja clans present signing their names, demanding that the Hokage's office audit the financial accounts from the third war to the present. If
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen agrees, then we will conduct the audit openly. If he refuses, then spread the word. I recall that the war pensions ninja tool expenditures and mission commission fees from the third war have yet to be settled, haven't
Speaker A
they? A moreover, the village's food and material reserves. It seems the village still lacks the funds to resolve these issues, doesn't it? Let the entire village know that Kenoha is not actually short of money. It's just that the funds
Speaker A
have been embezzled by certain individuals. The civilian ninja who have yet to receive their war pensions and mission commission fees from the war will inevitably become restless and cause a stir. Then we can lend them a hand behind the scenes.
Speaker A
Aiha explained in a measured tone. He did not wish to inherit a ruined Kenoa.
Speaker A
Therefore, even though he could easily eliminate the village's higher-ups, he decided to slowly wear down Saratobi Herusen and his ilk in order to minimize the losses caused by internal strife.
Speaker A
The reasoning was simple population resources were extremely important. Even those who could become ninja, even if of civilian origin, were valuable assets.
Speaker A
Once Aihajene ascended to the position of Hokag, these people would be working for him. Everyone he killed today would mean one fewer worker for him in the future. Such a thing could not be done.
Speaker A
Perhaps many leaders in the ninja world did not care about population, often deliberately using war to consume the surplus population they could not support. But Aihaene understood deeply that all development depended on population, especially those who could become ninja. They were practically born
Speaker A
to be laborers. Even if they had not yet pledged allegiance to him, Achihaene still wanted to protect them and prevent them from dying in internal strife. His next goal was to tear off Saratobi Herusen's mask and shatter the
Speaker A
foundation of his civilian support. Like boiling a frog in warm water, he would hollow him out bit by bit, avoiding provocation and giving him no chance to act forcefully until he was completely isolated. Aihajene was no longer the
Speaker A
same as before. In his view Konoha was his, he would never allow Saratobi Husen to run a muk. Yes, in the past, Saratobi Herusen treated Konoha as his private property and sought to eliminate the Aiha without cost. Now Aiha Jin harbored
Speaker A
the same sentiment. He regarded Konoha as his own and would not permit Saratobi Herusen to ruin his village. The assembled crowd was utterly astonished.
Speaker A
Aiha Jyn's style, methods, and personality all amazed them for such behavior was hardly typical of aha. Even the members of the Nar clan were also rather peculiar at this moment. There was no helping it. Such a method sounded
Speaker A
perfectly normal coming from their mouths. But when uttered by aha, it gave them an indescribably eerie feeling. If they weren't certain that Achiha Jeene had awakened the Shainggon, they would have suspected he was actually a Nar merely swapped at birth by the Aiha. In
Speaker A
particular, Naralui and Naruji were utterly impressed by Achihajin's methods. Even with their quick thinking, it was difficult to conceive such a precise point of entry. Reflecting on this, the two couldn't help but sigh.
Speaker A
With such a capable and shrewd leader in the future, they could imagine their own path would only become more difficult.
Speaker A
Indeed, they were truly convinced. Even the trivial affairs of the police department had been manipulated by Achihaene into an art form. At the very beginning, Aihaene had used the police department to break the deadlock, causing Saratobi Herusen to struggle and
Speaker A
even tarnishing the reputation of the A&BU. Unexpectedly, he was now using the police department again as a pawn to tear apart Saratobi Herusen's foundation. Truly a one-trick pony that never fails, especially having them draft a letter of inquiry demanding an
Speaker A
audit of the village's finances. This directly struck at the village's leadership's Achilles heel because he knew better than anyone that this matter could never withstand scrutiny. If it were normal times, even if exposed, it would at most be pinned on Danzo and the
Speaker A
matter would be brushed aside. But now it was different. Two or three years had passed since the third war ended. Yet the village had not even distributed compensation funds. Rewards for the meritorious settlements for war commissions. All sorts of messy affairs
Speaker A
required financial support. Moreover, someone had just made a fuss about this last month and it was only barely suppressed. Naral Luji and Naralui were well aware that the village leadership was waiting to eliminate the Aiha, using their assets to fill the fiscal hole.
Speaker A
But now the Aiha were growing stronger and they themselves had joined. This path was clearly cut off. Moreover, if they were to detonate this issue once the village learned that there was indeed money, but it was not being paid
Speaker A
out as compensation and had mysteriously vanished, one could imagine the desperate lengths the civilian ninjas would go to. Indeed, although the village was cloaked in the will of fire, it could not conceal the fact that Kenoha was essentially a military
Speaker A
fortress, and the nature of all ninjas was to work for money. With so many casualties in the war, you damn, well, don't even pay compensation or mission fees, and the village's finances just mysteriously vanish. He unless Saratobi Harusen could immediately plug this
Speaker A
hole, his tenure as Hokag would likely be over. All right, understood. I have the vill's financial data in my hands.
Speaker A
I'll draft the inquiry letter as soon as I return and it will be submitted to the Hokage's office by tomorrow afternoon at the latest. Tomorrow afternoon, everyone remember to come to my house to sign. Naral Luji smiled. He
Speaker A
increasingly felt that Narus thoughts were correct. Given Aiha Jyns sophisticated methods and terrifying power, Saratobi Haruen and his allies truly had no hope. More importantly, Achiha Jyn's governance policy, he actually did not restrict the development of the ninja clans. For
Speaker A
them, this alone was worth supporting with all their might. Upon hearing this, everyone naturally nodded with smiles.
Speaker A
Then, since the important matters had been largely discussed, the atmosphere relaxed. After a few more casual chats, they parted ways. The next day, in the afternoon, Saratobi Herusen, who had just regained consciousness, hurriedly arrived at the Hokag's office. Even
Speaker A
though he was still very weak, he had to force himself to sit here in order to barely maintain the village. There was no choice. If he as Hokag were to fall now, the remaining forces under his command would completely collapse. At
Speaker A
this moment, due to the absence of Danzo, the Kenoha F3 nervously began their discussion. Meanwhile, on the other side, Narali, who had already drafted the letter of inquiry, submitted it through official channels to the Jooning Council. Indeed, although
Speaker A
normally everyone could bypass rules and submit directly to the Hokag's office if on good terms now that they were enemies, everything had to be done legally and legitimately. Similarly, just as both sides were preparing for their next clash, Jeriah dragged back an
Speaker A
unwilling sun. Even her gaze toward Jeriah held a deeply hidden murderous intent. She was certainly not stupid. The reason she chose to leave Kenoha back then was that she had sensed something wrong. The Senu clan's deaths were too abnormal, but at
Speaker A
that time, her words carried little weight. Although her grandmother, Usuzamaki Mido, had tried because she bore the Usuzamaki name, she was not taken seriously, leading to the Sinju clan's complete extinction. Later the fates of Nwaki and Dan Ko further
Speaker A
solidified her resolve. It was also around that time that Sukcomo Hitaki committed suicide which made fully understand how ruthless her teacher was.
Speaker A
From that moment she made up her mind leave Kenoha. Moreover, as long as Saratobi Harusen was alive, she would never return because she didn't want to see him. Revenge. She had certainly had that thought and even attempted it. But
Speaker A
unfortunately, she failed at the very first step because when she tried to use the Senu clan's reputation to rally a group of ninja clans, she keenly noticed that many clans were acting strangely.
Speaker A
So, she immediately held back her words. Later upon investigation, cold sweat broke out. It turned out that the vast majority of the ninja clans had participated in the destruction of the Senu clan. In the end, she left with
Speaker A
Shizun because the enemy's power was too vast. Even with the backing of the Synju legacy, she couldn't possibly defeat the entire village. This was also the reason why in the original story she didn't want to return to Kenoha. Even though
Speaker A
she saw the shadow of Sinju noaki in Usuzamaki Narudo after becoming Hokage, she only did so for the sake of the name Kanoha. She never grew close to any of the major ninja clans. Revenge meaningless because Saratobi, Herusen,
Speaker A
and Danzo were already dead and she could hardly completely settle accounts with Hamira and Kohar Utudetain unless she dug up the filthy secrets of the past. Thus, in the end, after the fourth war concluded, she abdicated to avoid
Speaker A
the trouble. As for now, with Saratobi Herusen still sitting in the Hokag's seat, she truly did not want to come to this dark village, even if its name was the life's work of her two grandfathers.
Speaker A
But Jeriah was too outrageous. He ignored her resistance and even threatened to fight her just to drag her back to Kohaa.Sunady was furious yet utterly helpless. After all, the way Jeriah had brought her back to Kenoha, this time was almost the exact opposite
Speaker A
of the method in the original story. In the original tale, Jeriah had relied on Narudo Uzumaki to make Sununade change her mind willingly and returned to Kenoha to deal with the mess. But now, she had been practically dragged back by
Speaker A
Jeriah. Ever since he found her, he had shamelessly insisted she come back. And despite her clear refusal, he clung to her like a persistent shadow, causing her to be recognized wherever she went.
Speaker A
As everyone knew, she had racked up enormous debts outside. Usually when she and Shizuni traveled, whether gambling, lodging, or anything else, they would disguise themselves to evade creditors.
Speaker A
Now, thanks to Jeriah's antics, everyone knew she was the legendary sonade of Kohaa. In the end, she had no choice but to return. Yet, at the same time, the thought of all the recent troubles in Kenoha made her head throbb with pain.
Speaker A
Indeed, though she often stayed away from Kohaa, she had her own channels for gathering news about the village. So she was well aware that a formidable Aiha named Achiha Jeene had emerged someone who could stand against Husen Saratobi
Speaker A
without yielding. So knew this all too well. But the problem was they expected her to handle something that even Husen Saratobi and the others couldn't. Damn it. Did she even have that kind of ability? And even if she did, the
Speaker A
question was she didn't want to help her Saratobi anyway. So at that moments decided she would simply slack off. No matter what Harusen said, she would not get involved. As long as she didn't attack the uchiha, they probably
Speaker A
wouldn't provoke her either. Good that settled. Since Jeriah had already targeted her, it was hard to stay hidden outside Kinoa anyway. So, for the next while, she would just stay in the village and do nothing. Meanwhile, Jeriah, unaware of Sununade's
Speaker A
intentions, led her straight to the Hokag's office. Old man, I'm back. Mission accomplished. I brought Sununade back. Jeriah entered the office, his face brimming with pride and joy. Yes, he couldn't handle the Aiha himself, but he was confident that with Sununade's
Speaker A
abilities, she could resolve the village's turmoil. In response, merely sneered at the people present, not even bothering to greet them. She might not have the power to take revenge for past grievances, but she could at least ignore these people, and she was
Speaker A
confident they wouldn't dare act against her easily. Otherwise, if they tore away the last shred of the Synu clan's dignity, these old men wouldn't be able to face the entire village, let alone deal with the Aiha. So, not Aara. Do you
Speaker A
have no manners? This is the Hokage's office, not your private residence. Can't you even knock? Especially youade.
Speaker A
Who are you making that sour face at? Can't you even say a simple greeting? Do you have any respect for us elders left?
Speaker A
Kohari Utetain slammed the table clearly displeased with the pair. After all, if Aihaene hadn't been so troublesome, she would never have agreed to let these two return. Hamuridokado remained silent. He too was disgusted by their lack of decorum. It was hard to imagine what
Speaker A
status the elders would have if were pushed into power. Yes, after their three-way discussion, they had already decided to push Tsunady as the next Hokag. There was no other choice.
Speaker A
Aihajin was too formidable and they were no match for him. So, the only strategy was to retreat in order to advance. If they could installs as the fifth Hokag, the entire situation would instantly reverse for the Synu name still carried
Speaker A
weight in Kenoha. But the problem was looking at Sununade's current attitude. Everyone's heart sank. They had managed to manipulate Manado Namic case, but could they manipulate sununade? Just as the Kenoha F3 were pondering sununade let out a contemptuous snort. So you
Speaker A
don't welcome me at all. I knew I shouldn't have come back. Shizuni, let's go. With that, she crossed her arms and stroed toward the exit. Shizuni clutching a little pig looked bewildered but followed behind. How dare you?
Speaker A
Hamurokado couldn't contain himself and bellowed. Have you no sense of decency? Sorry, I don't snorted disdainfully. So I won't get in your way. She said it casually, but she didn't stop walking.
Speaker A
On the other side, Jeriah's mind exploded at the site. He blocked Sunsade's path. Don't be angry. The village is in real danger now. This is no time for a tantrum.
Speaker A
Remained icy. Jeriah, get out of my way. She felt no warmth toward him. After all these years, as comrades had long seen through Jeriah's true nature, he was a fool brainwashed by Mount Mayaboku, clinging to unrealistic dreams, yet
Speaker A
lacking the necessary courage and sense of responsibility. That was the real reason she had always looked down on him. At the same time, he was stubborn to a fault. He had a twisted will to protect Kenoha, fully aware of the
Speaker A
vill's true ailments. Yet, he lacked the boldness to change anything, only wanting to be a patcher who barely held things together. Why had she chosen Dan Ko back then instead of Jeriah? Did she really not know Jeriah's feelings? No,
Speaker A
the reason was simple. He was too useless. How could she choose a partner like Jeriah? Give me a little face.
Speaker A
Jeriah kept trying. Butsunade simply raised her fist, ready to knock him aside. Just then, Harusen Saratobi, who was smoking, let out a sigh. enough?
Speaker A
Hasn't it been long enough? Haven't you come to terms with it yet? The village is indeed in danger now. You wouldn't want the hard work of your two grandfathers to be destroyed with you.
Speaker A
Let me be frank. We intend to make you the fifth Hokag. We are old and it's time we retired. Kóa carries the ideals of Hashiamasama and the legacy of Toborama sensei. It will be the place you protect in the future. Stay
Speaker A
tomorrow. I will send a letter to the daimo and arrange your succession ceremony. Hirusen Saratobi with deep affection. He was confident in his ability to controls if she became the fifth Hokag, which was the desperate choice forced upon the Leafs F3. There
Speaker A
was no choice. Aihajin's tactics were too ruthless, and many ninja clans had all defected to his side. They knew very well that their reputations had long been tarnished due to their years of mishandling. Now, to reverse the decline, they had to rely on Sinja
Speaker A
heritage, and they were old hands at this kind of manipulation. Having already experimented once with Minato Name pulling strings from behind the scenes, they were quite adept. In truth, among the three legendary Sanin, as long as it wasn't Orochimaru who took the
Speaker A
position, they didn't really care whether its or Jeriah because both of them lacked the ruthlessness to resist.
Speaker A
They would be easily led by the nose. Orochimaru, however, was different. That man's blood ran too cold. If he truly became Hokag, they would all be forced out. Because if they refused to yield power, Orochimaru would actually dare to
Speaker A
kill them. Hokage hump. Only fools would want to be Hokage. Iunade would never do such a stupid thing. For such matters, find someone else. Sonad said with utter disdain, speaking the very words from the original story. However, in the
Speaker A
originals, Sununade's words were more veiled, and everyone simply thought she was affected by the deaths of Nwaki and Dan Ko. But in reality, she had long seen the true nature of power, knowing that even the Hokag was a puppet. These
Speaker A
old men would never willingly give up their authority. They would spout nonsense like, "You're still young. Let us help you manage things and turn the so-called Hokag into a puppet controlled by them." How dare you? This is the
Speaker A
vill's decision. You just need to accept it. Do you realize that your actions border on being a missing mean?
Speaker A
Koharudain and Hamurokado couldn't help but start ranting again. Meanwhile, Haruen Saratobi felt weary and snapped.
Speaker A
Both of you shut up. Isn't the situation messy enough already? Herus and you. The two were taken aback, but unfortunately Harus and Saratobi couldn't be bothered to argue with those fools knowing that stabilizing Sununade was the top priority. Otherwise, who knew how
Speaker A
chaotic the village would become? Then, after silencing the two, he turned to sununade with a look of deep affection.
Speaker A
Staysunade. You wouldn't want the legacy of your two grandfathers to be completely ruined by the Aiha, would you? Remained unmoved because she knew very well that if not for the misdeeds of these old men, the Aiha would never
Speaker A
have been driven to such extremes. However, before she could speak, Jeriah chimed in again. I beg you, sununade, just agree. Seeing the village torn apart like this, doesn't it pain your heart? You are the only one for the
Speaker A
position of fifth hokag. Unfortunately, sununade's face was full of contempt. Even as everyone pleaded, her expression remained utterly impassive. Indeed, according to her own wishes, unless Haruen Saratobi were dead, she wouldn't take a single step into Kinoa. This time
Speaker A
was purely accidental. She had only been pestered by Jeriah and had no choice but to return becoming Hokag. Not a chance.
Speaker A
However, just as sununade was about to speak of village Jonahan suddenly knocked on the door. Everyone present was taken back. Especially Hirus and Suratobi whose face showed clear displeasure. Why did someone have to interrupt at such a critical moment? But
Speaker A
before he could speak, Jaya opened the door. What is it? Nar Shikaku, the adviser, has submitted a letter of inquiry to the Joning Council. The messenger's forehead was covered in cold sweat, his eyes filled with fear. Upon hearing this, Jeriah's heart skipped a
Speaker A
beat. He knew well that Narashikaku had already defected to the Aiha side. So was this another move from them. Jeriah instinctively took the letter then waved his hand to dismiss the Jonan. There was no choice. The atmosphere in the Hokag's
Speaker A
office was tense not suitable for ordinary ninja to linger. And as for that, the Jonan said nothing more and left without a word. Obviously, he also knew the village's situation had been off lately. So many clan members had
Speaker A
resigned and joined the ichiha. Even though he didn't know exactly what was happening, he knew better than to get involved in such messy affairs. Then after the Jonan left, Jeriah closed the door again. Without regard for his status, he immediately opened the letter
Speaker A
and read at his face turning pale. Saratobi sensei, we have a big problem. Everyone take a look. If this isn't handled properly, it will definitely cause a huge upheaval. We need to find a solution quickly. Knowing Aihaene as I
Speaker A
do, that bastard definitely has other hidden tricks up his sleeve. Jeriah's panic was felt by everyone. Realizing that Achihajene was making another move, they recalled their previous confrontations with him and instantly felt their scalps tingle. That Achiha is
Speaker A
truly relentless. Hamurito spat out. Kohatain snorted, "Damn it, we should have killed him long ago." Meanwhile, Harusen Saratobi didn't echo their sentiments. Instead, he read the letter of inquiry. Then, his face turned livid and his body began to tremble slightly.
Speaker A
The others also sense something a miss and hurriedly took the letter to read. Evensunade leaned in. She too wanted to see firsthand what Achihaja Jins tactics were like. H. After reading it, their scalps went numb. The content of
Speaker A
the letter was simple. The village's financial records for the past 3 years didn't add up, and a large number of funds had mysteriously vanished.
Speaker A
Considering that the war had ended 2 to 3 years ago, yet compensation for Fallen Ninja hadn't been paid, mission fees for all ninja hadn't been settled, and various supplies and equipment needed restocking that couldn't be delayed any longer. All the major clans had jointly
Speaker A
submitted the letter of inquiry. They demanded an audit. They wanted to know where the funds that had mysteriously disappeared over the past 3 years had actually been embezzled. The letter was wellfounded and irrefutable. No one could find a reason to reject it, but it
Speaker A
also pushed the village's top brass into a corner. Indeed, knew very well that those vanished funds had most likely been pocketed by the high-ranking officials of the village. In the past, Herusen Saratobi and his group had strong control. And even though the
Speaker A
clans knew the truth, they didn't dare to challenge them on such matters. But now that they had joined the Etchiha, the tables had turned. Sunady's gaze grew profound, then fell into utter silence. There was no denying it. Aiha
Speaker A
Jyns methods were a master stroke of precision, ruthlessness, and accuracy. Though it seemed merely a light inquiry letter, it directly cornered the entire high-ranking officials of Konoha. For such a formal document could not be stopped.
Speaker A
Previously, everyone was well aware of the high-ranking officials covert maneuvers, but no one dared to bring them into the open. Now, however, it was different. Since a formal letter had been submitted, the matter had to be addressed, or else their governing
Speaker A
foundation would crumble. This straightforward tactic made evens sai admiration. Aiha was indeed formidable. Fortunately, she hadn't been persuaded by this group. Otherwise, if she had truly become Hokag, she would have been forced to confront Achihajene head-on.
Speaker A
No way. Given the means Aihaene had displayed, Sununade didn't consider herself his match. Of course, that was the case. Even ifsade had a way to handle it, she had no desire to become Hokag, why bother? She wasn't foolish.
Speaker A
Taking the position at this critical juncture would only mean clearing the path for these old fools. Yet now, she was in no hurry to leave. She was intensely curious to see how the three old men would handle the current
Speaker A
situation. Yes, she was ready to watch the show. Old man, what do we do? This can't be delayed. Oh, we must find a solution. and quickly. I suspect Aiha has more moves and we can't give him time to strike. Jeriah's face was grim,
Speaker A
his tone heavy with gravity. Indeed, he was well aware of the village's underhanded dealings. He despised certain actions of the high-ranking officials, which was why he constantly sought to escape the village. But equally, he absolutely disapproved of Achihaja Jyns actions, for they
Speaker A
would plunge the village into turmoil. Even if the high-ranking officials of Kohha were truly problematic, gentler measures could be taken, but this kind of behavior would destabilize the village. Moreover, he knew deep down that the so-called investigation was a
Speaker A
sham, Aiha Jyn's true intention was to target the high-ranking officials. And compared to before this time, he was aiming to shake the very foundation of the Hokag. After all, the villages finances had been troubled. And with war death benefits and mission commissions
Speaker A
for all ninjas, the village had delayed payments for 2 or 3 years. Once this erupted, chaos would be inevitable. Even just imagining the scene made Jeriah's heart tremble. Yes, Herzen, this matter must be handled quickly. We need to find
Speaker A
a solution. Damn Aiha. They're too insolent. Kohar Utain and Hamir Mito were instantly panicked. No choice. This matter was too critical. If it were fully exposed, they would all be finished. And as for that, Ian Saratobi smoked more and more frequently. His
Speaker A
mind racing without anyone's reminder. He knew the gravity of this issue. But the problem was he couldn't think of a solution. The Aiha side had employed an open strategy. Their own hands were dirty. So how could he come up with a
Speaker A
way on such short notice? Meanwhile, on the other side, watching the troubled expressions almost burst out laughing.
Speaker A
Good heavens. During her time in Kenoha, she rarely saw such faces. Thinking this, she was even less inclined to leave. Instead, she found a stool, sat down, crossed her arms, and prepared to watch the show. The fire is at her
Speaker A
eyebrows, and you're still so leisurely. Think of a way. Koharu could not bear to see idol, so she couldn't help but scold. To this, rolled her eyes and ignored her. Her Senu lineage alone ensured her invincibility. Did this old
Speaker A
hag think she could threaten her? Dream on. Hamira was displeased but said nothing. Clearly aware that was beyond their control. Herzen didn't even bother to look at knowing that as long as she didn't cause trouble, it was enough.
Speaker A
Expecting more. Impossible. But Jeriah couldn't hold back. He spoke urgently. You should think of something too. If this goes wrong, it could truly throw the village into chaos. To this, sneered. If you ask me, just let them investigate. It's a formal letter. The
Speaker A
content is quite detailed. According to procedure, we should investigate. If someone is found guilty, deal with them directly. As soon as she spoke, everyone was silenced. Damn it. Do you really need to say that? The key was that they
Speaker A
all had guilty consciences. They wanted to reprimands, but couldn't find a reason. Otherwise, wouldn't that be admitting they themselves were guilty?
Speaker A
Jeriah's face darkened. Displeased him deeply. The village was in such a state, and she remained indifferent. Did she not care about the village at all? Of course, he didn't voice it. He knew that if he did, would answer with two words. No. So with a
Speaker A
sigh, he could only start thinking of a solution. The others did the same. Suddenly faced with such a big incident, they had no energy to bicker with sununade. Finding a way was the priority. But unfortunately, against Achiha Jyn's open strategy, they could
Speaker A
think of no good solution. Refuse? Impossible. That would only prove their guilt. Plunging the village into chaos.
Speaker A
Agree? Even worse. Because the ninja world had only entered the era of hidden villages a few decades ago and no sophisticated method of falsifying accounts had developed. So if the matter were made public, all their dirty secrets would be exposed. So alas, in
Speaker A
their helplessness, all they could do was sigh. In the end, they chose to stall. They hoped that by delaying new variables might emerge. Jeriah had a nagging sense of unease because Achiha Jyn's personality likely anticipated this, so he probably had more moves
Speaker A
prepared. Stalling wouldn't solve the problem, but the issue was that he couldn't think of a better solution. So, aside from Asai, he could only remain silent. On the other side, seeing that there was no more interesting drama, simply left the Hokag building. No one
Speaker A
stopped her as the inquiry letter had consumed their attention, they had no mind to force Sununade to become Hokag.
Speaker A
Even if they wanted to push her, it would have to wait until after this matter was settled. After all, involving so many ninja's death benefits and mission commissions. If the high-ranking officials ignored the matter and instead held the Hokag inauguration ceremony,
Speaker A
countless villagers and civilian ninjas would explode in anger. Because these civilians were the ones most in need of money. 3 days later, the Kenoha high-ranking officials still had not found a solution. They and Jeriah were still working in the Hokag's office. But
Speaker A
unfortunately, what the Kenoha high-ranking officials did not know was that the Aiha supporting plan had been set in motion 3 days ago. The spies of the Achiha and countless ninja clans had long been cooperating with the police department to spread the news of the
Speaker A
inquiry among the villagers, but it was still in the incubation period in an izakaya inside a private room. Sunade was already slightly tipsy with empty sake bottles scattered everywhere. Sama You've had enough. Shisun was very helpless looking at sununade before her
Speaker A
truly at her wits end. And as for this, however, showed a look of disdain, charging the village openly. This kind of opportunity is rare. Naturally, I have to drink a bit more. After saying that, she took another gulp of sake, a
Speaker A
hint of bitterness flickering in her eyes. Yes, she was not a born drunkard. She was merely drowning her sorrows. In truth, long ago, she was only fond of gambling and rarely touched alcohol. But after Nwaki and Dan died, she became
Speaker A
crazily addicted to drink. After all, only when drinking could she temporarily forget the anguish in her heart. Not to mention that this time to force her into the position of Hokag, the village had even decided to let her charge all her
Speaker A
expenses during this period to the village's account. Even though she had never intended to become Hokag, she would not let such a bargain slipped by.
Speaker A
Shisun was utterly helpless. Finally, she stopped thinking about it and began to eat her own food. In contrast, grew more irritated as she drank. What are those people outside making a fuss about? Can't they let me drink in peace?
Speaker A
Shisun go and see. Sununade while drinking threw aside an empty bottle and spoke angrily and asked for this.
Speaker A
Although Shizun was very reluctant, she still left the room. However, when she returned moments later, her face turned deathly pale. Soon sama let's go. Those people outside are acting very strange.
Speaker A
They seem to be planning to smash the Hokag building. We'd better go back. Shizun was frightened, her eyes full of panic. There was no helping it. Although her medical ninjutsu was decent, she had little confidence in her combat
Speaker A
abilities. And to be honest, she had been taken away from Kenoha by Sununade since childhood. So naturally, she had no attachment to the village. If not forsunade choosing to return, she would never have thought of coming back. Thus,
Speaker A
as someone who felt no bond with the village, her first instinct upon facing this situation was to leave. On the other hand, upon hearing this, dazed eyes instantly cleared. Smash the Hokag building. Yes. Shizun immediately replied when asked. Sonade was
Speaker A
dumbfounded. Good heavens. She could hardly imagine ordinary people having such audacity. No, something was very wrong. She immediately threw down the sake bottle, left the private room, and went to the hall where she saw a man shouting loudly. Friends, compatriots,
Speaker A
many of our ninjas have shed blood and sacrificed their lives for the village. Countless relatives and friends have died on the battlefield, yet their pensions have not been paid for two or 3 years. Nar adviser recently discovered that the funds allocated by the daimo to
Speaker A
the village have all mysteriously disappeared. Even though an inquiry was submitted a few days ago to audit the accounts, there has been no response from the Hokag building. What does this mean? It means the village high-ranking officials know there is something shady
Speaker A
in the finances, but they still dare not let us audit. This proves that the problem might lie with the Kenoha high-ranking officials themselves. Think of the fallen comrades, think of our war commission fees. Are you willing to let
Speaker A
the money earned with our lies be embezzled by certain village high-ranking officials? No, I will never accept it. Those who are willing to follow me, come with me and smashed the Hokag building. After saying this, the leader waved his hand and left the
Speaker A
izakaya first. The others followed behind. There was anger burning in everyone's eyes for the money embezzled by the village high-ranking officials was earned with the lives of their relatives and friends. That money was stained with their blood. And on the
Speaker A
other side, having witnessed the entire incident, intoxication instantly dissipated. She immediately told Shizun to use a transformation technique and then transformed herself into an ordinary-l looking ninja. She followed the crowd out of the izakaya. Then she was utterly stunned. She saw a hospital
Speaker A
not far away engulfed in flame shops owned by the clans of the Hokag high-ranking officials being smashed and even the mission hall and the A&BU building were being stormed by villagers.
Speaker A
pale and her scalp tingled. Shizun was also terrified by the scene and couldn't help but asks Zama, "Should we go help?" shook her head saying nothing. At this moment, she was convinced that this was not a spontaneous uprising of the
Speaker A
villagers as someone was definitely pulling strings behind the scenes. Then who was it? Almost without thinking it had to be the however she thought of Nwaki Dan and the fallen members of the Senju clan. Could she really sacrifice
Speaker A
herself for this Kohaa high-ranking officials shrouded in darkness? Honestly, at this moment, she only wanted to flee. But unfortunately, she knew she couldn't. That idiot Jeriah would definitely come looking for her.
Speaker A
Therefore, since she couldn't avoid this matter to prevent Jeriah from pestering her, she finally made up her mind.
Speaker A
Shisun, do you trust me? Sama, I trust you. Shizuns face was calm and she spoke directly. Wherever you go, I will go. Good. Then let's go. Sonade said directly to the Aiha clan. Shisun was dumbfounded. Sinade sama. What did you
Speaker A
say? The Aiha. Sonad's tone was calm. After saying this, she turned and walked toward the Aiha clan grounds. Although Shizun's mind was blank, unable to understand why made this decision, she still followed behind Sonade. Yes, her bond with the village was shallow. Her
Speaker A
only family was naturally she would unconditionally follow whateversade chose. Soon after, before Sonade and the other could even step into the Aiha clan grounds, they were stopped by a patrol team. However, fortunately, in this patrol team, there was a Nar clan member
Speaker A
who recognized sonade. Sunade sama, what brings you here today? The leading Nar clan member took the initiative to speak as the namesade echoed the rest of the patrol instinctively relaxed their guard. They might not have metsunade in person, but they certainly knew the
Speaker A
name, one of the legendary Sanin of Kinoa. More importantly, the rumors spread by Aiha Gene had made them well aware of the village leadership's persecution of the Senju clan, defecting to the Aiha. Go report it. Sonade said with her arms crossed, her tone utterly
Speaker A
indifferent. Hearing this, the patrol member's minds went completely blank. What? Sonade defecting to the ichi. None of them could believe it, even instinctively thinking it a joke. After all, Sonad's identity was no simple matter. Still, they dared not be
Speaker A
negligent. One of them hurried toward the clan compound while the remaining two respectfully escorted Sununade inside. Moments later, Sununade was brought into Jyn's large courtyard and directly led to the reception room. So, your Aiha? Yes, please have a seat.
Speaker A
Looking at the sununade before him, Aiha Jyn's expression remained calm. Once sat across from him, Aiha Jeene poured her a cup of tea, then spoke with genuine curiosity. I truly didn't expect you to choose to defect to the Aiha. That was
Speaker A
the truth. This was the fifth Hokag from the original story. A person who also held no love for the Aiha. It couldn't be helped. How could the thousand-year hatred between the Sinju and Aiha be erased by just founding a village? It's
Speaker A
often said that Tobarama had a grudge against the Aiha, but that's actually a misconception. The truth is the entire Synu clan disliked the Aiha except for Hashiamarama who truly regarded them as friends. Sonade was no exception. It was
Speaker A
only because they shared the same village that she didn't target the Aiha as blatantly as the Kohaa F4. That was precisely why Aiha gene was curious. He had thoughts would at most stay neutral with a small chance of becoming the
Speaker A
fifth Hokag and almost zero chance of joining the Aiha. So when he learned that Sununade actually wanted to join the Aiha, his first thought was disbelief and his second was that the woman had lost her mind. Meanwhile, Sununade's expression remained
Speaker A
remarkably calm. Even though her eyes betrayed a hint of discomfort when looking at Aiha Jeene, she eventually picked up the tea he had offered. TCH, it's not sake. My apologies, but I'm not fond of alcohol. It clouds my judgment.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene shook his head and he was telling the truth. In his past life, he never liked drinking. In this life, the pressure was even greater. his nerves constantly taught. He dreaded that if he drank the root would finish him off
Speaker A
right after. Even now, it was still the same. Though the Aiha situation seemed favorable, they had only just reached the same level as the village's top brass. Only if this operation succeeded completely, could they truly suppress the Kohaa leadership? Yes, it was merely
Speaker A
suppression. There was still a long way from success. Not willing to drink? Then your life must be quite dull. Even the Nar clan occasionally indulges in sake to unwind. With all that scheming every day, what joy is there in life? But
Speaker A
never mind. It's none of my business anyway. As for why I chose to defect to the Aiha, just take it as me being kicked by a donkey. So down the tea in one gulp her mind, clearing slightly.
Speaker A
Then she froze. She had actually joined the ha. Why had she done that? Sobering up a bit, she stood there stunned.
Speaker A
Though she loathed Herusen Saratobi and the other elders, why would she choose to side with the truly a mistake made under the influence? But since the die was cast, all she could do was sign not knowing what else to say, what to do.
Speaker A
She couldn't exactly tell Achiha Jeene that she'd had a few drinks, then recalling the village's darkness, impulsively stormed to the Aiha compound, right? On the other hand, though, Sonade hadn't revealed the real reason Aiha sensed her awkwardness.
Speaker A
Combined with the heavy smell of alcohol on her, he had already guessed most of the truth. After a moment of deliberation, he spoke slowly.
Speaker A
"Ladysunade, your words are like the fed not understanding the hungry. If I didn't scheme, the Aiha would have been annihilated long ago, and I'd have best be a missing meme now. With such a minced survival pressure, how could I
Speaker A
find room for joy? Of course, I roughly understand your situation, Lady Sonade. The Aiha are free to come and go. We forced no one. If you have regrets, feel free to leave at any time. Aiha gene remained utterly calm. Having sensed
Speaker A
Sununade's emotions, he immediately gave his word. Yes, perhaps sununade's status as a medical ninja and the last singu was a huge boon to the Aiha. But he truly didn't place much importance on it. To put it plainly, in Aiiah Jyn's
Speaker A
grand scheme, there was no place for Sununade, so he naturally didn't care if she left. He had enough confidence in himself to achieve all his goals through the righteous path. Hearing this, was taken a back her face full of
Speaker A
astonishment. Though she seemed to be wallowing in self-destruction, she was still clear-headed about herself. Even if she didn't carry the Synu surname, the names remained irreplaceable in Kohaa. Otherwise, Harusen and Jeriah wouldn't have gone mad trying to bring
Speaker A
her back. But looking at the calm face of Aiha, she couldn't help feeling a bit irritated. Oh, such generosity. Aren't you afraid I might actually become the fifth Hokag? That would surely have a deep impact on your plans, wouldn't it?
Speaker A
The moment I nod, the chaotic civilian ninjas, villagers, and even the daimo would all recognize my position without question. Even among the clans you've won over, I'm confident I can win some of them over. Aren't you afraid of that?
Speaker A
Was inwardly confident as she truly had that capability. Of course, the precondition was that she must not exact revenge on the Saratobi and other clans or she would face the hostility of all the ninja clans. After all, those clans
Speaker A
had played an ignoble role in the fall of the Senju. Though they also hated Harusen and the others, they feared even more that she is the fifth Hokag would settle old scores with them. Therefore, as long as she gave up pursuing the
Speaker A
village's top brass, she could definitely ascend to the position of the fifth Hokag. Aiha his countenance serene. Observing Sununade's barely concealed fury, he nearly laughed aloud.
Speaker A
This woman, old enough to be his mother, acted more like a child. Yet, after a moment's deliberation, he instantly grasped the underlying reason. Examining Sonad's earlier years, though they were fraught with tragedy. Her brother and lover both perished, and the Synu clan
Speaker A
dissolved into oblivion, her personal circumstances remained rather comfortable. Unavoidably to preserve the Syninju legacy, Saratobi Herusen, dared not overstep with Sununade, the last of her lineage, and often indulged her whims. Even Danzo, the shadow of the Shinobi world, refrained from scheming
Speaker A
against her less Saratobi retaliate. Hence, Sunady presented a paradoxical figure. Though her heart harbored deep shadows, she occasionally displayed the petulence of a young girl. He glanced at then spoke with casual indifference. I rarely engage in arguments as they are
Speaker A
meaningless. But considering your actions do save me considerable time, I shall indulge in this game of debate with you. First, the ninja clans will never choose you. There are two reasons.
Speaker A
First, they have already betrayed the Kenoha leadership. If they then betray the Achiha, their credibility would be shattered beyond repair, and no future ruler would trust them. Of course, I know you would trust them, but each clan bears the weight of an entire lineage.
Speaker A
They dare not gamble on such a risk. Second, I offered the clans a hope, a promise not to restrict their development. This alone makes them impossible for you to recruit. From the villages perspective, whether you become the fifth Hokag or not has no bearing on
Speaker A
me, because the village is now a colossal mess. The Kohaa leadership's tyrannical rule has left the village riddled with wounds. Take the current issues of ninja pensions and war compensation. Can you truly bring yourself to eradicate the Saratobi and
Speaker A
the other three clans? You are too soft-hearted. I am certain you cannot. Your only recourse would be to seek more funds from the daimo. That might temporarily stabilize the village. But never forget, unless you fully purge the vill's upper echelons, this injustice
Speaker A
will remain a thorn in the hearts of the villagers and shinobi. And do not forget, I will not cease stirring trouble. Since the Kohaa leadership has been so inhumane, I can easily ignite public outrage at any moment. As long as
Speaker A
you refuse to eliminate the current leadership and conduct a thorough purge, Kenoha will never know peace. Finally, even if you could steal yourself to destroy those old relics, Iene could still establish a new Kohaa. And I am confident the damo would support it. The
Speaker A
reason is simpler. No matter how close your relationship with the daimo, as a creature of power, he cannot help but fear an uncontrollable entity like a ninja village. Even though the daimo cannot control the Achiha, a new village
Speaker A
hostile to Kinoa would be a welcome development for a power seeker like him. At the very least, he could play favorites. Supporting the weaker village to subtly influence the balance. Would the daimo refuse such an opportunity? On my side, I have the entire Aiha clan,
Speaker A
plus all major and minor ninja clans of Kohaa and perhaps some civilians from outside. Within a decade, a new Kohaa would emerge. But on your side with vested interests like Saratobi Herusen dragging you down how many prodigies can
Speaker A
arise from the common populace. You must admit that ninja clans produce geniuses at a higher rate. And with their secret techniques, they are more likely to become powerhouses. You know this well.
Speaker A
Throughout Kenoha's history, the only notable powerhouses from commoner origins are Jeriah Orochimaru and Manado Namic. But what of the geniuses from the ninja clans? Of course, I do not believe you would side with the Kenoha leadership. You share enmity with them.
Speaker A
What you truly care about is the village itself, the cherished legacy of your grandfathers. Thus, this debate is indeed pointless. I have already prepared countless strategies. No matter what Saratobi Herusen does, I have a tailored response. Having said that,
Speaker A
Aiha raised his teacup again, refusing to look at Sunady. Yes, to him, it was meaningless. It would be advantageous ifade joined him. She would be another card to expedite the collapse of the village leadership. But likewise, how much of a help would she be? In truth,
Speaker A
it was modest. Even ifsunade chose to aid the leadership or became the fifth Hokag, he still had countless countermeasures. The Kohaa leadership was doomed if not for his reluctance to waste resources. He could even repurpose the Saratobi and the other three clans
Speaker A
as assets and his weariness of the sage of six paths not wanting to draw the attention of those behind the scenes.
Speaker A
Otherwise, he would have eliminated the leadership long ago without waiting so long. Meanwhile, Sununade after hearing this could not help but tremble.
Speaker A
Aihajin's plan was too comprehensive. She racked her brain but found no way to break the deadlock. Unless her grandfather could be resurrected to crush the Aiha with absolute power, it would be feudal. And this was without the Aiha resorting to force, merely
Speaker A
political maneuvering. Remember, both Achihajene and Fagaku had already awakened their Mangeko and their forces comprise Kenoha's elite, the Aiha, and various ninja clans. Could the current village withstand such pressure? Even if she joined the leadership, the only powerhouses available would be herself,
Speaker A
Jeriah, and Saratobi Herusen. But Saratobi was old and she suffered from hemophobia. Could she rely solely on Jeriah? Realizing this tsunady let out a deep sigh. You win. It seems I am not that important after all. But for me,
Speaker A
that is rather a good thing. I will join the Aiha. However, you do not need me for the conflict with the village. I will handle the medical affairs from now on. Of course, there is a condition settle my outstanding debts. I am worth
Speaker A
that price, am I not? Achihaji nodded at Ssunade's demand. There was no need for deliberation on this point. Setting aside the psychological impacts, joining the Aiha, would have on Kenoha's populace, a top tier medical saint alone, was worth the price. Money. He
Speaker A
had never considered such trivialities. Even if the Aiha currently appeared to be living off their past glory, he had never bothered to engage in commerce.
Speaker A
Yet, if he wished, he could acquire wealth beyond measure. Economic development could wait until he secured the position of Hokag. No problem.
Speaker A
Starting tomorrow, you may select promising talents from the Aiha compound and various ninja clans and set up the medical framework as soon as possible.
Speaker A
As for the rest, you need not concern yourself. Aiha Jyns tone was calm. Having settled the matter, he directly raised his teacup, signaling the end of the conversation. Yes, he had nothing more to discuss with. Though she appeared remarkably youthful and
Speaker A
beautiful, seemingly possessing the secret of eternal youth, she was essentially old enough to be his mother.
Speaker A
He had no interest in developing any relationship beyond the professional. To this tsunady, though initially puzzled by the aihas implication, quickly grasped the meaning after a moment of thought. Thus, her expression turned exceedingly sour, for she had never been
Speaker A
so blatantly dismissed in her entire life. Yet, she said nothing more merely snorted and departed. Meanwhile, in stark contrast to the tranquil Aha compound, the entire village had descended into utter chaos. Sounds of smashing and the crackling of raging
Speaker A
fires filled every corner. Chaos. complete chaos, especially since Husen Saratobi, in a bid to preserve his already diminishing benevolent facade, had initially resorted to persuasion and other ineffective measures against the villagers excessive actions, thereby restraining the Yu. This inevitably led
Speaker A
to the current dire situation. Helpless, the police department was now a mere ornament, and the Yu under Herusen's orders could not attack the villagers without cause. Perhaps at the very beginning, even when incited, the villagers had exercised restraint. But
Speaker A
later, things changed. Many opportunists sensing the chaos began to exploit the turmoil for personal gain and inevitably the situation spiraled out of control.
Speaker A
Fortunately, Husen Saratobi was a seasoned veteran. With the police department refusing to obey orders and his black gloved assistant Danzo absent from the village, leaving him without a scapegoat, he quickly regained the decisiveness of the ninja hero. Under
Speaker A
his command, the U immediately took action. In the end, the U, now unshackled, began forcibly dispersing the crowd and even resorted to killing those who disobeyed. Only by around 2:00 in the morning did they barely manage to contain the chaos. Jeriah stood there,
Speaker A
his clothes filthy, his face bearing traces of smoke and fire, his white hair disheveled and faint blood stains visible on his body. Yet his eyes were filled with sorrow. Seeing the village now in ruins so battered and desolate,
Speaker A
he trembled with rage. However, in the end, he let out a sigh and reluctantly made his way back to the Hokag's office.
Speaker A
Jeriah, have you brought the situation under control? Herusen Suratobi remained seated behind his desk, puffing continuously on his pipe, his eyes clouded with inscrable gloom. Seeing Jeriah enter, he managed a force greeting. To this, Jeriah gazed at his
Speaker A
teacher's aged face and the shattered window pain in the Hokag's office. He opened his mouth several times, yet failed to utter a single complete sentence. He truly could not comprehend how things had escalated to such a state. After a long silence, a soft sigh
Speaker A
escaped him. Don't worry, old man. The situation is barely under control. Those who deliberately stirred up trouble have been either captured or killed. But I don't know what to do about the aftermath. Jeriah's voice was low. His eyes filled with dejection. Helpless. He
Speaker A
knew that after tonight's incident, the village could never again speak of the will of fire. Of course, tonight's events were brutally suppressed. How could anyone still believe in the will of fire after this? Yet at the same time, he understood his teacher's
Speaker A
predicament. Tonight's incident was too severe. If not forcefully suppressed, the situation would have been even more chaotic. Speaking of which, the Achiha were to blame. Even though no Achiha had appeared tonight, Jeriah knew deep down that the Achiha were undoubtedly behind
Speaker A
this scheme. However, despite his burning fury, he could not attack the Aiha. Doing so would mean a complete rupture. If a full-scale battle broke out, the entire Kohaa would be reduced to rubble. Not only were they no match
Speaker A
for the Aiha faction, but even if they somehow managed to eliminate the Aiha, how could the devastated village face the other ninja villages? So alas, he could only let out a helpless sign knowing not what else to do. Meanwhile,
Speaker A
on the other side, Husen Saratobi remained silent. Faced with the situation that had escalated to such a point, even he was at a loss. His black gloved assistant, Danzo, had completely left the village, clearly indicating that he would not return until Herusen
Speaker A
cleaned up this mess. Kohar Utitain and Hamir Midito were also unreliable. Countless ninja clans had all pledged allegiance to the Aiha. The only ones he could rely on now were Jeriah and Sununade. Thinking this, he immediately asked, "Where is Sununade?" "I'm not
Speaker A
sure," Jariah replied somewhat awkwardly, but then added, "Should I go find her?" Obviously, due to the night's chaos, they were unaware that Sununade in a drunken stuper had already defected to the thus in Jera's minds, Sinade was either at a bar or gambling. Finding
Speaker A
her, he thought, would not be difficult. To this, her Saratobi nodded. Emma, bring her back. We have no other choice.
Speaker A
We must hasten to install Sununade as the fifth Hokag. And don't worry, Koharu has already gone to the Daimo's palace. The Daimo will surely agree. The Jonan council is also nothing to fret about. Even if all the ninja clans have
Speaker A
defected to the Aiha, we still hold 40% of the Jonan. I will also urgently promote some Jonan from among the Yu who performed well tonight and even from the ninja stationed at the borders. As long as we pass the Jonan councils, we'll
Speaker A
become the fifth Hokag. Saratobi Husen spoke with a grave tone. Clearly, the current situation left him no room for deliberation. He had to swiftly elevate Sununade to the position of fifth Hokag, leveraging the lingering prestige of the Senju clan and her reputation as a
Speaker A
medical genius to temporarily stabilize the village. As long as the village could be steadied for the moment, those of them who had retreated to the shadows would have time to slowly contend with the etcha. As for the rest, there was no
Speaker A
time to worry about that. Will this do? Remember, we haven't yet found a way to resolve Narashikaka's letter of inquiry.
Speaker A
If we push for the fifth Hokag election now, will the villagers truly accept it?
Speaker A
Jeriah was taken aback. Clearly not entirely agreeing. No choice. It's too rushed. Would this hastily chosen fifth Hokag really gain everyone's recognition? And to this hearing this, Saratobi Herusen shook his head. He merely gave Jeriah a cold glance, then
Speaker A
said in a very serious tone, "Jeriah, there's no time to worry about that." Though it's a bit unfair to at this point, we can only ensure the process goes smoothly. As for whether the villagers are convinced, that's not
Speaker A
something we can concern ourselves with. But it doesn't matter. As long asade sits on the position of fifth hokag, I have ways to make those people fall in line and even genuinely legitimize sununade's position as hokag. While saying this, Saratobi Herusen's face was
Speaker A
full of confidence and determination. Indeed, in matters like this, he truly had a say because when he had ascended as the third Hokag, the situation he faced was even harsher than the present.
Speaker A
At that time, the Senu clan didn't recognize him. him. The Achiha stirred up trouble everywhere and the major ninja clans watched from the sidelines.
Speaker A
Perhaps Mido Uzumaki did give him a hand back then, but in reality, her help wasn't all that significant. The fact that he managed to secure his position as the third Hokag was entirely due to the combined efforts of the Kenoha F4.
Speaker A
If I could secure my position back then, I can helps secure hers now. Is that so?
Speaker A
Understood. I'll go find the Hokag right away. You handle the rest, old man. Farewell. After saying that, Jeriah let out a sigh and prepared to leave.
Speaker A
Indeed, although he also felt a bit sorry for Sonade. After all, in his original plan, he had no intention of setting her up. Even if she became Hokage, it would be like the fourth Hokag Minado Name. A Hokag genuinely
Speaker A
recognized by everyone. But there was no choice. The situation changed too quickly, leaving him overwhelmed. The original plan was no longer possible, but he believed would accept it since they all wanted the village to become better. It might cause sununade some
Speaker A
grievance. But for the sake of her two grandfathers village, Jeriah didn't think sununade would refuse. However, just as Jeriah was about to leave, an U member hurriedly knocked and entered.
Speaker A
Lord Hokag, Lord Jeriah. The U monitoring the Aiha report that Lady Sununade has headed to the Aiha compound piss. Upon hearing this, both of them drew in a sharp breath. Both of them were stunned. Their faces instantly turned pale and their bodies couldn't
Speaker A
help but tremble. What the hell? Sonade joined the Aiha. This joke is not funny at all. Especially Jeriah who directly grabbed the U member. You're joking right Lord Jeriah. I the U stammered but still spoke. I wouldn't dare to make
Speaker A
such a joke. Saratobi Herusen fell silent. Clearly at this moment he could no longer spare a thought for the U before him. His mind went blank and for a moment he didn't know what to say.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, Jeriah stared hard at the U. And only after a long while did he release his grip. The U fled without another word. No choice.
Speaker A
At that moment, Jeriah and Saratobi Harusen were too terrifying. Especially Jeriah's gaze, which seemed as if he wanted to kill the man. Especially considering the suppression measures at the Hokag building earlier that day. A chill ran down his spine. Honestly, if
Speaker A
it weren't for the Aiha looking down their noses and being as cold as ice, he would have defected to the Achiha long ago. Indeed, unlike the major ninja clans who had previously defected to the Achiha, these civilians of humble
Speaker A
origins knew little about the Achiha's true nature and simply took the Kenoha higher-ups propaganda at face value.
Speaker A
Therefore, even though Jeriah had intimidated him, he couldn't make a firm decision. Meanwhile, on the other side, the two in the Hokag's office were unaware of the Usus thoughts. Both of them were frozen in place, and even Saratobi Haruen didn't know what to do.
Speaker A
What to do? All of Saratobi Harusen's plans relied almost entirely onsade. Now thatsade had gone straight to the Aiha, his plans instantly fell apart. However, he was well aware that the issue now wasn't to dwell on this, but to figure
Speaker A
out the quickest way to handle everything. So, after taking a deep breath, his tone turned exceptionally cold. Jeriah, you will become Hokag.
Speaker A
What? Me? Jeriah immediately shook his head. No, absolutely not. I'm not cut out to be Hokage. How could I possibly do such a thing? No, really, no. He refused without even a moment's consideration. Are you kidding? If I
Speaker A
really became the Hokag of Kohaa, would I still have time to search for the savior? Besides, I'm a wanderer sitting in the Hokage's office every day. A forget it. At this moment, he didn't bother to think about the village's
Speaker A
situation. His first thought was to completely sherk this responsibility. After all, compared to the savior who would save the entire ninja world, the current chaos and Kohaa was much more acceptable. After all, if he could find the savior, the entire ninja world would
Speaker A
be saved and then Kenoha would surely return to peace. But unfortunately, Saratobi Herusen wasn't someone easily fooled. In the past, he had tolerated Jeriah's various refusals because he hadn't been pushed to the brink. So, he had no interest in forcing Jeriah. Now,
Speaker A
it was different. If the Aiha really took the Hokag seat, they would definitely settle scores with them.
Speaker A
Therefore, at this moment, Sartobi Herusen displayed his resolve as the hero of Kenoha and directly issued a firm order without any hesitation.
Speaker A
Jariah, I'm not discussing this with you. If you refuse to accept the position of Hokag, I will immediately list you as an S-rank missing mean of Keninoa. You should be well aware that your actions are essentially no different from a rogue ninja. After all,
Speaker A
which ninja would spend so much time wandering around the ninja world? You have no choice. Saratobi Herusen's tone was icy cold. There was no other choice.
Speaker A
The current situation left him no room for hesitation, nor did he have time to slowly discuss with Jeriah. He knew Jeriah's temperament well. If he truly deliberated with him, even if the Achiha clan were annihilated, Jeriah would most
Speaker A
likely never consent. Thus, no more words. One word, compel. As Jeriah's teacher, he understood his disciples character thoroughly. Though Jeriah currently refused with utmost firmness, if he pressed him with unwavering resolve, he would probably turn into a coward instantly. And indeed, that was
Speaker A
the case. With his forceful declaration, Jeriah stood frozen in place utterly stunned. He stared at Saratobi Herusen in disbelief before finally blurting out in astonishment. Teacher, have you lost your mind? Jeriah, do not blame me.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herus's voice remained, "I see. The situation demands I make a decision. If we hesitate any longer, the Aiha will eventually destroy the village. For the greater good, it is time you Jeriah made a sacrifice. If you are unwilling to
Speaker A
sacrifice for the village, then as your teacher, I must force you to do so." All for the sake of Canoah, a sharp intake of breath. Upon hearing Harusen's words, Jeriah felt as though his soul had been drained. He was dumbfounded. In the
Speaker A
past, he had always been the one telling others to sacrifice for Kohaa, even asking the Aiha to make concessions for the village. But now, now when Hirusan wrapped it in the guise of for Kohaa and asked him to make a small sacrifice, he
Speaker A
could barely contain himself. How could he sacrifice himself? He still had a crucial mission to find the savior who would rescue the ninja world. Yet, he also knew that telling Husen about this was feudal. Hirusen did not believe in
Speaker A
any savior. He had only indulged Jeriah before because the village's situation was not so tense. But now it was different. The village's tension was too high and Husen could not afford to let go of this fresh force. Unless he was
Speaker A
willing to become a rogue ninja, he had no other choice. What to do? A cold sweat instantly broke out on Jeriah's forehead. In the end, after swallowing hard, he solemnly said to Harrosen, "Let me go and persuade Sinade. She is the
Speaker A
most suitable person to become Hokag. Of course, I have no objection. Aruza nodded. But Jeriah, if you can bring sununade back, all is well. Otherwise, you must accept the position of the fifth Hokag. Otherwise, do not blame your teacher. Jeriah remained silent,
Speaker A
unsure how to respond. Could he resent his teacher? Yet, deep down, he understood that Hirusen truly had no other options, or he would not have spoken such words. So, with a helpless sigh, he dejectedly left the Hokag's office. He moved like a walking corpse
Speaker A
making his way to the Aiha clan compound and stating his intention to talk with Sonade. In response, the Aiha camp naturally had no goodwill toward Jeriah.
Speaker A
However, after reporting Aiha Jeene nodded in agreement. Yes, he agreed. In Aiha Jyn's eyes, Jeriah was no different from a clown. He did not think the man could persuade. Of course, if truly wished to leave, Aiha Jeene would not
Speaker A
stop her. Without absolute loyalty, he had no interest in forcing her to stay as it would only destabilize the interior. Thus, not only forsunady, but for anyone else if they wish to leave Aiha had no interest in stopping them.
Speaker A
15 minutes later, Jeriah arrived at Sununade's temporary residence, a one-bedroom apartment of about 30 m.
Speaker A
Frankly speaking, this was already a privilege for as even ordinary Jonan in the current Aiha clan compound were only allotted an 8person temporary dormatory.
Speaker A
Even the Aiha were no exception. Even married families now had only about 10 square meters each. There was no choice because countless ninja clans had all relocated here and the construction outside the village had just begun the per capita living space within the Aiha
Speaker A
compound was extremely tight. Why not let those clans return to their own homes and only send signal flares and emergencies with the Achiha then dispatching a rescue team? Ha. Wishful thinking. This world had sealing techniques. In the original story on the
Speaker A
night of the Aiha massacre, the entire clan perished. Yet Kohha remained silent unnoticed by anyone. That was the Aiha.
Speaker A
If it were other clans, should the village leadership decide to act, they could simply set up a large ceiling barrier outside to ensure no one could escape. The clans were wise, they would not gamble on probabilities. They would
Speaker A
rather crowd into the Achiha compound than test whether the village's top brass dared to strike ruthlessly. Of course, because countless clans had poured into the compound, the Aiha, while Happy naturally, had to contribute a large number of houses to temporarily
Speaker A
accommodate these people. Under these circumstances, Sununade obtaining a one-bedroom apartment was already quite generous. Even Aiha Jyn's own compound now housed many Aiha clansmen. Only because he needed to receive guests and hold meetings did he keep one room for
Speaker A
himself, a large meeting room, and a reception room. Naturally understood this and was quite satisfied with the arrangement. By now, she had completely sobered up. Facing Jeriah's sudden visits, showed no surprise. She simply said calmly, "Shis, go brew some tea."
Speaker A
"Yes, sama." Shizun nodded slowly. Sununade knelt on the tatami and Jeriah sat opposite her. They sat in silence.
Speaker A
10 minutes later after Shizun placed a teapot and two cups on the table before them. Sununade said calmly, "Shis, go to your room." "Okay." Shizen nodded knowing they had matters to discuss. She obediently retreated to her room. With
Speaker A
Shiz and Goneraya finally spoke. "Sunady, can you come back?" He had many questions why she had done this. But in the end, all he could utter was this one sentence. However, in that moment, he could say no more. and ultimately could
Speaker A
only voice those words. Sonat's expression remained unchanged. She merely gazed at Jeriah before her, her mind drifting back to their shared childhood. A profound melancholy settling in her heart. After taking a sip of tea, she spoke slowly. Have you
Speaker A
heard the rumors in the village about the Senju clan, Dan and Noaki. Those are lies. Jeriah's scalp tingled, yet he forced an explanation. The Achiha fabricated them to undermine the village. Can the Achiha produce evidence? How can you believe such
Speaker A
things? Don't be deceived. Jeriah hastily argued having heard those rumors himself. He didn't believe them, finding the accusations too absurd. Herusen Saratobi was his teacher and he knew the old man well. Despite being often inhumane, Jeriah couldn't accept the
Speaker A
Aiha slander. Thus, hearing Sununade echo those words, he couldn't help but defend his position. Inwardly, he even felt a flicker of relief. Ifsunade were to defect to the Achiha over such trivial matters, he was confident he could persuade her back. But alas,
Speaker A
Sonad's gaze remained placid. Once Jeriah had truly calmed down, she spoke in a level tone. The achi may lack evidence. But as it happens, I can provide some. What? Jeriah was stunned.
Speaker A
His face turned pale and his body began to tremble slightly. Meanwhile, on the other side, paid him no mind, instead pouring herself another cup of tea.
Speaker A
After a brief pause to collect her thoughts, she continued calmly. During the years when the Senju fell and Dan and Nwaki died, I secretly investigated those events and I did uncover some truths. I once considered revenge, but in the end, I gave up. I couldn't find
Speaker A
any trustworthy allies. And just as I was agonizing over how to exact revenge, Sukcomo Hitaki's suicide occurred. That incident terrified me, making me realize the old man's iron grip on the village.
Speaker A
utterly despairing of revenge and disillusion with the old man. I eventually used my hemophobia as an excuse and left the village with Shisen.
Speaker A
I feared that if I left Shisen behind, the old man would have her killed. After all, she lacked the Senju name to protect her. Who knows if he would have snuffed out Dan's only remaining kin.
Speaker A
Having spoken ignored Jeriah's ashen face and continued sipping her tea. Though she had once been a heavy drinker after truly joining the Aiha and making her choice, she found herself less inclined to alcohol. On the contrary, after experiencing Aiha Jyns
Speaker A
hospitality, she discovered that tea was indeed a fine thing. Jeriah sank into thought. His mind was a blank unsure how to face. After a long silence, he asked puzzled. Why have you never spoken of this over the years? You weren't
Speaker A
trustworthy, replied flatly, then added, "Orochimaru knew. But back then, the three of us lacked power and reputation.
Speaker A
Do you know why Orochimaru turned into a cold, venomous snake after Nwaki's death? We talked about it. I remember him saying that revenge was meaningless.
Speaker A
I later realized he was right. Even if we killed the old man, would Naki and Dan come back to life? Then Orochimaru joined Root and I left the village. Over the years, I've let it go. I just didn't
Speaker A
want to see the old man. If you hadn't dragged me back to Kohaa, I would never have returned unless he died. But unfortunately, you pulled me back.
Speaker A
Seeing that old face again rekindled my rage. And tonight, after a few drinks, I witnessed the village's farce, which infuriated me. This isn't what the village should be. It's filled with scheming and conspiracies. My two grandfather's dream was to create a
Speaker A
peaceful village where children wouldn't have to go to war. And look at Kenoha now. The old man sits in the village while wave after wave of children are sent to the battlefield. I've had enough. So don't bother persuading me.
Speaker A
I'm not going back to the village. If I hadn't been here when this happened, I would have pretended not to know and let the villagers fight among themselves.
Speaker A
But since you forcibly dragged me back, I don't mind settling old and new scores together. So you go back. face was full of contempt as she vented all her pent-up frustration. Indeed, she held grudges against the vill's leadership.
Speaker A
And even without the Aiha's revelations, she had long known the truth. For certain reasons, she had chosen to let it go. But now, everything was different. Even if her decision was fueled by alcohol, she ultimately chose to stand with the Aiha. Meanwhile, on
Speaker A
the other side, after hearing Sonad's words, Jeriah was utterly dumbfounded. What? Sonade had investigated these matters long ago, and Orochimaru knew, too. They just hadn't consulted him. It was hard to accept to Jeriahs and Orochimaru were his true friends. This
Speaker A
why was I really so untrustworthy. Jeriah's anger flared his eyes filled with resentment. He felt betrayed. He didn't even care about persuading sununade anymore. He just wanted to know why she and Orokimai had excluded him.
Speaker A
To this face remained calm. She said evenly, "Because you've been brainwashed by the toads of Mount Maboku. Look at your headband now. You've replaced the ninja headband with Mount Mayaboku's oil symbol. Moreover, when faced with trouble, you only ever run away. Can you
Speaker A
truly resolve anything? You fled from Manado and Cusha's situation, and now you're fleeing from your disciples son, Narudo Usuzamaki, with such a character who would dare to trust you. Jeriah stood frozen as he gazed at Sununade before him. He had never expected that
Speaker A
in the eyes of Sununade and Orochimaru, he would be perceived in such a light.
Speaker A
Touching the oil character on his forehead protector and recalling the wordsade had spoken, he could only let out a sigh utterly unable to utter a single word in response. He wanted to explain his thoughts, but deep down he
Speaker A
knew that Sununade would not listen. Seeking a savior, it seemed that in this life, aside from himself, no one else believed in him. Thus, he let out a helpless sigh, realizing that his ideas had completely failed. Yet, he still
Speaker A
made one last attempt. Don't you care about the village? Perhaps the old man and the others do have their issues. But if the village is truly handed over to the Aiha, given their extreme nature, aren't you afraid the village will be
Speaker A
dragged into war. As for this who was sipping tea were an increasingly disdainful expression. She cast a final glance at Jeriah before speaking calmly.
Speaker A
I don't see the Aiha as extreme. Rather, I see the village's high-ranking officials as extreme, going to all lengths to slander and oppress the Aiha.
Speaker A
When my grandfather was in power though, the Achiha had their grievances, both sides could still communicate. But ever since the old man took over, the tension between the village and the Aiha has only escalated. Did the Aiha contribute
Speaker A
little during the war? With so many of them dead, why is there no positive feedback within the village? Not even a place on the memorial stone. And let's not go far back. Take the third great ninja war for instance. Forcing the
Speaker A
Achiha clan to contend with a single hidden village and one that counters the Sharinggon the most. Kirigakure, can you claim that the vill's actions align with the will of fire? The Ninetales incident had nothing to do with the Aiha yet
Speaker A
because the one controlling the Ninetales had the Shainggon. They pinned the blame on them. Are the Achiha the Huga? They have no caged bird seal. Many Shaing have been lost. Does the village have evidence that the Achiha did it?
Speaker A
Besides, I recall that on the night of the Ninetailes incident, the old man ordered the Aiha to refrain from helping Minado namease, and they reluctantly complied. After Manado became Hokag, the Aiha situation improved. Why would they target him? Would they want to worsen
Speaker A
their own lot, paving the way for the old man who opposed them? Are the Aiha foolish? Since the old man returned to power, they moved their clan compound as order tolerated the surveillance from the Yu and Root endured the daily
Speaker A
disappearances of Achiha members and still held out. How much more do you want them to endure? Now, under the village's high-handedness, they've produced an Aiha gene, and you still call them extreme. then I'm sorry, but all I see is restraint. Even with such
Speaker A
persecution, the Achiha choose to remain restrained. Given the Achiha's current situation, do you really think it's difficult for them to launch a military rebellion? Can the old man and his faction truly withstand an Aiha uprising? Even now, when they seek
Speaker A
power, they do so with utmost restraint, using methods that least harm the village's strength, all to ensure that even after a successful takeover, the village remains intact. You say the Aiha are extreme. Where exactly are they extreme? Nad's tone was filled with
Speaker A
irritation and her gaze at Jeriah was as if she were looking at a fool. Indeed, were it not for the restraint and calm she had perceived in the Aiha's methods, she would never have chosen to join them even in her drunken state. She was a
Speaker A
Senu inherently predisposed against the Aiha. Yet even she sided with them. How could one call the Achiha radical? And do you truly think the major ninja clans of the village are fools? If the Aiha were truly extreme, even under Husen
Speaker A
Saratobi's suppression, they would never have chosen to defect to the Aia. Clearly, the major clans also recognized the Aiha's restraint, which is why after suffering under Haruen's pressure, they ultimately chose to join the Ajia.
Speaker A
Jeriah's words and Sonad's perception were nothing but a damned prejudice, and thus she held Jeriah in even greater contempt. Jeriah stood stunned.
Speaker A
Throughsade's words, a thunderous realization struck his mind. It seemed indeed that was the case. If the Aiha had not been exercising restraint given the current state of Kenoha's high command, they would hardly have been able to withstand an Aiha rebellion. At
Speaker A
this moment, he was truly speechless. In the end, Jeriah found no words and simply chose to leave helplessly. As for thatsunade couldn't be bothered to see him off, but she simply watched him depart. After downing the tea in her
Speaker A
cup, she couldn't help but sigh. No wonder that Aihaba Brad enjoys tea. It's certainly better than sake. Sonade felt an indescribable sense of relief.
Speaker A
Watching the gradual decline of the village's high-ranking officials, she experienced an inexplicable feeling of ease. Moreover, she increasingly felt that the current aiha resembled the kenoha that her two grandfathers had envisioned. The current village leadership, what were they even sama?
Speaker A
Just then, Shizun emerged from the room. Her expression was somewhat uneasy, though she had little emotional attachment to her uncle Ko Dan. He had died when she was very young.
Speaker A
overhearing the conversation about his death being the result of a conspiracy weighed heavily on her heart like a stone. It was suffocating yet with just a glance at Shisunade understood what she wanted to say. After a long silence,
Speaker A
she finally spoke. What I said just now is true. Dan's death was indeed related to me and to his being a genius back then. In the Kenoha ruled by the old man, although genius Shinobi could be accepted, they had to serve his
Speaker A
purposes. Otherwise, they would die. Such things were not meant for Shisin to know. But since they had now allied with the Achiha, there was no need to hide them. After all, with the Aiha factions abilities, protecting Shisin was no
Speaker A
issue now. Shizen side softly, unable to articulate her feelings, only a profound complexity. Finally, she nodded, having no intention to inquire further. The Hokag tower under the shroud of deep night. It was filled with a decaying atmosphere. Jeriah walked in dejectedly
Speaker A
glanced deeply at the Hokage's office and after a long silence knocked on the door. After receiving permission, he walked in. The agent Herusen Saratobi clad in the Hokag robe and wearing the Hokag hat cast a cold glance at Jeriah.
Speaker A
Without any inquiry, he directly issued his decision. Jeriah, it seems you have failed. Then there's no need for further words. Prepare to ascend as the fifth Hokag in the coming days. For other matters, you need not concern yourself.
Speaker A
Tomorrow morning, Koharu will return and tomorrow afternoon, we will hold the Jonan meeting. The day after tomorrow morning, the Hokag inauguration ceremony. Rest well tonight. I also need to return and make arrangements. After saying this, Husen Saratobi stood up
Speaker A
directly too indifferent to acknowledge Jeriah and left the Hokag tower. Indeed, he didn't need to ask Jeriah at all. It would just from the dejected look on his face, Herusen immediately understood the outcome. He was truly busy now. With
Speaker A
little time left, he had no leisure to console Jeriah. He had to push Jera onto the throne of the fifth Hokag before the Aiha could press further. Only by settling this matter and calming the village could he free his hands to
Speaker A
confront the Achiha. Therefore, even though he discerned Jeriah's unsettled mind, he deliberately ignored him. What if Jeriah refused and took the chance to leave Kinoa? He wasn't afraid. Jeriah had grown up under Harusen's watchful eye. So, he knew Jeriah's character
Speaker A
well. He was an escapist who would only try to avoid problems. And when he couldn't avoid them, he would passively follow others commands. And indeed, it was so. Watching the decisive Herusen Geriah stood frozen in place. He tried
Speaker A
to speak, but in the end, after Harusen had left, he still couldn't utter a word. Refuse. He couldn't say those words. Though he admitted that reasoning had some merit, he still couldn't believe the Aiha could become a good
Speaker A
Hokag. Perhaps Aiha Jyn's words were right. The prejudice in people's hearts is like a mountain. No matter how hard you try, you can never move it. In short, he just couldn't trust the Aiha.
Speaker A
Even if the Aiha were truly wronged, he would be willing to compensate them in other ways. But he absolutely refused to let the Achiha take the Hokag seat. So alas, with a helpless sigh, he left the Hokag tower. No choice. Facing Harusen,
Speaker A
he truly couldn't refuse. And most importantly, given the current state of Kohhan, no one else was truly suitable to become Hokag. Could they let Danzo do it? That man would be willing. However, just thinking about that possibility made him shudder involuntarily. The next
Speaker A
day at 10 in the morning in the grand meeting hall of Achihaja Jyn's residence, the clan heads and elite members of various ninja clans had all assembled with Aiha still seated high in the first place. Once everyone had
Speaker A
arrived, Achihajin spoke first. Everyone present. You all likely know Koharu has already received the da authorization and the Hokag's office has also issued a notice. Huen Saratobi is preparing to step down and has nominated Jeriah as the fifth Hokag which has also gained
Speaker A
the da consent. The Jooning Council is to be convened this afternoon. My opinion is that we will not attend. Let them play among themselves if our course of action remains unchanged. Continue spreading rumors to undermine their administrative foundation. Then on the
Speaker A
day Jeriah becomes Hokag, we will directly enter the Aiha clan grounds at the village's edge and immediately announce to the outside that we are establishing a new Kenoa. Shikakazu Fagaku, you two will make a trip to the Duo mansion for me. Do I need official
Speaker A
authorization from the Daimus office? As for how to win over the daimo shikakazu, I trust you. Fagaku, you will lead five elite Jonan squads to ensure Nar Shikakazu's safety. Aihajins expression was calm. He had no intention of discussing anything with the others.
Speaker A
He simply issued his decisions directly. The so-called meeting was merely to inform everyone. As he had said before, the real discussions had already been fully decided by the core members in a small meeting 2 hours earlier. This gathering was just a formality to
Speaker A
announce the decisions. As for the daimo, of course, he disliked that man, but he knew well that one must eat one bite at a time. Eating too much at once could choke. So for now, he had no interest in breaking the rules of the
Speaker A
shinobi world. His current goal was solely to gain complete control of Kenoa. Until then, everything would proceed as usual. Nar Shakazu, though resigned, still made a request. I have no problem with this, but I asked that Shikaku accompany me. That's fine. You
Speaker A
two can decide among yourselves. Aihaji nodded. Though in normal procedure, Shikaku and others should remain hidden in the background. Given that their allegiance was relatively recent, and considering the peculiar rules of the Nar clan, it was likely Shikaku
Speaker A
preferred to stay home and rest. So, forget it. Since Shikakazu had mentioned it, let the two of them sort it out.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Nar Shikaku wore a displeased expression, but ultimately gave a soft sigh. He naturally didn't dare to object, and since he was familiar with the daimo despite the trouble, he would make the trip. 20 minutes later, the meeting concluded successfully, but
Speaker A
Sununade did not leave. Instead, she followed Achiha into the small meeting room. Hey, Aiha, what's the point of this so-called meeting? Aren't you just acting like a dictator? Without mincing words, immediately voiced her objection.
Speaker A
Indeed, though she admitted Aihaene was excellent in many aspects, the Aiha's extreme tendencies must be corrected, or else she feared Jeriah's worries would come true. Since she had joined the Aiha camp, she intended to resolve all problems from the start. To be honest,
Speaker A
when she first attended the meeting, she was curious about how the Aiha conducted their assemblies. But after truly participating in one today, she was utterly astounded. Good heavens, was that what they called a meeting? It was as if Achiha Jeene was simply talking
Speaker A
without even asking for anyone's opinion, right? She absolutely could not accept this. Konoha was the life's work of her two grandfathers. And since she had already joined the Aiha camp, she would never allow Achihajene to act recklessly. In response, Aiha Jeene
Speaker A
remained calm, poured Sunsade a cup of tea, and then spoke in an extremely composed tone. You're overthinking it.
Speaker A
The real decision-making meeting took place two hours ago in the small meeting. The large meeting is just to inform every one of the decisions so they know what to do next. And haven't you noticed? Do any of the ninja clans
Speaker A
present show the slightest confusion? In the small meeting 2 hours ago, we had already reached a consensus on this decision. It's just that you're not yet qualified to attend the small meeting.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene spoke in a calm tone. He showed no intention of granting Sununade any face. After all, although she had proven somewhat useful upon first joining, she was hardly qualified to enter the inner circle at present. Thus, when the true internal meeting convened
Speaker A
that day, there was naturally no plan to invite her. How should one put it? For the Achiha faction, as it stood now, Sununade was more of a mere figure head.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, upon hearing this, froze instantly, her face turning quite awkward. There was no way around it. Despite how miserably things had been for her before, as long as she abandoned her quest for revenge, she
Speaker A
could still insert herself into nearly every matter discussed among the Kohaa leadership. Hadn't Jeriah come to beg her the previous evening to ascend as the fifth Hokag. She simply hadn't expected that after voluntarily joining the Aiha faction, she wouldn't even be
Speaker A
able to penetrate the most basic core circle. This drastic shift in status created quite a psychological gap for her. Nevertheless, she accepted it rather quickly. After all, such things were quite normal. She was not among the first batch of joiners, and her position
Speaker A
within the Aiha was somewhat awkward, but her demands were not high. As long as Kohaa remained stable and harmonious, she did not care about power or status.
Speaker A
After a moment of contemplation, she asked with some confusion. Could you explain in more detail? I'd like to know your specific procedures on this end.
Speaker A
Minor matters are discussed in large assemblies, important matters in small gatherings, and critical matters are never discussed at all, Achihajin said without reservation. Of course, considering special position, he offered a brief explanation. The reason for this is quite simple. Humanity as a group is
Speaker A
conformist. If discussions were truly opened up, efficiency would be terribly low. Everyone holds different thoughts and no organization can possibly satisfy everyone's ideas. Therefore, focusing on the key points while letting go of the trivial is the most suitable approach.
Speaker A
Each ninja clan will consider its own people, and those who rise to positions of authority can naturally represent their respective clans. combined with the elites from various factions to form the leadership. I believe they can already represent the majority's
Speaker A
opinions. On this point, the former Aiha clan Council serves as a cautionary example. They deliberated over both major and minor matters. Yet, when the village was on the verge of annihilating their clan, nothing productive was discussed. It was precisely this
Speaker A
consideration that led me to establish the current system. Truly important matters are discussed internally among the various leaders and faction elites.
Speaker A
The so-called large-scale meetings are more like platforms for communicating conclusions, letting everyone know the faction's decisions. Their responsibility is simply to execute. As for those truly critical matters that affect the survival of the faction, I would not discuss them with anyone.
Speaker A
Every minute wasted could determine the boundary between life and death. Therefore, I would issue orders without hesitation and have those truly loyal to me execute them immediately. The second reason is to prevent spies. With the addition of various ninja clans,
Speaker A
internal problems are certain to arise. The issue of spies is simply unavoidable. If we held large meetings to address these issues, I fear the spies would have already passed the information to the enemy before we could even finish discussing the matter.
Speaker A
Another cautionary example remains the Aiha Clan Council. Aiha spoke in a somber tone. Indeed, the so-called Aiha clan Council of the past was a textbook case of failure. Upon hearing these words, admitted to herself that she found it somewhat hard to accept. After
Speaker A
all, her two grandfathers had not managed Kinoa using Aihajins approach. However, after genuine reflection, she had to admit that Lin Mos thinking was correct. Indeed, one could not simply follow the opinions of subordinates, for they were far too
Speaker A
easily stirred into action. One only needed to look at the village today to see this clearly. The public opinion from both the Aiha and the village had plunged the entire settlement into chaos. With a helpless sigh, she asked
Speaker A
the question she cared about most. Will you continue to uphold the will of fire in the future? To be honest, that is merely a moral standard. Aiha Jeene said calmly. Look at Kenoha today, who still believes in the so-called will of fire.
Speaker A
Of course, I will continue to promote it. After all, the will of fire is quite admirable, and I strongly encourage everyone to embrace it. However, I will not issue strict mandates demanding that people sacrifice themselves for the village. This should be something that
Speaker A
comes from the heart, something people are genuinely willing to do of their own accord. I will establish rigorous legal standards and minimize ambiguities as much as possible, striving to make everything transparent. Take the case of Hitaki Sukumo for example. I would not
Speaker A
say that saving lives is more important, nor would I say that missions are more important. I will completely quantify mission standards, fully standardize mission ranks, and inform the ninja beforehand of each mission's level of importance before execution. For less
Speaker A
critical missions, saving lives takes priority. For truly important missions where lives may be at stake, I will inform them in advance. If they can accept the possibility of sacrifice, they may take the mission. If not, they may decline. I will not force the issue.
Speaker A
Of course, I will also establish corresponding rewards for each mission rank. For ninja who indeed sacrifice themselves for the village, I will properly plan their postumous honors and compensation. Even the annual benefits their families can receive. tuitionfree education for their children and
Speaker A
preferential treatment during recruitment by various departments will all be addressed. I have always believed that building a sound institutional system is far more practical than empty slogans. If ninja know while carrying out missions that even after their sacrifice their families will receive
Speaker A
the villages various welfare benefits, preferential treatment in employment and business and so on then I believe they will truly be willing to sacrifice themselves willingly. Almost instantaneously as Aiha Jin spoked finally listened with her full attention. She had to admit that
Speaker A
Achihajin's ideas were far more practical and compelling than the mere will of fire. In the past, the village would only ask people to sacrifice themselves and then offer their families a single compensation payment after which nothing more was done. But what
Speaker A
about Achihajene? He would establish and perfect a comprehensive system of laws institutionalizing everything thoroughly. When Ninja carried out missions, they would know exactly what benefits their families would receive in the future for every action they took.
Speaker A
In that case, how wonderful. I look forward to the actual implementation of these laws. You Aihaene are truly a natural-born leader. Even though you have not yet become Hokag, I can already envision what the village will look like
Speaker A
in the future. A smile appeared on Sunady's face. Clearly, Achihajin's words had completely convinced her.
Speaker A
Gazing atsunade's faint smile, Achihaene remained silent, a subtle smile playing on his lips. This was indeed not difficult for him. It was merely copying homework. It required hardly any deep thought, not even a full replication.
Speaker A
Just a small portion of the welfare measures would suffice to make anyone fight desperately for him. It was unavoidable. This world truly did not treat ninjas as human beings, constantly spouting that ninjas were tools. All he needed to do was simply treat ninjas as
Speaker A
people implement a few welfare measures and slightly refine the laws. That would be enough to earn the loyalty of every ninja. His mind raced with thoughts.
Speaker A
Then his eyes suddenly lit up. So, how about this? Since you've been relatively free lately, I'll entrust you with the entirety of the ninja welfare and the drafting of the first set of laws. I'll have the various ninja clans provide you
Speaker A
with personnel, especially more from the Nar clan. I'll also send you an outline and you can prepare the laws based on it. Once Shikaku and the others obtain the daimo's authorization, I'll ascend as Hokag of the new Konoha
Speaker A
alongside Jeriah and then we'll publicly announce the welfare and laws you've drafted. What do you think? Do you have confidence? Aiha said with a smile, a glint of sharpness in his eyes. Yes, he had directly revealed his ambition.
Speaker A
Although Sunady's position was indeed special, his time was equally precious. If he hadn't had other plans for her, he wouldn't have spent so long chatting with her here. Hearing this tsunade was momentarily stunned, then couldn't help asking, "You trust me with this?" "Why
Speaker A
not?" Achi Hajin replied calmly. "You still don't understand me. I have no interest in schemes and conspiracies. My moves are always open and above board.
Speaker A
My plans can be placed in the sunlight for all to see and scrutinize. Kóa was built by your grandfather's hard work.
Speaker A
Deep down, you care about the village. This matter benefits the village, and I don't think you'd have any reason to sabotage it." At these calm words, a complex expression crossed Sunsunade's face. Even she had to admit that Achihajene was truly different with a
Speaker A
mindset entirely unlike other Aiiah. Finally, she nodded solemnly. Though time is tight, I promise I'll complete the task. Good. Very well. Aiha said directly, "I trust you." Immediately after he summoned a subordinate and instructed him to gather personnel from
Speaker A
the major clans and also allocated an office for sununade to draft the laws and welfare policies. Then Achihajene took out paper and a pen and quickly wrote out an outline. After reading it, blood boiled with excitement. Without another word, she left immediately.
Speaker A
Seeing the fire insunade's eyes, Achiha Jeene couldn't help but smile slightly. Not bad. He had just gained another top tier workhorse. Meanwhile, on the other side in the large courtyard of Aiha Setsuna, one of the grand reception halls had been completely requisitioned
Speaker A
by Achihajene, now serving as Sununade's temporary office. Soon the ninjas summoned from various clans all looked at sununade with confusion. In response, sununade didn't hesitate. She briefly explained the situation and then presented Aiha Jyns outline.
Speaker A
Narashio glanced at the outline and drew a sharp breath. This is Lord Jeene really planning to do this. The financial burden would be immense. If these welfare benefits were truly implemented, the village would face severe fiscal problems every year. And
Speaker A
this financial disclosure system, these mission execution standards, it's terrifying. Yet, I must admit, if this system were implemented, the cohesion of our new Kohaa would be extraordinary.
Speaker A
Even the civilians from the old Konoha would likely flock to us in droves. Narashio trembled all over. Hearing his words, the other clan members were astonished and stepped forward to examine the outline. Then, everyone drew in a cold breath their hearts burning
Speaker A
with excitement even before the system was fully drafted. Clearly, all of them had to admit that if this system were truly implemented in the future, there would be no need to speak of the will of fire. they would willingly die for the
Speaker A
village. It was inevitable. The ninja world treated ninjas so poorly. And now encountering an aiha gene who treated ninjas as human beings, they truly didn't mind dying for him. All right, everyone. Don't worry about the finances. Just hurry up and draft this
Speaker A
system. Once Shikaku and the others return, Gene will soon become Hokag, and this system will be put into effect immediately. Time is tight, so we must work quickly. If we truly run into money problems, I'll go see the daimo myself.
Speaker A
At this moment, Sununade exuded an air of dominance. Indeed, she wasn't worried about financial issues at all, for she was, the rightful princess of the land of fire. Getting some money from the land of fire was hardly a challenge for
Speaker A
her, as the current daimo happened to be her uncle. Of course, the Synju clan didn't actually have a branch in the land of fire. It was simply that when Hashurama founded Kenoha, the daimo's sister married Sinat's father, and only
Speaker A
then were she and her brother Nwaki born. So for her asking the daimo for money wasn't really a big deal. She just hadn't been interested in doing so before. Obviously Hirus and Suratobi had wiped out the entire Senu clan and her
Speaker A
brother and boyfriend had also been killed. Why would she be insane enough to ask for money for her? But now the situation was completely different. She truly saw hope in Aiha and thus she was more than willing to approach the daimo
Speaker A
for funds. Meanwhile, as sununade spoke, everyone present became stirred with excitement. Clearly, everyone was well aware of the relationship between Sununade and the daimo. So, they understood that if she was truly willing to act, financial matters were nothing
Speaker A
to worry about. And it was precisely because of promise that everyone was filled with renewed vigor, eagerly beginning to design the welfare standards and laws for the new Kohaa based on the outline provided by Aiha.
Speaker A
Of course, driven by this fervent attitude, they managed to fully refine these standards in just 3 days. The next morning at the break of dawn, while the Achiha faction was quietly preparing, Koritain returned weary from her journey. Upon seeing the authorization
Speaker A
from the daimo in his hands, Herusen Saratobi's face finally revealed a faint smile. He then began preparing for the afternoon Jonan meeting. Kohara Hamira, this matter is of the utmost importance to us. The Aiha faction is now too
Speaker A
tightly sealed. We can hardly discern their intentions. Therefore, during this afternoon's Jooning Council, we must all remain vigilant to prevent Achiha Jeene from seizing the opportunity to stir up trouble. I have secretly recalled all qualified border guardians. I have also
Speaker A
temporarily promoted some elite tunin from our own clans to the rank of Jonan. You two will settle these men. Their trust votes will be our trump card in this afternoon's Jonan council. Go now.
Speaker A
With that, Harusen Suratobi pulled out three thick stacks of Jonan promotion orders from his desk drawer and handed them directly to Kohatang. Without hesitation, Kohar Utitain and Hamiramidokado accepted the promotion orders and departed. Clearly, they understood that the success of this
Speaker A
endeavor would determine whether they could continue to wield power over the village in the future. Thus, they harbored no doubts and cooperated fully with Husen Soratobi. Next, Husen Suratobi frown, pondered for a long while then summoned Anamu. He wrote a
Speaker A
letter on the spot, handed it to the operative, and spoke with grave severity, "Deliver this letter to the village's root ninja. Have him contact Danzo at the earliest possible moment.
Speaker A
Also convey this to Root. This juncture is critical. Danzo himself need not return, but the Ubu forces must be placed at my disposal. Only for this afternoon's Joon council. Go now. The Yu took the letter, bowed, and withdrew.
Speaker A
Only after the operative had truly left the Hokag's office did Husen Saratobi finally breathe a sigh of relief. Meanwhile, Jeriah stood with his arms crossed, leaning against the window, watching Herusen Saratobi issue various orders. Yet his eyes were filled
Speaker A
with sorrow and helplessness. He could not condone such underhanded tactics. In fact, he felt a subtle contempt for Husen Saratobi, for in his view, his teacher's methods were far less honorable than those of Achihajene. But alas, thinking of the situation, he
Speaker A
would soon face Jeriah could not help but let out a helpless sigh. That very sigh drew Haruen Saratobi's gaze.
Speaker A
Herusen Saratob's face darkened a cold gleam flashing in his eyes. He then took out a new tobacco pipe lit it and after a few puffs of smoke spoke to Jeriah in a calm tone. Jeriah, do not blame me.
Speaker A
Extraordinary times call for extraordinary measures. My methods may be unsavory, but everything is for the survival of the village. I will bear all these dark and dirty deeds. You know nothing of them. Just wait peacefully to ascend as Hokag. I will leave you a
Speaker A
clean village. His words were heartfelt and earnest. It seemed as if Huen Saratobi was willing to bear every sin just to leave a pure village for Jeriah.
Speaker A
Yet it must be admitted that Jeriah took it to heart. He looked at his teacher with gratitude. Teacher, you have suffered. Everything is for the village.
Speaker A
Herusen Suratobi replied calmly, his voice laden with gravity. I made a promise to Lord Tobarama, and I must protect the village. Where the leaves of Kenoha dance, the fire burns ever brighter. The flame will continue to illuminate the village and allow new
Speaker A
leaves to sprout. Now your teacher is at the point of burning himself to light the path for you, Jeriah, the new leaf.
Speaker A
You need not concern yourself with anything else. As his words fell, Jeriah was deeply moved. Yes, even if his teacher's methods were a little dirty, it was all for the sake of illuminating the village's future. This filled Jeriah's heart with fervent emotion.
Speaker A
After taking a deep breath, he spoke solemnly. Teacher rest assured, "I will definitely protect the village and not let your efforts go to waste." The evil Achiha, I will not allow them to succeed. Jeriah's face was stern, and a
Speaker A
hint of killing intent flickered in his eyes. Before he had never quite understood why his teacher and the others were always on guard against the uchiha. Now he understood it was such a trivial matter. He had even gone to
Speaker A
persuade them personally. Yet those damned Achiha still refused to reconcile. Indeed the evil Aiha. Herusen Saratobi was naturally very satisfied and sent Jeriah off to prepare. However, once Jeriah had truly left Huen Saratobi relaxed, leaning back in his chair and
Speaker A
taking a deep drag from his pipe. truly relaxed watching Jeriah depart, a cold smirk curled at the corner of his mouth.
Speaker A
At 2:00 in the afternoon, the Jonahan meeting officially commenced and many Jonan arrived one after another. Hirus and Saratobi and the other Canoa higher-ups were on high alert, their minds racing. How was the Aiha clan going to break this deadlock? This
Speaker A
silent contemplation continued until the meeting began. Then Husen Saratobi was instantly stunned because neither the Achiha nor any of the other major ninja clans had shown up. Not a single one.
Speaker A
Yes, not even a representative had come, leaving him completely dumbfounded. Where is the uchiha? Where are the other major clans? Why haven't they come?
Speaker A
Husen Saratobi was on the verge of losing his composure. He knew full well that if these clans refused to participate, even if he forced Jeriah into the Hokag position, it would feel illegitimate from the very start. But faced with Husen Saratob's fury, the
Speaker A
assembly hall remained dead silent. Especially the Huga clan. Apart from the Saratobi and the other three clans and the civilian ninja, only the Huga clan had chosen to attend. This naturally made every Huga present feel awkward and deeply uncomfortable. There was no
Speaker A
helping it. All the other ninja clans had banded together, leaving them standing out like a solitary crane among chickens. But they had no choice.
Speaker A
Because of the caged bird seal, Danzo had no interest in the Huga branch family. The main family had only a few members and they could not be sent into route. Under these circumstances, the Huga had no reason to defect to the
Speaker A
Aiha. Moreover, the Huga and Aiha clans had always been rivals, so they would not willingly surrender. But damn it, staring at this bizarre situation, Hayashi Huga was truly embarrassed.
Speaker A
Haishi, what should we do? It seems we shouldn't have come. Does this so-called Jonan assembly even need to continue? We need to think of a solution quickly. You are the clan head of the Huga. Many elders of the Huga clan began to speak
Speaker A
cautiously. Initially, they had been quite pleased. After all, while the vill's high-ranking officials and the Achiha were locked in conflict, the Huga clan could sit back and watch from the sidelines, never needing to participate in the struggle between the two
Speaker A
factions. Especially when they saw countless ninja clans being humiliated by the root or even joining the Aiha camp, they could still watch coldly, even sneering at those clans. Their Huga clan's caged bird had once suffered so much unfair treatment, but now they
Speaker A
suddenly felt that their ancestors had been wise and far-sighted. Because of the caged bird, the Huga clan had managed to avoid this crisis. Even a villain like Danzo of the root had no intention of troubling the Huga clan.
Speaker A
But now seeing what happened today, the Huga clan was instantly at a loss. No way. All other ninja clans had not attended this Jonan assembly. So the Huga clan stuck out like a sore thumb.
Speaker A
Huga Hayashi. At this moment, his expression was grim, and he couldn't help but roll his eyes. What to do? How would he know? Originally, he had wanted to see how the Aihal would contend with the vill's high-ranking officials and
Speaker A
even thought that perhaps both factions would try to win over the Huga clan. Then, having some leeway, he could wait until the two factions had fought to the end. And only after seeing the winner would the Huga clan cast their votes.
Speaker A
But damn it, the Aiha faction didn't attend the Jonan assembly, leaving the Huga clan in an awkward position. Should they really side with the vill's high-ranking officials now? No, absolutely not. If they sided with the vill's high-ranking officials, wouldn't
Speaker A
that offend the Aiha faction? Abstain? That didn't seem right either. Since the Aiha faction hadn't shown up, if the Huga chose to abstain, they would directly offend the vill's high-ranking officials. If the high-ranking officials won, in the end, the Huga clan would
Speaker A
face hard times. What to do? Hugahayashi was now caught in a dilemma. Cold sweat began to form on his forehead, and his mind was in turmoil, unsure of what to do. Meanwhile, on the other side, Saratobi Herusen had no attention to
Speaker A
spare for the Huga clan as he himself was also caught in a dilemma. The Aiha faction not coming was actually a good thing because then Jeriah could directly ascend to the position of fifth Hokag.
Speaker A
But without the Aiha faction's participation, would Jeriah as the fifth Hokag be able to command authority in the future? So, should they invite the Aiha faction? After thinking it over for a long time, he still felt it was
Speaker A
unnecessary. After all, if Jeriah as the fifth Hokag couldn't command authority, that was actually somewhat beneficial to him as it would make it easier for him to rule Kohaa from behind the scenes in the future. Hirusen, what should we do?
Speaker A
Should we go find the Aiha faction? It's already time. Should we wait a bit longer? While Saratobi Husen was thinking Uditain, Koharuru and Mito Hamira spoke up. Clearly, they were also uncertain about the current situation.
Speaker A
Even Jeriah subconsciously looked over. And to this, Saratobi Herusen pondered for a moment, then said calmly, I don't think we need to wait since we've already notified them in advance. Their absence is their decision. Let's just count them as abstaining. Let's begin
Speaker A
directly. After saying this, having made his decision, Saratobi Husen had the Yu closed the doors, then stood up and began to deliver his remarks. His speech was quite conventional. He first spoke of his achievements as hokag over the
Speaker A
years. Then mentioned some of his failures and finally stated that due to his advanced age, he had decided to resign and preside over the selection of the fifth hokag. Then the voting began.
Speaker A
Almost everyone present at today's Jonan assembly was a loyal follower of Saratobi Herusen. So naturally, they all voted for Jeriah. Only the Huga clan was racking their brains. Who to vote for?
Speaker A
For the Huga clan, this was a difficult choice. Although under normal circumstances, Jeriah was almost certain to win, the fact that the Achiha faction hadn't shown up made him feel a trace of unease. What exactly was the Achiha
Speaker A
faction plotting? Without figuring this out, he truly didn't dare to casually vote for Jera. Clan head, we must choose now. We have to decide who to support.
Speaker A
Vote for Jera or vote for the Aya? The Huga clan members spoke one after another. At this point, almost everyone present had finished voting and all eyes were on the Huga clan. So, they were indeed anxious. In fact, Hugah Hayashi
Speaker A
was even more anxious. Cold sweat on his forehead. But after pondering for a long time, he said, "Let's abstain this." The Huga clan members were stunned. However, before they could voice objections, Huga Hayashi gave his reasons. The Aiha
Speaker A
faction is acting very suspiciously. They seem to be plotting something. In any case, I don't believe they would easily surrender. After all, they've been fighting the vill's high-ranking officials tooth and nail. So, let's abstain. We'll remain neutral between
Speaker A
the vill's high-ranking officials and the Aiha. No matter who comes to power, they won't get to be augan of the Huga clan. At worst, neither side will be close to the Huga clan, but that's still better than the cost of choosing the
Speaker A
wrong side. Many Huga clan members let out a sigh. They had to admit that their clan heads thinking was correct. Perhaps for the Huga clan, this was the safest choice. After all, the bakugan was too important to the villages, especially
Speaker A
during wartime. No other secret technique could replace it. Whether it was sensory ninjutsu or the secret arts of the Abure clan, they could hardly replace the beakugan of the Huga clan.
Speaker A
So, no matter which faction came to power, at most, they would just suppress the Huga clan a bit. Anything more was unlikely. For this reason, many Joon of the Huga clan all cast their abstension votes. Half an hour later, after the
Speaker A
village tallied all the votes, the winner was undoubtedly Jeriah. Saratobi Herusen coughed. He cast a cold glance at the Huga clan, then stood up and solemnly announced, "Everyone, the results are in. Let us congratulate Jeriah who will be the fifth Hokag of
Speaker A
the village. Tomorrow morning, the new Hokag will be inaugurated." After speaking, Saratobi Haruen left the meeting room directly. Utain Koho Kado Hamira and Jeriah naturally followed behind Saratobi Herzen. Once they departed, the assembled Jonan began to leave as well. However, unlike previous
Speaker A
elections for a new Hokag this time, almost everyone present wore no smiles on their faces. This was understandable.
Speaker A
Although these civilian Jonan had still chosen the Hokag faction, the sudden rumors spreading through the village had made their hearts skip a beat. Moreover, the fact that almost all ninja clans had abstained from this Jonan meeting cast a
Speaker A
shadow over everyone's hearts. Was there still a future for the village? Even if they inwardly resented the clans, they had to admit that ninjas from clan lineages were elites. A fifth Hokag unsupported by all the ninja clans. Even
Speaker A
if they had thrust Jeriah into the role, could he truly hold that position steady in the future? Hard to say. It was precisely this thought that weighed heavily on everyone's minds. Clan leader. The Hokage's gaze at you just
Speaker A
now was off. Was our decision this time a mistake? Is our Huga clan really choosing neutrality? Members of the Huga clan spoke up one after another. All eyes turned to Huga Hayashi. Their hearts filled with anxiety. As for this,
Speaker A
Huga Hayashi himself felt a twinge of guilt. But since the decision was made, there was no room for regret. After a moment of deliberation, he finally spoke slowly. I trust my choice. The Aiha faction won't give up so easily. The
Speaker A
inauguration ceremony tomorrow. I sense something major will happen. Let's go. We'll find out who wins and who loses tomorrow. With that, Huga Hayashi led the way out of the meeting room, and the other Huga members followed suit. As
Speaker A
they walked through the streets, the village's atmosphere was eerily strange. Even though a new Hokag had been elected, not a single villager's face showed joy. Such a situation had never occurred in Kenoa's history. Looking at the numbed villagers on the streets,
Speaker A
Huga Hayashi felt increasingly certain that his decision to abstain was absolutely right. The village had lost its cohesion. He remembered when Minado Name's became Hokag. The entire village was festively decorated with celebrations everywhere, and many shops even offered discounts to mark the
Speaker A
occasion. But this time, instead, there was a sense of impending storm. Meanwhile, in the Hokag's office, Jeriah leaned by the window, staring at the deathly silent village, his mind in turmoil. Old man, the Aiha faction silence is eerily suspicious, and it
Speaker A
makes me deeply uneasy. Are your plans really going to work? In response to Jeriah's inquiry, Saratobi Herzen continued smoking his pipe. Clearly, he too felt a nagging unease, but he had no choice. He had to grit his teeth and
Speaker A
push forward. Seeing Jeriah's anxious face, he sighed and finally spoke. Jeriah, we have no choice but to go all the way. That's true. Jeriah laughed Riley. Indeed, even though they knew the Aiha faction was acting suspiciously, they had already lost
Speaker A
their retreat. Even if the Aiha side was up to something, could they simply give up? No, they couldn't. Facing the increasingly assertive Aha faction, the Hokag side had no cards left to play.
Speaker A
The only option was to make him Jeriah the fifth Hokag reopening the game for a chance to compete. Otherwise, they would have to burn their bridges or simply wait for death. With a soft sigh, he spoke slowly. I hope tomorrow goes
Speaker A
smoothly. Saratobi Herusen did not answer. Though he wanted to comfort himself, he too was deeply uncertain.
Speaker A
After all, he had clashed with Aiha for a long time and knew that man wouldn't surrender so easily. On the contrary, the calmer the other side appeared, the greater their scheme must be. But the question was, what angle could
Speaker A
Achihajene possibly use to break the deadlock? He couldn't figure it out. In his view, the best way for the Aiha to break through was to defeat Jeriah in today's Jonahan meeting and then forcibly claimed the title of fifth
Speaker A
Hokag through sheer strength. But unfortunately, the Achiha faction had abandoned that easiest path. So, what the hell was that bastard Aiha thinking?
Speaker A
And it was with this anxious feeling that he remained until 9:00 the next morning in front of the Hokag building.
Speaker A
Countless numb villagers and ninjas stood like hollow shells in the streets and alleys before the Hokag building, gazing at the rooftop with nervous, doubtful, and worried eyes. Huga Hayashi and several clan elders sat in a tea house their seats offering a clear view
Speaker A
of the Hokag building's rooftop. Clearly, they too were waiting, eager to see what sort of mischief the Aiha faction was plotting behind the scenes.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen felt the same at that moment. He was clad in a Hokag robe, his face under the hat still dark and uncertain. Beside him, Jeriah was in the same state. He too wore a pure white Hokag robe. The only difference from his
Speaker A
teacher being the words fifth hokag on his back while Saratobi Herus's robe clearly read third hokag. Ninjas villagers today is a good day. This old tree has withered and it is time to pass on the position of Hokag. But
Speaker A
fortunately the vill's new sprout has grown. Jeriah's abilities and merits are sufficient. He will lead the village to greater glory where leaves of the wood dance fire burns ever brighter. After a short speech, Saratobi Haruen removed his hokag hat and solemnly placed it on
Speaker A
Jeriah's head. His eyes held reluctance and sorrow. After all, he had worn that hat his entire life. Though each Hokage had multiple robes, the Hokag hat was one of a kind. Jariah's expression was complex. The moment the hat settled on
Speaker A
his head, he instantly felt a heavy burden of responsibility. Nevertheless, he stood on the rooftop of the Hokag building, looking down at the dense crowd of Kenoha villagers and solemnly declared himself the fifth Hokag, promising to lead them toward a better
Speaker A
life. After a few dry words, he fell silent. He had no choice. Unlike Saratobi Haren, he lacked the skill for speeches. But even so, a wave of applause rose from below. Though no one truly felt like celebrating, they had to
Speaker A
show the proper respect. However, the two men on the rooftop had no mind to appreciate the scene. Instead, their minds raced wondering what the Aiha faction was up to. Hijaraya had already become Hokag. Why hadn't they made a
Speaker A
move yet? Could it be they had truly given up? Just as they were pondering this, an ANBU member rushed to their side. Lord, third, Lord, fifth.
Speaker A
Disaster. A sharp gasp. In an instant, Jeriah and Saratobi Herusen's faces turned pale. They knew the dreaded event had finally come to pass. Over on the Achiha side, there was finally a new development. However, the two of them
Speaker A
said nothing more at the moment. After finishing their research as quickly as possible, they headed straight to the Hokag's office. But this time, Saratobi Herusen and the two elders sat to the side while Jeriah took his seat at the
Speaker A
Hokag's desk. Then, from an AMBU operative, they received a shocking piece of news. Aiha was establishing a new Mai, and today he had ascended to the position of Hokag. Holy The moment they learned this, everyone in the Hokag's office erupted almost
Speaker A
instantly. Outrageous. Damn it. How dare that Aiha do this? Does he intend to split the village directly? We must stop that mad man no matter the cost. Even if it means war, we have to kill him.
Speaker A
Uditen Koharu slammed the table and immediately roared. However, deep in her eyes, there was nothing but fear because she knew that if they couldn't handle this matter, then the high-ranking officials of Mai would be finished.
Speaker A
Today's ascension of Jeriah would become a joke and the so-called power in their hands would turn into a laughingtock.
Speaker A
Nonsense. The other side had already established a new Mayu. Regardless of whether you were in the right, you had no way to influence them. More importantly, almost all the elite of the village were on the side of the Numi.
Speaker A
Relying solely on the four ninja clans like the Saratobi, plus a few civilian-born ninjas and the fenceitting Huga clan. They might seem somewhat impressive in numbers, but they were simply no match for the Aiha side. Mito Hamira trembled slightly, but spoke with
Speaker A
grave seriousness. Hirus and Jeriah, there is no room for hesitation. Saratobi Herusen's expression was grim.
Speaker A
Clearly, although he had imagined countless possibilities, this was the one he had never anticipated. That Aiha gene would just flip the table and refuse to play. Thinking this, he said in an icy tone, "Let's go to the Aiha
Speaker A
compound." After speaking, he stroed out of the Hokag's office with Uditen Koharuru and Midokado Hamira following closely behind Jeriah. At this moment, he was totally bewildered. Holy crap, he was supposed to be the Hokag, wasn't he?
Speaker A
But well, never mind. Anyway, he agreed with Saratobi Herus's decision. He had no mind to bother with such trivial matters. So he grabbed his hokag robe and headed outside. Then the group accompanied by a squad of Ambu rushed
Speaker A
toward the Aiha compound in a flurry. The villagers on the streets wore strange expressions and their hearts sank to the bottom. Even if they didn't know the specifics, they could smell the gunpowder in the air. Nonsense. If nothing major had happened, why would
Speaker A
anyone go looking for trouble with the Aiha on the very day of Jeriah's ascension? On the tea house, Hugahayashi, who was sipping tea, had clearly noticed the scene. Something's happened. Just as I expected, the Achiha camp has made a move. What's not clear
Speaker A
now is exactly what happened to make the village's high command so furious. Hugahayashi set down his teacup. His tone turned serious and he immediately activated his bugan. Veins bulged around his eye sockets, but in the end, he saw
Speaker A
nothing. No choice. The Achiha compound was shrouded by countless ceiling techniques. Even his Bakugan couldn't penetrate them. The others faces changed drastically. They admired their clan leader choice even more. Yet their hearts grew increasingly uneasy. Yes, judging from the expressions of
Speaker A
Saratobi, Herusen, and his entourage, they looked ready to go all out. So, what choice would the Huga clan make next? Clan leader, what should we do? It seems we can't stay neutral anymore, can we? After all, it looks like a fight is
Speaker A
about to break out. Yeah, even if we try to stay neutral, we'll probably get dragged in. The people present all spoke up. By now, Hugahayashi was also hesitating. Finally, he stood up directly. Well return to the compound and seal it off completely.
Speaker A
We'll wait until the situation becomes clear. Yes, he had chosen to be a turtle, sealing the Huga clan away, caring about nothing, thinking about nothing. He would wait until the situation was clear before making any decision. The other Huga members wanted
Speaker A
to say something, but in the end, they chose to shut up completely. After all, unlike other ninja clans, the Huga had the caged bird seal, which left ordinary members with virtually no say in matters. Meanwhile, on the other side,
Speaker A
compared to the panicked Huga who chose to seal themselves in Saratobi Herusen and his group arrived at the Achiha compound. Facing the Achiha patrol that suddenly appeared to block their way, Saratobi Hirusen spoke coldly. Move aside, I want to see Achiha. He must
Speaker A
give me an explanation, otherwise it's war. Saratobi Haruen's tone was icy. Now, he had even changed into battle gear and summoned the monkey king Inma, transforming him into the adamant staff and holding it in his hand. Yes. In his
Speaker A
fury, he had long forgotten that he had already abdicated, and the current Hokage of Mai was Jeriah. Of course, under the current circumstances, Jeriah said nothing. His face was grim and terrifying, his eyes flickering as if lost in thought. The Aiha patrol,
Speaker A
however, did not step aside. Instead, they all drew their weapons, looking ready to start a fight. But after firing a signal flare, one of them broke away from the formation and dashed straight into the compound. Seeing this, Jeriah
Speaker A
stepped forward. Sensei calm down. Let's wait for Achiha and the others to come and hear what they have to say first.
Speaker A
Clearly, he was also trying to avoid a civil war because no matter who won dealing with the other ninja villages would be a huge problem. Saratobi Herusen trembled all over though he was already boiling with rage when he met
Speaker A
Jeriah's firm gaze. He finally relaxed a little. He stood there in silence waiting. 5 minutes later, Aiha also wearing a hokag robe walked out with the strong of all the major ninja clans following closely behind. Evensunade Kakashi and Mai were among them. They
Speaker A
stood directly opposite Saratobi Herusen. Yo Saratobi Haruen. I heard you've already abdicated. Now the Hokag on your side is Jeriah, right? Judging by your little show, it seems like you're still the one in charge. Well, I can understand that. When Minato Name's
Speaker A
took over, isn't that exactly what you did? Saratobi Harusen, is this your second abdication preparing to rule from behind the scenes again? I'm not one to talk, but you're already so old. If you're going to step down, then step
Speaker A
down completely. Why bother? Aiha opened his mouth to hurl sarcasm, showing no respect for you and fa risen.
Speaker A
This was easy to understand. This was no longer the time when Aiha had just risen to lead the radical faction. Now he not only firmly controlled the Aiha clan but also had the entire major ninja clans of my joining him and evensunade Kakashi
Speaker A
and Mai had joined. Under this new situation, he no longer needed to follow the rules of the game because he now had the power to set the rules. Thus, Amir Yuf Risen was worthy of only sarcasm.
Speaker A
Given his current power, if he hadn't been considering a seamless takeover of the entire Mai, he would have already started a war. Of course, he shared the same thought as Yu and Fay risen. The more one truly ascends to power, the
Speaker A
less they actually wish to go to war for war is always the worst option. The supreme art of war is to subdue the enemy without fighting. The next best is to break their alliances. The next is to attack their army. The worst is to
Speaker A
besiege their cities. As a trans migrator, he understood this simple truth better than anyone. Aiha, stop the nonsense. Your so-called new Mai is a provocation to the entire village. I advise you to immediately abandon the division of the village and recognize
Speaker A
Jeriah's position as Hokag or else we will be forced to go to war. Yu and Fe Rizen's tone was icy. He didn't care about Achiha Jins sarcasm. After all, as Hokag for so many years, his skin had grown thicker than a city wall.
Speaker A
He cared only about interests of face was inconsequential. Thus he wasted no time on other matters with Achihajene and directly raised his core demand abandoned the division of Mai and recognized Jeriah as Hokage. But unfortunately since Achihaene dared to
Speaker A
establish new Mai, he had naturally made all preparations. Therefore he calmly rejected Yu and Fe Rizen's demand. You fa Risen you've got one thing wrong.
Speaker A
When Mai was founded, there was a promise that every ninja clan could withdraw at any time. Given the special situation between the Achiha clan and the village since we couldn't truly integrate after decades, the Achiha naturally choose not to integrate.
Speaker A
Withdrawing from Mai is better for all of us, isn't it? The Aiha's withdrawal complies with the original covenant. Yu youu and Fay Risen have been Hokage for so many years. Could it be that you don't even know this basic covenant? If
Speaker A
so, you are hardly a competent Hokag. As for the other ninja clans, it's mere coincidence. They also felt uncomfortable staying in Mai and voluntarily withdrew. that has nothing to do with the iah. Our clans got together and thought since we've all
Speaker A
withdrawn, we might as well establish a new ninja village. So, we reported this to the daimo who was very willing to support us and provide financial and material aid. Thus, our village building process complies with all procedures.
Speaker A
Both the withdrawal from my and the laws of the fire country justify my actions.
Speaker A
Finally, let me remind you, although we are currently in my, we have obtained the daimo of the fire country's approval. Until the new my plan is completed, we have the right to stay on this land. Once the site designated by
Speaker A
the daimo for our new village is built, we will naturally relocate to that new land. If you start a war with us now, it will not be an internal conflict of the village, but an invasion of Numi by
Speaker A
then. Numi has the right to defend and counterattack. Moreover, regarding this act of aggression, we will definitely seek a judgment from the daimo. I doubt your invasion has been authorized by the daimo of the fire country has it. When
Speaker A
the daimo cuts your funding or punishes you in other ways, don't blame me for not warning you in advance. Aiha Jins tone was calm. He always acted only after careful planning. Since he had decided to establish new, he ensured
Speaker A
that no flaw could be found in either legal principles or any other aspect. Of course, only Aiha gene could pull this off. The previous Aiha clan lacked the capability because this was a world where Marshall might reign supreme. Even
Speaker A
if the Aiha had sought refuge with the Daimo in the past before they could reach the Daimo's residence, Mai would have annihilated the entire clan on route. Even if the daimo was displeased, he wouldn't bother to create friction with my over a dead Aiha clan.
Speaker A
Aiha gene was completely different. First, he himself was a Maneko powerhouse, and he had recruited Fugaku, another Mangeko user, while uniting the entire Aiha clan and attracting countless other clans, large and small.
Speaker A
His strength and influence were enough that he didn't fear my turning hostile. So, he had the qualifications to play this game because the first principle of power play is to use absolute hard power to force the enemy to the negotiating
Speaker A
table. The previous Aiha lacked this capability. After speaking, he directly pulled out the Daimo's authorization document and tossed it to Yuf Risen. On the other side, looking at the Daimo's authorization document before him, Yu Fe Rizen's heart instantly turned cold. Damn it. Familiar
Speaker A
with the Daimo's affairs, he knew this document was genuine. But this made things incredibly difficult because Achihajin was right. Before the village was founded, the first Hokag Senu Hasharama had publicly promised that every ninja clan had the right to
Speaker A
withdraw. However, as the village developed, the power of the higher-ups grew heavier, and the rights of the ninja clans were squeezed to nothing.
Speaker A
The original covenant was thus thrown into the trash. Without the strength to back it up, a covenant is just a scrap of paper. If you and Fe Rizen wished, he could instantly think of countless reasons to discard that covenant and
Speaker A
destroy the opponent. The victor takes all, but now the Aiha factions power was right there, and they had the strength to uphold that covenant. This was trouble. Yu and Fe Rizen's mind raced frantically, but he couldn't find any
Speaker A
counter-argument. The power he currently commanded made it impossible to break the deadlock through violence. On the other side, Jeriah, after reading the authorization document, felt his heart sink to the bottom. He couldn't help but ask, "Old man, is this real? Was there
Speaker A
really such a covenant when Mai was first established?" Obviously, he was born too late, not even remembering Sinju Tobarama. Thus, he naturally knew nothing about this covenant from the era of Sinju Hasharama being born after the village's founding. Saratobi Hirusen
Speaker A
remained silent. His mind was a chaotic mess, utterly at a loss for how to respond to Jeriah. Should he admit it?
Speaker A
Absolutely not. Wouldn't that be acknowledging the other party's act of splitting the village? But to deny it was equally difficult. After all, the original covenant was written into the provisional regulations of Kenoha to commemorate the villages founding. These
Speaker A
historical documents were displayed in the administrative office. However, Kinoa had only ever cultivated ninjas, and no one had ever taken the time to study such matters. But equally so, even as the third Hokag, he had no way to
Speaker A
erase that original covenant. Damn it. Saratobi Herusen was now deeply troubled for Achihajene was by far the most troublesome opponent he had ever encountered. Though seemingly a man Gekko wielder, this man never resorted to brute force to break through.
Speaker A
Instead, he played by the rules and regulations at every turn, which proved to be a massive headache. When dealing with previous enemies, he could always position himself on the side of justice, which was precisely why he could so
Speaker A
easily dismantle his opponents. But now in his clashes with Achiha, he felt constrained at every turn. There was no way around it. That bastard Aihaene always managed to place himself squarely on the side of justice. Take this current mess for instance. The man had
Speaker A
followed every procedure to the letter, leaving Harusen without even a pretext to declare war. After all this covenant allowing free withdrawal was established by the first Hokag Senu Hasharama himself and the man had also obtained the daimu authorization. So his creation
Speaker A
of new kanoha was procedurally sound as well. So what was he supposed to do? His mind was spinning out of control. Should he just slink away and defeat? He refused. Or should he truly throw all caution aside and force a war? First of
Speaker A
all, he wasn't certain he could defeat the faction. Secondly, he had to consider how to explain things to the daimo afterward. After all, the current daimo already held no goodwill toward him because of those third war troubles.
Speaker A
If he gave the daimo another reason to criticize him this time, then not only would this year's budget allocation be cut, but next year's would likely be out of the question, too. Old man say something. As your hoag, I need to know,
Speaker A
does this covenant actually exist or not? Jeriah was getting irritated. After all, he was the fifth hoag of the village. He had directly questioned the old man, yet received no response for so long. This was treating the village
Speaker A
chief like he wasn't even a cadre. Meanwhile, on the other side, though Saratobi Herusen was resigned, he ultimately nodded. When Kenoha was founded, there was indeed such a covenant that any clan could come and go freely and could choose to withdraw at
Speaker A
any time. In truth, this was precisely why he had spent all these years vigorously supporting the civilian faction while suppressing the clan factions. The clans held far too much power. Not only could they leave Kinoa at any time, but village rules couldn't
Speaker A
interfere with clan affairs either. This practically made the clans into villages within the village. Sinju Hashiamarama didn't care about any of this. His sheer strength could suppress everything. Senu Tobarama, while supporting civilians and willing to let some clan members
Speaker A
integrate into Kohaa, also placed few restrictions on the clans as long as they obeyed when he gave orders. After all, while his strength might not be as overwhelming as Sinju Hasharama's, he was still among the very strongest in
Speaker A
the entire ninja world. Not to mention that he possessed considerable wisdom as well. As for the next generation, Senu Tobarama wasn't particularly worried either, though he had indeed planned to support Saratobi Herusen to him. Heren was merely a transitional figure. The
Speaker A
real goal was to buy time for Singinjunaki to grow. And incidentally, it was rather nice to have someone else serve as Hokag for a term so the village wouldn't gossip about the Synu clan monopolizing the position. As for the
Speaker A
Sinju clan itself, needless to say, across a thousand years, they had always been one of the strongest clans in the ninja world. As long as Sinjinawaki could rise to power, he would absolutely secure the Hokag seat. And afterward, it
Speaker A
would be the same. As long as each generation of the Senu clan remained stable, they could absolutely keep the entire Kenoha in check. But unfortunately, he never expected that his own reckless moment on the battlefield would lead him to encounter
Speaker A
the gold and silver brothers who countered the flying rain technique. After his death, Kenoha did not develop according to his plans at all. That transitional Hokag Saratobi Herusen unexpectedly became a Hokage with real power and even reduced the Senzu clan's
Speaker A
legacy to ashes and Saratobi Herusen with his limited abilities naturally could only find ways to suppress the clans to secure his position as Hokag.
Speaker A
There was no other choice. He lacked the strength of Senu Hasharama and the wisdom of Sinju Tobarama. So suppressing the other clans was the only path available. So this is how it is. This is truly troubling. What was the first
Speaker A
Hokag thinking back then? How could he allow such a covenant to exist? This is a disaster. Jeriah side blurting out his honest thoughts. There was no helping it. Though he had already risen to the position of Hokag, he didn't understand
Speaker A
the intricacies of power struggles at all. So, he simply spoke his mind. Saratobi Herusen was instantly dumbfounded. Damn it. No matter how much you complain internally, you must never say such things out loud. Before those words were spoken, there was still room
Speaker A
for negotiation. But once you as the Hokag say something like that, you've essentially acknowledged the Covenant's validity. So what room is left for further discussion? And indeed, that was exactly what happened. Following Jeriah's words, Aiha Jeene immediately spoke up. Well, excellent. It seems our
Speaker A
fifth Hokag has also affirmed the validity of this covenant. In that case, all well, that ends well. Today marks the founding of our new Kohaa and also the day I ascend as its first Hokag. We warmly welcome friends from Kenoha to
Speaker A
visit. How about it? Would you care to come in for some tea? Aiha Jyns demeanor was gentle. A faint smile never left his face. He simply filtered out Jeriah's displeasure and extracted only the fact that the man had acknowledged
Speaker A
the covenant. Are you kidding? Letting trash like Jeriah become Hokag. Huh? If it weren't for that old fox, Saratobi Herusen, he could crush someone like this without even needing a plan.
Speaker A
Saratobi Husen G. Right. Yeah, Jeriah. At this moment, he was completely bewildered. Clearly, he still had no idea what on earth was happening. So instinctively he waved his hand and said, "I haven't acknowledged any such covenant." Aihajin, "Don't make things
Speaker A
up. So you're opposing the founding covenant." Then Aihajin immediately fired back. Jeriah, I advise you to think carefully. This was established by the first Hokag Senu Hasharama himself.
Speaker A
Are you the fifth Hokag going to oppose the first Hokag's promise? With a single sentence, he smoothly planted a massive trap. Even as dense as Jeriah was, he instantly sensed something was wrong.
Speaker A
But before he could speak, Saratobi Herusen clamped a hand over his mouth. Jeriah just shut up. I'm begging you.
Speaker A
All right. Herus and Saratobi was on the verge of madness. Faced with this, Jeriah before him, he truly felt like breaking down. Damn it. If you don't understand the intricacies here, then please just shut up. All right. It was
Speaker A
also because Kohaa was too weak now and he couldn't find a suitable candidate for Hokag. Oh, otherwise he really wouldn't want to put Jeriah in that position. Although it was easy to take power back from him in a peaceful era
Speaker A
with a normal transition, he would rather have Jeriah take over. But now it was different. Now with Aihajene as a great enemy in the village, having such a useless Hokage on his side meant that one careless moment could easily be
Speaker A
exploited by Aihaji. Jeriah was speechless with a black line on his face. This made him quite displeased.
Speaker A
Was he not even allowed to speak as the Hokage? Having never wanted to be Hokage in the first place, he now felt even more stifled. However, he also knew the situation was delicate. So, despite his frustration, he ultimately chose to
Speaker A
remain silent. But unfortunately, that wasn't enough. Even if Jera kept quiet, Ajihajene would not let the opportunity slip and immediately spoke out. Herus and Sir Toby, you've gone too far. Even if you were the Hokag before, you've already stepped down now. Understand?
Speaker A
Jeriah is the Hokag now, and you should show at least a basic level of respect to the Hokag. Instead of resting on the laurels of a former Hokag and nitpicking the current one. Got it, Herus. Saratobi was extremely displeased, but in the
Speaker A
end, he chose to stay silent because he couldn't think of a way to refute it.
Speaker A
Finally, he merely shot a deep glance at Achihajene, then grabbed Jeriah and left directly. As for Kohari, Utetane and Hamir Mito, they hadn't said a single word throughout. The reason was simple.
Speaker A
They had long realized that Aiha wouldn't buy their act. And since they couldn't restrain him through status and position, the only thing they could do was not cause trouble for Husen Saratobi. Seeing Husu and Saratobi turn and leave, they along with the other U
Speaker A
had no choice but to head back. 20 minutes later in the Hokag's office, the atmosphere was oppressively heavy. There was no helping it. Although today was the day Jeriah, the new Hokag took office, the troubles within the Aiha
Speaker A
faction, diluted the joy, casting a shadow over everyone's hearts instead. If a solution wasn't found soon, Kinoa would be on the brink of falling apart.
Speaker A
No one present was a fool. Even though they had been suppressing the ninja clans all these years, they had to admit that the various ninja clans, big and small, were the true pillars of the entire village. In every war, the ninja
Speaker A
clans were the main force. Even though civilian ninjas had grown a lot over the years, they still couldn't replace the niche of those clans. The gap between them was simply too huge. Now that those clans were going to the new koha, if war
Speaker A
broke out again, would they have to rely on civilians to fight? Nonsense. Kohhari Yudain and Hamurokado didn't speak up nor did they chatter as they used to clearly this matter was beyond their capability. And Saratobi was the same.
Speaker A
He couldn't think of a good solution. And after much deliberation, the only option was war. But they couldn't afford to fight. The village didn't have any strong warriors now. Even if they had enough civilian ninjas, could they really wear down the Aiha faction in a
Speaker A
prolonged war? He felt that was doubtful. But Jeriah couldn't hold back and blurted out a question. Old man, tell me, why did the village establish such a rule back then, allowing ninja clans to withdraw from this kind of
Speaker A
alliance? It's utterly ridiculous. Why did the village's higher-ups make such a promise in the past? As for Jeriah's curiosity, Huen Saratobi had no interest in explaining. He was too annoyed. Why would he bother satisfying Jeriah's curiosity? Even if Jeriah was the
Speaker A
so-called Hokag, Huen didn't care. Meanwhile, on the other side, although Koharu had no intention of dealing with Jeriah Hamurokado's side softly and began to explain, "Jeriah, you wouldn't understand. You were born after the founding of the village and don't know
Speaker A
the special circumstances back then. Kóa itself was formed by the Synu clan through their strong rallying power.
Speaker A
There was no civilian class at that time. Civilians only gradually joined after the village was established. In the old waring states period, each ninja clan had mortal enemies. No matter how strong the Sinju clan was, they couldn't force the clans to join, could they? A
Speaker A
Back then, there was no concept of a village. So, to attract various ninja clans to join the Synu clan had to make various promises to dispel the clan's concerns. Without such promises, no clan would dare to easily join a village. But
Speaker A
who could have imagined that after so many years, Aihajene would dig up such old history? Hamurokado looked helpless.
Speaker A
Indeed, if Achihaene hadn't brought up this alliance, none of them old-timers would have remembered that their village even had such a damn thing. But there was no way around it. It held up legally, which made them extremely uncomfortable. Unless they could
Speaker A
suppress the other side with absolute force, they could hardly think of any other solution. After all, Aihajins knew Kinoa was also a formal ninja village recognized by the land of fires daimo.
Speaker A
If you chose to go to war now, it wouldn't be an internal dispute within Kenoha, but a war between ninja villages. Whom would the daimo support?
Speaker A
That was truly hard to say. After listening, Jeriah was also stuck. Although he was furious at the Aiha's choice they were acting according to the rules, so he had no way to refute it.
Speaker A
Finally, he could only look at her and Saratobi. Old man, have you thought of a solution? Harusen gave a soft sigh. A solution? If he could think of one, would he be sitting here worrying?
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, compared to the quandry of Haruen's group, the Achiha side was quite lively. especially the words that effortlessly forced Herusen and his group to retreat deepened everyone's sense of unity toward the concept of the new Kohaa.
Speaker A
Today, the Aiha clan grounds were completely immersed in a carnival of celebration. Behind the clan grounds near the huge open area by the forest of death, a massive platform had been temporarily constructed. There was no helping it. The Aiha clan grounds didn't
Speaker A
have a building like the Hokag Tower. So, to hold today's ceremony and speech, they had to build this temporary structure. Aiha leaped up onto the platform. Looking at the densely packed ninja clan members and civilians below, he pondered for a moment and then began
Speaker A
his speech. My fellow compatriots, my fellow countrymen, ever since Saratobi Herusen ascended to the position of the third Hokag, he began suppressing our various ninja clans.
Speaker A
Consequently, countless clans that had survived the waring states era vanished without a trace during the age of the hidden villages. Among them, the most lamentable is the Senu clan, the founding ninja clan of Kenoha.
Speaker A
Furthermore, numerous powerful individuals were viewed with suspicion by the higher-ups due to their formidable strength and were subsequently liquidated by the village under various pretexts. Senju Nawaki Hataki Kakashi's father, Suko Hataki.
Speaker A
Most regrettable of all is Minato Namikes. He was chosen because he lacked background Saratobi Herusen's aim was to install a civilian Hokag so they could continue pulling the strings behind the scenes. And the facts prove I am not
Speaker A
speaking without cause. Those who live through the fourth Hokage's administration know that during Minado Name's tenure, the UBU, the ninja academy, and the education department remained under Saratobi Herus's control.
Speaker A
The barrier team, the administrative department, and the interrogation and torture division were led by Uditen Kohu and Danzo commanded the infamous route.
Speaker A
As the fourth Hokag Manado Names could truly only command the Joning Council, which held little real power and the analysis team, the higher-ups of the third Hokage's era, he never truly stepped down. And when Minado Name's attempted to reclaim authority within
Speaker A
less than a year, he could only manage to have Kakashi join the U and reorganize his own personal guard. But just as he began to act, the village was struck by the Ninetales rampage. And they even pinned the blame on Assiah.
Speaker A
Speaking of this, I can't help but laugh. During the Ninetales rampage, the Achiha were blocked by Root. So, what did Saratobi Herusen and the other higher-ups do? Apart from Saratobi Husen striking the Ninetailes with his staff and knocking it out of Kinoa, there were
Speaker A
no other actions worth noting. What's more thoughtprovoking is that Kushin's delivery date was kept extremely secret.
Speaker A
No one except the village's higher-ups knew about it. Especially the Aiha, who were not trusted by the village, had no possible way of knowing this. Yet the higher-ups fully aware of this fact still chose to suspect us Achiha after
Speaker A
the incident. Before his death, Manado Name and Kusha Uzumaki chose to seal the ninetales within their child Nerd Usuzamaki, but entrusted the key to unseal the eight trigram seal to Mount Maboku rather than to Sarobi Herusen.
Speaker A
What does this prove? It proves that Manado Names on his deathbed had likely guessed who the real culprit was. My fellow countrymen, because of the repeated actions of the vill's higher-ups, we had no choice but to leave the village to protect ourselves.
Speaker A
And today, we have established our new village. A new here, I can assure everyone, I will never do anything to target the ninja clans. Our achi clan cannot afford such disgrace. Let the capable govern and the incompetent step
Speaker A
down. As long as you can prove your strength and ability, you are qualified to stand for the position of Hokag. On this day of my ascension, I have also prepared a gift for everyone. Son, I leave it to you. In an instant, as Aiha
Speaker A
spoke, even though these rumors had circulated before hearing them directly from Achihajene himself, now left everyone with expressions of profound complexity rage frustration helplessness. A myriad of emotions intertwined, ultimately erupting into a resounding cheer. Yes, everyone believed in the Achihas promise. After all,
Speaker A
everyone understood the Aihas character. You could call them radicals or even villains, but the promises they made were always upheld. on the other side watching the crowd cheering Aiha Jeene immediately stepped aside and allowed Sununade to come to the front. At this
Speaker A
moments eyes were filled with complex emotions. She gave Achiha Jeene a profound look before solemnly addressing the crowd below. Everyone over this period of time we have compiled two sets of rules. First the property disclosure system. From now on all finances of the
Speaker A
new village, every expenditure where it was spent, how much and the remaining balance will be made public. Everyone has the right to know these details and to raise objections to any income or expense. Second, the Shinobi system. Is
Speaker A
saving companions more important? Or is completing missions more important? This dilemma that once confused and unsettled, everyone will cease to exist from today onward. From now on, the shinobi of our village will no longer be tools. They will be true complete human
Speaker A
beings. Before issuing a mission, we will disclose the specific requirements, the consequences of success or failure for the village, and the difficulty level of the mission in advance. Each shinobi may voluntarily accept or decline a mission. Of course, under
Speaker A
special circumstances such as war, mandatory missions will be issued. However, if you are willing to renounce your status as a shinobi, you may also refuse to carry out these compulsory missions. Naturally, the rules governing shinobi service have also been revised
Speaker A
and improved. This includes, but is not limited to a fixed salary for every Shinobi, an unconditional portion that each shinobi can receive regardless of whether they have undertaken a mission that month. Additionally, for those who retire due to injury, disability, or
Speaker A
age, the village will take responsibility for their future care and medical expenses, and they will even receive a fixed pension each month.
Speaker A
Moreover, retired Shinobi may enjoy certain privileges such as exemption from tuition and fees for their children's schooling exchange of ninjutsu for low merit and priority job placement for descendants with no ninja talent. Oh, as tsunady spoke, everyone erupted into an uproar. Even though they
Speaker A
came from ninja clans, a clan could not support a person for life. Unless one reached a high position within the clan, life was only slightly better than that of a civilian. But now the two policies issued by the new village would elevate
Speaker A
their lives several notches above before. Long live the Hokag. We firmly support the village. The crowd below was completely immersed in cheers. If before they had chosen to join the Aiha faction, mainly because of the harsh oppression from Saratobi Haruen and
Speaker A
Achihajins earlier speech only deepened their hatred for Saratobi Haruen. Now it was different.Sunady's words had truly begun to stir their hearts, making them identify with the new village. 20 minutes later, after the inauguration ceremony of the Hokag ended
Speaker A
once Aiha Gene and the others had all departed, the simple platform was naturally dismantled. Yet throughout the entire Achiha compound, every corner was immersed in an ocean of boundless joy.
Speaker A
Time flowed slowly. Two years later, the new Konoha had been completed and all members of the Achiha faction had moved to the new village. The entire new village was thriving. Under the new regulations issued by Aiha, all ninjas
Speaker A
had burst forth with great enthusiasm, and in just 2 years, the village's various departments were established.
Speaker A
During this period, Sununade personally visited the daimo's residents, securing a one-time funding of 5 billion Rio and a commitment of two billion Rio annually thereafter. Everyone cheered.
Speaker A
After all, in the old Kenoha, the annual daimo allocation was only 1.2 billion Rio. Moreover, because the new Kenoha was established with the daimo's endorsement, countless civilians chose to join within less than 2 years.
Speaker A
Similarly, due to the daimo's backing and the presence of major clans like the Achihan, numerous nobles and merchants placed their trust in the new village and a flood of mission requests poured in. The daimo's allocation and mission requests were the financial
Speaker A
sources of the new koha. Of course, Aihajin's supportive policies for ninjas were well executed. Even with the hospital, administrative department, ninja academy, and other branches to sustain the village still managed to save several hundred million Rio each year. This brought joy to everyone but
Speaker A
also deepened their disdain for the old Kohaa. Indeed, the new Kohaa provided so many benefits to ninjas and still saved that much money annually. The old Kenoha also received considerable financial allocations. Yet, the ninjas got little and the village seemed perpetually
Speaker A
strapped for cash. Where did the money go? Meanwhile, the old Kohaa and the new Kohaa were in stark contrast. These two years, the old Kohaa had been living quite frugally. At the beginning, Aiha had tally the debts of the old Kenoha to
Speaker A
the major clans during the third shinobi world war, including unpaid pensions and mission fees. Then he directly sent the bill to Jeriah the fifth Hokag. Jeriah being a man of honor argued with Herus and Saratobi and eventually forced the
Speaker A
three families, Saratobi, Utane, and Midokado to pull their resources to barely resolve the matter. However, the ninjas of the old Kohaa were not so fortunate. Their salaries were almost entirely on hold. It was unavoidable.
Speaker A
Although Huen Saratobi and other high-ranking officials had embezzled a lot, they had converted all the funds into resources over the years to train their own ninjas, under these circumstances, even if you pushed Huen Saratobi to the brink, he couldn't
Speaker A
conjure up that much money. Now being able to pay the debts of the major clans had drained their liquid assets. This was only achieved under Jeriah's firm insistence. If it were up to Huen Saratobi, he wouldn't have paid a single
Speaker A
Rio. Thus, the atmosphere in the old Kohaa grew increasingly tense. Although Jeriah staked his reputation as Hokag to urge everyone to endure a little longer.
Speaker A
But damn it, we need to eat. Especially when news of the new Kenoa's treatment of ninjas spread, more and more civilian ninjas enraged secretly began to defect to the new Kenoha. In response, Aiha accepted everyone who came. Of course,
Speaker A
Jeriah realized that something had to be done. Ultimately, Hu and Saratobi made the final decision to forcibly restrict all ninjas from leaving. They were not allowed to leave the village unless on a mission. Even if a ninja had to go on a
Speaker A
mission, their families had to remain in Kenoha. As for ninjas without families, huh? Though Heru and Suritoi said nothing openly behind the scenes, Danzo, who had returned with a vengeance, quietly arranged for all of them to be conscripted into route. Of course, on
Speaker A
the surface, these ninjas were all listed as missing during missions. Jeriah might have sensed something was wrong, but he had no evidence, so the matter eventually faded away. But the civilians, though not privy to highle information, were not fools. Even if
Speaker A
fear of authority kept them silent, they were all simmering with resentment. Given the chance they would erupt. For a time, tension filled the air in the old Kenoha. Everyone lived in numbness like walking corpses. In the new Kenoha, the
Speaker A
atmosphere was entirely different. Happiness shone on every face in the streets. Kakashi sat on the rooftop of a tea house, watching the bustling crowd below their faces radiant with vibrant smiles. A faint smile curled at the corner of his lips. He suddenly realized
Speaker A
that choosing to side with the uchiha might not have been a bad decision after all. While he was enjoying the sunshine and chatting with Mike Guy and Ambu appeared beside him. The ambu knelt on one knee and presented a scroll. Chief
Speaker A
intelligence from the old canoa has arrived. Good. I understand. Kakashi nodded. Because of his experience in the old kenoa andu, he was naturally appointed as the head of the newbu after the establishment of the new village. At that moment, he took the scroll and
Speaker A
dismissed theu. Then instead of opening it immediately, he said to Mike Guy, "Guy, please give me a moment." "All right, we'll talk after work," Mike Guy said without hesitation. He knew Kakashi had work to attend to and couldn't
Speaker A
continue their chat. With that, he left to train. Kakashi, wearing the new Kinoa headband, glanced at the scrolls contents, then with a serious expression, headed to the newly built Hokag building. Now he felt at ease.
Speaker A
Evidently, because of Sukumo Hataki's rehabilitation, he was no longer the walking corpse he once was. Arriving at the Hokag's office, Kakashi knelt on one knee. Lord Hokag, Lady Sununady.
Speaker A
Intelligence from the old Kenoha indicates that the envoy from Kimovicure has arrived, ready to sign a peace treaty with the old Kenoha. In response, Aiha took the scroll and told Kakashi to rise. Not far away in the Hokag's office
Speaker A
wassunade's desk. Sununade now wielded little real power. Her job was to assist Achihajene with administrative affairs.
Speaker A
In short, she was his secretary. Since she had been Hokag in the original timeline, Aihajene wasn't about to let such a capable workhorse go to waste. So aside from training medical ninjas for the new kenoha hospitals came to work
Speaker A
for Aiha. Idol impossible. Aihaene might pay generously but he made sure every workhorse stayed busy. Kimogi is coming to sign a peace treaty. I really can't understand why you care about this. And also you could have wiped out her
Speaker A
Saratobi and the others 2 years ago but you chose to create a new Kohó instead.
Speaker A
What's on your mind? Can you tell me? A at that moments was truly intrigued.
Speaker A
Even Kakashi who stood by instantly became interested upon hearing this and regarding this. Aiha put down the scroll in his hand, gazed at the two curious individuals before him. And after a moment of contemplation, he slowly began to speak. Since you're so eager to know
Speaker A
there's no harm in telling you in simple terms, what is happiness? When people are hungry, all they think about is how to fill their stomachs. Once full, they desire better clothing. E after wearing fine clothes, they yearn for a good
Speaker A
house. And having a good house, they seek greater wealth. Human desires are boundless. Do you truly believe the ninjas and villagers in our current village are living well? But in my eyes, they are merely average. So why are they
Speaker A
so content? In my view, it's purely a matter of comparison. Because the old koha suffered greatly when compared to that, don't they feel they are doing quite well? That's the first reason. As for the second, it's that I want to take
Speaker A
over a koha that is as intact as possible. In my view, human nature is inherently base. This is neither a compliment nor an insult, merely a descriptor. Two years ago, I could have acted, but that would have led to
Speaker A
bloodshed. Even though I believed I had enough strength to easily eliminate Husen Saratobi and the other high-ranking officials with the villagers truly accept me. Honestly, it would be difficult because my path to power would not be honorable and the
Speaker A
villagers stereotype of the Aiha clan would still persist even if I could forcibly suppress everyone and make them obey my commands. A village lacking internal cohesion would bring me no benefit whatsoever. I couldn't fully focus on external threats. When an
Speaker A
emergency occurred at the border while I was defending against foreign enemies, I would still have to worry about whether the village would cause trouble. Would certain schemers rebel. Too troublesome.
Speaker A
Though justice is ethereal, it is still crucial at times. If I had chosen bloodshed 2 years ago, regardless of whether Husen Saratobi struck first or I did, my position as Hokag would have been tainted. My enemies might not be
Speaker A
able to defeat me, but they would exploit this taint to the fullest. Thus, 2 years ago was not the optimal time to seize power because I did not wish to rule through terror. Stepping back was the best choice at that time. By
Speaker A
leveraging the alliance to withdraw from Kohaa and establish my own village with the Aiha as the absolute core of the vill's founding and severing ties with the old Kohaa, the rift between the villagers and the Aiha would automatically dissolve. Everything would
Speaker A
be legitimate and procedurally correct. You must understand that prejudice in people's hearts is like a great mountain. No matter how hard you try, you cannot move it. In the old Kohaa where the Aiha were long antagonized, even if I became Hokag, it would be
Speaker A
difficult to completely sever that prejudice. But now it's different. Look at the new village. Is there still that hostility toward the Aiha? Even the villagers and ninjas who later joined from the old Kohaa have automatically shed their former animosity toward the
Speaker A
Aiha. On the contrary, they can now genuinely go on missions together. So the existence of old Kohaa is actually quite meaningful. Jeriah can hardly gain real control of the village and old Kenoha remains under Herzen Soratobi's rule. The villagers of old Kohaa and
Speaker A
never noticed anything a miss before. But now with new Kohaa before their eyes, they will naturally compare the differences between the old and the new.
Speaker A
Now all I need to do is wait. Wait for Herus and Suratobi to exhaust the last of his goodwill. Wait for the villagers of old Kohaa to become utterly desparing and disheartened. That will be the time for the two Kenohas to merge. And now
Speaker A
the opportunity has come. What are the cloud ninjas like? Do you think they will quietly sign a peace treaty? I don't believe it. They have always sought to obtain bloodline limits from other villages. When Kohaa was strong, they dared to lay hands on Kusha. Now
Speaker A
facing a weakened old Kenoha. Do you think Cloud will let this chance slip? No. A leopard cannot change its spots. I am certain Cloud has some scheme.
Speaker A
Actually, just use your brain. The land of fire now has two Canoas. What use is a mere agreement between Cloud and Old Canoa? Without our nod, does that agreement have any effect? But unfortunately, Husen Saratobi, blinded by the peace treaty, has likely been
Speaker A
dazzled by peace. The covert struggles between us over the years have exhausted old Kenoha. He dreams of presenting a credible achievement to give old Kenoha a brief respit. This peace treaty is crucial to Herusen Saratobi. So wait, we
Speaker A
just wait for him to make a mistake for him to sound the final death nail for old Kenoha. Aihajin's tone was icy. Yes, his retreat back then came at a cost. He stepped back to gain even more. And now
Speaker A
it was finally the time of harvest. Sonade Kakashi. After hearing Aiha Jyns words, both felt a chill run down their spines. Good heavens. At this moment, the two of them felt a deep bone chilling cold. Previously, they had not
Speaker A
understood why Aiha had stepped back, then why he hadn't directly fought for the position of the fifth Hokag. Now that they knew the truth, they couldn't help but silently mourn for Husen Saratobi and the others. Truly a method
Speaker A
of killing the soul. However, they had to admit that Aihajin's approach was effective. Looking at the thriving and prosperous new Kohaa and then at the neighboring old Kenoha, which grew more decayed stale and exuded a faint aura of
Speaker A
death, the two of them already had their answer. No wonder Achiha Jeene insisted on building the new village right next to old Kenoha. It was all to make the people of the two villages compare. Aiha Jinu, you really don't seem like an
Speaker A
Aiha. Even the Nar clan doesn't have a mind like yours. Now everyone in our new Konoha is filled with boundless confidence in the village. Even Iunade seem unable to escape this worldly sentiment. At first, I still had some
Speaker A
lingering feelings for old Kohaa, but now I don't have a shred of goodwill toward that village. Kakashi, what about you? Sighed deeply, then turned to look at Kakashi. Yes, she had to admit that Aiha was right because even she had been
Speaker A
influenced. Previously, she believed the village was the legacy of her two grandfathers. So, even though she was reluctant to return, she was eventually dragged back by Jeriah. On one hand, she couldn't stand Jeriah's pestering, but more importantly, deep down, she
Speaker A
actually had feelings for Kohaa. Now, she felt no good will at all toward that decaying neighboring village. Even if that village were destroyed, Tsunad's heart would not stir. Kakashi, his face etched with bitterness. In the past, his deepest affections were for the old leaf
Speaker A
village for Aido Lin and his teacher, Manado Namikes, had all died for the village's sake. Even his own father, having suffered such immense injustice, chose suicide rather than harm the village. To be honest, this was precisely why even knowing the village
Speaker A
had its problems, he could not bring himself to act against it. For him, the village was the pure light of his heart.
Speaker A
Like his father, Sukumo Hataki, he harbored a profound intrinsic love for the village, willing to live as a soulless husk. Yet, he had remained silent all these years to preserve that light in his heart. After all, this was
Speaker A
the village for which his friend's comrade's teacher and father had chosen to die. Had it not been for my guy, he would rather have died than defect to the etchiha. But now he had personally helped build this new
Speaker A
village, witnessing everyone gradually construct it into something splendid, especially free from the chaos of the old leaf village. It had become a haven in his heart, a true refuge. As for the old leaf village, frankly his feelings were tangled, impossible to articulate.
Speaker A
To sum it up, simply sorrow for its misfortune, anger, for its unworthiness. He merely felt that his loved ones had died in vain for such a village. So in the end, after a moment of contemplation, Kakashi gave his answer
Speaker A
to question. Before the new leaf village was established, I stood with the Aiha faction, but not out of genuine fondness, only to protect Guy. Now that the new leaf village is built, I have truly come to love this place, and I am
Speaker A
willing to give my life for it. The Hokag's word comparison is apt. I never realized how rotten the old leaf village was until I saw the contrast. Now it's clear that village is utterly decayed.
Speaker A
Such a corrupt village no longer deserves to exist. Kakashi was quite blunt. He spoke his true thoughts without reservation. Even Aiha Jeene could not help but remark, "I could have endured the darkness if I had never seen the light." "Brilliant," Kakashi
Speaker A
praised.ade also sighed, "I never knew you could utter such profound words, Gene." Both of them were filled with emotion. They realized that this saying was indeed true. Though they had always resented the old leaf village, without witnessing the new leaf village, they
Speaker A
would never have grasped the severity of its flaws. And now the comparison between the old and new villages made it instantly clear the old leaf village was nothing but a pile of dong. Just then Kakashi suddenly spoke. By the way,
Speaker A
Hokag sama I would like to know your view on the ninetailes genturiki. Why didn't you consider retrieving him in these two years for a moment? With Kakashi's inquiry also turned her gaze to Achihajene. Indeed, both of them were
Speaker A
puzzled. Since Aiha was in a good mood today, they were curious whether he had other schemes in mind. to this. Aiha Jeene pondered briefly but did not answer directly. Instead, he smiled and asked back, "What about you two?" Narudo
Speaker A
Uzumaki is the child of your teacher Kakashi and Kusha used to call you big sister. In short, that boy is also your kin. Why haven't you two cared about him all these years? For a moment, both fell silent. Spoke first with a soft sigh. I
Speaker A
didn't know of the child's existence until I heard it from the Aiha side. But by then, I had already chosen to join the Aiha. Since Eugene were aware of the boy's situation, yet did nothing for years, I assumed you had other plans,
Speaker A
though I could never guess what they were. But I have witnessed all your strategies and preparations over the years. Even what I didn't understand at the time later proved the accuracy of your vision, so I trust you. Perhaps you
Speaker A
have no bond with the child, but Manado never targeted the Aiha, so I don't believe you would intentionally harm him. Aiha understoods reasoning. Having left the village early, she was not wellinformed about its affairs. She barely knew that Manado and Kusha had
Speaker A
died, let alone whether they had left a child. After Jera dragged her into the village for a few days, she had a drink and joined the Aiha faction. So he then looked at Kakashi, but obviously Kakashi was reluctant to speak. Finally, he
Speaker A
sighed. At first, I didn't know either. Narudo Uzumaki's existence was top secret in the village. Hirusen Saratobi never assigned me such a mission.
Speaker A
Shortly after my teacher died, most of my AMBU missions were on the border. Later, perhaps because of my behavior, Husen deemed me trustworthy and sent me back to secretly watch over the child.
Speaker A
However, Husen forbade me from contacting Narudo. I was just an ordinary ninja. It was impossible to approach him without the villages notice. A squad of constantly monitored him. There was little I could do.
Speaker A
Keeping him alive was the best I could manage. If I had forced my way into his life, his situation might have grown worse. So, I believed maintaining the status quo was the optimal choice.
Speaker A
Though Kakashi lived like a walking corpse, he still had feelings. But unfortunately, he was merely an ordinary ninja. As Manado's student, he was never truly trusted by her. So, he remained a squad leader in ENBU. Unlike regular ninjas, members frequently concealed
Speaker A
their identities. The reputation he had earned on the battlefield, and his identity as the fourth Hokag's disciple had long been eroded by time. Aside from the title of Elite Jonahan, he had almost nothing at that time. The same
Speaker A
was true in the original story. Except for his fellow ninja, who still remembered him, he was known as the copy ninja in other villages. But within the village itself, he had almost no renown.
Speaker A
Otherwise, when Naruto's team first appeared, no one would have recognized Kakashi Hitaki. It was only thanks to Mike Guy that they learned of his strength. From this perspective, it actually made sense. Kakashi didn't want to neglect his teacher's child, but he
Speaker A
was no Jeriah orsunade. He simply lacked the power to protect Narudo. Forcing his way in would only have made things worse for himself. After all, Harusen Saratobi was no saint, and Danzo lurked in the shadows. If Kakashi had interfered, he
Speaker A
would have given Danzo an opportunity to intervene. Yuzbo Gene a soft sight. The group of highle officials led by Yu Fe Risen truly did nothing worthy of respect. They didn't simply target the Yuzbo clan alone, but equally targeted
Speaker A
everyone in the entire Mai. As long as you had a bit of capability, unless you could kneel and become their dog, you were their target. Kaki was later assigned to the team monitoring Schwanua Mingan essentially because he had been a
Speaker A
dog for a long time to earn that. However, just as Yuzbo Gene was pondering Kaki interrupted directly, Lord Hokag, it's your turn. Oh, I see.
Speaker A
Yuzbo Gene nodded. Schwan Ming, I have no schemes against him. Even if he is the Ninetailes Guriki for our Yuzbo clan, especially those who have awakened the Mangeko, the threat is not that great. On the contrary, if we had
Speaker A
forcibly taken Shuana Mingan back, then it would likely have driven Yuf Risen and his group completely mad, and that was not the best time for a full-scale war. As for Shuan Ming's safety, neither of you need to worry. I cannot say much,
Speaker A
but I can tell you that his background is terrifying. He is not merely the son of Buffing Schuman, nor just the ninetailes genturiki. He actually has an even more fearsome background. Anyone might die, but he cannot. The one who
Speaker A
could kill Shuan Ming Ren is still just a little brat right now. Yuzbo Gene full of disdain. He truly was not worried about Shuan Wamuings safety.
Speaker A
Although this was not explained in the original story, the reincarnations of Axelo and Yinuo could only ever die at each other's hands. And this time, because Hua had schemed against YBO ban, it was almost the most special reincarnation cycle. Would Luda Xien
Speaker A
really allow these two to come to harm? Don't talk about Lua Xien not knowing Hua's schemes. The entire pure land was Lua Shenans domain. Yuzbo ban as the reincarnation of Yinuayo had not returned to the pure land for a long
Speaker A
time. If Luda Xien really didn't know about such a thing, huh? He didn't believe it. Yuzbo Gene would rather think too much than dare to gamble on this matter. On the contrary, if Shwan Ming was actually killed by Yuan Fe
Speaker A
Risen or Tuanzang and Lua Xen showed no reaction, then Yuzbo Gene would definitely set off firecrackers to celebrate. It was precisely considering these things that he increasingly wanted to ignore Ming. After all, he had no relationship with him. If after he
Speaker A
settled everything, he could naturally return to the new my if he was killed in the meantime, then that would be a good thing for him. Gangshell Kaki hearing Yuzbo Jyn's words, the two were utterly bewildered. Background. That little brat
Speaker A
Shuan Mingan besides being Schuan's child and the ninetailes container, could he have some other background? How could they not know? Ginu Gang Ho hesitated trying to speak, but before she finished, Yuzbo Jeene stopped her.
Speaker A
Don't ask, can't say. Then he looked at the two before him, becoming very serious. Anyway, just remember this matter. The waters of this world are deep. The five great Shinobi villages amount to nothing. The future world will become very chaotic. All I can say is to
Speaker A
strive. Enhance your strength as much as possible. In the future battlefield elite ninja are merely cannon fodder.
Speaker A
Kaga level barely counts as a small fry. Only super Kaga level can barely be considered a strong warrior. If you don't reach the rudo level, you're just a slightly stronger ant. Yuzbo Jeene spoke sternly. The reason he had been so
Speaker A
low-key all these years was simply because this world was too dangerous. As a time traveler without a system, his current mango meant nothing. Perhaps after awakening the eternal mango, he might be qualified to roam the ninja world a bit. Knowing too much was indeed
Speaker A
not a good thing. It was precisely because he knew too much and his strength couldn't improve that he had to scheme step by step carefully. If only he had a system, he would have been wild and unrestrained by now. Why would he
Speaker A
bother with political schemes here? But there was no way. Meanwhile, Kaki and Gangho on the other side started to be shocked and bewildered. They had indeed heard Yuzbo Jyn's evaluation of strength before Jyn and Chun Jonin Kaga level
Speaker A
super kaguro. But actually, they had treated it as a joke because the strongest in the ninja world were Jonan and the so-called Kaga was just a title.
Speaker A
But now they could sense that Yuziv Gene wasn't joking. But thinking that future Jonan would only be canon fodder and so-called Kaga level could barely intervene in wars filled them with shock and worry. Lord Hokag, are you sure
Speaker A
you're not joking now? Kaki couldn't help asking a hint of doubt in his eyes.
Speaker A
To this, Yuzbo Gene just nodded, then said, seriously, quickly pick up the Haki sword technique you abandoned and develop your sharing as much as possible. Yuzbo Gene was not interested in Aido's eyes. Since Kaki was one of his own, he would just wield Kaki as
Speaker A
a blade. After all, he wasn't a lone wolf. Since he now had a village serving him, he should make his subordinates as strong as possible. when he needed to target a beo in the future, Kaki would be a trump card. All right, I
Speaker A
understand. Kaki nodded. His tone became serious. In fact, after recovering in the past 2 years, he had reconciled with his deceased father and had started practicing the Hitaki sword technique 2 years ago. But before, he just didn't want his father's sword technique to be
Speaker A
disgraced. So, at Yuzbo Jyn's suggestion, he had resumed training in the sword technique after no longer being listless for 2 years. But now, he suddenly felt a sense of urgency. Taking a deep breath, he spoke again. By the
Speaker A
way, Lord Hokag, since I'm here today, let me report as well. After 2 years of effort, the U has tried to collect the existence of special bloodlines in the ninja world. Although we haven't gained nothing, we haven't had any major finds
Speaker A
either. The blood dragon Ilclan only has 12 members left. When we open the seal in the land of Lightning Fire City, Yen had already begun slaughtering the clan.
Speaker A
Even though we intervened, we only saved this many. Among them is Fire City, Yen's young daughter. Although Fire City Yen has escaped with this bond, we might be able to try to win him over in the future. As for the Uzumaki clan,
Speaker A
following your instructions, we found Karen and her mother, but her mother was severely injured and died on the way back to the village. We couldn't find other Usuzamaki members. Perhaps you and Fe Rizen went too far back, then causing
Speaker A
the Uzumaki clan to distrust Armi, so they might have all gone into hiding. As long as the Uamaki clan members dye their hair, the difficulty of finding them is too great. Oh, and one more thing. While collecting the umbu
Speaker A
happened to encounter another group also gathering bloodlines. They were not Kimogakure ninja from the land of lightning. We haven't identified who they are yet. Other than that, no more gains. Perhaps some bloodline families that were exterminated still have a few
Speaker A
descendants scattered outside, but they have likely all gone into hiding. It's still too difficult to find them.
Speaker A
Aihajene instantly understood. Kakashi intended to end the mission believing that further execution would yield little effect. He had no objections to this for one must not underestimate the wisdom of others. Just like Nagato's parents, it was only after Nagato's rise
Speaker A
that everyone learned they were of the Usuzamaki clan. What about before? Any same person would not expose red hair.
Speaker A
The same applied to other ninja clans. Their enemies were too formidable. So to survive, they would conceal themselves as much as possible. Even from their own children, they would never reveal their origins or the truth. All right, understood. Then let's end the mission.
Speaker A
As for these newcomers, you'll help them integrate into the village. I believe in you. Keep up the good work. Aihajin was quite straightforward. He had no intention of wasting time on such trivial matters. On the other hand, Sununade upon hearing this bristled with
Speaker A
irritation. Indeed, Sununade who had joined New Kohaa was vastly different from her original counterpart. Without the hindrance of Kohar Utetain and Hamira, the village was free of all those messy troubles. Thus, she was not as irritable as in the original story
Speaker A
and had even given up her drinking habit except for occasional gambling. When in good spirits, she had shed most of her vices. However, hearing Achiha assign her another task instinctively stirred a strong sense of displeasure within her.
Speaker A
But before she could speak, Achihajene stood up. I suddenly remembered something at home. Everyone go about your own business. Having said that, he immediately prepared to leave. Kakashi stopped him. Lord Hokag something. Aiha was taken aback. Kakashi rubbed his
Speaker A
forehead. Don't we need to make arrangements for the old kinoa? To this aiha rolled his eyes. No need to arrange anything deliberately. Save Saratobi Haruen from overthinking. You should have some faith in Saratobi Herus's foolishness. He will manage to ruin this
Speaker A
matter all on his own. We don't need to do anything. Just wait patiently. Then he patted Kakashi on the shoulder and left the Hokag office with graceful ease. Kakashi andsunade of course were long accustomed to this. Aihajene was
Speaker A
nothing like the previous Hokag. He had no interest in sitting in the office all day or he would come by, make a round, and then return. In his own words, he was only responsible for the grand direction and strategy. The minor
Speaker A
matters held no interest for him. He would rather spend time establishing a comprehensive set of regulations so that everyone could focus on what they excelled at rather than meddling in everything. Like former Hokag, one's energy is finite, and his top priority
Speaker A
was cultivation. He delegated almost all routine administrative tasks to others, only intervening in matters of utmost urgency or critical decisions.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, after arriving at the new clan compound, Aiha looked at the smiles on his clansmen's faces and felt a surge of accomplishment. Since the establishment of the new village, the Aiha had hardly participated in the power structure.
Speaker A
They no longer schemed for high positions and even lost interest in the police force. As Aiha Shan once said, when he had no power, he thought about it every day. But oddly enough, after truly obtaining power, he suddenly found
Speaker A
it incippid and tasteless. In the early days, Achiha figures were often seen in various departments. But within a few months, they all submitted their resignations one after another. Their excuse was that the headacheinducing documents made them want to smash the
Speaker A
desks. Too painful. Aiha could understand this perfectly. The Aiha's previous desire for power was merely a result of being suppressed too harshly.
Speaker A
Now, however, it was different. In New Konoha, the Aiiah were not suspected and everyone treated them with deep respect.
Speaker A
With no resentment in their hearts, they naturally lost interest in power. After all, by nature, the Aiha temperament was not suited for clerical work. Instead of sitting in an office, they longed for battle and combat. Thus, now apart from
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene becoming Hokag and Fagaku firmly holding the position of police chief, all other Achiha had become freelance ninjas. Their days filled with missions and training. Lord Hokag, if you're not busy, could you spare a few minutes? Just as Aiha Jeene was deep in
Speaker A
thought, someone called out to him. He turned around, gazing at the increasingly mature Sher Suer, who was holding little Sasuke in his arms. Aiha Jyns expression grew thoughtful.
Speaker A
Oh, what a rare sight. So you two finally acknowledge me as Hokage. Two years truly not easy. Aiha Jyn's words left Sher Sway and Itachi feeling somewhat embarrassed. No help for it.
Speaker A
Too much of a slap in the face. They had once believed their clansmen were too narrow-minded, that only integration into the village could bring change, and that Aiha Jyn's methods were too radical. Two years ago, even with the
Speaker A
ninja clans joining, even with Kakashi and joining, they might still have managed to deceive themselves. But now, Aiha Jyn's new Kohaa proved that the Aiha were not outcasts, that they could coexist normally with other clans and even civilians. Their previous struggles
Speaker A
in old Konoha were purely due to being bullied too harshly, especially now that they had left Old Kohaa and viewed it from the perspective of new Konoha. They found the old village increasingly repulsive. Previously trapped in the game, they now had a comparison and the
Speaker A
disparity was too stark. They could no longer deceive themselves. They had indeed been wrong. But before the two could speak, Aihaene took Sasuke from them. After playing with the little one for a while, he said directly, "What do
Speaker A
you want to ask? Just say it." Indeed. Compared to Shers Sway and Itachi, he was more curious about Sasuke. After all, a living reincarnation of Indra and little Sasuke in his current state was incredibly adorable, far better than the
Speaker A
two older ones. As for Achiha Jyn's action, Itachi reacted as if his favorite toy had been snatched away. For a brother complex like his, if it weren't Achiha, he would have been ready to attack. On the other side, Shersu
Speaker A
spoke with profound dejection and somnity. Is power really that important? Even now I cannot understand why Saratobi Herusen and the others value it so much. Hearing this question, Aiha Jeene fell silent. Finally, after handing little Sasuke back to Itachi and
Speaker A
noting the latter's relieved expression, he spoke with great gravity. Power is certainly important because when you obtain power, you automatically gain control over resource distribution. On a small scale, the ability to decide life and death with a single word is a
Speaker A
tremendous temptation for anyone. On a larger scale, it allows your descendants to enjoy more resources and enables your clan to thrive and develop. But in this world, there is something more important than power, strength. As long as your
Speaker A
strength is sufficient, you can overpower power. The Aiha's weak interest in power is merely supported by their strength. An Aiha with awakened eyes can instantly kill three peers of the same age. That's why even after becoming Hokag, I have no interest in
Speaker A
sitting in the office every day because I know very well that strength is far more important than power. Saratobi Haruen and the others value power simply because they cannot obtain strength.
Speaker A
They reached their strength ceiling 20 years ago which forced them onto the path of pursuing power. Aiha spoke with ease showing no sign of insincerity.
Speaker A
After all, Shersu and Itachi were rare and formidable warriors. Now that they genuinely acknowledged him having no system to rely on, he regarded them as his most elite allies. A few words of explanation cost nothing. And indeed, he
Speaker A
hadn't deceived them. In his view, if this were an ordinary world, power and authority would certainly matter. But unfortunately, in the Shinobi world, before him, strength reigned supreme.
Speaker A
Much like the current Aiha clan, once the pressure from above was removed, their strength ensured that no one would dare offend them lightly. The sole flaw of the Achiha was their excessive emotional depth. This intensity granted them immense power, but it also made
Speaker A
them prone to stubborn fixation. These two present were classic examples. Had Aiha Jeene not seized power established new Kohaa and deliberately left old Konoha as a contrast Shers and Itachi would never have been so easily persuaded. I see you were right, Gene.
Speaker A
Shers and I were too naive before. From today onward, I pledge my life. Shers sighed softly, his gaze turning solemn as he gave his vow, having fully seen the decay of old Kohaa and the vitality of the new village he had made his
Speaker A
choice. At that, Attachi quickly added, "I am with you." Aiha Jeene smiled faintly. Not bad. Both stubborn Shers and Itachi had been won over, and the entire new Kohaa flourished with a thriving spirit. The last remnants of old Konoha had been squeezed dry. It was
Speaker A
time to use the Kimogakir incident to bury the old village once and for all.
Speaker A
Good understood. Go find Fagaku to have your seals removed and Shir Sue retrieve your eyes. After that, you two will join the Yumbu. Kakashi is overwhelmed with work. Go assist him. Having said that, Aiha waved his hand and left. As for
Speaker A
whether Shersu and Itachi were pretending, he harbored no concern. The Achiha simply lacked the subtlety for such deception. Meanwhile, watching Aiha Gene depart, Shers and Itachi exchanged a look of mutual embarrassment. After all, they had once believed themselves
Speaker A
to be the clear-sighted ones of the Aiha, deeming the rest of the clan too radical, and that only they could save the Achiha from calamity. Now, however, it was proven that they were the ones holding everyone back. We were wrong,
Speaker A
Itachi. But being wrong is not terrible. only persisting in error is truly dreadful. Since Jyn's decisions are correct, I will fully support him from now on. Shiroui's voice was firm, his eyes resolute. Itachi had no objection, though he was reserved and
Speaker A
rarely showed his emotions. Yet, recalling how Hirus Saratobi had manipulated both him and Shiru, and now that he had seen the truth through new Kohaa, he instinctively revealed a look of utter disgust. Old Kohaa must die.
Speaker A
Only by utterly eradicating the cancerous high-ranking officials like Herus and Saratobi can Kinoa truly be reborn from the ashes. I am willing to bear this in if it means the village can become better. Sheri stood frozen staring at Itachi's calm face mind
Speaker A
blank. After a long silence, he spoke gravely. Itachi, you are too extreme. We only need to follow Jyn's orders. You should know by now that he never sends his people to their deaths. Itachi nodded. He was still the same person as
Speaker A
before, only now willing to sacrifice his clan for the village. Now having truly embraced New Kohaa, he was equally ready to slay Husen Saratobi and his ilk for the sake of his beloved village.
Speaker A
Sasuke watched utterly bewildered. He couldn't understand what his brother and Shers were discussing. But having his brother nearby was enough. After a moment of confusion, he giggled foolishly. Meanwhile, in Achihajin's courtyard, there was a massive training ground. After an hour of simple training
Speaker A
to ensure his taiitsu hadn't regressed, he took a bath and lounged on the tatami in the living room. Holding a miniature pagod pendant in his hand, he immersed his mind entirely into it. What exactly is this thing? Since it could follow me
Speaker A
across worlds, it must be no ordinary object. Likely my cheat. But damn it, I've tried countless methods over the years, yet I can't activate it, not even damage it. Buddy, I've almost conquered Canoa. Do I have to rule the entire
Speaker A
ninja world before you truly activate? Aiha was deeply frustrated. Every day besides training and handling village affairs, he spent most of his time studying the pendant. There was no other choice. His strength had reached a bottleneck. No matter how hard he
Speaker A
trained, he could barely advance further. Knowing how terrifying the future power levels would be, Aihaene had to rely on the pagota pendant to grow. He would rather not take Orochimaru's path unless absolutely necessary. He admitted Orochimaru was a
Speaker A
genius and Hashiama cells might help, but he still preferred not to go down that road. Even in a world of bloodlines, he felt that when it came to the body, the original parts were better. Injecting someone else's cells
Speaker A
into his body gave him the creeps. That was also why he never bothered to take Sher Su's maneko. He wasn't even interested in Hashiama's cells. Of course, it wasn't a matter of cleanliness, but rather a mindset rooted in Chinese philosophy. In this world,
Speaker A
ninjutsu cultivated the spirit without refining the body, whereas Daoism emphasized a perfect untainted physique like a golden elixir for longevity. If he pursued mainline cells and eyewopping, it might boost his power temporarily. But in the long run, would
Speaker A
a mixed body completely block the path to further advancement. Thus, he kept studying the pagod pendant. Unless the situation became so dire that he would face certain death without stronger power, he truly didn't want to follow Orrojamaru's method. Aiha grew more and
Speaker A
more irritated. What a pathetic transmigrator he was, possessing a suspicious cheap pendant, yet still forced to rely on his own hard work and even depend on wisdom as a crutch. Damn it. which transmigrated to the ninja world gets by on wisdom alone. Aiha
Speaker A
Jeene found himself in a state of profound irritation. At that very moment, Achihasuki entered carrying a tray of tea. She appeared entirely composed. Her demeanor gentle as she knelt beside him. Without a word, she began to pour tea and spoke. I am not
Speaker A
privy to the cause of your distress, Gene Coin. But perhaps a cup of tea might ease your mind. All troubles shall find their resolution. You have already achieved greatness. You do not burden yourself with undue pressure. Gene accepted the teacup, his gaze falling
Speaker A
upon Suki, and a warmth began to spread through his heart. She was the epitome of grace and humility devoid of any hottiness, exuding the quintessence of a perfect Japanese gentle woman. In his past life, a woman of such caliber would
Speaker A
have been far beyond his reach. But now, she had been placed by his side, attending to him with meticulous care each day. How could his spirits not be lifted? Emma, I understand. Gene nodded.
Speaker A
However, on the other side, observing his still furoughed brow, Sukis eyes sparkled with a sudden idea. By the way, Jin Kuan, she said, I recall that Elder Fagaku once wished to rename his son Sasuke, but you insisted he keep
Speaker A
that name. Might I ask what was in your mind? I cannot believe you did it merely to curry favor with Herisen Suratobi.
Speaker A
Her intention was to lighten his mood. Thus, she sought to divert the conversation, but at the same time, her curiosity was genuine. Initially, Elder Fagaku had named his second son Sasuke to ingratiate himself with Huen Saratobi. Later, due to the
Speaker A
deteriorating relations between the clan and the village, Fagaku wished to change his son's name, but Gene prevented it.
Speaker A
Everyone was astonished. Yet, out of trust in Gene, Fagaku ultimately decided to retain the name. At the time, though, all were curious. No one dared to ask.
Speaker A
Now, recalling it, Suki voiced her question spontaneously. On the other side, hearing this, Gene could not suppress a laugh. The name Sasuke, he said. To be honest, I didn't overthink it. I simply thought that since Sasuke is Husen Saratob's father, wouldn't it
Speaker A
be amusing if Herusen had to call that little brat dad? If that were the case, wouldn't Fagaku become Herusen's grandfather? Gene remarked casually, but Suki was stunned by his words. Neither she nor anyone else in the entire Shinobi world would have ever conceived
Speaker A
such a connection. It was inevitable. Unlike Jyn's past life in this world, naming a son after a deceased person was a tribute to a powerful figure. Yet with Jyn's interpretation, Suki suddenly found this shinobi tradition utterly absurd. Too absurd? Could it be that
Speaker A
Fugaku originally named his second son Sasuke just to become Husin's grandfather? After the laughter subsided, Suki cautioned. Jin Quinn, please refrain from speaking of this outside. The practice of naming children after the deceased is not uncommon. Many do it to honor the fallen. J nodded. He
Speaker A
was not foolish. He understood such matters well. They chatted briefly and seeing Jyn's mood improved, Suki bowed slightly and took her leave. Clearly, she knew her place. Her purpose in staying to chat was merely to lift Jyn's spirits. Now that his mood had
Speaker A
brightened, she knew it was time to depart. Not disturbing his thoughts was ingrained in her very being. Gene did not detain her. After Suki left, he turned his attention back to the pagod pendant in his hand. Suddenly, Gene
Speaker A
realized there was an untried method in release. In simpler terms, spiritual energy or the power of the mango. He acted without hesitation. As he opened his eyes again, the three tommo began to spin wildly, transforming into his unique mango. Almost instantly, the room
Speaker A
was filled with an icy aura. Gene channeled the eyes power, assaulting the pagod pendant with relentless force. It works. Sensing the ocular power, merging into the pigod. His eyes lit up.
Speaker A
However, just as he prepared to intensify the infusion, the seven- tiered pigota pendant transformed into a beam of light entering his body and firmly settling in his sea of consciousness. Of course, this was merely Jyn's assumption. He was
Speaker A
uncertain whether the location was truly the sea of consciousness. In his previous life, he had never studied Daist scriptures. All he knew was that it was not a physical organ, but a mysterious ethereal realm. In his perception, it was an endless ocean, but
Speaker A
the waves churning were black, an ominous sight that unsettled him. Yet, upon closer inspection, it felt remarkably similar to his ocular power.
Speaker A
But then came the question, ocular power should reside in the eyes. He had even seen his susenu within his eyes resting quietly in their depths. Thus, he was certain this was not his eyes, nor any other organ. Therefore, the only
Speaker A
explanation that came to mind was the sea of consciousness. Boom! At that moment, the seven-tiered pigota suddenly expanded, emitting a golden light that swept across the entire black ocean.
Speaker A
Then Gene saw countless ceiling techniques floating above the dark sea. But the golden light shattered them all.
Speaker A
Afterward, he felt his eyes connecting with the vast ocean before him. This boundless black sea was incredibly his own ocular power, sealed away by those techniques, leaving him only a sliver to use. Why? Jyn's face turned ashen. He
Speaker A
recalled that chakra was essentially the energy of the divine tree and Kagaya Atsitsuki in the original story could absorb all chakra. The tree itself was a possession of the Atsitsuki clan. So if he dared to speculate what was the true
Speaker A
nature of the eternal Mangeko achieved by transplanting his siblings eyes, could it be that everyone's ocular power was originally infinite? Was it that some unknown power of the divine tree or Haguro the progenitor of chakra deliberately sealed the ocular power of
Speaker A
every aiha leaving them with only a minuscule fraction the eternal mango eternal perhaps the concept of the eternal mangeko never truly existed it was merely a coincidence that Aihamadara used asuna's eyes causing the dojutsu power of both mangeko to overlap thereby
Speaker A
tearing apart the ceiling technique within Madara's body having obtained infinite dojitsu power perhaps Achiha Madara himself self never pondered the underlying principle and casually named this stage the eternal man Gekkyo. Then the next question arises. If the Achihostas dojutsu power was sealed,
Speaker A
does the Senu clan also possess something similar? He thought of Senu Hasharama, the only one who could actively awaken would release was also an outlier among the Senu. Could it be that within the chakra of the Senu, there also exists some kind of sealing
Speaker A
technique? Did Senu Hasharama as this generation's ashur managed to break the seal and awaken would release because the cycle of reincarnation had strengthened his power over time? Or was it the sage of six paths who deliberately orchestrated it? Seeing
Speaker A
that Achihamara had coincidentally fused his brother's eyes and inadvertently shattered the seal on his dojitsu power, so he decided to proactively unlock the seal within Senu Hasharama, allowing his two sons to remain evenly matched.
Speaker A
Unknown, uncertain, Achihajin's mind was in turmoil. These were merely his conjectures. But the one thing that could be affirmed was that the depths of this shinobi world were indeed profound.
Speaker A
First, the Atsitsuki planted the divine tree to harvest planetary energy. The situation in the Shinobi world was merely a special case. The invention and use of chakra by Atsutsuki Hagarommo likely only tapped into a fraction of the divine tree's functions. In essence,
Speaker A
perhaps even Kagaya and her son Haguro had only a partial understanding of the divine tree, having merely developed a portion of its capabilities. This was unavoidable. Kagaya herself was a mere branch family member of the Atsutsuki originally meant to be devoured by the
Speaker A
divine tree. How could she possibly know all its functions? Thus, another possibility emerged that the Achihas dojutsu power was sealed and perhaps even Hagaroma was unaware of it.
Speaker A
Regardless, it's still a good thing. At the very least, in this muddled state, I've managed to obtain the eternal maneko. Although Kagaya can directly devour chakra, the purpose of Hagarommo's pure land remains unclear.
Speaker A
and the infinite chakra of impure world reincarnation bodies all suggest that there might be a deeper conspiracy behind chakra but that's too far away for me now worrying about these things is unnecessary the priority is to find ways to strengthen my power of course
Speaker A
from a long-term perspective I need to set aside more time to ponder over my own pagota after all compared to the chakra system I am willing to trust this pigota Jyn's eyes flickered his mind began to race just as he was weighing
Speaker A
the pros and cons he suddenly received a message from the pigota Insufficient energy activation failed. Detected that the host's mental energy has been invaded by an unknown contamination source. Preliminary cleansing of the unknown entity's residual consciousness fragments within the host's body has
Speaker A
been completed and the so-called unknown seal hidden within the host has been torn apart. Please have the host expand their influence as much as possible and enhance their own fortune. The Hong Mang Pagod will autonomously absorb the host's fortune. 72 of the fortune value
Speaker A
remains to be consumed before activation. No one was actually speaking. Aiha had only received a mere consciousness. Yet his eyes instantly lit up because what he feared was not the difficulty of the path ahead, but the inability to find a direction to
Speaker A
strive toward, expand influence, and enhance fortune. A faint smile began to curl at the corners of Aiha Jyns mouth. Two days later, late at night, unable to continue slacking off Jeriah's eyes had become lifeless. His one straight back now hunched. Sitting
Speaker A
behind the Hokag's desk, his face was etched with exhaustion. Old man, isn't it time to clock out? How about you take the seat instead? I just want to go outside for some fresh air. Is that too much? Himogakure is signing a peace
Speaker A
treaty with the village tomorrow. There's nothing else for us to do, right? I just want to go keep Naruto company. You know how bad he's feeling.
Speaker A
After all, he only learned of his true identity from the enemy's rumors. And those rumors were filled with slander against Manado and you. If I don't watch him, I'm afraid the kid will overthink things. I'm doing this for the village,
Speaker A
too. Jeriah roared his face full of frustration. Ever since he became the fifth Hokag two years ago, he felt his life had turned into a tragedy. In the past, he could still sneak off to the women's bath house for research. But
Speaker A
now, as Hokag, it was inconvenient. And that damn old man, Saratobi Herusen, he had been asking for that crystal ball for ages. He just wouldn't give it. In 2 years, he had sacrificed his entire reputation to clean up after Saratobi
Speaker A
Herusen. Looking at the half-dead village now, he felt truly exhausted and worn out. It was already 9:30 p.m., and he just wanted to get some air. Was that too much? Meanwhile, Saratobi Herusen sat nearby, calmly smoking his pipe. He
Speaker A
cast a placid glance at Jeriah before speaking in a leisurely tone. Jariah, you need to mature. I'm teaching you how to be a good Hokag. Back in my day as Hokag, I never left the office before midnight. Get to it. Approve the
Speaker A
documents. Tomorrow is the official signing of the peace treaty with Kimogi. You won't have time to handle these administrative tasks then, so you must finish all these files tonight. After speaking, Saratobi Herusen directly pulled out a stack of documents waist
Speaker A
high and slammed it heavily onto the desk. However, what he said wasn't entirely true. In the past, he might have handled many documents, but never as many as Jeriah had now. Yes, indeed, he was doing it deliberately. Saratobi
Speaker A
Herusen not only handed over the Hokag's paperwork, but also dumped the work that used to belong to Udetain, Kohado, Hamira, and Nariku onto Jeriah. The reason was simple, to keep Jeriah as trapped in the Hokag's office as possible, preventing him from getting
Speaker A
involved in the village's affairs. Otherwise, he was afraid that Jeriah would find out what he had done over the past two years and get so angry that he'd beat him to death. What else could he do? He had done many dirty things in
Speaker A
these two years, such as forcing the villages Shinobi to take on missions while paying them even less than before his tenure, and even forcing all villagers not to move out of the village, requiring Shinobi to have their families watched while on missions.
Speaker A
Previously, to maintain his pure image as Hokag, he would still cover up such actions. Now, he had completely stopped covering up. Would it damage his reputation? Hano. Not to mention that his reputation was already bad enough.
Speaker A
But the key was that he was now just a powerless adviser. The current fifth Hokag was Jeriah after all. Even if the villagers wanted to curse, they'd be cursing Jeriah. Staring at the towering stack of documents on the desk, Jeriah's
Speaker A
mouth twitched more and more. It was absurd. He had been processing files all day, yet here it was nightfall, and there were still so many documents left unapproved. He suspected he was being set up, but he had no proof. After a
Speaker A
moment's hesitation, he let out a soft sigh. Resignedly, he pulled out a document and began to read, then started to think carefully. After all, despite his usual tendency to slack off when faced with problems, his feelings for the village of Kenoha ran deep. Whenever
Speaker A
a matter was placed before him, he would still strive to do his utmost. Meanwhile, on the other side, Saratobi Herusen watched Jeriah scrutinizing the documents and felt a slight sense of relief. He then continued to smoke and ponder. Jeriah's reputation was probably
Speaker A
ruined. But if he could hold on for a long time, could he thoroughly train Asuma during Jeriah's tenure? Honestly, it would be very difficult. After all, Asuma was still too rebellious, especially in recent years with the rise of Aihajin. Under the barrage of those
Speaker A
baseless rumors, Asuma increasingly looked down on his own father. Although he had tried to explain that these were slanders by enemies. Unfortunately, Asuma refused to listen. What to do? He dearly missed his eldest son Shinisuk.
Speaker A
If he hadn't died on a mission in the past, he wouldn't be struggling with Asuma's issues now. But alas, with a helpless shake of his head, he resumed his contemplation. He had to make the most of the transition period while
Speaker A
Jeriah took office, at least elevating Asuma to Kaga level strength and then find ways to build up his reputation.
Speaker A
Once Jeriah's reputation was completely ruined, he could push Asuma into the position of the sixth Hokag. Whether it was enhancing Asuma's strength or reputation, Hirusen had confidence in himself. But Asuma's mindset was a headache indeed. Like his own teacher,
Speaker A
Tobberenu, he had chosen to let Jeriah become the fifth Hokag essentially to have him serve as a placeholder. His unwillingness to relinquish power now was actually to save it for Asuma. Once he managed to persuade Asuma, all the
Speaker A
power in his hands would be handed over to him. Time passed slowly. Jeriah was toiling over documents while Hirusen was lost in his own thoughts. But at that moment, an U knocked and entered. Lord Hokag Lord Third. There's trouble at the
Speaker A
Huga compound. Lord Hayashi has killed the lead envoy of Kimogakir. Kimogakir was apparently trying to steal the Bakugan bloodline. So they secretly abducted Lord Hayashi's eldest daughter, Hinata. Lord Hayashi discovered them and during the struggle struck the envoy
Speaker A
dead with a palm. A sharp intake of breath. Hearing this, both Jeriah and Saratobi Herusen turned grim. This was a huge problem. Regardless of the rights and wrongs, this matter would be extremely difficult to handle. Jeriah's face darkened as he pondered while
Speaker A
Harusen had already risen and headed straight for the Huga compound. Seeing this, Jeriah abandoned the documents and quickly followed. However, by the time Harusen and Jeriah arrived at the Huga compound, one after another Uditain Koharu and Midokado Hamira, as well as
Speaker A
the Kimogakure delegation, were already there. This matter demands an explanation from Kenoha. Otherwise, forget the peace treaty. Under the rakage leadership, we will march our forces to Kenoha and demand answers.
Speaker A
Let's go. After saying this, the Kimovic delegation without waiting for a response from Kenoha took the body of their dead envoy and left the Huga compound. In Kenoha, there was dead silence. Herusen's expression was grim as his mismanagement over the past 2
Speaker A
years had cast a heavy cloud over the village. Perhaps he could shift all the blame onto Jeriah. But the instability of Kenoha was hard to change, especially with the thriving new Kohaa nearby.
Speaker A
Herusen was under immense pressure. He had to find a way to ease the situation or the entire village would collapse before Jera even stepped down. And today, the peace treaty negotiations with the Kimogakur envoy were the best remedy. At this moment, he could clearly
Speaker A
see that this was a scheme by the Kimogakure delegation. But could he blame them? No. Kenoha was too weak now, even weaker than in the original timeline. If they went to war with Kimogakur, Kinoa would collapse before the enemy even arrived. What to do? Hi
Speaker A
closed his eyes, his mind racing. Meanwhile, Jeriah had stayed silent the entire time, only speaking after the Kimogakure delegation left. Hayashi, what happened? Hugahayashi also wore a grim expression. He knew the Huga clan had been set up because he hadn't used
Speaker A
his full strength earlier. Obviously, he wasn't stupid. Even if the Kumogakur envoy was despicable during the peace treaty negotiations between the two villages, no matter how much he hated that envoy, he wouldn't have actually killed him. But damn it, who would have
Speaker A
thought that this Kimogakure envoy was so fragile that he died from just 30% of his strength. If this wasn't a conspiracy, even a dog wouldn't believe it. But the problem was that the envoy was dead and he died at his hands. Now,
Speaker A
it couldn't be explained, especially seeing the current high-ranking officials of Koha Hayashi's face grew even darker as anyone with a bit of sense could see that the village leadership wasn't going to stand up for the Huga clan. What to do? His mind
Speaker A
raced, but he couldn't find a way out. Finally, with a sigh, he reluctantly spoke. The despicable Kimogakure kidnapped my daughter. I fought with this envoy to rescue her. I swear I held back, but he died anyway. This is
Speaker A
definitely a Kimogakure conspiracy. After saying this, Hayashi looked at Jeriah, hoping he could help his clan.
Speaker A
this time. After all, Jeriah was not Herusen. And as the fifth Hokag, if he were willing to support the Huga clan, they could weather the storm. But on the other hand, Jeriah opened his mouth several times, but couldn't say a word.
Speaker A
If it were the old him, he would surely have supported the Huga clan since the fault lay with Kimogakir. But now he couldn't, as the fifth Hokag's position had changed. Could he still blindly protect the Huga clan? With the village
Speaker A
so weak now, could they really afford a war with Kimogakir? Just as Jeriah was at a loss for an answer, Husen, who had been silent with eyes closed, spoke, "Enough. Go back. I know the Huga clan is not at fault, but everyone knows the
Speaker A
village's situation. As the vill's leaders, we must consider the whole village. Go back and discuss countermeasures first. We'll see what Kimikir demands." Huga Hayashi, you better watch out. Saratobi Herusen was the first to leave. Jeriah, who was deeply anticipated by Hayashi, Huga
Speaker A
merely sighed and left directly without giving Hayashi any assurance or promise. Kohari Yudetain and Hamira Mido eventually left the Huga clan grounds without saying a word. Yes, ever since Jeriah became Hokag, Saratobi Husen and Danzo worked in perfect coordination,
Speaker A
leaving no room for them. Now the two are mere tools. Whatever Saratobi Herusen and Danzo ordered they would comply accordingly. This was their only value. By obeying Saratobi Herusen, they could ensure the stability of their two clans and even secure some resources in
Speaker A
the vill's distribution. Otherwise, what else could they do? Go and join that fool Jeriah. Not to mention that the man has been stripped of power by Saratobi Herusen. Even if the two were willing to help Jeriah, would he be willing to
Speaker A
share some resources with the two clans? Impossible. Jeriah is too naive. He would absolutely handle things strictly by the book and not share resources or benefits. Besides that, what else?
Speaker A
Defect to the new leaf of Acha. Huh? That would be like seeking death. So, it's better to play it safe and continue with Saratobi Herusen. Apart from no longer holding power, it's no different from before. This was also the reason
Speaker A
they didn't voice opinions on the Huga matter today. They no longer held any power as Saratobi Husen who had stepped down had taken all their authority into his own hands. So as for now, the two merely came to observe the situation.
Speaker A
Since Saratobi Herusen left, they naturally wouldn't stay either. Hayashi Huga. At this moment, his face was grim.
Speaker A
Watching the others leave smuggly is hard, instantly sinking to the bottom. He was not stupid. Saratobi Herus's words before leaving had subtly expressed the village's stance. Even if this incident was instigated by Cloud for the sake of the village's peace
Speaker A
talks, the village could only choose to endure. After Cloud makes its demands, the village can only bargain. But in essence, even if Cloud is demanding a lot, in the end, the Huga clan will have to compensate. Clan leader, the
Speaker A
village's high-ranking officials are untrustworthy. Let's just defect to the Aiha since all the ninja clans have gone there. Over these two years, the village has become increasingly heartless. I think it will eventually be absorbed by the new leaf. The Huga clan members
Speaker A
spoke up one after another. They were all angered by the village's actions. It was Cloud that wronged them first. How could the Huga let Cloud snatch their bloodline and just stand by watching others take it? But now, even though the
Speaker A
Huga clan did nothing wrong, the vill's current move is unbearable for all of them. This is different from the original story. In the original, due to the absence of the new leaf, the Huga clan had no other choice. So, Hayashi's
Speaker A
twin brother could die in his place. Now, with the New Leaf, no one would choose that path. On the one hand, the Huga clan has pride since Cloud is clearly at fault sending their own clan member to death. Moreover, for the clan
Speaker A
leader to die and even hand over the corpse to Cloud. What a joke. On the other hand, they must consider the internal stability of the Huga clan. The problems between the main and branch families are already significant. If
Speaker A
they truly choose to let the branch clan leader die, wouldn't that drive the remaining branch members to complete despair? In the original, this was impossible. Without the New Leaf, the branch family had no choice but to die together, or else the main family could
Speaker A
absolutely control them. Now, it's not possible. The New Leaf's policies are clear. They respect everyone who joins and welcome the Huga clan to join.
Speaker A
However, if the Huga truly joined the New Leaf, they might not stop the Caged Bird, but they would absolutely abolish the main family's control, developing new sealing techniques to prevent the main family from controlling the branch.
Speaker A
This was also why the Huga Clan hadn't defected to the new leaf over the past 2 years. But now, if the Huga clan dares to say such a thing as sending the branch clan leader to die, then it's
Speaker A
uncertain if the angered branch members would defect to the new leaf in droves. They can do this. Although the leaf has centuries patrols and even sealing barriers, the Huga clan all possess the Bakugan bloodline. Even if the branch
Speaker A
family's Bakugan has a onederee blind spot due to the caged bird, they can still avoid the village's surveillance.
Speaker A
Once these branch members join the new leaf, they naturally receive its protection. The new leaf is different from the old. Their leader is Aiha. He won't back down. If the main family truly dares to use the curse mark to
Speaker A
kill branch members who join the new leaf, then Achiha would absolutely use this as an excuse to start a war. And with the current attitude of the old leaf's high-ranking officials, they don't dare start a war with Cloud, so
Speaker A
would they dare start one with the new Leaf. All right, stop arguing. The elders will go to the meeting room to discuss. A everyone else disperse. After saying that, Hayashi Huga handed his daughter to a maid and then headed to
Speaker A
the Huga meeting room first. Many elders from both the main and branch families followed while other Huga members though angry eventually chose to go home. Soon in the meeting room, Hayashi Huga sat at the head looked at the elders below and
Speaker A
immediately spoke. Elders, the situation is as such. Now I should properly discuss how the Huga clan should proceed from here. Everyone has seen the state of the old leaf over these two years. In my view, the old leaf can't hold on much
Speaker A
longer, especially with the new leaf clearly present. Anyone not stupid knows what to choose. The old leaf seems to hold on now only because of Saratobi Harusen's authoritarian rule. The Huga clan joined the leaf originally because the village could protect the clan and
Speaker A
allow it to live better and normally. But now, a the old leaf clearly can't provide this. The subtle choice of the village's high-ranking officials just now has proven this to us. They want to back down, but the Huga clan will pay
Speaker A
the price. The new leaf side is also troublesome. Everyone knows the policies Aihajene promotes. The new leaf doesn't force the removal of the caged bird, but it strictly prohibits the main family from using the curse mark to control the
Speaker A
branch. So, let's discuss. Should the Huga clan defect to the new leaf in the future? In the meeting room, a dead silence prevailed. After Hayashi Huga's words, no one present dared to speak. As for the branch family, there was no need
Speaker A
to mention them. They had little say in the matter. that they were even allowed to attend the meeting was already a favor from the main family. As for the main family, well, although they rarely left the village and did not participate
Speaker A
in wars, those who held high positions were hardly fools. With the option of New Leaf Village now available, they naturally would not clamor for Hayashi's brother Hzashi to be sent to his death.
Speaker A
First, although Hayashi and Hizashi were from the main and branch families, respectively, their brotherly bond remained. Unless it were a situation with no other choice, as in the original story, no one would be foolish enough to propose such a suggestion. They might
Speaker A
not fear angering Hashi, but Hayashi was the clan head of the main family, even if he could not openly target them, who could guarantee that he would not secretly make life difficult for them.
Speaker A
Second, they could clearly see that the old leaf village was already on its last legs. It might still hold up for now, but who knew how much longer it could endure. The Huga clan had to consider the future. Had it not been for the
Speaker A
overly stringent conditions of New Leaf Village, they would have defected 2 years ago. After a long silence, an elder of the main family finally attempted to speak. Hayashi, can we negotiate? If New Leaf Village does not interfere in our clan's internal
Speaker A
affairs, then the Huga clan will choose to join New Leaf Village. There's no need for so-called discussions. With his words, others chimed in one after another. Their opinions were astonishingly unanimous. Everyone wanted to join New Leaf Village directly, yet
Speaker A
also wished to retain the autonomy of ninja clans. In response to this, the Branch family's expression remained unchanged, but from their tightly clenched fists, it was clear their hearts were not calm. Of course, they desired freedom. That was the wish of
Speaker A
all branch members. Even if they still had to retain the caged bird seal in the future, as long as the main family had no right to judge them and could no longer treat them like livestock or slaves, it would be enough for the
Speaker A
branch family. So seeing the main family's opposition, they were naturally furious. But likewise, unless the Huga clan truly joined New Leaf Village, they dared not voice their true feelings.
Speaker A
Otherwise, what awaited them would be a fate worse than death, if not death itself. Enough. Shut up. Hayashi Huga had heard enough and immediately spoke to silence everyone. New Leaf Village's policies are right there. It is we who
Speaker A
are eager to join them, not them begging us to join. Hearing this, many of the main family members were instantly stunned. Indeed, it was not New Leaf Village begging the Huga clan to join.
Speaker A
In such a situation, they had no bargaining power. The village not interfering with ninja clans was a rule set by the Old Leaf Village. New Leaf Village had no such rule. Other ninja clans might not care for the Aiha were
Speaker A
too arrogant to bother with internal affairs of other clans. The Huga clan was a pure exception. Because the caged bird seal was utterly detestable, and other ninja clans did not have such a things, they naturally had no objections. In the end, a dead silence
Speaker A
fell. Seeing this, Hayashi understood at once. The elders of the main family were still reluctant to give up. But well, he would wait until tomorrow to see the conditions from Humogakur, then carefully consider whether to join New Leaf Village. With a helpless wave of
Speaker A
his hand, he ended the meeting. Meanwhile, on the other side, only three people remained in the Hokage's office.
Speaker A
Heren, Soratobi, Jeriah, and Danzo. As for Koharu and Hamira, they had long lost any right to make decisions. This matter is troublesome. Although Kimovicure is clearly intentional, we must back down. If things go wrong on the front lines, the leaf village would
Speaker A
be completely finished. The village cannot sustain a war right now. We cannot drag the entire village into a war for the sake of one Huga clan member. Whatever demands Kimovicure makes, we must bear them. Even at critical moments, we might have to
Speaker A
pressure the Huga clan. Any objections? Husen put down his pipe his tone low. His eyes sharp as an eagle's fixed on Danzo and Jeriah. In response, Danzo, whose aura grew ever glooier, did not clamor for war as he had in the original
Speaker A
story, but his tone remained contemptuous. Heren, you are too weak. The leaf village cannot sustain a war, but can Kimogure sustain one? Don't forget that Kimogakure also suffered heavy losses in the third great ninja war. Moreover, if the leaf village truly
Speaker A
goes to war with Kimogakure with the wicked Achiha, just stand by and watch us fight. The daimo of the land of fire would never agree either. So, what are you afraid of? This incident was provoked by Kimobicure. Even if it
Speaker A
spreads across the entire ninja world, it is Kumobicure that will lose face. I think we should be tough and simply push back. I don't believe Kimogir dares to start a war. Danzo's eyes were cold and his tone was adamant. He might look down
Speaker A
on the Huga clan, but he was an absolute hardliner. It was impossible for him to show weakness. Even if Humogir truly dared to go to war, he would find a way to drag New Leaf Village into it.
Speaker A
Hirusen fumed and slammed the table. The village needs stability and recovery. We must prevent any accidents. Your plan may sound good, but what if something unexpected happens? If we drag the village into a war, how can it recover?
Speaker A
Even if the Huga clan has to suffer a little for the sake of the village's overall stability, I believe Hayashi will understand everything for the village. I will not allow you to act recklessly. In response, Danzo rose in
Speaker A
anger and shouted, "Husen, you will regret this." Danzo, don't forget. Herusen slammed the table again. I am the cough. Clearly, he suddenly remembered that he was no longer the Hokag. So, for a moment, Harusen was at a loss for words. In response to this,
Speaker A
Danzo let out a disdainful sneer, then turned and left the Hokag's office, slamming the door shut behind him.
Speaker A
Herusen was extremely embarrassed. But after taking a deep breath, he looked at Jeriah beside him. "Jariah, you are the Hokag. What do you think we should do about this matter?" Indeed, although he held the vill's power, Jeriah was the
Speaker A
Hokag. So, he needed to make the final decision. Or put simply, he would take responsibility for it. The label of coward externally had to be pinned on Jeriah. In response, Jeriah did not think much about it and simply said
Speaker A
lightly, "Old man, I only worry about one thing. If the village doesn't protect the Huga clan, what if they turn around and join New Leaf Village? Have you considered that?" Jeriah possessing a clear mind voiced his concerns. With
Speaker A
the emergence of the new hidden leaf, the situation had become dire for their village. Aside from the four ninja clans led by Harusen and the other elders, the Huga were now the only remaining ninja clan in the village. Though he leaned
Speaker A
towards supporting commoner ninja, he had to admit that in true combat, those of ninja clan lineage were simply superior to commoners. Overwhelmingly superior in every conceivable way. If they truly drove the Huga clan away, the village would instantly descend to
Speaker A
second rate status. As for the four clans of Herusen and company, he had never paid much attention to such matters before, but now that he had risen to the position of fifth Hokag and had actually met the ninja of these
Speaker A
clans, even Jeriah the Hokag could not help but shake his head in disappointment. They were utterly inadequate. First, these four clans possessed no keky. Second, they had no secret techniques to speak of. Though they had been pampered and fattened by
Speaker A
the four old men like Hirusen, their actual combat prowess was remarkably lackluster, even inferior to the elite among commoner ninja. With these four underwhelming clans and commoner ninja, the village could hardly compare to the other four great ninja villages. It was
Speaker A
nearly falling behind, even the hidden reign and hidden dragon villages. Did he the fifth Hokag even deserve the title of Kaga? And so Jeriah now perhaps had no desire to wage war and might even concede a step in skirmishes with the
Speaker A
hidden cloud. Yet he absolutely refused to accept an endless retreat without principle. Jeriah, you worry too much.
Speaker A
Ian Saratobi, looking at the deeply concerned Jeriah, took a drag of his pipe before speaking slowly. The new hidden leaf will never permit the traditions of the main house and branch house. On that point alone, the Huga clan will never defect to them. His gaze
Speaker A
was filled with unwavering conviction. Indeed, if the Huga clan had wished to defect to the new Hidden Leaf, they would have had countless opportunities to flee over the course of two full years. Yet, they had not done so. That
Speaker A
in itself was sufficient proof of his assertion. After all, the Huga had not been pushed to the brink of destruction.
Speaker A
They were merely being asked to pay a certain price. What was the big deal?
Speaker A
Jeriah opened his mouth to speak, but ultimately let out a sigh, shaking his head as he lost the will to argue further. Perhaps Arusen was right. The village truly could not afford war right now. The night passed without further
Speaker A
words. The next morning, the envoy from the hidden cloud arrived at the Hokag's office and immediately stated their demands. Huga Hayashi must pay with his life for the death of their ninja, and they would take his corpse back with
Speaker A
them. A sharp intake of breath. Everyone gasped at the exorbitant demand. Jeriah slammed the table at once. Absolutely impossible. Don't even think about it.
Speaker A
Oomph as you wish. The hidden cloud envoy showed not a trace of concern. He cast a contemptuous glance at everyone present, then spoke in a frigid tone.
Speaker A
This is the final decision of the rakage sama. The ninja who died last night was our hidden clouds Tetssurdano, one of the elite Jonan of our village and a rare possessor of the storm release, Keki Jenkai. If the leaf refuses even
Speaker A
this modest request, then this so-called peace negotiation is meaningless. You may as well prepare for war. Our delegation will give you one day. If there is no answer by this time tomorrow morning, well then with those words, the
Speaker A
hidden cloud delegation did not linger to bicker. They turned and left with a cold snort. All the great villages knew of the matter between the old and new leaf. Everyone had spies planted in other villages. With two Mangeko
Speaker A
wielders and major clans joining the new hidden leaf cloud might not dare provoke them, but the old leaf. How a joke. I'll bully you openly. And what can you do?
Speaker A
Declare war on the hidden cloud. After the cloud envoy departed, Jeriah slammed the table again. The cloud bullies us too much. A storm release Keki Jenkai user killed by Hayashi at merely 30% of his power. This is outright extortion.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Herusen Saratobi puffing ceaselessly on his pipe summoned an A&BU with a wave of his hand. Go asked Danzo whether that man was indeed a storm release ninja. Yes. The ANBU bowed and departed. Not long afterward, the A&BU
Speaker A
returned to the Hokage's office and knelt on one knee speaking respectfully. Tetsaram of the hidden cloud is indeed a storm release ninja. However, this man was diagnosed with a blood illness 2 years ago. According to Root's intelligence from spies in the cloud, he
Speaker A
would have died this year under normal circumstances. Almost instantly, silence fell so thick in the Hokag's office, you could hear a pin drop. So, the so-called storm release ninja was actually real.
Speaker A
This was going to be a problem. Jariah slammed the table in fury. They use a storm-released ninja dying of blood illness to trade for the head of our leafs. Huga clan leader. What a masterful scheme those damned cloud
Speaker A
bastards have hatched. Everyone knows blood illness is incurable. The man was good for nothing but waiting to die.
Speaker A
Herus and Suratobi's eyes flickered with thought. His mind raced at full speed. After a long deliberation, he cleared his throat. Jariah calmed down. Anger solves nothing. Even though the man had a blood illness, we cannot say a word
Speaker A
against it because he genuinely did die at Hayashi's hands. And that gives the cloud ample justification to start a war. Our leaf absolutely cannot afford to give them that excuse. The current leaf cannot withstand such a conflict.
Speaker A
At his words, Jeriah slumped in defeat. If Aihaene had not created the new hidden leaf and all the major clans had remained in the village, he would never have endured such humiliation. But alas, the fact that they had already gone to
Speaker A
establish a new village left him feeling helpless. He asked, "Old man, what's your take on this?" Huga Hayashi cannot die. That much is beyond question. Herus and Sir Tobi first established that bottom line, then pondered briefly before speaking again, first informed
Speaker A
the Huga clan of this news. Let us gauge their reaction. If they can resolve this matter themselves, that would be a benefit to the village as well. With that, he had the AMBU delivered the news to the Huga clan without even consulting
Speaker A
Jeriah the Hokag for his opinion. And as for that, the Ambu bowed and departed.
Speaker A
As a member of the AMBU, he understood perfectly well who truly wielded power in the village. Even though he personally preferred to follow Jariah the Hokage's command, he also knew that Jeriah had no real authority in the village. It seemed Jeriah himself had
Speaker A
never even considered seizing power. So forget it. He was merely a low-ranking A&Bu. He dared not get entangled in such matters. He feared that if he pledged allegiance to Jeriah Husen Saratobi would have him eliminated the very next
Speaker A
day. He did not believe that Jeriah the Hokag would defy his teacher Husen Saratobi for the sake of a mere Yin Buyu like himself. within the Huga clan's compound as the U departed Hugah Hayashi's expression darkened with terrifying intensity. The worst case
Speaker A
scenario had come to pass. Humogakir wanted his life the life of the Huga clan leader and even sought to take his corpse away. As good as declaring outright that they coveted the Bakugan bloodline. More critical still was the
Speaker A
village's stance. Jeriah, his last hope, had offered not even a single word of support, sending Umbu to notify him.
Speaker A
What was the meaning of this? His heart achd as if twisted by knives. his visage grim beyond measure. His fists clenched tightly as flames of fury rose within his eyes. A moment later in the Huga clan's meeting hall, elders of both the
Speaker A
main house and branch house gathered. As Huga Hayashi relayed Kimogakur's demands and the villages position, every elder present was consumed with rage.
Speaker A
Absolutely unacceptable. This is blackmail. They want the life of our Huga clan leader and even the Bakugan bloodline of our clan. Shameless wretches. Clan leader, what do we do? We must make our decision now. The branch house members spoke one after another.
Speaker A
Their expressions were steeped in grim fury insensed by the village's shamelessness. The entire meeting hall soon resounded with condemnations of the village. The main house, however, had yet to voice their stance. Soon after, sensing something amidst the branch
Speaker A
house elders gradually lowered their voices. Within mere minutes, the meeting hall once again fell into a silence so profound that a pin drop could be heard.
Speaker A
The branch house elders faces grew increasingly grim. They too were no fools. The main house's refusal to speak was itself a declaration of intent. They remained unwilling to join New Leaf for the rules that disadvantaged them.
Speaker A
Should the Huga clan truly align with New Leaf, they would lose their elevated standing forever? Hugahayashi's expression was equally grim. As the clan leader from the main house, how could he fail to perceive the main house's stance? But the problem was his very act
Speaker A
of convening this meeting and condemning the village's shamelessness represented his own position as clan leader. The main house elers lack of support was a direct slap to his face as clan leader.
Speaker A
Cold glints flickered intermittently in his eyes, for he understood all too well the main house's basess. If they refused to join New Leaf and yet wish to survive this crisis, only one path remained.
Speaker A
That was Huga Hizashi. He instinctively glanced at Huga Hzashi, and upon seeing his tormented, twisted expression, Hayashi's heart felt as though it were being sliced apart. The two were twins born of the same womb. How could there be no bond between them? In the original
Speaker A
tale, that was because New Leaf did not exist. And Hugahayashi's strength was too ordinary for the sake of the clan.
Speaker A
He had no choice but to send his brother to his death. Now it was different.
Speaker A
Unbroken by absolute despair, Huga Hayashi still harbored genuine affection for his younger brother. However, he did not betray his inclination. He remained seated in tranquil composure, though his gaze toward the main house elders grew increasingly undisguised in its
Speaker A
coldness. The main house elders were unnerved by that stare. They might treat the branch house like dogs, but they dared not overstep with Huga Hayashi.
Speaker A
After all, compared to Hayashi, who had truly fought on the battlefield, these main house elders were raised like pampered livestock. If they provoked Hayashi into a full outburst, even setting aside his status as clan leader, they would gain nothing from the
Speaker A
confrontation. Powerless, the main house elders, their scalps prickling under his gaze saw their leader, Huga, Tindu, venture tentatively. New Leaf treats the Huga clan too harshly. And our clan has yet to reach a point of life and death.
Speaker A
So I believe he attempted to persuade Huga Hayashi, but before he could finish, Haishi cut him off directly.
Speaker A
Enough, Elder Tendu. I know exactly what you intend to say. You want his Ashi to die in my place, don't you? I tell you now, that is nothing but a fantasy.
Speaker A
Though the branch house exists to protect the main house, has the Huga clan truly reached a point of utter desperation? and hardly. Hisashi may be of the branch house, but he is still my brother. You seek to serve your own
Speaker A
selfish interests, yet you dare to cloak it in grand rhetoric about the clan's welfare. I have made my decision. We will align with New Leaf. Elder Tinded, do you have any objection? Hugah Hayesi exuded absolute authority. His strength
Speaker A
perhaps insignificant by the standards of the entire village. Even with the Bakugan Keki Kai, he was at most an elite Jon and perhaps seated at the same table as Kakashi. Yet among the current Huga clan, he was undeniably the
Speaker A
mightiest warrior. And indeed, it was so. With Huga Hayashi's declaration, the main house elders fell completely silent, none daring to challenge his decision. As for Hugahashi of the branch house, his gaze toward his elder brother grew profoundly complex. Clearly, he had
Speaker A
never expected that the brother he had resented his entire life would go to such lengths for his sake. It was at this moment that Huga Hayashi spoke again. I must remind you elders of the main house. The current Kinoa grows ever
Speaker A
more rotten. All of us possess the Bakugan. All of us should clearly see the villages state. Though the members of the Soratobi and the other three clans are numerous, they have never partaken in war. How much real combat
Speaker A
strength can they truly command? And the villagers of Kenoha have long harbored the desire to join New Leaf. It is only through the village's heavy-handed suppression that they remain here for now. Can the village maintain this oppressive policy forever. Should even a
Speaker A
single unexpected incident occur, they would pour out of the village like a flood flocking to New Leaf. I cannot allow the Huga clan to be destroyed alongside Old Leaf. Therefore, my actions are likewise for the sake of our
Speaker A
clan. So now I declare, return to your homes and pack your most essential belongings. Tonight at 2:00 a.m., we depart from the villages west side through the direction of training ground. No. 37. My Bakugan has confirmed that the defenses are weakest there.
Speaker A
Hizashi make a trip to the Hokag's office. Tell Jeriah and Herzen Serbi that the Huga clan needs time to deliver it, and we will present our decision tomorrow morning. Dei, you take charge of watching over the main house. Before
Speaker A
we truly leave the village, anyone who dares to make any move, whether deliberately exposing our whereabouts or attempting to contact the village when discovered, they will be executed without mercy. His words dripped with murderous intent. In the original tale,
Speaker A
he had long harbored the desire to lift the caged bird seal, but was constrained by insufficient strength, lacked a compelling justification to raise the matter, and could not muster the resolve to suppress the main house faction. Now, it was different because with New Leaf's
Speaker A
emergence, Old Leaf had grown ever more decrepit, and the Kumobicure delegation incident had handed him the perfect pretext. The atmosphere in the meeting room was tense. The elders of the branch house struggled to contain their excitement, but those of the main house
Speaker A
wore grim expressions. Faced with a resolute and justified Hayashi Huga, they could think of no way to stop him.
Speaker A
The so-called caged bird seal was utterly ineffective against Hayashi Huga himself. Upon hearing his elder brothers orders, Hizashi Huga was the first to bow. Clan head, I'll go at once. Having said that, he left the meeting room without another word. Meanwhile,
Speaker A
Takahuga, who had been waiting outside, entered and bowed respectfully. As you command, as one of Hayashi's most trusted confidants, he fully understood the implication of this order. The ordinary members of the branch house couldn't possibly keep watch over the
Speaker A
main house. To achieve that, it had to be his team. Indeed, every ninja clan harbored hidden operatives. Shinobi, who were not part of the village's official ranks, and who never participated in wars or missions. His team was directly
Speaker A
under the clan head, and none of its members bore the caged bird seal. The elders of the Huga main house were livid. They glared at Hayesi with seething fury, yet unable to find a rebuttal. They could only scoff and
Speaker A
storm out of the meeting room under the watchful gaze of Takahhuga. There was nothing they could do. Under Hayashi's authority, they couldn't even vent their frustration on the branch house. A moment later, once everyone had left the meeting room fell into utter silence.
Speaker A
Hayashi Huga remained seated in his chair, but he now seemed utterly dejected. After a long while, he began to murmur to himself. Ancestors, forgive me. I do not know if this choice is right or wrong, but the village has
Speaker A
indeed begun to rot. I cannot stand by and watch the Huga clan be buried with the village. The system of main house and branch house can no longer be sustained. Do not blame me. His eyes were clouded with deep unreadable
Speaker A
emotion, and his heart was far from at peace. He himself did not know how long he had been lost in thought in that room. Only when the sun was about to set did Hayashi Huga slowly rise and leave
Speaker A
the meeting room, heading straight for the clan heads residence. Time passed slowly, and soon it was 2:00 in the morning. The entire village of Kohaa was shrouded in darkness. The Huga clan had already gathered and with a faint wave
Speaker A
of Hayashi's hand, they all began to retreat along the pre-planned route. The journey was remarkably smooth. Thanks to the Bakugans Keki Gunkai, and even more so, because the old Kinoa no longer had any ninja clans, they evaded the patrol
Speaker A
squads and lookouts of the U and route eventually crossing training ground no 37. To reach the outskirts, listen carefully, everyone. We are about to trigger the vill's sensory barrier. Each Chunin and Jinnon will carry one civilian clan member on their backs,
Speaker A
then run for the new Kohaa with all their might. All Jon and rally to me. I will personally lead the rear guard.
Speaker A
I've calculated the distance between here and new Kenoha. We only need to hold for 15 minutes. As for the main house, do as you please. Do whatever you want, even defecting to Herus and Saratobi. If you like, move out now.
Speaker A
With Hayashi's command, the entire Huga clan sprang into action. Chunin and Jinnon began hoisting civilians onto their backs, preparing for the final sprint. Even Takahuga stopped guarding the main house and led his men to Hayashi's side. Hayashi Huga's
Speaker A
expression was grave. This was the absolute limit of what the Huga clan could achieve. Though the Bakugan had gotten them this far, they were not part of the village's high command. So, they had no way of knowing the precise
Speaker A
details of the village's large-scale sensory and defensive barriers. So, next, the barrier squad would surely detect the Huga clan's defection. Jeriah and Herusen Saratobi would then come after them. The only saving grace was that the distance between the old and
Speaker A
new Kohaa was not too great. Even the vill's strongest would need at least five or 6 minutes to reach them. If he could lead the clan's Jonahan in holding the line for 10 minutes, the bulk of the Huga clan would enter New Kohaa and then
Speaker A
he and the other Jonan could retreat toward New Konoha as well. 3 minutes later, once everyone was ready, Hayesi Huga finally gave the signal with a sweeping gesture. In almost an instant, everyone began sprinting desperately toward New Konoha outside the village,
Speaker A
while Hayashi led the Jonahan at the rear. It was worth noting that even the main house was running toward New Kohaa.
Speaker A
They were clearly not foolish. Since they couldn't keep the branch house, who would they command if they stayed in Old Kohaa? Conversely, having no value to old Kenoha, they would likely be forcibly recruited into route by Danzo.
Speaker A
After all, without the caged bird seal, Danzo could still make use of them. So, off to new Konoha it was. they might no longer command a branch house. But at least they could live like normal people. Hayashi commanding the rear
Speaker A
guard turned his head to look back at Canoa. He saw a signal flare shoot into the sky and within less than a minuteu operatives route patrols and centuries began to appear charging straight at them. Huga clan are you defecting? The
Speaker A
leadingu demanded in an icy tone. In response, Hayashi couldn't be bothered to answer and simply continued running with his clansmen. Time was life now.
Speaker A
Every extra step counted. Who had time to argue with the MBU? enraged. The ANBU leader gave a wave of his hand. Kill them. In an instant, all the A&BU and root members who had arrived surged forward, attacking the Huga clan. The
Speaker A
many Jonan of the Huga clan, regardless of whether they were from the main or branch house, engaged the A&Bu directly in fierce combat. Even Hayashi himself joined the Frey, taking down an enemy with every swing of his hand. Indeed, as
Speaker A
an elite Jonan with the Bakugan Keki Gungai, these&u might be skilled, but they were mostly commoners by birth.
Speaker A
They were no match for Haishi at all. Everyone fight while retreating. Don't waste time. Haishi roared casually, dispatching an A and BU with a palm strike as he continued moving toward New Konoha. The others instantly understood.
Speaker A
They stopped focusing on killing enemies and focused instead on running toward New Konoha, only engaging when Ambu caught up then quickly disengaging to continue their retreat. 9 minutes later, Jeriah Herusen Saratobi and their forces finally arrived. They had been
Speaker A
completely caught off guard by the Huga clan's defection. So even though the barrier squad had reported it, it took time for Jeriah to gather his forces.
Speaker A
Hayashi Huga, have you lost your mind? Can't we resolve this through discussion? Why would you defect without a word? Jeriah was beside himself with grief and indignation. As a complete fool when it came to political minations, he failed to grasp the true
Speaker A
significance behind Haruen Saratob's decision to have the A&BU relay the Cloud Village delegation's demands to the Huga clan. It was precisely for this reason that he now felt ever more anguished. After all, from his perspective, although the Cloud Village
Speaker A
delegation's demands were indeed outrageous, the village was unwilling to go to war, so it was merely a matter of everyone discussing things with one another. But what he never anticipated was that such a simple action would lead to the Huga clan's defection. It
Speaker A
shouldn't be. Hadn't Husen Saratobi assured him that the Huga clan would never defect when he had previously voiced his concerns about that very possibility. With this thought in mind, he instinctively glanced at Huen Saratobi. He saw that Herusen's face was
Speaker A
now grim and dark with a flicker of fury and malice gleaming within his eyes.
Speaker A
Helplessly, Herusen was bewildered as well. His methods had been far more lenient than usual. And moreover, this whole affair had been instigated by the Huga clan themselves. So, what was wrong with asking the Huga clan to resolve it?
Speaker A
Back when he had targeted the Aiha, he had been far more ruthless than he was being with the Huga. Hadn't the Aiha endured it as best they could back then?
Speaker A
Why was it that now when it was the Huga clan's turn, they couldn't bear even the slightest grievance? Haishi turned back.
Speaker A
While there is still room to salvage this situation, I can promise that nothing happened tonight. Take my advice, defecting to the Aiha will do the Huga no good. As for the cloud village matter, we can still discuss it.
Speaker A
Huen Sartobi's tone was as gentle as possible as he tried his utmost to persuade Hayashi to change his mind.
Speaker A
Helplessly, Kohaa was far too weak now, and the Huga clan was considered one of its pillars. If even the Huga clan chose to defect to Achihajene, then old Kinoa would truly be nothing more than an empty shell. And who could then claim to
Speaker A
represent the true legitimacy of Kenoha. But unfortunately, Hayashi's expression remained remarkably calm. He still didn't order his clansmen to stop and didn't even acknowledge Jeriah and the others. Instead, he continued to urge his clansmen to flee as quickly as
Speaker A
possible. After all, the two villages were not far apart. And every extra minute, they gained me another clansmen could survive. So in the pitch black darkness of the night, the Huga clan frantically rushed towards New Kohaa with Jeriah Herus and Soratobi and the
Speaker A
others chasing behind them. The scene was naturally quite absurd to behold. Hayashi, don't run. Tell me your conditions. We can still talk. I really don't want to fight you. Please don't force my hand. All right. Jeriah chased after him, trying to persuade Hayashi
Speaker A
all the while. But unfortunately, at that moment, Hayashi was solely focused on running, having no intention whatsoever to banter with Jeriah. He only thought about stalling for time. He even silently began to pray that Jeriah would try to persuade him more, granting
Speaker A
the Huga clan more precious time to escape. Even just one more minute would be enough. Chaos Lion's main technique.
Speaker A
Jeriah wasn't foolish. Seeing the situation before him, he knew he couldn't wait any longer. So, seeing that Hayashi remained silent and intent on his path, he knew the man had made up his mind. He made his move. The hair
Speaker A
behind him grew wildly at an astonishing speed, aiming to directly restrain Hayishi. Eight trigrams vacuum palm.
Speaker A
Seeing this, Hayashi turned and struck out a palm. His Bakugan bulged and Jeriah's chakra flow became vivid and clear before his eyes. His palm struck precisely at the junction of Jeriah's chakra circulation, instantly disabling Jeriah's jutzu. Clearly, as long as
Speaker A
Jeriah didn't use sage mode, Haiishi was still capable of exchanging blows with him. Shuriken shadow clone technique.
Speaker A
Hirusen Saratobi made his move as well. After casually throwing a single shuriken, he rapidly formed hand seals, and it instantly multiplied into hundreds upon thousands, flying densely towards the Huga clan. Forced to, Haishi and several Jonan had no choice but to
Speaker A
halt their escape and began to counter with the eight trigrams palms. Firest style dragon flame jutzu. Earth style earth dragon jutzu. Lightning style thunderclap. Water style water dragon jutzu. Combined jutzu earth dragon flame stream. Combined jutzu lightning water
Speaker A
dragon jutzu. Unlike Jeriah who was still trying to persuade Harusen had already discerned from Hayashi's eyes how resolute the Huga clan's conviction was. Therefore, at this moment, he no longer held back. At this moment, Husen Saratobi displayed the formidable power
Speaker A
of the professor of jutzu. His hand seal speed was incredibly fast, and his chakra reserves were vast. Standing in the distance, he resembled a cannon turret, unleashing one jutzu after another with effortless ease. Under this barrage of jutzu, several Huga Jonan
Speaker A
were instantly killed, and a large number of lightly and heavily wounded fell to the ground in droves. It must be said, against opponents weaker than himself, Husen's advantage in group combat was immense. Faced with this scene, Hayashi was utterly enraged.
Speaker A
Eight trigrams palms rotation. Haishi let out a furious roar. A spherical chakra shield formed instantly blocking the hail of jutzu, even reflecting countless attacks back at his opponents.
Speaker A
Almost simultaneously, even the numerous ambu charging in were instantly blasted away, suffering significant casualties.
Speaker A
Don't underestimate the Huga clan, eight trigrams mountain crusher. Hizashi also made his move. A massive beam of chakra akin to a laser shot out in a straight line. The amb you caught in its direct path were instantly annihilated. But the
Speaker A
primary target Husen Saratobi Agile as a nimble monkey dodged in the blink of an eye and immediately used the summoning jutzu to call forth Emma. Herusen this time the opponent is no time to explain.
Speaker A
Transform into the adamanton staff. This very well. Emma who had just appeared hadn't even grasped the situation before transforming into the adamant staff and being grasped in Herusen's hand. He then ferociously charged straight at Hayesi.
Speaker A
And for this, Hayashi countered with the eight trigrams 128 palms. Although fine beads of sweat appeared on his forehead, he was barely managing to hold on with the help of his bugan. Damn it all. Why?
Speaker A
Why has it come to this? We were all comrades. But forget it. Since we have become enemies, I can no longer hold back. Summoning jutzu with a resounding poof, a colossal toad appeared.
Speaker A
Gamabunta by me some time. Gamabunta with a large pipe clenched in his mouth drew the massive sword from his waist and engaged his Ashi in battle. As for Jeriah, he had now brought his hands together in a seal, looking as if he was
Speaker A
about to enter sage mode. There was no other way. Since the Huga clan could no longer be kept as the Hokag of Kohaa, he had no choice but to eliminate them.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, a massive contingent of the Huga clan rushed toward New Koha, naturally drawing the attention of its covert sentinels. The recent treaty between the cloud and old Kohaa only heightened the alertness.
Speaker A
While Achihajene might have dismissed this matter, Kakashi took it quite seriously. Thus, under his orders, every U unit of New Kohaa, even those not deployed near Old Kohaa silently observed the direction of Old Kohaa from beyond New Konoha's borders. Before the
Speaker A
Huga clan could reach New Kohaa, an U squad intercepted them. You are the Huga clan. Leading the squad was Achiha Tachi. Since he and Shers had changed their minds, the four symbol seals within them had been undone and both had
Speaker A
chosen to join the Yu. Clearly unlike ordinary Aiha who preferred to serve as freelance ninja, they were willing to operate in the shadows, clearing all obstacles for the village. Yes, we are the Huga clan. This time our clan leader
Speaker A
Fagaka leads us. We have come to seek refuge in new Kohaa. All our clansmen are here. The Joon led by Fagaku have been intercepted by the old Kohaa high-ups and they are likely still engaged in battle. We beg you to lend
Speaker A
aid to our clan leader. The speaker was merely a huga tune in his heart filled with anxiety as he faced the umbu of new Kohaa. There was no helping it. They were only seeking refuge not yet acknowledged by New Konoha. So he was
Speaker A
uncertain whether New Konoha would be willing to help. Nevertheless, considering the safety of their clan leader, he instinctively pleaded to this. Aiha Jiene nodded. He offered no promises, only ordering his subordinates to fire a signal flare before addressing
Speaker A
the Huga clansmen head toward New Konoha. I will have an U member guide you. As for whether to aid your clan leader, that decision rests with my superiors. The Huga clansmen felt a pang of disappointment. Nevertheless, the mere permission for their clansmen to
Speaker A
proceed to new Kohaa filled them with gratitude. They nodded and continued their journey. They were but ordinary ninja with pursuers from old Konoha on their heels. All they could do was avoid adding to the burden of their stronger
Speaker A
clansmen. Aiha Atachi watched group after group of huga pass him sprinting toward new Kenoha his gaze complex. A strange inexpressable turmoil churned within him. How absurd. The village he had once believed in had become so reviled that even the last great clan,
Speaker A
the Huga. This clan, which had long vied with the Achiha for the title of the village's foremost family, was now willing to lower its proud head and flee with all its members to New Konoha.
Speaker A
Looking at it this way, his former self had been truly foolish. Yet, just as Aihaachi was lost in thought, Kakashi arrived with the main U force. And even Fagaku, his own father, led the Aiha elite to the scene. Captain Father Aiha
Speaker A
Itachi spoke respectfully. Kakashi nodded at Itachi, then drew his father's white light chakra saber. By the Hokag's order, aid the Huga clan. Then he transformed into a flash of lightning, his eyes blazing with excitement, his body flicker technique pushed to its
Speaker A
absolute limit as he charged directly toward the battle zone. Indeed, in the case of his father's suicide, Danzo had been the true instigator. But Saratobi Herusen was also complicit. For 2 years, he had lacked the opportunity. Now that
Speaker A
a chance had finally arisen, he was determined to confront Saratobi Herusen. Upon hearing Kakashi's command, Fugaku Itachi, and the others did not hesitate, charging straight into the battle zone.
Speaker A
A fierce glint flickered in every eye. For those who had joined New Koha, nearly every clan harbored some grievance against Saratobi Herusen and his ilk. In the dense forest outside, old Kohaa. Jeriah, having entered sage mode with the aid of the two Mount
Speaker A
Maboka sages, single-handedly suppressed Huga Hayashi and Isashi. If not for the faint glimmer of hope he still harbored, he could have struck them down long ago.
Speaker A
Hayashi hisashi, I'll give you one last chance. Look around you. These are your Hugo elites. Is it not a pity to let them die here? Surrender. As the fifth Hokag of Kinoa, I promised that tonight's incident can be overlooked.
Speaker A
Jeriah fought even as he urged surrender a glimmer of compassion in his eyes. To this, Hayashi and Hizashi battered and bleeding from the corners of their mouths instinctively glanced around at Jeriah's words. Under Saratobi Herusen's rampage, their clans Jonan had suffered
Speaker A
heavy casualties. The sight made their hearts bleed. Haishi, in particular, felt a piercing pain. He had known this defection would cost some clansmen, but witnessing the actual loss now was a torment beyond words. Yet his gaze remained resolute. By delaying so long,
Speaker A
he believed most of the Huga clansmen had already reached new Konoha. Thinking this, his tone was laced with contempt.
Speaker A
Jariah, save your breath. Your promises and guarantees mean nothing. You abandoned avenging your own disciple.
Speaker A
And even when your grand disciple Narudo sank to such depths, all you offered was cheap concern. Now that you are Hokage, you cannot even restore his reputation.
Speaker A
Fifth, Hokag, how what a joke. Do you have even a shred of real power? How could I entrust the lives of my Huga clan to a puppet Hokage like you? So spare me your words. Today we may be
Speaker A
doomed, but the majority of the Huga clan should have already entered new Kenoha by now. They will welcome a new life. That is enough. I Hugahayashi die without regret. My brother and I will await you in the pure land. Let us see
Speaker A
how long this rotten old Kinoa can endure. Huga Hayashi was defiant. Having come this far, he was prepared for death. And no longer would he cower as he once did. Jera's expression darkened, but just as he was about to strike, a
Speaker A
sharp sound of something cutting through the air reached his ears. Raichiri. Then a brilliant flash of lightning and a white figure charged fiercely towards Saratobi Herusen. Ca ca Cashi. Jeriah growled through clenched teeth. his voice turning icy. Kakashi is incredibly
Speaker A
fast. He is the most typical assassin type ninja with almost no advantage in group battles. And in direct confrontation, he is merely an elite Jonan. However, in terms of assassination, he is absolutely at the king level. Especially in such a chaotic
Speaker A
battlefield, no one noticed the hidden Kakashi. And when he struck, it was as swift as thunder tearing across the sky.
Speaker A
Especially a technique like Chidori which requires the coordination of the Shaing fully demonstrates the terrifying level of his speed. Therefore, for a moment, even a kaga level powerhouse like Saruti Husen broke out in a cold sweat on his forehead in an instant.
Speaker A
Even though he used the clone technique to escape elsewhere, in a thousandth of a second, the moment his clone shattered his real body was stabbed an inch into the chest. In the blink of an eye, blood flowed. Teacher. Seeing this, Kakashi
Speaker A
was utterly enraged. Even though his teacher had done many wrong things, he was still his teacher. At this moment, he was filled with rage and wanted to charge straight over. Now the eyes looking at Kakashi also began to flicker
Speaker A
with killing intent. But unfortunately before he could truly rush to Kakashi's side, Fagaku directly blocked his path, instantly activating his sharing to three Tommo and his murderous aura locked onto the Jeriah before him.
Speaker A
Jeriah, your opponent is me. But I don't want to fight you for now. So I advise you to give up today's actions. The Huga clan is protected by new Kenoha. Since we are here, you have no chance.
Speaker A
Fagaka's face was stern. And in his battle state, even Jeriah before him, now felt his hair stand on end. Yes, before he came, he had been briefed by Achiha Jeene and knew that tonight's main objective was still to safely
Speaker A
escort the Huga clan back. Even though he also hated the old Kohaa highups, he knew that tonight was not the time for battle. On the other side, Jeriah looked at Fagaku before him and his eyes flickered with shock and bewilderment.
Speaker A
Obviously, the first time he encountered Fugaku in a battle state, the feeling was completely different from usual.
Speaker A
Even Jeriah who had activated sage mode now dared not show the slightest slack. Fagaku, your new Kohaa has gone too far.
Speaker A
This is our village's affair. What does it have to do with new Kenoha? What right do you have to stop us? Seeing the increasing numbers of new Kohaa Yinbu and Aihajaya, though feeling frustrated in his heart knew that tonight's matter
Speaker A
would likely be difficult to continue. No choice. Old Kohaa had too few strong warriors, he subconsciously looked around at the situation. The new kinoai andu were almost all elites with the eno shikacho abur in Isizuka and others joining them. His own ambu couldn't hold
Speaker A
on for long especially Kakashi holding the white fang short sword and having picked up the hataki sword style again directly forced his teacher Suratobi Haruen into repeated peril. No choice.
Speaker A
Sarutoi Husen was a professor of ninjutsu. Although he had also trained in taijutsu and kjutsu, he was slightly inferior compared to his ninjutsu.
Speaker A
Especially now that he was too old, his taijutsu and kjutsu were no match for Kakashi. Additionally, Kakashi's speed was extremely fast and Saratobi Herusen unable to break free could not use his powerful ninjutsu at all. It was precisely considering this that Kakashi
Speaker A
chose to negotiate. And regarding this, Fagaka hearing Jeriah's words breathed a sigh of relief. Honestly, he was not willing to fight Jeriah. After all, a regular Thritomo couldn't defeat Jeriah in sage mode, and using the Mangeko would consume ocular power. So this
Speaker A
level of opponent should be left to Aiha. After all, in over two years, he had long understood Aiha Jyn's situation. No choice. Aiha had used the mano too many times before. So the entire Achiha clan was worried about
Speaker A
Jyn's eyes going blind. Finally annoyed by the constant concern, Achihaene simply revealed some information about himself to the clan. One of his ocular techniques could slowly restore ocular power. What else was there to say? Guys like Jeriah should be left to Achihajene
Speaker A
in the future. Thinking of this, Fagaku immediately said in a calm tone, "You have forgotten the founding promise of old Kenoha," "Any ninja clan can unconditionally withdraw. Since the Huga clan has chosen to withdraw from a legal standpoint, there is no problem."
Speaker A
"Founding promise! Damn it!" Jeriah's head achd terribly. At this moment, he was instantly stunned. The village's predecessors were too irresponsible. How could they make such a shameless promise? Even if the village was difficult to establish back, then they
Speaker A
couldn't just casually agree to such a thing. Now, damn it. Watching Saratobi Herusen becoming more and more perilous, Jeriah fell silent for a long time before issuing an order. Everyone stop.
Speaker A
We withdraw. Though extremely unwilling in his heart, Jeriah still gave the order. And regarding this, Fagaku immediately spoke upon hearing it.
Speaker A
Kakashi stopped. Don't forget our mission. Although Kakashi, who was in the midst of battle, was very displeased as a ninja, he chose to stop. There was no anger in his eyes because as a high-ranking member of New Konoha, he
Speaker A
knew very well that there would be plenty of time to play with old Konoha in the future. So no rush. He slowly retreated to Fagaku's side before she the white fang short sword in his hand.
Speaker A
At this moment, Jeriah and Saratobi Harusen's gazes towards Kakashi and the others naturally became extremely complicated. But in the end, they all chose to retreat. After the other side was almost gone, Fagaku calmly said to the people behind him, "Take the Huga
Speaker A
clan back to the village." With his command, the Aiha immediately set into motion. Kakashi's Ambu did not move. All Ambu members directly dispersed around the guard to prevent old Kinoa from playing tricks and suddenly striking again. Huga Hayashi and Huga Hizashi
Speaker A
finally relaxed. At this moment, the two knew they were saved. However, their gazes towards Fagaku were very complicated. After all, thinking back to the beginning, the Huga clan was once comparable to the Aiha clan. But what about the future? Don't even think about
Speaker A
it. For the Huga clan to survive, they might have to watch the Aiha's expression. Finally, after a soft sigh, the two turned their gaze to the dead Huga clansmen, their eyes filled with sorrow. After all these people were the
Speaker A
foundation of the Huga clan. All were lost tonight. Even though they knew this was a necessary cost, the weight of this cost still made their hearts heavy.
Speaker A
After all, those who were chosen to stay and fight alongside the two blocking old Kohaa were almost all elite Huga members carefully selected by them. But alas, after a helpless sigh, they closed the eyes of their clansmen and then left
Speaker A
with their bodies at the Aiha clan compound in New Leaf Jyn's courtyard. Despite the late hour Aiha still received Hugah Hayashi, the reason was simple. Although the Huga clan now seemed quite lackluster, their potential was still considerable. After all, they
Speaker A
were descendants of Hamira. Hayashi welcomed to join. However, my demands remain unchanged. Though New Leaf does not wish to meddle in the internal affairs of clans, the caged bird of the Huga clan is utterly detestable. This must be abolished with no room for
Speaker A
negotiation. Ajihajene spoke in a stern tone. He did not waste words directly stating his bottom line. After all, he was now the one who held the moral high ground. He had not forced the Huga to join New Leaf. This was their own
Speaker A
decision. Likewise, this was also the reason he wanted to establish New Leaf. If he had instead seized power directly in the old leaf, he would have had to acknowledge the messy affairs of the previous Hokage. Far better to start a
Speaker A
new game and set his own rules. Emma, I understand. Since we have chosen to join New Leaf, the Huga clan will naturally comply. But I still wish to ask why is Jin Kuan so strict with only the Huga
Speaker A
clan. Huga Hayashi nodded, having already decided to defect to New Leaf. He had long prepared himself mentally.
Speaker A
Nevertheless, he still couldn't quite understand why Achihajene would do this. After all, New Leaf had been established for two years and even ordinary civilians knew its situation. So, it was impossible for the Huga clan not to know. Thus, he was well aware that New
Speaker A
Leaf supported ninja clans and did not interfere with others. Yet, when it came to the Huga clan, Ajihajene was extremely harsh. Why? If Achihajene were from a Huga branch family, it would be understandable, but he was an Aiah, why
Speaker A
was he so strict with the Huga? On the other side, seeing that Huga Hayashi only asked but did not resist the rules he had said, Achiha Jeene felt even more admiration for himself. If he had chosen to seize power directly, it would not
Speaker A
have been so easy to make the Huga submit. Putting down his teacup, Achiha Jeene pondered briefly. After a short contemplation, he did not beat around the bush and spoke seriously. Because the Huga clan also has tremendous potential. The future enemies of the
Speaker A
village will be extremely powerful, so I need to prepare in advance. The Huga clan is one of the pieces I am preparing. During the waring states period, though the Huga clan was not as strong as the Aiha and Sinju, they were
Speaker A
only slightly weaker than the two of us. They were still the strongest among the second tier. Have you ever thought carefully about when the Huga clan began to decline? I can tell you directly it started with the invention of the cage
Speaker A
bird. That thing indeed protected the Bakugan bloodline, but it also severely limited the development of the Huga clan. Now it has even become a tool for the main family to rule the branch families. Under such circumstances, how can you expect the branch families to
Speaker A
strive in cultivation? Perhaps the Huga clan has also produced brilliant geniuses over the years, but under the caged bird seal, their wings have been completely broken. In the end, they all became mediocre. It was under these conditions that the Huga clan grew
Speaker A
increasingly decayed. Although it seemed to preserve the Bakugan bloodline, your clan has completely lost the qualification to climb upward. It is fortunate that we are now in the era of ninja villages and the basic abilities of the Bakugan are still useful.
Speaker A
Otherwise, your clan would have been annihilated long ago. Now, however, things are different. Since you have chosen to join my new leaf in order to fulfill my plans, I hope the Huga clan can produce some true geniuses, thereby
Speaker A
adding more weight to my future schemes. Aiha did not conceal his thoughts. He certainly could not reveal the full truth, but a subtle hint was harmless.
Speaker A
The Huga clan were descendants of Hamira. If not for the absurd cage bird, how could they have failed to produce a single jogen or tinsegan after all these years? In contrast, why could the uchiha be so strong producing powerful figures
Speaker A
in every generation? It was precisely because the aiha had no caged bird that even though many died in each generation and endured brutal battles, this was also the necessary breeding ground for the birth of true strength. On the other
Speaker A
side, hearing Aiha Jyn's words, Huga Hayashi was utterly stunned. Clearly, he had imagined countless possibilities, but never this one. Merely to let the Huga clan produce more strong individuals, and that the vill's future would face some great enemy. An enemy so
Speaker A
formidable that someone like Achiha had to be on full alert and prepare in advance, even going so far as to cultivate the Huga Clan. Of course, these matters were too far from him.
Speaker A
Even if the future was truly terrifying, Aiha would bear the brunt. So now he was more focused on Achihajin's evaluation of the Huga clan. After a moment, however, he had to admit that Achihajene was right. The caged bird, while
Speaker A
seemingly protecting the Bakugan bloodline, also restricted the development of the Huga clan, especially the privileges of the main family over the caged bird, which made the Huga clan lifeless and decayed. Even if the branch families could not resist, they could
Speaker A
simply slack off. Realizing this, Huga Hayashi's face twisted into a bitter smile. His fists clenched tightly, his body trembling slightly. After a long silence, he spoke solemnly. Jin Kuan, "What is your vision for the future of the Huga clan?" "Let nature take its
Speaker A
course," Aiha Jeene said calmly. "It depends on personal choice. Those who are not afraid of hardship and dare to fight as long as they are willing to bear the risk of being hunted by enemies need not be branded with the caged bird.
Speaker A
But if they die, they can only blame their own lack of ability. Those who fear death may have the caged bird, but all clan members must be told in advance the caged bird may protect them, but it will also suppress their bloodline
Speaker A
power, and they will never become true experts." The choice is given to each person and they decide for themselves.
Speaker A
Of course, the control techniques within the caged bird need to be removed, retaining only the core mechanism that destroys the bakugan upon the user's death. Hearing Achihajin's arrangement, Huga Hayashi frowned slightly, his mind racing. In the end, he had to admit that
Speaker A
this was indeed the best possible arrangement. Everything is a matter of free choice. Life and death are one's own responsibility. An hour later, having taken a reassuring pill, Rishiang Rizu arrived at an open space on the western side of Exinemi. Since Achiha
Speaker A
had long anticipated the Huga clans joining, he had already planned ahead several days ago, allocating a new clan territory for the Huga in the future. Of course, at present, it was still all vacant land. The Huga clan would have to
Speaker A
build their own territory, though, if they were willing to spend money, they could also pose tasks at the vill's mission hall. As for tonight, Xai and Mi only provided them with basic supplies, new tents, bedding, and mattresses. [clears throat] The most
Speaker A
fundamental necessities. The injured Huga members were slightly better off. They had already been admitted to the Exai and my hospital for the night.
Speaker A
Chief, you're back. What is the Hokag's thinking? What arrangements does he have for us, the Huga clan? As Rishiang Rizu returned, all the Huga clansmen crowded around him. Their eyes were filled with confusion, worry, and fear, but also
Speaker A
faintly a glimmer of anticipation. It was inevitable. Even though they had learned some information beforehand, today was the first time they had set foot in this unfamiliar place. Suddenly arriving in such a strange land, fear and concern were natural. That faint
Speaker A
glimmer of anticipation stemmed from the previous rumors they had heard about Exai and Mais attitude toward the Huga clan. The caged bird must be undone. So at this moment, seeing Rishang Rizus return, everyone yearned to hear the concrete details
Speaker A
from his lips. And Rishiang Rizu, understanding their worries, made no attempt to conceal anything. He straightforwardly told all the assembled clansmen exactly what Xini had arranged for the Huga. Immediately afterward, countless branch family members wept with joy, their eyes blazing with
Speaker A
excitement. Even though the caged bird still remained on their foreheads, they felt a freedom they had never experienced before. Only the main family wore grim expressions. Watching the branch family's ecstasy, they longed to use the caged bird to discipline them.
Speaker A
But mindful that this was X and M's territory, they ultimately chose to yield. No kidding. X and Mai refused to recognize the main family's privileged status. The main family could punish the branch members, but Xi and Mai would
Speaker A
equally punish them. Rishiang Rich's expression was complex. He couldn't help touching the caged bird on his forehead and then hurried over to Rishiang Rizu.
Speaker A
Brother, does this mean Ningxi won't have to be branded with the caged bird. His eyes were urgent for Ning was his child. This year, 5-year-old Ningi, according to Huga tradition, was originally scheduled to receive the caged bird after Chukians birthday.
Speaker A
But now, Rishiang Rizu looked at his younger brother and finally nodded solemnly. Richard, don't worry. From now on, Huga children do not need to be branded with that ugly caged bird before graduating from the ninja academy. Only when they have graduated from the ninja
Speaker A
academy, truly chosen to leave the village and face the storms of the ninja world, will they need to consider the caged bird issue. Moreover, the caged bird will not be mandatory. It will follow each person's own inner choice.
Speaker A
Only those who fear death dread being targeted by hunters and lack a strong heart will, if they voluntarily request it, be branded with the caged bird. If one possesses the heart of a true warrior and is prepared to face the
Speaker A
bloody storms of the ninja world, then naturally there is no need for such a thing as the caged bird. But likewise, without the protection of the caged bird, the danger of encountering peril may increase. If Ningi chooses not to be
Speaker A
branded with the caged bird, he must be prepared to grow through slaughter. The possibility of death will naturally surpass that of ordinary ninjas. Do you understand Richa? Rishiang Rizu spoke frankly. Although the Huga and Achiha both belonged to the Dojutsu clans, the
Speaker A
Huga were far more dangerous than the Aiah. Because while the Shaing was powerful, the side effects of transplantation were severe. Kakashi was a clear example. A once brilliant Kenoha prodigy now exhausted after just a few jutzu. The Hugis Bakugan, however, was
Speaker A
entirely different. anyone could easily transplant and use its basic functions, making it a coveted prize throughout the ninja world. And at this rich's initially excited, heart frozen place.
Speaker A
In the past, bound by the caged bird's life had been that of a slave treated like a dog by every main family member.
Speaker A
Even as the chief of the branch family, he was essentially powerless. The main family elders cared nothing for his chieftain status. If not for Rishiang Rizus presence granting them a slight show of respect, Rishang Richa would have had no dignity at all.
Speaker A
Growing up in such a harsh environment, he had never had time to contemplate a life without the caged bird. Now everything was different. Only after truly no longer needing to consider the caged bird did he realize that the
Speaker A
outside world was equally fraught with risk. Brother I, Rishang Richa, fell silent because at that moment the joy in his heart was utterly shattered by this harsh reality. The same was true for the other branch family members. Although
Speaker A
the absence of the caged bird filled them with elation, they would soon face a violent storm for the ninja world was filled with too many covetous eyes on the bugan. Witnessing this, Rishiang Rizu patted Rishiang Richa on the
Speaker A
shoulder and then addressed everyone present. Xen my needs the strong. This is the fundamental reason the Hokag chose to intervene in the Huga clan.
Speaker A
Though from now on, without the protection of the caged bird, the risks encountered by the Huga will greatly increase, so too will the probability of producing geniuses and strong warriors.
Speaker A
True strength can only be forged through slaughter and blood soaked storms. So Huga, if you wish to become strong, then fight like the Aiha. Battle and risk your lives. Of course, if you lack that ambition, then honestly accept the caged
Speaker A
bird and take on the responsibility of continuing the Huga bloodline. By now, Rishiang Rizu had clearly come to a full understanding. He too long for the Huga to become as powerful as the Aiha. Thus, even if the path ahead was drenched in
Speaker A
blood and storm, he would walk it without regret. His words also ignited the desire for strength in everyone. In an instant, with the loosening of the caged bird, a brilliant light burst forth from the eyes of every huga
Speaker A
present. That light was called ambition. A strong warrior. I will become one. Just like the Aihan next door, their strength was earned through battle and sacrifice. The Huga clan is no less.
Speaker A
Fight Huga. The next morning, at the break of dawn, at the Hokag Tower in a small meeting room, inside a long rectangular conference table dominated the space. Aiha sat at its head with the leaders of the various ninja clans
Speaker A
seated around it. Off to the side was a smaller table where sununade Kakashi Fagaku and Narroichi were seated. This was the new structure of the new Kenoha.
Speaker A
The great clans held no real political power. Their members were divided into three distinct groups. The first group handled administrative duties. The second group managed the clan's business enterprises while the final group became independent ninjas free from direct clan
Speaker A
or village assignment. The true high-ranking officials of Kinoa now consisted solely of Aiha Jeene the first Hokag, Narroichi, the Jonan squad leader, Kakashi, the Ambu captain, Fagaku, the police chief. O, and finally, Sunady, the head secretary.
Speaker A
They were simply known as the group of five. Institutions from the old Kenoha, such as the interrogation and torture unit, the intelligence division, and the barrier squad, were all reorganized as subordinate divisions under the ANBU, all under Kakashi's sole command.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, the administrative department, education department, ninja academy, mission hall, and medical department were all managed by Sununade, the head secretary. Nar Rokichi, the Jonan squad leader, handled the day-to-day affairs and was directly accountable only to Aiha Gene the Hokag.
Speaker A
Now that everyone is here, let's begin the meeting. After 2 years of planning and scheming the time for harvest has finally arrived. Under the tyranny of the old Kohaa, the Huga clan has joined us, sounding the death nail for the old
Speaker A
village. The old Kohaa now has virtually no strong warriors left. Its civilians and common ninjas are voicing their grievances. The time has come to completely overthrow it. Today's agenda has one primary objective to utterly destroy the old Kohaa while preserving
Speaker A
as many of its ninjas as possible. Even the ninjas of the Saratobi and other three clans should be persuaded to surrender unconditionally. The reason is simple. I view every ninja as a valuable resource. Although members of the four
Speaker A
clans like Saratobi must be put on trial, I do not wish to simply execute them because in my view that is the most wasteful course of action. These ninjas can be utilized during the war or assigned to mining, cultivating
Speaker A
medicinal herbs, growing food, or even constructing roads and houses. All of these are far more beneficial than simply killing them. I call this labor reform. They represent a highquality reusable human resource. Of course, a fair trial is still mandatory. After
Speaker A
judgment, they shall atone for their past deeds through labor. Of course, to prevent these convicted individuals from resorting to extremes, we must also give them hope. Therefore, we need to establish a set of procedures for this labor reform. Those who show good
Speaker A
behavior can have their sentences shortened. After a period of labor, they might even be granted status as citizens of the new Kenoha. We will discuss the specifics. Hence, today's meeting must achieve two objectives. First, how to cause chaos and collapse within the old
Speaker A
Kenoha all while remaining within the bounds of justice. Second, how to take over and resettle the large population and ninjas of the old village. And once criminals like Saratobi Herusen are judged, where should the labor reform operatives be placed? Within which
Speaker A
clan's industries? That is the general framework. Now, let's hear your opinions. So, you go first. Aiha wasted no words. After laying out the broad strokes, he allowed the others to fill in the specifics. No one was surprised that after 2 years they were all
Speaker A
accustomed to Achihajin's style, concise and efficient. Only the newly joined Huga Hayashi was completely stunned.
Speaker A
Holy At first glance, Aiha seemed like a benevolent man. The old Kinoa elite had persecuted the Aiha so harshly. Yet, this young man could still be so magnanimous, refusing to blindly kill even after a trial. But damn it,
Speaker A
upon reflection, Achihajene was a devil. He intended to squeeze every last drop of value out of everyone, maximizing benefit with ruthless efficiency.
Speaker A
Honestly, it would almost be better to just kill Saratobi, Haruen, and the others. Then at least one swift strike would end it all, and they'd know nothing. But now, their remaining years would likely be spent in continuous labor reform, converting themselves into
Speaker A
economic benefits for the new Kohaa. Ruthless, utterly ruthless. Sweat beated on his forehead and his lips twitched uncontrollably. Sonade, however, was unfazed. She too had grown accustomed to Aiha Jyn Jins methods. She immediately voiced her opinion. Hokag sama has set the general direction. So
Speaker A
I'll briefly add some details. I believe we should also categorize the criminals from the old kanoha into different classes. Those guilty of heinous crimes must be executed otherwise we cannot uphold the law or deter evildoers.
Speaker A
Similarly, the labor assigned should be graded according to its severity. Those with lighter sins can be given easier tasks while the more serious offenders must undertake hard labor. Of course, the specific arrangements will need a suitable plan from the administrative
Speaker A
department in the coming days. That's all I have to say. Next, following opening, the others spoke up each contributing details to refine the plan.
Speaker A
Finally, it was Narroichi who spoke regarding Hokagama's plan to destroy the old Kenoha justly. I have a small idea.
Speaker A
It is precisely because of the old Koha's misrule that we have been persistently working to win over its ninjas over these past 2 years. The results are quite promising. Since the various clans have members with prior work experience in the old villages
Speaker A
departments, we have leveraged this to recruit a considerable number of ninjas from its ambu intelligence and administrative divisions. We can use this current cloud incident as a pretext to provide support to these defectors.
Speaker A
They can stir up trouble from within, causing disruption and chaos. As chaos ensues, we can spread propaganda and open the old village's exits. I believe the civilians tired of the old regime's oppressive rule will flee without a second thought. At that point, all we
Speaker A
need to do is prepare to receive them here in the new Kohaa. Finally, we can have these recruited ninjas organize the civilians to create a petition from the people. This way, the new Kohaa can justly answer the peoples will arrest
Speaker A
the old Kohaa's high-ranking officials and then hold a trial. Aihaji nodded slightly. He inwardly agreed with Naru's suggestion. How could personally judging Saratobi Herusen and his cohorts be as righteous as being petitioned by the masses? Good, it's settled. Next, we need to decide which
Speaker A
industries within the village will receive the future reform through labor workers. This must be implemented before the collapse of the old Kenoha. Which clans industries need them? We'll follow the old rule and hold a bidding process.
Speaker A
The specifics will be handled by sunade. As for the final strike against old Koha Naralui, you'll be responsible. Kakashi Zambu must be mobilized to ensure that the Saratobi and the other three clans don't act recklessly in desperation.
Speaker A
Fagaku's police force must maintain stability, ensuring that the influx of people from old Kenoha does not disrupt the normal order of our village. All right, dismissed. With that, Aiha stood up and left the meeting room. As he departed, the other clan leaders began
Speaker A
to gather around. Lady Sunsade, the Nar clan's medicinal herb plantation needs to sign up. Our Inazuka clan's dog kennels also need reform workers. No matter what, we must get a batch of them. The Abureim clan's insect breeding base also needs them. Everyone present
Speaker A
began to speak. At this moment, they didn't seem like clan leaders, but rather ordinary street vendors arguing over the reform workers. This was only natural for the benefits were too great.
Speaker A
After all, in their clan businesses, they would normally have to pay to hire people. But with this batch of reform workers, they only needed to pay a fixed fee to the village, and then they could use these laborers for free over a long
Speaker A
period. Only a fool would refuse such a good deal. Seeing the crowd surging toward her, felt her scalp tingle.
Speaker A
"Bang!" She slammed the table. Stop your arguing. Go back and write an application first. The application must strictly state how many positions can be provided, the specific types of work, and the annual tax amount to be paid to
Speaker A
the village. After saying that, she couldn't be bothered with the crowd and simply left the meeting room. Then, Kakashi, Nara, Lui, Fugaku, and the others also left. In the end, although these clan leaders had been scolded, there was no displeasure on their faces.
Speaker A
Instead, they hurried back to prepare their application plans. The last to leave the meeting room was Huga Hayashi, but his face was filled with emotion. No wonder the shock he had received was too great. The atmosphere and work
Speaker A
procedures in the new Kohaa were completely different from the old Kenoha. But he had to admit that after streamlining the new Kenoha's efficiency was simpler, more direct, and more effective. This atmosphere is truly good. It seems that from today on the
Speaker A
Huga clan should welcome a new life. Thinking about other things is still too far off. I should go back and build the new clan compound first. A faint smile appeared on Hugahashi's face. He needed to establish the new clan compound and
Speaker A
then find a way to sort out all of the Huga clan's assets as quickly as possible. After all, the new Kinoa would soon have countless free laborers. He didn't want to miss this wave of era dividends. In the Hokag's office, just
Speaker A
as Aihajene was sitting behind his desk enjoying life, Nar Lui Kakashi andSunady arrived together. The expressions on all three were grim. Seeing this, Aiha Jeene asked with confusion. What happened? Why do you all look like that? Lord Hokag, I
Speaker A
think you forgotten something. Naralui said seriously, that is Kimogakure. Also spoke with the Huga clan joining the new Kinoa. I'm afraid that Kimogakure will turn its spearhead against us. Kakashi, however, said nothing and simply looked directly at Achihajene. Clearly, he wanted to know
Speaker A
how his hokage would resolve the Huga clan issue. Hearing this, Aiha couldn't help but roll his eyes. Hey, you scared me. I thought something major had happened. You don't need to worry about Kimogicure. There won't be a war. The
Speaker A
fourth rakage may seem reckless and rude, but it's actually just his disguise. No one who becomes a kaga is a fool. Think about the fourth rakage's performance during the third war. Even though his father, the third rakage, died at the hands of a wagure, he was
Speaker A
still able to put aside the vendetta and ally with a wagure to attack our kanoha together. Can someone who does that be a reckless man? During the third war, Kimogi suffered heavy losses to the point where their younger generation was
Speaker A
almost wiped out. How could he possibly dare to start a ninja war at this time?
Speaker A
He simply saw through Saratobi Haruen's age and fear of Warso. He thought he'd give it a try. If those Kumobicure fellows really dare to come, just tell them to get lost. His words were full of authority. After hearing this, and the
Speaker A
others thought it over and realized it seemed to make sense. The fourth rakage could even endure the murder of his father. He truly didn't seem like a mindless, brutish person. But it must be said, his disguise in the past was too
Speaker A
good. Oh, everyone had taken him for a rude person. If not for Achihajins revelation, perhaps they still wouldn't have realized it. Makes sense. Nar Louui spoke first. Lord Hokag, I am enlightened. The others nodded in agreement, and then they all took their
Speaker A
leave to attend to their own affairs. Time passed slowly. With the conclusion of today's meeting, the entire new Kohaa immediately began to operate, efficiently, sharpening their blades for the decaying old Kohaa not far away. But unfortunately, the new Kenoha had
Speaker A
already launched new actions while the old Kohaa was completely unaware of this. Instead, struggling with how to give an explanation to Kimogure. In the Hokag's office, Jeriah sat behind the desk, almost scratching his head off.
Speaker A
Old man talked to me. Now that the Huga clan has defected to the new Kenoha, how do we explain this to Kimogicure? We can't really follow Danzo's example and choose to go to war with them, can we? His words were filled with
Speaker A
displeasure because he had expressed his concerns earlier that evening, fearing that too direct a method would drive the Huga clan away. But Saratobi Herusen had paid no attention, even saying that the Huga clan would never accept the new
Speaker A
Canoa's rules. But now the Huga clan had joined the new Kenoha without looking back. And now these Kenoha highle officials could only stare helplessly.
Speaker A
What to do? Losing the Huga clan not only weakened the village, but also made the Kumovicure issue unsolvable.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, at this moment, Saratobi Herusen was also full of regret. Had he really pushed the Huga clan too hard? This shouldn't be.
Speaker A
Compared to his past ruthless methods against the Achiha, he felt he had been quite restrained this time. So, Harusen Saratobi still couldn't understand how he had driven the Huga clan away.
Speaker A
Honestly, this incident was a huge blow to him. However, after listening to Jeriah's words, he immediately retorted without hesitation. No, absolutely not.
Speaker A
The village is in a precarious state now, but we truly cannot start another war. Otherwise, I fear our village will truly collapse. Hirusen Saratobi broke out in a cold sweat. He had no choice.
Speaker A
Because Jeriah being merely a puppet, Hokag had no idea of the village's true situation, and Hiuen Saratobi couldn't let him know. But others might not know yet. Hi Saratobi himself knew well. The village had long lost the hearts of its
Speaker A
people, but was only held together by his ironfisted rule. The villagers weren't staying because they wanted to, but because they had to, otherwise they'd face death. In the past, he hadn't worried about this because he had dealt with such situations many times
Speaker A
and had various ways to ease them. First, give money. If he could just pay the pensions and war commissions owed since the third war, he was confident he could temporarily stabilize public sentiment. Second, an outlet for frustration. Whether it was Sakumo
Speaker A
Hitaki at the beginning or later Orochimaru's defection, the Aiha being slandered Naro Usuzamaki being rumored as a fox demon. In essence, beyond other schemes, the most important thing was to give the villagers an outlet for their frustration. Because if they couldn't
Speaker A
benefit from the war and couldn't resent him as Hokag, then finding a scapegoat would attract all the villagers resentment and anger. Although the second war was won without reparations from the defeated nation, they made Sukumo Hataki the outlet for everyone's
Speaker A
frustration. Underground human experiments discovered, then let Orochimaru take the blame. After the third war, no pensions, so resent the Aiha. After the night of ninetailes, the Achiha and Narud Uzumaki bore it together. But unfortunately, now the village could neither produce money nor
Speaker A
find a suitable outlet. Though it seemed there was Narudo Usuzamaki as the ninetailed fox. On one hand, his identity as the fourth Hokag's son was exposed. And on the other, since Jeriah had become the fifth Hokag, he simply
Speaker A
couldn't manipulate that matter. After all, even if Jeriah was a puppet, he ate and lived with Narudo everyday. It was under such circumstances that he devised a third method. used the peace treaty with Cloud to give everyone some
Speaker A
spiritual encouragement, at least loosening that tightly stretched string a bit. Unexpectedly, it also failed. Not only did it fail to ease the village's tension, but it even drove the Huga clan to defect. Now go to war. What are you
Speaker A
thinking? Hirus and Suratobi was certain that if the village dared to go to war with Cloud, then before the village's ninjas could even reach the front lines, most of them would likely have fled cleanly along the way. As for taking
Speaker A
ninja's families hostage before missions like they do now, huh, perhaps it works for daily mission requests. But doing so during war is suicide. Because with the large-scale mobilization of ninjas, the village wouldn't have enough people to guard so many hostages. If those ninjas
Speaker A
were all gathered together as long as a leader waved his hand, they could kill the A and BU guarding the hostages and then take all their families to defect to New Kohaa. Arus and Saratobi dared not let those ninjas he didn't trust
Speaker A
gather. But unfortunately, Jeriah was unaware of Herusen's thoughts. He simply thought the old man was a bit cowardly, lacking the spirit of the former ninja hero. With a helpless sigh, Jeriah spoke. The Huga clan has already fled.
Speaker A
How should we explain to Cloud, "Tell them the truth." His sui pondered for a long while, then said in a low voice, "Directly tell the cloud delegation that Kenoha is willing to pay Rio in compensation. If they're still
Speaker A
unsatisfied, they can go to new Kenoa." Jeriah was stunned. He looked at Husen in disbelief. Will that work? Whether it works or not, let's give it a try. Husen Saratobi shook his head. Anyway, I don't have any good ideas. If Cloud insists on
Speaker A
war, then we'll have to follow Danzo's plan and try to get the Daimo to make new Kenoha fight since our village has no strength to wage war. If Cloud invades the land of fire, those who suffer the most will be the Daimo and
Speaker A
the nobles of the land of fire. Then they will force New Kenoha to join the war. At this moment, he was completely resolute. He had no choice. truly no choice. The current Kinoa could no longer be described as backbone missing.
Speaker A
Anyway, they definitely couldn't afford compensation and they had no spare strength to help in a war. So, let them lose face. It was better than the village collapsing. Jeriah was full of black lines, his mouth twitching fiercely. However, he also knew Kenoha
Speaker A
truly couldn't bear it. So, with a sigh, he could only agree. Morning 9:00. The cloud delegation arrived at the Hokag's office, their faces full of arrogance, believing that Kenoha could only bow and submit. But one sentence from Jeriah
Speaker A
completely stunned them. Sorry, we can't compensate. The Huga clan has already left the village and according to the agreement at Kohaa's founding our village cannot stop them. If Cloud wants compensation, you'll have to check with new Kohaa. As for our side, considering
Speaker A
that your delegation's leader did die in our village, we are willing to give one of Rio as humanitarian compensation.
Speaker A
That's all. There's no more as the village's finances are also tight. The cloud delegation was dumbfounded. They looked at Kenoha's high-ranking officials who had completely given up momentarily at a loss for words. The deputy envoy Atsui couldn't help but
Speaker A
ask, "Aren't you afraid that we cloud will go to war with Kenoha? It doesn't matter. Suit yourself." Jeriah waved his hand. Herusen Sobi coughed and added, "Koha is too weak now. Even if you cloud conquer the land of fire, we Canoha have
Speaker A
no ability to respond to war. But the land of fire isn't the only ninja village. Presumably, when you invade the daimo, we'll send the Aihas village to fight you." The implication was simple.
Speaker A
Our village has given up. You cloud can do whatever you want. Atsui. At that moment, he was completely stunned. Wow.
Speaker A
Kenoha had simply given up. What was he supposed to do next? Ai opened his mouth to say something, but no words came out.
Speaker A
How frustrating. Facing this group of my high-ranking officials who had completely given up on saving face's mind went completely blank. How to break this situation. The village never taught him how to deal with this. In the end, he could only say coldly, "You will
Speaker A
regret this. I am the cough. Yuan Fe Rizen subconsciously wanted to retort but then suddenly realized that the person in front of him was not Tanzang and he himself was no longer the Hoying.
Speaker A
So aside from his awkward cough, his aged face flushed horribly. Zilli's mouth twitched as Yu and Fe Rizen's disciple, he naturally knew the truth.
Speaker A
The old man had simply misspoken. In essence, it was just a reflex. After all the words of the Union envoy were too similar to that old fellow Tuan, huh?
Speaker A
What's wrong with you? The Union envoy Ai was taken back. Obviously confused about the situation. In the end, he could only roll his eyes, then stormed out of the Hoying office and used a summoning beast to contact the village.
Speaker A
He briefly reported the situation and received a reply from Sedai AI. That very afternoon, first go to Numai and have a look, give it a shot whether there's a chance or not. Then they were stopped right outside the village before
Speaker A
they even entered Numi. The gatekeeper ninja contacted the Hoying office and received direct instructions from Yuzbo Gene. One word, get lost. Get as far away as possible. Do whatever you want.
Speaker A
War. If you have the guts, move your Yun ninja army to the border. Tell the Union envoy exactly those words. No need for any rhetorical flourish. After the new my ninja conveyed this message, Ai's face turned green with rage. What a
Speaker A
mess. Oldm had completely given up while New was even more arrogant than their own laying. They didn't even have the basic courtesy to receive him the Yun envoy in person and wouldn't even let him enter the gates of New. Outrageous.
Speaker A
Far too outrageous. But what could he do? Helpless AI had no choice but to temporarily return to old Mai and use a summoning beast to contact his own laying Yunin building. Upon receiving this news, Sedai AI was so furious that
Speaker A
he smashed his desk to pieces. Damned you, Zbo. I will kill him. How dare he tell me to get lost and even refuse entry to the Yin envoy. I absolutely will not accept this humiliation. I will crush Yibbo's new mind. Sai was
Speaker A
completely enraged. After all, he had never suffered such humiliation in his life. Even knowing that Yunin was not fit for war at present, he still wanted to lead an army to reason with Yuzbo Jeene. But unfortunately, Mabui immediately stopped Sadai, Lord
Speaker A
Lelaying, you must be calm. The village cannot afford another war. I calm down. Tutai, very helpless directly said, Mabui is right. The village can't afford war now. Anyway, our goal this time was just to test my and see if we could get
Speaker A
some benefits on the side. If we can't get anything, forget it. We still have to sign the peace agreement. The big picture. Everything for the big picture.
Speaker A
Sedai's forehead veins bulged and he trembled with rage. Obviously, he really wanted to charge into the land of fire and smash Yivo Jins skull. But alas, after a helpless sigh, he could only force himself to calm down. After
Speaker A
all, as the laying, he knew the village's situation better than anyone. So, in the end, he could only say with a face full of displeasure, "Don't ever give me that chance or I'll definitely kill that bastard Yuzbo Gene." In the
Speaker A
end, the matter was settled like that. As for Ai, who received the message from his village, though equally displeased, he had no choice but to sign the peace agreement with old Mai and finally left with one of the rotales of silver,
Speaker A
slinking away in shame. However, while Ai and Yunin were displeased, Yuan Fe risen was even more displeased. Looking at the peace agreement in his hands, his entire aged face darkened completely and his body trembled with rage. So simple.
Speaker A
Haha, just like that. Damn, Yuni. Mother, you and Fe Risen was dumbfounded. If he had known earlier that Yunin's true goal was merely to test Mai and see if they could get some benefits, how could he have ever thought
Speaker A
of making the Rishon clan suffer a loss? But now, because of his own misjudgment, he had so easily abandoned the Rishang clan. Damn it, he truly deserved to die.
Speaker A
On the other side, Zill was also not feeling well. There was no helping it.
Speaker A
If they had correctly judged Yunin's true intentions early on, how could there have been so many troubles? Now, although the peace agreement was signed, his heart could not be happy at all.
Speaker A
However, before he could complain about Yu and Feay Risen, he suddenly saw Yu and Feay Risen, starting to lose his mind. In an instant, his scalp went numb. Zilli quickly stepped forward, soothing his breath while trying to persuade him, "All right, old man. No
Speaker A
one could have predicted something like this. Let the past be the past. We should look to the future. At least the peace agreement has been signed. Now we can recuperate and develop our village properly." Although his heart was full
Speaker A
of anger and he somewhat resented Yuan Fe Risen at this moment, he kept it to himself and did his best to persuade Yuan Fe Rizen. No choice. The village's situation was very unfavorable now. Only he and Yu and Fe Rizen were Kaga level
Speaker A
powerhouses. If Yu and Fe Rizen fell, it would not be good for the current Mai.
Speaker A
However, fortunately, Yuan Fe Rizen had weathered many storms. Although he had suffered such a great loss this time with Zilli's repeated consolation, he quickly recovered completely. On the other side, Numi Kaki stood respectfully in the Hoying office reporting the
Speaker A
details of the peace agreement signed between Yunin and old Mai. Then the look in his eyes toward Yuzbo Gene became filled with boundless admiration. In fact, it wasn't just him. Even Gangs Ho side with emotion. Gene, you were right.
Speaker A
Yanin was just bluffing. They didn't dare to start a war either. That old man Yu Fe Risen is probably furious now. He suffered such a huge loss only to find out it was just him scaring himself.
Speaker A
Yuzbo Gene sat behind the horning desk. His expression still very calm. After all, he had anticipated this long ago, so there was nothing to be surprised about. Setting down his teacup, he spoke softly. "All right, since the peace
Speaker A
agreement has been signed, it's time for us to make our move." Tell Naralui to prepare for action. Aiha Jyns expression remained indifferent. He had long anticipated that Kimogakure would choose to back down because even in a high marshall world like the ninja
Speaker A
realm, warfare was inseparable from financial resources. At present, all major ninja villages across the ninja world had just endured the third great ninja war and were now in a period of recovery and recuperation. Humogakir's bluff had already pushed the limits. If
Speaker A
they attempted to mobilize their ninja forces and confront Kenoha on the front lines, the financial cost would be staggering. Ninja were not regular soldiers. Even deploying them to the front lines was considered a war mission even without active combat. The basic
Speaker A
war mission fees, chakra pills, ninja tools, provisions, and other supplies consumed enormous amounts of money daily. Spending so much just to confront Kenoha. That would be insane if they were certain Kenoha would yield fine.
Speaker A
But what if Kenoha held firm and refused to back down? The fourth rakage of Kimogakure, unless he were foolish, would not dare to gamble such a massive cost on an uncertain outcome. Otherwise, Kimogakure itself would be the one
Speaker A
cornered. Meanwhile, on the other side, Kakashi upon hearing Aiha Jyn's command, a flicker of something unusual shown in his eyes, but he still respectfully acknowledged the order and departed.
Speaker A
Sununade's face also bore a complicated expression. Gazing out the window at the village and the distant Hokag rock of the old Kohaa, her eyes were filled with profound emotion. After a brief moment of thought, she looked at Aiha. Aokag,
Speaker A
after we annex the old Konoha, could you tell me your specific plans going forward, especially regarding the arrangements for the former villagers and whether we will relocate? If we move to the old Kohaa, what about our current territory? If we don't move, how do we
Speaker A
handle the old Kenoha's land? Aihaji was momentarily taken aback. Seeing sun's solemn expression, he instantly understood that this old woman was likely feeling sentimental. Thinking it over, he could understand. After all the old Kohaa was the lifelong work of her
Speaker A
two grandfathers and she had grown up in that village. Now they were about to deliver the final blow to it. With Sununady's intellect, she naturally knew that since he had chosen to strike, the old Kohaa could not withstand his
Speaker A
assault. After all, he had been silently sharpening his blade for 2 years to deliver this blow. This strike was one the old Kohaa could not endure. However, what to do with the old Kohaa afterward truly stumped Aihajene. He had never
Speaker A
considered this before. But now since sununade had raised the issue and considering the old woman was one of his own, he began to ponder it seriously. He silently walked to the window gazing at the Hokag rock in the distance. 10
Speaker A
minutes later, Aiha Jeene took a deep breath and gave his answer. Keep it. The new Kohaa will remain here. I will not destroy the old Kohaa. Instead, I will allocate funds each year for its upkeep.
Speaker A
Furthermore, I will compile all history from the founding of the old Konoha by the first Hokag Hasharama Senju to the present day into a book and place it in the old Kohaa. I will neither vilify nor beautify anything. All events during
Speaker A
each Hokag's tenure, whether good or bad, will be displayed there. Anyone interested in history can visit and read. Remember history forge ahead. I hope the children growing up in the new Kohaa can learn from the history of the
Speaker A
old Kenoha and serve as a warning to future generations not to repeat the same mistakes. Of course, the annual maintenance costs are considerable. So, I plan to turn the old Kohaa into a tourist attraction. Anyone who wishes to
Speaker A
visit will need to buy a ticket. Aiha Jyn's tone was somber. Indeed, since he had established the new Kenoha, he could not relocate to the old one or his efforts would be meaningless. However, simply destroying it would be too
Speaker A
wasteful. So, with his mind merging two worlds, he decided to transform it into a tourist attraction and educational base. Of course, admission would be charged. After all, he was now the hokag of the new Kohaa. and every initiative
Speaker A
he implemented required vast amounts of money. It was only natural to fence off the old koha and charge of mission. So as he explained his plan in detail, he failed to notice expression growing darker. Sinade was speechless. She was
Speaker A
stunned. Her face a mix of confusion and disbelief. The way she looked at Achihaji was as if she were staring at a demon, especially when she saw the solemn expression on his face. She felt like cracking open his skull to see what
Speaker A
was going on inside that head of his. Damn it. At first hearing that Achihajene would preserve the old Kenoha, she was actually touched thinking he had some conscience. But hearing the rest, she could barely contain herself. Educational base,
Speaker A
exhibition hall of crimes, tourist attraction. Good grief. Was she sununady going to have to pay to visit her own home in the future? Son of a At that thought, fists clenched. Aihajene, you've gone too far. My Senju clan's old
Speaker A
residence is still there. Are you going to open my room to the public so anyone can pay to tour it? You bastard. I absolutely refuse.
Speaker A
fury erupted her killing intent condensing. No way. Imagining the old Senju residence with signs reading Hashiamaramajus former home, Tobberenjus former home, Sununade's former home, complete with her biography, family photos on the table, and people paying to stroll in examining
Speaker A
her childhood pictures and gossiping. She was livid. She was absolutely furious. If not for Achihajin's strength, she would have punched him already. On the other hand, Aiha was utterly perplexed by Sinade's anger.
Speaker A
Clearly, he thought this was a good thing. Why was she so angry? Wasn't it good for future children to remember the Syninju clan? Puzzle, he asked, "Why refuse? Not only will the Sinju clan's residence be open, but the Aiha clans
Speaker A
residents will also be open to the public. In fact, not just our two clans, but all major ninja clans, including the Saratobi and the other three, will be preserved for everyone to visit." Aiha was utterly perplexed. After all, for a
Speaker A
time traveler like him, wasting such a simple way to make money would be sheer madness. Indeed, having now become the Hokag of New Kohaa, he couldn't engage in robbery as blatantly as before, though he didn't entirely rule it out.
Speaker A
He needed to diversify his legitimate income streams. Enclosing old Kohaa and charging admission was the simplest method he could think of. More importantly, it was a sustainable business requiring minimal effort. Just cordon off the area and collect fees.
Speaker A
You sonade was stunned, her lips twitching. She felt utterly helpless before Aiha, unable to refute his logic.
Speaker A
If it were merely about enclosing the Senju clan's ancestral home for ticket sales, she might have mustered the strength to confront him. But now he was also opening the Aiha compound to visitors, leaving her at a loss for
Speaker A
words. Upon reflection, this might actually be beneficial. If left unattended, old Kohaa would inevitably crumble into ruins. Conversely, following Achiha Jyn's approach, annual funds would be allocated for restoration, which was in a sense a positive development. In the future,
Speaker A
when she wished to reminisce, she could return to visit her former home. Fine, you have a point. Let's do it your way.
Speaker A
Maybe it's a good thing. Sonade reluctantly conceded as his reasoning was sound. Yet even now, she couldn't be certain whether this was truly beneficial. Aiha Gene, observing this curled his lips slightly. The Shinobi world was still too crude. Perhaps due
Speaker A
to the brief history of the hidden villages or the misaligned status of ninjas, many things were utterly bizarre. Televisions and street lights had long existed, and even computers could be found in Orochimaru's research facilities. Yet other foundational technologies were woefully
Speaker A
underdeveloped, so the real estate industry naturally didn't exist. The Senu clan's old mansion was still preserved because it held little value.
Speaker A
The Kohaa higher-ups like Saratobi valued ninjutsu forbidden techniques and banknotes above all. While land had some worth, it wasn't enough to compromise the Hokag's dignity. That was precisely why when Aihaene requested the clan's territory, Saratobi Herusen, though reluctant, agreed relatively easily. The
Speaker A
fundamental reason was that it wasn't worth much. Despite Canoha's vast size, the civilian population was sparse. It wasn't that the village refused to accept them. Rather, civilians would rather be exploited by the daimo than associate with ninjas unless absolutely
Speaker A
desperate. Even though ninjas wielded devastating power in this strange shinobi world, their status was abysmally low. Not only did the daimo and nobles look down on them, but even commoners held them in contempt. After all, if you could hire a ninja for
Speaker A
money, how could civilians truly respect them? Thus, this was why villagers dared to challenge ninjas in Kenoha and why even Hitaki Sukumo was driven to suicide by public opinion. Of course, Aiha understood the deeper reasons. It was likely a scheme orchestrated by the
Speaker A
daimo and nobles to tightly control the ninja villages financially suppressed their social identity and even make ninjas believe they were inferior. And under these circumstances, they still periodically instigated wars among the major villages to reduce the number of
Speaker A
ninjas. Why? Because they were afraid. If they didn't force the villages to fight regularly binding the ninjas with chains of hatred and resource scarcity, they feared the ninjas would awaken and overthrow the daimo and nobles. These elements weren't depicted in the
Speaker A
original story simply because the focus was on the ninjas. But from Naruto's first seank mission, escorting the bridge builder Tzuna, it was clear that Tzuna mocked Narudo in the Hokag's office. As an outsider, he showed no respect for ninjas. Even Kenoha's
Speaker A
villagers paid little heed to ninjas, clearly illustrating this trend. As for old Kenoha, if Saratobi Herusen hadn't been forced to impose high pressure rule, who knew what chaos would have ensued? But soon, once he truly controlled the entire village, he
Speaker A
planned to test the daimo's court. Was it the Daimo and nobles who had bound ninjas with moral chains? Or were there hidden forces behind them? Now possessing the eternal Mangeko Aihajene naturally wanted to probe. As for unifying the shinobi world, Achihajene
Speaker A
had no such intention for now. Eliminating other villages might provoke unknown entities behind the scenes. So he would take it slow. No rush. He would first explore the daimo's court. If there were no hidden masters, he would simply eliminate the daimo and nobles.
Speaker A
Would his ruthless actions drive other daimo mad? No matter. First, Hihajin was a good person. After deciding to eliminate the daimo and nobles, he would also help other villages by wiping out all of them. Regardless of age or
Speaker A
gender, he would ensure that other villages could find no suitable person to become a daimo. Even if they wanted to maintain the one country, one village system, huh? Would they elevate a commoner? That would be no different from a puppet. Under those
Speaker A
circumstances, would other villages have time to trouble him? Without the constraints of Daimo and nobles, seeing him control the entire land of fire, he was certain other villages would be tempted. Why? Because Hihajene was a good person. Knowing other villages
Speaker A
couldn't bring themselves to act as fellow ninjas, he didn't mind lending them a hand. Secondly, he wasn't foolish. Even if he planned to eliminate the daimo and nobles, he wouldn't do it openly. He would simultaneously eliminate all daimo and nobles of the
Speaker A
five great nations. Then, as a victim himself, he would be persuaded by everyone to take over the land of fire.
Speaker A
Why? Because he was kind-hearted and couldn't bear to see the people of the land of fire suffer. If the daimo and nobles of the five great nations died simultaneously, who could link it to him? Aiha Jyns eyes flickered as he
Speaker A
pondered. What are you smirking about? You're definitely plotting something. Sonat's eyes narrowed. Aiha shook his head and offered no explanation. Such dark deeds were best entrusted to trusted allies not to be known by all.
Speaker A
Though he favored open schemes, he was no stranger to underhanded tactics. Conveniently, his reputation for preferring open strategy would make it even harder to connect him to the future deaths of the Daimo and nobles. In the old village, Knight had fallen. Beneath
Speaker A
its tranquil facade, undercurrents of tension ran deep. In a room on the vill's edge, six or seven figures had gathered their faces cold and steeped in murderous intent. Remember all of you, the success of our operation hinges entirely on tonight's actions. If we can
Speaker A
plunge the village into chaos, then half our battle is already won. Who among us will meet their end tonight? And who will live to see the morning sun rise over the new village will depend on each person's own fortune? One final
Speaker A
question. Does anyone regret this? The leader, bearing a large scar across his face, and wearing a forehead protector from the old village, spoke with utmost caution. Yet his tone was frigid. As he spoke, another man's face twisted into a
Speaker A
sneer of utter contempt. Relax. What's a little life- risking? Even if we stayed in this rotten village, we'd eventually be squeezed dry and die anyway. We shinobi live on the edge every single day. Who can truly be sure they'll see
Speaker A
the next sunrise? Even if I die tonight, if I can secure a future for my wife and children, that's enough. Following his declaration, the others chimed in one by one. Their thoughts were unified, all prepared for a desperate struggle.
Speaker A
Naturally, the very fact they had been swayed by the new village proved they had long since abandoned all hope for the old one. They did not fear death, for the new village had promised them wealth and status upon success. Even if
Speaker A
they perished this very night, their children would be cared for and suspicion of betrayal. The thought never crossed their minds. For one thing, they had witnessed the prosperity of the new village with their own eyes over the past 2 years. For another, the Achiha
Speaker A
name remained a millennium old stamp of trust. The men in this room were the architects of tonight's operation hold respectable positions in the old village and serving as key figures in various pivotal posts. Very well then, Ogawa Takahashi. Your men will gather as many
Speaker A
villagers as possible and head to the Hokag Tower to raise a ruckus at 10:00 tonight. The bigger the crowd, the better. Too small a gathering will be easily suppressed by the U. Remember this point well. For the sake of your
Speaker A
family's lives, spare no expense to swell the numbers. Tanaguchi, Nakayyama, Yamamoto, Kuraka, Ishida. You are the Yu members on duty for tonight's patrols and gate watch. Once the village is in chaos, take control of your units, eliminate the loyalists of the old
Speaker A
monkey, Saratobi, and secure all critical points throughout the village. All this must be accomplished within half an hour. By 1030 p.m., you must have full control and ensure the escape routes are clear. Finally, at 1040, Fuji Okada and I will lead the families of
Speaker A
all participating Shinobi in the first wave storming out of the village. Well create as much chaos as possible, sweeping up more people to follow. Any objections to this plan?
Speaker A
Yano Rayoi, their leader, asked with a grave tone. To which everyone remained silent, their expressions stern cold sweat beating on their foreheads. There was nothing to say. This plan was as close to perfect as it could get. If it
Speaker A
still failed, it would only prove their own incompetence. All or nothing. If it failed despite this, then fate had simply decreed itself. Finally, with a single command of dismissed from Yano Rayochi, everyone silently slipped out of the room, dispersing into the shadows
Speaker A
of the old village, vanishing into the pitch black night. The old village returned to silence once more. But this calm was fleeting a mere breath before the coming storm. As time passed 10:00 arrived, organized groups of villagers poured out of their homes, hoisting
Speaker A
signs high that read, "Jeriah must step down. Punish Harrison Sir Toby Danzo Shimura Koitane and Hamirado and we demand compensation marching swiftly towards the Hokag tower. The U on guard were stunned into an action. What to do?
Speaker A
Although Herus and Saratobi had secretly ordered them to kill any villager who dared to cause trouble without hesitation. But damn it, there are too many of them. In the span of a heartbeat, the streets were flooded with over 10,000 civilians. Did they really
Speaker A
dare to slaughter them all? They realized that things had escalated far beyond control tonight. Some umbus sensing the dire situation began to doubt if the old village could survive this. Discreetly they slipped into the shadows and a few especially those
Speaker A
without families took advantage of the chaos to flee the village entirely. But most hurried home instead they needed to secure their families amidst the chaos.
Speaker A
After all, one must be clever to become an umbu. Such a massive coordinated demonstration without a leader behind it. Huh? You'd be foolish to believe that. Moreover, these umbu had little faith in the vill's future themselves.
Speaker A
Seeing this, their loyalties wavered, and most began to think only of escaping the chaos and reporting to the village elders. No one did. Not a single one.
Speaker A
For the clans of Saratobi and their allies had long since become rotten, even though Herus and Saratobi had placed them in the umbu and key positions, they considered themselves born superior to the common folk. Under the pressure from the new village, they
Speaker A
initially performed their duties. But then what? Two whole years passed and the new village made no move. Their vigilance had long since eroded. Mundane tasks like guarding gates and patrolling streets were long since delegated to those of true commoner birth. They
Speaker A
meanwhile were enjoying their comfortable lives somewhere else. Were there no intelligent people among the Saratobi and other three clans? There were quite a few in fact. But all those clever ones had already been appointed to important positions never to be
Speaker A
assigned to the lower ranks. After all, Harusen Saratobi was desperately short of competent people. How could he ignore his own capable kin? Thus, the initial sparks of chaos left unchecked and unsuppressed swiftly ignited and engulfed the entire village. 15 minutes
Speaker A
later, by the time Hirusen Saratobi realized something was wrong, over 30,000 people had taken to the streets.
Speaker A
Within this massive upheaval, some had even begun to loot and smash property. In an instant, the entire village of Kenoha had descended into anarchy. Shout smash his screams. The once peaceful old Mai from the initial protests to the
Speaker A
lack of umbu oversight had instantly devolved into chaos. In the Hokag's office, Jeriah stood before the window, gazing at the escalating turmoil outside. His heart was filled with fury, yet his mind was a complete blank.
Speaker A
Helpless, though he was formidable in combat, he could think of no solution to the crisis unfolding before him. The sound of his master's roaring only fueled his inner agitation.
Speaker A
Unfortunately, Husen Suratobi was oblivious to this. He was now nearly mad with rage directly cursing the kneeling U operatives. Useless idiots, imbeciles.
Speaker A
An incident of this magnitude tonight could only have been a meticulously planned unified operation. What the hell were you doing? You didn't detect a single sign. The riots have been raging for so long. Where are your men? Get
Speaker A
out. Mobilize every available force immediately and suppress this at any cost. Hirus and Suratobi's face was now a mask of cold malevolence. Clearly, he had lost all interest in playing the role of the benevolent elder. His true nature steeped in ruthlessness, and
Speaker A
chill instantly plunged the Hokag's office into an icy silence. In response, Kohar Utain and Hamirado wore expressions of sheer terror. Though they had been invited to the so-called Supreme Council meeting today, there was no joy on their faces. After all, the
Speaker A
current situation was as clear as a civ. Oldm was doomed. Since the chaos hadn't been quelled at its inception, suppressing it now, given the level of turmoil was nearly impossible. They could only think of their own escape routes. This was precisely why the two
Speaker A
had remained silent until now. They had already abandoned hope for the village, and Danzo's continued absence only confirmed their suspicions. He had the keenest nose for danger. By the way, where is Danzo? Why hasn't that bastard shown up yet? Um, go find Danzo
Speaker A
immediately. Tell him to deploy all of Root and suppress the uprising with maximum speed. Koharo Hamira, you two go back at once and mobilize every member of your clans. Suppress this chaos at any cost. We have no retreat. Old Mai
Speaker A
will never accept us. Do you understand? Husen Sarato's voice was ice cold. He was more anxious than anyone. Anyone could surrender to new Mai except him Suratobi. But the same held true. The Udetain and Mito clans were also
Speaker A
trapped. His face twisted with ferocity. At that, Kohari Utudetain and Hamurito shuddered, but they gritted their teeth, nodded, and left the Hokag's office.
Speaker A
After they left, Hirusen Saratobi slumped into his chair. Exhaustion etched his face. He hadn't expected New Mai to be so ruthless. Yes, even without evidence, he was certain that Aihaene was behind this. Without the backing of New, the common civilian ninja of the
Speaker A
village, would never have dared to stir up such chaos. And not to belittle them, but even if they wanted to cause trouble, they could never have been so meticulous. Damn it, I was wrong. Numi has been silent for 2 years. I thought
Speaker A
that bastard Aiha Jeene had already satisfied his ambitions. I was wrong. This is a full-scale annexation of the village. Husen Soratobi murmured to himself. His eyes were filled with regret and fury. When Achihajene had led the ninja clans away to establish Numi,
Speaker A
he had breathed a sigh of relief, believing that was the extent of Jyn's ambition. On second thought, it wasn't so bad. Even if old Mai would be weaker than New Mi, at least without the constraining influence of the major
Speaker A
clans, the Saratobi clan could truly seize control. Overall, it was acceptable. Who would have thought? In just two years, as soon as Numi stabilized, it struck directly at his own village. At that moment, he finally understood. Aiha Jins method was
Speaker A
like boiling a frog in warm water. Exactly the same tactic he himself had used against the Aiha. Step by step, dismantling your power, each move seemingly gentle and barely tolerable.
Speaker A
But by the time you truly realized what was happening, you had already lost all means to counterattack. What to do? His eyes were bloodshot, but he could only hope his forces would act faster. Just then, Jeriah suddenly spoke. Old man,
Speaker A
aren't you going to step in? If you're willing to bear the burden of all sins and indiscriminately slaughter, you might still be able to intimidate everyone. As long as you can hold out until the U and the four major ninja
Speaker A
clans armies appear, the village might be stabilized temporarily. Then I as Hokag will step and kill you, the evil tumor, and believe the village can be reborn with new vitality. So teacher, are you willing to sacrifice yourself for the village? His tone was icy. The
Speaker A
fury that had been on his face vanished, replaced by an indescribable calm. Clearly at that moment, many things dawned on him. Perhaps today's action had Numi's hand in it. But if old Mai had truly been a solid block, could Numi
Speaker A
have won over their own ninja? Looking back at the two years since he took office, aside from sitting in the office approving documents, he had essentially done nothing else. The U should have been the Hokag's loyalist, but he
Speaker A
couldn't command them at all. In fact, upon reflection, not a single department listened to him. He remembered his promise when he first became Hokag to quickly distribute all the war compensation and pensions from the third great ninja war. Yet, after more than 2
Speaker A
years, nothing had been achieved. No money. Still no money. It seemed the village would never have that money. So, where did it go? Even as a puppet, Hokag Jeriah knew in his heart, all of it had gone into the pockets of the four major
Speaker A
ninja clans. Because two years ago, the compensation paid to Numai's clans had caused the Saratobi and other three major clans to suffer a massive hemorrhage. To recoup, they continued to loot the villages finances. He couldn't bring himself to oppose Huen Saratobi.
Speaker A
So, the matter kept being delayed. Now, it could no longer be delayed. The villagers had reached their breaking point, and they were willing to risk everything to flee to New Mai. So he truly wanted to kill that cancer Huen
Speaker A
Soratobi. Yet thinking of his life, this teacher had been kind to him. Even though he was disheartened, he couldn't help but offer a way out. Kill. If Haruen Soratobi could be ruthless enough to bear the sin of slaughter, then after
Speaker A
stabilizing the village, Hijarayo would step in and take over the mess. Forcefully make the four major clans spit out half their money, and he could stabilize the village. Then with the village in peace and prosperity, he the fifth Hokag could breathe new life into
Speaker A
it. Jeriah had an epiphany. He suddenly recalled the remark Orochimaru often made. The village was already rotten, and only by forcing the older generation to relinquish power could the windmill of Kenoha spin a new. In the past, he
Speaker A
had not understood or perhaps had refused to understand. Like an ostrich burying its head, he pretended all was well. But now, it was different. He could no longer deceive himself. His own teacher was the village's cancer. Only through cauterizing the wound could the
Speaker A
village be revitalized. Yet to achieve this, his teacher Husen Saratobi would need the resolve to sacrifice everything for the village. Yes, just as in the original tale, Itachi Aiha was willing to take up the blade to slaughter his
Speaker A
own clan for the sake of the village. If the old Koho wished to endure, then Hirusen must summon the same resolve as Itachi. Husen Soratobi. At that moment, he was utterly bewildered. What on earth? Sacrifice himself for the
Speaker A
village. His mind went blank, and he stared at Jeriah in stunned silence. He even wondered if Jeriah had a fever. The entire village belonged to Herusen and the Saratobi clan reigned supreme. All his life he had strived toward that
Speaker A
goal. And now Jeriah wanted him to sacrifice himself. However, he could not say such words outright. Though his expression soued, he pulled out his pipe and began to smoke. After a long pause, he finally spoke. Jeriona, no. As the
Speaker A
third Hokag, of course, I have the resolve to die for the village. But the village cannot do without me now. You have only recently taken up the reigns.
Speaker A
You lack the capacity to bear the village's burdens. However, do not worry. The Yu and the four great clans move swiftly. Once the reinforcements arrive, they will swiftly apprehend those who disrupt the village. Just wait a little longer. Herusen spoke slowly,
Speaker A
his words seemingly selfless, as if all his actions were for the village's sake. Of course, in truth, he had no wish to bear such guilt. Instead, he hoped Jeriah would willingly take on the role of one who shoulders the bloody burden
Speaker A
for the village, just like Manado Names in his day. But he could not voice such thoughts. So he only prayed inwardly that Jeriah would come to that realization on his own. After all, did not Jeriah care deeply for the village
Speaker A
as well. Meanwhile, on the other side, Jeriah was unaware of his teacher's true thoughts. On hearing those words, he saw a glimmer of hope in his despair. His eyes lit up and he suddenly perked up.
Speaker A
Teacher, do you remember where leaves dance fire burns a new? I assure you, I now have the ability to shoulder the village's fate. And I have long been mentally prepared. As the fifth Hokag, I swear I possess that resolve. So do not
Speaker A
worry teacher. Go and burn yourself for the village with peace of mind. If you bear this burden, I promise to breathe new life into the village. It cannot be helped. In any other matter, I would not hesitate to die for the village. But not
Speaker A
now. For besides being the fifth Hokag, I also hold the title of Mount Myaboku's disciple. I bear the great Toad sage's mission to seek the savior for the entire ninja world. So teacher, do not hesitate. For the will of fire, the time
Speaker A
has come for you to burn yourself and illuminate the village. At that moment, Jeriah was deeply agitated. Indeed, as a shinobi, he did not fear death. If it were for the vill's future, he would not shy away from sacrificing himself. But
Speaker A
no, for according to the great toad sage's prophecy, he was destined to become the teacher of the savior. It could not be helped. His time to die had not yet come. Thus, to save the village, his teacher would have to make the
Speaker A
sacrifice. Herusen was stunned. He stared at Jeriah in disbelief. Had he not known his disciples nature, he would have thought the man was deliberately sending him to his death. Yet precisely because he knew Jeriah, he became all the more certain that Jeriah was
Speaker A
serious. This disciple of his was indeed willing to die for the village. But the fool had clearly been brainwashed by Mount Mayabaku, a savior indeed.
Speaker A
Herusen, who did not believe in such nonsense, wanted desperately to convince his foolish disciple that there was no savior. The prophecy was just a lie to dupe him. So you need not worry about that ridiculous savior business. Just
Speaker A
calmly sacrifice yourself for the village. But damn it, he could not voice such thoughts. Hence, for a moment, his face flushed crimson with fury. He opened his mouth several times, yet could not utter a single complete sentence. Jeriahu. Meanwhile, Jeriah
Speaker A
remained unaware of his teacher's inner turmoil. Instead, he believed his teacher was merely worried about the village's welfare. So, he attempted to console him. Teacher, fret not. Go to your death for the village with ease.
Speaker A
You know my character. After your sacrifice, I will not move against the Saratobi clan. The village is sorely lacking in shinobi, but they must cease their attempts to plunder its resources.
Speaker A
I will surely rejuvenate the village and restore it to its golden age. I will also find a true savior and bring lasting peace to the ninja world. At that moment, Jeriah felt a surge of purpose. He was already immersed in a
Speaker A
vision of Hirusen sacrificing himself for the village of leading the village to become the strongest again, of finding the savior and bringing peace to the world. Thus, he kept trying to reassure Herusen, convincing him of his capability so that he could go to his
Speaker A
death without worry. But unfortunately, Hirusan absorbed none of it. Instead, he trembled with rage. Good grief. This was utter madness. For a phantom savior, you could send your own teacher to his death. A spray of blood burst from his
Speaker A
mouth, and he collapsed unconscious. There was no choice. He had to faint, for he could not refute Jeriah, nor could he truly sacrifice himself for the village. So unconsciousness it was. He believed that at the critical moment, Jeriah would be willing to die for the
Speaker A
village. By the time he woke, perhaps his disciple would have already made that sacrifice. Then he would mourn for Jeriah, take up the mantle of Hokag once more, and lead the village back to greatness. Master, wake up. How can you
Speaker A
faint at such a critical moment? If you collapse, what will become of the village? I still bear the heavy responsibility of finding the savior. I cannot sacrifice myself for the village now. Jeriah was utterly dumbfounded.
Speaker A
Staring at Husan Saratobi, who had directly fallen unconscious, he desperately thought of countless methods, yet still could not awaken his teacher. Then he slumped weakly to the ground, sinking into a state of turmoil what to do. His teacher, vomiting blood
Speaker A
and unconscious, could not sacrifice for the village. But he himself still bore the burden of teaching the savior. So alas, after a helpless Sai Jeriah rose and walked to the window, where he saw the remnants of the Yu and the ninjas of
Speaker A
the four great clans had already arrived. However, it seemed the village gate guards and patrol squads had vanished. He could see vast numbers of civilians frantically fleeing from the old Kohaa. He flashed to the top of the Hokag building where he could see
Speaker A
towering flames erupting everywhere across the village. Even with the U and the four great clans joining the effort, they could not stop the people from fleeing in panic. Instead, they only made the chaos worse. It's all over. I
Speaker A
must preserve my own life to find the savior of the ninja world. Why should I sacrifice myself for the village?
Speaker A
Master, you will surely regret this. Having said this, he leaped away from the Hokag building and headed toward Naro Uzumaki's home. But unfortunately, he could not find Naro Uzumaki. He immediately searched the surroundings, yet still found no trace of him. It's
Speaker A
over. This must be a plot from the new Kenoa. Someone wants to take the ninetailes ginuriki to trade for a better life in the new village. What to do? Manado, I have failed you. Helpless Jeriah sighed and began to leave. His
Speaker A
face was filled with anguish. He should have foreseen this. But now regret was useless. He did not believe he had the ability to go to the new koha and retrieve Narudo. So alas, even though this was somewhat disloyal to Manado for
Speaker A
the sake of the great Toad sage's prophecy, he had to urgently set out to find the savior. When he eventually reached the pure land, he would apologize to Manado.
Speaker A
Over at the new Kenoha, the gates were now tightly shut. As wave after wave of old Kenoha villagers arrived, the U were on full alert, as if afraid the riers would rush into the village and disrupt public order. As for the Aiha police
Speaker A
force, they were maintaining order outside the village. Everyone stay quiet. First, the new Kohaa welcomes you all. But before that, you must register and be cataloged. Only those with verified identities can truly enter the village to live. Do not worry about your
Speaker A
well-being or safety during the wait. The new Kohó will provide you with all necessary guarantees. Everyone line up properly and follow the orders of the police force. Fugaku Aiha shouted loudly. Countless Aiha activated their sharing gone, keeping a stern watch over
Speaker A
everyone before them. Indeed, even if the new Konoha was willing to accept these old Kohaa civilians, it could not take them all at once. At the very least, they had to verify identities and conduct a simple screening. Thus, the
Speaker A
new Kohaa had prepared a comprehensive procedure. He directly summoned Itachi and said in a grave tone, "Secretly inform all police force members. Anyone who causes trouble is to be killed without prior authorization." These are the Hokage's exact words. In turbulent
Speaker A
times, harsh measures are needed. Stability is paramount. Anyone attempting to incite unrest must be eliminated immediately. The families of ninjas participating in the operation can enter the village in the first batch after identity verification. Next are ordinary ninjas and finally ordinary
Speaker A
civilians. During the screening, be sure to identify all the thugs and habitual troublemakers from the old Kenoha. Deal with them all discreetly. The new Kenoha does not want trash. The Hokag has temporarily dispatched a group of Nar clan members. If you encounter a special
Speaker A
situation and cannot report in time, follow the Nar clan members instructions. Itachi Aihan nodded solemnly. Although he was not qualified to attend the highle meeting upon hearing his father's words, he immediately understood the Hokag's intent. The Aiha had been in charge of
Speaker A
the police force during the old Konoha era. So they knew exactly who the troublemakers and scoundrels were. Their main task was to admit people in batches and prevent a massive influx from disrupting the vill's order. Beyond that, they were to weed out the rotten
Speaker A
elements. That was also why he and Umbu member had been temporarily reassigned. So without a second word, he went to make arrangements. Thanks to the Nar clan's efforts, it took only about half an hour for order to gradually emerge
Speaker A
outside the new Kenoa. Of course, some were dissatisfied. Seeing the Aiha, they immediately shouted about unfairness.
Speaker A
Why? Oi, we chose to join your new Konoha because we think highly of your village. We want to enter the village.
Speaker A
They were not afraid. In the old days, when the Aiha managed village security, they had often acted this way and the Achiha dared not touch them, right? But unfortunately, before the man could finish his rant and Achiha rushed out
Speaker A
and severed his head with a single slash. All the old Kohaa villagers stood frozen in shock. Finally, the Aiha who stepped forward his sharing gone blazing flicked the blood off his blade and said in a frigid tone, "Those who do not wish
Speaker A
to join may leave. Our village is not begging you to stay. Those who want to leave, get out now. Those who want to join the new Kenoha obey orders.
Speaker A
Troublemakers will be killed." With the Aiha's ironfisted slaughter, the vast majority of old Kenoha villagers fell into line. Of course, some defiant ones chose to leave, and the Achiha did not stop them. As long as order was not
Speaker A
disrupted, they were free to come or go. The new Kohaa was not short of villagers. After seven or eight such killings order outside, the new Kohaa barely began to function. An hour later, with the new Canoha's gates opened the
Speaker A
first batch of verified individuals officially entered the village. It was precisely this first entry that gave the waiting people hope, prompting them to genuinely cooperate with the identity verification process. The Nar clan worked at a decent pace. Every half
Speaker A
hour, they would let in a batch of people. However, the number of old Kohaa villagers was overwhelming. In half an hour, they could barely verify the identities of over 500 people. But in that same half hour, more than a
Speaker A
thousand new arrivals would flood in from the old Kohaa, so there was no way around it. Both the Aiha and the Nar were exhausted, but they dared not slack off. The Nara worked meticulously while the Aiha strictly enforced police
Speaker A
discipline. Anyone who caused trouble was killed without a second thought. New Leaf Village Hokag building in a small meeting room next to the Hokag's office.
Speaker A
There were only five single seat sofas with Aiha sitting in the very center. To the left sat Kakashi andsunade. To the right sat Nar Rokichi and the remaining empty seat was clearly for Fagaku.
Speaker A
Fugaku was currently stationed outside the village. So naturally he wasn't called to this meeting. There is only one topic for today. Our plan has progressed too smoothly. Even I didn't anticipate that Old Leaf Village would rot to such an unbelievable extent. The
Speaker A
backup plan is no longer needed. Old Leaf Village has collapsed on its own. So should we take this opportunity and directly annex old leaf village tonight after finishing Achihaene directly picked up the teacup beside him? Yes. He still felt a sense of disbelief. Who
Speaker A
could have imagined that merely by winning over a few ninjas they could so easily cause Old Leaf Village to collapse? But this alone was enough to show that Old Leaf Village was truly rotten to the core. And regarding this,
Speaker A
simply shrugged. I have no objections. It doesn't seem to make much difference whether we strike tonight or later. It's just a pity that the life's work of my two grandfathers has turned into this mess. That old fool Harusen Saratobi
Speaker A
truly deserves to die. At this moment, she was very dejected. After all, old leaf village carried her childhood and was the dream of her two grandfathers.
Speaker A
Yet, now it faced its final destruction. Although the village before her was good and also named Leaf, it was ultimately not the original village. Just like the eastern Han and Western Han, though both were called Han, their essences were
Speaker A
completely different. The same naturally applied to New Leaf Village and Old Leaf Village. Therefore, forsunade at this point, it was already good enough that she was willing to support and not cause trouble. She clearly had no intention of
Speaker A
worrying about anything more. Kakashi glanced at Sunsade then let out a sigh. I think it's feasible. Our village's strength is now formidable. Dealing with Old Leaf Village shouldn't be too difficult. He and Sununade were actually similar. Old Leaf Village had also
Speaker A
carried the first half of his life. His father teacher teacher's wife Aido Ren now watching old leaf village crumble and even being one of the gravediggers himself. This feeling was indeed hard to describe. However, he had no regrets
Speaker A
because that village had already decayed. Too many strong individuals who should have grown up were destroyed by Huen Saratobi and other high-ranking officials. Thinking of all this, he felt deep pain and anger. Such a village deserved to be destroyed. The last to
Speaker A
speak was Narroichi, but his thoughts differed from sun and Kakashi. My suggestion is to wait. The destruction of Old Leaf Village is already a foregone conclusion, so there's no need to rush. The justice that Lord Hokag spoke of is important to a grand and
Speaker A
righteous path will more easily win people's hearts. So, at this stage, we just need to surround Old Leaf Village and prevent the four great ninja clans, including Saratobi, from escaping. As for the rest, take it slowly. We should
Speaker A
still go through the proper procedures. This will benefit the cohesion and centrial force of the village.
Speaker A
Narroichi's tone was serious. Although all the power was in their village's hands and destroying Old Leaf Village was as easy as saying a word, but a village is composed of people and each person has different thoughts. Since it's not an urgent moment, we should go
Speaker A
through the process under the name of justice with overwhelming momentum to destroy old leaf village so that new leaf village can have the most orthodox legitimacy in the future. Aihajene nodded upon hearing this. Indeed, just like the feudal dynasties of a past
Speaker A
life, they also had to observe the ritual of three declines and three acceptances and perform sacrifices to heaven and earth. Isn't that right? The ninja world was much more rough, but having something was better than nothing. Taking a deep breath, he
Speaker A
directly ordered. All right, let's do it this way. Kakashi immediately take charge of the U and surround Old Leaf Village, making sure the four great ninja clans, including Saratobi, don't escape. Rokichi, you go find Fagaku and complete the screening process as soon
Speaker A
as possible. Soonady, go to the mission hall and issue a temporary B- rank war mission to assist the UU in besieging Old Leaf Village. All ninjas in the village can freely accept it. Set the reward and merit points as you see fit.
Speaker A
After that, go to the administrative department and do your best to integrate the villagers of Old Leaf Village into our village. With Aiha Jyn's words, everyone stood up and respectfully accepted the orders. Immediately after the three left and began their
Speaker A
respective tasks. Aihajene also yawned and went home to rest. Yes, even though the entire village was busy, he as the hokag was an exception. Even at the critical moment of old leaf villages destruction, it couldn't affect his normal routine. He had no interest in
Speaker A
being like other traditional hokagages who had to handle everything themselves, big or small. Just like Narudo Uzamaki in the original story who exhausted himself to the point of neglecting his family, he became Hokag to enjoy life not to be a beast of burden. Meanwhile,
Speaker A
on the other side, Narroichi went directly outside the village to help Fagaku while sununady went directly to the mission hall and issued a war mission. B- rank mission assist the Yu in besieging Old Leaf Village. Tunin and above are allowed to accept the mission.
Speaker A
Those interested gather at training ground 13 within half an hour. Tune in reward 10 Rio 50 merit points. Perimeter containment low mortality elite tunein reward 30 Rio 100 merit points. Frontal confrontation medium mortality tokabetsu jonin reward 5 rio 200 merit points.
Speaker A
Temporarily assigned by ambu high mortality jonin reward rio 500 merit points. Must face the elites of the four great clans. extremely high mortality.
Speaker A
Unlike the mission releases of Old Leaf Village under the reforms promoted by Achihajene, he not only introduced a merit point exchange system that allowed every ninja to clearly see how many merit points they had accumulated and what level of ninja tools, techniques,
Speaker A
or special guidance they could exchange for. Moreover, the missions clearly indicated the level of danger. No mandatory assignments. Oh, everything was left to your choice. Even during wartime, there were no forced requirements. If you lacked ambition and preferred to slack off, no one would
Speaker A
force you. Of course, because it was already late at night, sent someone to notify everyone about this matter almost instantly. All the ninjas who received the notification almost unanimously chose to accept it. There was no choice.
Speaker A
They didn't care much about money as it could only improve their family's living conditions. What they truly cared about was merit points. That was the only path to becoming a strong ninja. During the Old Leaf Village era, civilian ninjas
Speaker A
could only obtain techniques depending on the mood of their supervising Jonin or after accumulating great merits. They still had to be favored by the higher-ups to receive them. Now, in New Leaf Village, everything was quantified.
Speaker A
Once your merit points reached the threshold, you could automatically exchange them. Under these circumstances, everyone naturally enjoyed doing missions. Even for the ninja clans, the value of merit points was quite high because they also needed certain special techniques, high-v value
Speaker A
items, and even guidance from certain strong individuals. Of course, when strong individuals provided guidance, they could also earn merit points. Half an hour later, training ground 13. It was the largest training ground in the new Hidden Leaf, capable of
Speaker A
accommodating 3,000 people for drills. Yet, when used for temporary troop assembly, it could hold every shinobi in the entire village. Kakashi stood with a calm expression. He led a squad of umbu and stood silently in place, watching the countless freelance shinobi
Speaker A
gradually gather. Times up. No more waiting. Move out. After speaking, he led the umbu directly toward the old hidden leaf. The gathered shinobi squads followed behind the umbu under their captain's command. As they left the village gates, they also saw the Aiha
Speaker A
and Narak clans along with the former villagers of the old hidden leaf who were queuing for screening. Everyone's eyes were filled with complex emotions.
Speaker A
After all, 2 years ago, they had all been from the same village. But now, 2 years later, everything had changed.
Speaker A
People and circumstances were no longer the same, and their statuses had long shifted due to the differences in their choices. Indeed, though the new hidden leaf appeared peaceful on the surface, it was actually divided into distinct classes. The treatment received by newly
Speaker A
joined villagers and old villagers could not be compared. This was perfectly normal. The old hidden leaf was founded by Hasharama who believed everyone was one family. So, there was little difference between newcomers and old-timers. The new hidden leaf,
Speaker A
however, was different. It was the village built by Aiha, so the rules had to follow his vision. Aiha was a pragmatic man, especially due to the lessons of his past life, which taught him that class was inevitable. Enforcing
Speaker A
absolute equality would benefit no one. On the contrary, it was precisely because of class that everyone harbored the ambition to climb higher and were more willing to strive for the village and their families. Therefore, what he needed to do was ensure class mobility,
Speaker A
provide everyone with a clear path for advancement, or whether they could achieve it was up to them. 20 minutes later, with the arrival of the UU and freelance, Shinobi Kakashi began urgently assigning tasks. Though Kakashi had never served as a frontline
Speaker A
commander, he had followed Minado Names during the third war, so he had no issues with troop deployment and formation. Finally, around 1:30 in the morning, the encirclement of the Old Hidden Leaf was completed. Boom. While Kakashi was studying the old Hidden
Speaker A
Leafs defense map in the temporary command tent, he suddenly heard explosions outside. Stepping out, he saw a skirmish taking place not far to the west. First battalion squad Ja 10 and Jia 20 moved to support immediately.
Speaker A
Squad Ja 9 observed from close range, identify the enemy, and hurry back to report. For the freelance, Shinobi dispatched 30 squads. Kakashi narrowed his eyes and issued orders directly. He was not flustered now because the entire first battalion of the umbu served as a
Speaker A
mobile force and he had also kept 50 regular freelance shinobi squads in reserve. No matter where an engagement broke out, he could provide emergency support. Such a minor incident did not trouble him. Immediately 11 U squads and 50 freelance Shinobi set out rapidly
Speaker A
closing in on the location of the battle. About 10 minutes later, squad Ja 9 of the first U battalion returned.
Speaker A
Lord Kakashi its route. Upon hearing this, Kakashi's eyes turned icy cold. Then, without waiting for squad Ja 9 to finish their report, he drew his white fang shorts sword, transformed into a flash of light, and charged toward the
Speaker A
battle. Lord Kakashi Danzo isn't there. You're the commander. You can't go to the front line. Let me finish. The squad leader of Ja Nine was stunned watching Kakashi charge off frozen in place. This is terrible. If the front line commander
Speaker A
ran off, what would happen if an emergency arose? Thinking this, he felt a chill run down his spine. But on the other side, Kakashi, oblivious to his muttering, burned with killing intent and reached the engagement zone in just
Speaker A
3 minutes. Lightning released chakra flowed through the hand, gripping his sword. And as it passed through the white fan chakra short sword, it had transformed into streaks of white lightning. His speed was extreme. After 2 years of grueling training and
Speaker A
Achihajin's assistance, he was no longer the Kakashi of old, but had taken on the aura of Sukcomo Hataki. Even against Ruth's elite, each swing of his blade claimed a life. With Kakashi's arrival, the battle ended in less than a minute.
Speaker A
30 root corpses were left on the scene and six of them were captured alive for refused to cooperate while two were willing. The other two had not been brainwashed for long, so they chose to cooperate, but their faces were filled
Speaker A
with conflict. Though we very much want to cooperate with the new hidden leaf we have curse seals placed on us. We cannot reveal any information about root at that. The other four root shinobi immediately began cursing. Bastards, how
Speaker A
dare you betray Lord Danzo. You two will die a terrible death. Lord Danzo will not forgive you. Kakashi's eyes flickered. After a brief moment of thought, he directly ordered all Yamanaka clan members step forward.
Speaker A
Attempt to extract the memories of these four. Then five Yamanaka clan Shinobi stepped out placing their hands on the heads of the four root Shinobi who glared at them with venomous eyes.
Speaker A
Secret technique mind transfer technique. Amid their screams, the six Yamanaka Shinobi broke out in sweat.
Speaker A
After a long while, the curse seals on the four route. Shinobi activated, turning their brains into a pulp. The six Yamanaka Shinobi stood up, all shaking their heads helplessly. No good.
Speaker A
The roots tung seal is too strong. We cannot break through its restrictions. Though we obtained some intelligence by force, it's fragmented and hard to organize quickly. Kakashi's expression remained unchanged. He had clearly anticipated this. In truth, he had
Speaker A
simply taken the opportunity to eliminate those four and if possible, glean a bit of rude intelligence. Even if it failed, it didn't matter. Even just intimidating the two remaining root shinobi was a net gain for Kakashi. He turned to the remaining two root shinobi
Speaker A
since you're willing to cooperate the new hidden leaf will do its best to ensure your safety. I won't ask about Root's intelligence. I'll try to avoid triggering the tongue curse seal. Now tell me how many people did Root
Speaker A
transfer. The two root shinobi were thoroughly frightened. They had joined Root not long ago with minimal brainwashing and their quality was far from that of the former elites. So trembling and forcing themselves to speak, they said, "We're the last batch.
Speaker A
Do you know where they were transferred? Kakashi continued. The route Shinobi attempted to answer. We can't say the exact location, but we do know where it is. No need to explain. Lead the way.
Speaker A
All Ubu members follow me. The rest continue with the defense. Move out. Kaki issued his commands with utmost directness. The two root ninja showed remarkable compliance immediately taking the lead. The Yu ninja following Kaki departed straight away with the two root
Speaker A
members while the other ninjas resumed their defensive positions. Of course though, Kaki sought to settle scores with Tuanzang. He did not forget to report to the village. He summoned his ninja dog P and ordered it to race to
Speaker A
Exai and Mai with all speed. Time trickled by. Barely half an hour later, the group arrived at a dense forest.
Speaker A
Kaki and the U concealed themselves. The two root members trembling formed a highly peculiar hand seal. The air around them shuddered, revealing a modest mountain and a pitch black entrance. Two root guards approached.
Speaker A
Why are there only two of you? Where are the others? At the root ninja's query, the two defected root members found themselves at a loss for words. Then in the next instant, Kaki and his U squad burst forth from the forest. Damn it,
Speaker A
you two are traitors. The two root guards erupted in fury, but as they moved to kill the defectors, Kaki transformed into a white flash, slaying both guards instantly. He then kicked the door open and charged inside. The other U did not hesitate. They followed
Speaker A
closely behind Kaki, plunging into the dark gateway. As for the two root defectors, Kaki and his team paid them no heat. Whether they became wandering ninja or joined Exen Mai was entirely irrelevant. Join another village.
Speaker A
Impossible. No village would ever trust them. If they chose that path, they would be drained of value and then killed. Become rogue ninja. They lacked even that qualification. Xin Mai would not bother to issue a bounty. What do we
Speaker A
do? One of the root defectors couldn't help but glance at his companion. In response, the other defector sighed softly. Let's go to Xi and Mai. With this merit, we probably won't be executed. Is that so? Very well. The
Speaker A
other nodded. Immediately after the two set off toward Exxin Mai, this choice was only natural. After all, whether as wandering ninja or cowering in some corner, nowhere more comfort than Exai Mai, especially since they had rendered some service tonight. Meanwhile, at Exai
Speaker A
Mai, upon receiving the message from Kak's ninja dog, Pake, Gang Ho was so enraged that she smashed her desk.
Speaker A
Though pursuing the route was important, it was not the primary mission of the night. Kak's behavior was utterly deplorable. After all, he was the frontline commander. If he went after Tuanzang, who would oversee the camp despite her fury, she woke the sleeping
Speaker A
Yuzbo Gene Kaki. He's gone to avenge his father. Though understandable, the law must be upheld. After this is over, confine him for a week and deduct half a year's salary. But we can't let Tuanzang escape. Send Xiu and Fuet to assist
Speaker A
Kaki. Have Kak's dog guide them. Let Naong Louui temporarily handle the screening and registration outside the village. As for the frontline commander besieging Jio, my summon showing from the Akimichi clan. After all, he's a disciple of your second Hokag's master.
Speaker A
I trust his abilities and methods. Let him reunite with his old comrades. Yuzbo Gene was quite displeased. He had just fallen asleep when he was roused and all because of Kaki. But even if he wanted to punish the man, it had to wait until
Speaker A
the Ji affair was resolved. He did not blame Gangho. She lacked the authority to issue such orders and Yuzbo Gene would not permit it. Only he could command the mobilization of a general.
Speaker A
As for capturing Tuanzang personally, huh? Tuanzang was not worthy of that honor. His subordinates were countless and formidable. He had no need to act himself. So, having said his peace, he immediately went back to sleep. Gho, however, was visibly annoyed. She worked
Speaker A
like a dog everyday while Yuzbo Gene the Hokag enjoyed high status, immense power, and crucially, far fewer troubles. She wanted to be that kind of Hokag too, but enough. She was quite satisfied with the current village and no longer inclined to slack off as she
Speaker A
once did. With a resigned sigh, she said about her duties. Upon hearing the order, Xioue and Fua immediately set out to hunt Tuanzang. After all the enmity between the Aiha and Tuanzang was beyond words. Given the chance to kill
Speaker A
Tuanzang, they would waste no words. The only one displeased was Chao chiefing. Me the frontline commander Gong Show. Is that Yuzbo Gene insane? I'm already too old for this. Having just lain down Showdown Chiefing's face was full of
Speaker A
irritation. Since Saratobi Harusen took power, he had completely withdrawn from the core of authority due to their differing worldviews. But who would have thought after all these years now that he was old, he had to toil like a beast
Speaker A
of burden again. Gongos expression remained unchanged. She said calmly, "This is the Hokage's order. Senior Chiefing, please don't throw a tantrum.
Speaker A
Louie and I are all too busy to handle this." "Oh well." Sha Chiefing helplessly. Fine. Fine, I understand, but I'm an old man now. Surely I can find a few helpers. Let Luhigh and Dingo assist me. That should be fine, right?
Speaker A
He had no choice. Though he wanted to refuse, he knew the times had changed.
Speaker A
He might not fear Saratobi Herusen and could even fight him in the village without consequences. But the problem was that the Achihan now held power and he had no rapport with them. The only Achiha he had some friendship with Aiha
Speaker A
Kagami had died too early. Considering the future of the Enoshiko clans in Xin, Mai ultimately reluctantly accepted the Hokag's order. Of course, as he said, he was no longer young and had not been on missions for [clears throat] a
Speaker A
long time. So, he intended to bring the original Inosikacho trio. Gengho did not hesitate and immediately nodded. No problem. Do as you wish. Yuzbo Gene has no intention of purging them. On the contrary, as the earliest defectors, the
Speaker A
Hokag must promote them to set an example for the rest of the village. Since you wish to take them senior, go ahead. Akimchi Toufu let out a sigh, yet he still yawned and dawned his combat gear, taking the opportunity to summon
Speaker A
the three of the Naray Yamanaka and Akimichi clans. Torenai, what's this? Narikaku was utterly bewildered at that moment. Clearly, the one sent by the Akimichi clan to summon them didn't know the specifics, only hoping they'd come quickly. So, Narashaku, having been
Speaker A
roused from sleep with a yawn, was stunned, speechless upon seeing Torfu in full combat gear. Shukaku, you've arrived. I never thought at my age I'd be dragged out for night work by that braachihajene.
Speaker A
Get ready. We're heading to the front lines. Objective besiege. Old Kenoa. Hearing this, Narashikaku was rooted to the spot. However, with his sharp mind, he instantly deduced that something unexpected must have occurred at the front to warrant summoning them. Soon
Speaker A
after, when Yamanaka Enochi and Akimichi Chosa arrived, Akimi Toufu stood up directly move out. With that, he took the lead and departed. The previous generation's Eno Shikacho trio naturally followed with Nar Shikaku briefly explaining the situation to his two
Speaker A
companions on route. Unbelievable. The three of us, the previous Enoch are actually joining forces again and a fight against the former village's high council head. When you think about it, it's ironic. Yamanaka Anochi's face was full of shock. Then he couldn't help but
Speaker A
sigh. As for that, Nar Shikaku also sighed, but after shaking his head, he refrained from saying more. Akimichi Chosa, on the other hand, showed only brief surprise before regaining his composure. Clearly, he held no particular fondness for the former
Speaker A
village's high council. Half an hour later, after the four arrived at the frontline command camp, Akimichi Torfu took out the Hokag's order and assumed command of the entire camp. Torfu sat at the head with the Eno Shikacho trio
Speaker A
flanking him. As the various key personnel of the camp arrived, Torfu immediately asked, "Who will brief me on the defensive layout?" "Allow me." Ajonan stepped forward. I'm the deputy head of the intelligence division and the deputy commander of the front lines.
Speaker A
Subsequently, after stating his identity, he gave a concise overview of Kakashi's arrangements to everyone present. After listening, Toru directly asked Shikaku, "Any additions?" None.
Speaker A
Narikaku slowly shook his head Kakashi's deployment is sound. It's just enough to keep the four clans of the Saratobi faction from desperate measures. With current strength, that's achievable. If we hastily reshuffle frontline forces, the enemy could exploit weaknesses and
Speaker A
break through. So, let's leave it as is. His tone was calm, his eyes briefly flickered, and he gave his verdict. As for that, the others naturally had no objections, holding Nar Shikaku in sufficient trust. Compared to Kakashi, the frontline commander Shikaku had
Speaker A
frequently been on the front lines during the third great ninja war, assisting three commanders, Jeriah, Orochimaru, and Manado Namic, and even personally commanding the camp when commanders were absent. Since he said there was no problem, there was nothing
Speaker A
more to discuss. Just then, an A&BU entered Nelt on one knee and reported, "Lord Torfu, the Uditain and Midocado clans are currently forcing their way through our northern 9th defensive line stronghold. They have overwhelming numbers. We need immediate
Speaker A
reinforcement." Hearing this, everyone's eyes narrowed. "Kimchi," Torifu sighed softly. The very thing he dreaded most had come to pass. Yuden Koharuru and Midokado Hamira, he truly didn't want to face his old friends in battle. However, since the Enoch Cho had made their
Speaker A
choice and after observing the new village for 2 years, he found it far preferable to the old one. So, for his clan, for the Enoshika Cho for the new village, Torfu immediately stood, commit all mobile units. I'll personally
Speaker A
confront those two clans. Shikaku and Noi chose a year with me. With that, he didn't hesitate and headed out. The [clears throat] others were stunned.
Speaker A
Commit everything. After all, the Shamura and Saratobi clans had yet to make a move. If they attempted to break out, there would be no reserve forces left. However, despite their doubts, Torfu was the true commander and held the Hokag's order. So, despite their
Speaker A
confusion, no one dared to speak up. 10 minutes later, all ninjas surged out of the camp and under Torah's leadership headed straight for the ninth temporary stronghold. Along the way, Narashaku couldn't help but ask, "Traf Senpai committing everything." But
Speaker A
unfortunately, before he could finish, Toru cut him off. I know those fellows better than you. The Shamura clan has only a few cats and dogs. Danzo doesn't treat them as his own. At best, he simply doesn't oppress them. That madman
Speaker A
Danzo cares more about Root. He has no interest in the Shamura clan. So, in essence, the Shamura clan follows the Saratobi. As for the Soratobi clan, they won't leave Kenoha because Husen knows full well that no nation in the ninja
Speaker A
world would accept them. Their clan knows too many secrets of Kohaa. And with their years of enmity with the Aiha, if they were to fight to the bitter, and they might carve out a slim chance of survival by leveraging the
Speaker A
village's resources. Fleeing that suicide, Narashikaku was taken aback. Despite serving as Jonan's squad leader and Hokag adviser for years, he didn't know the village's high council as intimately as Torah did. After all, he was a comrade of Harusen and the others.
Speaker A
However, since Torfu said the Saratobi and Shimura wouldn't flee Shikaku felt somewhat relieved, he had feared their enoiko ancestor might out of old friendship with Herusen and company let them escape on the battlefield. If that happened, the enoshiko would lose the
Speaker A
achias trust in the new village permanently. But after a moment's thought, he still asked, "Does the old village still have hidden resources?" Torphosama, do you know something? Of course, it has reserved strength. Tora murmured, "Don't underestimate Kenoa.
Speaker A
Although the monkey has done nothing good these years, the old village still carries the legacy of the Senu clan. The first Hokag and Lord Tobarama were absolute powerhouses. Alen camel is still bigger than a horse. What I fear
Speaker A
most is Orochimaru and even more the impure world reincarnation technique. Narikaku was stunned upon hearing this.
Speaker A
Orochimaru the impure world reincarnation technique. For a moment his mind struggled to process it. Hadn't Orochimaru become a rogue ninja long ago? And what exactly was this impure world reincarnation technique?
Speaker A
Meanwhile, on the other side, Akimichi Torifu, though not looking at Naras Shikaku, knew his junior must be pondering these questions. So he immediately began speaking with great seriousness. First, Orochimaru, do not simply view him as a rogue ninja. In
Speaker A
truth, his bond with the old monkey runs deep. Otherwise, do you think he would have escaped Kenoha so easily after the incident years ago? It was merely that Saratobi Herusen couldn't bear to strike him down. That Orochimaru is also a bit
Speaker A
twisted. A after completely losing the chance to become the fourth Hokag, he poured all his energy into research and staying in Kenoha, human experiments were too restricted. That's why he chose to expose himself and sever ties to conduct his experiments more freely
Speaker A
outside. The old monkey also knows he wronged Orochimaru regarding the Hokag selection. Though he gave up on Orochimaru to hold on to power, he still has feelings for his disciple. That's why old Kinoa never truly pursued Orochimaru all these years. Orochimaru
Speaker A
may bear resentment towards Soratobi Herusen, perhaps even looking down on his teacher. But if the old monkey faced such a crisis, he would definitely come to help. Second, the impure world reincarnation. This is a technique Lord Tobarama developed back in the day,
Speaker A
capable of summoning the dead back to the living world. Although Lord Tobarama hadn't perfected it before his death, the souls summoned could only exert limited power. But that Orochimaru is a bit twisted. Who knows if he's perfected it over the years. So whether we can
Speaker A
absorb old Kenoha depends on our Hokag Aihajene. Of course, that kind of highstakes battle is not our concern. We only need to make sure they're trapped and can't leave. Akimichi Torfu said calmly as Tobarama's disciple, his understanding of his teacher naturally surpassed
Speaker A
ordinary people. So, he knew well the true foundation of Kinoa. The impure world reincarnation was usually a forbidden technique, but with Saratobi Herusen pushed to the brink if the old monkey fought desperately and summoned the previous Hokag Usuzamaki Mido,
Speaker A
Hataki Sukumo, and other powerhouses. It was hard to say. Meanwhile, on the other side, Narashikaku and the others were stunned. Old Kenoha actually had such a bizarre technique, summoning the dead.
Speaker A
Even after serving as old Kenoha's high-ranking officials for so many years, they never imagined the leadership held such terrifying power.
Speaker A
After a moment of deliberation, he asked in confusion, "Can our new Kohaa withstand this?" "Old Master Tool, why didn't you stop us back then?" To this, Akimichi Torus expression remained unchanged. Instead, he merely said calmly, "Old Kenoha's foundation comes
Speaker A
from the Sinju clan. Why do you think the Aiha have no foundation of their own? Never forget that during the waring states era, the Achiha fought the Synu for a thousand years. Old Kinoa relies solely on the Synu's legacy while the
Speaker A
Achiha rely on their own. Just think about the Mangeko Sharing. How many Achiha have awakened it now? At these words, Naras Shikaku was left dumbfounded. Indeed, old Kohaa's so-called foundation came only from defeating the Synu and inheriting their
Speaker A
legacy. But what about the Aiha? They were also a prestigious clan that once rivaled the Senu. Did they lack their own foundation? And with the near invincible man Gekkyo, the Achiha already had three users openly. Gene Fagaka sure sway. So indeed, just as old
Speaker A
master tofu said, this highstakes battle should be left to the iah. They just needed to do their own part. Before long, they arrived at temporary stronghold now. Nine and immediately joined the battle. Expansion jutzu meet tank. Akimich Chosa without hesitation
Speaker A
transformed into a massive ball of flesh and charged straight at the Udane clan. In an instant, he carved a bloody path through the battlefield. Nar Shikaku and Yamanaka Enochi also charged in without a word. Countless A and Bu and freelance
Speaker A
ninjas saw this and immediately plunged into the fray, stabilizing the situation in moments. At that moment, Yudain Koharu and Nidokado Hamira stepped forward. Aki, Mii, Tori, Fu, have you and old man also become a lackey of the Aiha. For the sake of old friendship,
Speaker A
show us a way out. The two spoke immediately, hope gleaming in their eyes. Indeed, they truly hadn't expected the old man a kimchi tofu to appear, let alone take the etchias side. Yet, they couldn't help but try. After all, given
Speaker A
their years of friendship, they hoped that Kimichi Toufu would show some consideration. But unfortunately, Akimi Toufu's face was full of disdain, his tone cold and indifferent. Go back. If you turn back now, I promise I won't lay a hand on you. And don't bring up
Speaker A
friendship. It's nauseating. Of all our old comrades, the only true friend I had was Kagami. Do you really think I don't know how you bastards conspired to kill Kagami back then? Kagamiy's eyes are still in Danzo's sockets. Did you
Speaker A
really think I returned to my clan and lived in seclusion all these years because of a difference in principles?
Speaker A
It was Kagami. The old monkey was chosen by the teacher. Back then, I had no power to avenge Kagami. And honestly, I couldn't bring myself to kill you. But likewise, don't expect me to let you off easy since the Enoch will be working
Speaker A
with the Aiha from now on. and Aayakimichi Torfu would never be foolish enough to let you go. So get out. I don't know what Achihajene will do to you, but if you don't get back now, I'll kill you both right here." These words
Speaker A
were dripping with killing intent. Though Akimichi Toufu was advanced in age, the killing intent he exuded was formidable. Meanwhile, on the other side, Uditain Koharu and Midokado Hamira were frozen in place. Clearly, they never expected that the seemingly
Speaker A
simple-minded Akimichi Tofu would know about Achihagami's matter. This was it. They were doomed. Their expressions turned grim and for a moment they were at a loss for words. The Uditain and Midocado clans ultimately chose to retreat. It couldn't be helped. They
Speaker A
could sense the killing intent in Akimichi Toru's eyes. Back in the day among Tobber Sensei's disciples, his strength was only slightly below that of Aihakagami. While he and Saratobi Herusen were evenly matched. Although this old man hadn't made a move in many
Speaker A
years, they still didn't consider themselves his match. So alas, if New Kohaa truly intended to kill them, then their two clans would certainly have to fight to the death tonight. But the problem was judging from New Koha's current tactics, they didn't seem to
Speaker A
harbor such intentions at all. Thus, their resolve to fight to the death was naturally not very strong. Hope still lingered in their hearts. What if Aiha never actually intended to kill them?
Speaker A
Besides, it would be better to return to old Kohaa and see if Saratobi Haruen had any tricks left to turn the tables. At the very least, it would be better than dying at Akimichi Tofu's hands. All right, go back. Akimichi Toru glanced at
Speaker A
the retreating Uditain and Midocado clans, then let out a sigh and turned away. Meanwhile, Shikaku and the other two exchanged glances. They first replenished the personnel at temporary outpost 9, then gathered the remains of the fallen Shinobi before leaving the
Speaker A
area and hurrying back to the frontline camp. Along the way, Narashikaku side repeatedly. The older the ginger, the spicier it is. He might have been able to resolve this himself, but it would have cost many lives. After all, while
Speaker A
the Udetain and Midocado clans might not have as many elite fighters as other Shinobi clans, their sheer number of clan members was substantial. The combined strength of the three Inoacho clans probably isn't even as numerous as one of those clans. It couldn't be
Speaker A
helped. These Kenoha higher-ups had monopolized the village's resources for far too long. Who knows how much they had embezzled over the years. While money might not be able to cultivate top tier experts, it was certainly enough to train ordinary shinobi. But now,
Speaker A
akimichi tofu just showed his face barked a few reprimands and sent them packing. Truit didn't seem like he killed many enemies. But the key point was that their mission wasn't to kill anyway. It was to keep the four clans
Speaker A
trapped within old Kenoha. After all, Aiha had no intention of killing them. He regarded them all as free labor. The supply of such top tier workh horses was dwindling. Lose one and he's gone forever. The Inosikacho Industries would
Speaker A
also need plenty of manual labor in the future. Tora Fasama is truly remarkable. Even someone from the Nar clan like me couldn't think of such a solution. Nar Shikaku side with admiration. Yamanaka and Noi and Akimichi Chosa couldn't help
Speaker A
but nod in agreement. Truly an elder in the family is a treasure. Although Tora Fasama seemingly didn't lift a finger, his contribution was immense. Meanwhile, on the other side, Kakashi and the ENBU had already stormed the root headquarters. The battle was almost
Speaker A
one-sided. The current route was no match for the AMVU's assault. Damn it. If it weren't for that bastard Achihajene as he watched the battle unfold, Danzo's heart bled. It couldn't be helped. Last time when they tried to surround and kill Achihajin, nearly all
Speaker A
of Root's elite forces were wiped out. Although he later attempted to conscript from the various Shinobi clans, he only ended up driving them all into Aiha's camp. And Root didn't gain a single new recruit. So Danzo had to settle for a
Speaker A
lesser option, recruiting from civilian shinobi. Consequently, facing this ambu force composed entirely of elite shinobi, his root troops barely put up any fight before they were almost completely slaughtered. Dan. So Kakashi's eyes blazed with fury, his voice as cold as iron. Lightning
Speaker A
crackled around the white fang saber in his hand as he charged at Danzo at blinding speed. In response, Danzo remained calm, calmly speaking while working on dismantling the seal on his arm. Fu Rayoma, buy me some time. At
Speaker A
Danzo's command, the two responded with calm composure. Then without a second word, they launched themselves at Kakashi. Hard turn puppet curse seal technique. Yamanaka Fu formed hand signs well aware of Kakashi's troublesome nature and went straight for a killing
Speaker A
blow from the start. In an instant, a puppet was unleashed immediately, executing the mind body switch technique. Although Kakashi's speed was at its absolute limit, Yamanaka Fu still managed to seize control of him. As one of Danzo's top generals, Yamanaka Fu's
Speaker A
abilities remained as troublesome as ever. However, just as the secret technique was about to seal his soul, Kakashi's three Tommo Sharinggon suddenly contorted, transforming into the shape of a sickle. In that very instant, even though it was Kakashi's
Speaker A
first time awakening the maneko, he instantly understood the ability of this new ocular power. Kimui, the puppet approaching him, was instantly warped and twisted out of existence. And in response to this, Yamanakaf Fu, though surprised, pressed forward with his
Speaker A
cannai. Unfortunately for him, while his swordsmanship was decent, it pald in comparison to Kakashi's within barely 10 exchanges, he was already struggling to hold his ground. Ryoma now Yamanaka fubed on the other side. Abureim Ryoma finally completed his hand signs. Kichu
Speaker A
void. A torrent of insect swarms filled the air. These were his special parasitic insects. While perhaps not as formidable as Abureame's nanocale insects, these unique bugs were still terrifying, capable of directly devouring an enemy's chakra. Damn it, Kamu. Though Kakashi was already feeling
Speaker A
drained, the Mangeko's power was immense, but took a heavy toll on his body. But there was no choice. Facing this sky darkening swarm of special insects, he could only use Kimui again to swallow them. Then he forcibly drew
Speaker A
out his remaining chakra and with three clean slashes, he finished off Yamanakafu. Then he charged straight at Abby Ryoma. 2 minutes later, Abby Ryoma was dead. It was at that very moment that Danzo finally unraveled the seal.
Speaker A
And on the other side, Kakashi's steps faltered with exhaustion. His strength might have grown considerably over the past two years, but Yamanaka Fu and Abu Rayoma were also the last two elite generals under Danzo's command.
Speaker A
Defeating these two was already pushing Kakashi to his very limits. Kakashi, you're quite impressive, but you're still far inferior to your father. Had he faced Fu and Ryoma, he could have killed them both in an instant. Still, I
Speaker A
commend you. After all, those were my two finest subordinates. Now then, it's time for you to die. As Danzo unraveled the bandages, he revealed the pale withered skin ravaged by Hasharama cells with three charing gone gleaming with a
Speaker A
sinister crimson light. Danzo quickly formed hand seals for Mauhighway and Izanagi immediately took effect. Unlike the original story where he fought against Sasuke, Danzo didn't probe. Due to the rise of Achihajene, he had almost no charinggon left in stock. Unable to
Speaker A
be reckless, he could only engage in mid-range combat. Windstyle vacuum serial waves. In an instant, a series of sickle-shaped wind blades shot rapidly toward Kakashi. Kakashi's forehead beated with sweat. He could barely even extract Chakra. Now facing this fierce
Speaker A
and urgent onslaught. He was utterly unable to resist for the moment. But at that moment, Sherse and Fugaku, who had just rushed and saw this, Shers charged at Danzo with Itachi while Fugaku pulled Kakashi aside to dodge. Kakashi get some
Speaker A
rest. Leave the rest of the battle to us. After saying that, Fagako looked at Danzo again, especially at the Shainggon on his arm and his eyes turned extremely ferocious. He activated his three tommo sharing and unleashed a great fireball
Speaker A
technique. Danzo, who was engaged in a Taiutsu and ninjutsu clash with Sheru, narrowed his eyes, used Sherui's attack to leap backward, dodge the fireball, and then fired a vacuum great sphere.
Speaker A
Obviously, even though he rarely fought, he had been on the battlefield many times. So in a mere conventional battle, even though Shers and Fagaku were both strong, they could not easily subdue Danzo. Damn it, Danzo's eyes flickered with evasion, he had not expected the
Speaker A
reinforcements from New Leaf to arrive so quickly, and such Mangeko wielders as Fagaku and Shersu. Even though the two had not yet used their Mangeko, he knew it would be difficult to gain anything today. So he immediately summoned the
Speaker A
Baku and without a word retreated through another secret passage. Yes, Danzo was well aware that the old leaf village was beyond saving. Since the new leaf ninja had pursued him, it seemed this base could no longer be held. He
Speaker A
had originally wanted to kill Kakashi and take as many resources as possible. Now it seemed there was no chance. Danzo was fast. Seeing that the Baku had just blocked the two, he turned and fled without a word. Don't even think about
Speaker A
escaping. Shers saw this and became furious. He immediately activated Susenu and slashed the Baku to death with one stroke while Fagaka chased after Danzo.
Speaker A
Tinga Gene reed 20 times. To prevent Danzo from truly escaping, Fagako did not spare his manekioscular power. As a trail of blood tears flowed from his eyes, he immediately slowed Danzo's speed by 20 times. Fagaku caught up to
Speaker A
Danzo and directly cut off his head. Elder Fagaku Shiroui who had caught up couldn't help asking, "Is he dead?" Just like that. No, not yet. Fagaka shook his head and said, "Slowly, is Anaji? In fact, it was so." Just as Fagaku
Speaker A
finished speaking, the corpse on the ground gradually disappeared. Danzo immediately appeared on the other side.
Speaker A
Just revived, he used Izzanagi while frantically fleeing out of the base. But at this moment, Fagaka did not give him a chance to use Izanagi. Without a word, he used Ting Gao Jin Re again and with a ruthless heart, he directly slowed him
Speaker A
down by 30 times. Even though it was just three hand seals, Danzos speed of forming them was as slow as a snail.
Speaker A
Taking this opportunity, Danzo roared. Sheru seized the charing. Yes. Shers nodded. Then his speed reached its limit. He first cut off Danzo's wood release arm with a single stroke, then dug out the grandfather's eyes from his eye sockets. Seeing this, Fagaka
Speaker A
deactivated his man Gekcko. Oh, Danzo let out a scream. Without the suppression of the charing gone, the stump of his arm began to turn to wood.
Speaker A
Damn it, bastards. You two damned Achiha. Even if I die, I'll take you with me. It's a pity that Achiha Gene is not here. At this moment, Danzo was very clear that he had lost his last resort.
Speaker A
So, without hesitation, he now unleashed his final technique. Reverse four symbol seal. Seeing black ink splattering from Danzo's chest shers sway sense something was wrong and immediately kicked him deep into the corridor. A few seconds later accompanied by Danzo's shrill
Speaker A
desperate cry he sealed half of the secret passage. Nothing could be done at this moment. He was truly desperate. He had not expected that his final dying move would not even take a single enemy with him. What a terrifying sealing
Speaker A
technique. Fagaka gasped and couldn't help saying. Shers nodded upon hearing this. Fortunately, he had kicked Danzo away. Otherwise, both of them would have been buried with him. "Elder Fagaku, what about this arm?" Shers picked up Danzo's wood releaseleas arm and
Speaker A
looked at Fagaku with confusion. As for this, Fagaku thought briefly, then used the four symbol seal to seal it and directly placed it into his storage scroll. Soon after, when the two returned, the fighting among the Yu had
Speaker A
already ended. Seeing this, Fagaka said directly, "I'll take Kakashi back first. Leave the rest to you, Shers." "All right." Shers nodded. Then Fagaku carried Kakashi on his back and headed straight toward New Leaf Village.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, temporarily taking command of the Yu, he ordered them to seal the roots supplies here. On the other side, the two clans, Koharu and Hamira, had also returned to Old Leaf Village.
Speaker A
Hamuri Kohars voice was a bit Hamira did not answer, looking utterly dejected after a long while. After a long silence, he finally spoke slowly.
Speaker A
Kohari, you don't need to worry too much. Although that old man Torfu is unwilling to help, he still gave us a subtle reminder. Aiha probably doesn't really want to kill us. Otherwise, they wouldn't just surround the village. Take
Speaker A
it easy. Don't overthink it. Hearing this, Kohar didn't know what to say except let out a sigh. Of course, she knew that. If not for Torfu Akimi's subtle hint, she would never have let the clan retreat directly tonight, even
Speaker A
if it meant a desperate fight. But still, her heart was uneasy. While the two were discussing this, a member of the Suratobi clan ran over and said, "Elder Koharo, Elder Hamira, the Hokag Sama is still unconscious. Young master
Speaker A
sent me to ask you to help treat him." Hearing this, the two were stunned.
Speaker A
Hirus and Saratobi is unconscious. Hamira pondered for a moment, then said firmly, "Koharu, let's go take a look." "All right," Koharu nodded. As the head of the medical department, "Her medical ninjutsu might not be as good as, but she was still a skilled
Speaker A
practitioner. Now she understood Hamira's implication. Since they couldn't escape anymore, they might as well see if Herusen had any hidden trump cards. If he had, all the better. If not, then they could only pray that Aiha would show them mercy. Hoying building.
Speaker A
After Juwan Xiaoin and Shua, Yen arrived again, they looked at this core building of Mai and somehow felt a decaying aura.
Speaker A
However, when the two arrived at the Hokag's office and saw the unconscious Yuanfi risen, as well as the elders of the Yufi and Jimu clans present, their brows involuntarily furrowed. Where is the Hokag? What is that fellow Zillide doing now? Xiaoin
Speaker A
frowned and asked, but the people who heard this did not know how to answer for a moment. Finally, Asama shook his head. After we arrived at the Hoyang building, we have never seen Zilli again. No one knows where he went. Have
Speaker A
you searched? Shuom Yin asked. Asam nodded. We have sent people to search, but still haven't found him. Xiao Jun was somewhat stunned. Zilli couldn't have run away, could he? It's hard to say. Shumen Yin sighed. Zilli is different from us. He might not
Speaker A
surrender to the exi, but besides being loyal to the village, he is also loyal to Myamu Mountain. That fellow has been thoroughly fooled by Myamu Mountain taking the search for the savior as his lifelong belief. It's possible that
Speaker A
after realizing the village is hard to change, he plans to preserve himself and go around the world looking for the savior. His tone was very calm without any anger or resentment. Obviously, with the village in such a state, it wouldn't
Speaker A
be of much use for Zilli to stay. So, it doesn't matter. After all, these village rulers don't hold much hope for the current village anymore. Isn't that right? Upon hearing this, Schwanin Xiaoin also sighed. Finally, she turned her gaze to the unconscious Yuan Fe
Speaker A
risen. And after thinking for a moment, she directly took action using professional methods to stimulate his brain, causing Yuan Fe Risen to instantly wake up. Xiaoun Yianama, why are you all here? Where is Zilli? Could he? At this moment, the just awakened
Speaker A
Yuf Risen did not realize the seriousness of the problem. He even thought his plan had succeeded, especially when he thought of Zilli bearing the sin and that he had lost another piece. He even began to feel a little guilt. However, unfortunately,
Speaker A
Xiaoin shattered his fantasy with a single sentence. Zilli can't be found. It seems he has probably run away and the village is now finished. All the villagers have fled. Now only our four ninja clans remain and the village is
Speaker A
completely surrounded and blocked by the Exai and my ninja army. Do you have any trunk cards in your hand? If you do, take them out quickly. Otherwise, we are all dead. H accompanied by Xiaos words, "You Fe Risen was instantly
Speaker A
dumbfounded." "What? What did you say?" At this moment, his mind went blank, and he couldn't help but go to the window.
Speaker A
And then his heart sank. He saw that all around the Hoying building, it was occupied by ninjas from the four clans.
Speaker A
Even the elderly and children of the clans had come. Further away, there was nothing but dead silence. Everywhere was filled with broken ruins from smashing and looting. Besides that, he couldn't even see a single ordinary civilian.
Speaker A
Why? Why did it come to this? Where is Zilli? Didn't he sacrifice himself for the village? What exactly happened?
Speaker A
Countless questions tangled in his mind and his face began to turn worse and worse. Zilli. He suddenly thought of the conversation he had with Zilli before he fell unconscious. The savior. Damn it.
Speaker A
Did that bastard think that finding the savior was more important than saving the village? Thinking of this, he suddenly began to regret. If he had known that finding the savior weighed so heavily on Zilli, he shouldn't have staged the fainting act earlier. But
Speaker A
there was no way. Who could have thought that that bastard Zilli would be so stubbornly devoted to Meamu Mountain?
Speaker A
What to do? Did he still have any trump cards? No. Of course, he had thought of the impure world reincarnation technique. But the problem was that the technique was incomplete. In the past, Chinsho Fjin had not truly perfected it.
Speaker A
Even if he actually summoned the first and second Hokag through impure world reincarnation, they would have no power to resist the Exai Mai. Could he rely on the two Hokag to plead for mercy and ask Gangho to let them off? But the problem
Speaker A
was although Gangho is also a high-ranking official in the X and Mai unless Yuzbo Gene nods this matter is completely meaningless. Just as he was thinking suddenly a snake slithered in through the door crack with a bang Dashuan appeared before them. Dashuan
Speaker A
with his appearance everyone present was shocked. In response Dashuan revealed a sinister smile full of contempt for everyone present. Finally he looked at his teacher Yuan Fe risen gazing at his increasingly aged and stooped figure after a long while he couldn't help but
Speaker A
speak. How ugly it is, teacher. I told you before, you old people are already a burden to the village. You should learn to let go and hand over power to the next generation. Only when the wind flows can the windmill of the village
Speaker A
turn. But unfortunately, you have been blinded by power and have given up so many opportunities. I am very curious.
Speaker A
Do you regret it now? Dashawan's tone was deep. Although he had not systematically studied it, he had still accurately pinpointed the village's fatal weak point. Only when the old generation completely hands over power and allows the new generation to rise
Speaker A
can the social straighta of the village flow normally. But unfortunately these old men were too greedy for power forcing one genius after another to their deaths. And now they seem to have retained power. But in the end the
Speaker A
village is completely ruined. And in response Yuenf Risen looked at his disciple and instantly understood his purpose. Then he directly said to everyone, "You all leave for now. I need to have a private talk with Dashuan." The others of course were unwilling.
Speaker A
Asama even stepped in front of Yu and Fe Rizen dashawanu. Asama get out. Before Asama could finish his words, Yuan Fe Rizen interrupted him. Father you. A sama was stunned. Yu and Fe risen. Trust me. Get out. On the other side and Shuom
Speaker A
Yin instantly understood the situation. Dashuan most likely was not an enemy. Thinking of this, a glimmer of hope surged in their hearts and they directly took a sama and the others and left.
Speaker A
Shortly after, the Hokag's office became quiet again. That night, no one knew what Saratobi Husen and Orochimaru had discussed. In any case, that very night, Orochimaru excavated the graves of many powerful warriors, while Saratobi Herusen selected many Jonan from the
Speaker A
four great clans who would voluntarily sacrifice themselves. There was no choice. Now that there were no other Shinobi clans or civilian classes, they could only sacrifice their own ninjas.
Speaker A
Within the four great clans, a sense of panic immediately spread. Even they began to feel a subtle resentment toward Haruen and the other high-ranking officials. But unfortunately, they had no power to resist. In the end, they all became the necessary materials for the
Speaker A
Edetoensei. Clan leader, I don't want to die. I'm only 17, a prodigy of the clan.
Speaker A
Why was I chosen? Please spare me. I beg you. The selected children had all their chakra sealed. But they still kept begging for mercy with their mouths.
Speaker A
There was no way. They were not fools. Even if they didn't yet know what they were chosen for the presence of Orochimaru, that sinister rogue ninja was enough to prove that what awaited them was nothing good. Orochimaru stood
Speaker A
still his face filled with mockery and disdain. Behind him stood Saratobi Harisen Yudatain Kohharu and Midokado Hamira who looked at the clan prodigies before them with deep concern and regret. These were the most talented members of their clans. Utain Koharu and
Speaker A
Midokado Hamira remained silent. After a long deliberation, Saratobi Husen couldn't help but ask, Orochimaru, do we have to use them? There's no choice, master. You should know that. Orochimaru licked his lips. His tone relaxed. The quality of the sacrifices determines how
Speaker A
much of their original strength the resurrected warriors can unleash. If we used ordinary sacrifices, let alone dealing with the Aiha strong ones even ordinary ninjas could easily defeat and seal them. Of course, if you regret it, Master Saratobi, we can just call off
Speaker A
the deal. Indeed, although Orochimaru was willing to help his master, he would not engage in a losing business. This time he was indeed willing to help Sartobi Hirusen block the strong forces of New Konoha. But in return, Harusen
Speaker A
had to pay an enormous price. That was these sacrifices. You see, for the resurrected warriors to exert their full strength, the quality of the sacrifices was crucial. Unlike the later era when Kabutoo could simply have black zetsu hand over a bunch of white zetsu, the
Speaker A
rogue ninja Orochimaru now found it no easy task to find suitable sacrifices. And now the four clans led by Saratobi handed over all their prodigies and strong members which saved Orochimaru a lot of trouble. As long as he helped old
Speaker A
Kenoha withstand the attack of new Kenoha this time then the batch of resurrected warriors would become his private assets. That was the deal between the two. While helping his master, he also added a trump card for himself. Similarly, he was also very
Speaker A
curious about that Aiha gene. A once ordinary ninja had not only risen and developed rapidly himself but also managed to unite the Aiha in such a short time and even recruited so many clans finally establishing new kinoa. So
Speaker A
just in time Pain of the Akitsuki had issued this mission and he took the opportunity to learn about the Aiha situation. I understand Saratobi Haruen was unaware of Orochimaru's thoughts.
Speaker A
After confirming that this matter could not be changed, he could only sigh and turned to look at those clan prodigies who were now sacrifices. After a long pause, he spoke slowly. I'm sorry, children. Although I know you are
Speaker A
innocent, and we old men don't want to sacrifice you either. We have reached a point of life and death. But what I want to say is that your sacrifice is meaningful. I can guarantee that your families will be taken care of better.
Speaker A
Finally, after saying that, he sighed and turned to Orochimaru. All right, let's begin. Good. Orochimaru nodded.
Speaker A
After preparing the Edetoensei ritual, he immediately formed hand seals. Tiger, snake, dog, dragon, Edotensei. As Orochimaru completed the final seal, a large amount of dust began to cover the sacrifices, slowly transforming into various former Kohaa strong warriors.
Speaker A
Now they had their eyes closed with large cracks on their faces. Seeing this, Orochimaru was slightly puzzled because the Edotensei of the fourth Hokag Name's menato had failed. However, considering that the Edetoensei of the others all succeeded, he was in a fairly
Speaker A
good mood. He turned to Saratobi Herusen and said, "Master, would you like to communicate with the two Hokag? No need.
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen shook his head as if he had brought the village to such a state.
Speaker A
How could he face those two Hokag? If they learned of his actions over the years, they would most likely kill him the third Hokag first. So, it was better to wait until the actual battle began before restoring their consciousness.
Speaker A
Thinking this, he couldn't help but look at Orochimaru. Can you erase the consciousness of the two Kag and control them yourself to fight? Obviously, even when battle truly began, he didn't want the two former Hokag to regain their
Speaker A
consciousness. And to this, Orochimaru shook his head and said directly, "I'm sorry, master. Although I can erase their intelligence and control the two Kagaya to fight the strength they can exert is limited. To fight against New Konoha, it would be almost impossible. I
Speaker A
suggest that you think carefully tonight, master. When the two former Hokag see that all the major clans and evensunade have defected to the Aiha, how will you explain this to them?" After saying that, he immediately formed a hand seal and a large batch of coffins
Speaker A
rose. The resurrected warriors entered them and as the coffin lids closed, the batch of coffins instantly sank into another dimension. Saratobi Husen looked grim. He kept taking big puffs of his pipe trying to find an excuse. But damn
Speaker A
it, all the major clans had abandoned Kohaa and even Sinade of the Synu clan had chosen to join the Aihas camp. There was simply no way to explain this.
Speaker A
Thinking of this, Saratobi Herusen was nearly scratching his scalp off. However, compared to the troubled Husen, Utitain Koharuru and Midito Hamira were a bit better off. There was no choice.
Speaker A
With Saratobi Huen bearing the brunt, the two didn't need to worry about such things. All right, master. The preliminary preparations are done. Now we just wait for the battle to begin. I really look forward to it. A sinister
Speaker A
smile filled Orochimarus face. Then, without acknowledging Saratobi, Herusen, and the others, he left the basement on his own. The next morning at the break of dawn, under Achihas attentive service, Achiha Jeene, who had just risen from bed, stretched lazily,
Speaker A
feeling refreshed and invigorated. After he finished washing up, Achiha had also prepared breakfast. Looking quite at ease, Aiha finished his meal quickly and then headed to the Hokage's office.
Speaker A
Fugaku Kakashiunade Rokichi. The entire core high-ranking members of the new Kinoa had already arrived at the Hokag's office. Lord Hokagm, have a seat. Aiha casually waved his hand. Only after he settled behind his desk did the others except Sununade take their seats on the
Speaker A
reception sofa. As for Sununade, as Aiha Jins secretary, she naturally had her own place in this office. Rokichi, you go first. Aiha picked up his teacup, his tone, relaxed and casual. How is the screening of the old Kohaa civilians
Speaker A
progressing now? Lord Hokag, it's 3/4 done. Nar Rokichi spoke with reverence. The civilian shinobi and their families have been screened and the screening for regular civilians will be finished within the hour. As for the rest, they are either local thugs, those who joined
Speaker A
old Kenoha only a few years ago, those from the orphanage, or the current children and staff of the orphanage.
Speaker A
This part is the most difficult to screen. Needless to say, the thugs are a problem, but among the civilians who haven't been around long, the probability of them being spies is extremely high. As for the orphanage itself, it was Root's very own breeding
Speaker A
ground. This is also the hardest part of the screening, but I can guarantee it will be concluded this afternoon.
Speaker A
However, even for those who pass the screening and are allowed into the new Kohaa, I suggest we have the U and the police force monitor them for a period of time. Nar Rokichi's workability, strategic mind, and wisdom far surpassed
Speaker A
even those of Shikaku. Despite the urgency of the matter, he handled everything with remarkable order and efficiency. This was a fact acknowledged within the Nar clan. Upon hearing this, Aiha nodded in agreement. All right, do as you suggest. Fagaku and Kakashi make
Speaker A
sure the police force and U cooperate. Next, sununade. Regarding the siege of old Konoha, how is a Kimchi Torifu's progress?
Speaker A
Furoughed slightly upon hearing this. Her expression turned somewhat grim, but she let out a sigh before speaking. The siege on Old Kohaa is going smoothly.
Speaker A
Last night, the Saratobi and Midocado clans attempted to break out, but they were ultimately pushed back by a Kimichi Torfu. However, our intelligence operatives have brought back some troubling news. Orochimaru has returned.
Speaker A
Furthermore, last night the four great ninja clans conducted large-scale gravedigging operations in the various cemeteries of old Kenoha. I have a bad feeling about this. I'm afraid that Orochimaruade's face grew colder and colder. Clearly, as the last surviving member of the Senu
Speaker A
clan and the granddaughter of Hasharama and Tobaramaju, she had certainly seen the forbidden scroll. Perhaps the intelligence operatives didn't know what Herusen Saratobi and Orochimaru were up to, but how could she not guess? But the problem was she truly didn't know how to
Speaker A
voice it. Part of her wished she could see her former relatives again, but a greater part felt fear and sorrow because she would likely become enemies with them. On the other side, hearing Sununade's report, a flicker of surprise
Speaker A
passed through Achihajin's eyes. Orochimaru, he truly hadn't expected that guy to return and to resort to large-scale grave digging at that.
Speaker A
Looking at Sununade's conflicted face, he set down his teacup and spoke slowly. It seems the remnants of old Kinoa like Saratobi Herusen have chosen the impure world reincarnation as their final means of resistance. And with a researcher like Orochimaru involved, it's highly
Speaker A
likely that this jutzu has been perfected and improved. Impure world reincarnation. Upon hearing the name of this jutzu, almost everyone present wore a look of utter confusion. Yes, perhaps this jutzu was frequently mentioned among the trans migrators, but the
Speaker A
natives of the shinobi world knew nothing about it. However, the fact that old Kohaa had faith in it to resist the new Kohaa and the gravedigging that happened last night. Frankly, it was a bit creepy. However, was stunned. Gene,
Speaker A
you know of it. Of course, I do. Hachiha Jeene nodded. Your second grandfather was indeed a genius. Using the genetic information of the dead as an anchor, he altered the summoning jutzu's link to the pure land, then used a sacrificial
Speaker A
vessel to bring the dead back to the world of the living. So, it seems we're about to face an army of the dead. A collective sharp intake of breath echoed through the room as Aiha Jeene spoke and then came the anger. They were shocked
Speaker A
by the terror and malevolence of the impure world reincarnation, but were even more enraged by the gravebing actions of Saratobi and the other three clans. Damn it, there was no need to even think. The bastards were definitely digging up the graves of the powerful
Speaker A
Shinobi from the various clans. For a moment, the entire room fell into a dead silence. No one knew how to react to such a situation, and evens eyes had turned icy cold. Seeing this Achihajene couldn't help but let out a chuckle. All
Speaker A
right, everyone, don't panic. The impure world reincarnation isn't without its weaknesses. I, after all, they are just a bunch of undead. Ceiling jutzu is a great point to exploit. Since we still have some time before the real battle
Speaker A
begins, you and the barrier squad should get to work. Design a ceiling jutzu capable of containing the impure world reincarnation as quickly as possible.
Speaker A
Also make as many ceiling scrolls as you can. Give them to our stronger fighters.
Speaker A
Even if they don't know ceiling jutzu, they can find an opportunity to use them on the impure world reincarnated fighters. As for the strongest the first and second Hokag, I will handle them myself. However, for the Impure World
Speaker A
Reincarnated souls to unleash their full living combat power, the quality of the sacrificial vessels needs to be exceptionally high. And as everyone is well aware of the current state of old Kohaa for sacrificial vessels, they can only use the strong warriors from their
Speaker A
own clans. Among the four great ninja clans like Saratobi, they may have a vast number of shinobi, but they have very few truly powerful ones. Now that the impure world reincarnation has drained another batch, those four clans are practically just a flock of sheep.
Speaker A
So when the real battle begins, once we confirm the number of their impure world reincarnated fighters and have assigned our opponents, the rest of you must move quickly to capture the members of the four ninja clans. Capture one, imprison
Speaker A
one. Use our villages numerical advantage. Even if we can't seal those impure world reincarnated fighters, as long as we capture the clan members of Saratobi and the other three clans, they will become our hostages. Do you all understand what I mean? Aiha Gene is
Speaker A
tone Kong as a trans migrator since he had chosen the path of conquest would he not consider how to deal with the trump cards in Canoa's hands. The impure world reincarnation technique was so famous in the original story over the past 2
Speaker A
years. He had been thinking about how to counter it. To be honest, he was very satisfied with the current situation because the timing he had chosen was excellent. The major ninja villages just having ended the third great ninja war
Speaker A
had no energy to influence Kenoha. The Akisatsuki organization was still in its dormant period and Aido for unknown reasons had not come to cause trouble.
Speaker A
Yes. In fact, during these two years, what he worried about most was this wise fool. Because to ensure the progress of the Moon I plan Aido needed to continuously weaken the strength of the major ninja villages. Under normal
Speaker A
circumstances, he would certainly target the Achiha first since the Aiha clan was too unstable. The Achiha only grow stronger through battle. If 10 Aiha without awakened Shainggon were thrown onto the battlefield, perhaps five would die instantly, but the remaining five
Speaker A
would almost certainly awaken their Shaing. Once they awaken, they become elites. Furthermore, the more you push the Achiha to the brink, the greater the chance of them awakening the Maneko Sharing. Unless, as in the original story, a traitor like Itachi emerged
Speaker A
from within a clan like the Aiha would be very difficult to exterminate. So logically, seeing the Aiha so prosperous, Aido should be anxious and angry. Whether he came personally to cause trouble within the Aiha or controlled the mist to declare war on
Speaker A
the land of fire, to be honest, Aiha gene could understand it all. He had even prepared for the worst. But damn it, after waiting a full 2 years, Aido had taken no action at all, as if he had
Speaker A
forgotten about Kenoa. This was very strange. After all, in the original story, Aido had always been watching Kenoa. Why was he not watching now? This made all of Achiha Jyn's preparations go down the drain. Of course, this was also
Speaker A
a good thing. Although Aiha was not sure of the reason, he was happy to maintain the status quo and develop slowly. This plan is not bad. As long as my lord Hokag can hold off the strongest first and second Hokag. Then even if Saratobi
Speaker A
Herusen schemes his heart out, our chances of winning will be enormous. We don't even need to seal those impure world reincarnation warriors, it's enough to stall them for a while. Use this time to capture the ninja of the
Speaker A
four great clans. As long as we capture enough Saratobi Herusen, we'll likely have no choice but to surrender. Nar Louui's eyes lit up. Achihajins plan was actually not complicated. If he wanted, he could easily think of it too.
Speaker A
But the problem was that he lacked Achihaja Jyn's strength. So naturally, he could not devise such a scheme.
Speaker A
However, after a sigh of admiration, he could not help but speak. But my lord Hokag, the core of this plan actually lies with you. Can you really hold off the first Hokag and Madara Aiha? As for the second Hokag, Tobarama, and even
Speaker A
Sukumo Hitaki, although they are powerful, we can find ways to restrain them. Only the first Hokage, Hasharamaju, and Madara Aiha are too powerful. I have read the clan's records before, and honestly, if I had not seen your sisu, my lord Hokag, I would have
Speaker A
thought those were myths. Yes, although Naralui had never met Hashiamarama or Madaraa, he was not as busy as Narikaku in the past. So, he would spend his idol time reading the clan's historical records. Regarding the records of Hashiama and Madara, his first thought
Speaker A
was disbelief because those were not ninja. They were more like the work of gods. But he also knew that the clan's elders would not record things recklessly. So he had remained skeptical of these records until two years ago
Speaker A
when he saw Aiha Jyn Su. Only then did he reluctantly believe the clan's records. But at the same time he now worried even more could Aiha truly withstand the impure world reincarnated Hashiama and Madara. As Louis spoke, the
Speaker A
others also turned to look at Achihajene, especially Sonade. Although she was young back then and had never seen her grand uncle fight at full strength, she had seen Hashiamarama clap his hands together and then Kinoa gained a forest of death. Could Aiha really
Speaker A
hold them off? In response, facing everyone's doubts, Aiha could not help but smile. Louie, don't worry. First, as for Madara Aiha, Saratobi, Herusen, and Orochimaru cannot summon him via impure world reincarnation. Second, I have awakened the eternal Mangeko Sharing.
Speaker A
Perhaps I cannot defeat a living hasharamaju. But an impure world reincarnated one is nothing to me. Yes, if it were a living hasharamaju, perhaps if the white zetsu were used as a sacrifice in the later stage, he might
Speaker A
truly not be able to defeat him because of the sage arts. Sage art would style true several thousand hands cannon Buddha. In the past, even Madara with the ninetailes armored in susenu could not win. So now someone with only the
Speaker A
eternal maneko sharing naturally could not defeat a peak hasharama. But unfortunately at this stage Orochimaru's impure world reincarnation was not fully perfected and he could not obtain the highest quality sacrifices. Want to summon a peak hasharamaju? Absolutely impossible. As Achihajene spoke with
Speaker A
such dominance, everyone present including sununade herself did not understand impure world reincarnation. Well, so in the end they could only nod because apart from trusting Aiha, they had no other choice. I understand. Narui said it once. I will complete the
Speaker A
screening as soon as possible and push them to petition collectively begging my lord Hokag to give them justice. As for the sealing techniques, I can only say I'll do my best. With a headache, could not help but say, "If the impure world
Speaker A
bodies do not resist, I am confident I can seal everyone, including my two grandfathers. But we don't know how many strong enemies they have reincarnated.
Speaker A
If we mass-produce sealing scrolls, we will not have nearly enough manpower. Even if we produce that many scrolls, it would be hard to find people who can use them. After all, to seal someone as strong as my grandfather's ordinary
Speaker A
ceiling scrolls are useless. We would need at least large ceiling scrolls. To this, Achiha remained calm. Having silently pondered for 2 years, he naturally already had a set of counter measures. Looking at sununade before him, he shook his head and said,
Speaker A
"Sunady, you're overthinking it." Orochimaru can reincarnate only a limited number of strong people. First, he cannot summon Madara. Aiha Manado Name is currently in the belly of the death god. So, Orochimaru cannot summon him either. So the strongest he can
Speaker A
reincarnate are at most or two grandfathers and sukumo Hitaki three people. So preparing five large ceiling scrolls will be enough. For other ordinary strong people, regular ceiling scrolls will suffice. I don't think Orochimaru would dare to reincarnate the
Speaker A
Kaga of other villages or he would have to prepare for war with the other four great ninja villages. Aihajin was quite certain. In the original story, Kabutoo Yakushi dared to recklessly reanimate the powerful figures from several major ninja villages because he and Aidito had
Speaker A
already prepared to initiate the fourth great ninja war. But now, would Orochimaru be willing to defy the other four major ninja villages just for Huen Saratobi? Nonsense. Even if Orochimaru were willing, Huen Saratobi wouldn't dare to allow it, would he? Otherwise,
Speaker A
those four ninja clans wouldn't just be unable to survive in the land of fire.
Speaker A
the entire ninja world would issue a kill order against them. Therefore, in his view, preparing five large scrolls was sufficient. After all, the powerful adversaries they would likely face were only Hashiama, Tobarama, and Sukumo Hataki. As for Mido, Uzuzumaki and
Speaker A
Kusha, they were merely members of the Usuzamaki clan. When reanimated, they wouldn't have the nine tales as a deadly weapon within them. I see. Then I have no further issues. I guarantee the task will be completed within 3 days.
Speaker A
Breathed a sigh of relief and then agreed. She was also a master of ceiling techniques. Five large ceiling scrolls were nothing to her. Finally, after everything was settled, Aiha turned to Kakashi. Kakashi, never mind. I don't even want to bother with your matters.
Speaker A
Go to the confinement room for 3 days. Kakashi had no objection. After all, what he had done was indeed excessive.
Speaker A
As a ninja, he had disobeyed orders, especially as a commander. If it weren't for the fact that many could replace him in the new Kohaa, he would have caused a major disaster. And this was entirely different from Sukcomo Hitaki's
Speaker A
experience. Thus, 3 days of confinement was already a lenient punishment. Fagaka, what about you? What's the situation with Danzo? After dealing with Kakashi, Aihajin looked at Fagaku. In response, Fagaka's tone was very calm.
Speaker A
Danzo is dead and rude has been eradicated. His would release arm was brought back. Should we remove the sharing gone from it? Aihajene was stunned. Danzo died just like that. For a moment, his gaze was distant. After all, for other trans migrators, Danzo
Speaker A
was at least a minor boss. But now he hadn't even seen Danzo's last face and he was killed directly by Fugaku. At this moment he felt somewhat wistful.
Speaker A
Nevertheless, he shook his head and spoke directly. There's no need to remove the sharing for now. Without it to suppress the arm, it would instantly turn into a large tree. Hashurama cells can replenish Mango power. After we eliminate the old Kohaa Saratobi and
Speaker A
others, we can have study it thoroughly. If we can weaken the main line cells, you and Shers Suway might not achieve eternal mango, but at least you won't have to worry about exhausting Mangeko's ocular power in the future. Aihajene was
Speaker A
quite straightforward. Even though this matter involved Hasharama's cells, he had no intention of hiding anything. He felt the same way even when facing sununade. In truth, conducting research wasn't terrifying. What was terrifying was secret research. As long as
Speaker A
everything was placed in the open and supervised by everyone, it was acceptable. Thinking this, he added directly. First, I declare that the new Kohó will not engage in shady dealings.
Speaker A
I don't need a so-called route to bear the so-called darkness for me. Even research work will be conducted openly and supervised by everyone, including the villagers. Upon hearing this, everyone felt a slight relief. While that was good, they were truly afraid
Speaker A
that Aihaene would also adopt that approach. They had been genuinely traumatized by Herusen Saratobi's methods. Although the idea of conducting research made them uneasy since it was open to supervision and involved restoring Mangeko ocular power, they could agree to it. After all, if the
Speaker A
problem of Mangeko blindness could be resolved, the village's combat power would instantly surge significantly.
Speaker A
Who had also breathed the sigh of relief couldn't help but ask, "Can my grandfather cells restore the ocular power consumed by the mano?" That statement is not entirely accurate. Aiha shook his head. More precisely, it's the extreme yong release and life force
Speaker A
within Hasharama cells. The Aiha and Senzu are actually related. That's the real reason why Danzos hasharama cell arm needed the sharing to stabilize. This is recorded on the Achiha stone tablet. His words left everyone present stunned. The Senju and
Speaker A
Achiha were relatives. Couldn't help but ask, "Jan, are you joking? Gene, that can't be right." Fugaku also quickly spoke up. I have also viewed it with my man Gekko. What the sharing can see is a god divided in and yang for stability.
Speaker A
The interaction of opposing forces yields all things. What the mango can see is he who merges the power of aha and senu can open the renean and gain the power of all things. Infinite sukuyami is the only path to save the
Speaker A
achiha. But the first line sounds more like a myth and what the mangeko shows doesn't prove the two clans are related.
Speaker A
As for the so-called infinite sukuy, I don't know what it refers to. With Fagaku's words, everyone became interested. They all looked at Achiha Jeene, clearly eager to hear this gossip. In response, Aiha smiled and spoke. Fagaku, what you saw is
Speaker A
incomplete. The stone tablet has been altered. There's no need for you to dwell on the specifics. Sometimes knowing too much isn't good. When the time comes, I will naturally tell you what you need to know. What I can say is
Speaker A
that the Aihai ancestor is Indra and the Sinju ancestor is Ashur. They were true brothers. Their father is Atitsuki Haguro. His other name might be more familiar to you all, the sage of six paths. He was also the founder of the
Speaker A
Ninshu sect. However, when choosing a successor, the sage's test was solved by Indra through force, while Ashura chose to communicate and cooperate with the villagers. The sage of six paths chose Ashur, which led to Indra's dissatisfaction, and the two brothers
Speaker A
began a lifelong battle. This is also the reason for the thousand-year blood feud between the Sinju and Achiha. It's just that the descendants of the two brothers, due to years of conflict, had long forgotten that the two clans were
Speaker A
actually relatives. For a moment, everyone present fell into silence. Clearly, they had never imagined that in the distant past, the Aiha and Sinju shared such a history. While everyone was stunned, Aiha Gene stood up. All right, no need to dwell on it. It's been
Speaker A
such a long time. Just treat it as an interesting story. Today's work is done.
Speaker A
Keep up the effort, everyone. I'll head back now. 3 days later, the population of New Konoha had increased by roughly 90,000 and a vast expanse of new buildings had risen from the ground. A feat made possible thanks to Kakashi. It
Speaker A
was through his personal efforts that Yamo chose to join new Kinoa. Clearly, Yamo trusted Kakashi, his comrade, from the U days deeply. And by utilizing the woodrelease multi-layered house technique and a massive supply of military ration pills, he managed to
Speaker A
erect an entire district within three days, simultaneously amassing a considerable fortune in merit points and money, surpassing even Kakashi, who had been a member of New Konoha for 2 years and served as the Yamu commander. It must be said real estate was truly
Speaker A
lucrative. Of course, the local thugs of old Kohaa along with the informants secretly backed by Danzo, who had also served as his primary weapon for stirring public opinion, were largely filtered out by New Kenoha this time.
Speaker A
And ultimately, Kakashi's umbu decapitated them all in the shadows. Furthermore, taking advantage of this opportunity, spies of various sizes from other hidden villages were nearly wiped out. Yamato, how do you find it here in New Konoha? At the street corner by the
Speaker A
alley, Kakashi leaned against the wall watching Yamato who had just pressed his palms together and conjured a new house.
Speaker A
A faint smile crossing his face. And upon hearing this, Yamato turned. When he saw it was Kakashi, a warm smile appeared on his face. Kakashi, is your confinement over? You just finished.
Speaker A
Kakashi shrugged. At that moment, he looked somewhat fatigued. After all, confinement was a damnable thing, even for a veteran ninja like him. That's great. Yam was delighted. Kakashi patted him on the shoulder. Come on, let's talk. Yamato did not refuse. They went
Speaker A
straight to a tea house where Yamo finally voiced his thoughts. New Konoha, how should I put it? Maybe because I haven't been here long, I don't quite understand many things yet, so I can't really say whether it's good or bad. But
Speaker A
one thing that struck me deeply is order. New Konoha rarely preaches the will of fire, nor does it gloss over things like the old Kenoha did. What can be done and what cannot. Everything has become clear law. To put it simply, take
Speaker A
acquiring a jutzu for example. In new Kohaa, you know exactly how many merit points you need and what rank you must achieve to obtain a certain technique.
Speaker A
Everything is clear and transparent. You just work toward that goal. Old Konoha was different. Getting a new jutzu relied more on luck. Either finding a reliable Jonan instructor or making a contribution to the village and hoping the higher-ups would allow you to
Speaker A
exchange for it on a whim. Under such vague circumstances, people didn't even know how to strive. So, to get a jutzu, you had to resort to scheming and currying favor with your superiors. From that perspective, I prefer New Kohaa.
Speaker A
Everything is so orderly and people don't have to play mind games. At this point, Yamo's face was full of emotion.
Speaker A
However, he did genuinely hold a favorable impression of New Kenoha. Many things that he had once taken for granted only now made him realize how old Kohaa had truly treated Ninja as tools, not people. Take the jutzu exchange system for example. He used to
Speaker A
think old Kenoha was fine. But after comparing it with new Kohaa, he saw how terrible the old system really was. And upon hearing this, Kakashi nodded and said, "Our Hokage once said, "The law is the lowest baseline of morality. For
Speaker A
ninja willing to sacrifice for the village, the village will honor them with glory, money, support for their families and descendants and spread their achievements throughout the village. But if you are unwilling to sacrifice, the village will not morally
Speaker A
blackmail you. As long as you abide by the minimum standard of morality, that is the law, you can live a peaceful and normal life in the village. The Hokage says that everyone is first a human and only second a ninja. Being a ninja is
Speaker A
just a job. So he doesn't treat ninja as tools. That's the real reason I'm willing to work for the Hokag and join new kinoa. Kakashi's tone was serious.
Speaker A
Yes, at first he had joined the Aiha faction simply to protect my guy. Now it was different. He truly acknowledged Aiha gene and was genuinely willing to fight for him and for New Konoha.
Speaker A
Sometimes he thought if his father had lived in New Konoha, perhaps that tragedy would never have happened. Yes, when the word moral blackmail came up, he couldn't help but think of his father. Wasn't his father Sukcomo Hataki driven to death by moral blackmail back
Speaker A
then? And upon hearing this, Yamato nodded his heart, also full of agreement. But just then, the two noticed chaos outside. When they stepped out, they saw countless villagers from Old Kohaa heading toward the Hokag building. They were still holding up all
Speaker A
kinds of signs denouncing the failures of old Kohaa and the atrocities of Husen Saratobi and others demanding that Aiha hold a public trial for them. At that moment, an U appeared. Kakashi sama the hokag request your presence. All right,
Speaker A
understood. Kakashi nodded. Then after the Yu left, he turned to Yamo. I have to go to work. Well talk later. M okay. Yamo nodded in response. I'll go build houses, too. Yes. Compared to the bloodshed of the Yu, he preferred using
Speaker A
wood release to build houses. Kakashi watched Yamo walk away, then used the body flicker technique to head toward the Hokag building. Shortly after, when he pushed open the door of the Hokag's office and saw the people inside, he was
Speaker A
stunned. because of Naruto Uzumaki. Besides GeneSunade, Fagaku and Shikichi, the one who drew his attention most was that small figure. Kakashi bowed, "Hokage sama." Mm. Have a seat. Aihajene nodded. After Kakashi took his place, Aiha said to Naro Uzamaki, "This Kakashi
Speaker A
is a disciple of your father. Because of her Saratobi's prohibition, he couldn't show up to help you before.
Speaker A
From now on, you'll live with him. I believe he will take good care of you." Patting Naro Uzumaki on the shoulder, he pushed him toward Kakashi. Narudo Usuzumaki was a little bewildered, his father's disciple. Thanks to the Aiha
Speaker A
founding new Kinoa, he had long known that his father was the fourth Hokag. Moreover, back in old Konoha Jeriah had apparently been his father's teacher, and now a disciple of his father had suddenly appeared. This left him at a
Speaker A
loss. There was no helping it. At this age, Narudo Uzumaki was still far too young. Meanwhile, on the other side, watching Uzumaki Narudo walking over in a day's Kakashi's eyes were filled with complex emotions. his teacher's child.
Speaker A
He felt he had failed his teacher. Narudo, don't worry. I am indeed your father's disciple. From now on, I will take good care of you. Kakashi spoke softly. He could feel Naruto's fear and trepidation. So, he directly pulled
Speaker A
Narudo into his embrace. At this moment, Naruto's mind was in utter chaos. Yes, his current behavior was completely different from that in the original story. After all, in the original story, Narudo did not know his parents identity. Although he kept saying, "I am
Speaker A
not a demon fox." In reality, he acknowledged his identity as the demon fox. Therefore, to gain others attention, lacking familial bonds and friendship, he naturally caused all sorts of trouble just to attract notice.
Speaker A
But now it was different. Having learned his true identity at an early age, even with Azjura's chakra within him, he still felt deep confusion and suffocation. His parents had sacrificed themselves for the village, and his father was the Hokag. Why did he become
Speaker A
the so-called demon fox? Moreover, although Jeriah, his father's teacher, had taken good care of him over the past two years, he had never truly given him a proper title. So, when the Aiha first caused trouble, Narudo did have a
Speaker A
slightly better time. But what happened later? Shortly after the Aiha's departure, rumors of the demon fox surged back like a flood. At first, Jeriah had promised to explain his identity to the entire village in his capacity as Hokag, but later it was left
Speaker A
unresolved. Young Usuzamaki Narudo had asked, but Jeriah only said that the village was in a difficult time and it was not the moment to give him a title.
Speaker A
He told him to wait. Moreover, Jeriah was often busy with work and rarely chatted with him. So essentially, he was not very close to Jeriah. This was also why even after being brought to the New Leaf Village, his expression remained
Speaker A
largely unchanged. Because he was too young, unlike in the original story, he did not understand what the village represented. Kakashi later take Narudo to bathe, get a haircut at the barber, tidy up his facial whiskers, and buy some new clothes. That fool Jeriah can't
Speaker A
even take care of his own disciple's child. What does he think about everyday? Aiha Jeene muttered a couple of complaints. Then he said to Narudo, "Kakashi is your father's disciple, and Sununade here is a relative on your mother's side. In the future, if you
Speaker A
need anything, just go to them. Why not entrust him to me?" Son was displeased.
Speaker A
Why give him to Kakashi? Aihajene rolled his eyes at that. Your own daily life relies on Shisuno's help. Can you take care of Narudo? You felt stifled then sighed. All right. She really couldn't take care of Narudo. Even if
Speaker A
she took him home, it would only add to Shisuno's burden. After all, Shisuno was now the hospital director and she still had to take care ofsunade's daily needs when she returned home. So, it seems she truly lacked the capacity to look after
Speaker A
Narudo. On the contrary, although Kakashi was a man, he was not a slob. So, from this perspective, Kakashi was the right person to take care of Naruto.
Speaker A
Narudo remained bewildered. Clearly being too young at this point, he still did not understand the situation. How did another relative suddenly appear? As for the confused Narud Aiha did not bother to explain too much since he was too young to understand anyway. Gene,
Speaker A
what about Naruto's identity? Can we issue a public announcement directly? Tsunady asked her tone very serious.
Speaker A
Upon hearing this, Naruto's eyes suddenly lit up. Clearly, he could understand that. Aihajene directly said, "Of course, go ahead and announce it.
Speaker A
include Naruto's identity as the son of the fourth hokag are villages ninetailes genturiki and why manado namic did this decrypt everything I am not like kusen saratobi I aihajin fear no challenges and have no need for those underhanded
Speaker A
tricks his words were resounding hearing this everyone present was deeply moved governance was completely different from her Saratobsis perhaps because he was powerful enough he had no need for Saratobi scheming but it had to be admitted Aihajin was really damn cool
Speaker A
Even Sunsunade's gaze toward Aiha began to turn complex as she vaguely saw the style of her grand uncle in him. "All right, let's talk business." Aihajene looked directly at Sununade. "Are the ceiling scrolls ready?" "Yes, ready," Sununade said with pride. Seven large
Speaker A
ceiling scrolls, 200 ordinary ceiling scrolls. Hearing this, a faint smile finally appeared on Aiha Jins face.
Speaker A
"Good, that's enough. Send a message to Herusen Seratobi demanding unconditional surrender before tonight in acceptance of the most impartial trial of the entire leaf village. Otherwise, don't say we didn't warn you, Ajihajene said with a doineering look. Hearing this,
Speaker A
everyone's tone instantly turned serious. Then, as the meeting concluded, Narashikaku began drafting a document and sent someone to deliver the ultimatum to the Old Leaf Village directly. Jinade first issued a public statement officially restoring Uzumaki Naruto's identity and strictly forbade
Speaker A
anyone from discriminating against the hero's son. Anyone found doing so would be sentenced to prison. Then she went directly to the ceiling squad and discussed specific tactics with the ceiling ninjas as well as the distribution of ceiling scrolls during
Speaker A
the battle. Fugaku handed over the work of the police department to his subordinates and began to gather the Aiha clan members to prepare for war.
Speaker A
Yes, for this kind of combat work, the Achiha were the main force. As for Kakashi, his ambu didn't need much preparation. So after entrusting the final preparations to Sherui, he directly took Usuzamaki Narudo and left looking at the somewhat gloomy Narudo
Speaker A
Kakashi side and couldn't help feeling a bit of heartache. But in the end, he still first took Narudo to the newly opened Icharaku Ramen to eat, then to bathe by new clothes, change his hairstyle, and so on. It must be said
Speaker A
when Narudo left the barber shop again, Kakashi was momentarily stunned. There was no help for it. In the past, Narudo had no one to take care of him, wearing a dull yellow outfit and often looking dirty. Unless someone knew his identity.
Speaker A
They wouldn't connect him with Manado Namicase. But now, after bathing, changing into a new black and white outfit, trimming his facial whiskers, and styling his hair, he was a spitting image of a mini manado namicase.
Speaker A
Teacher, Kakashi murmured. On the street, Kakashi walked with Usuzamaki Narudo, but now Narudo could feel that the overwhelming malice he had once sensed in the village was absent.
Speaker A
Occasionally, he might encounter one or two individuals carrying hostility, but they no longer dared to curse him as before. In fact, upon seeing Kakashi, they would display a flicker of fear and swiftly vanish from their sight.
Speaker A
Usuzumaki Naro looked puzzled. Glancing at Kakashi beside him, he couldn't help but ask, "Uncle Kakashi, all those who bore me ill will have fled in haste." They are afraid, terrified. Kakashi replied simply, "Because I am a ninja.
Speaker A
The village we are in now is different from the one you lived in before. Here, ninjas hold a high status and authority.
Speaker A
They cannot afford to provoke us, so they hide. Listen, Narudo, the malice you suffered in the past is over. From now on, no one will dare to show you hostility. All you need to do is grow up happily. I believe that is what your
Speaker A
teacher and his wife would have wished for. I give you my word on this.
Speaker A
Kakashi's face was filled with determination. In the past, he truly lacked the ability. Now, however, it was different. In this new village, he possessed the strength and status to protect his teacher's child. As for Naruto's future, he was not worried.
Speaker A
First, most of the villagers in Numi had joined from other parts of the Ha country over the past 2 years. They did not know Uzumaki Narudo, nor had they been exposed to the Oldm's prejudices.
Speaker A
So, they lacked that mindset. Second, the status of ninjas had risen. Numi was completely different from old Mai.
Speaker A
Ninjas held a very high position, and common villagers had no right to meddle with or discuss ninja affairs. Ninjas were the rulers of the privileged class.
Speaker A
Even villagers who had migrated from Oldm had to accept this reality, no matter how displeased they were. Yes, this was not old Maya. If you were unhappy, you could leave. In fact, over the past two years, Kakashi had
Speaker A
gradually come to understand why Achihajin had chosen to establish new Mai rather than v for power in old Mai.
Speaker A
If he had fought for power in old Mai, even if he ultimately seized control, he would still be trapped by its entrenched systems, making reform extremely difficult. Most people were unwilling to accept change. By stepping back and creating new Mai, it was like painting
Speaker A
on a blank canvas. As the vill's founder, he faced no constraints and no one could resist Aiha Jins will.
Speaker A
Now when villagers from old Msatought to join, all they could do was accept it.
Speaker A
Even if they were dissatisfied, they could not vent their grievances because this was no longer the village they had lived in before. If they could not accept it, they would have to leave. To stay, they had to abide by Aihajins
Speaker A
laws. No one was begging you to stay. Thank you, Uncle Kakashi. At that moment, Uzumaki Narudo finally breathed a sigh of relief. The everpresent tension in his heart eased for he truly felt the goodwill of the new village.
Speaker A
The overwhelming malice from the old village had completely dissipated. It was precisely because of this that he for the first time truly accepted Kakashi. This was exactly what Aihaene had hoped for. He even felt that exposing Naruto's azure chakra could be
Speaker A
quite beneficial. Just like the Uzamaki Narudo in the original story who would give his all for the sake of Mai. But now though, he would strive with everything he had for himself. In the future, as the hokag of this new
Speaker A
village, Usuzamaki Narudo would likewise defend him with all his might. A truly top-notch workhorse if he had remained within the confines of old Mayarudo might have become an enemy, and he would have tried to stir Naruto's discontent with the village. But now, by simply
Speaker A
changing the perspective, Usuzumaki Narudo had become his workhorse. At 3:00 in the afternoon, Kakashi bought a large quantity of items, bedding, toiletries, and various groceries before taking Narudo to his home, a three courtyard mansion. It was even several times
Speaker A
larger than the house he had in Old Mai. However, the courtyard was merely a symbol of status, Kakashi had no interest in hiring servants. At 5:00 in the afternoon, after 2 hours of work, Kakashi cleared a sunlet room beside his
Speaker A
own bedroom. Opening the window, he could feel the golden sunlight streaming in. After working for a while, Kakashi gazed at the view outside, and a sense of langor washed over him. All right, Naro. This will be your room from now
Speaker A
on. Let's make the bed first. Put your new clothes in the wardrobe, and then you can go play as you like. As for me, I need to prepare dinner. We have guests coming tonight," Kakashi said with a smile. And with that, looking at the now
Speaker A
clean and tidy room, the wardrobe full of new clothes, and especially the view of the garden outside through the window while sitting on the bed. Was this his new home? Thinking this, a smile appeared on Usuzumaki Naruto's face.
Speaker A
Clearly at this moment, he felt a flicker of anticipation for his new life. Filled with enthusiasm, Narudo began to organize his new clothes, carefully putting each piece into the wardrobe. Soon after, after finishing, Kakashi led Narudo to the living room.
Speaker A
You can explore the whole house. If you want to read, go to the study. If you're bored, you can watch TV. The small garden outside is also a great place to play. You can have some fun on your own
Speaker A
for a while. I need to start preparing dinner for tonight. After the guests leave, I'll teach you how to refine chakra. Kakashi, who had long since shed his lethargy, naturally had no interest in Jeriah's masterpieces, so he wasn't
Speaker A
worried about Narudo stumbling upon any inappropriate books. After all, his previous behavior was merely a way to distract himself to avoid being idol.
Speaker A
Otherwise, whenever he had free time, he would inevitably recall the pain of the past. Meanwhile, upon hearing this, Usuzamaki Naruto's eyes lit up. Refined Shakra. Uncle Kakashi, are you going to teach me ninjutsu? Kakashi patted Naruto's head and said with a smile,
Speaker A
"Yes, Ninjutsu. By this time next year, you'll be attending the ninja academy. It's time to teach you some basics. All right, go play. I need to get busy." After settling Narudo and briefly, Kakashi went to the kitchen. Left alone
Speaker A
in the living room, Narudo was a bit reserved at first, but soon became lively. After all, he was just a child.
Speaker A
In the past, he was too young still at the age of breastfeeding. So, even if someone harbored hostility toward him, he simply didn't understand. The actual experience of hostility had only been a little over a year. Coupled with the
Speaker A
influence of Azure's chakra and the fact that today in this new village, there was no longer any hostility. He was soon captivated by novelty. The energetic and restless Narudo played in the living room for a while, then ran straight to
Speaker A
the small garden outside to play. Soon, as the sun set and dusk fell, Sunsade and Shizun arrived together, and Kakashi had also prepared the evening meal. Lady Sunsade, Shizun, welcome. Please sit down. Just as he brought the last dish
Speaker A
to the dining room, seeing Sununade and Shizun before him, a faint smile involuntarily appeared on his face.
Speaker A
Sununade sat at the table, looking at Narudo, not far away. Kid, come here. Okay. Naruto's face was full of a silly grin. Seeing Naro Kakashi couldn't help but show a faint smile. Then the four of them ate and chatted the atmosphere
Speaker A
quite harmonious. At this moment, Narudo felt an immense happiness, then couldn't help but ask, "Since you are all my relatives, why didn't you bring me here before?" Obviously, Naro had his own concerns. Previously, in a defensive state, he simply hadn't dared to ask
Speaker A
directly. Now that he had truly relaxed and begun to accept the two relatives before him, he couldn't help but voice his confusion. And to this, Sununade let out a helpless sigh because that guy, Jeriah, is also one of your relatives.
Speaker A
Who would have thought he would be so unreliable? She didn't tell the truth. In fact, was well aware of Achihajin's intentions only by having Narudo suffer discrimination and humiliation in the old Kohaa could he better integrate into the new Kohaa when he came. This was
Speaker A
also why he had established the new Kohaa and had been too lazy to seize power before. However, these things were unnecessary to tell Naro. Letting him grow up happily was enough. that white-haired old man. He was indeed quite nice to me, but he often broke his
Speaker A
promises. He clearly promised to clear my name, but he always made excuses to put it off. He just kept telling me to endure and understand others, and he was always busy off and not coming home.
Speaker A
Narudo began to complain, feeling quite discontent. Obviously, because of Jeriah, his life was better than in the original story, but the improvement was quite limited. After all, he lacked the courage to reclaim the Hokag's authority with Saratobi Haruen and others holding
Speaker A
him back. Usuzamaki Naruto's treatment could not have been much better. That idiot Jeriah, that's just his nature.
Speaker A
So's face was full of disdain, which was also the reason she looked down on Jeriah. He wanted everything, but had no backbone. So over the years, they had only been friends and comrades, but that relationship would never spoil. Kakashi
Speaker A
patted Naruto's head, "From now on, don't think too much. Just live happily." Usuzamaki Naru nodded. Since he was brought to this new village, from the moment he met Kakashi throughout the day, he keenly felt that his life had
Speaker A
changed. There was no longer the overwhelming malice. Instead, he had gained two relatives in his life, which naturally filled him with confidence for the future. By the way, Kakashi, from today, Shizun and I will move in as well. Remember to prepare two rooms for
Speaker A
us so we can all live together and have more fun. Also, there's your marriage issue. Over the past few years, we've arranged so many blind dates for you, and you've rejected all the girls from the major clans. Our Hokag is very
Speaker A
displeased about this. I advise you to find a girlfriend on your own in the next month or two. Otherwise, I'm afraid Gene will personally take matters into his own hands.
Speaker A
Suddenly spoke her tone very serious. Hearing these words, Kakashi stood frozen in place, then felt a headache coming on again. He had no objection to and Shizen moving in. Narudo was still a child and having a lively home was fine.
Speaker A
But whenever the topic of blind dates came up, he felt even more despondent. There was no help for it. Although his attitude toward life had become much more positive over the past 2 years, to be honest, he still had no confidence in
Speaker A
starting a family. Could he really take on the responsibility of a family? Thinking of his father who committed suicide, his deceased teacher teacher's wife, Renabido. His heart still achd and he hesitated to take that step. However, yet he also knew Achihajin's temper.
Speaker A
This Okage of theirs wouldn't think too much. Although this time he had sununade remind him if he still didn't show an attitude the next time Aiha took personal action, he would most likely be forced to have a wife assigned to him,
Speaker A
not ready to take on a family. With Aiha Jyn's temperament, he would force him to be ready. So alas, after a helpless Saiakashi could only say reluctantly, "All right, I understand. I'll do it as soon as possible." Hearing this, said no
Speaker A
more. After the meal, Sununade and Shizun did not stay at Kakashi's house directly as it was difficult for Kakashi to prepare guest rooms that night. So they temporarily returned to their own home. Later, after Kakashi had prepared the rooms, they
Speaker A
would truly move in together. Meanwhile, on the other side, in stark contrast to the new Koha, the old Kohaa was filled with deathly stillness and decay, especially after receiving a sternly worded letter from the new Kohaa, Saratobi Herzen, was so furious that he
Speaker A
directly smashed his 701st new pipe. Bastard. Damn it. An evil Aiha. What right does he have to judge me on behalf of the people? And he advises me to surrender unconditionally. Accept his righteous judgment. Get out. Get out of
Speaker A
here right now. Go back and tell Aiha he has no right to judge me. I represent the real Kinoa. He is nothing but a forced user and you Nar Shikaku Yuino Shikacho have betrayed the oath of the earrings. I don't want to see you get
Speaker A
out. Saratobi Herus's tone was icy. His face was as dark as water as he roared at the messenger from the new Kenoa. To this Narashaku as the messenger remained calm in both tone and expression. He did not take Saratobi Herusen seriously, nor
Speaker A
did he fear that Husen might kill him in desperation. So after listening to his outburst, he spoke calmly. Fine, but let me remind you one last time. The new Kohaa is giving you only one night to think it over. If you remain obstinate
Speaker A
by 9:00 tomorrow morning, the new Kohaa will launch a full assault. Nalyong Lu departed without any superfluous words.
Speaker A
After all, he knew this was merely a formality. Even Yuzbo Gene, the new fire shadow of New Mi had not expected Yuf Risen to surrender had he. Thus, having completed the prefuncter procedure, Naong Luio could not be bothered to
Speaker A
listen to Yu Fe Rizen's ramblings. And as for this, Yuan Fe Rizen's eyes blazed with murderous intent countless times, tempted to kill Naong Lujiio on the spot. Yet, in the end, he chose to desist because it was meaningless.
Speaker A
First, Nyong Lus strength was quite ordinary, and now he held no significant power in Numi, barely a figure of importance. Killing him would not affect the overall situation. On the contrary, it would enrage Numi. Although Orochimaru had assembled a team of
Speaker A
impure world reincarnation experts, their true prowess remained untested. He had to preserve a last retreat for the Yufay clan. Even if he himself failed and perished, even if most of the Yufay clan were purged, as long as the final
Speaker A
layer of phase was not torn, there might still be a chance to preserve a threat of bloodline for the Yufay family. Damn it. Why? Why has it come to this? Yuzbo Gene, heaven truly has no eyes. I had
Speaker A
already controlled and could even obliterate the Aiha. Why did the heavens send such a cunning fellow to the Aiha?
Speaker A
You and Feay Risen was seething with rage. If the Achiha had not possessed Gene, he was confident he could have exterminated them two years ago. Even if the Aiha awakened one or two Mangeko, it would only be a minor inconvenience to
Speaker A
him. Dealing with them would not have been a great problem. But then Yuzbo Gene not only awakened the Mangeko, but was also a rare Aiha with intelligence.
Speaker A
A Aiha with formidable strength and a mind rivaling the Nar. That was the true reason the village's situation spiraled out of control. Nevertheless, alas, with a helpless Sai, Yuenf Risen opened the drawer and took out a new pipe. Yes,
Speaker A
over the past two years, he had developed the habit of stocking up on new pipes for his pipe breakage rate had increased dramatically due to Yuzbo Gene. Without a certain reserve, he would often find himself without tobacco. Lighting another pipe full
Speaker A
Ren's gaze grew deep and unfathomable. Orochimaru, I'm counting on you. I hope the village can survive this ordeal or otherwise the decades of accumulated foundation of the Yuanfay clan might vanish into thin air. I hope everything goes smoothly. He rose and walked to the
Speaker A
window gazing at the pitch black village outside. UF risen sank into reminiscence. In the past, even at night, the village was alive with the glow of myriad lights. But now, apart from the four major clans, including the unfay, the entire village was filled
Speaker A
with deathly silence and desolation. Finally, with a helpless sigh, he shook his head and left. Tomorrow was the day of battle, he needed to sleep early tonight to ensure his energy tomorrow.
Speaker A
Early the next morning on the new my side training ground 13, the vill's elite gathered like a forest, and Yuzbo Jyn's face bore no trace of laxity, replaced by an oppressive and awe inspiring dominance. Gazing at the strong men under his command, he fell
Speaker A
into contemplation. He thought of the fear upon his first transmigration, the terror of having no golden finger, the caution during the third shinobi world, wore the silent preparation of a retreat after the Aiha clan massacre, the despair upon returning from training to
Speaker A
find his parents taken by root. All of that was in the past. With the awakening of the Mangeko in despair, he had schemed step by step until now his wings fully grown. Only the final battle remained to truly and completely control
Speaker A
the entire leaf village. and it would be his own creation. A leaf without the Synu clan's traces, without any shackles, a leaf that belonged solely to him. At the thought, a surge of pride swelled within him. Finally taking a
Speaker A
deep breath, he spoke coldly, "Move out." At Yuzbo Jyn's command, he did not indulge in excessive sentimentality or even a speech. He had absolute control over the village before him with no need for the will of fire like Eu Risen. In
Speaker A
an instant, as Yuzbo Gene departed, the assembled crowd followed in his wake. 20 minutes later when the group arrived at the entrance of old myuf risen and his men had long been waiting clearly they did not wish today's battle to take
Speaker A
place within old Mai Yuzbo Gene you have gone too far back then when your Aha clan wanted to secede and establish new did not stop you and watched as your various clans departed even if we are no longer from the same village we are
Speaker A
still both shinobi villages of the land of fire and our leaf village is willing to maintain friendly ties with yours but your appetite is too great not only did you secretly instigate an incite a riot in the village. But now you even intend
Speaker A
to completely annihilate our village. There are limits to forbearance today. Even if I have to sacrifice my old life, I will cut down you evil aiha right here. You and Feay Risen struck first firmly seizing the banner of justice.
Speaker A
Determined to brand Yuzbo Gene as a traitor. Even if Yuzbo Gene could destroy his village, he would forever bear these stains. As a ruler for so many years, such tactics had become almost instinctive. But unfortunately, had it been anyone else, they might have
Speaker A
silently endured. But Yuzbo Gene was not the type to fall for such tricks. Without even lifting his eyelids, he retorted directly. You and Feay Risen, don't flatter yourself. I originally had no interest in meddling with the affairs of your old Mai, but the villagers who
Speaker A
fled to us hold such deep hatred for you that they insisted I, as their fire shadow, seek justice for them. As for that, I am quite helpless. However, considering that we all belong to the land of fire, and considering all the
Speaker A
messes you, the third generation fire shadow, have created during your administration, I as a fire shadow, do not wish to see the title kaget tarnished. Thus, I have come here for the sake of justice and righteousness.
Speaker A
Our new Mai is determined to eradicate you this cancerous tumor that brings shame to the title fire shadow. So, enough talk. Are you ready to accept the judgment of justice? Yuzbo Gene wore a mask of unimpeachable righteousness. His
Speaker A
speech emphasized his reluctance and expressed his determination to act for fairness and justice to seek vindication for all the wrong villagers. And upon hearing this, Yu Risen was so furious that he nearly spat blood. Hirus and Suratobi was on the verge of despair.
Speaker A
This was almost his final attempt. Yet the outcome yielded nothing. There was no choice. Aiha Jeene was simply too troublesome to deal with. Not only was Jyn's strength impossible to suppress, but even in political maneuvering, he had suffered a crushing defeat.
Speaker A
Orochimaru begin. After a soft siharisen Soratobi spoke helplessly. Yes. Further words were pointless. In the end, Force would have to decide the matter.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, Orochimarus gaze was deep and profound as he stared at Aiha from a distance, unable to resist licking his lips. This was his first encounter with Achihajene. But hearing the words spoken made him lament his teacher's misfortune in facing such an
Speaker A
endlessly troublesome Achia. He truly deserved to lose. Yet his gaze at Aiha remained filled with greed. After all desiring immortality and mastery of all knowledge, he genuinely envied the Achihas supreme bloodline limit.
Speaker A
Especially someone like Gene, the strongest among the Aiha. He truly wished to bind him to an experiment table. However, he also knew this thought was rather unrealistic. So, shifting his gaze, he immediately pressed his palms together. Then, row
Speaker A
after row of coffins rose from the ground, accompanied by thunderous bang bang bang sounds as the coffin lids slammed onto the earth. One by one, powerful figures resurrected by the impure world reincarnation emerged. All their eyes were filled with confusion.
Speaker A
Wasn't I dead? Where is this? It looks like Kenoha. Is this the impure world reincarnation? Tobarama, this is all your fault. Big brother shut up.
Speaker A
Numerous resurrected ninja all began speaking simultaneously. However, they quickly noticed something a miss and began to carefully observe the current situation. Meanwhile, Orochimaru wasted no words with these resurrected warriors. instead turning his curious gaze toward Aiha. Jin Kuin, hello. I
Speaker A
never expected that after parting ways at the Kikio mountain battlefield, you would have become the leader of an entire village. I am truly curious about Eugene Coin. This impure world reincarnation technique is my strongest move. Please do give it a taste, Gene
Speaker A
Coin. All right, allow me to briefly introduce it. This is my perfected version improved based on the incomplete version left by the second Hokag Tobaramasama after more than 2 years of dedicated work. Ever since I learned of your power, Jen Kuin, I abandoned all
Speaker A
other research over these two years, dedicating myself entirely to refining and perfecting this technique. Now, by using elite Jonan as sacrifices, this impure world reincarnation can fully unleash approximately 80% of the resurrected warriors original strength.
Speaker A
Even without erasing their consciousness, I can issue simple commands they are compelled to obey.
Speaker A
While precise control isn't possible, I believe this is more than sufficient. Of course, considering that impure world reincarnation is Tobberama's technique, the second Hokag might possess the hand seals to release it. So, I specifically modified this aspect, meaning you need
Speaker A
not worry about Tobaramasama forcibly unsealing my control. So, from here on, let me enjoy your performance, Juan.
Speaker A
Please begin. Orochimaru's lips still curled into a sinister smile. After speaking, he quietly stepped back and made a pleas gesture toward Aiha. It was as if Achihajene were a circus monkey performing for him while Orochimaru sat as the audience enjoying the show. On
Speaker A
the other side, Aihaji narrowed his eyes slightly. He was genuinely takenback by Orochimaru's words. He had originally assumed that Orochimaru of this era had only made minor improvements to the technique, but he never imagined that due to his own sudden rise, Orochimaru
Speaker A
abandoned all other research for 2 years to wholeheartedly refine and perfect the impure world reincarnation. Furthermore, from what Orojimaru said, it seemed the impure world reincarnation he would face today was likely the truly perfected version that Kabuto Yakushi had only
Speaker A
fully completed during the fourth great ninja war. Honestly, this caught him completely off guard. He had been viewing things with outdated perspectives. He never expected that his own existence like a single butterfly flapping its wings had caused Orochimaru
Speaker A
to perfect the impure world reincarnation ahead of time. Although in the original story it was Kabutoo who perfected this technique, he had to admit Orochimaru was equally a genius.
Speaker A
What Kabutoo could achieve, Orochimaru certainly could as well. Now trouble was coming. He had originally expected to face resurrected warriors with erased consciousness. But instead, he must confront a group retaining their intellect while still being controlled by Orochimaru. Monkey, answer me. What
Speaker A
is the meaning of this? Is that man over there an enemy of the village? Why do I since they are all from our village's clans? and that sununade over there. Why is she on the enemy's side too?
Speaker A
Tobaramajus eyes were ice cold. Even without understanding the full situation, he instantly sensed something was wrong. Meanwhile, Hashiama was also slow to react. Littlesunade, why are you on the enemy's side? Grandfather, you was deeply troubled. Although seeing her
Speaker A
relatives brought her joy, this situation gave her no reason to be happy. Moreover, her grandfather's foolishness made her feel deeply embarrassed. Littlesade, come back. And that young man beside you is an Aiha, isn't he? Why have you both gone over to
Speaker A
the enemy's side? Hurry, come over here. Hashiama Senju said with a smile on his face. He kept waving for Sununade and Aiha Jeene to come over as he recognized Husen Saratobi, the disciple of his brother, Tobarama, and thus
Speaker A
instinctively assumed Aiha Jyn's side were the enemies. Of course, he didn't overthink it. He simply believed and Aiha were standing on the wrong side.
Speaker A
Big brother shut up. Tobarama Senju couldn't hold back, scolded his brother, then directly shouted at sununade. How can you stand with the wicked Aiha?
Speaker A
Second grandfather, I'm sorry. Sunade could only say helplessly, the situation is complicated and hard to explain in a few words. In short, you just need to know it's not just me. The entire village, every villager, every clan has
Speaker A
all chosen to side with the Aiha. You just need to know that your old disciple Herus and Saratobi went so far that nobody could tolerate him anymore.
Speaker A
People would rather turn to the Aiha than continue with him. In short, from now on, we are outright enemies.
Speaker A
However, second grandfather, rest assured. I will definitely seal you and send you back to the pure land to rest in peace. Tobaramaju was instantly dumbfounded. He of course was not stupid. Seeing that all the major clans, including had joined the Achiha faction,
Speaker A
he knew that his disciple must have done something heinous. Yet, his heart was still filled with great reluctance. Why join anyone else? Why must it be the monkey? What exactly did you do? Driven to the extreme of anger and frustration,
Speaker A
he roared directly at Haruen Suratobi. As for this, even the slowest reacting Hashiama Senju belatedly sensed something a miss. Tobarama, are you saying that all those people on the other side are from our village? Big brother, you just figured that out.
Speaker A
Tobarama was speechless. Hirus and Surb's face was grim. He opened his mouth to defend himself, but let out a helpless sigh. Orochimaru began. M I'm fine. Orochimaru nodded then said with a smile, "All right, everyone." The chitchat time is over. Let's not keep
Speaker A
Lord Gene waiting. All you predecessors, it's your turn to perform. After saying this with his instantaneous hand seals the many reanimated strong once present charge directly toward the opposite side. Tobaramaju was so angry he could spit blood. Good grief. Even ignoring
Speaker A
the questioning of his own teacher. This made the proud Tobarama want to slap that old monkey to death. Monkeyu.
Speaker A
Before Tobarama could finish his cursing, his body already charged toward Achihajene. Hashiamaenjus face was dark. Seeing his beloved village reduced to this, his heart was more grieved than anyone else's. But seeing that everyone, even his own granddaughter, had betrayed
Speaker A
the village, he knew that Husen Saratobi, the Hokag, must have committed grave mistakes that even his own people could not tolerate. So while performing the tree birth depths with his hands clased together, he shouted directly at Aiha gene, descendant of the Aiha, be
Speaker A
careful. Although this body can only exert 70 of my power, it is still enough for me to use the sage art. true several thousand hands. I don't know the weakness of this technique either, so I can't guide you in that regard. Be
Speaker A
careful. Boom. As Hashiamarama spoke, a vast forest instantly rose from the ground, and his own speed surged to the extreme as he charged directly toward Aiha. Evil Aiha, but forget it. Since chose you, I will tell you the
Speaker A
weaknesses of my techniques. See us as soon as possible. Although Tobber Syninju wore a look of displeasure from Horusans, ignoring he understood that the air he had sought was probably also doing a terrible job. So even though he
Speaker A
despised the Aiha, he had to reluctantly help Achihajene. Water release water shock wave as he performed hand seals of vast ocean instantly emerged accompanying the forest that rose from the ground rushing directly toward Achihajin. As for this Aiha Jyn's eyes
Speaker A
turned serious, watching the two brothers Hashiamarama and Tobarama charging at him, he did not hesitate to activate his man Gekckyo and then directly manifested the complete susenu.
Speaker A
A massive black susenu towering over a 100 meters stood proudly at the entrance of the old koha fire release great fire annihilation. In an instant, a massive fireball like a meteor crashed into the ground, creating a sea of flames. The
Speaker A
moment it collided with Tobarama's water release, a vast cloud of steam rose up. The next second, Hasharama Senju slammed a heavy fist into the susenu, causing a large crack to spread across it. Oh, not bad. This complete susenu is almost as
Speaker A
good as Madaras. Hashiamarama laughed foolishly. But upon hearing this, Aiha couldn help but twitch the corner of his mouth. Truly, the god of shinobi, his own complete susenu could actually be cracked by pure taiitsu. Water released water severing wave while Aihaene was
Speaker A
thinking toama also charged in. Then from his mouth, he spat out a thread-like ultra- high-pressure straightwater jet, which slashed directly across the crack that Hashiamarama had created. In an instant, the susenu shattered completely. Seeing this, Aiha couldn't help but be filled
Speaker A
with shock. So formidable, even though he had already overestimated these two kag after the exchange, he realized he had still underestimated them. Even if these were not their full power, they were still not easy to deal with. But
Speaker A
thinking about it, it makes sense. After all, in the original story during the fourth great ninja war, Tobarama's water severing wave could cut through the roots of the divine tree. Thinking of this, his mano spun wildly. The shattered susenu instantly reformed and
Speaker A
he drew his susenu's great sword. Boom! With one slash, the earth was torn apart. After Hashiamarama and Tobarama dodged Hashiamarama, immediately clased his hands together. Sage art would release true several thousand hands.
Speaker A
Under Orochimarus control, a giant Buddha far larger than the Susenu appeared and directly engaged Achiha Jinns Susenu in battle. For a moment, Aiha Jins pressure increased sharply. Even though the current Hashiamarama did not use the Buddha's palm, it was still beyond his current
Speaker A
ability to contend with. Meanwhile, on the other side, just as Tobarama was about to strike again, Shersu directly blocked him with his Maneko glaring.
Speaker A
Another Mangeko. Tobarama's mouth twitched. Although he was forced to participate in a battle and even reluctantly willing to secretly help the achi, seeing another mangeko emerge from the aiha still made him extremely displeased deep inside. But unfortunately, just as Tobarama was
Speaker A
about to act, Fagaku also stood to his left with his maneko. What the hell?
Speaker A
Another mano. Is this era so crazy? Seeing Fagaku in front of him, Tobarama truly broke down. You see, in normal times for the Aiha, each generation basically had only one mano. The era of Madara Aiha was considered the most
Speaker A
prosperous, giving rise to two Mangeko users, Madaraa and Azuna. But now just the ones revealed so far amount to three pairs. Second Hokag, my apologies. Shers drew his short sword manifested six clones and charged directly at Tobarama.
Speaker A
Although I'm not happy about it, kid, watch out. I'm going to use the flying thunder god. After saying that in an instant, Tobarama's figure vanished from the spot. Fagaka wasted no words immediately spinning his mango. Ting Gaojian re 30 times. Since he couldn't
Speaker A
catch Tobarama, he directly covered a 10-meter radius with his dojutsu. The next second, Tobarama's figure appeared to Fagaka's left only 3 in away from him. Seeing this, Fagaka broke out in a cold sweat. If he hadn't unhesitatingly used his Maneko technique, he would
Speaker A
probably have been stabbed to death by Tobarama's canai by now. Bwa ceiling seal. Fagaka hesitated no longer directly pulling out the ceiling scroll that had given him. Fuyu moved with incredible speed as he formed a single hand seal. The ceiling scroll in his
Speaker A
hand instantly unraveled, releasing a dense array of sealing techniques that crawled over Tobber Senju's reanimated body. In the next moment, Tobarama's impure world reincarnation form was completely sealed within the scroll.
Speaker A
Breathing a sigh of relief, Fuyu let out a breath. That was too close. Truly worthy of Tobarama Senju. Even facing only a reanimated body, he nearly killed me with a single cany. and I am a mano wielder. Wiping the cold sweat from his
Speaker A
brow, Fuyu deactivated his Maneko Shainggon and wiped away the blood trickling from his eyes. Of course, he knew this was pure luck. His mano ability happened to counter Tobarama.
Speaker A
Otherwise, sealing him would not have been so simple. Yet, just as he relaxed, a flash of white light darted across his vision. He stood there utterly bewildered. What was that? Obviously, with his man, Gekko deactivated his naked eye could not perceive such speed.
Speaker A
While Fuyu was still stunned, Shers Sway suddenly stepped in front of him and clashed directly with the newcomer.
Speaker A
Seeing this, Fuyu sighed softly. There was no choice. Having just used his maneko, he was now severely drained.
Speaker A
After all, Tobarama Senju was too formidable. Freezing and slowing his time with ocular jutzu required an immense amount of dojutsu power. Last time, he had easily sealed Shers Sway and Itachi because they were caught off guard. But Tobarama was a completely
Speaker A
different story. Thus, he was already exhausted. Not to mention the drained dojitsu. His chakra reserves had been pushed to the limit, squeezing out both mental and physical energy. Yet, he endured the stinging pain in his eyes and reactivated his three tommo shaing,
Speaker A
only to see that the newcomer was none other than Sukcomo Hitaki. Young Aiha, my weakness is obvious. Find a way to restrict my speed and you'll be halfway to victory. You are fast. I believe you can do it. I when you see Kakashi, tell
Speaker A
him I'm sorry. Sukumo Haki spoke with remarkable gentleness. Yet his blade was swift as lightning each strike cunning and seasoned. Sherui's face turned grave. His man Gekko allowed him to follow Sakomao's blade, but his body still lagged slightly behind. No help
Speaker A
for it. Though his moniker was sure sway of the body flicker, it relied heavily on jin jutsu. In pure swordsmanship, he was formidable, but still a step behind Sukumo. As for ocular jutzu, useless.
Speaker A
Cotto Amitsuki alters a person's thoughts. But Sukkumo's mind was intact. He didn't want to fight. only his body was being controlled by Orochimaru.
Speaker A
Susanu first his Mangeko was not eternal so he could barely sustain the second stage and even that would be a strain.
Speaker A
Sukumo was too fast. Even if he forcibly activated Susenu, he would only be a punching bag. Shuer hold him off. I'll call for reinforcements and find a way to trap him. The Aiha aren't skilled in area control. We need Earth and water
Speaker A
release ninjas. With that, Fuyu immediately ran back and summoned a large group. Earth release Earth flow wall. Earth release earth prison dome.
Speaker A
Water release water prison technique. Earth release earth mount technique. A series of earth walls rose first. Though Sakcomo could easily shatter or dodge them. Breaking one wall only revealed another and dodging was feudal. The summoned ninjas were ordinary and
Speaker A
Sukcomo could kill them in an instant. But unfortunately, Shersway clung to him relentlessly denying him the time. Thus, his maneuvering space shrank. He was an assassin, unbeatable one-on-one and able to retreat from a group. But with Shers hounding him and a horde of ordinary
Speaker A
ninjas using various techniques to trap him. This time he had no way out. 10 minutes later, Sakomao was confined to a tiny space and Shers promptly unfurled a ceiling scroll. Seal: Everyone, I'm sorry. I've caused you trouble. While I
Speaker A
still have some time, could you tell me briefly? How is Kakashi doing? As the dense ceiling marks crawled over his body, Sukumo's face remained gentle. Clearly, he was deeply worried about Kakashi. to this. Shway offered a faint smile and said sincerely to the
Speaker A
swordsman. Kakashi is the captain of theu in New Leaf Village. In fact, he's my direct superior. I see. That puts my mind at ease. Sukumo sighed in relief.
Speaker A
As he finished speaking, the ceiling marks climbed over his head and he was completely sealed away. Meanwhile, on the other side, thanks to the ceiling scrolls had prepared in advance, the new leaf forces faced the reanimated army without panic. Within just 10 odd
Speaker A
minutes, most were sealed. Grandmother, forgive me. That bastard, Orochimaru, I will make him pay for disturbing your peace and the pure lands.
Speaker A
Stern, tinged with reluctance. Facing Mido Usuzumaki, she had so much to say, but unfortunately, they were on a battlefield, and she had no time to waste. Mito remained unfazed, caring not for the battle, but instead fussing oversunade's personal life. New Leaf, I
Speaker A
didn't know about the monkeys affairs. I just never expected him to be so useless that even the major clans abandoned him.
Speaker A
And I never thought the Aiha would establish new leaf and that you little sununade would willingly join and be so devoted. Tell your grandmother the truth. Have you taken a liking to some Aiha? Though I dislike the Achiha. If
Speaker A
you like him, your grandmother won't mind. I'll only bless you. Listen to your grandmother. You're no longer young. It's time to marry. You understand? Moto chattered on endlessly.
Speaker A
Having personally elevated Hirusen Saratobi to power. And having witnessed the downfall of the Synu and Usuzamaki clans, how could she not know Hirusen's true nature? Thus, she cared nothing for the fall of old leaf. She had chosen not
Speaker A
to make a fuss back, then only out of respect for Hasharama. But now it was different. As a dead woman, she was indifferent to the leaf's demise. Her only concern was personal affairs. At her age, still unmarried. Sununade,
Speaker A
listening to her grandmother's nagging, grew increasingly irritated. Grandmother, stop worrying. Just go to the pure land. My affairs are none of your concern. Seal. Enraged accelerated her ceiling speed. Before Mido Usuzamaki could finish her last words, she was
Speaker A
completely sealed within the scroll. Witnessing this, she finally breathed a sigh of relief. Finally, some peace and quiet. Though she had once dreamed of seeing her loved ones again, now that she truly met them, she was so annoyed
Speaker A
that she wished to send them back to the pure land at once. Aiha, me interested in him? Impossible. His mother is younger than me, right? How could I possibly be interested in him? On the battlefield, fell into contemplation,
Speaker A
but in the end, she shook her head helplessly. When she came back to her senses, she saw many injured allies around her. There was no help for it.
Speaker A
The four clans like Saratobi had not yet acted, and these were merely a few reanimated corpses. Even with the ceiling scrolls, she had prepared casualties and deaths were inevitable.
Speaker A
Or dog, bird, monkey, ram, summoning Katsuyo. With a loud bang, a giant slug was summoned. Sonat sama. Katsuyu spoke in a sweet voice. Tone was stern.
Speaker A
Katsuyu, go heal everyone. Almost instantly the giant slug split into countless small slugs which then crawled onto each injured person. Then immediately aftersade also made her move facing an acquaintance. Sunady n I never thought we would meet under these
Speaker A
circumstances. Do you know how that boy Narudo is doing? Kusha Uzumaki while exchanging blows with sununade tried to inquire about her son to thisade felt a bit overwhelmed at a loss even somewhat suffocated. She felt guilty for cushion
Speaker A
as nay but after a moment's hesitation she said helplessly Narudo he actually had a rough life before that vile Sarutoi Herusen embezzled the inheritance you and Manado left and even hid Naruto's identity all these years in old Kohaa he was known only as the fox
Speaker A
demon but don't worry Narudo has been brought to new koha and is now under Kakashi's care from now on I'll look after him upon hearing this Kusha felt the pain in her heart her expression turning increasingly grim she had
Speaker A
already guessed as much for the fact that many ninja clans and civilians had all chosen to abandon Saratobi Harusen and flocked to the Aiha faction spoke volumes. So alas, after a helpless sigh, she forced herself to perk up. I
Speaker A
understand. Thank you. N don't say that. It's I who wronged you. Sunsunade shook her head helplessly. In the past, she had been too self-centered, never considering the feelings of those around her. Then after a brief chats, sealed Kusha. That was only natural. At
Speaker A
present, Kusha did not have the ninetailes inside her. She was just an ordinary Usuzamaki with average combat skills. Although her Usuzamaki bloodline was potent and her adamanton ceiling chains could restrain the Ninetales. The problem was that Manado had doted on her
Speaker A
taking on countless missions with his flying ragene to keep her off the battlefield. Therefore, Kusha's combat ability was weak. So without the Ninetales, she stood no chance against time slowly passed. After just over 20 minutes, only Hashiama remained of the
Speaker A
reanimated army that Urochimaru had summoned. To be honest, Aiha was fighting with great difficulty. Facing a Hashiamarama who could only exert 70 of his full power, he was still at a disadvantage. There was no helping it.
Speaker A
Hashiama Senju was from the waring states era. Having spent nearly every day in battle, his killing techniques far surpassed those of Achihajene, especially since he often fought Achihham, the great Hashiama, was extremely familiar with Susnu. So Achihajin was truly frustrated and
Speaker A
furious. Eternal Mangeko. If not for Hashiamarama, he could indeed dominate the current era. Even against Nagato with the renean of the Akisatsuki, he might not win, but would likely not lose either. After all, the rene couldn't fully utilize its powers. But
Speaker A
alas, looking at the silly grin on the great Hashiamarama's face, Aiha, who had been about to show off, decided he'd better play it safe for now. Haha, young Aiha, your strength is quite impressive.
Speaker A
Apart from Madara of old, you're the only one who's managed to fight me to this point. Hashiamarama Senu wore a foolish grin. He was genuinely praising Aiha. Indeed, because throughout Hashiamarama's life, Aihaji was only slightly inferior to Madara. As for
Speaker A
others, huh, they didn't even qualify to make him use his true several thousand hands. Hey, great Hashiama. The battles on other fronts have ended. I'm about to put an end to this fight as well. So, let's talk later. Aiha let out a great
Speaker A
roar. Yes, he had fought with Hasharama for so long, mainly to gauge his own strength and to train his combat skills against a powerful opponent. Now, after this battle with Hashiamarama, realizing he was still a notch below Hashiamarama
Speaker A
and Madara, he naturally lost the interest to continue playing with Hashiamarama, for the main task was more important. On the other side, hearing Achiha Jyns words, Hashiamarama was momentarily stunned. Oh, young man, it seems you still have hidden abilities.
Speaker A
Show me, let me see. Standing at top the Buddha's head, Hashiamarama couldn't help but become intrigued. Clearly, he was curious whether Aiha Jins techniques could actually harm him now.
Speaker A
In response, Achiha Jeene did not hesitate. He retracted his susenu and his maneko began to spin wildly. Susano almost instantly with the power of his eternal maneko. An immense amount of dojutsu was consumed in an instant.
Speaker A
Though nothing seemed to happen externally, the great Buddha of Hashiamarama began to crumble inch by inch. Yes, Mangeko techniques were so unreasonable. As long as you had enough ocular power, you could achieve anything. However, in the same way, the
Speaker A
stronger the enemy, the greater the ocular power consumed. Just as when he had restricted Tobarama, which drained Fagaku instantly, Aihajin's dojutsu seemed equally overpowered. But the amount of ocular power needed to shatter Hashiamarama was also tremendous. If he
Speaker A
hadn't awakened his eternal Mangeko, even if his manoyo were destroyed, he wouldn't be able to easily shatter the Hashiamarama before him. Almost instantly, Achihajene sensed his ocular power draining at an alarming rate. Even the vast reserves of his eternal man
Speaker A
Gekko struggling to keep pace. Simultaneously, as Aihajene exerted his power, Hasharamaju's colossal Buddha began to crumble piece by piece, and even his reanimated body started to disintegrate. Incredible. So, this is the Mangeko technique Madara spoke of.
Speaker A
It's truly overbearing and utterly unreasonable. Young one of the Aiha, it seems you are indeed the victor here.
Speaker A
Hashiama Senju remained calm. As a dead man, he held little concern for the matters of the living. Especially since in this instance, Aiha seemed to be the hero and Husen Saratobi, the villain, he cared even less about losing to the Aiha
Speaker A
before him. On the contrary, he was in quite high spirits after their battle. And because of Madara Aiha, he was certainly not unfamiliar with the unique Mangeko techniques of the Aiha clan.
Speaker A
However, Madara's mind was rather straightforward. So, his Mangeko ability was purely an amplification type. This was why his jutzu and his susenu were vastly more powerful than those of other achiah. So today, Hashiamarama was able to witness firsthand the strange and
Speaker A
varied Mangeko abilities of the Aiha. Then even as he marveled, his body began to crumble. However, due to the Edeto Tensei, he was quickly restored. But at that moment, Aiha charged forward and using sun's ceiling scroll directly sealed Hashiamurama away. At this point,
Speaker A
Aiha wasted no more words, standing silently before Husen Saratobi and the others. Meanwhile, sununade Kakashi and the other shinobi of New Konoha had all gathered behind him completely surrounding Husuan Saratobi and his remaining forces. I'll ask one last
Speaker A
time. Will you surrender? As he spoke, the atmosphere froze solid. Hirusen Suratobi's face turned ashen. He fully understood Aiha Jyn's unspoken implication. Surrendering with safe face for everyone. Given that he had provided Gene with a claim of righteousness, he
Speaker A
himself and the other core leaders might face severe punishment, and his clan might face discrimination and hardship in the new village. But his clan would survive. At worst, they'd find themselves in the same position the Aiha were in before, but at least they could
Speaker A
avoid a massacre. Could Aiha secretly kill them later? Impossible. The Aiha's thousand-year reputation was something one could trust. After all, the Aiha were not like Danzo. But if they chose not to surrender, could he even escape the land of fire? Honestly, that would
Speaker A
be very difficult. First, the Aiha faction was far too powerful. Even with a desperate fight, only a small fraction of their four clans could hope to escape. And even if they did escape, what then? Would other ninja clans
Speaker A
accept them as rogue ninja? No. Because the Saratobi and the other three clans weren't bloodline limit families, not even on par with secret technique clans like the Narayamanaka or a Kimichi. They didn't even have the value to be used as
Speaker A
breeding stock. With this realization, he took a long deep breath. I surrender. With his declaration, everyone present breathed a sigh of relief. For the members of the Saratobi and the other three great clans, at least they had avoided the worst case scenario. Their
Speaker A
lives were spared. On the other side, the people with Aiha were also overjoyed. After all, if a real battle had broken out, not only would they have suffered casualties, but even a few more deaths among the Saratobi and other
Speaker A
three clans would have been a great loss to them. Such excellent top tier workh horses. It would be such a waste for them to die here. Clearly, after two years under Achihaja Jyn's rule, the ideology of these clans had changed from
Speaker A
what it was before. Previously, they might have thought that too many ninjas wasn't a good thing, and they might have even used wars to call the numbers. Now, however, it was different. With their changed mindset, everyone felt a pain of
Speaker A
loss at the thought of losing such top tier workh horses. After all, providing these workh horses with a little food each day yielded returns hundreds or thousands of times over. M I'm good. It seems you are a wise man after all. In
Speaker A
that case, let's proceed with the formalities. Son, use caling techniques to control all of them and temporarily transport them to the wasteland west of our village. Rokichi, you'll be in charge of their resettlement. Aiha spoke with a smile. As he gave the order, led
Speaker A
the ceiling team and began to seal the chakra of Husen Saratobi and the others.
Speaker A
Herusen Saratobi avoided sununade's gaze as she approached. He opened his mouth several times as if to speak, butsunade couldn't be bothered to acknowledge him.
Speaker A
She placed the seal on him without a word and turned to leave. She didn't spare him a single glance, a trace of disdain, curling her lips. Clearly, she harbored a deep resentment towards her former teacher, Arusen Saratobi.
Speaker A
Watching Sununade walk away, he could only let out a helpless sigh. He was in utter despair. He had hoped to appeal to Sununade to go easy on the Saratobi clan. Unfortunately, Sununade ignored him completely, leaving him at a loss
Speaker A
for words. Of course, after a moment's thought, he understoods Sununade's perspective. After all, when Husuan Saratobi was at the height of his power, he had shown no mercy to the Senu family. If sun's position wasn't so unique, if she hadn't left the village
Speaker A
on her own accord and avoided politics, she would likely have been killed, too. So, under these circumstances, why should she show any mercy? He had no one to blame but himself. He had been too ruthless in the past. His ruthless
Speaker A
actions back then had completely severed any path of retreat for the Saratobi clan. Time passed slowly asade's team sealed one group Kakashi's U transported them to New Konoha. Aiha with his main force kept the remnants of the four
Speaker A
clans tightly encircled preventing any desperate escape attempts. 2 hours later after the last group was moved, Aiha looked at Orochimaru. Yes, Orochimaru had not left, nor had he chosen to interfere. He had simply stood by and watched. A flicker of sorrow arose in
Speaker A
his eyes, especially when he saw Husen Saratobi, his chakra sealed, being led away by Kakashi Zambu. Clearly, he had feelings for Husen Saratobi. After all, when he was young, his parents had died on the battlefield. And it was his
Speaker A
teacher Herusen Saratobi who had filled that void. For this teacher, Orochimaru harbored complex emotions. On one hand, when he was young and had just lost his parents, the teacher Husen Saratobi filled the void in his heart, making Orochimaru feel the warmth of family. In
Speaker A
those days, especially the Husuen Soratobi of the past, who was genuinely good to him as a disciple. He set no barriers regarding ninjutsu resources or money. Ordinary ninjas had to accumulate years of merit and complete hundreds of missions just to qualify for exchange.
Speaker A
And then still needed to curry favor with superiors, pull strings, and spend money to obtain the forbidden techniques that Orochimaru could acquire with a mere word. He needed nothing at all.
Speaker A
Growing up in such an environment, how could Orochimaru not have feelings for Herus and Saratobi? But on the other hand, Kohaa had indeed fallen into decline under his rule. to maintain his authority as Hokag. Countless powerful ninjas perished in his schemes and the
Speaker A
windmill of Kinoa became utterly decayed. How did Nwaki die? Did Orochimaru really not see through it?
Speaker A
Why did leave the village? The bloodshed and the power struggles involving the Senju clan, the Uzamaki clan, Sukumo Hitaki, and Dan Ko had nearly worn away Orochimaru's goodwill toward Hiroen Saratobi. Of course, the most important thing was that when he was vying for the
Speaker A
fourth Hokag position, his teacher stabbed him in the back. You see, at that time, although Manado Name's reputation was rising, he was far inferior to Orochimaru in essence.
Speaker A
Because Manado Namay had a major issue with his abilities, no one could keep up with his flying thunder god technique, causing him to often act alone on the battlefield, which prevented him from cultivating his own trusted subordinates. Aside from a few
Speaker A
individuals like Chao, Tang Dong and Yu Envy Xiwei and his sole disciple Kakashi Manado Name had virtually no loyal followers. His so-called reputation was actually quite hollow. Ninjas are an extremely pragmatic group. No matter how formidable the yellow flash might be,
Speaker A
what benefits could he bring to others if he became Hokage. The key point was that people were not close to him. Under such circumstances, even if you were incredibly powerful, you were not one of their own. So why should they support
Speaker A
you? As for Jeriah, although he was also one of the legendary Sanin and seemed to stand on the same level as Orochimaru in essence, that was nonsense. Jeriah was by nature a wanderer. Even though he came from a commoner background, he had
Speaker A
never truly fought for the right status or wealth of the common people. Though he participated in the second and third great ninja wars, Jeriah never cultivated trusted followers or subordinates. So his support for Manado Namic was actually quite limited. But
Speaker A
Orochimaru was completely different. He had genuinely striven for the position of fourth Hokag and with his ambition for power, he had been laying the groundwork as early as the second great ninja war. Especially knowing the pain of the commoners, Orochimaru's treatment
Speaker A
of his subordinates boiled down to two words, fairness. Whether or not they were his trusted aids, as long as they achieved merits, they would be rewarded.
Speaker A
The correspondence between merits and rewards was clear and transparent. As long as you worked under Orochimaru, no one could steal your achievements. You could call him ruthless and merciless, but he would ensure you receive the benefits you deserved. Take the battle
Speaker A
of Kikio Mountain during the third great ninja war, for example. Most thought he used his own ninjas as pawns to sacrifice luring the main forces of Sunagaker into a trap and then wiping them out in one fell swoop. But in
Speaker A
reality, those Kohó ninjas who were treated as pawns did so willingly. It was all because of fairness. Back then, Orochimaru told everyone, "Your mission this time is to go to your deaths, but your families and children will be under
Speaker A
his protection. The proper compensation and rewards even the third Hokag and Danzo would not dare to touch." What was even more crucial was the protection of Orochimaru, one of the Sanin. As long as they were willing to sacrifice for him,
Speaker A
the darkness of the village would never affect their families. So no matter how much Jeriah and Manado Name were also from the commoner faction, their foundations were far inferior to Orochimaru's. Even Sukumo Hataki in his prime had far less influence and appeal
Speaker A
among the commoners than Orochimaru. It could be said that if Orochimaru had truly fought for the position, even Husen Saratobi's support for Manado Names would have been useless. So why did he lose? Because his heart had grown cold and disillusioned. His teacher
Speaker A
Haruen Saratobi had abandoned him. The man who though he never said it, he had treated like a father since childhood had so lightly cast him aside for the sake of power. For the proud Orochimaru the title of Hokag was no longer an
Speaker A
honor. Even the mere mention of the word Hokag filled him with disgust. He had voluntarily given up the fight for the fourth Hokag position. Otherwise, Manado Namay was nothing. He had never regarded that junior as a threat. This was the
Speaker A
real reason why Orochimaru was willing to come now when Hirus and Saratobi had lost power and the clan was on the verge of collapse. Collecting the corpses of powerful ninjas and materials for the impure world reincarnation was certainly
Speaker A
one of the benefits he sought. But more than that, he wanted to help her Saratobi. In the original story, when his teacher was old and frail and Kenoha had grown even more corrupt, he gave his teacher a grand funeral. Now it was the
Speaker A
same. Even though Herus and Saratobi had made countless mistakes, even though Orochimaru himself looked down on this teacher, this seemingly cold and venomous snake still displayed the last warmth that should not have existed.
Speaker A
However, unfortunately, he still failed. The power of Achiha Gene was too terrifying. Even the impure world reincarnation he had mastered could not help her Saratobi. Of course, he had anticipated this outcome. His appearance this time was merely to fulfill his
Speaker A
duty. But now, even though he ultimately failed, he considered that he had done his filial duty as a disciple. After completely releasing the last shred of attachment in his heart, Orochimaru felt a sense of relief. At the same time, he
Speaker A
could not help but look at the Aiha gene before him, his eyes revealing a deep curiosity. Yes, Aiha, who was the least like a Aiha, whose political acumen was even more terrifying than the Nar clan, and whose strength nearly reached that
Speaker A
of the god of Shinobi Senju Hasharama. This was truly an irresistible attraction for Orochimaru. He really wanted to study him. However, just as Orochimaru was about to exchange a few pleasantries and then prepare to retreat, Aihaene directly spoke.
Speaker A
Orochimaru hand over the impure world reincarnation technique and the control of these resurrected powerful ninjas. I will spare your life and let you leave.
Speaker A
His words were filled with overbearing dominance. As Achiha Jyn's doineering words echoed, Orochimaru, who was about to speak, was taken aback. He stared at Aiha as if looking at a fool.
Speaker A
Ridiculous. Who did he think Orochimaru was? Although he had indeed failed to save his teacher, Saratobi Herusen today. Did you really think you could dictate terms to him? Thinking this, he let out a cold laugh. Jin Kuan, you've
Speaker A
gone too far. Do you believe you have me cornered? Orochimarus tone was icy. At this moment, he was truly angered.
Speaker A
His eyes turning cold and furious. He intended to retract his previous assessment. In his view, Aihajin was far too foolish. Orochimaru had roamed the ninja world for many years. Perhaps his strength was not the greatest, but he held absolute confidence in his survival
Speaker A
abilities. Aiha wanted to trap him. Wishful thinking. It was for this reason that Orochimaru did not flee. Even surrounded by so many leaf ninjas, he was confident he could escape. After all, not to mention Aiha before him, even the Akatsuki's leader Pain was not
Speaker A
someone Orochimaru truly feared. In fact, he harbored a desire to study the so-called god. Why? because he believed that if he wished to leave, even pain that self-proclaimed deity could not capture him. Meanwhile, on the other side, Aiha observed Orochimaru, whose
Speaker A
eyes brimmed with disdain, seemingly unbothered by the encirclement, even daring to meet his gaze. A smirk of mockery crept across Jyn's lips.
Speaker A
Heaven's curse seal living corpse reincarnation eight-headed serpent technique. If I am not mistaken, these are the foundations of your audacity, but it's understandable. The heaven's curse seal allows you to implant a portion of your soul into another's body
Speaker A
as a curse mark, enabling rebirth, even if your original body perishes. Living corpse reincarnation is equally formidable, allowing you to continuously reincarnate through souls in different bodies. And these two techniques serve the eight-headed serpent technique. The eight-headed serpent technique is the
Speaker A
core of all your ninjutsu, your greatest trump card. From this perspective, Orochimaru, you are indeed a genius.
Speaker A
Aayachihajene, sincerely admire you. Perhaps you are not the strongest ninja, but your survival abilities are terrifyingly formidable. Your pride is understandable. Aihajins tone was calm. A sharp intake of breath echoed among the onlookers. Though they were aware of Orochimarus prowess, they
Speaker A
had not taken it too seriously. Even now, Orochimaru remained unflinching, sparking curiosity. Yet, they still did not regard him as a major threat. After all, could Orochimaru be stronger than an entire ninja village? But now, as Aiha Jyn's words spilled forth, the
Speaker A
crowd's gaze toward Orochimaru shifted to one of terror. How terrifying. If Aiha spoke the truth, they might indeed be unable to detain Orochimaru. His survival abilities were simply spine shilling. Blurted out in astonishment.
Speaker A
Orochimaru is Gene telling the truth. She was bewildered. As one of Orochimaru's friends, she knew he had a sinister side, always pursuing immortality. However, she had always deemed such a concept too elusive, never imagining Orochimaru could succeed. But
Speaker A
now, from Aiha Jyn's tone had Orochimaru truly succeeded. Orochimaru was stunned. Hearing Jyn's words, a chill ran down his spine. He could not fathom it. Even his most trusted subordinates only knew of living corpse reincarnation. He had never disclosed the heavens curse seal
Speaker A
to anyone. Those who knew him well, were only aware of the earth curse seal at best. The eight-headed serpent technique was the core of his secrets and knowledge he would never share, even with Kabuto Yukushi. So, how did Aihajin
Speaker A
know? At this thought, panic crept in and cold sweat soaked his back. How? How do you know? Orochimaru blurted out in shock. In response, Aiha Jyn's gaze remained calm, but he offered no explanation for his source of information. Instead, he spoke in a flat
Speaker A
tone, "Allow me to introduce my left eyes dojitsu susu. It awakens through extreme love, which is why the Aiha are known as the clan of love. It is precisely because the Aiha love everything that upon losing that love
Speaker A
they have a chance to awaken the mangeko its ultimate form. The achias mano shainggon is also called the eye of the heart's reflection. The greatest wish in one's heart at the moment of awakening spontaneously forms the unique dojutsu
Speaker A
of the mangeo. My sharing awakened from my parents at that time. Danzo's root ninjas abducted my parents from within the clan. I loathed my own powerlessness unable to protect even my own damn parents. So at that moment I longed for
Speaker A
destruction to obliterate the entire world which is why I awakened the dojitsu susnu. Its function is simple ignore all defenses and annihilate everything including time and space.
Speaker A
Recently after evolving to the eternal man geko this ability naturally evolved further. Now this dojitsu has been enhanced to annihilate souls. Simply put, no matter how many pieces you split your soul into if I use my dojutsu to
Speaker A
annihilate your current soul, my dojitsu power will take your present soul as a reference. ignoring space and distance.
Speaker A
All your souls will be extinguished in an instant. Your soul won't even have the qualifications to be sealed by the death god or reach the pure land. Now, do you understand? If you know what's good for you hand over the impure world
Speaker A
reincarnation technique and the control of these resurrected strong ones, otherwise you will die today and even the sage of six paths cannot save you. I assure you, Aiha was utterly doineering.
Speaker A
As his words fell, a chill ran down the spines of everyone present. Even Orochimaru stood frozen in place. There was no helping it. The dojutsu Aihajene awakened was simply shameless. Such power was virtually unsolvable. Unless your strength surpassed Aiha by a major
Speaker A
realm like Senu Hashiamarama, who could withstand it head-on, no one could endure such an unreasonable dojitsu.
Speaker A
Orochimarus expression flickered with uncertainty. His entire body trembled with rage, and his back was drenched in cold sweat. At this moment, he truly felt a surge of panic. Indeed, he had come this time with a desire to repay a debt of gratitude and perhaps
Speaker A
even to acquire a batch of impure world reincarnation bodies at the Jonan level. But all of this was predicated on his assurance of a safe retreat. But now, after hearing Achihajin's self-introduction, he could only sense the absolute confidence Achihajene had
Speaker A
in himself. He had already been cornered. Should he believe it? For a moment, he sank into deep thought. He couldn't help but reflect on the earlier clash between Achihajene and Sinju Hasharama, especially the moment when Achihaene activated his dojutsu. There
Speaker A
was no fluctuation in chakra nature, and nothing was visible on the surface. Yet, in that instant, Hashiamarama's woodrelease, Buddha began to collapse and dissipate into the void in a manner he could not comprehend. Even Hashiamarama's impure world reincarnation body collapsed and
Speaker A
vanished completely in that same moment, only to be sealed after the reincarnation had been reconstituted. To be honest, this kind of unreasonable mano dojutsu was indeed troublesome.
Speaker A
Even a research scholar like Orochimaru couldn't grasp the fundamental principles behind it. But one thing was certain Aiha Jyn's attack earlier had only targeted the material plane without annihilating Hashiamarama's soul.
Speaker A
However, the question remained, was Aiha incapable of doing so, or had he deliberately held back? After a moment of thought, Orochimaru leaned toward the latter. The reason was simple.
Speaker A
Hashiamarama was after all sununade's grand uncle andsunade was now a core member of Aiha Jins leadership.
Speaker A
Showing restraint out of consideration for her was perfectly plausible. Of course, more importantly, he believed in the name Aiha. The Aiha clan was one that never lied. Out of pride for their lineage, they would never stoop to deception. That Aiha gene had awakened
Speaker A
the manoyo was ample proof that he was an extreme individual. From Orochimaru's analysis of human nature, the likelihood of Achiha Jeene lying was exceedingly low. Moreover, Achiha Jyn Jins governance lent immense credibility to his words. Although Achihajin's tactics
Speaker A
and schemes were more formidable than even those of the Nar clan from his rise to power to the present, his confrontation with his teacher Haruen Saratobi had never employed the underhanded strategy of deception. Aiha had relied almost exclusively on open
Speaker A
strategies. So after a long deliberation, Orochimaru unrolled a scroll and tossed it directly to Achihajene. Fine, take it. This time you've won Gene Coin. I, Orochimaru, accept defeat gracefully. The impure world reincarnation technique along with the control seals for these reincarnated
Speaker A
bodies. It's all yours. Orochimarus voice was calm. He was a man who could accept loss as long as it didn't touch his core interest. Techniques like impure world reincarnation mattered little to him. In response, Aiha did not reach for the scroll directly. Instead,
Speaker A
he employed an extraordinary application of firerelease chakra nature transformation, effortlessly drying the mucus on the scroll without damaging the scroll itself. This display made Orochimaru narrow his eyes. Such precise chakra nature transformation proved that Achihajin's strength even without the
Speaker A
sharing had reached the kaga level. It further convinced him that during the third great ninja war, Achiha had definitely not been fighting at full strength. To conceal his power at a time like that, especially on a battlefield, and to do so without anyone ever
Speaker A
discovering it spoke volumes about Achiha Jyn's formidable nature and tenacity. Meanwhile, on the other side, Aiha didn't even bother to look. After drying the scrolls mucus, he casually tossed it to Sunady. Inspected. His tone was perfectly calm. Caught the scroll
Speaker A
and began a meticulous examination. She frowned slightly. In truth, she had seen the original manuscript of her grand uncle's impure world reincarnation.
Speaker A
After all, Kenoha's forbidden scrolls were essentially the Synu clan's legacy, but what Orochimaru had provided was far more refined. However, impure world reincarnation was still a combination of summoning and sealing techniques.
Speaker A
herself was a skilled sealing expert. So, with a few simple deductions, she could confirm that the scroll in her hands was genuine. Then, she pulled out the scroll containing Kusha Usuzamaki seal, released Kusha, and applied the control seal. Only then did she speak to
Speaker A
Aiha Gene with utmost seriousness. Gene, it's fine. Mm. I see. Aihaji nodded. Hearing this, Orochimaru couldn't help but ask, "Can I leave now?" "Wait ah interjected." Orochimarus expression darkened. He had already handed over the impure world reincarnation technique, and nearly all
Speaker A
of the Jonan level reincarnated bodies he had gathered had been taken by Aiha Jyn's side. In short, he had gained nothing from this venture. And under these circumstances, he still wasn't being allowed to leave. At this thought, Orochimarus demeanor turned grim.
Speaker A
"Jinkuin, don't go too far." His eyes flashed with cold menace. Yes, he was one of the legendary Sanin. Orochimaru was not someone to be trifled with. Aiha was different too. Even if Achiha Jyn's terrifying dojutsu did give him pause,
Speaker A
Orochimaru was not entirely without a means to fight back. Rest assured, Orochimaru, Iiihajene, keep my word. The impure world reincarnation technique you just gave me is your apology for the trouble you caused us today. Now, I wish to make a deal with you. Of course, you
Speaker A
are free to decide whether to accept it. Even if you refuse, it's fine. Aihajins tone was calm. As the Hokag of the new Kohó, he naturally wouldn't contradict his own words. After all, his earlier conversation with Orochimaru had been witnessed by the
Speaker A
entire village. He couldn't afford to go back on his word. Otherwise, he would trust him as Hokag in the future. Thus, since Orochimaru had offered an apology, the trouble he had caused would be considered fully settled. What he wanted
Speaker A
now was a transaction. Meanwhile, on the other side, upon hearing this, Orochimaru breathed a slight sigh of relief, and his expression began to soften. Good. Aiha was being honorable, which lifted his spirits considerably. A transaction, I'm very interested. What
Speaker A
do you need, Jin Kuen? Orochimarus eyes flickered with curiosity. Indeed, Aihajene was no ordinary man now. As the hokag of a hidden village, what could he possibly want from him? Observing Orochimarus face brimming with curiosity, Aiha had no intention of
Speaker A
wasting words. hasharama cells and all the research materials you have on them. If you're interested, feel free to make an offer." Aiha spoke with blunt directness as his words echoed. The people behind him, though initially startled, quickly composed themselves.
Speaker A
It was Orochimaru who froze entirely. Asharama's cells. Could such a thing really be spoken of so casually in public? In Orochimaru's understanding this was an absolute taboo for the ninja villages, especially Kohaa. Even if Aiha truly coveted the power of wood release,
Speaker A
he should never have voiced it. so openly, especially sonade. She was right there in the crowd. How could she possibly tolerate him so blatantly discussing research on her great-grandfather? Instinctively, Orochimaru couldn't help but glance at Sununade only to find himself even more
Speaker A
stunned. Her expression was remarkably calm. He couldn't contain himself. Aihaji wants to study Hashiama's cells.
Speaker A
Don't you have anything to say? Orochimaru asked bewildered. Unfortunately, responded with utter composure. Even if you're willing to trade these materials, the research will likely fall to me anyway. Do you understand what I mean? Yes. The research on hasharama cells was not a
Speaker A
secret in the new Kohaa. Unlike the secret of research in the old Kohaa, the new Kohaa's work was conducted openly.
Speaker A
It was simply that had been too busy, especially with the old Kohaa still existing to dedicate much time to it.
Speaker A
Orochimaru at this moment, he was truly dumbfounded. He quickly scanned the expressions of everyone present and instantly realized that the research on hasharama cells was no secret in the new koha. In fact, it seemed everyone already knew. He couldn't help it. A
Speaker A
faint envy stirred within him. Back in the old kohha, none of these people held such attitudes and everyone refused to conduct such cruel experiments. In those days, he had to hide in the basement everyday for his experiments, living
Speaker A
like a rat, ashamed of the light. But now, now the new Kenoha conducted such research openly in the daylight. He wanted that, too. If the old Kohaa had permitted such practices, even if he had lost the position of fourth hokage, he
Speaker A
would never have left in anger. So he couldn't help but look at Aiha, the core figure of the new Kenoha. Gene sama, can you tell me why? How did you convince everyone? Why do they all have such expressions? Tell me the truth, and I'll
Speaker A
give it to you for free. Orochimaru spoke immediately. Yes. While Hashiamarama cells were precious, they could be cultivated indefinitely. There was essentially an unlimited supply. As for his own research manuscripts on Hashurama cells, they were worthless.
Speaker A
Consider that even after all this research, although they had produced Yamo and Danzo Hashurama cell arms, they were essentially unfinished products. So these materials were hardly precious. On the contrary, he was genuinely interested in the current situation, unable to understand how Achihaene had
Speaker A
convinced everyone in Kenoha. He was truly jealous. If the Hokage of the old Kohaa had been Aiha, he would never have become a missing mean. So he genuinely wanted to know the specific reasons willing to gift all of this away for
Speaker A
free. After all, it was worthless. Meanwhile, a faint smile appeared on Achihajin's face before he spoke in a remarkably calm tone. The reason is simple. Because I, Aiha, am sufficiently transparent, and my heart holds none of the darkness that people like Husen
Speaker A
Saratobi harbors. Therefore, my actions can naturally be brought into the sunlight open to everyone's scrutiny and observation. I do not discriminate against human research, nor do I treat scientific inquiry as an abomination. On the contrary, I regard it as a latter
Speaker A
for human progress. Thus, the research facilities of the new Kohaa are not hidden in some underground secret chamber, but in a plainly visible three-story building not far from the Hokag tower. The funding allocated for research, as well as all other
Speaker A
expenditures, are publicly disclosed on a monthly basis. As for the sources of experimental subjects in human research, they are generally prisoners from hostile villages. Though more often they are volunteers. For instance, those seeking a better life for their families
Speaker A
or those whose injuries render conventional medicine useless. So they gamble on this special treatment. The sources are quite numerous. Moreover, even those who become subjects are not controlled. They remain free individuals throughout the process. They may leave at any time and can even return home
Speaker A
each day. Furthermore, our laboratory commits to employing gentle approaches rather than radical indifferent ones that disregard the well-being of subjects. Roughly, that is all.
Speaker A
Therefore, our research institution in the new koha is entirely different from what you imagined Orochimaru. This is an organization that can be placed under the sunlight. As for the research on hasharama cells, it is essentially unrelated to other ninja clans. Even if
Speaker A
there are subjects, they would only be achi. Because my research on hasharama cells is fundamentally aimed at solving the problem of mangeko sharinggon users going blind after prolonged use. I presume you have also discovered through your years of research that the shaing
Speaker A
can suppress hashurama cells. Danzo s arm is a product of that finding. However, while your approach focused on the shaing suppressing hasharama cells, my primary research explores using hashurama cells to stimulate and gently nurture the shaing, especially the
Speaker A
maneko. Aiha Jeene spoke with calm composure. This was hardly any secret to him. As Hokag, he had no need for shadows root or darkness. Everything he did was conducted in the open for all to witness. So since Orochimaru wished to
Speaker A
know there was no harm in telling him. After all, he had already prepared for this transaction. Since Orochimaru now offered to gift it freely, he certainly had no reason to refuse such a fortunate opportunity. Meanwhile, having listened to these words, Orochimarus eyes
Speaker A
grew increasingly complex. After a long while, he let out a soft sigh and casually tossed another scroll forward.
Speaker A
At this moment, Orochimaru felt utterly dejected. Yes, he did. When he thought about how the new Kinoa openly conducted research without any discrimination, and even Sununade could carry out her studies so openly, he had to admit he was envious. Though he had made
Speaker A
immortality his lifelong goal, and seemingly severed all ties with Kohaa when he defected, in truth, it was a necessity. But in reality, it was a last resort. After all, humans are social creatures. If others had understood his pursuits, would he have chosen to defect
Speaker A
so directly back then? He used to think it didn't matter as long as he could pursue immortality, losing friends, and severing bonds was acceptable. But now, seeing the new Koha, his heart began to feel unbalanced. Thus, he felt it was
Speaker A
all meaningless. He even secretly wondered if only he had met a hokag like Achihajene back when he was still in Kanoha. Meanwhile, on the other side, Aiha used a fire release to dry the mucus on the scroll before casually
Speaker A
tossing it to sununade. Then looking at the disheartened Orochimaru, he pondered briefly and seemed to grasp Orochimarus thoughts. After a moment's thought, he added, "Orochimaru, would you like to join the new Kenoa?" "Me? Join." Orochimaru was taken aback.
Speaker A
But I'm a rogue ninja. You would let a rogue ninja like me join a Orochimaru couldn't quite understand. Yes, indeed.
Speaker A
If Hirus and Saratobi were still in charge, he would have been confident about returning to Kenoha simply by using a classified mission as an excuse.
Speaker A
But back then, he looked down on Kenoha's decaying windmill. Of course, if Jeriah orsunade had taken over, he would have had a chance to return as well. But Aiha, this left him puzzled as he had no prior connection with him.
Speaker A
Regarding this, Aiha Jeene spoke calmly. Why not? Orochimaru, you need to understand one thing. I didn't seize power within Kenoha. I chose to start a new from scratch. I founded the new Kenoa. Everyone else joined later. You are a rogue ninja of the old Kenoha.
Speaker A
What does that have to do with my new Kenoa? Orochimaru was stunned. Being a sharp-minded person, he instantly understood. Indeed, Aiha didn't inherit or user power, he didn't take on the role of the fifth Hokag. He simply built
Speaker A
a new village outside, becoming its founder and first Hokag. Nominally, he was still a rogue ninja of the old Kohaa with no ties to the new Kohaa.
Speaker A
Therefore, he could remain a rogue ninja of the old Kohaa while still joining the new Kohaa before him. In an instant, fully grasping this, Orochimaru couldn't help but admire Aiha. Though it seemed to involve the same old personnel in
Speaker A
essence, it was an entirely new framework and system. The old baggage of Kohaa could no longer affect the present. Thinking this, he began to feel tempted. After all, truly starting a venture outside was indeed difficult.
Speaker A
His current sound village was nothing but a small-scale operation. The resources and manpower he could muster were incomparable to a major ninja village like Kenoha. His underground research facilities had to be moved frequently, and a single battle could
Speaker A
destroy a base. Those high precision research instruments cost a fortune to set up each time. In contrast, if he had a major village like Kenoha as his backing, he wouldn't have to worry about such troubles and could devote himself
Speaker A
entirely to his research. Honestly, he was truly tempted. After all, the new Kenoha was different from the old. It didn't restrict his research. However, after careful consideration, Orochimaru shook his head helplessly. I'm sorry, though this offer is very tempting. I've
Speaker A
already joined a mysterious organization, so I'll have to think it over. Yes, despite his inner temptation, after a moment's deliberation, he reluctantly declined. Upon hearing this, Aiha couldnt help but smile faintly. The Akatsuki, right? Orochimaru was stunned. You know about it, Ga. Of
Speaker A
course, Achihajin replied, I know it well. If you're worried about pain of the Akatsuki, there's no need. I admit the rene is powerful, but I have the ability to protect you. If pain disagrees, let him come to me. Oh, and I
Speaker A
also understand your thoughts. You want to study the renegon, don't you? That's not necessary. I can tell you that pain is just a decoy placed in front to draw attention. There's a mastermind behind the Akatsuki and behind that mastermind
Speaker A
lies an even deeper one. You won't succeed. Aiha Jins expression remained calm, but his tone was doineering. Yes, he admitted that Nagato with the renegan was strong, but they were roughly evenly matched. In short, they were both at the super kaga level.
Speaker A
After all, the renegon didn't truly belong to him. Despite his powerful Usuzamaki bloodline, the constant draining by the demonic statue of the outer path, and the renegon had nearly turned Nagato into a dried up husk.
Speaker A
Nagato was now a crippled version. Though he could seemingly wield the reneg's power, he couldn't sustain a prolonged battle. But he was different.
Speaker A
Even with only the eternal mango, he had no fear of Nagato. The Akatsuki Sonade was startled and asked in confusion. The others also showed expressions of surprise and curiosity upon hearing this. But Aiha simply smiled. This isn't important. I'll tell you when I have
Speaker A
time. All right, Sununade nodded. Meanwhile, on the other side, Orochimaru, who was well acquainted with the Akitsuki, stood frozen in place, truly stunned. Yes, he couldn't understand. From what he knew of Aiha Jin, the man had barely left Kinoa since
Speaker A
the end of the third great ninja war. So, how could he know so much about the Akitsuki? It didn't make sense.
Speaker A
regarding the bewildered Orochimaru Aiha Jeene offered no further explanation. Orochimaru after a moment of contemplation simply nodded in agreement. Very well, I shall join you.
Speaker A
However, if that is the case, I trust you Lord Hokag will handle the troubles with the Akitsuki organization.
Speaker A
Orochimarus eyes flickered with thought. On one hand, Achiha Jins openness regarding research fields was indeed far more beneficial than his previous solitary pursuits. Yet more importantly, he wished to probe and see how this new Hokag would deal with the
Speaker A
Akatsuki moving forward. As for his research falling into Aiha Jyn's hands after joining the new hidden leaf, he scoffed inwardly. He care not. As long as his pursuit of immortality wasn't hindered, nothing else truly mattered to him. Good welcome aboard. Don't worry
Speaker A
about the Akatsuki. If they dare to act recklessly in the leaf, I will deal with them personally. Also, since you've chosen to join my new leaf, there's no need for your hidden sound village to continue existing. Move your personnel
Speaker A
and laboratories back here as soon as possible. Aiha said with a smile. He harbored no concern for the Akatsuki.
Speaker A
After all, Nagato wasn't yet prepared and wouldn't easily step onto the stage to oppose a major village like the leaf.
Speaker A
Moreover, even if he did attack, so what? The leaf under his rule was far from the broken village that was ravaged by Herusen Saratobi and then inherited by in the original timeline. While his village might not boast a forest of
Speaker A
experts, it certainly wasn't intimidated by the Akatsuki either. The Aiha clan alone had him with his eternal maneko plus Fagaku and Shway with their maneko.
Speaker A
Itachi had also touched the limits of his three tommo sharing teetering on the verge of awakening his maneko. However, Achihajene had held Itachi back. His physique was too frail to withstand the drain of the maneko. If forced to awaken
Speaker A
it now, he would become as weak as his original counterpart. Though seemingly powerful, he would be a spent force merely holding on until Sasuke grew up.
Speaker A
Why? He was simply too young. Despite his strong Achiha bloodline in the original story, his mano was forced open by the trauma of Sher Sui's death. Now it was different. The Aiha were immensely powerful and with Aiha Jyn's
Speaker A
rise relations with the village had completely thawed. There was no need for Itachi to be pushed prematurely. So his advice to Atachi was to temporarily set aside his sharing and train in Taiutsu with Mike Guy to build up his physical
Speaker A
strength. Then once the hashurama cell research was on track and he had received the transplant, he could awaken his man Gekckyo without suffering the fate he did in the original story. Under these circumstances, even if the Akatsuki were to attack Achihajene
Speaker A
wouldn't be the least bit afraid. I see understood. I will have my people return to the leaf as soon as possible.
Speaker A
Orochimarus eyes held a deep unfathomable look. He truly hadn't expected Achihajene to be so formidable, knowing not only about the Akatsuki's movements, but also having him completely figured out, even down to the affairs of the hidden sound village. Em
Speaker A
good, let's head back. Aiha naturally noticed Orochimaru's deep gaze, but said nothing more. With a faint smile, he took the lead towards the new hidden leaf. The others naturally followed.
Speaker A
Time passed. Three days later, the western wasteland, where the Saratobi and three other clans were temporarily detained, had been transformed into a massive temporary prison. Tall wooden walls surrounded the area and countless A&BU monitored the perimeter. Apart from
Speaker A
a daily delivery of food supplies, the prisoners were essentially left to their own devices. Through the intense efforts of Sununade and Shikazu over these past few days, the allocation of the labor force from the four clans had finally
Speaker A
been tentatively agreed upon by the major ninja clans. Today was the day of the formal trial held in the vast plaza before the Hokag building. A temporary stage had been erected in the square.
Speaker A
Aihajin along with Fugakuade Shikazu and Kakashi sat behind desks on the stage. The leaders and elders of the major ninja clans were seated to the right of the stage while the heads of the vill's various departments were on the left.
Speaker A
Directly facing the stage stood countless civilians of the new hidden leaf. And in the center lay the captured members of the Saratobi and other three clans. However, the faces of the three former leaf elders, including Herusen Saratobi, were pale and filled with a
Speaker A
creeping dread. Clearly, they never imagined Aihaene would go for the jugular subjecting them to a public trial. Evil Aiha, how dare you? We are former leaf elders. Even if we made mistakes, you cannot humiliate us in this manner. Damn it. What do you think
Speaker A
the title of Hokag means? Even if you had us executed in secret, you shouldn't trample the name Hokage underfoot. Don't you understand even that basic principle? Hamurramidokado and Kohar Utudatain were cursing loudly. Yes, they couldn't believe Aihaene would dare to
Speaker A
do such a thing. Especially Hirusen Saratobi. Even though he wasn't shouting, his eyes were dark and venomous. His face was ashen and his entire body trembled with rage. He was grinding his teeth so hard it seemed they might shatter. He was consumed by
Speaker A
hatred. Had he known Aiha would resort to a public trial, he would have killed himself upon surrendering 3 days ago. As the third Hokage, he could not endure such humiliation. But why Hirusen Saratobi genuinely couldn't comprehend it? Aihajene was the Hokag now. Didn't
Speaker A
he realize the immense impact of putting him on trial? Any normal Kagaya would try to downplay this affair at least grant him some dignity. He could be killed, but the title of Kaga should not be dishonored. This was the reason he
Speaker A
had chosen to surrender 3 days prior. Having clashed with Achihajene these past years, he knew him to be a formidable leader and had assumed naturally that Achihajene would understand these unspoken rules. like himself in the past. Even after
Speaker A
destroying the Syninju clan, he hadn't tarnished their reputation. He had even elevated sununade holding her in high regard. But damn it, he hadn't expected Achiha to be so dishonorable to actually stage a public trial for him.
Speaker A
Unfortunately, it was too late for regrets. With his chakra completely sealed, he couldn't even take his own life now. Aiha remained expressionless.
Speaker A
Seated high in the center of the podium, he completely ignored the clamor of Uditen Koharuru and Midokado Hamira, choosing to disregard them. Just a bunch of grasshoppers. After autumn, he turned to sununade and spoke in a calm tone.
Speaker A
Summon the ancestors using the impure world reincarnation. On such a momentous day, they should witness this too. It will greatly benefit the stability of the new village moving forward. Although I founded the new Kohaa, it is still built upon the legacy of the old. Sonade
Speaker A
was stunned. She had never expected Aihaji to do this. This was a ruthless strike against the very soul of the old regime. But upon further thought, it made sense. Aiha Jyns reasoning was sound. Though this was the new Kenoha,
Speaker A
it still had the foundation of the old. Having the ancestors of the old Kenoha bear witness would greatly contribute to the vill's future stability. With this in mind, she nodded and began forming hand seals. Impure world reincarnation.
Speaker A
With a series of explosions, rows of coffins were summoned. As the coffin lid slowly came down, the many resurrected warriors gradually opened their eyes.
Speaker A
Tobaramaju stretched his hands and looked at them with displeasure, summoned again by this damn jutzu.
Speaker A
Tobarama, "It's all your fault." Hashiama shouted, "I told you many times. Just stick to mastering your water style instead of constantly researching those strange techniques.
Speaker A
You never listen. Now look what's happened." His eyes were filled with reproach and anger. In response, Tobarama let out a disdainful snort, completely ignoring his elder brother.
Speaker A
Enough. Hashiama shut up. Mido Uzumaki crossed her arms and shot a warning glare at Hasharama. He instantly cowed.
Speaker A
The person he feared most in life was Mido Uzumaki. Whenever he wanted to secretly play with Madura, he had to carefully avoid her. And every time he returned home, he was sure to be scolded. Grandmother Kusha Uzumaki smiled gently upon seeing Mido. As for
Speaker A
Sukumo Hataki, he remained silent instead fixing his gaze on the podium. specifically at the white-haired masked man seated at the edge. Although he had never seen an adult Kakashi, he instantly recognized his son. At that moment, Kakashi also looked at Suko
Speaker A
Haki. "Father," he murmured softly, but his voice was low. Given the formal occasion, he could not simply go and greet him. Sukumo Hitaki waved at him.
Speaker A
Seeing his own son seated among the core leadership, he could die content. Just then, approached the group. Grandfather, grand uncle, grandmother, today I have summoned you from the pure land to witness the trial of Hirusen Saratobi and others and to draw a final
Speaker A
conclusion on the decades of corruption in old Kenoa. Sunat did not waste words. After briefly greeting everyone, she directly stated the purpose. Then considering that those present were unfamiliar with the situation, she began recounting events from the death of her
Speaker A
grandfather Hasharamaju onward, covering everything that had happened in Kohaa up to the present. It was necessary to give them a basic understanding of the circumstances. Half an hour later, the resurrected warriors now fully informed fixed their gazes on Hirus and Soratobi
Speaker A
and the others with extreme hostility, especially Tobarama Senju, as these were the students he had mentored. Their disgrace reflected poorly on him as a teacher. However, he said nothing and instead turned a cold gaze toward Achiha Gene on the high platform. Clearly, even
Speaker A
after learning of the events of the past years, he still harbored deep resentment toward the Aiha. Butsunade after briefly explaining the situation returned to her seat on the podium to the left of Aiha.
Speaker A
As a village leader, it was awkward for her to sit while her elders stood. But in such a formal setting, there was no alternative. On the other side, seeing return, Aiha Jeene finally spoke. All right, everyone. Old Kohaa is now
Speaker A
history, but we must remember history using it as a lesson to avoid repeating the same mistakes. While exposing those criminal and foul secrets may tarnish the title of Hokag and cover it with dust if we do not cut away these
Speaker A
parasitic tumors, the village will never be able to move forward unburdened. Therefore, today's trial is not only to judge Harisen Soratobi and the old Kenoha leadership, but also to sound an alarm for all of us present. From now
Speaker A
on, when anyone contemplates committing crimes, they should remember the fate of these people. Only by remembering history can the alarm bell ring forever.
Speaker A
Aiha Jyn Jins lofty words instantly brought semnity to the entire gathering. Indeed, many present were reluctant to see Husen Saratobi and the others put on trial. In their view, these were former village leaders. Why not simply dispose of them quietly? Tarnishing the name of
Speaker A
the Hokag was not beneficial to those in power. The higher one's status, the more one wishes to preserve the veil of superiority. But Achiha Jyns words left everyone speechless. Only Hashiama clapped in approval. Well said, young man of the Aiha. I support you.
Speaker A
Tobaramaju was exasperated. However, he had to reconsider the aiha before him as such words were not typical of an aiha.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, Achihajene had no time for idol chatter. He merely paused briefly before continuing his speech. He detailed the dishonorable rise of Husen Saratobi, his persecution of the Syninju and Usuzamaki clans, the deaths of Nwaki, and Dan the forced suicide of
Speaker A
Sakomao Hataki under public pressure, the suspicious circumstances of Manado Namek's death, and finally the persecution of the Aiha under Herusen.
Speaker A
Upon hearing of the persecution of the Senju Hasharama, immediately spoke, I never said that the entire Synu clan should dissolve into the village. I only hoped that some members would integrate, and that was merely a call, not a forced
Speaker A
requirement. I must clarify this. I simply believe that too few villagers could condense Chakra and I hope that by blending some of the Synu bloodline into the village, more ordinary people could become civilian ninjas. Senu Hasharama was consumed by fury. He believed that
Speaker A
Saratobi Harusen had twisted his words. He had never said anything about the Syn being forced to integrate into the village. This was utter nonsense. And at this Senju Tobarama's expression turned equally grim. He immediately spoke coldly to Saratobi Herusen. monkey, you
Speaker A
deserve to die. As my disciple, do you even understand such a basic truth? Back then, my brother and I consented to a portion of the Synu members integrating into Kohaa solely to nurture more individuals with ninja potential among
Speaker A
the common populace. This was to expand the ninja base, thereby countering warriors from other hidden villages. And after my brother's passing, I revised his approach entirely. My brother spoke of voluntary integration. Any Senju clan member could assimilate into the village
Speaker A
if they wished. But my intention was that only commoners within the Senu clan and those with poor ninja aptitude could be permitted to abandon the Senju name and merge into the civilian populace.
Speaker A
Senu members above the rank of Chunin, even if they desired it, were forbidden from merging into the civilians. Even after integration, should any prodigy emerge among their descendants, they must rejoin the Synu clan. As my disciple, how could you be unaware of
Speaker A
this? or did you deliberately choose ignorance? Senju Tobarama erupted in fury. Indeed, though his elder brother was a simpleton, he would never orchestrate the demise of the Senu clan.
Speaker A
He had merely called for a portion of people to voluntarily integrate into the populace. And at the time, his brother's motive was not to increase the ninja base, but to stabilize the newly founded village, which was fraught with internal
Speaker A
strife. But equally, his brother Senu Hasharama had never intended for the Sinju clan to perish. And after Hashiamarama's death, when Sinju Tobarama assumed leadership, he changed his stance entirely. He no longer spoke of voluntariness. Instead, he tightened the restrictions directly. Sinja members
Speaker A
with considerable ninja talent were strictly forbidden from abandoning the Synu title and joining the civilians.
Speaker A
Only commoners and those with poor ninja aptitude were allowed. But now, according to what reached Saratobi Harusen, it became that the entire Sinju clan had to relinquish their title and everyone must integrate into the village. What was even more infuriating
Speaker A
was that those who refused to abandon the Syninju title were all sent to the front lines and met their deaths.
Speaker A
Meanwhile, those who were willing to give up the Synu name were tricked into becoming sacrificial victims for Hashuramicell experiments. What a brilliant move. On the other side, Usuzamaki remained indifferent to these matters, having witnessed such scandals back in her day. Thus, she was not
Speaker A
particularly enraged now, though her gaze towards Sir Toby Herusen grew colder. Hitaki Sukumo felt the same, though he was a samurai devoted to justice. His time in the A&BU had exposed him to the village's darkness.
Speaker A
Therefore, his choice of suicide was solely to protect Kakashi. Because when Saratobi Herusen failed to halt the public outcry, Sukumo knew that Husen wanted him tainted by darkness, stripping him of any chance to become the fourth Hokag, ultimately forcing him
Speaker A
to serve as Husen's obedient dog. But equally though, Haki Sukumo had never aspired to become the fourth Hokag. His pride would never allow his life to be manipulated by Saratobi Haruen. Nor would he be coerced into embracing darkness and becoming a lackey. However,
Speaker A
the question arose, could he resist? Despite his abilities at the time, Saratobi Herusen was firmly entrenched in the Hokag's seat. Any rebellion would have been feudal defect. What about young Kakashi? So unwilling to be a dog, yet desperate to protect Kakashi, he
Speaker A
hardened his heart and chose suicide. Thus, when Aihaji revealed the truth, Hitaki Sukumo's face betrayed no surprise, for he had long known the truth in his heart. Therefore, he merely watched silently. Only Usuzamaki Kusha.
Speaker A
At this moment, upon hearing Achihajin mention that the Knight of the Nine Tales was also suspicious, she became utterly incandescent with rage. Saratobi Husen, you deserve to die. How could I have never considered this before? Now that I think about it, it all makes
Speaker A
sense. Back then, only a few top Kohaa officials knew the time of my delivery.
Speaker A
Even the A and BU covertly guarding on the day of birth were only notified an hour beforehand. So how did the mastermind behind that night learn the true date of delivery? There must be a traitor. But I never imagined that you
Speaker A
saw a Toby Herusen would not even tolerate Manado for the sake of power. To think that Manado back then showed you a retired third Hokag considerable respect. Even after you stepped down whenever you spoke, Manado would comply despite his deep discomfort. Ultimately,
Speaker A
he always acquiesced. Under such circumstances, what more could you want? Minato with his gentle nature was still too much for us to harusen to bear. I have realized on the night our couple died when Manato sealed the nine tales
Speaker A
into Naro, he specifically entrusted the key to Mount Mayaboku. At the time, I was baffled as to why. You had already arrived Saratobi Herusen. But Manado chose to give the key to Mount Mayaboku rather than to you. So even then, Manado
Speaker A
must have seen through you Saratobi Huen even without concrete evidence, didn't he? Thinking back, it all makes sense.
Speaker A
These years, why has my Naro suffered so much? Huh? My child has survived only because you lack the key to unlock the ninetail seal on Naro, unable to extract the beast from him. That is the sole reason he has managed to cling to life,
Speaker A
isn't it? If Minato had truly handed the key to you, I suspect Naruto would have met an untimely end for some reason long ago. Sorry, Toby Harisen. You are truly ruthless. How could I have never seen through you such a despicable man? Why
Speaker A
is power truly that important? If it was so important, why did you hand it over to Minato? Why did you let him become the fourth Hokag? At this moment, Kusha Uzumaki's tone grew increasingly cold.
Speaker A
Clearly, after hearing Aiha Jyns words combined with the events of the Ninetales Knight, she instantly understood Manado Namik's choice. Back then, the couple had already determined that death was inevitable for them.
Speaker A
Thus, making their child the Ninetailes Genturiki was the only means to protect him. Because the key to the eight trigram ceiling was in Mount Mayaboku.
Speaker A
The Canoa higher-ups led by Husen Saratobi might have made their child's life miserable, but they would absolutely protect his life. Change the Genturiki. Absolutely impossible. This was the only solution Manado Name could think of to protect his child after
Speaker A
detecting the darkness in the village. Perhaps their child would suffer, but he would never die young. Hashiama Senju's face darkened. After hearing about the good deeds Husen Soratobi had done over the years, the usually carefree Hashiamarama's aura dropped to a
Speaker A
terrifying low. At this moment, he truly displayed the demeanor of the god of Shinobi. He stared fixly at Herusen Saratobi from a distance, though he seemed not to utter a single word, his surging killing intent firmly locked onto the old man. Yes, this god of
Speaker A
Shinobi had earned his title through bloodshed. Although he usually appeared lazy and simple-minded as a powerhouse capable of dominating an era, his true fury was something ordinary people could hardly withstand. They deserve death.
Speaker A
All these old Kohaa elites deserve death. I've always wondered why was Hirusen Saratobi the so-called strongest Hokag leading the village into ever growing hardships. Strong individuals and geniuses kept emerging yet they died for no reason. Only those old bastards
Speaker A
remained unscathe. When did our village begin to decline? It started with Husen Saratobi's reign, thinking about the will of fire. How ridiculous, isn't that right? Saying the old leaves burned to protect the new sprouts, but all the new
Speaker A
sprouts died inexplicably while these old leaves thrive. Countless civilians began to speak. Their expressions were grim, for they were too far from the upper echelons to notice many things.
Speaker A
Previously, they had vaguely sensed something wrong with the village, but they couldn't pinpoint exactly what. But now as Aiha Jeene slowly spoke, exposing the dirty deeds of the old Konoha elites, these civilians belatedly understood the things that had once
Speaker A
puzzled them. Meanwhile, amidst the curses and cries of death to them. Kohharudane and Hamier Midocado stared blankly, offering no reaction at all.
Speaker A
After all, ever since they surrendered and were captured, they had anticipated this scene. Neither of them cared much about reputation. Even now, facing such a public trial, they only feared execution. Our reputation meant nothing to them. The only one who cared was
Speaker A
Husen Saratobi. All his life he valued reputation above all, second only to clan legacy. Thus, he trembled with rage. His aged face twisted into a grimace. Nonsense, slander. I admit the matters regarding the Synu and Usuzamaki clans, and I acknowledge my wrongs to
Speaker A
Sakumo Hitaki. I also bear responsibility for Orochimaru's situation, and I can admit to marginalizing the Aiah. But the incident involving Minado Name, it truly had nothing to do with me. I never intended to harm Manado. He was an excellent
Speaker A
Hokag. Although I did cling to Hokag authority at the time and thought of having Minato serve as a transitional Hokag while I groomed my son for the fifth Hokag position. I swear I never planned to kill Monado. That incident
Speaker A
had nothing to do with me. Husen Saratobi roared. Yes. Though earlier he had refused to admit anything now that things had reached this point. He chose to confess everything except the matter of Manado Namic which he would never
Speaker A
acknowledge. Nonsense. That incident truly had nothing to do with him. He could swear it. Seated on the high platform, Achihajene watched the agrieved Husen Suratobi and couldn't help but show a hint of sympathy in his smile. Yes, others might not know, but
Speaker A
as a time traveler, he was fully aware that Husen Saratobi wasn't lying this time. If blame was to be placed for the Manado Name's incident, it should fall on Kakashi, who was sitting beside him.
Speaker A
It was Kakashi who while visiting Ren Nohara's grave spoke a few extra words that were overheard by Aido lurking in the shadows. But why should he seek justice for Haruen Saratobi? Honestly, those unaware of the truth would never
Speaker A
guess it involved Kakashi. Just as Aiha Jeene was lost and thought Kusha Usuzumaki standing below could no longer contain herself and shouted at Husen Saratobi. You old monkey, you're lying.
Speaker A
Minato told only you the exact time of my delivery. Even Kohhur Utetain and Hamirado didn't know the full details.
Speaker A
Only you and Kakashi were fully informed. The other A and BU only knew there was a mission that night, but not the specifics. If not you, then who?
Speaker A
Could it be Kakashi? With Kusha Usuzamaki's roar, Herusen Saratobi was left speechless. Yes, in a sense, even Husen Saratobi began to wonder, could he really be the culprit? Could he have forgotten due to sility? But no, he truly didn't recall such a thing. Yet,
Speaker A
he had no way to refute Kusha Usuzamaki because Kusha was right. The delivery date of the Ninetailes Genturiki was a critical secret. Since Manado Name was the Hokag at the time, such important information would not have been shared
Speaker A
with others. He told Harusen because of his status as the third Hokag whom Minado deeply respected and trusted. He told Kakashi because Kakashi was a student. Beyond that, no one else knew.
Speaker A
Whether it was the AMBU guards that night or the medical ninjas at the hospital, they were all notified just before the operation began with no opportunity to inform anyone else. Given the attackers behavior on the night of the Ninetales, they clearly knew the
Speaker A
Genturiki's delivery date in advance. Thus, the only possible leakers were the two who knew the full truth. Husen, Saratobi, and Kakashi, Kusha, Usuzumaki trusted Kakashi. Given his deep respect for Anato, he would never have leaked such information. Therefore, the only
Speaker A
person with a motive to leak it was the power- hungry Husen Saratobi. Saratobi Husen. Upon hearing these words, he stood frozen in place. There was no way.
Speaker A
He truly could not refute. Usuzamaki Kusha's chain of suspicion was far too airtight. Although she could produce no evidence, the matter required none. Only himself and Kakashi had known the information in advance and he was convinced Kakashi was not the one who
Speaker A
leaked it. Then who else could it be? It seemed only himself, but damn it, it really wasn't him. Saratobi Herusen was driven to the brink of madness. Yet, no matter how he racked his brain, he could not find a scapegoat. Wait, scapegoat? A
Speaker A
figure instantly flashed through his mind. His lifelong comrade, the one whose face and arms were wrapped in bandages. Yes, that was Kenoha's king of scapegoats, Danzo. At the thought, his eyes lit up and he immediately spoke aloud. Danzo, it must be Danzo.
Speaker A
Initially, considering the gravity of the Ninetales Guriki's child birth, I secretly informed Danzos route to stand guard. Danzo also knew of this in advance, so this must be his doing. That man's lifelong ambition was to become Hokag. When the fourth was about to
Speaker A
assume the position, I had to go to the Daimo's residence to negotiate. Back then, Danzo even attempted to assassinate me. Considering his advanced age, he must have thought that if he could eliminate Manado Name's, he would seize the chance to become the fifth
Speaker A
Hokag. Danzo has a motive, this must be his secret operation behind my back. Damn it, it's definitely him. After all, that fellow also possesses Kagami's Mangeko Sharing, which explains the Mangeko projection in the Ninetailes eyes back then. Saratobi Herusen
Speaker A
declared immediately. At first, he merely sought to shift blame, but the more he thought, the brighter his eyes became because it made far too much sense. Even he began to feel that this was not merely scapegoating. It was
Speaker A
highly likely that Danzo had indeed done it. His gaze grew increasingly resolute and even the others began to believe.
Speaker A
Aiha Jeene narrowed his eyes. How intriguing. He had never expected events to unfold in such a manner. However, watching a dog eat dog spectacle would be quite entertaining. With that thought, he summoned a scroll and retrieved Danzos would release arm
Speaker A
from within. Then Aiha spoke, "Truth becomes clearer through debate. Under my rule, the new Kenoha will not let a single villain escape, nor will it wrong an innocent man. Even if Saratobi Harusen is guilty of heinous crimes if
Speaker A
he did not commit this act, I will not pin the blame on him. This is Danzo's modified wood release arm containing not only would release cells and sharing, but also a portion of Danzo's genetic information. Guards, bring me a death
Speaker A
row convict from the prison. As Aiha spoke, the eyes of everyone present instantly filled with admiration and pride. Look, this was their new Hokag.
Speaker A
Even though Saratobi Haruen was already guilty of monstrous crimes, their new Hokage still refused to falsely accuse him. This behavior only deepened everyone's trust in Achihajene. Not letting a villain escape, nor wronging an innocent man. Well said. Hearing
Speaker A
this, the commoners erupted in fervent applause and cheers. Sununade frowned upon hearing this. Frankly, she disliked the frequent use of the Edeto Tensei technique, but she could not refute Aiha Jins words. In the end, she sighed softly and accepted it. Meanwhile, on
Speaker A
the other side, the many reincarnated warriors commoners and Shinobi below the stage saw Danzo's arm and their faces instantly darkened, especially the pale wood release cells and the crimson threetoone which deepened their disgust toward the old Kenoha leadership. Look,
Speaker A
this was one of the sins of the old Kohaa leadership. The old Kohaa leadership truly deserves to die. What were Huen and the others planning with Wood release and the sharing gone? What I'm more concerned about is didn't they
Speaker A
taint other bloodlines as well? This is damnable. Thank heavens for the rise of our new Hokag Aiha gene or else we clans would have been ruined by those old leaders. Indeed, those old Kohaa leaders deserve to die. Everyone present spoke
Speaker A
out especially the clans with bloodline limits or secret techniques. Their expressions grew increasingly grim and their gazes at Saratobi Husen and the others became filled with murderous intent. In fact, even the reincarnated warriors wore dark expressions. Hitaki Sukumo sighed softly. I knew the old
Speaker A
Kohaa had darkness, but I never imagined it to this extent. Damn it. Damn it.
Speaker A
Usamaki Kusha cursed furiously. So this is the so-called will of fire. Usuzumaki Mito snorted. Seeing this arm makes me sick. As for Sinju Hasharama, he was seething with rage. Frankly, he valued the village, yet he also did not value
Speaker A
it too much. What he truly wanted was to establish a village where children could grow up safely. Whether it was Kenoha or not did not matter. That was why he had not been overly angered when he learned that Aiha had founded the new Kenoha. In
Speaker A
his view, as long as Achihajene had earned everyone's recognition, the original vill's name was irrelevant.
Speaker A
After all, it was still the same people. But now, earlier hearing the list of Husen's crimes, he had been angry but not truly affected. Now, however, it was different. Staring at that revolting arm, especially the crimson sharing gone
Speaker A
upon it, Senju Hasharama felt his heart bleed. Was this the village he had created? had it decayed to such a degree. Frankly, if the current Hokag Achihajene had not yet spoken, he would have wanted to crush Saratobi Herusen
Speaker A
with a single slap. But he restrained himself, choosing to leave the judgment to Achihajene. So he immediately pointed at Senu Tobarama. Tobarama look at the disciples you taught. Brother, Sanju Tobarama's mouth twitched. They were not like this before. Speaking thus,
Speaker A
Tobarama was dumbfounded and felt deeply wronged. There was no help for it. In the past, these disciples of his had been quite obedient and well- behaved, hadn't they? Tobaramaju felt extremely agrieved. He was well aware that the environment could change a person,
Speaker A
especially one who held power but lacked strength. So, he had initially believed that Hirusen Saratobi would inevitably undergo some changes. But damn it, first of all, he never truly thought he would die. In hindsight, that incident was merely a test for his disciples. After
Speaker A
all, he was a man who possessed the flying thunder god technique. Even though he had been pushed to the brink by the cloud village, he honestly didn't think they could kill him. The problem was who could have imagined that the
Speaker A
cloud villages Kinkaku and Ginkako brothers would pull out six paths artifacts that could counter the flying thunder god. Secondly, even when he was on the verge of death, he had considered that after Herus and Saratobi took power since the Saratobi clan had no bloodline
Speaker A
limit, their strength ceiling would likely be low. And so for the sake of power, he would inevitably make some mistakes. But at that time, he was not afraid. In Tobarama Senju's plan, Huen Suratobi was merely a transitional Hokag. Considering that the Senu clan
Speaker A
had no strong figures emerging at that time and that if the Senu clan held the Hokag position for three consecutive generations, it would easily provoke discontent among the other ninja clans, especially the Aya. Therefore, the fact that Huen Soratobi's strength ceiling
Speaker A
was low was actually a good thing for him. Allowing the weak Husen Soritoi to serve as Hokag for a term would conveniently silence the other clans, especially the Aiha, preventing them from gossiping that the Synu had completely monopolized the Hokag
Speaker A
position. Then, as long as his elder brother's grandson, Nwaki Syninja, grew up, it would be effortless for him to take over as the fourth Hokag. The reasoning was simple. The ninja world ultimately speaks through strength, so-called power, is never as important
Speaker A
as actual ability. As long as Nwaki Senu could grow strong, relying on the Senu clan's foundation, reputation and influence, pushing him to become the fourth Hokag would be a piece of cake.
Speaker A
But the problem was that even Tobarama had not anticipated that power would cause Huen Saratobi to change so drastically in an instant. This bastard gave Nwaki no chance to grow. As soon as he gained power, he began plotting
Speaker A
against the Synu clan and casually wiped out the Usuzamaki clan, the Sinju's core ally. Using the excuse of integrating into Kohaa that he and his brother had casually mentioned, he directly sent the Synu elite to the battlefield to be
Speaker A
consumed. Then, under the pretext of wood release experiments, he schemed to kill a large number of Senu members.
Speaker A
Finally, taking advantage of the Senu's decline, he killed Nwaki Senju, killed by explosive tags. Thinking of this, he sneered inwardly. The Senu clan was renowned for its powerful life force and Nwaki Senu was the one with the strongest bloodline in the clan. Even
Speaker A
though he seemed foolish as a child as he grew up and his bloodline power awakened Noaki Senju would definitely become a powerhouse. Just like his elder brother Hasharamaju and Madara Aiha their strength as children was actually quite poor. They only began to slowly
Speaker A
awaken their bloodline power around the age of 15 or 16. Therefore, Tobberenu was absolutely certain that someone like Nwaki with such a powerful bloodline, even if the power hadn't manifested due to his youth, was definitely not someone ordinary could compare to, let alone
Speaker A
being killed by explosive tags. Even if he were covered in them, they would at most severely injure him, never take his life. So, alas, thinking that the strongest Synu clan of the waring states period would be directly destroyed in
Speaker A
the era of ninja villages, his heart became extremely agrieved and pained. However, looking at the arm of Danzo that Achiha Gene was holding his eyes couldn't help but flicker. Charinggon would release. As a master of scientific research, he instantly understood that
Speaker A
the purpose of the Shainggon was to suppress his elder brother's cells. This approach was indeed clever. Back then, he had vaguely sensed this, but he died too early and never had the chance to continue his research before perishing
Speaker A
on the battlefield. But thinking that there was such a brilliant researcher in this era, his mind began to conceive some other ideas. Tobarama, it's all your fault. If not for your precious disciples, the village wouldn't have ended up like this, and the Synu and
Speaker A
Usuzamaki clans wouldn't have been destroyed. In any case, you must take responsibility for this. Hasharamaju kept roaring. At first, he was merely venting his anger, but soon he vaguely felt that he seemed to be a bit stronger than his younger brother. At least, the
Speaker A
destruction of the Senu clan had nothing to do with him. It's all that fool Tobarama's fault. Yes, indeed, Tobarama is the fool. Oh, I'm smarter than him.
Speaker A
Although the destruction of the Sinju clan made him furious thinking that he was smarter than his brother, still made him want to laugh secretly. No help for it. Although his strength surpassed his brother's Tobarama had spent his whole
Speaker A
life mocking his intelligence. And now facts prove that Tobarama is the fool. Tobarama Senju. He just glanced sideways at his elder brother and knew exactly what he was thinking. But the problem was he couldn't refute it. So though he
Speaker A
felt extremely agrieved, he could only silently endure. Meanwhile, on the other side, just as Hashiama Senju was cursing his younger brother, Tobarama, the U directly brought a death row prisoner to the scene. Lord Hokag, this is a spy
Speaker A
from the cloud village at Chunin we captured. The U knelt on one knee is tone calm. In response to this, Aiha just nodded upon hearing this. We only need to ask Danzo some questions. A tunin level impure world reincarnation
Speaker A
is sufficient. After speaking, he nodded to beside him. Though still reluctant stood up and walked over to the unconscious death row prisoner. However, she did not act directly. Instead, she called out Orochimaru who was watching the show and quickly performed the
Speaker A
impure world reincarnation ritual. Finally, she formed hand seals and summoned Danzo's soul from the pure land. I, this is impure world reincarnation. The awakened Danzo looked bewildered. Then, as he instinctively looked around, his face instantly turned ashen. Clearly, he realized that the old
Speaker A
Kohaa had completely collapsed. However, thinking that his old friends like Husen Saratobi had become prisoners, his mood instantly improved. Although he had failed in his lifelong pursuit of becoming Hokag, the fate of his old friends didn't seem much better, which
Speaker A
for Danzo was evidently a somewhat acceptable outcome. Speak. What do you want by summoning me with impure world reincarnation? At this moment, Danzo looked defiant. Yes, since he was already dead, what was there to fear? At this moment, Danzo bore an expression of
Speaker A
arrogant defiance. After all, he was already a corpse. What could Achihajin possibly do to him now? He unconsciously glanced around. Although the appearance of Chinsho Fein sent a chill down his spine, he quickly regained his composure. He was dead already. What was
Speaker A
there to fear? By nature, he was utterly selfish and self- serving. Back when Shinsho Fein had denied him the title of Hokag, resentment had already begun to fester in his heart against his teacher.
Speaker A
After a long life filled with failed attempts to seize the Hokag position, his hatred for Chincho Fein had only deepened. Of course, if he were still alive, no matter how bitter he felt, he would never dare to openly defy Shinshu
Speaker A
Fein. But the problem was he was already dead. So with a cold snort, Danzo dismissed Shinsho Fein from his thoughts and began surveying the situation around him. Almost instantly, he grasped that this was a trial for Yu and Feay Risen
Speaker A
and the others. Yet, he couldn't fathom why such a trivial matter had summoned him back. Danzo, tell me honestly, was the death of wolfing Shuan you're doing?
Speaker A
After all, only Schuan Kaki and I knew the delivery date of Jixenai, and I only told you. Unfair Risen immediately launched his attack, voicing the suspicion he had just formed. Clearly, he intended to pin this blame squarely on Danzo. He had no choice. His
Speaker A
reputation was the most precious thing to him in life. Even if his name was already tarnished, he refused to bear such a heinous stigma for Danzo. Wolfing Shuen was a Hokage. The weight of this accusation was terrifying. Though he had
Speaker A
been involved in the persecution of the Aiha clan and the suicide of Chimu Shuma, their status could never compare to that of a Hokag. Even the deaths of Chincho Shushing and even the entire Chincho clan pailed before the crime of
Speaker A
assassinating a Hokage. In Kenoha, the Hokag held a singularly sacred position. It was not merely a title, but the spiritual leader of all. If Euf Risen were to bear this accusation, the Yuf clan would be utterly destroyed. In
Speaker A
fact, they would never rise again as long as the name of Hokag endured the stigma of the Yufay clan's treachery would be passed down through generations. Who would ever dare to promote or trust the descendants of the Yuf clan? Indeed, Yuf Risen could accept
Speaker A
the past misdeeds because at worst he and those who performed the dirty work would die. The clan would surrender all the resources they had plundered and the remaining Yufay disciples would be sent to the front lines to perish. That would
Speaker A
be enough. As time passed, the Yufay clan might still have a chance to rise again. But if he admitted to the assassination of a hokag, then as long as Kenoha existed in this world, the Euanf clan would never have a chance to
Speaker A
recover. So this burden must be placed on Danzo. Moreover, Yuanf Risen had always believed that it was highly probable Danzo had indeed done it. After all, the man had once attempted to assassinate him the Hokag. Thus, under these circumstances, finishing off the
Speaker A
fourth Hokage as well seemed perfectly plausible. Danzo confessed, "Did you have anything to do with the fourth Hokage's death? Look me in the eyes and tell me. Chincho Fjins gaze was icy. He stared fixedly at Danzo, clearly placing great importance on this matter.
Speaker A
The position of Hokag was far too special. Almost instantly with Chinho Fein's words, the eyes of everyone present turned toward Danzo. Danzo. At that moment, he was utterly bewildered.
Speaker A
What the hell? Wolfing Shuan was killed by me. Damn it. Even though I have indeed done many dirty deeds, you can't just dump any filth on me. His eyes were filled with shock. And then he burst into furious curses. You and Fay risen.
Speaker A
You've gone too far. What does bluffing Schuman's death have to do with me? Why do you push everything dirty onto me?
Speaker A
And don't you forget one thing. I was your black glove. Every dirty D my route carried out had your approval. Take Orochimaru's research on hashurama cells for example. Without your consent as Hokag, how could all those high precision instruments have been brought
Speaker A
into the village? Such large objects couldn't be hidden with storage scrolls. Were all your umbu blind? The same logic applies to bluffing Schuan's death.
Speaker A
First, that night, I led Root to monitor the Aiha clan. There was absolutely no way I could have been involved in the Ninetailes incident. Second, I admit I desperately wanted to become Hokag. But do you think I had the ability? If I
Speaker A
truly had the power to control the Ninetales or even kill Woofing Schuan, then he wouldn't have been qualified to become the fourth Hokag in the first place. So, spare me. Don't try to smear me with this filth. I'm already dead. Do
Speaker A
you expect me to take the fall for him? Danzo raged showing no respect for Yu and Fay Risen. Of course, when he was alive, he had always borne the blame for Yu and Fay Risen. Back then, because he
Speaker A
wanted to expand his power and seize the Hokag position, he swallowed his pride and accepted it silently. But now, it was different. He was already dead. What benefit could Eufe Risen offer him? So, why should he take the blame? Euf Risen
Speaker A
was stunned. After turning it over in his mind, he had to admit there was logic to it. Indeed, he knew his old partner well. If Danzo truly had the power to kill bluffing Shu Min or control the Ninetailes, he would never
Speaker A
have chosen to lurk in the shadows. So, who was the real culprit? He was certain he wasn't the killer, and it seemed Danzo wasn't either. Could it be Kaki?
Speaker A
The name flashed through his mind, but he quickly dismissed it. Ridiculous. Absolutely impossible. He would rather believe he had amnesia and forgotten about it than believe Kaki was the murderer. So, well then, after perfectly eliminating the true culprit, Yuan Fe
Speaker A
Risen was at a loss. The matter was stuck. He couldn't refute Achiha Jins claim only he Kaki and Danzo knew in advance about Shuana Jaxini's delivery date. First Kaki wasn't the killer. Danzo didn't seem to be either.
Speaker A
So who was the murderer? Saratobi Herusen's face darkened because no matter how you looked at it, he seemed to be the most likely culprit. But damn it, he really wasn't the one. At this moment, he was about to cry so anxious
Speaker A
that he was nearly scratching his scalp off. After all, taking the blame for assassinating the Hokag was a burden he absolutely could not bear. Just as Saratobi Haruen was racking his brains, Danzo, who was standing nearby, couldn't help but sneer and say, "Enough,
Speaker A
Saratobi Herzen. I am already a dead man now. The world of the living has nothing to do with me, and I am destined never to become Hokag. So, you should understand in your heart that I have absolutely no reason to deceive you.
Speaker A
Minato Namke's death has nothing to do with me, Danzo, or Root. On the contrary, I also believe that Kakashi is not the killer since he had no reason to betray Minato Namikes. So, admit it.
Speaker A
This matter was most likely done by you, old monkey. But speaking of you, you old monkey, you are truly a ruthless man.
Speaker A
Just because Manado Names refused to obediently be a puppet Hokag, you actually had the audacity to directly kill him. To be honest, even I was deceived by you. I thought you were becoming more muddled and timid with age. I never imagined that Manado was
Speaker A
killed by you. I always thought the Aiha were the killers. But now that I think about it carefully, I finally understand. The Aiha were not accepted by the village's highranking officials at that time. How could they have known
Speaker A
in advance the delivery date of the Ninetailes Ginuriki? In that case, only you monkey have this ability. After all, you knew the Genturiki's delivery date.
Speaker A
And you also had a motive to take action yourself. Because although Manado Namay seemed gentle and easy to talk to in reality ever since he became the fourth Hokag, he had been trying to reclaim the Hokage's authority. On one hand, he had
Speaker A
Kakashi join the U, clearly intending to disrupt your U monkey. Secondly, he formed his own Hokag guard. You know, this institution was thrown into the trash along with your ascension as the third Hokag, but Manado Name still fished it out of the trash and used the
Speaker A
Hokag guard to win over the common ninja class. More importantly, at that time, although Minato didn't have devoted followers through the simple bonds formed during the third Shinobi World War by carrying out missions with the Enoshiko clans, he managed to win over
Speaker A
the four clans, the Nara, Akimichi, Yamanaka, and Abure. Furthermore, thanks to Kusha Uzumaki and Mikoto Aiha, the Aiiah clan had actually begun to implicitly support Manado Names during that period. I believe that if Manado were given two more years, he would
Speaker A
certainly have rested the Hokag's great power from your hands. But who would have thought? Old monkey, you are so ruthless. Not only did you instantly sense the danger, but you also struck viciously and directly killed Manato Namay. Impressive. Truly impressive.
Speaker A
Everyone, including me, as your comrade has underestimated your methods, old monkey. Although I still can't figure out where you found such a person. Not only possessing mango sharing to control the ninetailes, but more importantly, the guy you found is also proficient in
Speaker A
space-time ninjutsu. Spac-ime ninjutsu. If you think about it carefully, isn't it just the flying thunder god technique? I never thought about this subconsciously before, but now that I think about it, the answer is already obvious. After all, besides the flying
Speaker A
thunder god, where else in the ninja world could a new space-time ninjutsu come from? I suppose that person was secretly trained by your Soratobi clan, right? As for the mysterious person's mango on the night of the ninetailes, I
Speaker A
always thought it was a symbol of the Aiah. But upon careful thought about Kagami's Mangeko sharing gone back, then I actually only obtained one of his eyes. So where is the other Mangeko? H so hard to guess. Danzo's tone was
Speaker A
filled with sarcasm and disdain. However, accompanied by Danzo's new version of conspiracy theory, everyone present couldn't help but gasp in shock.
Speaker A
Because if we follow Danzo's reasoning, the events of that Ninetailes knight can indeed be explained. The mysterious person's proficiency in space-time ninjutsu could be attributed to his learning the flying thunder god. And the flying thunder god is a forbidden
Speaker A
technique unique to Kenoha. Saratobi Herusen obviously had the ability to obtain it. Secondly, the mysterious person's man Gekko Sharinggon could be the other eye that Kagami mysteriously lost back then. The logic loop is closed. It really is Saratobi Harisen.
Speaker A
Now it's confirmed. I never would have imagined that old man Saratobi Herusen was so ruthless back then. The other mano that Achiha Kagami lost back then, plus a member of the Saratobi clan, proficient in the flying thunder god
Speaker A
technique. But it's a bit inconsistent. If that mysterious person was truly a member of the Saratobi clan, why hasn't he stepped forward to help Saratobi Haruen when the Saratobi clan is in such dire straits now? What's so inconsistent? Probably the Saratobi clan
Speaker A
split into two branches long ago to protect themselves. Who knows which corner of the ninja world the other branch of Saratobi is in? I see that makes sense. Everyone present began to speak. Even Tobaramaju and others who had previously been sure that Danzo was
Speaker A
the culprit now looked gravely at Saratobi Herusen not far away. Obviously, they were also convinced by Danzo's words. After all, Saratobi Husen knew the Genturiki's birth time and he also had the opportunity to obtain the other Shainggon that Achihakagami lost
Speaker A
back then. More importantly, only Saratobi Herusen had the authority to cultivate someone capable of mastering a forbidden technique like the flying thunder god since others including the Achiha clan could not access Koha's forbidden technique scrolls. Therefore, all things considered, Saratobi Haruen
Speaker A
is the most suspicious. Aiha at this moment, he was sitting on the podium frozen in place. His mind went blank staring at Danzo in shock. To be honest, if he as a reincarnator didn't know the truth that the culprit of the ninetailes
Speaker A
knight was a veto which he happened to hear from Kakashi, he would have believed Danzo's words. Damn it. Danzo is truly a talent. No, it's not. All of you believe me. I really didn't kill Manado. I can swear to the heavens. Damn
Speaker A
it. Believe me. Saratobi Husen's voice was shrill at this moment. His whole body was cold and his face was extremely ugly. He had no choice. He felt terribly wronged. However, it was a pity. Faced with Saratobi Herusen's clamor, he did
Speaker A
not gain anyone's trust. Danzo's logical chain was too complete, and Saratobi Herusen also had that motive. Thus, even without any evidence, he was still destined to bear the blame. As for Danzo, although he possessed the scroll of the flying thunder god technique and
Speaker A
could obtain the mano sharing, seemingly making him one of the best candidates to take the blame, the problem was that he could not quite shoulder this burden.
Speaker A
Because if the mysterious person were one of Danzo's men, then given Danzo's obsession with the Hokag position, he would never have allowed Saratobi Herusen to reclaim the Hokag's authority so easily after Manado Namek's death. Enough stop arguing. Let me add a
Speaker A
few words. First, from the principle of who benefits most is most likely. There is no doubt that the fourth Hokag Manado Namik's death brought the greatest benefit to the third Hokag Soratobi Husen. He directly seized this opportunity to regain the Hokag's
Speaker A
authority and upon taking office, he immediately completely negated the fourth Hokag's governing policies. As everyone knows, when Minado Names became Hokage, he pursued contact and negotiation with the Aiha clan, helping them integrate into the village as much as possible. At that stage, the Inoshiko
Speaker A
clans also became high-ranking officials due to their outstanding abilities. But with Saratobi Herus's return to power, the process of integrating the Achiha into the village was completely shattered and they even faced more severe hostility than before. If the
Speaker A
Aiha matter were an isolated case, then the purge of the Inoshiko clans and the removal of key positions like the Jonin commander and intelligence chief would be enough to show that the targeting of the Aiha was not simply aha problem.
Speaker A
This is a purge of factions. If Saratobi Herusen only targeted the ninja clans after taking power, it might be understandable. But does anyone still remember the members of Minado Name's Hokag Guard? And no one remembers. And this point is enough to prove my view.
Speaker A
From Saratobi Herus's actions after his return to power, it is clear that he was extremely dissatisfied with Manado Name.
Speaker A
Otherwise, he would not have so thoroughly eliminated every trace of Minato's influence immediately upon taking office. Second, the possibility of Danzo being the culprit is slim because he gained almost no benefit.
Speaker A
Although I truly loathe that bastard Danzo, I must admit that on that night, Danzo and Root were locked in a standoff with the uchiah. If he were the real culprit, he would have used this opportunity to plot his rise to Hokag
Speaker A
rather than wasting time confronting the afterward. When Saratobi Husen became Hokag Danzo did not make a big fuss. If Danzo were the real culprit, he would not have given up so easily. After all, why would he pay such a huge price just
Speaker A
to pave the way for Saratobi Herusen? Considering that Danzo had even attempted to assassinate Saratobi Herusen in the past to become Hokag, the likelihood of him being the culprit is extremely low. As for the Shamura clan, they gained no benefits afterward
Speaker A
either. So although I hate Danzo to the core as a member of the Aiha, I disdain lying. The probability of Danzo being the culprit is not high. On the contrary, Saratobi Herusen is the most likely. Does anyone still remember that
Speaker A
during the Ninetailes night, Saratobi Husen contributed almost nothing throughout the entire incident? Apart from knocking the nine tales out of the leaf with a single staff strike, he did little else. Logically, as the strongest Hokag, he should not have been so
Speaker A
useless. If he truly believed in the will of fire and was willing to sacrifice for the village, he should have performed the dead demon consuming seal in place of Manado Names. After all, he was the withered leaf that
Speaker A
should burn for the village while the young manado was the village's fresh sprout. But the reality was exactly the opposite. In the end, it was Minato Namikes the sprout who sacrificed himself while Saratobi Herusen the withered leaf lived on to reclaim the
Speaker A
Hokag's seat. By now, everyone should understand the will of fire that old Kohaa revered was nothing but a joke, just a slogan for the rulers to exploit the common people. That is also why my new Kohaa does not advocate the will of
Speaker A
fire because I find it meaningless. The Aiha disdain such hypocrisy. Instead, I advocate that credit and reward should be proportional. The more you contribute, the more you gain. Fair and reasonable, honest and trustworthy, Aihajin declared loudly, seizing the
Speaker A
moment to deliver his speech. Not only did he firmly nail Saratobi Harusen to the pillar of shame, but he also took the opportunity to scorn the old Kohaa and positively promote the benefits of the new Kenoha. For a moment, with Aiha
Speaker A
Jin's speech, everyone inwardly nodded in agreement. Clearly, compared to the old Kenoha, which only demanded dedication without offering benefits, Aiha Jyn's new koha earned more favor from the crowd. Yes, although Hashiama founded Kinoa and truly valued the village even to the point of defeating
Speaker A
his own brother Madara Aja, he however did not care who held the reigns of power. As long as the village could protect the children as they grew, he was satisfied. Thus, although the old Kohaa he created had crumbled, this
Speaker A
village still nurtured the descendants of the major clans and commoners. That was enough for Hashiama, he cared nothing for his reputation as the first Hokag. Midito Uzumaki, already displeased with Saratobi Herus's actions, cared even less about the village's fate. Sukomao Hitaki was even
Speaker A
simpler. He had long been disillusioned by the old Kohaa. He did not care whether it lived or died as long as Kakashi was well. As for Kusha, h she and her husband died for the village, yet their child lived like a stray dog.
Speaker A
Moreover, she was originally from the Usuzamaki clan and only later joined Kenoha. What do you think she would feel for the old Kenoa? Only Tobarama felt deeply frustrated. Unlike the naive Hashiamarama, he truly harbored affection for the old Kinoa. Seeing it
Speaker A
destroyed naturally left him bitter, but considering the mess his own disciples had made, he could not bring himself to refute Achihajene. Moreover, his granddaughters had joined the new Kinoa, and judging by the current situation, had even become a high-ranking official.
Speaker A
So, he let it be. With a helpless sigh, he chose to say nothing more. That was that. If there was anyone present who was most displeased and agreved, it was clearly Saratobi Hirusen, the one being judged. helpless because in his heart he
Speaker A
knew very well that he was not the real culprit behind the scenes. However, it was a pity. No one cared about his roar and clamor. Instead, they directly moved on to the next step to avoid any appearance of bias. Aiha remained
Speaker A
silent. Instead, it was Naroku who stepped forward to directly announce the final judgment. Saratobi Herusen Yuditain Koho Kado Hamira and Shamura Danzo. These four, as the old Kenoha High Council, orchestrated a series of horrific incidents that shocked the
Speaker A
Shinobi world, all to cling to their own power. This resulted in countless talented individuals and geniuses of the village meeting untimely ends and reduced Kenoha from the strongest ninja village under the second Hokag to its current state of decay and decline.
Speaker A
Second, during the tenure of the Kenoha F4, they embezzled a significant portion of the village's financial budget.
Speaker A
Third, they were weak against external foes, yet cruel domestically. Despite being victorious in the third great ninja war, they secured no reparations.
Speaker A
During negotiations with Kimogicure, even though the cloud village had conspired to steal the Bakugan, they not only failed to seek justice for the Huga clan, but shamelessly ordered the clan to resolve it themselves. Fourth, they conspired to kill the fourth Hokag and
Speaker A
falsely branded his heroic son, Naro Usuzamaki, as the fox demon. This led to the hero's son being ostracized by the entire village. Moreover, the inheritance of Manado Namikes and Kusha Usuzamaki has yet to be returned to Narudo. In conclusion, the verdict is as
Speaker A
follows. Saratobi Herusen and the other three high-ranking Kenoha officials are sentenced to death row, but they shall also be made to serve 30 years of hard labor in their reanimated forms to atone for their crimes. The high-ranking members of the four great clans as
Speaker A
lackeyis of Saratobi Herusen and his cohorts are sentenced to 20 years of forced labor. The mid and lowranking members of the four great clans, while perhaps not guilty of direct crimes, have benefited from the resources embezzled by Saratobi Herusen.
Speaker A
Therefore, they are all sentenced to 15 years of forced labor. Furthermore, all family assets are to be confiscated. Of course, considering New Koha is a humane village, our esteemed Hokag Aiha is willing to offer those who have aired a
Speaker A
chance to reform. During the labor reform, rankings will be held every 10 days. The most diligent workers among the top 100 will earn one point. The top 50 earn three points. The top 10 earn five points. The third place earns 10
Speaker A
points. The second place earns 20 points. And the first place earns 30 points. Accumulating 100 points grants a one-year reduction in the labor sentence. Additionally, there are other ways. After each day's labor, one can write reflections or statements of
Speaker A
remorse. The most sincere can also earn points as encouragement. Those who choose to join the battlefield during times of war and achieve merits can also earn points. Those who invent a new jutzu and new technology or even find
Speaker A
ways to increase agricultural yield or invent new farming tools will receive substantial innovation bonus points for each contribution. Specific rules will be provided to you once you begin your labor reform. After saying this, Naroku sat back down, but an eerie silence fell
Speaker A
over the gathering. Clearly, the verdict from New Konoha was vastly different from what everyone had anticipated.
Speaker A
After all, following the traditional norms of this era in the shinobi world, the typical outcome would involve executing Saratobi Herusen and his cohorts, completely purging the four clans, confiscating their assets and suppressing them into insignificance.
Speaker A
Just like the Aiha were once suppressed by the village high council, but this current judgment left them utterly perplexed. What's going on? Is this punishment heavy or light? I can't quite figure it out. I'm also unsure. I can't
Speaker A
quite say. The crowd began to murmur amongst themselves. Even the resurrected figures stood there filled with bewilderment and shock. Only Hashiama Senju immediately clapped his hands and approval. Young Aiha, I support you.
Speaker A
Thank you for giving those kids like Saratobi Herusen a chance to reform. I increasingly believe you will become a great Hokage in the future. Keep it up.
Speaker A
I don't blame you for establishing new Konoha. Please take good care of the village from now on. Hasharamaju spoke with great emotion. Although Achihaene intended to execute Saratobi Herusen and the others his simple values told him they deserved it. As for the judgment on
Speaker A
the four clans, he also sensed a strong element of humanity. Labor reform. Those two words really weren't bad. Beside him, however, Tobarama Senju stood with his arms crossed looking at his elder brother in exasperation, a line of black
Speaker A
lines forming on his forehead. Idiot. Brother shut up. Unable to contain himself, Tobarama snapped at Hashiamarama. And to this, Hashiamarama scratched his head, looking at his brother in confusion. Tobarama, what's wrong? Why are you so angry, brother? Do
Speaker A
you truly think this judgment is light? Tobarama countered. Hashiamarama nodded. It does seem light. For such severe crimes, only four people are being executed in the end. Hearing his brother's words, Tobarama was left speechless because it was the truth. On
Speaker A
the surface, it appeared so. But as the second Hokag, he immediately perceived the deeper implications. light. Tobarama said coldly, "Brother, you're wrong.
Speaker A
This punishment is severe. It would have been kinder to simply kill them." That wicked Aiha to think of such a method.
Speaker A
Hashiamarama was utterly baffled. Staring at his brother, who looked so confident and as if he saw through everything, Hashiamarama was momentarily frozen in place. This judgment is severe. I really can't see it. Just as he was pondering, Mito Usuzumaki frowned
Speaker A
and spoke. Tobarama, please explain. I also sense something is off. Yes, I'm curious too. Kusha Usuzumaki couldn't help but nod. Though Sakomao Hitaki remained silent, he too looked at Tobarama with great curiosity. Indeed, they were not dense like Hasharama and
Speaker A
could vaguely sense the abnormality in this judgment method. But unfortunately, if pressed to articulate what exactly was wrong, they would struggle. It was no use. They were not masters of political intrigue. Being able to sense something a miss was already a feat. If
Speaker A
they possessed such political acumen, they wouldn't have been so easily eliminated by Saratobi Herusen. And to this, Tobarama frowned, organizing his thoughts before speaking in a grave tone. In the past, criminals were simply imprisoned. This required dedicated personnel for guarding and managing
Speaker A
their daily needs. But now, a under that wicked Achiha boy, these criminals have become the cheapest source of labor.
Speaker A
Tobaramaju spoke with eloquence and ease. As a former Hokag, he easily discerned the ruthlessness within this judgment and was inwardly startled by the troublesome Aiha Brad Aihajene. He even held a fundamentally pessimistic view of the village's future. There was
Speaker A
no helping it. Not only was this bastard exceedingly powerful, but his political maneuvering was so ruthless, it sent chills down his spine. Almost as soon as this judgment was rendered, Tobberenu's heart was certain that unless some unforeseen accident occurred, the
Speaker A
village would completely become the Aihas village from now on. Indeed, back when he was Hokag, he too had tried to reshape Kinoa into the Sinju's village.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, he had underestimated Kingu and Ginkaku of Kimogakure, which led to a mistake in the succession plan for the village's leadership. Had he not been so reckless back then and died on the Kimogakure battlefield, he could have continued to nurture Nwaki Senju
Speaker A
for another 10 years. Once Nwaki truly matured, he could then have handed the village completely over to Huen Saratobi as the third Hokag. Perhaps he himself would have passed away by then, but with a fully grown Nawaki Synu and the Senju
Speaker A
clan's formidable dominance, Huen Saratobi would have had absolutely no room to maneuver. He would ultimately have become nothing more than a dispensable transitional Hokag. Had Nwaki Senu become the fourth Hokag, then with the Senu clan strength as time
Speaker A
passed, as long as they could suppress the Aiha, they would absolutely be able to completely dominate the entire village of Kinoa. Yes, the ninja world is not like an ordinary historical world. One must remember that this world venerates marshall might above all. With
Speaker A
the Senu clan's bloodline, each generation could produce a large number of elite Jonin and Chunin, as well as one or two exceptionally powerful juniors. Moreover, as time passed, the Synu clan's dominance over Konoha would only grow more terrifying. Therefore, as
Speaker A
long as each generation could firmly suppress the Aiiah, the village of Kenoha would eventually become the Synu clan's private domain. Did he desperately suppress the Aiha merely because the Aiha were extreme? because the Aiha killed his three younger
Speaker A
brothers or because of the hatred between the Synu and Achiha clans of nonsense. He did it to completely rule Kohaa village for generations upon generations. Tobber Senu had long since keenly perceived the underlying logic of this world. Because the power inherited
Speaker A
in the Synu clan's bloodline meant they would never face the decline seen in the later stages of dynasties in the history of the land of flowers. He established the foundational rule of suppressing the Aiah. As long as they could suppress the
Speaker A
Achiha completely, make them as docil as sheep, and eradicate the Aiha's path to supremacy at its roots, the Sinju clan would eventually become the royalty of Kinoa. Because aside from the Aiha, no other ninja clan or commoner had the
Speaker A
qualifications to challenge the Sinju clan. Even if future Senu generations lacked political cunning, it wouldn't matter in this world that revered martial might. Having strength was enough. But unfortunately with his reckless death on the Kimogakure battlefield, Husen Saratobi, the
Speaker A
designated transitional Hokag directly became the deacto ruler of Kinoa. He even ruthlessly eliminated the Senuamaki and all other challengers within the village. Had her Saratobi truly managed to eliminate the Aiha, then the Saratobi and other three clans would have grown
Speaker A
into the position he had originally planned for his own Senju clan. This was also the reason why Tobarama Senu despite being angry after being reanimated was not overly furious.
Speaker A
Because had he been in Herus and Saratobi's position, he would have made the exact same choices. To put it simply, the Senu clan simply lacked luck. He had made a strategic error, so he couldn't blame others. With this
Speaker A
thought, he let out a soft sigh. Looking at the gazes of those around him, he pondered for a moment before beginning to speak again. The point system is even more ruthless. Originally, despite being pressured by the entire village, the
Speaker A
Saratobi and other three clans remained an unbreakable unity internally. But with the implementation of the point system, the internal cohesion of these four ninja clans will be completely destroyed. The Saratobi and other three clans have embezzled the vill's
Speaker A
financial resources for so many years. So you can imagine how rapidly they have developed over this time. Everyone must understand one thing. As long as you have money, offspring will multiply very quickly. Even if each clan has only
Speaker A
10,000 members, the four clans together would have 40,000. But according to the point system established by Aiha, only the first 100 people can earn one point.
Speaker A
That means the remaining 3900 people will earn zero points. Under this system, the difficulty of obtaining a sentence reduction is unimaginable. In the end, it's highly likely that only a very small number of people will succeed. But at the same time, as this
Speaker A
system is implemented in order to reduce their sentences and get out of prison, they will fall into competition amongst themselves, and there will be no possibility of them uniting in the future. After all, humans are selfish.
Speaker A
Once they fall into competition, the internal cohesion of the ninja clans will plummet. As time passes, they will completely degenerate into commoners, thus losing all threat to the village.
Speaker A
In fact, to avoid being purged, people released from prison will likely abandon their family names. The so-called four great ninja clans will naturally dissipate like smoke. On the contrary, Ashihajene not only easily deconstructed the Saratobi and other three clans, but
Speaker A
also gained a free labor force of at least 40,000 people. Moreover, motivated by the point system, they will work desperately to earn points. And when war breaks out, they will desperately kill enemies on the battlefield. Everyone must understand one thing. Even if these
Speaker A
40,000 people were all just farming, they could significantly increase the annual food production. Not to mention industries like mining, road construction, and medicinal herbs. If operated well, they would definitely generate a large amount of money. The annual economic benefit these 40,000
Speaker A
people could produce might even match the daios financial allocation, I suspect. But what's even more ruthless is that the punishments for former leaders like Herus and Saratobi are truly cruel. Even in death, they will not find release. Not only must they do
Speaker A
forced labor in their reanimated bodies, but they must also witness their own clans being divided and deconstructed, ultimately causing all their clansmen to fall to the status of commoners. What does this mean? They will never rise again for eternity. Death itself isn't
Speaker A
scary. When you close your eyes, you know nothing. But Hirus and Saratobi and the others have to do a 100 years of forced labor. It's equivalent to watching their own clans disappear into the annals of history. This kind of
Speaker A
psychological blow will likely make their lives worse than death. So now do you understand that wicked brat Aiha Jeene is not implementing some humane system here? He harbors a deep-seated hatred for Husen Saratobi and the others. Compared to Aiha Jyns
Speaker A
ruthless methods, my past measures to guard against and suppress the Achiha seem utterly childish in comparison. As Chincho Fein spoke, the people around him couldn't help but gasp. A chill ran down their spines, for they had not anticipated that this seemingly lenient
Speaker A
verdict concealed such a bitingly cold intention. For a moment, none of them knew what to say. Shinsho Zhu Jian felt a pang of discomfort. He wanted to interject, yet words failed him. After all, Chinsho Fein could only speculate.
Speaker A
He had no concrete evidence. On the surface, at least Aiha Jyns judgment appeared remarkably lenient. At the very least, he had only executed the four ring leaders while the punishments for the others were relatively light, certainly better than the Aiha's
Speaker A
previous predicament. From this standpoint, he could not speak out. Moreover, as a dead man, he naturally refrained from interfering in the world of the living. Thus, despite the turmoil in his heart, he remained silent. Yet, his gaze toward Yuenf Risen and the
Speaker A
others began to brim with a peculiar sympathy. No, I refuse to accept this. I cannot agree with this verdict. Aihaji, you might as well kill us all. Slay every shinobi from our four clans and spare only the civilians and the
Speaker A
elderly. I beg you, kill me. You and Fe Rizen spoke out. Clearly, his political acumen might not match Shincho Funions, but he had been Hokag for decades. The Senju and Usuzamaki clans had perished under his watch and countless strong men
Speaker A
had fallen to his schemes. So yes, he saw through the ruthlessness of Aiha Jins clan and that was precisely why he was truly terrified. He was willing to trade the lives of all Shinobi from the four great clans for a
Speaker A
future where the Yufay clan could rise again. As long as the civilians and the elderly of the Yufay clan were spared, the civilians of the UNF clan could earn a living. And thanks to the clan's rise in recent years, most children had the
Speaker A
potential to become shinobi. The surviving elders could naturally teach them. Combined with the vast collection of jutzu he had amassed, as long as the sins ended with this generation, and aihajene did not deliberately target the Euf clan's future, then when the
Speaker A
children grew up, they would restore the Yuf clan's prestige. The Yuf clan would remain a shinobi clan. Even if its size shrank 10fold or 20fold, it would still survive. The worst case being a return to its preoa scale. At least compared to
Speaker A
the clans that had vanished into history, the Yufay clan's fate was still tolerable. But if they did not resist and followed Aiha Jyn's plan, the Yufay clan would be utterly annihilated. The reason was unity. Even if all the
Speaker A
shinobi of these clans died, the four clans, including Yuenf, remained internally united. If they stood together through the toughest times, a new generation would rise in 10 years, and the Yuf clan would still be a Shinobi clan. But if they followed this
Speaker A
verdict, the Yufay clan would crumble from within. Yes, he keenly sensed the terror of the merit system. It was clearly designed to divide the clan from the inside. After all, the unfair clan had no bloodline limit, nor was it a
Speaker A
secret technique family like the Enoshiko. Once internal stability collapsed, they would be no different from commoners. Thus, absolutely not.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, before Aiha could even speak, Xiaoin screeched at you and Fe Rizen. You and Fay Rizen, shut up. If you want to die, I don't. Myin clan accepts this punishment. Thank you, Lord Hokag. Myaning clan is willing to
Speaker A
undergo reform through labor. Xiaoin spoke immediately. Yes, who would choose death when they could live, though she was certain she would die this time her family and children would survive.
Speaker A
Reform through labor was merely that. And with the merit system, she believed her efforts would at least allow her family to earn early commutation.
Speaker A
Shuahumen Yin nodded as well. I also agree with the village's punishment plan. The Shuahan clan thanked the Lord Hokage for his mercy. Yu and Fay Risen was furious. His two old friends were utter fools. How could they not see such
Speaker A
a scheme after holding high positions for so many years? But alas, the truly intelligent were few in this world. And in the history of the shinobi world, schemes like this were rare. Juwan, Xiaoin, and Shuah, Yen were the
Speaker A
majority. Of course, did they truly not understand. Perhaps they simply chose not to. After all, compared to the extinction of their clans, they preferred to protect their own families.
Speaker A
At most, one could say that Yu Fe Risen chose the clan while they chose their families. Similarly with Juwanin Xiaoin and Shua Yians agreement the Jiuin clan unseen in the frame also accepted.
Speaker A
As for Tuanzang, he was utterly indifferent. His first priority was the Hokag seat the second was his rude organization. The clan itself held no significance in his eyes. Though the Ziuin clan existed and had reaped some benefits from Tuanzang, they were
Speaker A
meager. Tuanzang had not been as ruthless as in other tales. He did not drag the entire Ziuin clan into root, but neither did he bestow excessive favors upon his own family. At best, they were treated slightly better than
Speaker A
ordinary civilians and other clans. Now that he was dead, even if controlled by the impure world reincarnation, he would not willingly submit to labor. Either he would be forced to work or he would utterly slack off since he cared nothing
Speaker A
for the clan. It mattered little for the desireless or unbending. Meanwhile, on the podium, Aiha watched the quarreling below and frowned. He had not expected that old fox Yuan Fe Risen would actually discern the deeper meaning of his plan, but it mattered not. He
Speaker A
cleared his throat, sharply silencing the commotion. Enough. All of you shut up. You and Feay Risen understand this.
Speaker A
What you see before you is a punishment for your misdeeds. This is not a negotiation. It is the village's final decision. Whether you understand or not, it must be carried out. And so it is settled. Um, proceed with the execution.
Speaker A
After these people die, Orochimaru, you will use the impure world reincarnation to bring them back. Kakashi, it's your turn. Having said this, Achiha Jeene sat back down and leaned against his chair, falling silent. Meanwhile, at Aiha Jins command, Kakashi rose and drew
Speaker A
his white light chakra saber, stepping deliberately toward Yuf Risen and the others. Kakashi's blade was steady. The gazes of Saratobi, Herusen, and the others toward him had become exceedingly awkward. After all, the Kakashi of old had been their own blade. But this time,
Speaker A
the blade they had nurtured was about to slay its master. Kakashiu. Saratobi Herusen opened his mouth, still wanting to say something. Before he could finish, however, Kakashi's wrist flicked and with a piercing white flash, Saratobi Haruen's head was severed in an
Speaker A
instant. In a flash, blood sprayed. Then to the astonishment of Uditen Koharuru and Nidokado Hamira Kakashi's blade rose and fell, slaying them both in an instant. Next, he solemnly approached Hataki Suko's side. Father, I have avenged you, Kakashiu. Hataki
Speaker A
Sukumos face was filled with shock. Clearly, the adult Kakashi before him was vastly different from the one in his memories. Hitaki Sukumo's eyes grew deeply complex and after a long pause, he let out a sigh. Kakashi, you have
Speaker A
suffered all these years. I am fine, father. Kakashi's gaze was profound, but he spoke slowly. I was too young before and even misunderstood you. But I was fortunate. Because of the Hokag, I gradually came to understand your choices back then. You were forced into
Speaker A
a corner with no choice but to do what you did to keep me alive. Hitaki Sukumos face could not help but reveal a faint smile. Watching Kakashi, who had gradually matured, he could finally set his heart at ease. When the
Speaker A
impure world reincarnation ended, he would be able to depart peacefully for the pure land. Pondering this, he mused for a moment, then spoke to Kakashi solemnly. Kakashi, when I took my own life, you were too young. There were
Speaker A
many things I could not tell you because at that time, you had no ability to protect yourself, nor even the capacity to act. If you had shown even a glimmer of hatred back, then Saratobi Haruen would never have let you live. I had to
Speaker A
make you truly resent me to make you believe your father was a coward. Only then could you grow up safely in Kinoa.
Speaker A
Seeing you now, I am truly relieved. Kakashi, you have grown up. At that moment, Haki Sukumo was deeply gratified. But upon hearing the conversation between father and sonu Hasharama's face instantly turned grim, it was hard for them to comprehend how
Speaker A
their village had come to such a state. Was such a drastic measure truly necessary to allow a child to survive?
Speaker A
Saratobi Herusen truly deserves to die. Senu Hasharama spoke coldly. Clearly, even as a dead man, he could scarcely accept this. After all, this village was forged with his own blood. Senu Tobarama, however, said nothing. As a cold-hearted ruler, he understood well
Speaker A
that it was not entirely Saratobi Herusen's fault. In the end, it was merely the victor's justice. Whoever wins is right. Now, the Aiha had won.
Speaker A
So, the situation had turned out this way. Otherwise, if the Aiha had not produced such a monstrous prodigy as Aiha gene, they would likely have been crushed by Saratobi Herusen long ago.
Speaker A
Usuzumaki and Kusha both wore extremely grim expressions. Clearly, they held not a shred of goodwill toward the koho of today. Meanwhile, on the other side, while the resurrected warriors were chatting, three new spies were brought in. Orochimaru approached and
Speaker A
immediately performed the impure world reincarnation technique. The next moment, the three just slain Saratobi and his two companions stood once more in their original spots, but now in the form of impure world reincarnation. At this moment, the three stared at their
Speaker A
own corpses on the ground, their faces twisting into extreme ugliness. Aiha, you truly deserve to die. You won't even let the dead rest. Truly an evil Achiha.
Speaker A
Saratobi Hirusen's voice was icy. His gaze toward Achiha was now filled with chilled despair and regret. Yes, if before he had held a sliver of hope for the future, believing that even if Achiha Jin acted ruthlessly, he might
Speaker A
still leave a threat of survival for the Saratobi clan. Now, it was different. On one hand, he had guessed the deeper meaning behind Aiha Jyns judgment, knowing that the Saratobi clan would likely vanish completely. On the other hand, being already dead, he no longer
Speaker A
cared about earning Achihajin's spite. However, unlike Saratobi, Herusen, Udetain, Koharuru, and Midokado Hamira, though death was indeed painful, had not fathomemed the hidden implication behind the verdict. Of course, even if they had guessed, it would still be the same.
Speaker A
After all, even if they could not save the clan, protecting their family and children would be enough. To this Achihajene could not be bothered to say more. He immediately stood up and declared, "Today's trial ends here for now. The subsequent handling of these
Speaker A
reformation prisoners will be fully entrusted to Sununade and Narroichi. As for the resurrected warriors, there is no need to return to the pure land immediately. Since you have returned, take this chance to reunite with your loved ones." Dismissed. After speaking,
Speaker A
he paid no further attention to the crowd and vanished in an instant using the body flicker technique. With Achihaja Jyn's departure, the onlookers also began to leave one after another.
Speaker A
After all, they had their own work to attend, to taking time out to watch was already a luxury. Compared to the old Koha, the new Kohaa had more reasonable rules and stronger motivation to work.
Speaker A
But naturally, everyone was busier than before. As for the resurrected warriors, almost all of them followed Kakashi heading straight toward his residence.
Speaker A
Yes, first Hitaki Sukumo had to stay with Kakashi. Second, Usuzamaki Narudo was staying at Kakashi's house. So, Usuzamaki Kusha naturally had to go as well. As for the Sinja brothers and Usuzamaki Mido, since was temporarily lodging at Kakashi's place, they had no
Speaker A
choice but to go to at Kakashi's house. After the group arrived at the large courtyard, Hataki Sukumo could not help but remark, "It seems you are doing well, Kakashi. That puts my mind at ease. He is after all an A&BU captain.
Speaker A
Such treatment is only natural." Senu Toborama nodded. Senu Hasharama, on the other hand, found everything novel and bore an easygoing demeanor. As for Kusha, the moment she saw Usuzamaki Narudo, she knew instantly that this yellow-haired boy was her child. She
Speaker A
immediately embraced him tightly. Narudo, I'm sorry. Mother made you suffer you, Usuzamaki. Narudo was bewildered. Instinctively, he looked at Kakashi. Seeing this, Kakashi shrugged and said, "This is your mother Narudo.
Speaker A
Mother." Upon hearing this, Usuzamaki Narudo froze in place. In the Kakashi household, warmth and joy abounded.
Speaker A
Although all of them were reincarnated through the impure world reincarnation technique devoid of any sense of touch or smell the mere sight of their loved ones once more filled their hearts with elation. Yet on the other side and
Speaker A
Rokichi found themselves overwhelmed with work for settling these free laborers was no easy task. On the western side of the village, Sununade and Rokichi along with a group of staff set up several large tables in the wasteland where the four clans were
Speaker A
being held and began processing paperwork on the spot. The managers of various ninja clans formed a long queue.
Speaker A
First, listen to me. The members of the Saratobi and other three clans have all been dispersed. We cannot achieve absolute fairness and allocation only a semblance of relative equity. I hope you all understand this. First, for the Abureim clan's insect breeding base, we
Speaker A
allocate three Jonan, 50 Chunin, 200 Jin, and 1500 civilians. Here's the list. Sign and take your people. Sat behind the desk, swiftly producing two contract documents. The Abureame clan member wearing sunglasses joyfully signed his name and aftersunade also
Speaker A
signed, she handed both contracts to him. Immediately after the sunglassed Abureame Ninja went straight to Narroichi tucked one contract away and presented the other to him. Nar Rokichi without much scrutiny simply tucked away the contract, signed a form and passed
Speaker A
it to an administrative staff member waiting behind him. All right, Moshiroichi said, "Follow the staff to receive your people." Upon hearing this, Abure Moshi nodded with a smile and followed the staff into the temporary holding area. Then, with the staff's
Speaker A
cooperation, within about 15 minutes, he received the full quota he needed and happily headed toward his clan's insect breeding base. Even though he was alone, he had no fear of the laborers escaping.
Speaker A
For over the past few days, these prisoners had already been marked with ceiling tags, and he had received the control tags for them, so there was no need for mass supervision as in the ordinary world. The Abureim clan was but
Speaker A
a microcosm. Countless ninja clans and merchants of the new Konoha waited in line, chatting pleasantly as they awaited their allotments. The atmosphere relaxed and cheerful. Only Rokichi and the other staff were exhausted for the paperwork was the most time-consuming
Speaker A
part. But there was no help for it. Aihajene placed great emphasis on procedures. So even though considered these processes and documents utterly pointless, she could only helplessly sign her name one after another. The on-site process was efficient and
Speaker A
smooth, almost like an assembly line. Only the old Kenoha high-ranking officials such as Saratobi Herusen were deliberately left unassigned for the time, being perhaps to maximize their humiliation, and were instead made to sit nears work area. They watched as
Speaker A
their clan members, even their own kin, were led away like livestock or tools by various ninja clans and merchants. And this sight pierced their hearts like knives. Grandpa, I don't want to be taken away. Grandma, save me. Lord
Speaker A
Hokag, do something. You traitor Saratobi Herusen, I hate you to death. You embezzled so much of the vill's supplies and my family never got a penny of benefit. Yet now we have to atone for your deeds. As the members of the four
Speaker A
clans were led past Saratobi and the others, they almost all shouted abuse. Cries for help, please for mercy curses.
Speaker A
These shouts intermingled like sharp daggers stabbing repeatedly into the hearts of Saratobi and his cohorts.
Speaker A
Danzo, for his part, snorted coldly, his face full of contempt. Even as his own Shamura clan was led away like livestock, he merely smiled faintly, utterly indifferent. After all, compared to the darkness of his root organization, this minor spectacle was
Speaker A
nothing. As for Koharu and Hamira, they kept their eyes shut, unable to watch their hearts evidently in turmoil.
Speaker A
Honestly, they regretted it now. But looking back on their lives in their youth, they had wielded immense power, making all of Kenoha tremble beneath their feet. A single order or word could decide a ninja's life or death. But now,
Speaker A
this felt like a karmic cycle. In the past, they had held high positions, yet treated other ninja as less than human, even clamoring that ninja were mere tools. Now, fortunes had reversed. Their own clansmen had truly become tools.
Speaker A
That feeling was utterly agonizing. And the one who suffered most was undoubtedly Saratobi Herusen. He had once been the Hokag, the highest authority in the village, respected by all, even when his actions were wrong.
Speaker A
You could question or resist unless you didn't value your life. But now, because of that damned Aiha, he had been reduced to a prisoner. At this moment, he truly regretted it. He should have heeded Danzo's advice long ago. Even if it
Speaker A
meant turmoil in the village, he should have done everything to destroy the Etiha clan. But it was too late now.
Speaker A
With that thought, he turned his gaze tossady. Sunady enough. I was your teacher, and I've treated you well over the years. Even when you wanted to leave the village, I never labeled you a rogue ninja. And I even covered your debts
Speaker A
from time to time. Now, I'm not asking you to let me go, but at least spare me this torment. Assign me quickly. It's but a word from you. Can you do that? At this point, Saratobi forced down the
Speaker A
anger festering within him. He stared at Sununade with icy eyes clearly unable to bear the resentment and hatred of his own clansmen and now only hoped that would allocate him somewhere quickly.
Speaker A
But unfortunately, the busy sununade upon hearing his words simply ignored Saratobi Husen entirely. However, Sununade's utter disregard infuriated Saratobi Herusen. He kept nagging insunade's ear without pause until finally furious, she slammed the table, created a shadow clone to sign documents
Speaker A
in herstead, then turned and yelled at Saratobi. Saratobi Herusen, that's enough. Do you really think you were good to me all these years? You can't be that deluded, can you? Not declaring me a rogue ninja. Would you dare? The last
Speaker A
descendant of the Syninju clan branded a rogue by the very village we founded. Sorry, Toby. Her risen I ask you would you dare?
Topics:
Naruto
Uchiha
Konoha
Mangekyo Sharingan
Susanoo
Time Manipulation
Ninja War
Clan Politics
Radical Faction
Transmigrator
